QCPU Users Manual (Hardware Design - Maintenance and Inspection)
Uploaded by
Magna AutomaçãoQCPU Users Manual (Hardware Design - Maintenance and Inspection)
Uploaded by
Magna AutomaçãoMITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Programmable Controller
User's Manual
(Hardware Design,
Maintenance and Inspection)
QCPU
01072009
SH(NA)-080483 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Version P
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before using this product.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full
attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " DANGER" and " CAUTION".
DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to
serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.
Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future
reference.
A-1
[Design Precautions]
DANGER
Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system
operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable
controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
(1) Configure external safety circuits, such as an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit, and
protective interlock circuit for forward/reverse operation or upper/lower limit positioning.
(2) The programmable controller stops its operation upon detection of the following status, and the
output status of the system will be as shown below.
Status Q series module AnS/A series module
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection of
All outputs are turned off All outputs are turned off
the power supply module is activated.
The CPU module detects an error such as All outputs are held or
a watchdog timer error by the turned off according to the All outputs are turned off
self-diagnostic function. parameter setting.
All outputs may turn on when an error occurs in the part, such as I/O control part, where the CPU
module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety
mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit
example, refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in this manual.
(3) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor. Configure
an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.
A-2
[Design Precautions]
DANGER
In an output module, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a
load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an
external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power
supply.
If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or
malfunction.
For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to relevant manuals for
the network.
Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.
When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the
CPU module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module, configure an
interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely.
For program modification and operating status change, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure
the safety before operation.
Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote programmable controller,
immediate action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable controller due to a
communication failure.
To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program, and determine corrective
actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication
failure.
CAUTION
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power
cables.
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.94 inches) or more between them.
Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.
When a device such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module, a
large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from
off to on.
Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating.
A-3
[Installation Precautions]
CAUTION
Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in this
manual.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the
product.
To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the
module, fully insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the
module until it snaps into place.
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module
with a screw.
Tighten the screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely.
Check the connection for looseness.
Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output.
When using a memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot.
Check that it is inserted completely.
Poor contact may cause malfunction.
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in
the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to this manual and in the manual for the corresponding module.
Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module.
Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.
When using a Motion CPU module and modules designed for motion control, check that the
combinations of these modules are correct before applying power.
The modules may be damaged if the combination is incorrect.
For details, refer to the user's manual for the Motion CPU module.
A-4
[Wiring Precautions]
DANGER
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product.
After wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
DANGER
Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable
controller.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction.
Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade
solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting
in failure.
Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables
correctly.
Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or
failure.
Connectors for external connection must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the
manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered.
Incomplete connections could result in short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
A-5
[Wiring Precautions]
DANGER
A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove the film during wiring.
Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.
Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels.
Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay
terminal block.
Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by maintenance personnel
who is familiar with protection against electric shock. (For wiring methods, refer to this manual).
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
DANGER
Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause electric shock.
Correctly connect the battery connector.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or
retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
A-6
[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]
CAUTION
Before performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output, and operation
status change) for the running CPU module from the peripheral connected, read relevant manuals
carefully and ensure the safety.
Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.
Do not disassemble or modify the modules.
Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire.
Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone
System) more than 25cm (9.85 inches) away in all directions from the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the
module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in
the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online, and each module has its
predetermined replacement procedure.
For details, refer to this manual and the manual for the corresponding module.
After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the
terminal block to/from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.
Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from
the human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A-7
[Disposal Precautions]
CAUTION
When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the Battery Directive in EU countries, refer to Appendix 4.)
[Transportation Precautions]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
(For details of the regulated models, refer to Appendix 3.)
A-8
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print date Manual number Revision
Jun., 2004 SH(NA)-080483ENG-A First edition
Dec., 2004 SH(NA)-080483ENG-B Addition
Section 12.2.21
Partial correction
CONTENTS, Section 2.1.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 9.1.2, 9.2.4, 10.3.1, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6.1,
11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.1, 12.3.1, 12.3, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 2.1,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 3.1
May, 2005 SH(NA)-080483ENG-C Addition
Section 12.2.22, 12.2.23, 12.2.24, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2,
2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.4, 7.2.1, 7.2.2, 9.1.3, 10.2, 10.3.2, 10.6.2,
11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.3, 12.2.5, 12.2.7,
12.3.2, 12.4.1, 12.4.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 3
Aug., 2005 SH(NA)-080483ENG-D Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section
2.1.1, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 7.1.2, 10.6.2, 11.3.3, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 12.4.2, 12.6,
12.7, Appendix 1.2
Apr., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-E Model addition
QA65B,QA68B
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 5.1, 5.2.1,
5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.1.6, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, 12.3.2, Appendix 1.4,
Appendix 2.2, 2.4, Index
Aug., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-F Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.1.5, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 9.1.5, 10.2, 10.3.1, 12.5.1,
12.5.2, Appendix 1.3, 1.4
Sep., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-G Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 7.1.2, 9.1.6, 10.3.1, 11.3.3,
12.3.4, 12.3.6, 12.7
Oct., 2006 SH(NA)-080483ENG-H Addition
Section 12.3.11
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.1, Chapter3, Section 4.1, 4.2.1, 5.1,
5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.1, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.2.3, 9.2.5, 10.2, 10.3.1, 10.6.1,
10.6.2, 11.3.1, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.19, 12.3.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.5, 12.3.10, 12.6, 12.7,
Appendix 1.2, Appendix 2.2
Japanese manual version SH-080472-S
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mit-
subishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur
as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-9
Print date Manual number Revision
Apr., 2007 SH(NA)-080483ENG-I Universal model QCPU model addition,
Revision involving High Performance model QCPU and Redundant CPU serial
No.09012
Model addition
Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q65WRB
Addition
Section 4.4, 12.2.25
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, ABOUT MANUALS,
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1, 2.1.1,
2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 4.2.2, 4.3.2, 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2,
6.1.3, 6.1.4, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.5, 7.1.6, 7.1.7, 7.2.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 10.3.1,
10.3.3, 10.4, 10.6.1, 10.6.2, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.4, 11.5,
12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.3, 12.2.10, 12.2.15, 12.2.21, 12.2.22, 12.2.23, 12.3.1,
12.3.2, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.3.7, 12.3.8, 12.3.9, 12.3.11, 12.4.1,
12.5.1, 12.5.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.4,
Appendix 2.2, Appendix 3
Jan., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-J Revision due to the support for Redundant CPU serial number 09102
Model addition
QA6ADP, Q64PN
Addition
Appendix 2.6
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTION, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS,
Section 1.1, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.5, 4.1, 4.2.1, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, Chapter 3,
Section 5.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3, 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.5, 9.1.6, 9.2.3, 10.1,
10.3.1, 10.3.3, 10.6.1, 10.6.2, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.4, 12.2.13, 12.2.22, 12.3.3,
12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.9, 12.4.1, 12.4.2, 12.5.1, 12.5.2, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.2,
Appendix 2.5, Index
Mar., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-K Model addition
Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
Addition
Section 11.3.1
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, PRECAUTIONS FOR USE,
Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 4.1, 4.4.1, 5.2.1, 5.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.3,
7.1.1, 7.1.6, 7.2.1, 10.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.4, 12.3.1, 12.3.3,
12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.6, 12.7, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6
Section11.3.1 11.3.2, Section11.3.2 11.3.3, Section11.3.3 11.3.4,
Section11.3.4 11.3.5
A - 10
Print date Manual number Revision
May, 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-L Revision due to the addition of Process CPU and Universal model QCPU.
Addition
Section 12.2.26, 12.2.27, 12.2.28, 12.2.29, 12.2.30, 12.2.31, 12.5.2
Model addition
Chapter 1, Section 1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, 6.1.3,
7.1.2, 11.3.2, 12.2.1, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.3.5, 12.3.6, 12.3.9, 12.6, 12.7,
Appendix1.1, Appendix 2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6
Sep., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-M Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTION, Section 1.1, 2.2, 7.1.6, 7.2.1, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, Appendix 2.6
Addition
Appendix 4
Dec., 2008 SH(NA)-080483ENG-N Universal model QCPU model additions
Revision and overall review for support to the Universal model QCPU serial
number "10101".
Model addition
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU
Mar., 2009 SH(NA)-080483ENG-O Revision due to the support for Universal model QCPU serial number "11012".
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, GENERIC TERMS AND
ABBREVIATIONS, Section 1.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 4.1.3, 4.1.5, 4.3.1, 4.3.2, 4.3.5,
4.4.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 5.2.4, 5.3, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 7.1.2, 7.1.6, CHAPTER 8, Section
9.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.1.5, 9.2, 9.2.4, 10.1, 10.3.1, 10.3.3, CHAPTER 11, Section 11.3.1,
11.3.2, 11.3.3, 12.1, 12.2.1 to 12.2.12, 12.2.14 to 12.2.36, 12.3.11, 12.5.1, 12.6,
12.7, 12.8, Appendix 2.6
Addition
12.2.37 to 12.2.39
Jul., 2009 SH(NA)-080483ENG-P Revision because of function support by the Universal model QCPU having a
serial number "11043" or later
Partial correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 2.1.3, 2.1.6, 7.2.2, 11.3.1,
11.3.2, 11.3.3, 11.4, 11.5, 12.3.3, 12.3.4, 12.4, 12.7, 12.8, Appendix 2.6
A - 11
Memo
A - 12
INTRODUCTION
This manual provides hardware specifications, maintenance and inspection of the system, and troubleshooting of the CPU
modules, power supply modules, and base units required for operating the Q series programmable controllers.
This manual roughly comprises the following three parts.
1) Chapter 1 and 2 Describes outline of the CPU module and the system configuration to help users
understand features of the CPU module and fundamentals of system configuration.
2) Chapter 3 through 7 Describes the general specifications of operating environments for the CPU module,
power supply module, and base units and performance specifications of respective
modules.
3) Chapter 8 through 12 Describes overall maintenance such as installation of the CPU module, daily inspec-
tions, and troubleshooting.
Relevant CPU module
CPU module Model
Basic model QCPU Q00(J)CPU, Q01CPU
High Performance model QCPU Q02(H)CPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Process CPU Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU,
Universal model QCPU Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU
Remark
This manual does not describe the functions of the CPU module.
For the functions, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used. (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
For multiple CPU systems, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
For redundant systems, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
A - 13
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................................................... A - 1
REVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... A - 9
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... A - 13
MANUALS ............................................................................................................................................. A - 19
MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION ......................................................................................................... A - 22
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................... A - 24
USAGE NOTE ....................................................................................................................................... A - 27
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1-1 to 1-7
1.1 Features................................................................................................................................. 1 - 1
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2-1 to 2-26
2.1 System Configuration............................................................................................................. 2 - 1
2.1.1 Overall configuration ......................................................................................................... 2 - 2
2.1.2 Component list .................................................................................................................. 2 - 3
2.1.3 Precautions for system configuration ................................................................................ 2 - 6
2.1.4 Bus connection of GOT ..................................................................................................... 2 - 13
2.1.5 Peripheral device configuration ......................................................................................... 2 - 17
2.1.6 Applicable softwares ......................................................................................................... 2 - 22
2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version ..................................................................... 2 - 25
CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3-1 to 3-2
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE 4-1 to 4-55
4.1 Performance Specifications ................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.1.1 Basic model QCPU ........................................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.1.2 High Performance model QCPU ....................................................................................... 4 - 4
4.1.3 Process CPU..................................................................................................................... 4 - 8
4.1.4 Redundant CPU ................................................................................................................ 4 - 12
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU ..................................................................................................... 4 - 16
4.2 Basic Model QCPU ................................................................................................................ 4 - 26
4.2.1 Part names ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 26
4.2.2 Switch operation at the time of writing program ................................................................ 4 - 31
4.2.3 Reset operation ................................................................................................................. 4 - 32
4.2.4 Latch clear operation......................................................................................................... 4 - 33
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU .................................. 4 - 34
4.3.1 Part names ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 34
4.3.2 Switch operation after writing program.............................................................................. 4 - 40
4.3.3 Reset operation ................................................................................................................. 4 - 41
4.3.4 Latch clear operation......................................................................................................... 4 - 41
4.3.5 Automatic writing to standard ROM................................................................................... 4 - 42
4.4 Universal Model QCPU.......................................................................................................... 4 - 43
A - 14
4.4.1 Part names ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 43
4.4.2 Switch operation after writing a program........................................................................... 4 - 53
4.4.3 Reset operation ................................................................................................................. 4 - 54
4.4.4 Latch clear operation......................................................................................................... 4 - 55
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5-1 to 5-36
5.1 Base Unit that Can Be Used in Combination with Power Supply Module.............................. 5 - 1
5.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications ................................................................................. 5 - 2
5.2.2 Selecting the power supply module .................................................................................. 5 - 21
5.2.3 Life detection power supply module .................................................................................. 5 - 26
5.2.4 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply .......................................... 5 - 30
5.2.5 Precautions on power supply capacity .............................................................................. 5 - 30
5.3 Part Names and Settings ....................................................................................................... 5 - 31
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6-1 to 6-21
6.1 Base Unit ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.1.1 Extension base units that can be combined with the main base unit ................................ 6 - 1
6.1.2 Specification table ............................................................................................................. 6 - 2
6.1.3 Part names ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 6
6.1.4 Setting extension bases .................................................................................................... 6 - 14
6.1.5 Guideline for extension base units .................................................................................... 6 - 16
6.2 Extension Cable..................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.2.1 Specification table ............................................................................................................. 6 - 21
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7-1 to 7-17
7.1 Memory Card ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 1
7.1.1 List of usable memory cards ............................................................................................. 7 - 1
7.1.2 Memory card specifications............................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.1.3 Part names of the memory card ........................................................................................ 7 - 4
7.1.4 Handling the memory card ................................................................................................ 7 - 5
7.1.5 Installing and removing a memory card ............................................................................ 7 - 6
7.1.6 Specifications of the memory card battery ........................................................................ 7 - 10
7.1.7 Battery Installation into the memory card .......................................................................... 7 - 11
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT) .......................................................................................... 7 - 13
7.2.1 Battery specifications ........................................................................................................ 7 - 13
7.2.2 Battery installation ............................................................................................................. 7 - 14
CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES 8-1 to 8-3
A - 15
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9-1 to 9-18
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive .......................................................... 9 - 1
9.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive .......................................................................... 9 - 2
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive......................................................................... 9 - 3
9.1.3 Cables ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 4
9.1.4 Power supply part of the power supply module, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU................... 9 - 8
9.1.5 When using MELSEC-A series modules........................................................................... 9 - 8
9.1.6 Others ............................................................................................................................... 9 - 13
9.2 Requirement to Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive ................................................. 9 - 15
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller.................................... 9 - 15
9.2.2 MELSEC-Q series programmable controller selection...................................................... 9 - 15
9.2.3 Power supply..................................................................................................................... 9 - 16
9.2.4 Control panel ..................................................................................................................... 9 - 16
9.2.5 Grounding ......................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
9.2.6 External wiring................................................................................................................... 9 - 18
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 10-1 to 10-46
10.1 General Safety Requirements................................................................................................ 10 - 1
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller..................................................... 10 - 7
10.3 Module Installation ................................................................................................................. 10 - 10
10.3.1 Precaution on installation .................................................................................................. 10 - 10
10.3.2 Instructions for mounting the base unit ............................................................................. 10 - 19
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module.................................................................................... 10 - 22
10.4 How to set the Base Number for the Extension Base Unit .................................................... 10 - 30
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable ............................................................... 10 - 36
10.6 Wiring..................................................................................................................................... 10 - 39
10.6.1 Wiring precautions ............................................................................................................ 10 - 39
10.6.2 Connecting to the power supply module ........................................................................... 10 - 44
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 11-1 to 11-35
11.1 Daily Inspection...................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.2 Periodic Inspection................................................................................................................. 11 - 4
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure .............................................................................. 11 - 5
11.3.1 Display of battery consumption and reduction measures of the consumption .................. 11 - 6
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules ........................................................................................... 11 - 8
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery ........................................................ 11 - 23
11.3.4 SRAM card battery life ...................................................................................................... 11 - 29
11.3.5 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure................................................. 11 - 31
11.4 When Programmable Controller Has Been Stored Without Battery....................................... 11 - 34
11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable Controller........................... 11 - 35
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12-1 to 12-272
A - 16
12.1 Troubleshooting Basics.......................................................................................................... 12 - 1
12.2 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 3
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart ................................................................................................. 12 - 3
12.2.2 When the ERR. terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened).................................... 12 - 5
12.2.3 When the LIFE OUT terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened) ............................ 12 - 9
12.2.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on ............................................................................ 12 - 10
12.2.5 When the MODE LED is flickering .................................................................................... 12 - 11
12.2.6 When the POWER LED has turned off ............................................................................. 12 - 12
12.2.7 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange ................................................................. 12 - 14
12.2.8 When the POWER LED has turned on in red ................................................................... 12 - 15
12.2.9 When the LIFE LED has turned off ................................................................................... 12 - 16
12.2.10 When the LIFE LED has turned on in red ......................................................................... 12 - 17
12.2.11 When the LIFE LED is flickering in red ............................................................................. 12 - 17
12.2.12 When the RUN LED has turned off ................................................................................... 12 - 18
12.2.13 When the RUN LED is flickering ....................................................................................... 12 - 19
12.2.14 When the ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering ........................................................... 12 - 19
12.2.15 When the USER LED has turned on ................................................................................. 12 - 20
12.2.16 When the BAT. LED has turned on or is flickering............................................................. 12 - 20
12.2.17 When the BOOT LED is flickering ..................................................................................... 12 - 21
12.2.18 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on ........................................................ 12 - 22
12.2.19 When output load of the output module does not turn on ................................................. 12 - 23
12.2.20 When unable to read a program ....................................................................................... 12 - 24
12.2.21 When unable to write a program ....................................................................................... 12 - 25
12.2.22 When program is rewritten unintentionally ........................................................................ 12 - 26
12.2.23 When unable to perform boot operation from the memory card ....................................... 12 - 27
12.2.24 When “UNIT VERIFY ERR.” has occurred........................................................................ 12 - 29
12.2.25 When “CONTROL BUS ERR.” has occurred .................................................................... 12 - 30
12.2.26 When the CPU module does not start............................................................................... 12 - 31
12.2.27 When “OPERATION ERROR” has occurred at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions. ............................................................................. 12 - 32
12.2.28 When comments cannot be read at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR
instructions ...................................................................................................... 12 - 33
12.2.29 When “PARAMETER ERROR” has occurred at power on or reset................................... 12 - 35
12.2.30 When the CPU cannot communicate with GX Developer ................................................. 12 - 39
12.2.31 When Ethernet communication is not available other than by direct connection to GX Developer
.................................................................................................................... 12 - 41
12.2.32 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available ............................. 12 - 43
12.2.33 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to GX Developer.... 12 - 48
12.2.34 When Ethernet communication with CPU module is slow or unstable.............................. 12 - 51
12.2.35 When an error has occurred during MC protocol communication ..................................... 12 - 54
12.2.36 When clock data cannot be set by SNTP.......................................................................... 12 - 57
12.2.37 When unable to receive data on the external device side by the Socket communication function
.................................................................................................................... 12 - 59
12.2.38 When unable to receive data by the Socket communication function ............................... 12 - 60
12.2.39 When open process of the Socket communication function does not complete ............... 12 - 61
12.3 Error Code List....................................................................................................................... 12 - 62
12.3.1 Error codes........................................................................................................................ 12 - 63
A - 17
12.3.2 Reading an error code ...................................................................................................... 12 - 63
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)............................................................................................ 12 - 64
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)............................................................................................ 12 - 77
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)............................................................................................ 12 - 95
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)............................................................................................ 12 - 112
12.3.7 Error code list (5000 to 5999)............................................................................................ 12 - 127
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)............................................................................................ 12 - 129
12.3.9 Error code list (7000 to 10000).......................................................................................... 12 - 139
12.3.10 Canceling of Errors ........................................................................................................... 12 - 144
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module............ 12 - 146
12.4 Module Change during System Operation............................................................................. 12 - 167
12.4.1 Online module change ...................................................................................................... 12 - 167
12.4.2 Change of redundant power supply module ..................................................................... 12 - 178
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 12 - 180
12.5.1 Input circuit troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 12 - 180
12.5.2 Output circuit troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 12 - 183
12.6 Built-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 12 - 187
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST........................................................................................................... 12 - 195
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST.................................................................................................... 12 - 221
APPENDICES App-1 to App-37
Appendix 1 External Dimensions ................................................................................................... App- 1
Appendix 1.1 CPU Module ............................................................................................ App- 1
Appendix 1.2 Power Supply Module ................................................................................ App- 6
Appendix 1.3 Main Base Unit ......................................................................................... App- 10
Appendix 1.4 Extension Base Unit .................................................................................. App- 16
Appendix 1.5 Extension Cable ........................................................................................ App- 22
Appendix 1.6 Tracking cable .......................................................................................... App- 22
Appendix 1.7 Q8BAT-SET ............................................................................................. App- 23
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade..................................................... App- 24
Appendix 2.1 Basic Model QCPU Upgrade ....................................................................... App- 24
Appendix 2.2 High Performance Model QCPU Upgrade ...................................................... App- 26
Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of Older Versions ........ App- 28
Appendix 2.4 Process CPU Upgrade ............................................................................... App- 31
Appendix 2.5 Redundant CPU Upgrade ........................................................................... App- 32
Appendix 2.6 Universal Model QCPU Upgrade .................................................................. App- 33
Appendix 3 Precautions for Battery Transportation........................................................................ App- 35
Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States ........ App- 36
Appendix 4.1 Disposal precautions.................................................................................. App- 36
Appendix 4.2 Exportation precautions .............................................................................. App- 37
INDEX Index-1 to Index-4
A - 18
MANUALS
To understand the main specifications, functions, and usage of the CPU module, refer to the basic manuals.
Read other manuals as well when using a different type of CPU module and its functions.
Order each manual as needed, referring to the following lists.
The numbers in the "CPU module" and the respective modules are as follows.
Number CPU module
1) Basic model QCPU
2) High Performance model QCPU
3) Process CPU
4) Redundant CPU
5) Universal model QCPU
: Basic manual, : Other CPU module manuals
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
User's manual
Specifications of the hardware (CPU
modules, power supply modules, base
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design,
units, extension cables, and memory
Maintenance and Inspection)
cards), system maintenance and
< SH-080483ENG (13JR73) >
inspection, troubleshooting, and error
codes
QnUCPU Users Manual (Function Explana-
Functions, methods, and devices for
tion, Program Fundamentals)
programming
< SH-080807ENG (13JZ27) >
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamen- Functions, methods, and devices for
tals) programming
< SH-080808ENG (13JZ28) >
Information for configuring a multiple CPU
system (system configuration, I/O
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System) numbers, communication between CPU
< SH-080485ENG (13JR75) > modules, and communication with the
input/output modules and intelligent
function modules)
QnPRHCPU User's Manual Redundant system configuration,
(Redundant System) functions, communication with external
< SH-080486ENG (13JR76)) > devices, and troubleshooting
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via
Functions for the communication via
Built-in Ethernet Port)
built-in Ethernet port of the CPU module
< SH-080811ENG (13JZ29) >
Programming manual
QCPU Programming Manual (Common
How to use sequence instructions, basic
Instructions)
instructions, and application instructions
< SH-080809ENG (13JW10) >
A - 19
Manual name CPU module
Description
< Manual number (model code) > 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
System configuration, performance
QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming
specifications, functions, programming,
Manual (SFC)
debugging, and error codes for SFC
< SH-080041 (13JF60) >
(MELSAP3) programs
QCPU (Q Mode) Programming Manual Programming methods, specifications,
(MELSAP-L) and functions for SFC (MELSAP-L)
< SH-080076 (13JF61) > programs
QCPU (Q Mode) Programming Manual
Programming methods using structured
(Structured Text)
languages
< SH-080366E (13JF68) >
QCPU (Q Mode) / QnACPU Programming
Manual (PID Control Instructions) Dedicated instructions for PID control
< SH-080040 (13JF59) >
QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU Programming
Manual (Process Control Instructions) Dedicated instructions for process control
< SH-080316E (13JF67) >
A - 20
Other relevant manuals
Manual name Description
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Specifications, procedures and settings before system operation, parameter
Manual setting, programming, and troubleshooting of the CC-Link IE controller
< SH-080668ENG (13JV16) > network module
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network
Specifications, procedures and settings before system operation, parameter
System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC
setting, programming, and troubleshooting of a MELSECNET/H network
network)
system (PLC to PLC network)
< SH-080049 (13JF92) >
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network
Specifications, procedures and settings before system operation, parameter
System Reference Manual (Remote I/O
setting, programming, and troubleshooting of a MELSECNET/H network
network)
system (remote I/O network)
< SH-080124 (13JF96) >
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module Specifications, procedures for data communication with external devices,
User's Manual (Basic) line connection (open/close), fixed buffer communication, random access
< SH-080009 (13JL88) > buffer communication, and troubleshooting of the Ethernet module
E-mail function, programmable controller CPU status monitoring function,
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
communication via MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10, communication
User's Manual (Application)
using the data link instructions, and file transfer function (FTP server) of the
< SH-080010 (13JL89) >
Ethernet module
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
System configuration, performance specifications, functions, handling,
Manual
wiring, and troubleshooting of the QJ61BT11N
< SH-080394E (13JR64) >
Overview, system configuration, specifications, procedures before
Q Corresponding Serial Communication
operation, basic data communication method with external devices,
Module User's Manual (Basic)
maintenance and inspection, and troubleshooting for using the serial
< SH-080006 (13JL86) >
communication module
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Special functions (specifications, usage, and settings and data
Module User's Manual (Application) communication method with external devices of the serial communication
< SH-080007 (13JL87) > module
Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Communication method using the MC protocol, which reads/writes data to/
Protocol Reference Manual from the CPU module via the serial communication module or Ethernet
< SH-080008 (13JF89) > module
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual
Operating methods of GX Developer, such as programming and printout
< SH-080373E (13JU41) >
A - 21
MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION
Note (icon) Reference Chapter
The detailed explanation of "Note . " is The section in this manual or The chapter of the current page can be
provided under the corresponding another relevant manual that can easily identified by this indication on the
"Note . " at the bottom of the page. be referred to is shown with . right side.
Note (detailed explanation) Section title
The detailed note corresponding to each icon The section number and title of the current
is described. page can be easily identified.
Icons
High
Basic model Universal model Description
Performance Process CPU Redundant CPU
QCPU QCPU
model QCPU
Icons indicate that
specifications
High
Basic performance Process Redundant Universal described on the
page contain
some precautions.
A - 22
In addition, this manual uses the following types of explanations.
In addition to description of the page, notes or functions that require special attention are described here.
Remark
The reference related to the page or useful information are described here.
A - 23
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.
* indicates a part of the model or version.
(Example): Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B Q3 B
Generic term/abbreviation Description
Series
Q series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
Generic term for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A Series Programmable
AnS series
Controller
Generic term for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC-A Series Programmable
A series
Controller
CPU module type
Generic term for the Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU,
CPU module
Process CPU, Redundant CPU, Universal model QCPU
Basic model QCPU Generic term for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, and Q01CPU
High Performance model QCPU Generic term for the Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Process CPU Generic term for the Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU
Generic term for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Universal model QCPU
Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU,
Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU
Generic term for the Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU,
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU
Generic term for Mitsubishi motion controllers, Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN,
Motion CPU Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172CPUN-T, Q173CPUN-T, Q172HCPU-T,
Q173HCPU-T, Q172DCPU, and Q173DCPU
Generic term for MELSEC-Q series-compatible PC CPU module,
PC CPU module
PPC-CPU852(MS)-512, manufactured by CONTEC Co., Ltd.
Generic term for the Q06CCPU-V, Q06CCPU-V-B, and Q12DCCPU-V C
C Controller module
Controller modules
CPU module model
Generic term for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
QnU(D)(H)CPU Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU, and Q26UDHCPU
Base unit type
Generic term for the main base unit, extension base unit, slim type main base
unit, redundant power main base unit, redundant power extension base unit,
Base unit
redundant power extension base unit, and multiple CPU high speed main base
unit
Main base unit Generic term for the Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, and Q3 DB
Generic term for the Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB, Q6 WRB, QA1S6 B, QA6 B,
Extension base unit
and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B
Slim type main base unit Another name for the Q3 SB
Redundant power main base unit Another name for the Q3 RB
Redundant power extension base
Another name for the Q6 RB
unit
Redundant type extension base unit Another name for the Q6 WRB
A - 24
Generic term/abbreviation Description
Redundant type extension base
Another name for the Q6 WRB
unit
Multiple CPU high speed main
Another name for the Q3 DB
base unit
Generic term for the redundant power main base unit, redundant power
Redundant base unit
extension base unit, and redundant type extension base unit
Base unit model
Q3 B Generic term for the Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, and Q312B main base units
Q3 SB Generic term for the Q32SB, Q33SB, and Q35SB slim type main base units
Q3 RB Another name for the Q38RB redundant power main base unit
Q3 DB Generic term for the Q38DB and Q312DB multiple CPU high speed main base units
Q5 B Generic term for the Q52B and Q55B extension base units
Q6 B Generic term for the Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, and Q612B extension base units
Q6 RB Another name for the Q68RB redundant power extension base unit
Q6 WRB Another name for Q65WRB extension base unit for redundant system
QA1S6 B Generic term for the QA1S65B and QA1S68B
QA6 B Generic term for the QA65B and QA68B extension base units
A5 B Generic term for the A52B, A55B, and A58B extension base units
A6 B Generic term for the A62B, A65B, and A68B extension base units
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B Abbreviation for a large type extension base unit where the QA6ADP is mounted
Power supply module
Generic term for the Q series power supply module, slim type power supply mod-
Power supply module
ule, and redundant power supply module
Generic term for the Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, and
Q series power supply module
Q64PN power supply modules
AnS series power supply module Generic term for the A1S61PN, A1S62PN, and A1S63 power supply modules
Generic term for the A61P, A61PN, A62P, A63P, A68P, A61PEU, and A62PEU
A series power supply module
power supply modules
Slim type power supply module Abbreviation for the Q61SP slim type power supply module
Redundant power supply module Generic term for the Q63RP and Q64RP redundant power supply modules
Life detection power supply
Abbreviation for the Q61P-D life detection power supply module]
module
Network
MELSECNET/H Abbreviation for the MELSECNET/H network system
Ethernet Abbreviation for the Ethernet network system
CC-Link Abbreviation for the Control & Communication Link
Memory card
Memory card Generic term for the SRAM card, Flash card, and ATA card
Generic term for the Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS, and
SRAM card
Q3MEM-8MBS SRAM cards
Flash card Generic term for the Q2MEM-2MBF and Q2MEM-4MBF Flash cards
Generic term for the Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, and Q2MEM-32MBA ATA
ATA card
cards
A - 25
Generic term/abbreviation Description
Others
Product name for SW D5C-GPPW-E GPP function software package compatible
GX Developer
with the Q series
PX Developer Product name for SW D5C-FBDQ process control FBD software package
QA6ADP Abbreviation for the QA6ADP QA conversion adapter module
Generic term for the QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, and QC100B
Extension cable
extension cables
Generic term for the QC10TR and QC30TR tracking cables for the Redundant
Tracking cable
module
Generic term for the Q6BAT, Q7BAT, and Q8BAT CPU module batteries,
Battery
Q2MEM-BAT SRAM card battery, and Q3MEM-BAT SRAM card battery
Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal, GOT-A*** series, GOT-F***
GOT
series, and GOT1000 series
A - 26
USAGE NOTE
First use of the Q series CPU module
Memory must be formatted using GX Developer before first use of the CPU module.
For details of memory formatting, refer to the following.
Operating manual for GX Developer
Batteries
(1) When resuming operation with the CPU module which has been stored without battery:
The CPU module memory must be formatted using GX Developer. ( Section 11.4)
(2) When resuming operation with the CPU module in which installed battery life had expired during storage:
The CPU module memory must be formatted using GX Developer. ( Section 11.5)
A - 27
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Features
This section describes features of the Q series CPU module.
(1) Large number of I/O points that can be controlled
The Q Series CPU module supports the following number of actual I/O points accessible to the I/O modules
mounted on the base unit.
(a) Basic model QCPU
• Q00JCPU: 256 points (X/Y0 to FF) : 256 points (X/Y0 to FF)
• Q00CPU, Q01CPU: 1024 points : 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
Up to 2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for refreshing the
remote I/O of the CC-Link and link I/O (LX, LY) of the MELSECNET/H.
(b) High Performance model QCPU
One module can support 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF).
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for the remote I/O
stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network, the CC-Link data link, and the MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data
link.
(c) Process CPU and Redundant CPU
One module can support 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF).
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for the remote I/O
stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network and CC-Link data link.
(d) Universal model QCPU
• Q00UJCPU : 256 points (X/Y0 to FF)
• Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU : 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
• Q02UCPU : 2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF)
• Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU,
Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q26UD(E)HCPU : 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
Up to 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF) are supported as the number of I/O device points usable for the remote I/O
stations in the MELSECNET/H remote I/O network and CC-Link data link.
1-1
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
(2) Lineup of CPU 1
The following lists the lineup of CPU available for various program size.
Table1.1 Program size for each CPU module 2
CPU module type Program size
Q00(J)CPU 8K steps
Basic model QCPU
Q01CPU 14Ksteps 3
Q02(H)CPU 28K steps
Q06HCPU 60K steps
High Performance model QCPU
Q12HCPU 124K steps 4
Q25HCPU 252K steps
Q02PHCPU 28K steps
Q06PHCPU 60K steps
5
Process CPU
Q12PHCPU 124K steps
Q25PHCPU 252K steps
Q12PRHCPU 124K steps
6
Redundant CPU
Q25PRHCPU 252K steps
Q00U(J)CPU 10K steps
Q01UCPU 15K steps
7
Q02UCPU 20K steps
Q03UD(E)CPU
Q04UD(E)HCPU
30K steps
40K steps
8
Universal model QCPU
Q06UD(E)HCPU 60K steps
Q10UD(E)HCPU 100K steps
Q13UD(E)HCPU 130K steps
1.1 Features
Q20UD(E)HCPU 200K steps
Q26UD(E)HCPU 260K steps
1-2
(3) High speed processing
High speed processing has been achieved.
Table1.2 Processing speed (LD instruction)
LD instruction processing
CPU module type
speed
Q00JCPU 200ns
Basic model QCPU Q00CPU 160ns
Q01CPU 100ns
Q02CPU 79ns
High Performance model QCPU Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 34ns
Process CPU
Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q00UJCPU 120ns
Q00UCPU 80ns
Q01UCPU 60ns
Q02UCPU 40ns
Universal model QCPU
Q03UD(E)CPU 20ns
Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU,
Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, 9.5ns
Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU
The MELSEC Q series base unit high-speed system bus has achieved faster access to an intelligent function
module and link refresh with a network module.
(a) Basic model QCPU
MELSECNET/H link refreshing: 2.2ms/2K words*1
*1: The Q01CPU is used without using SB and SW, and the MELSECNET/H network module is mounted on the main base
unit.
(b) High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU or
Universal model QCPU
Access to the intelligent function module: 20 s/word (approximately 7 times*2)
MELSECNET/H link refreshing: 4.6ms/8K words (approximately 4.3 times*2)
*2: These are the values resulted from the following comparison:
• Comparing Q02HCPU with Q2ASHCPU-S1
• Comparing Q25PHCPU with Q4ARCPU
• Comparing Q25PRHCPU with Q4ARCPU
1-3
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
(4) Increase in debugging efficiency through high-speed communication with GX 1
Developer
High speed communications at 115.2Kbps maximum are available by using RS-232 which reducing the time
2
required for writing and reading of programs and monitoring. Also, the communication time efficiency of
debugging has been increased.
In addition, High Performance model QCPUs (except for the Q02CPU), Process
3
CPUs, Redundant CPUs and Universal model QCPUs support USB, so that high-speed communications of
12Mbps are available.
Q25HCPU(USB) 12
4
Q25HCPU(RS-232) 30
Q2ASHCPU 86 5
A2USHCPU-S1 94
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 (Unit:s)
Figure 1.1 26K step program transfer time 6
(5) AnS/A series I/O modules and special function modules are available 7
The AnS/A series compatible extension base units (QA1S6 B, QA6 B and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B) allow the
High Performance model QCPU to use the AnS/A series I/O modules and special function modules.
8
(6) Saved space by downsizing
The installation space for the Q series has been reduced by approx. 60% compared with the AnS series.
1.1 Features
AnS series
98mm (3.86inch)
Q series
(depth:98mm(3.86inch))
5 Slot Main Base Unit 245mm(9.65inch)
8 Slot Main Base Unit 328mm(12.92inch)
12 Slot Main Base Unit 439mm(17.28inch)
Figure 1.2 Installation area comparison between Q series and AnS series
1-4
(7) Connection of up to 7 extension base units.
Up to seven extension base units can be connected to the Q series CPU module.
The overall extension cable length is 13.2m (43.31feet), which allows flexible layout of base units.
(8) Memory extension Note1.1 by memory cardNote1
Memory card installation connector is incorporated so that a maximum 32M bytes of memory card can be
connected. (32M bytes memory card can be connected only when an ATA card is used.)
By installing a large size memory card, large size files can be managed such as comment setting to all data
devices and saving old programs in a memory as correction data.
Even when a memory card is not installed, a program can be stored into the standard ROM through the standard
ROM incorporated in the CPU module, and file registers can be handled by the standard RAM.
For the High Performance model QCPU, the number of usable file register points differs depending on the function version
and serial number.
For details, refer to Appendix 2.2.
Note1
Note1.1 Basic
The Basic model QCPU, Q00(J)CPU, and Q01UCPU do not support memory cards.
1-5
CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
(9) Automatic writing to standard ROM Note1.2, Note1.3Note1
1
Parameters and programs can be written to the standard ROM of the CPU module without using GX Developer.
When the boot operation is handled by the standard ROM, users do not need to have GX Developer (personal
computer) on hand for modifications of parameters and programs since those can be stored in a memory card
2
and written to the standard ROM of the CPU module.The Q Series CPU module enables writing the parameters
or programs saved on a memory card into the standard ROM of the CPU modules without using GX Developer.
3
(10)Forced on and off of external I/O Note1.2
Forced on and off of external input and output is available using GX Developer even when the CPU module is
4
running or program is being processed.
Also, wiring test and operation test can be conducted without halting the CPU module by forcibly turning on or off
the I/O. 5
(11)Remote password can be set
6
When access to an Ethernet module, serial communication module, or modem interface module is made from the
outside, whether access to the CPU module is enabled or not can be selected with a remote password.
7
(12)Remote I/O network of MELSECNET/H Note1.2
A MELSECNET/H remote I/O system can be configured by installing a MELSECNET/H remote master station.
8
● The remote password can be set up when the Ethernet module, serial communication module, or modem interface
1.1 Features
module of function version B or later is used.
● The MELSECNET remote I/O network can be implemented when the MELSECNET/H network module of function
version B or later is used.
Note1
Note1.2 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not support the following functions.
• Automatic writing into the standard ROM
• Forced on/off of the external I/O
• MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Note1.3 Universal
The Universal model QCPU does not support the following function.
• Parameter setting of automatic write to standard ROM
1-6
(13)Supporting the multiple CPU system
Multiple CPU systems can be constructed in combination with CPU modules, motion CPU(s), and PC CPU
module(s).
For details of the multiple CPU system, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
(14)Supporting the redundant power supply system
The redundant power supply system can be configured using a redundant base unit and redundant power supply
modules.
The system can continue operation even if one of the power supply modules fails, since the other will supply the
power.
(15)Direct connection to Ethernet Note1.4Note1
The Built-in Ethernet port QCPU module allows direct connections to Ethernet.
For details of the functions, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
Note1
Note1.4 Universal
Applicable only to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
1-7
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1
This chapter describes system configurations, precautions, and components of the Q Series CPU module.
2
2.1 System Configuration
This section describes system configurations for a single CPU system with the Basic model QCPU, High Performance
3
model QCPU, Process CPU, or Universal module, and a system configuration when using GOT by bus connection.
For a multiple CPU system and redundant system (when using the Redundant CPU), refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
4
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
2.1 System Configuration
2-1
2.1.1 Overall configuration
Memory card
Battery for QCPU (Q6BAT)
Q7BAT-SET Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Universal model QCPU
Q3 B main base unit
Battery holder Battery for QCPU (Q7BAT) Q3 RB redundant power main base unit
Q3 SB slim type main base unit
Q8BAT-SET Q3 DB multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Q8BAT connection cable Battery for QCPU (Q8BAT)
Extension cable
Power supply module/I/O module/Intelligent function module/Special function module
Q5 B extension base unit
Q6 B extension base unit
Q6 RB redundant power extension base unit
QA1S6 B extension base unit
QA1S6 B extension base unit
Figure 2.1 System configuration
The combination of modules depends on the devices used in the configuration.
For the applicable combinations, refer to the following.
• Combination of a CPU module and the base unit, battery, and memory card.
Section 2.1.2
• Combination of the base unit and power supply module. CHAPTER 5
• Combination of the main base unit and extension base unit. CHAPTER 6
• Combination of a CPU module and a intelligent function module or special function module.
User's manual for each module
2-2
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.2 Component list
1
(1) Basic model QCPU
Table2.1 Configuration with the Basic model QCPU 2
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Applicable main base Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
unit*1 Slim type main base unit Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB 3
Multiple CPU high speed transmission base unit Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable extension base
Model requiring a Q series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B 4
unit
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Maximum number of
extension bases of
Q00JCPU: 2 extension bases 5
Q00CPU, Q01CPU: 4 extension bases
extension base unit
Maximum number of Q00JCPU: 16 modules
mounted I/O modules Q00CPU, Q01CPU: 24 modules 6
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m (43.31 feet)
cables 7
Applicable memory card ----
Applicable battery Q6BAT
*1: The Q00JCPU does not require a power supply module and the main base unit since the module is an integrated combination of a power 8
supply module and the main base unit.
2.1.2 Component list
2.1 System Configuration
2-3
(2) High Performance model QCPU
Table2.2 Configuration with the High Performance model QCPU
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
Applicable main base unit
Slim type main base unit Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
Multiple CPU high speed transmission base unit Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Model requiring a Q series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Applicable extension base
*1 QA1S65B, QA1S68B
unit Model requiring a AnS series power supply module
*1 QA65B, QA68B, QA6ADP+A6 B
Model requiring A series power supply module
Model requiring no A series power supply module*1 QA6ADP+A5 B
Maximum number of
extension bases of 7 extension bases
extension base unit
Maximum number of
64 modules
mounted I/O modules
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m (43.31 feet)
cables
Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q2MEM-2MBF, Q2MEM-4MBF, Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, Q2MEM-
Applicable memory card
32MBA
Applicable battery Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT
*1: The A/AnS series extension base units are applicable only when the main base unit (Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B) is used.
(3) Process CPU
Table2.3 Configuration with the Process CPU
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B
Applicable main base unit Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
Multiple CPU high speed transmission base unit Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable extension base
Model requiring a Q-series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
unit
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB
Maximum number of
extension bases of 7 extension bases
extension base unit
Maximum number of
64 modules
mounted I/O modules
Extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
13.2m (43.31 feet)
cables
Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q2MEM-2MBF, Q2MEM-4MBF, Q2MEM-8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, Q2MEM-
Applicable memory card
32MBA
Applicable battery Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT
2-4
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(4) Universal model QCPU 1
Table2.4 Configuration with the Universal model QCPU
Main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B 2
Applicable main base Redundant power main base unit Q38RB
unit*1 slim type main base unit Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB
Multiple CPU high speed transmission base unit Q38DB, Q312DB 3
Applicable extension base Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
unit Model requiring a Q-series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B, Q68RB
Redundant power extension base unit Q68RB 4
Maximum number of Q00UJCPU: 2 extension bases
extension bases of Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU: 4 extension bases
extension base unit Other than above: 7 extension bases 5
Q00UJCPU: 16 modules
Maximum number of Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: 24 modules
mounted I/O modules Q02UCPU: 36 modules
Other than above: 64 modules
6
Extension cable QC05B, QC06, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Total length of extension
cables
13.2m (43.31 feet) 7
Q2MEM-1MBS, Q2MEM-2MBS, Q3MEM-4MBS, Q3MEM-8MBS, Q2MEM-2MBF, Q2MEM-4MBF, Q2MEM-
Applicable memory card*2
8MBA, Q2MEM-16MBA, Q2MEM-32MBA
Applicable battery Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT 8
*1: The Q00JCPU does not require a power supply module and the main base unit since the module is an integrated combination of a power
supply module and the main base unit.
*2: Memory cards cannot be used in the Q00U(J)CPU and Q01UCPU.
2.1.2 Component list
2.1 System Configuration
2-5
2.1.3 Precautions for system configuration
This section explains restrictions on configuring a system with the Q series CPU module.
(1) Number of modules that can be installed
The following tables indicate the number of modules that can be installed in a system and restrictions of functions.
(a) When using the Basic model QCPU
Table2.5 Number of modules (units) that can be installed
Number of modules (units) that can
Product Model
be installed per system
• QJ71GP21-SX
CC-Link IE controller network module
• QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11
One module*1
• QJ71LP21-25
MELSECNET/H network module
• QJ71LP21S-25
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71NT11B
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Q series Ethernet interface module One module
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system master local • QJ61BT11
Up to 2 modules *2
module • QJ61BT11N
Interrupt module • QI60 One module *3
• GOT-A900 Series (for bus
connection only)*4
GOT Up to 5 units
• GOT1000 Series (for bus
connection only)*4
*1: The number is the total of the CC-Link IE controller network module and MELSECNET/H network module.
*2: Applicable to the function version B or later.
*3: The number indicates interrupt modules with no interrupt pointer setting.
No limitation is placed when the interrupt pointer settings have been completed.
*4: For the applicable GOT models, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Work2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 Compatible Connection System
Manual)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
2-6
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(b) When using the High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU 1
Table2.6 Applicable number of modules (units)
Number of modules (units) that can be
Product Model
installed per system
2
CC-Link IE controller network • QJ71GP21-SX
*1
Up to 2 modules
module • QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
3
• QJ71BR11 Up to 4 modules in
• QJ71LP21-25 total
MELSECNET/H network module
• QJ71LP21S-25
Up to 4 modules
4
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71NT11B
• QJ71E71 5
• QJ71E71-B2
Q series Ethernet interface module Up to 4 modules
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system master • QJ61BT11
6
No limitation *2
local module • QJ61BT11N
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 data link • A1SJ71PT32-S3 No limitation
module*3 • A1SJ71T32-S3 (but auto refresh can not be set) 7
• A1SD51S
• A1SD21-S1
AnS Series special function
• A1SJ71J92-S3 8
*3
(When using GET/PUT service) Up to 6 modules in total
module
• A1SJ71AP23Q
• A1SJ71AR23Q
• A1SJ71AT23BQ
2.1.3 Precautions for system configuration
2.1 System Configuration
• A1SI61*3
Interrupt module One in total
• QI60
GOT-A900 Series (only for bus
connection)*4
GOT Up to 5 units
GOT100 0Series (only for bus
connection)*4
*1: Only the High Performance model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "09012" or later and Process CPU whose
serial number (first five digits) is "10042" or later can be used.
*2: The following indicates the number of modules that can be controlled with the CC-Link network parameter set by GX
Developer.
• The CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "08031" or earlier: Up to four modules
• The CPU module whose serial number (first five digits) is "08032" or later: Up to eight modules
When setting parameters with CC-Link dedicated instructions, the number of modules to install is not limited.
For the CC-Link system master/local modules whose parameters can be set by the dedicated instructions, refer to the
following.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*3: Applicable only when the High Performance model QCPU is used.
*4: For applicable GOT modules, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Work2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 Version2 Compatible Connection
System Manual)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
2-7
(c) When using the Redundant CPU
For modules having a limit to the number of mountable modules, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
(d) When using the Universal model QCPU
Table2.7 Applicable number of modules (units)
Number of modules (units) that can
Product Model
be installed per system
• QJ71GP21-SX
CC-Link IE controller network module*1
• QJ71GP21S-SX
• QJ71LP21
• QJ71BR11
Up to 4 modules*2 *3
• QJ71LP21-25
MELSECNET/H network module
• QJ71LP21S-25
• QJ71LP21G
• QJ71NT11B
• QJ71E71
• QJ71E71-B2
Q series Ethernet interface module Up to 4 modules*3
• QJ71E71-B5
• QJ71E71-100
Q series CC-Link system master local • QJ61BT11
No limitation*4 *5
module • QJ61BT11N
Interrupt module • QI60 Only one module*6
GOT1000 Series (only for bus
GOT Up to 5 units
connection)*7
*1: Only the CC-Link IE controller network module whose serial number (first five digits) is "09042" or later can be used.
*2: The number is a total of the CC-Link IE controller network modules and MELSECNET/H network modules.
*3: The applicable number of mountable module for the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU is one in total, for the
Q02UCPU is two modules.
*4: Applicable to the function version B or later.
*5: The following indicates the number of modules that can be controlled by the CC-Link network parameter set by GX
Developer.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: Up to two modules
• Q02UCPU: Up to four modules
• Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU: Up to eight modules
When setting parameters with CC-Link dedicated instructions, the number of modules that can be installed is not limited.
For the CC-Link system master/local modules whose parameters can be set with the dedicated instructions, refer to the
following.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
*6: The number indicates interrupt modules that have no interrupt pointer setting.
No limitation is placed when the interrupt pointer settings have been completed.
*7: For the applicable GOT models, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
2-8
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(2) Modules with limitations when using a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU 1
When using a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, limitations are placed on the module listed in the Table2.8.
Table2.8 Modules restricted when using a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU 2
Product Model First five digits of the serial number
QJ71LP21-25
QJ71LP21S-25 Some modules have restrictions depending 3
MELSECNET/H module *1
QJ71LP21G on the use conditions.
QJ71BR11
QJ71C24N 4
Serial communication module QJ71C24N-R2
"10042" or later
QJ71C24N-R4
Modem interface module QJ71CMON
5
Web server module QJ71WS96
"10012" or later
MES interface module QJ71MES96
6
*1: If the MELSECNET module meets the following all conditions, use the MELSECNET/H module whose serial number (first
five digits) is “10042” or later.
1. A multiple CPU system containing a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU is configured.
2. To an Ethernet port of a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU, GX Developer or GOT is connected. 7
3. From GX Developer or GOT, access is made to another station through a MELSECNET/H module controlled by another
CPU.
4. The access target on another station is an A/QnA series CPU module.
8
(3) Number of available slots
Empty slots are included in the number of available slots (modules) in the base unit.
2.1.3 Precautions for system configuration
2.1 System Configuration
(A slot is occupied by setting the slot as "Empty, 0 point" as shown in Figure 2.2)
The number of available slots (modules) varies depending on the base unit.
CHAPTER 6
For the assignment concepts of base units and I/O numbers, refer to the following.
User's manual for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4
Input Input Empty Input Output
Number of 16 16 0 16 16
slot points points points point points points
Occupies 1 slot.
Figure 2.2 Number of modules including empty slots
2-9
(4) Precautions for the number of modules to mount
Mount modules within the range of the number of available slots.
When the total number of slots for the main base unit and extension base units exceeds the number of available
slots (for example, six 12-slot base units are used), mount modules only on the available slots so that no error
occurs.
If a module is mounted on a invalid slot, "SP.UNIT LAY ERR." (error code: 2124) occurs.
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q612B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Extension 1
Q612B
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Extension 2
Q612B
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Extension 3
Q612B
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Extension 4
When the GOT has been bus-
connected, one slot of extension
base 1 is used.
Also one GOT occupies 16 I/O
Q612B
points.
60 61 62 63 Extension 5 When using the GOT, consider
the number of slots and the
number of I/O points.
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Prohibit
Refer to the GOT Manual for
details of busconnecting the GOT.
Modules can be Modules cannot be installed.
installed. (Installing modules will result in error.)
Figure 2.3 Configuration example with the High Performance model QCPU
2 - 10
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(5) Precautions when using AnS/A series modules 1
1) When using the AnS series special function modules shown below, a limitation is placed on an accessible
device range.
2
• A1SJ71J92-S3 type JEMANET interface module
• A1SD51S type intelligent communication module
Table2.9 Accessible device range 3
Device Accessible device range
Input (X), Output (Y) X/Y0 to 7FF
Internal relay (M), Latch relay (L) M/L0 to 8191
4
Link relay (B) B0 to FFF
Timer (T) T0 to 2047
Counter (C) C0 to 1023
5
Data register (D) D0 to 6143
Link register (W) W0 to FFF
Annumciator (F) F0 to 2047
6
2) The modules listed below cannot be used.
7
Table2.10 Incompatible modules
Product Model
MELSECNET/10 network module
A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11, A1SJ71QLP21, A1SJ71QLP21S, 8
A1SJ71QBR11
MELSECNET(II), /B data link module A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, A1SJ71AT21B
Ethernet interface module A1SJ71QE71N-B2(-B5), A1SJ71E71N-B2(-B5)
2.1.3 Precautions for system configuration
2.1 System Configuration
Serial communication module, computer link module A1SJ71QC24(N), A1SJ71UC24-R2(-PRF)
Computer link/multidrop link module A1SJ71UC24-R4*1
CC-Link system master/local module A1SJ61QBT11, A1SJ61BT11
Modem interface module A1SJ71CMO-S3
ME-NET interface module A1SJ71ME81
*1: Only multidrop link function can be used. The computer link function and printer function cannot be used.
3) The QnA/A series dedicated instructions for the following modules cannot be used.
Rewriting using the FROM or TO instruction is required.
Table2.11 Modules requiring instruction rewriting
Product Model
High speed counter module A1SD61, A1SD62, A1SD62D(-S1), A1SD62E
MELSECNET/MINI-S3 A1SJ71PT32-S3, A1SJ71T32-S3
Positioning module A1SD75P1-S3(P2-S3/P3-S3)
ID module A1SJ71ID1-R4, A1SJ71ID2-R4
4) System configurations and functions are partially restricted when writing the parameters set under the "High
speed interrupt fixed scan interval" setting.
For the restrictions, refer to the following.
User's manual for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
2 - 11
5) For restrictions on mounting the A series module on the QA6 B or QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B, refer to the
following.
QA65B/QA68B Extension Base Unit User's Manual
QA6ADP QA Conversion Adapter Module User's Manual
6) For restrictions on using varying AnS/A series compatible extension base units, refer to Section 10.4.
2 - 12
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.4 Bus connection of GOT
1
In the system with the Q series CPU module, the GOT can be connected on the bus using the extension cable
connector of the main base unit or extension base unit.
This section describes the system configuration of a GOT on the bus. 2
For details of bus connection of the GOT, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
3
(1) GOT recognized by CPU module 4
When a GOT is connected by bus, the CPU module recognizes the GOT as an intelligent function module with 16
I/O points.
Therefore, the I/O must be assigned to the CPU module in the GOT setup. 5
(When connecting a GOT on the bus, one extension base (16 points x 10 slots) must be occupied by the GOT.)
For details of the GOT setup, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extension Function /Option Function) 6
GT15 User's Manual
(2) Maximum number of GOTs 7
Up to five GOTs can be connected on the bus.
(3) Precautions
8
• When connecting a GOT on the bus, position the GOT in the base subsequent to base units. Do not position
the GOT between base units.
2.1.4 Bus connection of GOT
2.1 System Configuration
Figure 2.4 Precaution for connecting GOT by bus
• Extension cables for connecting a GOT on the bus must be a maximum of 13.2m (43.31 feet) in total length.
• A bus extension connector box (A9GT-QCNB) is required when a first GOT connected on the bus is installed
13.2 m (43.31 feet) or more away from the main base unit. (Note that the bus extension connector box
cannot be used for the Q00JCPU.)
For details of the A9GT-QCNB, refer to the following.
A9GT-QCNB Type Bus Extension Connector Box User's Manual
• When using a redundant base unit (Q3 RB/Q6 RB/Q6 WRB) as the base unit, a GOT cannot be
connected on the bus.)
2 - 13
• When using the QA1S6 B as a extension base unit, install the GOT in the base subsequent to the
extension base units but assign the I/O number subsequent to Q6 B/Q5 B.
Extension
stage number I/O number
Q38B main base unit 00 to 7F
Q68B extension base unit 1 80 to FF
QA1S68B extension base unit 3 1A0 to 21F
GOT 2 100 to 19F
Figure 2.5 I/O number when 16-point modules are mounted on all slots
• When using the QA6 B,QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B as a extension base unit, the GOT cannot be connected
to the bus.
• Before starting up the CPU module, initialize the GOT (Set up the extension base and slot number in the
GOT setup.) that is to be connected to the bus.
(Set up the extension base and slot number in the GOT setup.)
• Apply the power to the CPU module and GOT by either of the following way.
1) Simultaneously turn on the CPU module and GOT.
2) Turn on the CPU module first, and then the GOT.
• Only the GOT1000, GOT-A900, and GOT-F900 series can be used. (Basic operating systems and
communication driver that are compatible with the Q mode must be installed.)
The GOT800 series, A77GOT, and A64GOT cannot be used.
2 - 14
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(4) Outline of system configuration 1
Main base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
Q35B (5 slots occupied)
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 .... Slot number
2
00 to 0F
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
30 to 3F
40 to 4F
.... I/O number 3
Q series
power supply CPU module 4
module
Extension base unit ... The figure shows the configuration when 16-point modules are loaded to each slot.
5
Q68B (8 slots occupied)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6
C0 to CF
B0 to BF
A0 to AF
50 to 5F
60 to 6F
70 to 7F
80 to 8F
90 to 9F
Q65B (5 slots occupied)
7
13 14 15 16 17
8
100 to 10F
110 to 11F
E0 to EF
D0 to 0F
F0 to FF
2.1.4 Bus connection of GOT
2.1 System Configuration
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 No. of extension stages: 3 Set on
slots No.: 0 slots No.: 1 slots No.: 2 slots No.: 3 slots No.: 4 the GOT
side.
Stage extension image for GOT connection viewed from CPU module
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
120 to 12F
130 to 13F
140 to 14F
150 to 15F
160 to 16F
GOT (No. of extension stages:F3)
16 points ×10 slots occupied
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Set to empty in "I/O assignment setting"
of PLC parameter
Figure 2.6 System configuration example with GOT
2 - 15
Note1
Table2.12 Restrictions on the system configuration and applicable base units, extension cables and power supply modules
When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU :2
When using Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU,
Maximum number of
or Q02UCPU :4 The final base is occupied by
extension bases for bus
When using High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, GOT
connection of GOT
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, or Q26UD(E)HCPU :7
When using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU : 16 - (No. of connected GOTs) modules
When using Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q00UCPU, or Q01UCPU : 24 - (No. of connected GOTs) modules
Maximum number of I/O
When using Q02UCPU : 36 - (No. of connected GOTs) modules
modules that can be
When using High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU,
mounted
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, or Q26UD(E)HCPU : 64 - (No. of connected GOTs) modules
Applicable main base unit Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, Q38DB, Q312DB
Model requiring no power supply module Q52B, Q55B
Applicable extension base Model requiring a Q-series power supply module Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B
unit Model requiring a AnS series power supply
QA1S65B, QA1S68B
module Note2.2
Applicable extension cable QC05B, QC06B, QC12B, QC30B, QC50B, QC100B
Q series power supply
module Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P, Q64PN
Note2.1
AnS series power supply
module A1S61PN, A1S62PN, A1S63P
Note2.2
Note1
Note2.1 Basic Universal
Because the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU is the CPU module with a power supply module and main base unit
incorporated, the main base unit (Q3 B) and Q series power supply module are not required.
High
Note2.2 performance
Usable only when the High Performance model QCPU is used.
2 - 16
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.5 Peripheral device configuration
1
This section describes peripheral devices that can be used in a system where the Basic model QCPU, High
Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, or Universal model QCPU is installed.
2
(1) When using the Basic model QCPU
Basic model QCPU
3
6
Personal Computer (GX Developer, GX Configurator) RS-232 cable
*1: For the versions of GX Developer and GX Configurator that can be used with the Basic model QCPU, refer to Section
2.1.6.
2.1.5 Peripheral device configuration
2.1 System Configuration
Figure 2.7 Configuration of peripheral devices
2 - 17
(2) When using High Performance model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Memory card 1
RS-232 cable
Personal Computer
4
(GX Developer, GX Configurator)
USB cable 2, 3
(Connector type B)
Memory card 1 PC card
adapter
*1: Format ATA cards by GX Developer only. ( Section 7.1.4)
*2: Not applicable to the Q02CPU.
*3: For writing to memory cards and USB cable details, refer to the following.
GX Developer operating manual
*4: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the Process CPU, refer to Section 2.1.6.
*5: For inquiries and orders of a programming unit (EPU01) and connection cable (EPU20R2CBL), please contact your local
Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. sales office.
*6: Programming units cannot be used when the "High speed interrupt fixed scan interval" parameter is written to the High
Performance model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "04012".
Figure 2.8 Configuration of peripheral devices
2 - 18
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(3) When using the Process CPU 1
Process CPU
3
Memory card 1
4
RS-232 cable
5
Personal Computer
(GX Developer, GX Configurator,
PX Developer) 3
USB cable 2
6
(Connector type B)
Memory card 1 PC card
adapter 7
*1: Format ATA cards by GX Developer only. ( Section 7.1.4)
8
*2: For writing to memory cards and USB cable details, refer to the following.
GX Developer operating manual
*3: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the Process CPU, refer to the Section 2.1.6.
2.1.5 Peripheral device configuration
2.1 System Configuration
Figure 2.9 Configuration of peripheral devices
2 - 19
(4) When using the Universal model QCPU
(a) QnU(D)(H)CPU
Universal model QCPU
Memory card 1
RS-232 cable
Personal Computer
3
(GX Developer, GX Configurator)
USB cable 2
(Connector type miniB)
Memory card 1 PC card
adapter
*1: Format ATA cards by GX Developer only. ( Section 7.1.4)
*2: For writing to memory cards and USB cable details, refer to the following.
GX Developer operating manual
*3: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the Universal model QCPU, refer to
Section 2.1.6.
Figure 2.10 Configuration of peripheral devices
2 - 20
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(b) Built-in Ethernet QCPU 1
Universal model QCPU
Memory card 1
3
4
4
Ethenet cable
Personal Computer
5
3
(GX Developer, GX Configurator)
USB cable
(Connector type miniB)
2
6
Memory card PC card
7
1
adapter
*1: Format ATA cards by GX Developer only. ( Section 7.1.4) 8
*2: For writing to memory cards and USB cable details, refer to the following.
GX Developer operating manual
*3: For the GX Developer and GX Configurator versions that can be used with the Universal model QCPU, refer to Section
2.1.6.
2.1.5 Peripheral device configuration
2.1 System Configuration
*4: Use the following Ethernet cables
• For 10BASE-T connection: Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 3 or higher (STP/UTP cables).
• For 100BASE-TX connection: Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 5 or higher (STP/UTP cables (In an
environment subject to electric noise, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables)).
Figure 2.11 Configuration of peripheral devices
2 - 21
2.1.6 Applicable softwares
The following table indicates software versions applicable to the system.
(1) GX Developer and PX Developer versions applicable to a single CPU system
Table2.13 Applicable GX Developer and PX Developer
Software version
CPU module
GX Developer PX Developer
Basic model QCPU Version 7.00A or later
N/A
High Performance model QCPU Version 4.00A or later
Q02PHCPU
Version 8.68W or later Version 1.18U or later
Q06PHCPU
Process CPU
Q12PHCPU
Version 7.10L or later*1 Version 1.00A or later
Q25PHCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Version 8.48A or later
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Version 8.62Q or later
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Universal model Q04UDEHCPU
N/A
QCPU Q06UDEHCPU Version 8.68W or later
Q13UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU Version 8.76E or later
Q10UD(E)HCPU
Q20UD(E)HCPU
*1: When using PX Developer, use GX Developer of Version 7.20W or later.
2 - 22
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(2) GX Configurator versions applicable to a single CPU system 1
The table Table2.14 indicates software versions of GX Configurator applicable to a single CPU system.
The applicable versions depend on a intelligent function module used.
For the applicable versions of GX Configurator, refer to the user's manual for the intelligent function module used.
2
(a) When Basic model QCPU, Hogh Performance model QCPU, and Process QCPU are 3
used
Table2.14 Applicable GX Configurator
4
Software version
CPU module
Product name Version
GX Configurator-AD Version 1.10L or later 5
GX Configurator-DA Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-SC Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-CT Version 1.10L or later 6
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-TC Version 1.10L or later
Basic modelQCPU
GX Configurator-FL Version 1.10L or later 7
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.10L or later
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-AS Version 1.13P or later 8
GX Configurator-MB Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.10L or later
GX Configurator-AD SW0D5C-QADU 00A or later
2.1.6 Applicable softwares
2.1 System Configuration
GX Configurator-DA SW0D5C-QDAU 00A or later
GX Configurator-SC SW0D5C-QSCU 00A or later
GX Configurator-CT SW0D5C-QCTU 00A or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-TC SW0D5C-QCTU 00A or later
High Performance model QCPU
GX Configurator-FL SW0D5C-QFLU 00A or later
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.00A or later
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-AS Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-MB Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-AD Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-DA Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-SC Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-CT Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-TI Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-TC Version 1.13P or later
Process CPU
GX Configurator-FL Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-QP Version 2.13P or later
GX Configurator-PT Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-AS Version 1.13P or later
GX Configurator-MB Version 1.00A or later
GX Configurator-DN Version 1.13P or later
2 - 23
(b) When Universal model QCPU is used
Table2.15 Applicable GX Configurator
Version used in combination with Universal model QCPU
Q02U,Q03UD,Q04UD Q13UDH or Q03UDE,Q04UDEH,Q0 Q00U(J),Q01U,Q10UD
Product
H,or Q06UDHCPU in Q26UDHCPU 6UDEH,Q13UDEH, or H,Q20UDH,Q10UDEH,
use in use Q26UDEHCPU in use or Q20UDEHCPU
Version 8.48A Version 8.62Q Version 8.68W Version 8.78G
GX Developer
or later or later or later or later
Version 2.05F Version 2.05F Version 2.05F Version 2.05F
GX Configurator-AD
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 2.06G Version 2.06G Version 2.06G Version 2.06G
GX Configurator-DA *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 2.12N Version 2.12N Version 2.17T Version 2.17T
GX Configurator-SC
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.25AB Version 1.25AB Version 1.25AB Version 1.25AB
GX Configurator-CT *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA
GX Configurator-TI
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z
GX Configurator-TC
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z
GX Configurator-FL
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 2.25B Version 2.29F Version 2.29F
GX Configurator-QP Not available
or later or later or later*5
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z
GX Configurator-PT *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 1.21X Version 1.21X Version 1.21X Version 1.21X
GX Configurator-AS *1 *2 *3
or later or later or later or later*4
Version 1.08J Version 1.08J Version 1.08J Version 1.08J
GX Configurator-MB
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
Version 1.23Z Version 1.23Z Version 1.24AA Version 1.24AA
GX Configurator-DN
or later*1 or later*2 or later*3 or later*4
*1: The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*2: The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later
*3: The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*4: The software can be used by installing GX Developer Version 8.78G or later
*5: The software can be used by connecting USB
2 - 24
CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version
1
The serial number and function version of the CPU module can be checked on the rating plate, on the front of the
module, and on the System monitor screen in GX Developer. 2
(1) Checking on the rating plate
The rated plate is located on the side face of the CPU module. 3
4
Serial number (first 5 digits)
function version
5
Relevant regulation standards
6
Figure 2.12 Plate rated
(2) Checking on the front of the module 7
The serial number is shown on the rating plate located on the front (at the bottom) of the module.
This does not apply to the following CPU modules.
• Modules manufactured in mid-September, 2007 or earlier.
8
• Redundant CPUs manufactured in March 2008 or earlier.
• Redundant CPUs and Q00JCPU.
2.2 Checking Serial Number and Function Version
090911090910001-B
Serial number
Figure 2.13 Display on the front of the module
2 - 25
Remark
Attaching a serial number label to the front of each Redundant CPU was started from March 2008.
However, some of the modules manufactured at the beginning of it may not have the label.
(3) Checking on the System monitor screen (Product information list screen)
To display the screen for checking the serial number and function version, select [Diagnostics] [System
monitor] and click the Product Inf. List button in GX Developer.
On the screen, the serial number and function version of intelligent function modules can also be checked.
Serial Function Product
number version number
Figure 2.14 System monitor
[Serial No., Ver., and Product No.]
• The serial number of the module is displayed in the "Serial No." column.
• The function version of the module is displayed in the "Ver." column.
• The serial number (product number) printed on the rating plate of the module is displayed in the "Product
No." column.*1
Note that "-" is displayed for a modules that does not support the product number display.
*1: The product number is displayed only for the Universal model QCPU.
The serial number displayed on the Product information list screen of
GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front of the module.
• The serial number on the rating plate and on the front of the module indicates the management information of the
product.
• The serial number displayed on the Product information list screen indicates the functional information of the
product.
The functional information of the product is upgraded when a new function is added.
2 - 26
CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1
The general specification of the programmable controller are shown in Table3.1.
2
Table3.1 General specifications
Item Specification
Operating ambient
0 to 55
3
temperature
Storage ambient *3
-25 to 75
temperature
4
Operating ambient
5 to 95%RH *4, non-condensing
humidity
Storage ambient
humidity
5 to 95%RH *4, non-condensing 5
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count
Under
intermittent
5 to 9Hz ----
3.5mm
(0.14 inches) 10 times each in 6
Compliant with X, Y, Z directions
Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 and vibration 9 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 ----
IEC 61131-2
Under continuous 5 to 9Hz ----
1.75mm
(0.069 inches) ----
7
vibration
9 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 ----
Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502, IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s2, 3 times in each of 3 directions X, Y, Z) 8
Operating ambience No corrosive gases
Operating altitude*5 2000m (6562 feet) max.
Installation location Inside control panel
Overvoltage
II max.
category *1
Pollution level *2 2 max.
Equipment category Class I
*1: This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power
distribution network and the machinery within premises. Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed
facilities.
The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
*2: This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used.
Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected
occasionally.
*3: The storage ambient temperature is -20 to 75 if the system includes the AnS/A series modules.
*4: The operating ambient humidity and storage ambient humidity are 10 to 90%RH if the system includes the AnS/A series modules.
*5: Do not use or store the programmable controller under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0m.
Doing so can cause a malfunction.
When using the programmable controller under pressure, please contact your sales representative.
3-1
Memo
3-2
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU 1
MODULE
2
4.1 Performance Specifications
3
4.1.1 Basic model QCPU
Table4.1 to 4.5 show the performance specifications of the CPU module. 4
Table4.1 Performance specifications
Basic model QCPU
Item 5
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode (Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
6
Sequence control lan- Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block,
Program lan- guage and structured text (ST)
guage Process control lan-
guage
---- 7
Processing LD X0 200ns 160ns 100ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 700ns 560ns 350ns 8
instruction)
Processing
Tracking execution
speed
time ----
(redundant
4.1.1 Basic model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
(increased scan time)
function)
Constant scan 1 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan time) (Setting available in1ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
Program size *1, *2 8K steps (32K bytes) 14K steps (56K bytes)
Program memory
58K bytes 94K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card (RAM)
----
(drive 1)
Memory card (ROM)
----
(drive 2)
Memory size*1
Standard RAM
0 128K bytes *3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
58K bytes 94K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared memory
---- 1K bytes
*3 , *4
*1: The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program size) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: The size has been increased for the function upgrade of the CPU module. ( Appendix 2)
*4: The CPU shared memory is not latched.
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module.
4-1
Table4.1 Performance specifications
Basic model QCPU
Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU
Program memory *5
6
Memory card (RAM) ----
Memory Flash
Max. number ----
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card ----
Standard RAM ---- 1
Standard ROM 6 *5
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
2048 points (X/Y0 to 7FF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
256 points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
(X/Y0 to FF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 2048 points by default (L0 to 2047) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 2048 points by default (B0 to 7FF) (changeable)
512 points by default (T0 to 511) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
No. of device points
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
• Normal counter: 512 points
by default (C0 to 511) (changeable)
Counter [C]
• Interrupt counter: 128 points max.
(0 point by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 11136 points by default (D0 to 11135) (changeable)
Link register [W] 2048 points by default (W0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 1024 points by default (F0 to 1023) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 1024 points by default (V0 to 1023) (changeable)
32768 points (R0 to 32767)/block
[R] ----
File (The number of device points is fixed.)
register 65536 points
[ZR] ----
(ZR0 to 65535) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special relay [SB] 1024 points (SB0 to 3FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 1024 points (SW0 to 3FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
*5: Each of parameter, intelligent function module parameter, sequence program, SFC program, device comment, and device initial value
files can be stored.
*6: The number of points can be changed within the setting range.
( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4-2
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.1 Performance specifications
Basic model QCPU
Item
Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU 2
Step relay [S] *7 2048 points (S0 to 127/block) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 10 points (Z0 to 9) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Pointer [P] 300 points (P0 to 299) (The number of device points is fixed.) 3
128 points (I0 to 127) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device points
The cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(2 to 1000ms, 1ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
4
Special relay [SM] 1024 points (SM0 to 1023) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 1024 points (SD0 to 1023) (The number of device points is fixed.)
5
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
6
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device directly.
Exclusively used for CC-Link IE controller network and MELSECNET/H. 7
Link direct device
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,
J \SW ,J \SB
Intelligent function module device
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly. 8
Specified form: U \G
L0 to 2047 (default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
4.1.1 Basic model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 7FF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.2 to +5.27s(TYP.+1.98s)/d at 0
Accuracy: -2.57 to +5.27s(TYP.+2.22s)/d at 25
Accuracy: -11.68 to +3.65s(TYP.-2.64s)/d at 55
Allowable momentary power failure 20ms or less (100VAC or
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time more)
5VDC internal current consumption 0.26A *8 0.25A 0.27A
H 98mm(3.86 inches) 98mm(3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 245mm(9.65 inches) *9 27.4mm(1.08 inches)
D 98mm(3.86 inches) 89.3mm(3.52 inches)
Weight 0.66kg *9 0.13kg
*7: The step relay is the device for the SFC function.
*8: The value includes those of the CPU module and base unit.
*9: The value includes those of the CPU module, base unit, and power supply module.
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
4-3
4.1.2 High Performance model QCPU
Table4.2 Performance specifications
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
Control method Stored program repeat operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block,
Program language and structured text (ST)
language Process control
----
language
Processing LD X0 79ns 34ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 237ns 102ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking
speed execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan
function) time)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan
(Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
28K steps 60K steps 124K steps 252K steps
Program size *1, *2
(112K bytes) (240K bytes) (496K bytes) (1008K bytes)
Program memory
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
Size of the installed memory card
(RAM)
(2M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card Size of the installed memory card
(ROM) (Flash card: 4M bytes max.,
*1 (drive 2) ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
Memory size
Standard RAM
64K bytes 128K bytes *3 256K bytes *3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
8K bytes
memory *3 , *4
*1: The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program size) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: The size has been increased for the function upgrade of the CPU module. ( Appendix 2)
*4: The CPU shared memory is not latched.
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module.
4-4
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.2 Performance specifications
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2
Program memory 28 60 124 252 *5
Memory card (RAM) 287(When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used)
Max. number
Memory Flash
288
3
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
Standard RAM 3 *6 4
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
No. of times of writing data into the
standard ROM
Max. 100000 times
5
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points 6
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable)
7
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
8
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
No. of device points*7
4.1.2 High Performance model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
• Normal counter, 1024 points by default
(C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
• Interrupt counter: 256 points max.
(0 point by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*5: The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. The CPU module cannot execute 125 or more programs.
*6: Extended by the upgraded functions of CPU module ( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals))
*7: The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals)
4-5
Table4.2 Performance specifications
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU
32768 points(R0 to 32767) 32768 points(R0 to 32767)
Standard 32768 points Up to 65536 points can be used by Up to 131072 points can be used by
RAM (R0 to 32767) block switching in units of 32768 block switching in units of 32768
points points
SRAM card
Up to 517120 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(1M bytes)
[R]
SRAM card
Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
File Up to 1042432 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(4M bytes)
*8
register
65536 point 131072 points
Standard 32768 points
(ZR0 to 65535) (ZR0 to 131071)
RAM (ZR0 to 32767)
No. of device points
Block switching not required. Block switching not required.
SRAM card
517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), Block switching not required.
(1M bytes)
[ZR] SRAM card
1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), Block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), Block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1042432 points (ZR0 to 1042431), Block switching not required.
(4M bytes)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Step relay [S] *9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
*8: Read only when Flash card is used. ATA card is unusable.
*9: The step relay is the device for the SFC function.
4-6
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.2 Performance specifications
High Performance model QCPU
Item
Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device points
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
3
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.) 4
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device directly.
Link direct device
Dedicated to CC-Link IE controller network *10 and MELSECNET/H. 5
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,
J \SW ,J \SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U \G
6
L0 to 8191 (default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.) 7
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.18 to +5.25s(TYP.+2.12s)/d at 0 8
Accuracy: -3.93 to +5.25s(TYP.+1.90s)/d at 25
Accuracy: -14.69 to +3.53s(TYP.-3.67s)/d at 55
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
4.1.2 High Performance model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.60A 0.64A
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 27.4mm (1.08 inches)
D 89.3mm (3.52 inches)
Weight 0.20kg
*10: For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer.
( Appendix 2.2)
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
4-7
4.1.3 Process CPU
Table4.3 Performance specifications
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Control method Stored program repeat operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language Process control
FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer.)
language
Processing LD X0 34ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 102ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking
speed execution time
----
(redundant (increased scan
function) time)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
28K steps 60K steps 124K steps 252K steps
Program size *1, *2
(112 bytes) (240 bytes) (496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
(RAM) Size of the installed memory card (2M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card
Size of the installed memory card
(ROM)
(Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Memory size*1
Standard RAM
128K bytes 256K bytes *3
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
112K bytes 240K bytes 496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
8K bytes
memory *3
*1: The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program size) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: The CPU shared memory is not latched.
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module.
4-8
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.3 Performance specifications 1
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Program memory 28 60 124 252 *4
2
Memory card (RAM) 287(When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used)
Memory Flash
Max. number
card card
288 3
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
Standard RAM 3 *5
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
4
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
5
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF) 6
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable) 7
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions. 8
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
No. of device points*6
0 point by default (sharing of low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
4.1.3 Process CPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
• Normal counter, 1024 points by default
(C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
• Interrupt counter: 256 points max.
(0 point by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*4: The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. The CPU module cannot execute 125 or more programs.
*5: Extended by the upgraded functions of CPU module ( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals))
*6: The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals))
4-9
Table4.3 Performance specifications
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Standard Up to 65536 points can be used by block Up to 131072 points can be used by block
RAM switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767). switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
SRAM card
Up to 517120 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[R] Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
Up to 1042432 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
File (4M bytes)
register*7 Standard 65536 points (ZR0 to 65535), block switching 131072 points (ZR0 to 131071), block switching
RAM not required. not required.
SRAM card
No. of device points
517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), block switching not required.
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[ZR] 1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1042432 points (ZR0 to 1042431), block switching not required.
(4M bytes)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Step relay [S] *8 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
*7: Read only when Flash card is used. ATA card is unusable.
*8: The step relay is the device for the SFC function.
4 - 10
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.3 Performance specifications
Process CPU
Item
Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 2
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device points
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
3
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.) 4
No. of device tracking words ----
5
Device for accessing the link device directly.
Link direct device Exclusively used for CC-Link IE controller network*9 and MELSECNET/H.
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,J \SW ,J \SB 6
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U \G
L0 to 8191(default) 7
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week 8
(Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function Accuracy: -3.18 to +5.25s(TYP.+2.12s)/d at 0
Accuracy: -3.93 to +5.25s(TYP.+1.90s)/d at 25
4.1.3 Process CPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
Accuracy: -14.69 to +3.53s(TYP.-3.67s)/d at 55
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
period
5VDC internal current consumption 0.64A
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 27.4mm (1.08 inches)
D 89.3mm (3.52 inches)
Weight 0.20kg
*9: For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer. ( Appendix 2.2)
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
4 - 11
4.1.4 Redundant CPU
Table4.4 Performance specifications
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Control method Stored program repeat operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language Process control
FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer.)
language
Processing LD X0 34ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 102ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking
Device memory 48k words: 10ms
speed execution time
Device memory 100k words: 15ms
(redundant (increased scan
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System))
function) time)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
124K steps 252K steps
Program size *1, *2
(496 bytes) (1008 bytes)
Program memory
496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card
(RAM) Size of the installed memory card (2M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card
Size of the installed memory card
(ROM)
(Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Memory size*1
Standard RAM
Size of the installed memory card (2M bytes max.)
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
496K bytes 1008K bytes
(drive 4)
CPU shared
----
memory
*1: The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program size) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4 - 12
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.4 Performance specifications
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 2
Program memory 124 *3
252
Memory card (RAM) 287(When the Q2MEM-2MBS is used)
Memory Flash 3
Max. number 288
card card
of files stored
(ROM) ATA card 512
Standard RAM 3 *4 4
Standard ROM 124 252
No. of times of writing data into the
standard ROM
Max. 100000 times
5
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points 6
(No. of points accessible to the actual 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0 to 8191) (changeable) 7
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0 to 8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (sharing of low- and high-speed timers) (changeable) 8
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
4.1.4 Redundant CPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
No. of device points*5
0 point by default (sharing of low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST] The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
• Normal counter, 1024 points by default
(C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
• Interrupt counter: 256 points max.
(0 point by default, setting by parameters)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
*3: The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. The CPU module cannot execute 125 or more programs.
*4: Extended by the upgraded functions of CPU module ( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals))
*5: The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation,
Program Fundamentals))
4 - 13
Table4.4 Performance specifications
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Standard
Up to 131072 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
RAM
SRAM card
Up to 517120 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[R] Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
(2M bytes)
Flash card
Up to 1042432 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 points (R0 to 32767).
File (4M bytes)
register*6 Standard
131072 points (ZR0 to 131071), block switching not required.
RAM
SRAM card
No. of device points
517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), block switching not required.
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
[ZR] 1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
1042432 points (ZR0 to 1042431), block switching not required.
(4M bytes)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points (SB0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points (SW0 to 7FF) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Step relay [S] *7 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Index register [Z] 16 points (Z0 to 15) (The number of device points is fixed.)
4096 points (P0 to 4095) (The number of device points is fixed.), The use ranges of the local
Pointer [P]
pointers and common pointers can be set up by parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255) (The number of device points is fixed.)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
*6: Read only when Flash card is used. ATA card is unusable.
*7: The step relay is the device for the SFC function.
4 - 14
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.4 Performance specifications
Redundant CPU
Item
Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 2
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device points
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SD0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
3
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.) 4
Max. 100k words
No. of device tracking words
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System))
5
Device for accessing the link device directly.
Link direct device Exclusively used for CC-Link IE controller network*8 and MELSECNET/H.
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,J \SW ,J \SB 6
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U \G
L0 to 8191 (default) (Setting by parameters.) 7
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week 8
(Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: -3.2 to +5.27s
(TYP.+2.07s)/d at 0
Clock function
Accuracy: -2.77 to +5.27s
4.1.4 Redundant CPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
(TYP.+2.22s)/d at 25
Accuracy: -12.14 to +3.65s
(TYP.-2.89s)/d at 55
Allowable momentary power failure
Varies depending on the power supply module.
time
5VDC internal current consumption 0.89A
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 55.2mm (2.17 inches)
D 89.3mm (3.52 inches)
Weight 0.30kg
*8: For use of CC-Link IE controller network, check the versions of the CPU module and GX Developer. ( Appendix 2.2)
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
4 - 15
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU
(1) Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU
Table4.5 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU
Control method Stored program repeat operation
Refresh mode
I/O control mode
(Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
Program language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
language Process control
----
language
Processing LD X0 120ns 80ns 60ns 40ns 20ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 240ns 160ns 120ns 80ns 40ns
instruction)
Processing Tracking execution
speed time
----
(redundant (increased scan
function) time)
Constant scan
0.5 to 2000ms
(Function for keeping regular scan
(Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.)
time)
10K steps 15K steps 20Ksteps 30K steps
Program size *1, *2
(40K bytes) (60K bytes) (80K bytes) (120K bytes)
Program memory
40K bytes 60K bytes 80K bytes 120K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card (RAM) Size of the installed memory card
----
(drive 1) (8M bytes max.)
Size of the installed memory card
Memory card (ROM)
---- (Flash card: 4M bytes max.,
(drive 2)
ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
Standard RAM
---- 128K bytes 192K bytes
(drive 3)
Standard ROM
Memory 256K bytes 512K bytes 1024K bytes
(drive 4)
size*1
QCPU
standard ---- 8K bytes
memory
CPU Multiple
shared CPU
memory high
*3 speed ---- 32K bytes
transmis
-sion
area
*1: The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program size) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: The CPU shared memory is not latched.
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module.
4 - 16
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.5 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU 2
Q03UDECPU
Program memory 32 64 124
Memory card (RAM) ----
319 (When the Q3MEM-8MBS is 3
used)
Max.
Memory Flash
number of ---- 288
files stored
card
(ROM)
card
4
ATA card ---- 511
Standard RAM ----
Standard ROM 128 256
5
No. of times of writing data into the *4
Max. 100000 times
program memory
No. of times of writing data into the
standard ROM
Max. 100000 times*5 6
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
256 points 1024 points 2048 points 4096 points (X/Y0
7
(No. of points accessible to the
(X/Y0 to FF) (X/Y0 to 3FF) (X/Y0 to 7FF) to FFF)
actual I/O module.)
Internal relay [M]*6 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable) 8
*6 8192 points by default (L0-8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L]
Link relay [B]*6 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]*6
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
No. of device points
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
Retentive timer [ST]*6 The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
*6 • Normal counter, 1024 points by default (C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Counter [C]
Data register [D]*6 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Extended data register [D] ---- 0 points by default (changeable)
*6 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Link register [W]
Extended link register [W] ---- 0 points by default (changeable)
*6 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Annunciator [F]
*6 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V]
*6 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special relay [SB]
*6 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special register [SW]
*4: The one write operation may not be counted as one writing to a program memory.
The number of writing to the program memory can be checked by the special register (SD682 and SD683).
*5: The one write operation may not be counted as one writing to the standard ROM.
The number of writing to the standard ROM can be checked by the special register (SD687 and SD688).
*6: The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals))
4 - 17
Table4.5 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU
32768 points (R0
to 32767) Up to
Standard 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 65536 points can be 98304 points can
----
RAM used by block switching in units of 32768 points be used by block
switching in units
of 32768 points
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to
SRAM card
---- 517120 points can be used by block
(1M bytes)
switching in units of 32768 points
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to
SRAM card
---- 1041408 points can be used by block
(2M bytes)
switching in units of 32768 points
[R]
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to
SRAM card
---- 2087936 points can be used by block
(4M bytes)
switching in units of 32768 points
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to
SRAM card
---- 4184064 points can be used by block
(8M bytes)
switching in units of 32768 points
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to
Flash card
File ---- 1041408 points can be used by block
(2M bytes)
switching in units of 32768 points
register*7
No. of device points
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to
Flash card
---- 2087936 points can be used by block
(4M bytes)
switching in units of 32768 points
98304 points
Standard (ZR0 to 98303)
---- 65536 points (ZR0 to 65535) Block switching not required.
RAM Block switching
not required.
SRAM card 517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), Block
----
(1M bytes) switching not required.
SRAM card 1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407),
----
(2M bytes) Block switching not required.
[ZR]
SRAM card 2087936 points (ZR0 to 2087935),
----
(4M bytes) Block switching not required.
SRAM card 4184064 points (ZR0 to 4184063),
----
(8M bytes) Block switching not required.
Flash card 1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407),
----
(2M bytes) Block switching not required.
Flash card 2087936 points (ZR0 to 2087935),
----
(4M bytes) Block switching not required.
Step relay [S] *8 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)*9
Index register /
max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard devise register [Z]
Index register [Z]
max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification ----
(Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
of ZR device)
*7: Read only when a Flash card is used. ATA card is unusable.
4 - 18
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.5 Performance specifications 1
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU 2
4096 points (P0 to 4095), The use
512 points (P0 to 511), The use ranges of the local pointers ranges of the local pointers and
Pointer [P]
and common pointers can be set up by parameters common pointers can be set up by 3
parameters.
256 points (I0 to 255)
128 points (I0 to 127) The constant cyclic interval of system
4
No. of device points
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set
Interrupt pointer [I] to 31 can be set up by parameters. up by parameters.
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit) (0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, 5
I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.) 6
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
7
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device directly. 8
Dedicated to CC-Link IE controller network and MELSECNET/H.
Link direct device
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,
J \SW ,J \SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U \G
Data transmission
---- 100/10Mbps
speed
Full-duplex/Half-
Communication mode ----
duplex
Transmission method ---- Base band
Max. distance
100m
between hub and ----
Specific (328.08 feet.)
node
ations of
Cascade
built-in 10BASE-
Max. ---- connection: Up to
Ethernet T
number of four bases
port
CPU connecta Cascade
100BASE
module ble nodes ---- connection: Up to
-TX
*10 two bases
16 for a total of
socket
communication,
Number of
*11
---- MELSOFT
connections
connection, and
MC protocol and 1
for FTP
*8: The step relay is the device for the SFC function.
*9: The device points can be changed to 0 for the Universal model QCPU if the serial number (first five digits) is "10042".
*10: Applicable only to the Q03UDECPU.
*11: The number indicates the total number of TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols.
4 - 19
Table4.5 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item Q03UDCPU
Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU
Q03UDECPU
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute,
second, and day of the week
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the
(Automatic leap year detection)
week
Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s
( Automatic leap year detection)
Clock function (TYP.+1.42s)/d at 0
Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.24s)/d at 0
Accuracy: -3.18 to +3.74s
Accuracy: -2.34 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.63s)/d at 25
(TYP.+1.50s)/d at 25
Accuracy: -11.48 to +2.12s (TYP.-3.03s)/d at 55
Accuracy: -13.20 to +2.12s
(TYP.-3.54s)/d at 55
Allowable instantaneous power 20ms or less
Varies depending on the power supply module.
failure period (100VAC or more)
5VDC internal current 0.37A*12 0.33A 0.23A 0.33A*13
98mm
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
(3.86 inches)
245mm
External dimensions W 27.4mm (1.08 inches)
(9.65 inches)*14
98mm 89.3mm (3.52 inches)*15
D
(3.86 inches)
Weight 0.70kg*14 0.15kg 0.20kg*15
*12: The value includes those of the CPU module and base unit.
*13: The current consumption in the Q03UDECPU is 0.46A
*14: The value includes those of the CPU module, base unit, and power supply module.
*15: The values for the Q03UDECPU are as follows.
External dimensions (D): 115mm (4.53 inches)
Weight: 0.22kg
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
4 - 20
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
(2) Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, 1
Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU
Table4.6 Performance specifications 2
Universal model QCPU
Item Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
3
Control method Stored program repeat operation
I/O control mode Refresh mode (Direct access I/O is available by specifying direct access I/O (DX , DY ).)
Sequence control Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC),
4
Program lan- language MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
guage Process control lan-
guage
----
5
Processing LD X0 9.5ns
speed
(sequence MOV D0 D1 19ns 6
instruction)
Processing Tracking execution
speed time
(redundant (increased scan
---- 7
function) time1)
Constant scan
(Function for keeping regular scan 0.5 to 2000ms (Setting available in 0.5ms unit.) (Setting by parameters.) 8
time)
40K steps 60K steps 100K steps 130K steps 200K steps 260K steps
Program size *1, *2
(160K bytes) (240K bytes) (400K bytes) (520K bytes) (800K bytes) (1040K bytes)
Program memory
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
160K bytes 240K bytes 400K bytes 520K bytes 800K bytes 1040K bytes
(drive 0)
Memory card (RAM)
Size of the installed memory card (8M bytes max.)
(drive 1)
Memory card (ROM)
Size of the installed memory card (Flash card: 4M bytes max., ATA card: 32M bytes max.)
(drive 2)
Standard RAM
256K bytes 768K bytes 1024K bytes 1280K bytes
(drive 3)
Memory Standard ROM
512K bytes 1024K bytes 2048K steps 4096K steps
size*1 (drive 4)
QCPU
standard 8K bytes
CPU memory
shared Multiple
memory CPU high
*3 speed 32K bytes
transmis-
sion area
*1: The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown below.(Program size) - (File header size (default: 34 steps))
For details, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: The CPU shared memory is not latched.
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
The CPU shared memory is cleared by turning on the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module.
4 - 21
Table4.6 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Program memory 124 252*4
Memory card (RAM) 319(When the Q3MEM-8MBS is used)
Max. num- Memory Flash
288
ber of files card card
stored (ROM) ATA card 511
Standard RAM 3
Standard ROM 256
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times*5
program memory
No. of times of writing data into the
Max. 100000 times*6
standard ROM
No. of I/O device points
8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
(No. of points usable on program.)
No. of I/O points
(No. of points accessible to the 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
actual I/O module.)
Internal relay [M] 8192 points by default (M0-8191) (changeable)
Latch relay [L] 8192 points by default (L0-8191) (changeable)
Link relay [B] 8192 points by default (B0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
2048 points by default (T0 to 2047) (changeable)
(Sharing of low- and high-speed timers)
The low- and high-speed timers are specified by the instructions.
Timer [T]
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed timers is set up by parameters.
(Low-speed timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
0 point by default (sharing of the low- and high-speed retentive timers) (changeable)
No. of device points*7
The low- and high-speed retentive timers are specified by the instructions.
The measurement unit of the low- and high-speed retentive timers is set up by parameters.
Retentive timer [ST]
(Low-speed retentive timer: 1 to 1000ms, 1ms unit, 100ms by default)
(High-speed retentive timer: 0.1 to 100.0ms, 0.1ms unit, 10.0ms by default)
• Normal counter, 1024 points by default
Counter [C]
(C0 to 1023) (changeable)
Data register [D] 12288 points by default (D0 to 12287) (changeable)
Extended data register [D] 0 points by default (changeable)
Link register [W] 8192 points by default (W0 to 1FFF) (changeable)
Extended link register [W] 0 points by default (changeable)
Annunciator [F] 2048 points by default (F0 to 2047) (changeable)
Edge relay [V] 2048 points by default (V0 to 2047) (changeable)
Link special relay [SB] 2048 points by default (SB0 to 7FF) (changeable)
Link special register [SW] 2048 points by default (SW0 to 7FF) (changeable)
*4: The CPU module can execute up to 124 programs. The CPU module cannot execute 125 or more programs.
*5: The one write operation may not be counted as one writing to a program memory.
The number of writing to the program memory can be checked by the special register (SD682 and SD683).
*6: The one write operation may not be counted as one writing to the standard ROM.
The number of writing to the standard ROM can be checked by the special register (SD687 and SD688).
*7: The number of points can be changed within the setting range. ( QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals))
4 - 22
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.6 Performance specifications 1
Universal model QCPU
Item Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU 2
32768 points 32768 points
(R0 to 32767) (R0 to 32767)
Standard
Up to 131072
points can be
Up to 393216
points can be
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up
to 524288 points can be used
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up
to 655360 points can be used
3
RAM used by block used by block by block switching in units of by block switching in units of
switching in switching in 32768 points 32768 points
units of 32768 units of 32768 4
points points
SRAM card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 517120 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
[R]
(1M bytes) points
5
SRAM card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
(2M bytes) points
SRAM card
(4M bytes)
32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 2087936 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
points
6
SRAM card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 4184064 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
(8M bytes) points
Flash card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 1041408 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768 7
(2M bytes) points
File reg-
Flash card 32768 points (R0 to 32767) Up to 2087936 points can be used by block switching in units of 32768
ister*8 (4M bytes) points 8
No. of device points
131072 points 393216 points
(ZR0 to (ZR0 to
Standard 524288 points (ZR0 to 524287) 655360 points (ZR0 to 655359)
131071) Block 393215) Block
RAM Block switching not required. Block switching not required.
switching not switching not
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
required. required.
SRAM card
517120 points (ZR0 to 517119), Block switching not required.
(1M bytes)
SRAM card
1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), Block switching not required.
[ZR] (2M bytes)
SRAM card
2087936 points (ZR0 to 2087935), Block switching not required.
(4M bytes)
SRAM card
4184064 points (ZR0 to 4184063), Block switching not required.
(8M bytes)
Flash card
1041408 points (ZR0 to 1041407), Block switching not required.
(2M bytes)
Flash card
2087936 points (ZR0 to 2087935), Block switching not required.
(4M bytes)
Step relay [S] *9 8192 points (S0 to 8191) (The number of device points is fixed.)*10
Index register /
max. 20 points (Z0 to 19)
Standard devise register [Z]
Index register [Z]
max. 10 points (Z0 to 18)
(32-bit modification specification
(Index register (Z) is used in double words.)
of ZR device)
4096 points (P0 to 4095), The use ranges of the local pointers and common pointers can be set up
Pointer [P]
by parameters.
*8: Read only when Flash card is used. ATA card is unusable.
*9: The step relay is the device for the SFC function.
*10: The device points can be changed if the serial number (first five digits) of the Universal model QCPU is "10042" or later.
4 - 23
Table4.6 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU
Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
256 points (I0 to 255)
The constant cyclic interval of system interrupt pointers I28 to 31 can be set up by parameters.
Interrupt pointer [I]
(0.5 to 1000ms, 0.5ms unit)
No. of device points
Default values I28: 100ms, I29: 40ms, I30: 20ms, I31: 10ms
Special relay [SM] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Special register [SD] 2048 points (SM0 to 2047) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function input [FX] 16 points (FX0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function output [FY] 16 points (FY0 to F) (The number of device points is fixed.)
Function register [FD] 5 points (FD0 to 4) (The number of device points is fixed.)
No. of device tracking words ----
Device for accessing the link device directly.
Dedicated to CC-Link IE controller network and MELSECNET/H.
Link direct device
Specified form: J \X ,J \Y ,J \W ,J \B ,
J \SW ,J \SB
Device for accessing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module directly.
Intelligent function module device
Specified form: U \G
Data transmission
100/10Mbps
speed
Communication mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex
Specifi- Transmission method Base band
cations Max. distance
of Ether- between hub and 100m (328.08 feet)
net port node
built in Max. 10BASE-
the CPU Cascade connection: Up to four bases
number of T
module connect-
*11 100BASE
able Cascade connection: Up to two bases
-TX
nodes
Number of connec-
16 for a total of socket communication, MELSOFT connection, and MC protocol and 1 for FTP
tions *12
*11: Applicable only to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
*12: The number indicates the total number of TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols.
4 - 24
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Table4.6 Performance specifications
Universal model QCPU
Item Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU 2
Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
L0 to 8191 (8192 points by default)
Latch range
(Latch range can be set up for B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, and W.) (Setting by parameters.)
3
RUN/PAUSE contact One contact can be set up in X0 to 1FFF for each of RUN and PAUSE. (Setting by parameters.)
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, and day of the week
(Automatic leap year detection)
Accuracy: -2.96 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.42s)/d at 0
4
Clock function
Accuracy: -3.18 to +3.74s (TYP.+1.50s)/d at 25
Accuracy: -13.20 to +2.12s (TYP.-3.54s)/d at 55
Allowable instantaneous power
5
Varies depending on the power supply module.
failure period
5VDC internal current 0.39A *13
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
6
External dimensions W 27.4mm (1.08 inches)
D 89.3mm (3.52 inches)*14
Weight 0.20kg*15 7
*13: The current consumption Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU is
0.49A
*14: The values for the Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, and Q26UDEHCPU are as 8
follows.
External dimensions (D): 115mm (4.53 inches)
Weight: 0.22kg
4.1.5 Universal model QCPU
4.1 Performance Specifications
Remark
For the general specifications, refer to CHAPTER 3.
4 - 25
4.2 Basic Model QCPU
4.2.1 Part names
(1) Q00JCPU
1) 4) 5) 6)
OUT
2)
7)
When opening the cover, put your 8)
finger here.
Figure 4.1 Front face
20)
Q00UJCPU
OUT
3) INPUT
100-240VAC 14) 13)
50/60Hz 105VA
OUTPUT
5VDC 3A
(FG)
(LG)
INPUT N
100-240VAC
100-240VAC
L
15) 19) 18)
Figure 4.2 With front cover open
Table4.7 Part names
No. Name Application
1) Base mounting hole Pear-shaped hole for mounting the unit to a panel such as a control box. (For M4 screw)
Protective cover for extension cable connector. Remove this cover when connecting an
2) Cover
extension base unit.
Connector for transferring signals to or from the extension base unit. Connect an extension
3) Extension cable connector
cable.
4) POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5VDC. Turns on in green during normal output of 5VDC.
4 - 26
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.7 Part names 1
No. Name Application
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On : During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN". 2
Off : During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When the error that stops operation is detected.
Flash : When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
is moved from "STOP" to "RUN". 3
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
•Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
5) RUN LED
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.( Section 4.2.3) 4
•Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
•Power on the programmable controller again.
5
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN"
after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflected on the param-
eters related to the intelligent function module, such as the network parameters.) 6
On : When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
•When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter.
6) ERR. LED
•When the annunciator (F) is turned on by the SET/OUT instruction.
•When battery low occurs.
7
Off : Normal
Flash : When the error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch. 8
Connector used for mounting an I/O or intelligent function module.
7) Module connector (To the connector of the spare space where no module is mounted, fit the accessory connector
cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent dust from entering.)
8) DIN rail adaptor mounting holes Holes for mounting a DIN rail adaptor.
4.2.1 Part names
4.2 Basic Model QCPU
9) FG terminal Ground terminal connected with the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
10) LG terminal Power filter ground having a half potential of the input voltage.
11) Power input terminals Power input terminals for connection of a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function and backup
12) Battery
power time function.
13) Battery fixing hook Hook for holding the battery.
For connection of the battery lead wires.
14) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
15) RS-232 connector *1
Can be connected by the RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
RUN : Executes sequence program operation.
STOP : Stops sequence program operation.
16) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2 RESET : Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Section 4.2.3)
4 - 27
(2) Q00CPU, Q01CPU
1)
2)
3)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
4)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
Figure 4.3 Front face Figure 4.4 With front cover open
10)
11)
12)
Figure 4.5 Side face
4 - 28
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.8 Part names 1
No. Name Application
Hook used to fix the module to the base unit.
1) Module fixing hook
(Single-motion installation) 2
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On : During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN".
Off : During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
Flash : When parameters/program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
3
is set from "STOP" to "RUN".
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
•Move the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN". 4
2) RUN LED •Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.( Section 4.2.3)
•Power on the programmable controller again
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations. 5
•Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
•Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN"
after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflected on the param- 6
eters related to the intelligent function module, such as the network parameters.)
On : When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
•When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter. 7
•When the annunciator (F) is turned on by the SET/OUT instruction.
3) ERR. LED •When battery low occurs.
Off : Normal
Flash : When the error that stops operation is detected. 8
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
4) Serial number Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, clock function and backup
5) Battery
4.2.1 Part names
4.2 Basic Model QCPU
power time function.
6) Battery fixing hook Hook for holding the battery.
For connection of the battery lead wires.
7) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
RUN : Executes sequence program operation.
STOP : Stops sequence program operation.
8) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2 : Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
RESET
( Section 4.2.3)
Connector for RS-232 connection
9) RS-232 connector*1
Can be connected by the RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
10) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 12 screw)
11) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
12) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
4 - 29
*1: When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
Figure 4.6 RS-232 cable fixing processing
*2: Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
4 - 30
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
4.2.2 Switch operation at the time of writing program
1
Programs can be written to the Basic model QCPU in either the STOP or RUN status.
(1) When writing program with RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
2
When writing a program with the Basic model QCPU placed in the STOP status using the RUN/STOP/RESET
switch, operate the switch in the following procedure.
3
1) RUN/STOP/RESET switch: STOP
RUN LED: Off, from CPU module STOP status to Program write
2) RUN/STOP/RESET switch: Perform reset.( Section 4.2.3) 4
3) RUN/STOP/RESET switch: STOP to RUN
RUN LED: On, CPU module RUN status
5
(2) When it is desired to place the Basic model QCPU in RUN status without
resetting it after program write 6
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from STOP to RUN, STOP and then RUN.
After the second STOP to RUN operation, the CPU module is put in the RUN status.
At this time, the device memory data are those saved before program write. 7
(3) When writing program after remote STOP using GX Developer
When writing a program with the Basic model QCPU stopped by remote STOP using GX Developer, no operation 8
is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
When remote RUN is performed using GX Developer, the Basic model QCPU is placed in the RUN status.
4.2.2 Switch operation at the time of writing program
4.2 Basic Model QCPU
(4) When performing online change of program
When the online change of a program is performed, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch need not be operated.
The program modified online during boot operation is written to the program memory.
After making online program change, also write the program to the standard ROM of the boot source memory. If the program
is not written in the standard ROM, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
For details of the boot operation, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4 - 31
4.2.3 Reset operation
For the Basic model QCPU, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is used to switch between the RUN
status and STOP status and to perform RESET operation.
When using the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to reset the CPU module, moving the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the
reset position will not reset it immediately.
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the RESET position until reset processing is complete (the flashing ERR. LED turns
off).
If you release your hand from the RUN/STOP/RESET switch during reset processing (the ERR. LED is flashing), the switch
will return to the STOP position and reset processing cannot be completed.
Perform reset operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch as shown in Figure 4.7.
Start
.......................Reset operation is started using
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
in the "RESET" position.
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET
STOP switch
.......................Reset is accepted and reset
The ERR. LED flickers several times
processing is performed.
(3 to 4 times) rapidly.
Flickers.
.......................Reset is completed.
The "ERR. LED" goes off .
Goes off.
.......................Reset is canceled.
Return the RUN/STOP/RESET
switch to the "STOP" position.
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET : Releasing your hand from the
STOP switch RUN/STOP/RESET switch returns it
to the STOP position.
Termination , completed , end
Figure 4.7 Reset operation
4 - 32
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
2
4.2.4 Latch clear operation 3
For the Basic model QCPU, latch clear is performed by the remote latch clear operation of GX Developer.
Latch clear cannot be executed by operating the switches of the CPU module. 4
● The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each device. The setting can be
5
mode in the device setting of the PLC parameter.
● For the remote latch clear operation by GX Developer, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) 6
4.2.4 Latch clear operation
4.2 Basic Model QCPU
4 - 33
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant
CPU
4.3.1 Part names
(1) Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
1)
2)
9)
3)
4)
5)
1
2
6) 3 13)
4
7) 10) 5
14)
15)
11) *1
12)
8)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
Figure 4.8 Front face Figure 4.9 With front cover open
16)
*1: Not provided for Q02CPU.
17)
20)
19)
18)
Figure 4.10 Side face
4 - 34
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
(2) Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU 1
1)
21)
2
2)
9)
3) 22)
4) 23) 3
5)
24)
6) 13)
7) 10)
14)
4
15)
25)
5
11)
12) 6
8)
7
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
Figure 4.11 Front face Figure 4.12 With front cover open 8
16)
4.3.1 Part names
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
17)
20)
19)
18)
Figure 4.13 Side face
4 - 35
Table4.9 Part Names
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to secure the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
2) MODE LED On (green) : Q mode
Flash (green) : Forced on and off for external I/O registered
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On : The RUN/STOP switch is set to "RUN" and the module is running.
Off : The RUN/STOP switch is set to "STOP."
(The standby system Redundant CPU module in the backup mode does not turn on even
when the RUN/STOP switch is set to "RUN" but the module is stopped.)
When an error is detected and operation must be halted due to the error
Flash : Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP switch set to "STOP" and then
the RUN/STOP switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
When the operation mode is changed from the backup mode to the separate mode in
the Redundant CPU system, the RUN LED of the standby system side CPU module
3) RUN LED flashes.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
•Set the RUN/STOP switch from "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
•Reset with the RESET/L. CLR switch.
•Restart the programmable controller power.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
•Reset with the RESET/L. CLR switch.
•Restart the programmable controller power.
(If the RUN/STOP switch is set from "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after changing the
parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module parameters will not
be updated.)
On : Detect on of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
Off : Normal
4) ERR. LED
Flash : Detection of the error that stops operation.
When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally. (The BOOT LED
flashes together.)
On : Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator (F) turned ON
5) USER LED Off : Normal
Flash : Execution of latch clear
On : Battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU module or memory card.
6) BAT. LED
Off : Normal
On : Start of boot operation
Off : Non-execution of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
Flash : When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally. (The ERR. LED flashes
together.)
4 - 36
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.9 Part Names 1
No. Name Application
8) Serial number Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module. 2
10) Memory card installing connector Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type B)
11) USB connector Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable. 3
(Not available for Q02CPU.)
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector *1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
4
Used to set the items for operation of the CPU module.
For the system protection and the valid parameter drives of the DIP switches, refer to the fol-
lowing.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
5
Fundamentals)
DIP switches *2
SW1 : Used to set system protection. Inhibits all the writing and control instructions to the CPU
ON SW module. (Factory-default is off) 6
Off : No protection
1 On : Protection
13) 2 SW2, SW3 : Used to specify parameter-valid drive. 7
(Both SW2 and SW3 are preset to off as factory default)
3
SW2 SW3 Parameter Drive
4 OFF OFF Program memory (Drive 0)
8
5 ON OFF SRAM card (Drive 1)
OFF ON Flash card/ATA card (Drive 2)
ON ON Standard ROM (Drive 4)
(Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM (Drive 3).)
4.3.1 Part names
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
SW4 : Must not be used. Normally off. (Factory default: Off)
SW5 : Must not be used. Normally off. (Factory default: Off)
RUN : Executes sequence program operation.
14) RUN/STOP switch *3
STOP : Stops sequence program operation.
RESET : Used to perform hardware reset, operation fault rest, operation initialization, etc.
(If this switch is left in the RESET position, the whole system will be reset and the
system will not operate properly.
15) RESET/L. CLR switch*3
After performing reset, always return this switch to the neutral position.)
L. CLR : Used to turn "Off" or clear to "zero" all latch area data set in the parameter.
Used to clear the sampling trace settings.
16) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 12 screw)
17) Module fixing projection Projection used to fix the module to the base unit.
For connection of battery lead wires.
18) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
Backup battery for use of program memory, standard RAM, clock function and the backup
19) Battery
power time function.
20) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
4 - 37
Table4.9 Part Names
No. Name Application
Indicates the backup or separate mode while the system is running normally.
On (green) : Backup mode
Off (red) : The status in which control (RUN) cannot be continued by system switching
On (orange) : Separate mode
Off : Debug mode
The LED indication is as shown below when the memory copy from control system to standby
system is executed.
21) *4
BACKUP LED In backup mode In separate mode
Control system Standby system Control system Standby system
Memory copy executing ON (red) ON (red) ON (orange) ON (orange)
Memory copy normally ON (red) ON (red) ON (orange) ON (orange)
completed
For the memory copy from control system to standby system, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
Indicates the CPU module operates as control system or standby system.
On : Control system (The standby system is normal and system switching is available.)
22) CONTROL LED *4
Off : Standby system
Note that this LED turns on in the debug mode.
The LED of the CPU module on the system A side turns on.
On : System A
Flash : When the tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs normally as the system
23) SYSTEM A LED *4 A.
(It lasts until the system A side tracking cable is connected.)
Off : System B (The SYSTEM B LED turns on.)
Note that this LED turns on in the debug mode.
The LED of the CPU module on the system B side turns on.
On : System B
Flash : When the tracking cable is disconnected while the system runs normally as the system
24) SYSTEM B LED *4 B
(It lasts until the system B side tracking cable is connected.)
Off : System A (The SYSTEM A LED turns on)
Note that this LED turns off in the debug mode.
25) TRACKING connector *4 Connector for connecting system A or B with the tracking cable (QC TR).
4 - 38
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
*1: When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling. 1
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
2
RS-232 cable
3
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
4
Figure 4.14 RS-232 cable fixing processing
*2: Because the DIP switches are located out of reach of fingertips, operate it with a tool such as screwdriver. Careful attention must be paid
to prevent the switch part from being damaged. 5
*3: Operate the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L. CLR switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
*4: Applicable only to the Redundant CPU.
6
4.3.1 Part names
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
4 - 39
4.3.2 Switch operation after writing program
This section explains the switch operation after a program is written using GX Developer.
(1) When writing program with CPU module set to "STOP" *1
(a) To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared
1) Set the RESET/L. CLR switch to the RESET position once and return it to the original neutral position.
2) Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
3) The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(b) To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held)
1) Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN.
2) The RUN LED flashes.
3) Set the RUN/STOP switch to STOP.
4) Set the RUN/STOP switch to RUN again.
5) The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(2) When a program is written while CPU module is running
(online change)*2
No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L. CLR switch of the CPU module.
At this time, the device memory data are not cleared.
*1: When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the program to the boot source
memory.
If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
*2: When a program is changed online in the ladder mode, the changed program is written to the program memory.
When performing boot operation, also write the program to the boot source memory after online change. If the program is
not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
For details of the boot operation, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
● Before writing a program to the CPU module, perform the following operation.
• Set the system protect setting switch (DIP switch: SW1) of the CPU module to off (not protected).
• Cancel the registered password on GX Developer.
● When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP operation of GX Developer, it can be put in
the RUN status by the remote RUN operation of GX Developer after program write. In that case, No operation is
needed for the RUN/STOP switch and RESET/L. CLR switch of the CPU module.
● For details of GX Developer, refer to the following.
GX Developer Operating Manual
4 - 40
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
4.3.3 Reset operation
1
Reset operation is performed by turning the RESET/L. CLR switch of the CPU module to the RESET side for the High
Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU.
2
Be sure to return the RESET/L. CLR switch to the neutral position after resetting. When the system is left with the RESET/L.
CLR switch set to the RESET, the entire system is reset, not operated normally. 3
4.3.4 Latch clear operation 4
To perform latch clear, operate the RESET/L. CLR switch in the following procedure.
1) RUN/STOP switch : STOP
5
2) RESET/L. CLR switch : Set the switch to the L. CLR position several times until the
USER LED flashes.
6
USER LED: Flash : Ready for latch clear
3) RESET/L. CLR switch : Set the switch to the L. CLR position one more time.
USER LED: Off : Latch clear complete 7
● The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each device. The setting can be 8
mode in the device setting of the PLC parameter.
● In addition to the way of using the RESET/L. CLR switch for latch clear, remote latch clear may be performed from GX
Developer.
For details of remote latch clear operation by GX Developer, refer to the following.
4.3.3 Reset operation
4.3 High Performance Model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4 - 41
4.3.5 Automatic writing to standard ROM
The High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and Redundant CPU allows data in the memory card to be written
into the standard ROM automatically.
For details, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
(1) Procedures for automatic write to standard ROM
Automatic writing to the standard ROM is performed with the following procedures.
(a) Operation with GX Developer (setting automatic writing to standard ROM)
1) Check the "Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM" in the PLC parameter boot file
setting.
Set the parameter and program to be booted at the "Boot file" setting section.
(Set the "Transfer from" to "Standard ROM".)
Check "Auto Download
all Data from Memory
card to Standard ROM ".
Set the "Transfer from"
to "Standard ROM".
Figure 4.15 Boot file setting
2) Store the set parameters and programs to be booted in the memory card.
(b) Operations on CPU module (automatic writing to standard ROM)
1) Power off the programmable controller.
2) Insert the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the CPU module.
3) Set the DIP switches on the CPU module so that the valid parameter drive is matched with the memory card
to be installed.
• When a SRAM card is installed: SW2 : On, SW3 : Off
• When a Flash card/ATA card is installed: SW2 : Off, SW3 : On
4) Power on the programmable controller.
• Boot the file specified in the memory card into the program memory, and write the program in the
memory to the standard ROM after completion of the boot.
5) The BOOT LED will flash when automatic write to standard ROM is completed, and the CPU module will be
in the stop error status.
6) Turn off the programmable controller.
7) Remove the memory card, and then set the valid parameter drive to the standard ROM with the CPU
module's DIP switches.
• Standard ROM: SW2 : On, SW3 : On
The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory when the
programmable controller is turned on to enable actual operations.
4 - 42
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
1
4.4.1 Part names
2
(1)Q00UJCPU
1) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
3
4
2)
10) 11) 12)
7
When opening the cover,
put your finger here.
Figure 4.16 Front face
8
20)
Q00UJCPU
OUT
4.4.1 Part names
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
3) INPUT
100-240VAC 14) 13)
50/60Hz 105VA
OUTPUT
5VDC 3A
(FG)
(LG)
INPUT N
100-240VAC
100-240VAC
L
16)
17)
15) 19) 18)
Figure 4.17 Side face Figure 4.18 With front cover open
4 - 43
Table4.10 Part Names
No. Name Application
1) Base mounting hole Pear-shaped hole for mounting the unit to a panel such as a control box. (For M4 screw)
Protective cover for extension cable connector. Remove this cover when connecting an exten-
2) Cover
sion base unit.
Connector for transferring signals to or from the extension base unit. Connect an extension
3) Extension cable connector
cable.
4) POWER LED Power indicator LED for 5VDC. Turns on in green during normal output of 5VDC.
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
On: Q mode
5) MODE LED
Off: Executional conditioned device test in process
Forced on/off of external devices in process
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN".
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP"
When the error that stops operation is detected.
Flash: When parameters or a program is written during STOP and the RUN/STOP/RESET
switch is moved from "STOP" to "RUN".
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
• Shift the RUN/STOP/RESET switch from "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN".
6) RUN LED
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is shifted from "STOP" to "RUN" to "STOP" to "RUN"
after changing the parameter values, the new values are not reflected on the parame-
ters related to the intelligent function module, such as the network parameters.)
On: When the self-diagnostic error that will not stop operation is detected.
(When continuation of operation at error detection is set in the parameter)
7) ERR. LED Off: Normal
Flash: When the error that stops operation is detected.
When reset operation is performed with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
On: Annunciator (F) turned on.
8) USER LED
Off: Normal
Flash (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
On (green): Keeps on for 5 seconds after competing of restoring the data that are backed up
by the latch data backup function to the standard ROM.
9) BAT. LED
Flash (green): When data are backed up to the standard ROM by the latch data backup func-
tion
Off: Normal
10) Serial number Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
Connector used for mounting an I/O or intelligent function module.
11) Module connector (To the connector of the spare space where no module is mounted, fit the accessory connector
cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent dust from entering.)
12) DIN rail adopter mounting holes Holes for mounting a DIN rail adaptor.
13) FG terminal Ground terminal connected with the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
14) LG terminal Power filter ground having a half potential of the input voltage.
15) Power input terminals Power input terminals for connection of a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
16) Battery Backup battery for use of the standard RAM, backup power time function.
For connection of the battery lead wires.
17) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
4 - 44
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.10 Part Names 1
No. Name Application
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral devices. (Connector type miniB)
18) USB connector *1
Can be connected by USV-dedicated cable. 2
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
19) RS-232 connector *1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable. (QC30R2)
RUN: Executes sequence program operation. 3
STOP: Stops sequence program operation.
20) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2
RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
(Section 4.4.3)
4
*1: When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
5
6
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
7
Fixing screw
Figure 4.19 RS-232 cable fixing processing
8
*2: Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
4.4.1 Part names
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
4 - 45
(2) Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
1)
Q00UCPU
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
10)
11)
12)
7)
When opening the cover,
put your finger here.
Figure 4.20 Front face Figure 4.21 with front cover open
13)
14)
15)
8)
9)
Figure 4.22 Side face
4 - 46
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.11 Part Names 1
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module. 2
On : Q mode
2) MODE LED
Flash : Executional conditioned device test is in process
Forced on and off function for external I/O is in process.
3
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
Off: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
When an error that stops operation is detected. 4
Flash: Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP",
and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN."
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations. 5
• Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
3) RUN LED
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
• Power on the programmable controller again.
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following operations. 6
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN" after
changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module parame-
7
ters will not be updated.)
On : Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.) 8
Off : Normal
4) ERR. LED
Flash : Detection of the error that stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.RUN/STOP/
RESET.
4.4.1 Part names
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
On : Annunciator (F) turned on.
5) USER LED
Off : Normal
On (yellow) : Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the memory card.
On (green) : Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backed up to the standard ROM by
the latch data backup is completed.
Flash (green) : Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data backup is
completed.
6) BAT. LED Off: Normal
Flash (yellow): Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
On (green): Keeps on for 5 seconds after completing of restoring the data that are backed up
by the latch data backup function to the standard ROM.
Flash (green): Completion of backup to the standard ROM by the latch data backup function.
Off: Normal
7) Serial number Shows serial number printed on the rating plate.
Backup battery for use of the program memory, standard RAM, and backup power time func-
8) Battery
tion.
For connection of battery lead wires.
9) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
RUN: Executes sequence program operation
STOP: Stops sequence program operation
10) RUN/STOP/RESET switch *2 RESET: Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization, and like.
( Section 4.4.3)
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type miniB)
11) USB connector *1
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.USB.
4 - 47
Table4.11 Part Names
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector *1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
13) Module fixing holes Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit. (M3 12 screw)
14) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
15) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
*1: When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
Figure 4.23 RS-232 cable fixing processing
*2: Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
4 - 48
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
(3) Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, 1
Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
2
1)
2)
9)
3) 3
4)
5)
6) 4
7) 10)
13)
5
11)
6
12)
8) 7
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
Figure 4.24 Front face Figure 4.25 With front cover open 8
14)
4.4.1 Part names
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
15)
18)
17)
16)
Figure 4.26 Side face
4 - 49
(4) Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU
1)
2)
9)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
10)
13)
11)
20)
19)
21)
8)
When opening the cover, put
your finger here.
Figure 4.27 Front face Figure 4.28 With front cover open
14)
15)
18)
17)
16)
Figure 4.29 Side face
4 - 50
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
Table4.12 Part names 1
No. Name Application
1) Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit. (Single-motion installation)
Indicates the mode of the CPU module.
2
On: Q mode
2) MODE LED Flash: Executional conditioned device test is in process
Forced on and off function for external I/O is in process 3
CPU module change function with memory card is in process
Indicates the operating status of the CPU module.
On
Off
: During operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "RUN"
: During stop with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to "STOP".
4
When an error that stops operation is detected.
Flash : Parameters or programs are written with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch set to
"STOP", and then the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is turned from "STOP" to "RUN." 5
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the program, perform the following operations.
• Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN".
3) RUN LED • Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
• Power on the programmable controller again.
6
To turn on the RUN LED after writing the parameters, perform the following
operations.
• Perform reset with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch. 7
• Power on the programmable controller again.
(If the RUN/STOP/RESET switch is set in the order of "RUN" "STOP" "RUN"
after changing the parameters, network parameters and intelligent function module 8
parameters will not be updated.)
On : Detection of self-diagnosis error which will not stop operation, except battery error.
(When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting.)
4) ERR. LED Off : Normal
4.4.1 Part names
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
Flash : Detection of the error that stops operation.
When reset operation becomes valid with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
On : Annunciator ( F) turned on
5) USER LED
Off : Normal
On (yellow) :Battery error due to battery voltage drop of the memory card.
Flash (yellow) : Battery error due to voltage drop of the CPU module battery.
On (green) : Turned on for 5 seconds after restoring of data backuped to the standard
6) BAT. LED ROM by the latch data backup is completed.
Flash (green) : Flashes when backup of data to the standard ROM by latch data backup is
completed.
Off : Normal
On : Start of boot operation
7) BOOT LED
Off : Non-execution of boot operation
4 - 51
Table4.12 Part names
No. Name Application
8) Serial number Shows the serial number printed on the rating plate.
9) Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module.
10) Memory card installing connector Connector used for installing the memory card to the CPU module.
Connector for connection with USB-compatible peripheral device. (Connector type miniB)
11) USB connector
Can be connected by USB-dedicated cable.
Connector for connecting a peripheral device by RS-232.
12) RS-232 connector *1
Can be connected by RS-232 connection cable (QC30R2).
RUN : Executes sequence program operation.
STOP : Stops sequence program operation.
13) RUN/STOP/RESET switch*2 RESET : Performs hardware reset, operation error reset, operation initialization or like.
( Section 4.4.3)
14) Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to secure to the base unit. (M3 12 screw)
15) Module fixing projection Projection used to secure the module to the base unit.
For connection of battery lead wires.
16) Battery connector pin (Lead wires are disconnected from the connector when shipping to prevent the battery from
consuming.)
17) Battery Backup battery for use of standard RAM, clock function and backup power time function.
18) Module mounting lever Lever used to mount the module to the base unit.
19) Ethernet connector Connector for connecting an Ethernet device (RJ-45 connector)
On: Connected at 100Mbps.
20) 100M LED
Off: Not connected, or connected at 10Mbps
On: Data being sent/received
21) SD/RD LED
Off: No data being sent/received
*1: When a cable is connected to the RS-232 connector at all times, clamp the cable to prevent a poor connection, moving, and
disconnection by unintentional pulling.
The Q6HLD-R2 type RS-232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS-232 connector.
CPU module
RS-232 cable
Q6HLD-R2
Fixing screw
Figure 4.30 RS-232 cable fixing processing
*2: Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
4 - 52
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
4.4.2 Switch operation after writing a program
1
This section explains the switch operation after a program is written using GX Developer.
2
(1) When writing program with CPU module set to "STOP" *1
(a) To set to RUN status with device memory data cleared
3
1) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RESET position once (Approximately 1 second) and return it to
the STOP position.
2) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position. 4
3) The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On).
(b) To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared (held) 5
1) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position.
2) The RUN LED flashes.
3) Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the STOP position.
6
4) Setthe RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the RUN position again.
5) The CPU module is placed in the RUN status (RUN LED: On). 7
(2) When a program is written while CPU module is running (online change)*2
No operation is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module. At this time, the device memory
8
data are not cleared.
*1: When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation, also write the program to the boot source
memory.
4.4.2 Switch operation after writing a program
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
If the program is not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation.
*2: When a program is written online in the ladder mode, the changed program is written to the program memory.
When performing boot operation, also write the program to the boot source memory after online change. If the program is
not written to the boot source memory, the old program will be executed at the next boot operation
For details of the boot operation, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Functional Description, Program Fundamentals)
When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP operation of GX Developer, it can be set in the
RUN status by the remote RUN operation of GX Developer after program write.
In that case, no operation is needed for the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module.
For details of GX Developer, refer to the following.
GX Developer Operating Manual
4 - 53
4.4.3 Reset operation
For the Universal model QCPU, the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is used to switch between the RUN
status and STOP status and to perform RESET operation.
When using the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to reset the CPU module, setting the RUN/STOP/RESET switch to the
reset position will not reset it immediately.
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch in the RESET position until reset processing is complete (the flashing ERR. LED turns
off).
If you release your hand from the RUN/STOP/RESET switch during reset processing (the ERR. LED is flashing), the switch
will return to the STOP position and reset processing cannot be completed.
Perform reset operation with the RUN/STOP/RESET switch as shown in Figure 4.31.
Start
.......................Reset operation is started using
Hold the RUN/STOP/RESET switch
the RUN/STOP/RESET switch.
in the "RESET" position.
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET
STOP switch
.......................Reset is accepted and reset
The ERR. LED flickers several times
processing is performed.
(3 to 4 times) rapidly.
MODE
RUN Flickers.
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
.......................Reset is completed.
The "ERR. LED" goes off .
MODE
RUN Goes off.
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
.......................Reset is canceled.
Return the RUN/STOP/RESET
switch to the "STOP" position.
RESET RUN
RUN/STOP/RESET : Releasing your hand from the
STOP switch RUN/STOP/RESET switch returns it
to the STOP position.
Termination , completed , end
Figure 4.31 Reset operation
4 - 54
CHAPTER4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CPU MODULE
1
Operate the RUN/STOP/RESET switch with your fingertips.
To prevent the switch from being damaged, do not use any tool such as screw driver.
2
4.4.4 Latch clear operation
3
For the Universal model QCPU, latch clear is performed by the remote latch clear operation of GX Developer.
Latch clear cannot be executed by operating the switches of the CPU module.
4
● The valid/invalid for latch clear in the clear range of latch clear operation can be set for each device. The setting can be
made in the device setting of the PLC parameter. 5
● For the remote latch clear operation by GX Developer, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Functional Description, Program Fundamentals)
6
4.4.4 Latch clear operation
4.4 Universal Model QCPU
4 - 55
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
This chapter describes the specifications of the power supply modules applicable for the programmable controller
system (The Q Series power supply module, slim type power supply module, redundant power supply module and
AnS/A Series power supply module) and how to select the most suitable module.
5.1 Base Unit that Can Be Used in Combination with Power Supply
Module
This section describes the base unit that can be used in combination with the power supply module respectively.
For details of the CPU modules and base units, refer to the following.
CPU modules : CHAPTER 4
Base units : CHAPTER 6
For details of the system configuration, refer to CHAPTER 2.
Table5.1 Base unit that can be used in combination with power supply module
Base unit
Main base unit Extension base unit
Power
Q33B Q63B
supply Q32SB QA65B
Q35B Q38DB Q52B Q65B QA1S65B
module Q33SB Q38RB Q68RB Q65WRB QA68B
Q38B Q312DB Q55B Q68B QA1S68B
Q35SB *2
Q312B Q612B
Q61P-A1
Q61P-A2
Q61P
Q61P-D
Q62P
Q63P
Q64P
Q64PN
Q61SP
Q63RP *1
Q64RP
A1S61PN
A1S62PN
A1S63P
A61P
A61PN
A62P
A63P
A61PEU
A62PEU
: Combination available : Combination not available
*1: When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose serial number (first six digits) is "081103" or later.
The vibration condition described in the general specifications may not be met if the serial number (first six digits) of the Q64RP is
"081102" or earlier is mounted.
*2: The QA6ADP+A6 B also has the equivalent specifications.
5-1
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
5.2 Specifications
1
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
2
Table5.2 shows the specifications of the power supply modules.
Table5.2 Power supply module specifications
3
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot 4
Applicable base unit Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B
+10% +10% +10%
100 to 120VAC -15% 200 to 240VAC -15% 100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 132VAC) (170 to 264VAC) (85 to 264VAC)
5
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage distortion
factor
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4) 6
Max. input apparent
105VA 120VA 105VA
power
Max. input power ----
7
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5
Rated output
current
5VDC 6A 3A
8
24VDC ---- 0.6A
External output voltage ---- 24VDC 10%
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more 3.3A or more
protection*1
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
24VDC ---- 0.66A or more
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection *2 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure period *3
Dielectric withstand Between input -LG batched and output-FG batched
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000m (6562 feet))
Input and LG batched, output and FG batched, batch input-LG, batch output-FG
Insulation resistance
10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
5-2
Table5.2 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P
Application ERR. contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
No
suppressor
Fuse No
Terminal screw size M3.5 7
Applicable wire size 2
0.75 to 2mm
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
W 55.2mm (2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 90mm (3.55 inches)
Weight 0.31kg 0.40kg 0.39kg
5-3
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.3 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
Q63P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot 2
Applicable base unit Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B
Input power supply
+30%
24VDC -35% 3
(15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency ----
Input voltage distortion
----
4
factor
Max. input apparent
----
power
5
Max. input power 45W
Inrush current 100A within 1ms (at 24VDC input)
Rated output 5VDC 6A 6
current 24VDC ----
External output voltage ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more 7
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection *2 24VDC ---- 8
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary Within 10ms
power failure time *3 (at 24VDC input)
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
Dielectric withstand
Between primary and 5VDC 500VAC
voltage
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
Noise durability By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
5-4
Table5.3 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q63P
Application ERR. contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
No
suppressor
Fuse No
Terminal screw size M3.5 7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
W 55.2mm (2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 90mm (3.55 inches)
Weight 0.33kg
5-5
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.4 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64P Q64PN
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot 2
Applicable base unit Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B
Input power supply
100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC -15%
+10% +10%
100 to 240VAC -15% 3
(85V to 132VAC/170 to 264VAC) (85V to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage distortion 4
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
factor
Max. input apparent
160VA
power 5
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5
Rated 5VDC 8.5A
output current 24VDC ---- 6
Overcurrent 5VDC 9.9A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 7
*2
protection 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary 8
*3
Within 20ms
power failure time
Dielectric withstand Between inputs/LG and outputs/FG
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 feet))
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
Input and LG batched, output and FG batched, batch input-LG, batch output-FG
Insulation resistance
10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
5-6
Table5.4 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64P Q64PN
Application ERR. contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 2
0.75 to 2mm
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
W 55.2mm (2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 115mm (4.53 inches)
Weight 0.40kg 0.47kg
5-7
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.5 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61SP
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot 2
Applicable base unit Q3 SB
Input power supply
100 to 240VAC -15%
+10%
3
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage distortion 4
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
factor
Max. input apparent
40VA
power 5
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5
Rated output 5VDC 2A
current 24VDC ---- 6
Overcurrent 5VDC 2.2A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 7
*2
protection 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary 8
*3
Within 20ms (AC100VAC or more)
power failure time
Dielectric withstand Between inputs/LG and outputs/FG
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 feet))
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
Input and LG batched, output and FG batched, batch input-LG, batch output-FG
Insulation resistance
10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
Fuse None
5-8
Table5.5 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61SP
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 2
0.75 to 2mm
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
W 27.4mm (1.08 inches)
dimensions
D 104mm (4.09 inches)
Weight 0.18kg
5-9
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.6 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
Q63RP
Base unit position Power supply module mounting slot 2
Applicable base unit Q3 RB, Q3 RB, Q6 WRB
Input power supply 24V DC(-35%/+30%) (15.6 to 31.2V DC)
Max. input power 65W
3
Inrush current 150A within 1ms
Rated output
current
5VDC
24VDC
8.5A
----
4
Overcurrent 5VDC 9.35A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
5
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*2 24VDC ----
Efficiency 65% or more
6
Allowable momentary
Within 10ms(at 24V DC input)
power failure period*3
Dielectric withstand
voltage
Between primary and 5VDC 500VAC 7
Insulation resistance 10M or more by insulation resistance tester
Noise durability
By noise simulator of 500Vp-p
noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz
8
noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication*6 (Normal operation: On(green) Error:Off(red)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
Application ERR. contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
Contact output section
voltage, current
Minimum switching
5VDC, 1mA
load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge suppressor None
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 Screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5, RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
W 83mm (3.27 inches)
dimensions
D 115mm (4.53 inches)
Weight 0.60kg
*6: Although the POWER LED momentarily turns on in red immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, the Q64RP is not faulty.
5 - 10
Table5.7 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64RP
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3 RB, Q6 RB, Q6 WRB*8
+10%
100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 132VAC/170 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
factor
Max. input apparent
160VA
power
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5
Rated output 5VDC 8.5A
current 24VDC ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 9.35A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*2 24VDC ----
Efficiency 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure time*3
Dielectric withstand Between inputs/LG and outputs/FG
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 feet))
Input and LG batched, output and FG batched, batch input-LG, batch output-FG
Insulation resistance
10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: ON (green), Error: ON (red)) *7
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
*7: Although the POWER LED momentarily turns on in red immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, the Q64RP is not faulty.
*8: When mounting the Q64RP to the Q65WRB, use the Q64RP whose first 6 digits of serial No. is "081103" or later.
The vibration condition described in the general specifications may not be met if the serial number (first six digits) of the Q64RP is
"081102" or earlier is mounted.
5 - 11
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.7 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
Q64RP
Application ERR. contact ( Section 5.3) 2
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
3
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Life
Mechanical : More than 20 million times 4
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge
None
suppressor
5
Fuse None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm
2 6
Applicable solderless
R1.25-3.5, R2-3.5, RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
7
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
dimensions
W 83mm (3.27 inches) 8
D 115mm (4.53 inches)
Weight 0.47kg
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
5 - 12
Table5.8 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-D
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B
+10%
100 to 240VAC -15%
Input power supply*10
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
factor
Max. input apparent
130VA
power
Max. input power ----
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5
Rated output 5VDC 6A
current 24VDC ----
External output voltage ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 6.6A or more
protection*1 24VDC ----
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection *2 24VDC ----
Efficiency 70% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms
power failure period *3
Dielectric withstand Between input -LG batched and output-FG batched
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000m (6562 feet))
Input and LG batched, output and FG batched, batch input - LG, batch output - FG
Insulation resistance
10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (POWER LED, LIFE LED)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Application ERR. contact, LIFE OUT contact ( Section 5.3)
Rated switching
24VDC, 0.5A
voltage, current
Contact output section
Minimum
5VDC, 1mA
switching load
Response time OFF to ON: 10ms max. ON to OFF: 12ms max.
Mechanical : More than 20 million times
Life
Electrical : More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage, current
Surge suppres-
No
sor
Fuse No
*10: When using the Q61P-D in the system configured with a A/AnS series module, the power supply modules mounted on the main base
unit and extension base unit must be turned on and off simultaneously.
5 - 13
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.8 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
Q61P-D
Terminal screw size M3.5 7 2
Applicable wire size 2
0.75 to 2mm
Applicable solderless
terminal
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5 3
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 98mm (3.86 inches) 4
External
W 55.2mm (2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 90mm (3.55 inches)
Weight 0.45kg 5
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
5 - 14
Table5.9 Power supply module specifications
Performance Specifications
Item
Q00JCPU (Power supply part) Q00UJCPU (Power supply part)
+10%
100 to 120VAC -15%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Input voltage distortion
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
factor
Max. input apparent
105VA
power
Inrush current 40A within 8ms*5
Rated output
5VDC 3A
current
Overcurrent
5VDC 3.3A or more
protection*1
Overvoltage
5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*2
Efficiency 65% or more
Allowable momentary
Within 20ms (100VAC or more)
power failure time*3
Dielectric withstand Between inputs/LG and outputs/FG
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 feet))
Input and LG batched, output and FG batched, batch input-LG, batch output-FG
Insulation resistance
10M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency
Noise durability
• Noise voltage IEC61000-4-4, 2KV
Operation indication LED indication (The POWER LED of the CPU part: Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Contact output section None
Terminal screw size M3.5 7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 - 3.5, RAV2 - 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
External dimensions
Section 4.1
Weight
5 - 15
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.10 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
Mounting position Power supply module mounting slot 2
Applicable base unit QA1S6 B
Input power supply
100 to 240VAC -15%
+10%
24VDC -35%
+30%
3
(85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% ----
Input voltage distortion
---
4
Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
factor
Max. input apparent
105VA ----
power 5
Max. input power ---- 41W
Inrush current 20A within 8ms*5 81A within 1ms
Rated output 5VDC 5A 3A 5A 6
current 24VDC ---- 0.6A ----
Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A or more 3.3A or more 5.5A or more
protection*1 24VDC ---- 0.66A or more ---- 7
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
*2
protection 24VDC ----
Efficiency 65% or more 8
Allowable momentary Within 10ms
Within 20ms
power failure time*3 (at 24VDC input)
Dielectric withstand Between inputs/LG and outputs/FG Between primary and 5VDC
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
voltage 2830VAC rms/3 cycles (2000 m (6562 feet)) 500VAC
Between inputs and outputs (LG and FG separated), between inputs and
5M or more by insulation
Insulation resistance LG/FG, between outputs and FG/LG 10M or more by insulation
resistance tester
resistance tester
• By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 By noise simulator of 500Vp-p noise
Noise durability to 60Hz noise frequency voltage, 1 s noise width and 25 to
• Noise voltage IEC 61000-4-4, 2KV 60Hz noise frequency
Operation indication LED indication (Normal: On (green), Error: Off)
Fuse Built-in (User-unchangeable)
Contact output section None
Terminal screw size M3.5 screw
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless
RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
terminal
Applicable tightening
0.66 to 0.89N•m
torque
H 130mm (5.12 inches)
External
W 55mm (2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 93.6mm (3.69 inches)
Weight 0.60kg 0.50kg
5 - 16
Table5.11 Power supply module specifications
Specifications
Item
A61P A61PN A62P A63P
Slot position Power supply module mounting slot
Applicable base unit QA6 B
+10%
100VAC to 120VAC-15%
(85VAC to 132VAC) 24VDC-35%
+30%
Input power supply
200VAC to 240VAC-15%
+10% (15.6VDC to 31.2VDC)
(170VAC to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5% –
Input voltage distortion Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4) –
Max. input apparent
160VA 155VA 65W
power
Inrush current 20A, 8ms or less*5 100A, 1ms or less
Rated output 5VDC 8A 5A 8A
current 24VDC – 0.8A –
Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 5.5A or more 8.5A or more
*1
protection 24VDC – 1.2A or more –
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*2 24VDC –
Efficiency 65% or more
Dielectric withstand Between AC external terminals and ground, 1500V AC, 1 minute
voltage Between DC external terminals and ground, 500V AC, 1 minute
By noise simulator of
By noise simulator of 1500Vp-p noise voltage, noise width 1 s, and 25 to 60Hz 500Vp-p noise voltage,
Noise durability
noise frequency noise width 1 s, and 25
to 60Hz noise frequency
Insulation resistance Between AC external terminals and ground, 5M or higher by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Power indicator LED indication of power supply
Terminal screw size M4 0.7 6
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless R1.25-4, R2-4
terminal RAV1.25, RAV2-4
Applicable tightening
78 to 118 Ncm
torque
H 250mm(9.84 inches)
External
W 55mm(2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 121mm(4.76 inches)
Weight 0.98 kg 0.75 kg 0.94 kg 0.8 kg
Allowable momentary
20ms or less 1ms or less
power failure time*3
5 - 17
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.12 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance specifications
Item
A61PEU A62PEU
Slot position Power supply module mounting slot 2
Applicable base unit QA6 B
Input power supply 100 to 120/200 to 240VAC +10%/-15%
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
3
Input voltage distortion Within 5% ( Section 5.2.4)
Max. input apparent power 130VA 155VA
4
Inrush current *5
20A, 8ms or less
Rated output 5VDC 8A 5A
current 24VDC – 0.8A 5
Overcurrent 5VDC 8.8A or more 5.5A or more
protection*1 24VDC – 1.2A or more
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V – 6
*2
protection 24VDC –
Efficiency 65% or more
Dielectric withstand
Between 7
primary side 2830V AC rms/3 cycles (altitude 2000m (6562 feet))
voltage
and FG
Noise durability
By noise simulator of noise voltage IEC 801-4, 2KV, 1500Vp-p, 8
noise width 1 s, and noise frequency 25 to 60Hz
Power indicator LED indication of power supply
Terminal screw size M4 0.7 6
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25-4, RAV2-4
Applicable tightening torque 98 to 137N cm
H 250mm(9.84 inches)
External
W 55mm(2.17 inches)
dimensions
D 121mm(4.76 inches)
Weight 0.8 kg 0.9 kg
Allowable momentary power failure
20ms or less
time*3
5 - 18
*1: Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V, 24 VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in the
circuit exceeds the specified value.
The LED of the power supply module turns off or turns on in dim green when voltage is lowered. (As for the redundant
power supply module, the LED turns off or turns on in red.) If this device is activated, switch the input power supply off
and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short. Then, a few minutes later, switch it on to restart
the system.
The initial start for the system takes place when the current value becomes normal.
*2: Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection device shuts off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5.5 VDC is applied to
the circuit.
When this device is activated, the power supply module LED turns off.
If this happens, switch the input power off, then a few minutes later on. This causes the initial start for the system to
take place. The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains off (As for the
redundant power supply module, the LED turns on in red).
*3: Allowable momentary power failure time
(a)For AC input power supply
• If the momentary power failure time is within 20ms, the system detects an AC down and suspends the operation
processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
• If the momentary power failure time exceeds 20ms, the system either continues or initially starts operations
depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued, the system operates the
same as when the momentary power failure time is within 20ms.
Supplying the same amount of AC to both the power supply module and the input module (such as QX10) can
prevent the sensor connected to the input module from being switched to the OFF status when the power supply
turns off.
Note, however, that if only the input module (such as QX10) is connected on the AC line, which is connected to
the power supply, an AC down detection in the power supply module may be delayed due to the internal capacitor
of the input module. To avoid this, connect a load of approx. 30mA per input module on the AC line.
In the system operating with two redundant power supply modules, the system does not initially start operations
when the momentary power failure exceeding 20ms occurs in only one of the input power supplies.
The system, however, may initially start operations when the momentary power failure exceeding 20ms occurs
simultaneously in both input power supplies.
(b)For DC input power supply
• If the momentary power failure time is within 10ms(*4), the system detects an 24VDC down and suspends the
operation processing. However, the system continues operations after the power comes back.
• If the momentary power failure time exceeds 10ms(*4), the system either continues or initially starts operations
depending on the power supply load. In case that the operation processing is continued, the system operates the
same as when the momentary power failure time is within 10ms.
(*4: This is the time when 24VDC is input. If the input is less than 24VDC, the time will be less than 10ms.)
*5: Inrush current
When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than the
specified value (2ms or less) may flow. Reapply power 5 or more seconds after power-off. When selecting a fuse and
breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics and above matters.
5 - 19
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.13 Power supply module specifications 1
Performance Specifications
Item
A68P
Location I/O module slot 2
Number of points occupied 2 slots occupied, 1 slot 16 points
3
+10%
100 to 120V AC-15%
(85 to 132V AC)
Input voltage
+10%
200 to 240V AC-15%
(170 to 264V AC)
4
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5%
Max. input apparent power
Inrush current
95VA
20A, within 8ms
5
Rated output +15VDC 1.2A
current -15VDC 0.7A
6
Overcurrent +15VDC 1.64A or more
protection*8 -15VDC 0.94A or more
Efficiency 65% or more
7
Power indicator Power LED display (Normal: On (green), error: Off)
Contact output
Power ON monitor output
Switched on if +15V DC output is +14.25V or higher or -15V DC output is -14.25V or lower.
8
Min. contact switching load: 5V DC, 10mA
Min. contact switching load: 264V AC (R load)
Terminal screw size M3 0.5(0.02) 6(0.24)
2
5.2.1 Power supply module specifications
5.2 Specifications
Wire size 0.75 to 2mm (18 to 14 AWG)
Soldreless terminal V1.25 - 4, V2 - YS4A, V2 - S4, V2 - YS4A
H 250mm(9.84 inches)
External
W 75.5mm(2.97 inches)
dimensions
D 121mm(4.76 inches)
Weight 0.9kg
*8: The overcurrent protection shuts off the +15VDC circuit if a current higher than the specified value flows in the circuit and:
• Both +15VDC and -15VDC are switched off if overcurrent has occurred at +15V; or
• -15VDC is switched off but +15V remains output if overcurrent has occuerred at -15V; and
• The power supply module LED is switched off or dimly lit due to 15VDC voltage drop.
If this device is activated, turn off the input power supply and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short before
restarting the system.
5 - 20
5.2.2 Selecting the power supply module
The power supply module is selected according to the total of current consumption of the base units, I/O modules,
intelligent function module, special function module, and peripheral devices supplied by its power supply module.
For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the base unit, refer to CHAPTER 6.
For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the I/O modules, intelligent function module, special function module,
and peripheral devices, refer to the Manuals of their respective modules.
For the devices obtained by a user, see the manual for the respective device.
(1) When the base unit is Q3 B, Q3 DB or Q6 B:
Power supply module Base unit Q35B,
Q61P, Q62P, etc. Q65B, etc.
Peripheral devices, converter,
CPU module 1
cables, etc. (for connection
Q02(H)CPU,
between CPU module and
Q06HCPU, etc.
PC)
I/O module QX10,
QY10, etc.
Intelligent function module Q64AD,
QJ71LP21-25, etc.
Figure 5.1 Modules and peripheral device that are powered
by power supply module
*1: The CPU module is mounted on the main base unit.
Keep the current consumption of the base unit (Q3 B, Q3 DB, Q6 B) below the 5VDC rated output current of
the Q series power supply module.
Table5.14 5VD rated output current
5VDC rated output current Type
6.0A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q63P
3.0A Q62P
8.5A Q64P, Q64PN
(a) Precaution on using the extension base unit (Q5 B)
When Q5 B is used, a power of 5VDC is supplied from the power supply module on the main base unit
through an extension cable.
Pay attention to the following to use Q5 B.
• Select a power supply module of a proper 5VDC rated output current to be installed to the main base unit
so that it will cover the current used by Q5 B.
For example, if current consumption is 3.0A on the main base unit and 1.0A on Q5 B, any of the power
supply modules shown in Table5.15 must be mounted on the main base unit.
5 - 21
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.15 5VD rated output current 1
5VDC rated output current Type
6.0A Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q61P-D, Q63P
8.5A Q64P, Q64PN 2
• Because 5VDC is supplied to Q5 B through an extension cable, voltage is lowered in the extension
cable.
The power supply module and extension cable must be selected so that a voltage of 4.75VDC or more is
3
supplied at the "IN" connector of Q5 B.
For details of the voltage drop, refer to Section 6.1.5.
4
(b) Methods for reducing voltage drops
The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables.
1) Changing the module loading positions
5
Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit.
Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit (Q5 B). 6
2) Using short extension cables
The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistance and voltage drops will be.
Use the shortest possible extension cables. 7
(2) When the base unit is Q3 SB:
8
Slim type
Power supply module Slim type main base unit Q32SB,
Q33SB, Q35SB
Q61SP
5.2.2 Selecting the power supply module
5.2 Specifications
CPU module Peripheral devices, converter,
Q02(H)CPU, cables, etc. (for connection
Q06HCPU, etc. between CPU module and
PC)
I/O module QX10,
QY10, etc.
Intelligent function module Q64AD,
QJ71LP21-25, etc.
Figure 5.2 Modules and peripheral device that are powered
by power supply module
Keep the current consumption of the slim type main base unit (Q3 SB) not exceeding the 5VDC rated output
current of the slim type power supply module (Q61SP).
Table5.16 5VD rated output current
5VDC Rated output current Type
2.0A Q61SP
5 - 22
(3) When the base unit is Q3 RB or Q6 RB
Redundant power supply Redundant power supply base unit
module × 2 modules Q3 RB, Q6 RB
Peripheral devices, converter,
CPU module 2
cables, etc. (for connection
Q02(H)CPU,
between CPU module and
Q06HCPU, etc.
PC)
I/O module QX10,
QY10, etc.
Intelligent function module Q64AD,
QJ71LP21-25, etc.
2: Mounted on the redundant main base unit (Q3 RB)
Figure 5.3 Modules and peripheral device that are powered
by power supply module
Table5.17 5VD rated output current
5VDC rated output current Type
Q63RP
8.5A
Q64RP
When a redundant power supply system is configured and one redundant power supply module has failed, the system is
operated using the other redundant power supply module only during replacement of the failed redundant power supply
module.
Therefore, keep the current consumption of the redundant power supply base unit (Q3 RB/Q6 RB/Q6 WRB) within the
5VDC rated output current (8.5A) for one redundant power supply module.
5 - 23
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
(a) Cautions for using the extension base unit (Q5 B) 1
When Q5 B is used, a power of 5VDC is supplied from the redundant power supply module on the redundant
power main base unit (Q3 RB) through an extension cable.
Pay attentions to the following to use Q5 B. 2
• Keep the sum of the current consumption on Q3 RB and Q5 B not exceeding the 5VDC rated output
current for one redundant power supply module. 3
• Because 5VDC is supplied to Q5 B through an extension cable, voltage drop occurs in the extension
cable.
Select an appropriate extension cable so that a voltage of 4.75VDC or more is supplied at the "IN" 4
connector of Q5 B.
For details of the voltage drop, refer to Section 6.1.5.
5
(b) Methods for reducing voltage drops
The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables.
1) Changing the module mounting positions 6
Mount a module with large current consumption on the redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB).
Mount small current consumption modules on the extension base unit (Q5 B).
7
2) Using short extension cables
The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistance and voltage drops are.
Use the shortest possible extension cables. 8
(4) When the base unit is QA1S6 B:
AnS series power supply
5.2.2 Selecting the power supply module
5.2 Specifications
Base unit QA1S65B,
module A1S61PN, A1S62PN,
QA1S68B
A1S63P
I/O module A1SX10,
A1SY10, etc.
peripheral
Special function module devices
A1SD61,A1SD75P1-S3, etc. AD75TU
Figure 5.4 Modules and peripheral device that are powered
by power supply module
Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral devices
connected to the special function module.
For example, when the AD75TU is connected to the AD75P1-S3, the current consumption of the AD75TU must
also be taken into account.
5 - 24
(5) When the base unit is QA6 B:
A series power supply
Base unit QA65B,
module A61P, A61PN, A62P,
QA68B
A63P
I/O module AX10,
AY10, etc.
Peripheral
Special function module device
AD61,AD75P1-S3, etc. AD75TU
Figure 5.5 Modules and peripheral device that are powered
by power supply module
Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral devices
connected to the special function module.
For example, when the AD75TU is connected to the AD75P1-S3, the current consumption of the AD75TU must
also be taken into account.
5 - 25
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
5.2.3 Life detection power supply module
1
The Life detection power supply module estimates its remaining life internally and indicates the life. The remaining life
of the module can be checked by the LIFE LED located on the front of the module and on/off of the LIFE OUT termi-
nals. 2
(1) LED indication and module status during operation
Table5.18 indicates the LED indication and module status during operation.
3
Table5.18 LED indication and module status
LED 4
LIFE OUT terminal Module
POWER LIFE
• Power supply module failure
• AC power is not input 5
Off Off Off
• Power failure (including momentary power
failure for 20ms or more)
On (green) On (green) • Normal operation 6
On • Normal operation (Remaining life approx.
On (green) On (orange)
50%)*1
Flash (orange) • Normal operation (Remaining life approx. 1 7
On (green) (On for 5 sec. and off for year)*1
1 sec.) Replacement of the module is recommended
Flash (orange) Off
• Normal operation (Remaining life approx. 6 8
On (green) (At intervals of half a *1
months)
sec.)
On (green) Off • Life expired
• Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambi-
5.2.3 Life detection power supply module
5.2 Specifications
On (green) On (red) ent temperature is exceeding the specifica-
tion)
• Function failure (Normal processing is not
Flash (red)(At intervals of Turns off and on three
On (green) available due to a failure of the life diagnos-
1 sec.) times at intervals of 1
tics circuit in the module)
second and then off
• Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambi-
ent temperature is exceeding the specifica-
On (green) Off
tion and also the life detection function has
stopped.)
On (orange) Off Off • Watchdog timer error in the module
*1: The remaining life of the module varies depending on the ambient temperature.
(If the ambient temperature rose by 10 , the remaining life of the module will be shortened by half.)
(2) Monitoring module life by using the LIFE OUT terminal
The module life can be monitored in either of the following way by using outputs of the LIFE OUT terminal
• Connecting the terminal to an external display device
• Obtaining the output status into an input module and monitoring it by GOT
5 - 26
(a) Connecting the terminal to an external display device
Connecting the LIFE OUT terminal allows indication of the remaining life of the module to an external display,
device such as external LED, by turning it off when the life is one year or less.
When the external display device turned off, the remaining life can be checked by the LIFE LED of the Q61P-D
located in the control panel.
The LIFE LED turns on in orange
Remaining life is 1 year or less
External LED Control panel
LIFE OUT terminal
Figure 5.6 When connecting to an external display device
(b) Obtaining the output status into an input module and monitoring it by GOT
Obtaining the LIFE OUT terminal status into an input module allows monitoring of the module remaining life in
a sequence program.
The following indicates how to monitor the remaining life of the power supply module in the sequence program
by using GOT.
1) System configuration
GOT
Q61P-D
Figure 5.7 When obtaining into an input module
Table5.19 I/O assignment
Model name Start XY
Q02CHPU -
QX40 0000H
5 - 27
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
2) Conditions of a program
Table5.20 and Table5.21 indicate devices used in a program for monitoring the module life.
1
Table5.20 Devices used by user 2
Sinal Device Function
Monitoring clear command X0F Resets the life monitoring processing
Turns on when the remaining life of the 3
Life warning signal M11
Q61P-D is one year or less
Turns on when the life detection
Error signal M12
function of the Q61P-D is faulty 4
Table5.21 Devices used by program 5
Signal Device Function
LIFE OUT terminal status of the Q61P-
LIFE OUT signal X00
D 6
An internal signal for resetting the life
Monitoring clear request M0
monitoring processing
Monitoring start flag M1
An internal signal for detecting offs of 7
the LIFE OUT terminal
An internal signal for counting ons and
Time monitoring flag M2
offs of the LIFE OUT terminal
8
Ons and offs of the LIFE OUT terminal
ON/OFF monitoring timer T0 are counted while this timer is enabled
(6 seconds)
Counts ons and offs of the LIFE OUT
5.2.3 Life detection power supply module
5.2 Specifications
ON/OFF counter D100
terminal
When the life detection function of the Q61P-D is faulty, the LIFE OUT terminal repeats on and off for three times when the
module is started.
Depending on the system, this behavior (ons and offs) of the LIFE OUT terminal may not be obtained to the input module
due to delay of the sequence program start after the Q61P-D has started.
In this program example, M11 turns on even though the life detection function is faulty when powered on since the remaining
life is regarded as one year.
5 - 28
3) Program example
Monitoring for 6 seconds
The life is 1 year or less
if remains off
Monitoring continues
if turned on
Faulty if repeats off and on
5 - 29
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
5.2.4 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply
1
Be sure of the following terms when connecting the Q series CPU module system to the uninterruptive power supply
(hereinafter referred to as UPS):
2
Use the online UPS or line interactive UPS with a voltage distortion rate of 5% or less.
For the off-line system UPS, use Mitsubishi Electric's F Series UPS (serial number P or later) (Ex.: FW-F10-0.3K/
0.5K). 3
Do not use any off-line system UPS other than the F series mentioned above.
5.2.5 Precautions on power supply capacity 4
The Q64RP and Q64P automatically recognize the rated input voltage waveform to switch the input voltage between
100VAC and 200VAC. 5
Select the power supply for the Q64RP/Q64P power supply module, considering the power supply capacity.
(Reference: At least twice as much as the current consumption)
If the power supply of insufficient capacity is applied, the power supply module might fail when 200VAC power is 6
supplied.
5.2.4 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply
5.2 Specifications
5 - 30
5.3 Part Names and Settings
This section describs part names of each power supply module.
Q61P-A1 (100 to 120VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q61P-A2 (200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q61P (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q62P (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 3A/24VDC 0.6A output)
Q63P (24VDC input, 5VDC 6A output)
Q64P (100 to 120VAC/200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 8.5A output)
Q64PN (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 8.5A output)
11) 1), 2)
10) 10)
8) 4) 4)
(Q62P
6) 6)
only)
7) 7)
13), 14), 16)
15), 17)
12) 9) 9)
Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P, Q62P, Q64P, Q64PN Q63P
Q61P-D (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC 6A output) Q61SP (100 to 240VAC input, 5VDC2A output)
3)
11) 1) 11)
Q61SP
INPUT Q61SP
100-240VAC
10)
4)
4)
5)
6)
6)
7)
7)
15)
15)
MITSUBISHI
12)
12) 9)
Figure 5.8 Power supply module
5 - 31
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Table5.22 Part Names 1
No. Name Application
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
Off: • AC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order. 2
1) POWER LED*2 (5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or blown fuse)
• AC power supply is not on.
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 20ms or more)
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 10ms)
3
Off: • DC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
2) POWER LED (5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or blown fuse)
• DC power supply is not on. 4
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 10ms or more)
On (green) : When operation has started
On (orange) : Remaining life of the module approx. 50% 5
Flash(orange) : • On for 5 seconds and off for 1 second:
Module remaining life is approx. 1 year
• At intervals of 0.5 seconds:
3) LIFE LED
Module remaining life is approx. 6 months 6
Off: • Module life expired. (Turns on red for 1 second after power-on)
• Ambient temperature is out of range (Ambient temperature of the module is
exceeding the specification and also the life detection function is stopped.)
On (red) : Ambient temperature out of range (Ambient temperature of the module is
7
exceeding the specification)
Flash(red) : Function failure
• Turns on when the entire system operates normally. 8
• Turns off (opens) when the AC power is not supplied, a stop error (including reset)
occurs in the CPU module, or the fuse is blown.
4) ERR. terminal
• In a multiple CPU system, turns off when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU
modules.
5.3 Part Names and Settings
Normally off when mounted on a extension base unit.
• Output signal of the terminal turns off (opens) when the life is detected. (Applica-
ble only when the remaining life is 1 year or less.)
• Flicker-OFF (opens) when the life diagnostics error (including detection error)is
detected.*1
5) LIFE OUT terminal • Flicker-OFF (opens) when the ambient temperature is detected out of range.*1
• Output signal of the terminal turns off (opens) when the watchdog timer error is
detected in the module.
The above operations are available when the module is mounted on an extension
base unit.
6) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. For AC input, it has one-half the potential of
7) LG terminal
the input voltage.
Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module
8) +24V, 24G terminals
(using external wiring).
9) Terminal screw M3.5 7 screw
10) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Used to secure the module to the base unit.
11) Module fixing screw hole
M3 12 screw (user-prepared) (Tightening torque range : 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
12) Module mounting lever Used to mount the module onto the base unit.
*1: Flicker-OFF indicates that the output signal of the terminal turns off and on at intervals of one second for three times and then off
(opens).
*2: When using the Q61P-D in the system configured with an extension base unit, the POWER LED of the Q61P-D on the extension base
unit may turn on in dull red when the module is turned off. Note that this does not indicate an error.
5 - 32
Table5.22 Part Names
No. Name Application
13) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q61P-A1 and connected to a 100VAC power supply.
14) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q61P-A2 and connected to a 200VAC power supply.
Power input terminals for Q61P, Q61P-D, Q61SP, Q62P, Q64PN and connected to a
15) Power input terminals
power supply of 100VAC to 200VAC.
16) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q63P and connected to a 24VDC power supply.
17) Power input terminals Power input terminals for Q64P and connected to a 100VAC/200VAC power supply.
● The Q61P-A1 is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 100 VAC.
Do not input a voltage of 200 VAC into it or trouble may occur on the Q61P-A1.
Table5.23 Precaution
Supply power voltage
Power module type
100VAC 200VAC
Q61P-A1 Operates normally. Power supply module causes trouble.
Power supply module does not cause trouble.
Q61P-A2 Operates normally.
CPU module cannot be operated.
● Q64P automatically switches the input range 100/200VAC.
Therefore, it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC).
The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied.
● Ground the LG and FG terminals to the protective ground conductor.
● When the Q61P-A1, Q61P-A2, Q61P-D, Q61P, Q62P, Q63P, Q64P or Q64PN is mounted on the extension base unit, a
system error cannot be detected by the ERR. terminal. (The ERR. terminal is always off.)
● Cables for the ERR. contact and LIFE OUT contact must be up to 30m (98.43 feet) and installed in the control panel.
5 - 33
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
Q64RP
1
Q63RP
10) 1) 10) 2) 2
INPUT 9) 9) 3
24VDC
MAX 65W
OUTPUT 5VDC 8.5A
4
ERR.
L
3) 3)
24VDC 0.5A
(FG) 4) 4)
(LG) 5) 5)
+24V
INPUT 24VDC 6) 7) 5
24G
Q63RP
11) 11)
8) 8)
6
Figure 5.9 Power supply module
Table5.24 Part Names
7
No. Name Application
On (green) : Normal operation (5V DC output, momentary power failure of 20ms or
less) 8
On (red)*1 : DC power is input but the Q63RP is faulty. (5V DC error, overload, or
1) POWER LED*1
internal circuit failure)
Off : DC power not input, blown fuse, power failure (including momentary
power failure of 10ms or more)
5.3 Part Names and Settings
On (green) : Normal (5V DC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
On (red) : AC power supply is on but Q64RP is out of order.
2) POWER LED *1 (5V DC error, overload, or internal circuit failure)
Off : AC power supply is not on, blown fuse, power failure (including
momentary power failure of 10ms or more)
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power main base unit (Q3 RB)>
• Turns on when the system on the redundant power main base unit operates
normally.
• Turns off (open) when the Q63RP fails, the DC power supply is not input, a CPU
module stop error (including a reset) occurs, or the fuse is blown.
• Turns off (open) when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU modules in a multiple
3) ERR. terminal
CPU system.
<When power supply is mounted on redundant power extension base unit (Q6 RB) or
redundant type extension base unit (Q6 WRB)>
• Turns on when the Q63RP operates normally.
• Turns off (open) when the Q63RP fails, the DC power supply is not input, or the
fuse is blown.
4) FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of Q64RP terminal is 1/2 of the input
5) LG terminal
voltage.
6) Power input terminals Connect direct current of 24 VDC with the power input terminal.
7) Power input terminals Power input terminals and connected to a 100VAC/200VAC power supply.
8) Terminal screw M3.5 7 screw
5 - 34
No. Name Application
9) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Screw hole for securing a module to the base unit.
10) Module fixing screw hole
M3 12 screw (user-prepared) (Tightening torque : 0.36 to 0.48N•m)
11) Module mounting lever Used to mount a module on the base unit.
*1: Although the POWER LED turns on in red for a moment immediately after the power supply is turned on or off, redundant power supply
modules is not faulty.
● Q64RP automatically switches the input range 100/200VAC.
Therefore, it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage (133 to 169VAC).
The CPU module may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied.
● Supply power to redundant power supply modules from separate power sources (a redundant power supply system).
● Ground the LG and FG terminals to the protective ground conductor.
5 - 35
CHAPTER5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
1
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
9) 9) 9)
2
1) 1) 1)
3
8) 8) 8)
6
3) 4) 5) 7) 2) 3) 4) 5) 7) 3) 4) 6) 7)
Figure 5.10 Power supply module
7
Table5.25 Part names
No. Name Application 8
On (green): Normal (5VDC output, momentary power failure within 20ms)
Off : • AC power supply is on but the power supply module is out of order.
1) POWER LED (5VDC error, overload, internal circuit failure, or fuse blown)
5.3 Part Names and Settings
• AC power supply is not on
• Power failure (including an momentary power failure of 20ms or more)
2) +24V, 24G terminals Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module (using external wiring).
3) FG terminals Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN terminal is 1/2 of
4) LG terminals
the input voltage.
5) Power input terminals Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply.
6) Power input terminals Used to connect a 24VDC power supply.
7) Terminal screw M3.5 7 screw
8) Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block
Used to secure the module to the base unit.
9) Module fixing screw hole
(M4 screw, tightening torque : 0.66 to 0.89N•m)
● Do not wire to those terminals for which NC is stamped on the terminal block.
● Ground the LG and FG terminals to the protective ground conductor.
5 - 36
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
This chapter describes the specifications of the extension cables for the base units (the main base unit, slim type main
base unit, redundant power main base unit, extension base unit, redundant power extension base unit and redundant
type extension base unit) used in the programmable controller system and the specification standards of the extension
base unit.
6.1 Base Unit
6.1.1 Extension base units that can be combined with the main base unit
This section introduces extension base units that can be combined with the main base unit.
For details of the CPU module and power supply modules, refer to the following.
CPU module : CHAPTER 4
Power supply modules : CHAPTER 5
For the details of system configuration, refer to CHAPTER 2.
Table6.1 Extension base unit that can be combined with the main base unit
Extension base unit
Q63B
Main base
Q52B Q65B QA1S65B QA65B
unit Q68RB Q65WRB*1
Q55B Q68B QA1S68B QA68B*2
Q612B
Q00JCPU
Q00UJCPU
Q33B
Q35B
Q38B
Q312B
Q32SB
Q33SB
Q35SB
Q38RB
Q38DB
Q312DB
: Combination available : Combination not available
*1: Applicable only in a redundant system.
*2: The same specifications are applied to the QA6ADP+A6 B.
Slim type main base units do not have a connector for extension cable. Therefore, connection of extension base units and
GOT by bus is not available.
6-1
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
6.1.2 Specification table
1
The base unit is a unit to which the CPU module, power supply module, I/O module and/or intelligent function module
are installed.
Section 6.1.2 to Section 6.1.5 provide the specifications and other information on the base unit. 2
(1) Main base unit
3
Table6.2 Main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B 4
Number of I/O modules
3 5 8 12
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable 5
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.11A 0.12A 0.13A
consumption 6
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 189mm (7.44 inches) 245mm (9.65 inches) 328mm (12.92 inches) 439mm (17.28 inches) 7
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches)
Weight 0.21kg 0.27kg 0.36kg 0.47kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 4 pieces*1 (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately) 8
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1
type
*1: The 5 base mounting screws are included with the Q38B and Q312B that have 5 base mounting holes.
6.1.2 Specification table
6.1 Base Unit
(2) Slim type main base unit
Table6.3 Slim type main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB
Number of I/O modules
2 3 5
installed
Possibility of extension Not extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.09A 0.10A
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 114mm (4.49 inches) 142mm (5.59 inches) 197.5mm (7.78 inches)
D 18.5mm (0.73 inches)
Weight 0.12kg 0.15kg 0.21kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 12 4 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN3
type
6-2
(3) Redundant power main base unit
Table6.4 Redundant power main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q38RB
Number of I/O modules
8
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.12A
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 439mm (17.28 inches)
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches)
Weight 0.47kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN1
type
(4) Multiple CPU high speed main base unit
Table6.5 Multiple CPU high speed main base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q38DB Q312DB
Number of I/O modules
8 12
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.23A 0.24A
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External
W 328mm (12.92 inches) 439mm(17.30 inches)
dimensions
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches)
Weight 0.41kg 0.54kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14, 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting
Q6DIN1
adapter type
6-3
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
(5) Extension base unit (Type not requiring power supply module) 1
Table6.6 Extension base unit (Type not requiring power supply module) specifications
Type 2
Item
Q52B Q55B
Number of I/O modules
installed
2 5
3
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.08A 0.10A
4
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches) 5
External
W 106mm (4.17 inches) 189mm (7.44 inches)
dimensions
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches)
Weight 0.14kg 0.23kg 6
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14, 4 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting
adapter type
Q6DIN3
7
(6) Extension base unit (Type requiring power supply module)
8
Table6.7 Extension base unit (Type requiring power supply module) specifications
Type
Item
Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B QA65B QA68B
6.1.2 Specification table
6.1 Base Unit
Number of I/O
3 5 8 12 5 8 5 8
modules installed
Possibility of
Extendable
extension
Applicable module Q series modules AnS series modules A series module
5 VDC internal current
0.11A 0.12A 0.13A 0.12A
consumption
M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole M5 screw hole or 5.5 hole
Mounting hole size
(for M4 screw) (for M5 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches) 130mm (5.12 inches) 250mm (9.84 inches)
189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm 315mm 420mm 352mm 466mm
External
W (7.44 (9.65 (12.92 (17.28 (12.41 (16.55 (13.86 (18.34
dimensions
inches) inches) inches) inches) inches) inches) inches) inches)
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches) 51.2mm (2.02 inches) 46.6mm (1.83 inches)
Weight 0.23kg 0.28kg 0.38kg 0.48kg 0.75kg 1.00kg 1.60kg 2.00kg
2 Mounting screw M5 25
Mounting screw M4 14 , 4 pieces *
Attachment ----
(DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately) 4 pieces
DIN rail mounting
Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 ---- ---- ---- ----
adapter type
*2: The 5 base mounting screws are included with the Q68B and Q612B that have 5 base mounting holes.
6-4
(7) Redundant power extension base unit
Table6.8 Redundant power extension base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q68RB
Number of I/O modules
8
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.12A
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 439mm (17.28 inches)
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches)
Weight 0.49kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 , 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN1
type
(8) Redundant extension base unit
Table6.9 Redundant extension base unit specifications
Type
Item
Q65WRB
Number of I/O modules
5
installed
Possibility of extension Extendable
Applicable module Q series modules
5 VDC internal current
0.16A
consumption
Mounting hole size M4 screw hole or 4.5 hole (for M4 screw)
H 98mm (3.86 inches)
External dimensions W 439mm (17.28 inches)
D 44.1mm (1.74 inches)
Weight 0.52kg
Attachment Mounting screw M4 14 , 5 pieces (DIN rail mounting adapter is sold separately)
DIN rail mounting adapter
Q6DIN1
type
6-5
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
6.1.3 Part names
1
The part names of the base unit are described below.
(1) Main base unit (Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B)
2
5) 4) 3
1) OUT
5V
SG
4
2) POWER
FG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 IO5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
3) 6)
6
Figure 6.1 Main base unit (Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B)
Table6.10 Part names
No. Name Application
7
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the extension
1) Extension cable connector
base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is connected, the
8
2) Base cover area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" on the base cover
must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules, and
6.1.3 Part names
6.1 Base Unit
intelligent function module.
3) Module connector
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, attach the
supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
6-6
(2) Slim type main base unit (Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB)
3) 2)
SG
4) 1)
Figure 6.2 Slim type main base unit (Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB)
Table6.11 Part names
No. Name Application
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules, and
intelligent function module.
1) Module connector
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, attach the
supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
2) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
3) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
4) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
6-7
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
(3) Redundant power main base unit (Q38RB) 1
5) 4) 2
1) OUT
5V
SG
5V
SG
3
2) CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
3) 6)
Figure 6.3 Redundant power main base unit (Q38RB)
5
Table6.12 Part names
No. Name Application 6
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the extension
1) Extension cable connector
base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is connected, the 7
2) Base cover area surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" must be removed with a tool such as a
flat head screwdriver.
Connector for connecting a redundant power supply module, CPU module, I/O module and 8
intelligent function module
3) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
6.1.3 Part names
6.1 Base Unit
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
6-8
(4) Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q38DB, Q312DB)
5) 4)
1) OUT
5V
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
2) FG
3) 6)
Figure 6.4 Multiple CPU high speed main base unit (Q38DB, Q312DB)
Table6.13 Part names
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the extension
1) Extension cable connector
base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector. Before an extension cable is connected, the
2) Base cover area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word "OUT" on the base cover
must be removed with a tool such as nippers.
Connector for installing the Q series power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules, and
intelligent function module.
3) Module connector
To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, attach the
supplied connector cover or the blank cover module (QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel such as a control panel (for M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter
6-9
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
(5) Extension base unit (Q5 B, Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B) 1
Q52B,Q55B 2
5)
6)
IN OUT
3)
3
2)
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
1)
4
7) 4)
Q63B,Q65B,Q68B,Q612B
5)
5
6)
IN OUT
3)
2)
5V
SG
6
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
1)
7
4) 7)
QA1S65B,QA1S68B
5) 8
6)
3) IN OUT
5V
2)
6.1.3 Part names
6.1 Base Unit
SG
FG
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
1)
4)
QA65B, QA68B
3) 8) 5) 4)
6)
1)
QA68B
2)
8) 5)
Figure 6.5 Extension base unit (Q5 B, Q6 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B)
6 - 10
Table6.14 Part names
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the main base
1) Extension cable connector
unit or other extension base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
2) Base cover Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must be
removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
Connector for setting the number of bases of the extension base unit.
3) Base No. setting connector
( Section 6.1.4)
Connectors for installing the power supply module, I/O modules, and intelligent function mod-
ule/ special function module.
To those connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed, apply
4) Module connector the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module to prevent entry of dirt.
Blank cover module applicable to Q52B, Q55B, Q63B,Q65B, Q68B and Q612B: QG60
Blank cover module applicable to QA1S65B and QA1S68B: A1SG60
Blank cover module applicable to QA6BB and QA68B:AG60
Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit.
5) Module fixing screw hole Q52B, Q55B, Q63B,Q65B,Q68B and Q612B.................................Screw size: M3 12
QA1S6B, QA1S68B, QA65B and QA68B.......................................Screw size: M4 12
Hole for mounting this base unit on the panel such as a control panel.
6) Base mounting hole Q52B, Q55B, Q65B,Q68B and Q612B ...........................................For M4 screw
QA1S6B, QA1S68B, QA65B and QA68B.......................................For M5 screw
7) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
8) Module fixing hole Cut out to accept projection and hook at rear of modules.
6 - 11
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
(6) Redundant power extension base unit (Q68RB) 1
6) 5)
2
IN OUT
3)
5V 5V
2) SG SG
3
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
1)
4
4) 7)
Figure 6.6 Redundant power extension base unit (Q68RB) 5
Table6.15 Part names
No. Name Application
6
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the redundant
1) Extension cable connector
power main base unit or other extension base unit)
2) Base cover
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must be
7
removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
Connector for setting the number of bases of redundant power extension base units.
3) Base No. setting connector
( Section 6.1.4)
8
Connector for installing a redundant power supply module, I/O module and intelligent function
module.
4) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
6.1.3 Part names
6.1 Base Unit
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
5) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
6) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit on the control panel. (For M4 screw)
7) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
6 - 12
(7) Redundant extension base unit (Q65WRB)
5) 2) 4)
IN1 IN2 OUT
5V 5V
SG SG
POWER 1 POWER 2 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
1)
3) 6)
Figure 6.7 Redundant extension base unit (Q65WRB)
Table6.16 Part names
No. Name Application
Connector for connecting an extension cable (for signal communications with the redundant
1) Extension cable connector
system of the main base unit)
Protective cover of extension cable connector.
2) Base cover Before connecting an extension cable, the part under OUT on the base cover must be
removed with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver.
Connector for installing a redundant power supply module, I/O module and intelligent function
module.
3) Module connector
To the connectors unused, attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module
(QG60) to prevent entry of dirt.
4) Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit. Screw size: M3 12
5) Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit on the control panel. (For M4 screw)
6) DIN rail adapter mounting hole DIN rail adapter mounting hole.
6 - 13
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
6.1.4 Setting extension bases
1
The base number setting method of each extension base unit to be used is described below.
Stage No. setting
1
2
3
5
4
connector 5
6
7
7
Figure 6.8 Connector
Table6.17 Setting of base number for extension base units 8
Number setting for extension bases
Extensi Extensi Extensi Extensi Extensi Extensi Extensi
on 1 on 2 on 3 on 4 on 5 on 6 on 7
6.1.4 Setting extension bases
6.1 Base Unit
CPU module
Q02(H)CPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU,
Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Setting available
Q06UD(E)HCPU, Q10UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q26UD(E)HCPU
Setting
not
Q12PRHCPU*2, Q25PRHCPU*2 Setting available*4
available
*3
Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU Setting available Setting prohibited *1
Q00CPU, Q00UCPU, Q01CPU,
Setting available Setting prohibited *1
Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU
6 - 14
*1: If these base numbers are set, "BASE LAY ERROR" (error code: 2010) occurs.
*2: The extension base unit can be connected only when the serial number (first five digits) of the Redundant CPU is "09012"
or later and the redundant system is configured.
The extension base unit cannot be connected when the serial number (first five digits) of the Redundant CPU module is
"09011" or earlier.
*3: Connect the Q6 WRB to the first extension base. Since the Q6 WRB is fixed to the first extension base, base number
setting is not required.
*4: The Q6 WRB cannot be connected to the second extension base or later bases. Use the Q6 RB for the second
extension base or later bases.
● For the base number setting connector, set the number matched with the extension base number.
Do not set the same base number at two or more positions or do not fail to set a number. A miss-input or miss-output
may occur.
● In case of using the QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B, set the same base number to both the base number setting connector of
the A5 B/A6 B and that of the QA6ADP.
6 - 15
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
6.1.5 Guideline for extension base units
1
Since the extension base unit (Q5 B) is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module on the main base unit, a
voltage drop occurs at extension cables.
Improper I/O may be provided if the specified voltage (4.75VDC or higher) is not supplied to the "IN" connector of the
2
Q5 B.
When using the Q5 B, make sure that the "IN" connector of the Q5 B is supplied with 4.75VDC or higher.
3
And it is recommend to connect it with the shortest possible extension cable right after connecting the main base unit,
so as to minimize the effects of voltage drop.
4
(1) When only the Q5 B is connected to the extension base unit
(a) Selection condition
5
4.75VDC or higher should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B in the final extension base.
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4.90VDC.
6
Therefore, the Q5 B can be used if the voltage drop is 0.15VDC or lower (4.9VDC - 4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Table6.18 Extension cable conductor resistance 7
Extension cable conductor
Extension cable type
resistance
Main base unit QC05B 0.044 8
Power QC06B 0.051
supply
module QC12B 0.082
QC30B 0.172
6.1.5 Guideline for extension base units
6.1 Base Unit
V1 R1 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
QC50B 0.273
Extension QC100B 0.530
I1 stage 1
V2 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
R2
Extension
I2 stage 2
V7 R7 Extension base unit (Q5 B)
Extension
I7 stage 7
Figure 6.9 System configuration
6 - 16
Table6.19 Symbol
Symbol Description
V1 Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
Voltage drop at the extension cable between the extension base unit (Q5 B) (extension base n-1) and extension base unit
Vn
(Q5 B) (extension base n)
R1 Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q5 B) (extension base n-1) and extension base unit (Q5 B)
Rn
(extension base n)
l1 to l7 5VDC current consumption among extension base 1 to 7 *1
*1: Sum total of current consumed by Q5 B and currents consumed by the I/O, intelligent function modules loaded on the Q5 B.
The symbols including "I" (I1 to I7) vary with the modules loaded on the Q5 B. For details of the symbol, refer to the User's manuals of
the module used.
Table6.20 List for calculating voltage drops occurring at extension cables in system consisting of extensions 1 to 7
Voltage drop at extension cable on corresponding extension unit Sum total of
Q5 B
voltage drops to
Installation
V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 "IN" connector
position
of Q5 B (V)
Extension 1 R1•I1 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- V=V1
Extension 2 R1 (I1+I2) R2•I2 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- V= V1+V2
R1
Extension 3 R2 (I2+I3) R3•I3 ---- ---- ---- ---- V=V1+V2+V3
(I1+I2+I3)
R1
R2
Extension 4 (I1+I2+I3+ R3 (I3+I4) R4•I4 ---- ---- ---- V=V1+V2+V3+V4
(I2+I3+I4)
I4)
R1 R2
R3 V=V1+V2+V3+V4+
Extension 5 (I1+I2+I3+ (I2+I3+I4+ R4 (I4+I5) R5•I5 ---- ----
(I3+I4+I5) V5
I4+I5) I5)
R1 R2 R3
R4 V=V1+V2+V3+V4+
Extension 6 (I1+I2+I3+ (I2+I3+I4+ (I3+I4+I5+ R5 (I5+I6) R6•I6 ----
(I4+I5+I6) V5+V6
I4+I5+I6) I5+I6) I6)
R1
R2 R3 R4
(I1+I2+I3+ R5 V=V1+V2+V3+V4+
Extension 7 (I2+I3+I4+ (I3+I4+I5+ (I4+I5+I6+ R6 (I6+I7) R7•I7
I4+I5+I6+ (I5+I6+I7) V5+V6+V7
I5+I6+I7) I6+I7) I7)
I7)
The voltage supplied to "IN" connector of the Q5 B in the final extension reaches 4.75 VDC or higher on the condition
that the sum total of voltage drop to "IN" connector of Q5 B (V) is 0.15V or lower.
6 - 17
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
(2) When the Q6 B is connected between the main base unit and the Q5 B 1
(a) Selection condition
4.75VDC or higher should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B in the final extension. 2
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4.90VDC. 3
Therefore, the Q5 B can be used if the voltage drop is 0.15VDC or lower (4.9VDC -4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Table6.21 Extension cable conductor resistance
4
Extension cable conductor
[When the Q5 B is connected to Extension 2.] Extension cable type
resistance
Main base unit QC05B 0.044 5
Power QC06B 0.051
supply
module QC12B 0.082
Extension base unit (Q6 B)
QC30B 0.172
6
R1
Power
QC50B 0.273
supply Extension
QC100B 0.530
V module stage 1
7
Extension base unit (Q5 B)
R2
Extension
I1 stage 2 8
Figure 6.10 System configuration
Table6.22 Symbol
6.1.5 Guideline for extension base units
6.1 Base Unit
Symbol Description
V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
5VDC current consumption when the extension base unit (Q5 B) is used as Extension n+1, n = 1 to 6, n: Extension number of
extension base unit (Q6 B) connected
In
(Sum total of current consumed by Q5 B and currents consumed by the I/O, intelligent function modules loaded on the
Q5 B.)
Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and the extension base unit (Q6 B) or the extension base unit
Rn
(Q6 B) and the extension base unit (Q6 B)
Rn+1 Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q6 B) and extension base unit (Q5 B)
6 - 18
Table6.23 List for calculating voltage drops occurring at extension cables
when connecting Q6 B between main base unit and Q5 B
Position of extension base unit Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the main
Q6 B Q5 B base unit to the Q5 B IN connector (V)
Extension1 Extension 2 V=(R1+R2)I1
Extension 1, Extension 2 Extension 3 V=(R1+R2+R3)I2
Extension 1 to 3 Extension 4 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)I3
Extension 1 to 4 Extension 5 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)I4
Extension 1 to 5 Extension 6 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)I5
Extension 1 to 6 Extension 7 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6+R7)I6
The voltage supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B reaches 4.75 VDC or later on the condition that the voltage
drop (V) at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5 B is 0.15 VDC or lower.
(3) When the GOT is bus-connected
(a) Selection condition
4.75VDC or later should be supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B.
(b) How to calculate voltage to "IN" connector
The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4.90VDC.
Therefore, the Q5 B can be used if the voltage drop is 0.15VDC or lower (4.9VDC -4.75VDC = 0.15VDC).
Table6.24 Extension cable conductor resistance
Extension cable conductor
Extension cable type
resistance
[When the Q5 B is connected to Extension stage 2.] QC05B 0.044
Main base unit QC06B 0.051
Power
supply
QC12B 0.082
module
QC30B 0.172
Extension base unit (Q6 B) QC50B 0.273
R1 Power QC100B 0.530
supply Extension
V module stage 1
Extension base unit (Q5 B)
R2
Extension
I1 stage 2
GOT GOT
Extension
stage 3
Im
Number of GOTs connected : Max. 5units
Figure 6.11 System configuration
6 - 19
CHAPTER6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
Table6.25 Symbol 1
Symbol Description
V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q5 B)
5VDC current consumption when the extension base unit (Q5 B) is used as Extension n+1, n = 1 to 5, n: Extension number of
2
In the extension base unit (Q6 B) connected
(Sum total of current consumed by Q5 B and currents consumed by I/O, intelligent function modules loaded on the Q5 B)
5VDC current consumption of the GOT (current consumption per GOT is 255mA)
3
Im
• Im = 255 c (c: Number of GOTs connected (c: 1 to 5))
Rn
Extension cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit (Q6
and extension base unit (Q6 B)
B) or the extension base unit (Q6 B)
4
Rn+1 Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit (Q6 B) and extension base unit (Q5 B)
Table6.26 List of calculated voltage drop caused by the extension in bus connection of GOT
5
Position of extension base unit Number of bases
Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the
Q6 B Q5 B
for GOT bus
main base unit to the Q5 B IN connector (V) 6
connection
Extension 1 Extension 2 Extension 3 V=(R1+R2)(I1+Im)
Extension 1, Extension 2 Extension 3 Extension 4 V=(R1+R2+R3)(I2+Im)
7
Extension 1 to 3 Extension 4 Extension 5 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4)(I3+Im)
Extension 1 to 4 Extension 5 Extension 6 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5)(I4+Im)
Extension 1 to 5 Extension 6 Extension 7 V=(R1+R2+R3+R4+R5+R6)(I5+Im)
8
The voltage supplied to the "IN" connector of the Q5 B reaches 4.75 VDC or later on the condition that the
voltage drop (V) at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5 B is 0.15 VDC or lower.
6.1.5 Guideline for extension base units
6.1 Base Unit
When connecting GOT by extension cable that is 13.2 m (43.31ft) or longer, the bus extension connector box A9GT-QCNB
is required.
Since the A9GT-QCNB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module loaded on the main base unit, 30mA must be
added to "Im" as the current consumption of the A9GT-QCNB.
For details of the method for GOT bus connection, refer to the following.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
6 - 20
6.2 Extension Cable
The extension cables are connected to transfer signals between a main base unit and an extension base unit or
between extension base units.
For specifications of the extension cables, refer to Section 6.2.1.
6.2.1 Specification table
Table6.27 Extension cable specifications
Type
Item
QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B
Cable length 0.45m 0.6m 1.2m 3.0m 5.0m 10.0m
Conductor resistance value 0.044 0.051 0.082 0.172 0.273 0.530
Weight 0.15kg 0.16kg 0.22kg 0.40kg 0.60kg 1.11kg
When the extension cables are used in combination, overall distance of the combined cable must be 13.2 m (43.28 feet) or
less.
6 - 21
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 1
This chapter describes the specifications of the memory cards and the batteries for the Q Series CPU Module and how
to handle them. 2
7.1 Memory Card 3
The memory card Note7.1 is used for storing programs and file registers as well as storing debugged data by the
tracing function.Note1 4
It is also used when handling a file register that exceeds the number of points storable in the standard RAM.
( Section 4.1)
5
7.1.1 List of usable memory cards
Three types of memory cards(SRAM card, Flash card, and ATA card) are available. The memory cards usable for each
6
CPU module are shown in Table7.1.
Table7.1 Memory cards and applicable CPU modules 7
CPU module
Q02UCPU
Q02CPU
Q03UD(E)CPU 8
Q02PHCPU Q04UD(E)HCPU
Q00JCPU Q02HCPU Q00UJCPU
Memory card *1 Q06PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q06UD(E)HCPU
Q00CPU Q06HCPU Q00UCPU
Q12PHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q10UD(E)HCPU
Q01CPU Q12HCPU Q01UCPU
Q25PHCPU Q13UD(E)HCPU
7.1.1 List of usable memory cards
7.1 Memory Card
Q25HCPU
Q20UD(E)HCPU
Q26UD(E)HCPU
Q2MEM-1MBS
Q2MEM-2MBS
SRAM card
Q3MEM-4MBS
Q3MEM-8MBS
Q2MEM-2MBF
Flash card
Q2MEM-4MBF
Q2MEM-8MBA
ATA card Q2MEM-16MBA
Q2MEM-32MBA
: Usable : Not usable
*1: Only one memory card can be installed for each CPU module.
Storable data vary depending on the type of memory card.
For the data that can be stored on memory cards, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Note1
Note7.1 Basic Universal
The Basic model QCPU, Q00U(J)CPU, Q01UCPU do not support memory cards.
7-1
7.1.2 Memory card specifications
The specifications of the memory card which can be used on the CPU module are compliant with those of the PCMCIA
small PC card.
(1) SRAM card
Table7.2 SRAM card specifications
Type
Item
Q2MEM-1MBS Q2MEM-2MBS Q3MEM-4MBS Q3MEM-8MBS
Memory size after format 1011.5K bytes 2034K bytes 4078K bytes 8172K bytes
Storable number of files 255 287 319
Number of insertions and removals 5000 times
H 45mm (1.77 inches) 74mm (2.91 inches)
External dimensions W 42.8mm (1.69 inches)
D 3.3mm (0.13 inches) 8.1mm (0.32 inches)
Weight 15g 30g 31g
(2) Flash card
Table7.3 Flash card specifications
Type
Item
Q2MEM-2MBF Q2MEM-4MBF
Memory size 2035K bytes 4079K bytes
Storable number of files 288
Number of insertions and removals 5000 times
Number of writings 100000 times
H 45mm (1.77 inches)
External dimensions W 42.8mm (1.69 inches)
D 3.3mm (0.13 inches)
Weight 15g
(3) ATA card
Table7.4 ATA card specifications
Type
Item
Q2MEM-8MBA Q2MEM-16MBA Q2MEM-32MBA
Memory size after format 7982K bytes*1 15982K bytes*1 31854K bytes
Storable number of files 512
Number of insertions and removals 5000 times
Number of writings 1000000 times
H 45mm (1.77 inches)
External dimensions W 42.8mm (1.69 inches)
D 3.3mm (0.13 inches)
Weight 15g
*1: The size of ATA cards after formating will be as follows when the manufacuturer control number of the card is E or earlier.
Manufacturer control number E: Q2MEM-8MBA: 7948K bytes, Q2MEM-16MBA: 15948K bytes
Manufacturer control number D or earlier: Q2MEM-8MBA: 7940k bytes, Q2MEM-16MBA: 15932K bytes
For the manufacturer control number, refer to "POINT" in this section.
*2: Up to 511 files can be stored in the Universal model QCPU.
7-2
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
1
When the ATA card is used, the value stored in the special register SD603 differs depending on the manufacturer control
number and CPU module type.
When the CPU module is the Universal model QCPU, the ATA card size is stored in SD603 in units of K bytes.
When the module is not the Universal model QCPU, 8000, 16000, or 32000 is stored in SD603 and the value depends on
2
the manufacturer control number and CPU module type
Table7.5 When the value stored in SD603 depending on manufacturer control number of the Q2MEM-8MBA
3
Value stored in special register SD603
Other than the Universal model QCPU
Manufacturer control No. and type of
ATA card type
Serial No. (first 5 Serial No. (first 5 Universal model 4
digits) is 09011 or digits) is 09012 or QCPU
earlier later
Q2MEM-8MBA 8000 8000 5
" " and
Q2MEM-16MBA 16000 16000
" D " or earlier
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-8MBA 16000 8000 6
ATA card size
" E " Q2MEM-16MBA 16000 16000
(K bytes)
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-8MBA 32000 16000 7
" F " or later Q2MEM-16MBA 32000 32000
Q2MEM-32MBA 32000 32000
8
The manufacturer control number (the third digit from the left) of the ATA card is described in the label on the back of the ATA
card. (Refer to Figure 7.1)
When character string including the manufacturer control number is 4digits, the third digit from the left is the manufacturer
control number, and when it is 3 digits, the manufacturer control number is "B".
7.1.2 Memory card specifications
7.1 Memory Card
Manufacturer
control number
Figure 7.1 Label on the back of ATA card
7-3
7.1.3 Part names of the memory card
The part names of the memory card are described below.
1)
1)
3)
3)
4)
Write protect ON
"LOCK" Write protect ON
"RELEASE"
"LOCK"
2) "RELEASE" 4)
2)
Figure 7.2 Memory card
Table7.6 Part names
No. Name Descriptions
1) Connector area Connector area connected to the CPU module
2) Battery holder Used to set the lithium battery for data backup of the SRAM memory (SRAM card only)
Switch for fixing the battery holder to the memory card. Locked at: LOCK position (write
Battery holder fixing protect switch side)
3)
switch *1 LOCK: Locked, RELEASE: Unlocked
(SRAM card only)
Used to set write prohibit in the memory. Set to off by factory default.
(SRAM card and Flash card only)
4) Write protect switch
On: Data write inhibited
Off: Data write enabled
*1: The battery holder fixing switch is returned automatically from the RELEASE to LOCK position when the battery holder is
disconnected.
7-4
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
7.1.4 Handling the memory card
1
(1) Formatting of memory card
Any SRAM or ATA card must have been formatted to use in the CPU module.
Since the SRAM or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted, format it using GX Developer before use.
2
(Formatting is not necessary for Flash cards.)
For formatting, refer to the following.
3
GX Developer Operating Manual
4
Do not format an ATA card other than by GX Developer.
(If formatted using format function of Microsoft® Windows® Operating System, the ATA card may not be usable in a CPU
module.)
5
(2) Installation of SRAM card battery
6
A battery used to backup for power failure is supplied with the SRAM card.
Before using the SRAM card, install the battery.
7
Note that the SRAM card memory is not backed up by the CPU module battery only.
Also, the program memory, standard RAM, and latch devices of the CPU module are not backed up by the battery installed
on the SRAM card.
8
(3) Types of files which can be stored on memory card
7.1.4 Handling the memory card
7.1 Memory Card
For the types of the files that can be stored on each memory card, refer to the following.
Manuals for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
7-5
7.1.5 Installing and removing a memory card
(1) For Q2MEM type memory card
(a) To install the memory card
Install the memory card into the CPU module, while paying attention to the orientation of the memory card.
Insert the memory card securely into the connector until the height of the memory card reaches that of the
memory card EJECT button.
Memory card
EJECT button
CPU module main
unit
Memory card
Insertion direction check
( mark)
Figure 7.3 Install the memory card
(b) To remove the memory card
When removing the memory card from the CPU module, press the memory card EJECT button to pull out the
memory card.
Memory card
EJECT button
CPU module
main unit
Push
Memory card
Figure 7.4 Remove the memory card
7-6
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
(2) For Q3MEM type memory card 1
(a) To install the memory card
When installing a memory card to the CPU module main body, install it according to the procedures in Figure 2
7.5, while paying attention to the direction of the memory card.
Install the memory card CPU module
main unit
Slightly bend the center of a lid
to make space between a
3
projection and a mounting hole
and remove the lid.
Turn OFF power supply of the
CPU module and remove a lid
of the CPU module main body.
Projection 4
MEMORY card
EJECT button
5
CPU module
main unit
Memory card
Install a memory card to a
memory card slot of the CPU
6
module main body.
*Insertion direction check
( mark)
7
8
CPU module
main unit
Set a memory card protective
cover to the CPU module.
7.1.5 Installing and removing a memory card
7.1 Memory Card
Completed
Figure 7.5 Installing a memory card
7-7
(b) To remove the memory card
When removing a memory card from the CPU module main body, remove a memory card protective cover and
press the EJECT button to pull out the memory card.
Remove a cover,
pressing fixing claws
Remove the memory card of top/bottom
CPU module
main unit
Turn OFF power supply of the
CPU module and remove a
memory card protective cover
from the CPU module.
Memory card
EJECT button
Push
CPU module
Press the EJECT button to eject main unit
a memory card.
Completed
Figure 7.6 Removing a memory card
(3) To remove the memory card during power on
When removing the memory card, confirm that special relays "SM604" and "SM605" are off.
• The memory card cannot be removed while "SM604" is on because the CPU module is using the card.
• Turn off "SM605" if it is on.
When both "SM604" and "SM605" are off, remove the memory card according to the following procedure.
1) Turn on the special relay "SM609" using the sequence program or by the device test of GX Developer.
2) By monitoring GX Developer, check that the special relay "SM600" is turned off.
3) Remove the memory card.
SM600 (Memory card can be used) : The system is turned on when
memory card is ready to be used.
SM604 (memory card is being used) : The system is turned on when the
CPU module is using the memory
card.
SM605 (memory card removal prohibited) : Turned on by the user to disable a
removal of the memory card.
(4) To install the memory card while the power is on
1) Install the memory card.
2) Check that the special relay "SM600" is turned on by monitoring GX Developer etc., .
7-8
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
1
The following precautions must be observed when inserting or removing the memory card while the power is on.
● Note that the data in the memory card may be damaged if the above mentioned procedures are not performed
correctly. 2
Also, if the CPU module operation for an error is set to "Stop" in the Parameters, the CPU module stops its operation
upon the occurrence of “ICM.OPE.ERROR”.
● When the memory card is installed, the scanning time is increased by several 10ms max. 1 scan is only added, when
the CPU module executes mount processing.
3
● Poor insertion of the memory card may result in “ICM.OPE.ERROR”.
● Using the tweezers below is effective when the memory card cannot be removed smoothly.
4
Table7.7 Tweezers for replacing memory card
Product Model name
Plastic tweezers NK-2539
5
8
Figure 7.7 Memory card replacement using plastic tweezers
7.1.5 Installing and removing a memory card
7.1 Memory Card
7-9
7.1.6 Specifications of the memory card battery
This section describes the specifications of the battery used for the memory card (SRAM card).
Table7.8 Specifications of the Battery for Memory Card
Type
Item
Q2MEM-BAT Q3MEM-BAT
Classification Graphite fluoride lithium primary battery Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial voltage 3.0V 3.0V
Nominal current 48mAh 550mAh
Battery life when stored Actually 5 years (room temperature)
Battery life when used Section 11.3.4.
Lithium content 0.014g 0.150g
Power failure backup for SRAM card Power failure backup for SRAM card
Application
(for Q2MEM-1MBS/Q2MEM-2MBS) (for Q3MEM-4MBS/Q3MEM-8MBS)
Remark
• For the life of the memory card battery, refer to Section 11.3.4.
• For the battery irective in EU member states, refer to Appendix 4.
7 - 10
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
7.1.7 Battery Installation into the memory card
1
Installation method of the battery for the memory card (SRAM card)
The battery for the SRAM card is removed from the battery holder when shipping.
Before installing the SRAM card into the CPU module, set the battery holder as shown in Figure 7.8. 2
(1) For Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS
3
Side with “product name” Battery holder's locking switch
Set the battery holder's locking switch to
the "RELEASE" position. ......
4
RELEASE position
Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card. ...... 5
' ' sign
Set the battery onto the battery holder
with the "plus" face up. ...... 6
Battery holder
7
Insert the battery holder with which the
battery is installed firmly, into the SRAM ......
card.
8
Confirm that the battery holder's locking
switch is set to the "LOCK" position. ......
7.1.7 Battery Installation into the memory card
7.1 Memory Card
"LOCK"
: The battery holder's locking switch is set automatically to the
"LOCK" position when the battery holder is removed. In its position,
Completed insert the battery holder firmly.
Figure 7.8 Memory card battery setting procedure
Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder.
Battery holder latches
Battery fixing guide
Battery holder
Figure 7.9 Battery setting direction
7 - 11
(2) For Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS
Set a battery holder fixing switch to
the RELEASE position.
Pull out a battery holder of a SRAM
card.
RELEASE
Battery holder position
*1
fixing switch '+' sign
Facing up a positive side of a
battery, set the battery on the
battery holder.
Battery holder
Deeply insert the battery holder
where the battery is set into the
SRAM card.
Set the battery holder fixing switch
to the LOCK position.
LOCK
position
Completed
Figure 7.10 Memory card battery setting procedure
*1:The following shows the direction of a battery.
Maker name Manufacture number
Model (varies depending on date of manufacture)
Polarity
Voltage
'+' side '-' side
Figure 7.11 Direction of a battery
7 - 12
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)
1
Batteries (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) are installed in the CPU module to retain data of the program memory,
standard RAM, and latch device in case of power failure. 2
7.2.1 Battery specifications
3
This section describes the specifications of the battery used for the CPU module.Note1
Table7.9 Battery specifications
4
Type
Item
Q6BAT Q7BAT(-SET) Note7.2 Q8BAT(-SET) Note7.2 5
Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Classification Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
(assembled battery)
Initial voltage 3.0V 6
Nominal current 1800mAh 5000mAh 1800mAh (1800mAh 10 pieces)
Battery life when stored Actually 5 years (room temperature)
Battery life when used Section 11.3.2. 7
Lithium content 0.49g 1.52g 4.9g
For data retention of the program memory, standard RAM, and latch device during the power
Application
failure 8
Accessory ---- *1 *2
Battery holder Q8BAT connection cable
*1: Included only when the Q7BAT-SET is purchased.
*2: Included only when the Q8BAT-SET is purchased.
7.2.1 Battery specifications
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)
Remark
• For the battery life, refer to Section 11.3.2.
• For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Appendix 4.
Note1
Note7.2 Basic
The Q7BAT and Q8BAT is not applicable to the Basic model QCPU.
7 - 13
7.2.2 Battery installation
(1) Q6BAT battery installation procedure
The battery connector of Q6BAT is disconnected when shipping. Connect the connector as follows.
For the service life of the battery and how to replace the battery, refer to Section 11.3.
(a) Basic model QCPU
Open the CPU module front cover. CPU module
Confirm that the battery is loaded
correctly.
Insert the battery connector into the
connector pin on the case. Be sure that
the insertion direction is correct.
Connector
Completed
Figure 7.12 Q6BAT battery installation procedure
(b) High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal model
QCPU
Open the CPU module bottom cover.
Connector
Confirm that the battery is loaded
correctly. Connector Battery
stopper
Insert the battery connector into the
connector pin on the case. Be sure that
the insertion direction is correct.
CPU module
Completed
Figure 7.13 Q6BAT battery installation procedure
Firmly push the connector all the way.
7 - 14
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
(2) Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure 1
When changing the battery for the CPU module from the Q6BAT to the Q7BAT, set the battery and connect its
connector in the following procedure.
2
Open the CPU module bottom cover.
Disconnect the connector connecting the 3
Q6BAT to the CPU module.
Connector
Remove the Q6BAT and cover from the 4
CPU module. Connector
stopper
Connect the Q7BAT- SET to the battery
5
connector of the CPU module and set it
into the connector holder of the battery
holder.
6
CPU module
Battery holder
Set the Q7BAT- SET in the CPU module.
7
Completed
Figure 7.14 Q7BAT-SET battery installation procedure
8
Firmly push the connector all the way.
7.2.2 Battery installation
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)
7 - 15
(3) Q8BAT-SET battery installation procedure
When changing the battery of the CPU module from the Q6BAT to the Q8BAT, install the battery and connect its
connector in the following procedure.
Open the cover of the CPU module's Connector of
bottom. CPU module
Connector of
battery
Q6BAT
Disconnect the connector connecting
the Q6BAT to the CPU module.
Remove the Q6BAT and cover from
the CPU module.
CPU module
Connector
of cable
Insert the connector of Q8BAT Q8BAT connection cable
connection cable (included in the
Q8BAT-SET) into the connector of Connector of
CPU module while confirming the CPU module
orientation of each connector. CPU module
Q8BAT connection cover
Q8BAT connection cover
Attach the Q8BAT connection cover
to the CPU module.
Q8BAT connection cable
CPU module
(To next page)
7 - 16
CHAPTER7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY
(From previous page)
1
Control panel
Q8BAT
Mount the CPU module onto the main
base unit, so that the Q8BAT
2
connection cable connected to the
CPU module will not interfere with the
other devices.
3
Fix the Q8BAT onto the control panel.
(Screws or DIN rail is applicable.) 4
R (bending radius)
10mm (0.39 inch)
Attach the connector of Q8BAT
connection cable to the Q8BAT while
or more
5
confirming the orientation of the
connector.
6
Completed Q8BAT Q8BAT
connection cable
7
• Clamp the Q8BAT connection cable.
Failure to do so may damage the Q8BAT connection cover, connector, or the cable due to unintentional swinging
and shifting or accidental pulling of the cable. 8
• Provide 10mm (0.39 inches) or more of the bending radius for the Q8BAT connection cable.
If the bending radius is less than 10mm (0.39 inches), malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration
and wire breakage.
• For details of the module mounting position, refer to the following.
7.2.2 Battery installation
7.2 Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT, Q8BAT)
Section 10.3.2
• Firmly push the connector all the way.
• When installing the Q8BAT for the Universal model QCPU, use the connection cable with “A” printed.
A Sticker
7 - 17
CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES
This chapter provide the start-up procedure for the Q Series CPU module on the assumption that programs and
parameters have been created separately.
For the start-up procedures for a redundant system configured with a Redundant CPU, refer to the following.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
Start
Module installation ••• CHAPTER 10
Install any of the following modules required for the system configuration to the
base unit.
•Power supply module
•CPU module (Install a memory card if necessary.)
•Intelligent function module and/or special function module
•Network module
•I/O module
Wiring/connection ••• CHAPTER 6,
1) Wire the power supply to the power supply module. CHAPTER 7,
2) Wire external device(s) to intelligent function module(s), special function mod- CHAPTER 10
ule(s), and/or I/O module(s).
3) Install wiring between network modules.
4) Install the battery to the CPU module.
5) Connect the main base unit to an extension base unit and also between exten-
sion base units by extension cables and then set the number of bases to exten-
sion base units.
Module initial settings ••• CHAPTER 4
1) Halt the CPU module.
2) Set up switches of the intelligent function module(s) and/or special function
module(s).
3) Set up switches of the network module.
System power on ••• CHAPTER 4,
Confirm the following items of the system, and then power on the system. CHAPTER 5,
•Wiring of the power supply CHAPTER 10
•Power supply voltage
•Operating status of the CPU module: Stop status (reset canceled)
Connection of the PC in which GX Developer is installed ••• GX Developer
1) Start up GX Developer on the personal computer. Operating
2) Connect the personal computer in which GX Developer is installed, to the CPU Manual
module.
(To next page)
Figure 8.1 CPU module start-up procedures
8-1
CHAPTER8 CPU MODULE START-UP PROCEDURES
(From previous page)
1
Memory formatting ••• GX Developer
Format the memory to be used by the "PC Memory Formatting" of GX Developer.
Operating 2
Manual
Writing the parameters and programs ••• GX Developer 3
Write the parameters and programs created by GX Developer into the CPU Operating
module. Manual
4
System reboot ••• CHAPTER 4
Turn off and on the system power supply, or reset the CPU module.
5
Error check ••• CHAPTER 4
Confirm that the ERR.LED of the CPU module is off.
If the ERR.LED is on or flashing, identify the error cause by the system monitor
of GX Developer or diagnostics* to eliminate the error cause.
6
If the error is related to the parameters or programs, correct them.
Running of the CPU module
7
••• CHAPTER 4
Run the CPU module, and then confirm that the RUN LED of the CPU module
turns on.
8
Completed
Figure 8.2 CPU module start-up procedures (Continue)
*: The following types of diagnostics are available.
• PC diagnostics
• Network diagnostics
• Ethernet diagnostics
• CC-Link and CC-Link/LT diagnostics
For details of the wiring, connection, and initial settings of intelligent function modules, special function modules, and net-
work modules, refer to relevant manuals for the network.
8-2
Memo
8-3
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9
Compliance to the EMC Directive, which is one of the EU Directives, has been a legal obligation for the products sold
in European countries since 1996 as well as the Low Voltage Directive since 1997. 2
Manufacturers who recognize their products are compliant to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives are required to
declare that print a "CE mark" on their products.
3
(1) Authorized representative in Europe
Authorized representative in Europe is shown below.
Name : Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV
4
Address: Gothaer strase 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany
5
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
6
The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause
excessive electromagnetic interference (emissions) and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference
(immunity)". 7
Section 9.1.1 through Section 9.1.6 summarize the precautions on compliance with the EMC Directive of the
machinery constructed with the MELSEC-Q series programmable controllers.
These precautions are based on the requirements and the standards of the regulation, however, it does not guarantee 8
that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions will comply with above-mentioned directive. The
method and judgement for complying with the EMC Directive must be determined by the person who construct the
entire machinery.
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
9-1
9.1.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive
The standards relevant to the EMC Directive are listed in Table9.1.
Table9.1 Standards relevant to the EMC Directive
Specification Test item Test details Standard value
EN61000-4-2 Immunity test in which electrostatic is
8KV Air discharge
Electrostatic discharge applied
4KV Contact discharge
immunity*2 to the cabinet of the equipment.
EN61000-4-3 Immunity test in which electric
1.4GHz-2.0GHz, 80-1000MHz, 10V/m,
Radiated electromagnetic fields are irradiated to the
80%AM modulation@1KHz
field immunity*2 product.
AC power cable: 2KV
EN61000-4-4 Immunity test in which burst DC power cable: 2KV
Electrical fast transient/ noise is applied to the power cable I/O power(DC): 1KV
burst immunity *2 and signal line. DC I/O, analog, communication
line(shielded): 1KV
AC power line:
EN61131-2:
2003 Common mode 2KV, differential
mode 1KV
DC power line:
Immunity test in which burst Common mode 1KV, differential
EN61000-4-5
noise is applied to the power line mode 0.5KV
Surge immunity *2
and signal line. I/O power(DC):
Common mode 0.5KV, differential
mode 0.5KV
DC I/O, analog, communication (shielded):
Common mode 1KV
EN61000-4-6 Immunity test in which high
0.15-80MHz, 80%AM modulation 1KHz,
Conducted disturbances frequency noise is applied to the
3Vrms
immunity *2 power line and signal line.
*1: QP : Quasi-peak value, Mean : Average value
*2: Programmable controller is an open type device (a device designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be installed inside a
conductive control panel.
The corresponding test has been conducted with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel.
Besides, our programmable controller has been tested with the maximum rated input value of the power supply module to be used.
9-2
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive
9
Programmable controller is an open type device and must be installed inside a control panel for use.*1
This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of programmable controller-generated
electromagnetic noise.
2
*1: Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel.
However, the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
3
(1) Control panel
• Use a conductive control panel.
• When attaching the control panel's top plate or base plate, mask painting and weld so that good surface 4
contact can be made between the panel and plate.
• To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel, mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner
plate in the control panel so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area. 5
• Ground the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured
even at high frequencies.
• Holes made in the control panel must be 10 cm (3.94 inches) diameter or less. If the holes are 10 cm (3.94 6
inches) or larger, radio frequency noise may be emitted.
In addition, because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit,
reduce the clearance as much as practicable. 7
The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint
surface.
8
Our tests have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max. and 30 dB mean
(measured by 3 m method with 30 to 300 MHz).
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
(2) Connection of power line and ground wire
Ground wire and power supply cable for the programmable controller system must be connected as described
below.
• Provide an grounding point near the power supply module. Ground the power supply's LG and FG terminals
(LG : Line Ground, FG : Frame Ground) with the thickest and shortest wire possible. (The wire length must
be 30 cm (11.81 inches) or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the
programmable controller system to the ground, so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured.
As the wires are used to relieve the noise, the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring
means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna.
• The ground wire led from the grounding point must be twisted with the power supply wires. By twisting with
the ground wire, noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the ground. However, if a filter
is installed on the power supply wires, the wires and the ground wire may not need to be twisted.
9-3
9.1.3 Cables
The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component. On the outside of the control
panel, therefore, they serve as antennas to emit noise. To prevent noise emission, use shielded cables for the cables
which are connected to the I/O modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the
control panel.
The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance.
The signal lines (including common line) of the programmable controller, which are connected to I/O modules,
intelligent function modules and/or extension cables, have noise durability in the condition of grounding their shields by
using the shielded cables. If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly, the noise resistance will not meet
the specified requirements.
(1) Grounding of shield section of shield cable
• Ground the exposed shield section of the shielded cable close to the module. Confirm that the grounded
cables are not induced to electromagnetic from the cables, which are not yet grounded.
• Ground the exposed shield section to spacious area on the control panel.A clamp can be used as shown in
Figure 9.2.
In this case, apply a cover on the painted inner wall surface of the control panel, which comes in contact with
the clamp
Screw
Shield section Clamp fitting
Paint mask
Shield cable
Figure 9.1 Part to be exposed Figure 9.2 Shield grounding (Correct example)
Note) The method of grounding with a vinyl-coated wire soldered onto the shielded section of the shielded
cable as in shown Figure 9.3 is not recommended. Doing so will raise the high-frequency impedance,
resulting in loss of the shielding effect.
Shield cable
Wire
Solderless terminal, crimp contact
Figure 9.3 Shield grounding (Incorrect example)
9-4
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
(2) MELSECNET/H module 9
Always use a double-shielded coaxial cable (MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.: 5C-2V-CCY) for the
coaxial cables MELSECNET/H module. Radiated noise in the range of 30HMz or higher can be suppressed by
using double-shielded coaxial cables. Ground the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to
2
the ground.
3
Shield Ground here
Figure 9.4 Double-shielded coaxial cable grounding
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield. 4
(3) Built-in Ethernet port QCPU module, Ethernet module, FL-net module, Web
5
server module, MES interface module
Precautions for using AUI cables, twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are described below.
• Always ground the AUI cables*1 connected to the 10BASE5 connectors. Because the AUI cable is a 6
shielded type, strip part of the jacket as shown in Figure 9.5 and ground the exposed shield section to the
ground as much as possible.
7
AUI cable
Shield 8
Figure 9.5 AUI cable grounding
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
*1: Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT2032 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
9.1.3 Cables
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
• Always use shielded twisted pair cables for connection to 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX connectors.
• For the shielded twisted pair cable, remove a part of the jacket as shown in Figure 9.6 and ground the
exposed shield section to the ground as much as possible.
Shielded twisted pair cables
Shield
Figure 9.6 Shielded twisted pair cable grounding
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
• Always use double-shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables*2 connected to the 10BASE2 connectors.
Ground the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground.
Shield Ground here
Figure 9.7 Double-shielded coaxial cable grounding
Refer to (1) for the grounding of the shield.
*2: Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT3035 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
9-5
(4) Positioning module, channel-isolated pulse input module
Use shielded cables for the external wiring, and ground the shields of the external wiring cables to the control box
with the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi).
(Ground the shields 20 to 30cm away from the module.)
Inside control box
QD70
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
Figure 9.8 AD75CK cable clamp mounting position
The AD75CK allows up to four cables to be grounded if the outside diameter of the shielded cable is about 7mm.
(5) Temperature control module
Use shielded cables for the external wiring, and ground the shields of the external wiring cables to the control box
with the AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi).
(Ground the shields 20 to 30cm away from the module.)
Inside control box
Q64TC
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
Figure 9.9 AD75CK cable clamp mounting position
The AD75CK allows up to four cables to be grounded if the outside diameter of the shielded cable is about 7mm.
The required number of AD75CKs is indicated in Table9.2. (When cables of 7mm outside diameter are used for
all wiring.)
9-6
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
Table9.2 Required number of AD75CK 9
Number of Used Channels
Required Number of AD75CKs
1 2 3 4
0 1 1 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 3
2 1 2 2 3
3 2 2 3 3 3
Number of used CT channel 4 2 2 3 3
5 2 3 3 4
6 2 3 3 4
4
7 3 3 4 4
8 3 3 4 4
5
(6) Redundant CPU
Be sure to use the QC TR for the tracking cable, and ground the shielded part of the cable to the panel with the 6
AD75CK cable clamp (Mitsubishi).
(Ground the shield at a position 20 to 30cm (7.87 to 11.81 inches) away from the module.)
7
Inside control panel
8
QnPRHCPU
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
9.1.3 Cables
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
Figure 9.10 AD75CK cable clamp mounting position
(7) I/O signal lines and other communication cables
For the I/O signal lines (including common line) and other communication cables (RS-232, RS-422, CC-Link,
etc.), always ground the shields of the shield cables as in (1) if they are pulled out of the control panel.
(8) Extension cable
For an extension cable, always ground the shields of the shield cables as in (1) if they are pulled out of the control
panel.
(9) Power line for external power supply terminal
The power line connecting to the external power supply terminal of the analog module must be 30m (98.43 feet)
or less.
(10)Power line of CC-Link remote module
Power line connecting to the external power supply terminal (compliant with I/O power port of CE standard) must
be 30m (98.43 feet) or less. Power line connecting to module power supply terminal (compliant with I/O power
port of CE standard) must be 10m or less.
9-7
9.1.4 Power supply part of the power supply module, Q00JCPU, and
Q00UJCPU
Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them.
9.1.5 When using MELSEC-A series modules
The following describes the case where the MELSEC-A series module is used, using the QA1S6 B, QA6 B, and
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B as the extension base unit.
(1) Cable
(a) Grounding the shield section of shielded cable
• Ground the exposed shield section of the shielded cable close to the module. Confirm that the grounded
cables are not induced to electromagnetic from the cables, which are not yet grounded.
• Ground the exposed shield section to spacious area on the control panel.
• A clamp can be used as shown in Figure 9.12.
In this case, apply a cover on the painted inner wall surface of the control panel, which comes in contact
with the clamp.
Screw
Shield section Clamp fitting
Paint mask
Shield cable
Figure 9.11 Part to be exposed Figure 9.12 Shield grounding (Correct example)
Note) The method of grounding with a vinyl-coated wire soldered onto the shielded section of the shielded
cable as in shown Figure 9.13 is not recommended. Doing so will raise the high-frequency impedance,
resulting in loss of shielding effect.
Shield cable
Wire
Solderless terminal, crimp contact
Figure 9.13 Shield grounding (Incorrect example)
9-8
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
(b) Positioning modules 9
Precautions for configuring the machinery compliant with the EMC Directives using the A1SD75P -S3
(abbreviated as A1SD75 hereafter), AD75P -S3 (abbreviated as AD75 hereafter) are described below.
1) When wiring cable of a 2 m (6.56 feet) or less 2
• Ground the shield of the external device connection cable with a cable clamp. (Ground the shield at the
closest location to the A1SD75/AD75 external wiring connector.)
• Wire external device connection cables to drive modules and external devices by the shortest distance.
3
• Install the drive unit in the same panel.
Connector for external device connection
4
Power supply module
A1
SD
75 Cable clamp
Cable for external device connection (within 2 m)
5
Drive unit
6
Figure 9.14 When wiring with a 2 m (6.56 feet) or less cable
7
2) When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m (6.56 feet), but is 10 m (32.79 feet) or less
• Ground the shield of the external device connection cable with a cable clamp. (Ground the shield at the
closest location to the A1SD75/AD75 external wiring connector.) 8
• Wire external device connection cables to drive modules and external devices by the shortest distance.
• Install a ferrite core.
Connector for external device connection
Power supply module
A1
9.1.5 When using MELSEC-A series modules
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
SD
75 Ferrite core
Cable clamp
Cable for external device connection (over 2 m to less than 10 m)
Drive unit
Figure 9.15 When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m (6.56 feet), but is 10 m (32.79 feet) or less
9-9
3) Ferrite core and cable clamp types
• Cable clamp
Type : AD75CK (Mitsubishi)
• Ferrite core
Type : ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK ferrite core)
Table9.3 Number of required ferrite cores and cable clamps
Required Qty
Cable length Prepared part
1 axis 2 axes 3 axes
Within 2 m (6.56 feet) AD75CK 1 1 1
2 m (6.56 feet) to 10m AD75CK 1 1 1
(32.79feet) ZCAT3035-1330 1 2 3
4) Cable clamp mounting position
Inside control box
AD75
20 to 30cm
AD75CK (7.87 to 11.81 inch)
Figure 9.16 AD75CK cable clamp mounting position
9 - 10
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
(c) CC-Link module 9
• Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC-Link module close to the exit of control
panel or to any of the CC-Link stations within 30 cm (11.81 inches) from the module or stations.
The CC-Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable. Remove a part of the jacket as shown in Figure 9.17 and 2
ground the exposed shield section to the ground as much as possible.
CC-Link dedicated cable
3
Shield
Figure 9.17 CC-Link dedicated cable grounding
• Always use the specified CC-Link dedicated cable. 4
• The CC-Link module, the CC-Link stations and the FG line inside the control panel must be connected at
the FG terminal as shown in Figure 9.18.
5
Master module Remote module Local module
(Blue)
6
DA DA DA
Terminal resistor (White) Terminal resistor
DB DB DB
(Yellow)
DG DG DG
SLD CC-Link SLD CC-Link SLD
FG dedicated FG dedicated FG 7
cable cable
Figure 9.18 Connection between CC-Link module/CC-Link station and FG line inside the control panel.
(Simplified figure)
8
• Use the external power supply that is CE compliant. Ground FG terminals.
Table9.4 External power supply
9.1.5 When using MELSEC-A series modules
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
Power supply
DLP75-24-1 DLP100-24-1 DLP120-24-1 DLP180-24-1 DLP240-24-1
model name
Rated input voltage 100 to 240VAC
Rated Voltage 24VDC
output Current 3.1A 4.1A 5.0A 7.5A 10.0A
• Power line connecting to the external power supply terminal (compliant with I/O power port of CE
standard) must be 30m (98.43 feet) or less. Power line connecting to module power supply terminal
(compliant with I/O power port of CE standard) must be 10m (32.81 feet) or less.
• The signal line connecting to the analog input of the following modules must be 30m or less.
AJ65BT-64RD3
AJ65BT-64RD4
AJ65BT-68TD
(d) I/O signal lines
For the I/O signal lines (including common line), if extracted to the outside of the control panel, also ensure to
ground the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item (1) above.
(e) Extension cable
For an extension cable, always ground the shield section of the shield cables as in (1) if they are pulled out of
the control panel.
9 - 11
(2) Power supply module
The precautions required for each power supply module are described in Table9.5. Always observe the items
noted as precautions.
Table9.5 Precautions when using a power supply module
Model Precautions
A1S61P
A1S62P
Not usable
A61P
A62P
A1S63P *1
Use the CE marked 24VDC panel power equipment.
A163P
A1S61PEU
A1S62PEU
A1S61PN
A1S62PN
Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short-circuiting them.
A61PN
A61PEU
A62PEU
A68P
*1: If sufficient filter circuitry is built into the 24VDC external power supply module, the noise generated by A1S63P will be
absorbed by that filter circuit, so a line filter may not be required.
Filtering circuitry of version F or later of A1S63P is improved so that a external line filter is not required.
9 - 12
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
9.1.6 Others
9
(1) Ferrite core
A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band.
It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables, but it is recommended to fit ferrite cores if shield cables pulled out of
2
the enclosure do not provide sufficient shielding effects.
Note that the ferrite cores must be fitted to the cables in the position immediately before they are pulled out of the
enclosure. If the fitting position is improper, the ferrite will not produce any effect.
3
(2) Noise filter (power supply line filter) 4
A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise.
It is not required to attach the noise filter to the power supply line except the A61PEU, A62PEU power supply
modules and some models, however, attaching it can suppress more noise. 5
(The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 MHz or less.)
The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below. 6
• Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter. When bundled, the output side
noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the noise was filtered.
7
Input side Input side
(power supply side) (power supply side)
Induction
9.1.6 Others
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with the EMC Directive
Filter Filter
Output side Output side
(device side) (device side)
The noise will be included when the Separate and lay the input
input and output wires are bundled. and output wires.
Figure 9.19 Precautions on noise filter
• Ground the noise filter grounding terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest wire possible (approx. 10
cm (3.94 inches)).
Remark
Table9.6 Noise filter specifications
Noise filter model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11
Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK
Rated current 3A 6A 3A
Rated voltage 250V
9 - 13
(3) Isolation transformer
An isolation transformer has an effect on reducing conducted noise (especially, lightning surge).
Lightning surge may cause a malfunction of the programmable controller.
As a measure against lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer as shown in Figure 9.20.
The use of an isolation transformer reduces an impact of lightning.
Programmable Isolation
Main controller power transformer
power supply supply
100VAC Programmable
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
Motor power supply
Motor equipment
Inside a control panel
Figure 9.20 Power supply wiring figure
9 - 14
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
9.2 Requirement to Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
9
The Low Voltage Directive requires each device that operates with the power supply ranging from 50 to 1000VAC and
75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements. 2
In Section 9.2.1 to Section 9.2.6, cautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
to comply with the Low Voltage Directive are described.
These descriptions are based on the requirements and standards of the regulation, however, it does not guarantee that
3
the entire machinery manufactured based on the descriptions complies with the above-mentioned directive. The
method and judgment for the low voltage directive must be left to the manufacturer's own discretion.
4
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
The standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller is EN61131-2 safety of devices used in
measurement rooms, control rooms, or laboratories.
5
The MELSEC-Q series programmable controller which operate at the rated voltage of 50VAC/75VDC or above are
also developed to conform to the above standard. 6
The modules which operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC/75VDC are out of the Low Voltage Directive
application range.
For products with the CE mark, refer to the "Standard Compliance" menu of the MELFANSweb homepage. 7
9.2.2 MELSEC-Q series programmable controller selection
8
(1) Power supply module
There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the power supply modules of the 100/
200VAC rated I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-Q series programmable controller
9.2 Requirement to Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
primary and secondary.
(2) I/O module
There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the I/O modules of the 100/200VAC rated
I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and
secondary.
The I/O modules of 24VDC or less rating are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range.
(3) CPU module, memory card, base unit
Using 5VDC circuits inside, the above modules are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range.
(4) Intelligent function modules (special function modules)
The intelligent function modules such as analog-digital converter modules, digital-analog converter modules,
network modules, and positioning modules (special function modules) are out of the scope of the low voltage
directive because the rated voltage is 24VDC or less.
(5) Display device
Use the CE marked display device.
9 - 15
9.2.3 Power supply
The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category II. Be sure to use
the installation category II power supply to the programmable controller.
The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt. Category I has
the lowest durability; category IV has the highest durability.
Category IV Category III Category II Category I
Figure 9.21 Installation category for power supply module
Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers
from the public power distribution.
9.2.4 Control panel
Programmable controller is an open type device (a device designed to be housed inside other equipment) and must be
installed inside a control panel for use.*1
*1: Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel.
However, the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
(1) Electrical shock prevention
The control panel must be handled as shown below to protect a person who does not have adequate knowledge
of electricity from an electric shock.
• Lock the control panel so that only those who are trained and have acquired enough knowledge of electric
facilities can open the control panel.
• The control panel must have a structure which automatically stops the power supply when the box is
opened.
• For electric shock protection, use IP20 or greater control panel.
9 - 16
CHAPTER9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
(2) Dustproof and waterproof features 9
The control panel also has the dustproof and waterproof functions. Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features
lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in insulation destruction.
The insulation in our programmable controller is designed to cope with the pollution level 2, so use in an
2
environment with pollution level 2 or below.
Pollution level 1 : An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist. 3
Pollution level 2 : An environment where conductive dust
does not usually exist, but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the
accumulated dust. Generally, this is the level for inside the control box equivalent to IP54 in 4
a control room or on the floor of a typical factory.
Pollution level 3 : An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the
accumulated dust. 5
An environment for a typical factory floor.
Pollution level 4 : Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, etc. An outdoor environment.
As shown above, the programmable controller can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control panel 6
equivalent to IP54.
9.2.4 Control panel
9.2 Requirement to Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
9 - 17
9.2.5 Grounding
There are the following two different ground terminals.
Use either ground terminal in an grounding status.
Protective grounding : Maintains the safety of the programmable controller and improves the noise resistance.
Functional grounding : Improves the noise resistance.
9.2.6 External wiring
(1) Module power supply and external power supply
For the remote module which requires 24VDC as module power supply, the 5/12/24/48VDC I/O module, and the
intelligent function module (special function module) which requires the external power supply, use the 5/12/24/
48VDC circuit which is doubly insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit or use the power supply whose
insulation is reinforced.
(2) External devices
When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the programmable controller, use a
model whose circuit section of the interface to the programmable controller is intensively insulated from the
hazardous voltage circuit.
(3) Intensive insulation
The intensive insulation covers the withstand voltages shown in Table9.7.
Table9.7 Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage (Installation Category II, source : IEC 664)
Surge withstand voltage
Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area
(1.2/50 s)
150VAC or below 2500V
300VAC or below 4000V
9 - 18
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 9
In order to increase the reliability of the system and exploit the maximum performance of its functions, this chapter
describes the methods and precautions for the mounting and installation of the system. 10
10.1 General Safety Requirements
3
Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to
ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in
4
DANGER
the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do
so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
(1) Configure external safety circuits, such as an emergency stop
5
circuit, protection circuit, and protective interlock circuit for forward/
reverse operation or upper/lower limit positioning.
(2) When the programmable controller CPU stops its operation upon 6
detection of the following status, and the output status of the system
will be as shown below.
7
Q series module AnS/A series module
8
(a) Overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the All outputs are All outputs are
power supply module is activated. turned off. turned off.
(b) The CPU module detects an error such as a All outputs are held or All outputs are
watchdog timer error by the self-diagnostic turned off according to
the parameter setting. turned off.
function.
All outputs may turn on when an error occurs in the part, such as I/O
10.1 General Safety Requirements
control part, where the programmable controller CPU cannot detect
any error. To ensure the safety operation in such a case, provide a
safety mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable
controller.
(3) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module
relay or transistor. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output
signals that could cause a serious accident.
In an output module, when a load current exceeding the rated current or
an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may
cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety
circuit, such as a fuse.
Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first
and then the external power supply.
If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due
to an incorrect output or malfunction.
For the operating status of each station after a communication failure,
refer to the relevant manuals for the network.
Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure amy result
in an accident.
10 - 1
When changing data of the running programmable controller from a
peripheral connected to the CPU module or from a personal computer
DANGER
connected to an intelligent function module, configure an interlock circuit
in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always
operate safely.
For program modification and operating status change, read relevant
manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation.
Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote
programmable controller, immediate action cannot be taken for a
problem on the programmable controller due to a communication failure.
To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program,
and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external
device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the
main circuit lines or power cables.
CAUTION
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.94 inches) or more between them.
Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.
When a device such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled
through an output module, a large current (approximately ten times
greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on.
Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a
sufficient current rating.
When the programmable controller is powered on and off, normal control output may not be done momentarily due to
a delay or a start-up time difference between the programmable controller power supply and the external power supply
(DC in particular) for the control target.
For example, if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC output module and then the
programmable controller power supply is switched on, the DC output module may provide false output instantaneously
at power-on of the programmable controller. Therefore, it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the
programmable controller power supply first.
Also, malfunction may occour if an external power supply or the programmable controller is faulty.
To prevent any malfunction which may affect the whole system and in a fail-safe viewpoint, provide a external circuit to
the areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents (e.g. emergency stop, protective and interlock
circuits) must be constructed outside the programmable controller.
The following page gives examples of system designing in the above viewpoint.
10 - 2
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(1) System design circuit example (when not using ERR. terminal of power supply 9
module, or using Q00JCPU)
FOR AC
Power supply
FOR AC/DC 10
Power supply
Transformer Transformer
Transformer
Input switched when
power supply
Fuse Fuse 3
Fuse
established. CPU module
CPU module
RUN/STOP circuit SM52 DC power
SM52
Ym interlocked with RA1
SM403
Ym
(-) (+) 4
(run monitor relay)
SM403 Yn Fuse
Yn XM Set time for DC power
TM
5
supply to be
Program established.
TM
MC1 NO M10
START SW RA1 NO
MC M10
MC STOP SW
Program
Input module START SW RA1
MC
6
MC STOP SW
Output module
Low battery alarm RA2
Ym
L
(Lamp or buzzer) RA2
XM
Voltage relay is
recommended 7
ON when run by
Yn SM403
RA1
8
Low battery alarm
Output module
Output module MC (Lamp or buzzer)
Power to output Ym
equipment switched ON when run by SM403
L
MC OFF when the STOP
signal is given. Yn
In the case of an RA1
emergency stop or a
MC2
10.1 General Safety Requirements
stop caused by a limit
MC1
switch. Output module
MC MC
MC1 Power to output
Interlock circuits as
MC2 equipment switched
necessary.
OFF when the STOP
Provide external
signal is given.
interlock circuits for
conflicting operations, In the case of an
such as forward rotation MC2 emergency stop or a
and reverse rotation, MC1 stop caused by a limit
and for parts that could switch.
damage the machine or MC1
cause accidents if no MC2
interlock were used.
Figure 10.1 System design circuit example
The power-on procedure is as follows:
For AC For AC/DC
1) Turn the power on. 1) Turn power on.
2) Set CPU to RUN. 2) Set CPU to RUN.
3) Turn on the start switch. 3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes ON.
4) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes 4) Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100%. (The TM set
on, the output equipment is powered and value must be the period of time from when RA2 goes on to the
may be driven by the program. establishment of 100% DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5
seconds.)
5) Turn on the start switch.
6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is
powered and may be driven by the program. (If a voltage relay is used at
RA2, no timer (TM) is required in the program.)
10 - 3
(2) System design circuit example (when using ERR. terminal of power supply
module)
Power supply
FOR AC/DC
Transformer Transformer
Fuse Fuse
Input switched
when power supply
established. CPU module
SM52 DC power
Ym
RUN/STOP circuit (-) (+)
SM403
interlocked with RA1 Yn Fuse
(run monitor relay)
XM Set time for DC power
TM supply to be established.
TM
NO MC1 NO M10
M10
Program
START SW
RA1 RA3
MC
MC STOP SW
RA2
RA2 Voltage relay is
XM recommended
Output module
Ym Low battery alarm
L (Lamp or buzzer)
Yn
RA1
OFF at ERR contact OFF
ERR (stop error occurrence)
Power supply module RA3
Output module
MC MC
Interlock circuits as
necessary. Output by ERR contact OFF
Provide external Power OFF of equipment
interlock circuits for
conflicting operations, In the case of an
such as forward rotation MC2 emergency stop or a
and reverse rotation, and MC1 stop caused by a limit
for parts that could switch.
damage the machine or MC1
cause accidents if no MC2
interlock were used.
Figure 10.2 System design circuit example
The power-ON procedure is as follows:
For AC/DC
1) Turn power ON.
2) Set CPU to RUN.
3) When DC power is established, RA2 goes on.
4) Timer (TM) times out after the DC power reaches 100%. (The TM set value must be the period of time from when RA2
goes ON to the establishment of 100% DC voltage. Set this value to approximately 0.5s.)
5) Turn on the start switch.
6) When the magnetic contactor (MC) comes on, the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program. (If a
voltage relay is used at RA2, no timer (TM) is required in the program.)
10 - 4
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(3) Fail-safe measures against failure of the programmable controller 9
Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self-diagnosis function. However, failure of I/O control
area may not be detected by the CPU module.
In such cases, all I/O points turn on or off depending on a condition of problem, and normal operating conditions
10
and operating safety cannot sometimes be maintained.
Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality control, they may cause failure
or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons. To prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system,
3
machine breakdown, and accidents, fail-safe circuitry against failure of the programmable controller must be
constructed outside the programmable controller.
Figure 10.3 and Figure 10.4 are a system example and its fail-safe circuit example. 4
Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
6
Extension cable
7
No. of slots 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
Output module for fail-safe purpose 1
Y80 to Y8F Output
8
Output
Output
Output
Empty
10.1 General Safety Requirements
No. of slots 16 points 16 points 16 points 16 points
*1: The output module for fail-safe purpose must be mounted in the last slot of the system. (Y80 to Y8F in the above system.)
Figure 10.3 System example
10 - 5
On delay time
Internal program Y80 T1
1s
SM412 Off delay timer
Y80 T2
1s
External load MC
Y81 L
Y80 Y8F L
24V
0.5s 0.5s
0V
DC24V
CPU module Output module 2
T1 T2
MC
*2: Y80 repeats turning on and then off at 0.5s intervals.
Use a no-contact output module (transistor in the example shown above).
Figure 10.4 <Fail-safe circuit example>
10 - 6
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller
9
The ambient temperature inside the panel storing the programmable controller must be suppressed to an ambient
temperature of 55 or less, which is specified for the programmable controller. 10
For the design of a heat releasing panel, it is necessary to know the average power consumption (heating value) of the
devices and instruments stored inside.
Here the method of obtaining the average power consumption of the programmable controller system is described. 3
From the power consumption, calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the panel.
How to calculate average power consumption 4
The power consuming parts of the programmable controller are roughly classified into six blocks as shown below.
5
(1) Power consumption of power supply module
The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is approx. 70 %, while 30 % of the output power is
consumed as heat. As a result, 3/7 of the output power is the power consumption. 6
Therefore the calculation formula is as follows.
3
W PW = ×{(I5V×5) + (I15V×15) + (I24V×24)} (W)
7 7
I5V: Current consumption of logic 5 VDC circuit of each module
I15V: Current consumption of 15VDC external power supply part of intelligent function
module 8
I24V: Average current consumption of 24VDC power supply for internal consumption of the
output module
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller
In a redundant power supply system configuration, the same calculation method is applied.
(When 2 redundant power supply modules are placed in parallel, they run sharing the load current half-and-half.)
(2) Total power consumption for 5VDC logic circuits of all modules
(including CPU module)
The power consumption of the 5 VDC output circuit section of the power supply module is the power consumption
of each module*1 (including the current consumption of the base unit).
W5V = I5V 5 (W)
*1: For the power consumption of the motion CPU and PC CPU module, refer to the instruction manuals of the
corresponding modules.
10 - 7
(3) A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module
(power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
The average power of the external 24 VDC power is the total power consumption of each module.
W24V = I24V 24 Simultaneous ON rate (W)
(4) Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the
output module
(Power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
WOUT = IOUT Vdrop Number of outputs Simultaneous ON rate (W)
IOUT : Output current (Current in actual use) (A)
Vdrop : Voltage drop in each output module (V)
(5) Average power consumption of the input section of the input module
(Power consumption for simultaneous ON points)
WIN = IIN E Number of input points Simultaneous ON rate (W)
IIN : Input current (Effective value for AC) (A)
E : Input voltage (Voltage in actual use) (V)
(6) Power consumption of the external power supply section of the intelligent
function module
WS = I+15V 15+I-15V 15+I24V 24 (W)
The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block becomes the power consumption of the overall
sequencer system.
W = WPW+W5V+W24V+WOUT+WIN+WS (W)
From this overall power consumption (W), calculate the heating value and a rise in ambient temperature inside the
panel.
The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the panel is shown below.
W
T= C
UA
W : Power consumption of overall sequencer system (value obtained above)
A : Surface area inside the panel
U : When the ambient temperature inside the panel is uniformed by a fan......6
When air inside the panel is not circulated..................................................4
If the temperature inside the panel has exceeded the specified range, it is recommended to install a heat exchanger to the
panel to lower the temperature.
If a normal ventilating fan is used, dust will be sucked into the programmable controller together with the external air, and it
may affect the performance of the programmable controller.
10 - 8
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(7) Example of calculation of average power consumption 9
(a) System configuration
Q61P-A1 10
Q02HCPU
Q35B
QX40 Q62DA
4
QY40P QJ71LP21-25
Figure 10.5 System configuration
5
(b) 5VDC/24VDC current consumption of each module
Table10.1 5VDC/24VDC current consumption
module name 5VDC 24VDC
6
Q02HCPU 0.64A ----
QX40 0.05A ----
QY40P 0.065A 0.01A 7
QJ71LP-25 0.55A ----
Q62DA 0.33A 0.12A
Q35B 0.11A ----
8
(c) Power consumption of power supply module
WPW = 3/7 (0.64 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.065 + 0.55 + 0.33 + 0.11) 5 = 3.85(W)
10.2 Calculating Heat Generation of Programmable Controller
(d) Total power consumption for 5 VDC logic circuits of all module
W5V = (0.64 + 0.05 + 0.05 + 0.065 + 0.55+ 0.33 + 0.11) 5 = 8.98(W)
(e) Total 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module
W24V = 0.01 24 1 = 0.24(W)
(f) Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output
module
WOUT = 0.1 0.2 16 1 = 0.32(W)
(g) Average power consumption of the input section of the input module
WIN = 0.004 24 32 1 = 3.07(W)
(h) Power consumption of the external power supply section of the intelligent function
module
WS = 0.12 24=2.88(W)
(i) Power consumption of overall system
W = 3.85 + 8.98 + 0.24 + 0.32 + 3.07 + 2.88 = 19.34(W)
The value of the heat generated in a redundant system configuration (when the Redundant CPU is used) is the sum of the
two values for the control and standby systems, each of which is calculated by the same method as that for the single
system.
10 - 9
10.3 Module Installation
10.3.1 Precaution on installation
Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the
general specifications in this manual.
CAUTION
Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage
to or deterioration of the product.
To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever located
in the lower part of the module, fully insert the module fixing projection(s)
into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into
place.
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure or drop of the module.
When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent
vibrations, fix the module with a screw.
Tighten the screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop,
short circuit, or malfunction.
When installing more cables, be sure that the base unit and the module
connectors are installed correctly.
After installation, check them for looseness.
Poor connections could cause an input or output failure.
When using a memory card, fully insert it into the memory card slot.
Check that it is inserted completely.
Poor contact may cause malfunction.
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before
mounting or removing the module. Failure to do so may result in damage
to the product.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the system where a CPU
module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced
online, and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure.
( 12.4.1).
After the first use of the product, do not mount or remove the module to
or from the base unit, and the terminal block to or from the module more
than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
10 - 10
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module. 9
Doing so can cause malfunction of failure of the module.
CAUTION
When using the Motion CPU module or motion module, check that the
combination of modules is correct before power-on. 10
The product may be damaged if the combination is incorrect.
For details, refer to the User's manual for the Motion CPU module.
3
In case of using the QA1S6 B, when installing the base unit to DIN rail in an environment of frequent vibration, use a 4
vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D). Mounting the vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D) enhances the resistance to
vibration.
Depending on the environment to install the base unit, it is also recommended to secure the base unit directly to the control
panel. 5
This section gives instructions for handling the CPU, I/O, intelligent function and power supply modules, base units and 6
so on.
• Module enclosure, terminal block connectors and pin connectors are made of resin; do not drop them or
subject them to strong impact. 7
• Do not remove module's printed circuit boards from the enclosure in order to avoid changes in operation.
• Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal block screws within the tightening torque range specified
shown in Table10.2. 8
Table10.2 Tightening torque range
Location of Screw Tightening Torque Range
Module fixing screw (M3 12 screw) 0.36 to 0.48N•m
10.3.1 Precaution on installation
10.3 Module Installation
I/O module terminal block screw (M3 screw) 0.42 to 0.58N•m
I/O module terminal block fixing screw (M3.5 screw) 0.66 to 0.89N•m
Power supply module terminal screw (M3.5 screw) 0.66 to 0.89N•m
• Be sure to install a power supply module in the power supply installation slot of Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB,
Q3 DB, Q6 B, Q6 RB, Q6 WRB, QA1S6 B or QA6 B.
Even if the power supply module is not installed, when the I/O modules and intelligent function module
installed on the base units are of light load type, the modules may be operated.
In this case, because a voltage becomes unstable, we cannot guarantee the operation.
• When using an extension cable or a tracking cable, keep it away from the main circuit cable (high voltage
and large current).
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.94 inches) or more from the main circuit.
• The following are precautions on use in combination with a module whose depth is 130mm or more (Q66DA-
G).
1) A module that is less than 130mm in depth cannot be mounted between modules that are 130mm or more
in depth.
2) A module that is less than 130mm in depth cannot be mounted on the right side of a module that is 130mm
or more in depth.
3) If a module that is 130mm or more in depth is mounted in slot 0 with the Q64P(N) used as power supply,
operations such as installing or removing a CPU memory card may be difficult.
Although there is no problem with the operation behavior, if it is inconvenient, mount a module that is less
than 130mm in depth in slot 0 or leave the slot empty.
10 - 11
Install a main base unit, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU (by screwing) in the following procedure.
4) Fit the two base unit top mounting screws into the enclosure.
Panel
Figure 10.6 Installing a main base unit,Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU
5) Place the right-hand side notch of the base unit onto the right-hand side screw.
Panel
Figure 10.7 Installing a main base unit, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU
6) Place the left-hand side pear-shaped hole onto the left-hand side screw.
Panel
Figure 10.8 Install a main base unit, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU
7) Fit the mounting screws into the holes at the bottom of the base unit, and then
retighten the all mounting screws.
• Install the main base unit, Q00JCPU, and Q00UJCPU on the panel while no module is mounted in the right-end
slot on the base.
When removing the base from the panel, remove the module mounted on the right-end slot first and then the base
unit.
• The mounting screws that provided with the slim type main base unit differ from those provided with other types of
the base unit.
For mounting screws for the slim type main base unit, order "cross recessed head bind screw M4 x 12 (black)."
10 - 12
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
Note the following when mounting a DIN rail.
Mounting a DIN rail needs special adaptors (optional), which are user-prepared. 9
(a) Applicable adaptor types
For Q38B,Q312B,Q68B,Q612B,Q38RB,Q68RB, 10
Q65WRB,Q38DB,Q312DB : Q6DIN1
For Q35B,Q65B,Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU : Q6DIN2
For Q33B,Q52B,Q55B,Q63B,Q32SB,Q33SB,Q35SB : Q6DIN3 3
Table10.3 Parts included with DIN rail mounting adaptors
Quantity of included parts
DIN rail mounting
Mounting screw
4
adaptors Adaptor(Large) Adaptor(small) Square washer Stopper
(M5 10)
Q6DIN1 2 4 3 3 2
5
Q6DIN2 2 3 2 2 2
Q6DIN3 1 2 2 2 2
(b) Adaptor installation method 6
The way to install the adaptors for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit is given in Figure 10.9.
Base unit rear
7
10.3.1 Precaution on installation
10.3 Module Installation
Place the hook of the adaptor Push the top of the adaptor
(small) in the lower hole. (small) far enough until it
"clicks".
Insert the adaptor (large) into the grooves of Push the bottom of the adaptor (large) far enough
the base unit from below. until it "clicks".
Figure 10.9 Adaptor installation method
10 - 13
(c) Applicable DIN rail types (IEC 60715)
TH35-7.5Fe
TH35-7.5Al
TH35-15Fe
(d) Distance between DIN rail mounting screws
When using DIN rail, DIN rail mounting screws must be inserted in 200 mm (7.88 inches) distances or less in
order to ensure that the rail has sufficient strength.
DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw
(obtained by user)
35mm
(1.38 inch)
P P P
P=200mm (7.88 inch) or less
Figure 10.10 Distance between DIN rail mounting screws
When installing the DIN rail in a frequent vibration and/or shock prone environment, insert the mounting screws
in 200mm interrals or less by the following method show below.
<For Q38B, Q312B, Q68B, Q612B, Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB, Q38DB or Q312DB type>
Screw the DIN rail in three places using the mounting screws and square washers included with the DIN rail
mounting adaptors (hereafter referred to as the adaptors) in ‘Position A’ (bottom of base unit).
B *3 A *2 B *3
Mounting screws (included with adaptors)
Mounting screws (obtained by user)
Square washers necessary *1
DIN rail No square washers
35mm
Stopper
P P P P
Stopper
P=200mm (7.88 inch) or less
Figure 10.11 Distance between DIN rail mounting screws
10 - 14
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
<For Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q33B, Q35B, Q65B, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q32SB, Q33SB or Q35SB type>
Screw the DIN rail in two places using the mounting screws and square washers included with the adaptors in 9
‘Position A’ (bottom of base unit).
B *3 A *2 B *3
Mounting screws
(included with adaptors)
Mounting screws (obtained by user) 10
DIN rail Square washers necessary *1 No square washers
35mm
3
Stopper
Stopper
P P P 4
P=200mm (7.88 inch) or less
Figure 10.12 Distance between DIN rail mounting screws
5
*1: The following shows where to position the square washers.
6
Square washer DIN rail Mounting screws DIN rail
7
square washer Mounting side
(e.g. Control panel)
Mounting screws 8
(M5 10) Side view A Side view A
Figure 10.13 Square washer
*2: Screw the DIN rail to a control panel using the mounting screws and square washers included with the adaptors in
‘Position A’ (bottom of base unit).
10.3.1 Precaution on installation
10.3 Module Installation
*3: Screw the DIN rail with mounting screws(obtained by user) in ‘Position B’ (Where the base unit is not installed). In this
method the supplied mounting screws and square washers are not used.
● Use only one washer for each mounting screw. Use only the square washers supplied with the adaptors.
If two or more washers are used together for one mounting screw, the screw may interfere with the base unit.
● Make sure to align the square washer sides with the DIN rail.
square washer DIN rail square washer DIN rail
Figure 10.14 Precautions when mounting a square washer
● Use the DIN rail that is compatible with M5 size screws.
10 - 15
(e) Stopper mounting
When using the DIN rail in the environment with frequent vibration, use stoppers included with the DIN rail
mounting adaptor shown in (a).
1) Loosen the screw at the top of the Hook Stopper
stopper. (2 stoppers) 1)
Hook
2) Hitch the lower hook of the stopper
to the bottom of the DIN rail. Install
the stopper with the arrowhead side 3) Hitch hook to top of
facing up. DIN rail
3) Hitch the upper hook of the stopper
to the top of the DIN rail. 2) Hitch hook to bottom
of DIN rail
4) Slide the stopper to the end of the
base unit so that they are fully in Stopper 4)
contact.
5)
5) Tighten the screw of the stopper DIN rail
with a screwdriver.
(Tightening torque 1.00 to 1.35N m) (Left side)
4) Stopper
5)
DIN rail
(Right side)
Make sure that the left and right
stoppers are fixed securely to the
DIN rail. Stopper Stopper
Complete
Figure 10.15 Fixture mounting procedure
10 - 16
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
In addition, when three or more modules with 130mm or more in depth (such as Q66DA-G etc.) are mounted,
or when the base unit is used in the environment with extremely frequent vibration, use the Q6DIN1A Q-type 9
base DIN rail mounting adaptor (vibration-proofing bracket kit) where the large mounting bracket is included.
The large mounting bracket enables to enhance the resistance to vibration. Depending on the environment, it is
recommended to mount the base unit directly on the control panel. 10
1) Q6DIN1A applicable models
Q00JCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q33B, Q35B, Q38B, Q312B, Q32SB, Q33SB, Q35SB, Q38RB, Q38DB, Q312DB,
Q52B, Q55B, Q63B, Q65B, Q68B, Q612B, Q68RB, Q65WRB
3
Table10.4 Q-type base DIN rail mounting adaptor (Vibration-proofing bracket kit) included parts
Quantity of included parts 4
DIN rail mounting Module
Mounting
adaptor (Vibration- Adaptor Adaptor mounting Square Mounting Mounting
Stopper screw
proofing bracket kit) (Large) (small) screw washer bracket L bracket R
(M5 10)
5
(M4 10)
Q6DIN1A 2 4 4 3 2 1 1 3
6
When stoppers are used, the dimension of stoppers need to be considered in the unit installation dimensions. Refer to a
CPU user's manual for the base unit dimensions (W). 7
Base unit
Stopper Stopper
(1.93) (1.93)
49
35(1.38)
98(3.86)
49
10.3.1 Precaution on installation
10.3 Module Installation
DIN rail
Base unit width : W DIN rail center
W+18(0.71)
Unit: mm (inch)
Figure 10.16 Base unit external dimensions (Front face)
10 - 17
(f) Dimensions when DIN rail is attached (Side view).
Board side
DIN rail depth (D)
TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al:7.5 (0.30) D 7.5 Base unit Power supply module
TH35-15Fe:15 (0.59) (0.30)
5
(0.20)
DIN rail adaptor
(49 (1.93))
DIN rail: TH35-7.5Fe,
TH35-7.5Al,
TH35-15Fe
98 (3.86)
35 (1.38)
(49 (1.93))
(0.12)
3
Example) Q64PN Power supply module = 115 (4.53)
Unit: mm (inch)
Figure 10.17 External dimensions (Side face)
10 - 18
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
10.3.2 Instructions for mounting the base unit
9
When mounting the programmable controller to an enclosure or similar, fully consider its operability, maintainability and
environmental resistance.
10
(1) Module mounting position
Keep the clearances shown in Figure 10.18 or Figure 10.19 between the top/bottom faces of the module and
other structures or parts to ensure good ventilation and facilitate module replacement.
3
(a) In case of main base unit or extension base unit
4
Indicates the panel top, wiring duct or any
part position.
30mm(1.18 inch) Programmable
5
5, 6 or more controller
1, 5
6
Panel Door
4 30mm(1.18 inch)
20mm
(0.79 inch) 7
or more
or more
3
4, 5
8
5mm (0.20 inch) or more 2, 6 5mm (0.20 inch) or more 6
*1: For wiring duct with 50mm (1.97 inches) or less height.
10.3.2 Instructions for mounting the base unit
10.3 Module Installation
40mm (1.58 inches) or more for other cases.
*2: 20mm (0.79 inches) or more when the adjacent module is not removed and the extension cable is connected.
*3: 80mm (3.15 inches) or more for the connector type. 140mm (5.51 inches) or more for installing a tracking cable when
using a Redundant CPU. 80mm (3.15 inches) or more for installing the Q8BAT cable when using the Q8BAT.
*4: 45mm (1.77 inches) or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
*5: 30mm (1.18 inches) or more from the top and bottom of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
*6: 5mm (0.20 inches) or more from the right and left of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
Figure 10.18 Module mounting position
10 - 19
(b) In case of slim type main base unit
Indicates the panel top, wiring duct or any
part position.
30mm (1.18 inch) Programmable
5, 6 or more controller
1, 5
Panel Door
20mm
(0.79 inch)
4 30mm (1.18 inch)
or more
or more
3
4, 5
17 mm (0.67 inch) or more 2, 6 5mm (0.20 inch) or more 6
*1: For wiring duct with 50mm (1.97 inches) or less height.
40mm (1.58 inches) or more for other cases.
*2: The cable of the power supply module of the slim type main base unit protrudes out of the left end of the module. Install
the module while reserving 17mm (0.67 inches) or more wiring space.
If the cable sheath is susceptible to damage caused by a structural object or part on the left side of the module, take a
protective measure with spiral tube or a similar insulator.
*3: 80mm (3.15 inches) or more for the connector type. 80mm (3.15 inches) or more for installing the Q8BAT cable when
using the Q8BAT.
*4: 45mm (1.77 inches) or more when the Q7BAT is mounted.
*5: 30mm (1.18 inches) or more from the top and bottom of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
*6: 5mm (0.20 inches) or more from the right and left of the Q8BAT when the Q8BAT is mounted.
Figure 10.19 Module mounting position
(2) Module mounting orientation
• Install the programmable controller in the orientation in Figure 10.20 to ensure good ventilation for heat
release.
Figure 10.20 Orientation in which modules can be mounted
• Do not mount it in either of the orientations shown in Figure 10.21.
Horizontal installation
Vertical mounting
Figure 10.21 Orientation in which modules cannot be mounted
10 - 20
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(3) Installation surface 9
Mount the base unit on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is not even, this may strain the printed circuit boards
and cause malfunctions.
10
(4) Installation of unit in an area where the other devices are installed
Avoid mounting base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic contractors and no-fuse circuit 3
breakers; mount these on a separate panel or at a distance.
(5) Distances from the other devices 4
In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat, provide the clearances indicated below between the
programmable controller and devices that generate noise or heat (contactors and relays).
• Required clearance in front of programmable controller : at least 100 mm (3.94 inches)* 5
• Required clearance on the right and left of programmable controller : at least 50 mm (1.97 inches)
7
At least
50mm (1.97 inch)
At least At least 8
100mm 50mm (1.97 inch)
(3.94 inch)
Contactor, relay, etc.
10.3.2 Instructions for mounting the base unit
10.3 Module Installation
*: When using a Redundant CPU, keep a distance of 100mm (3.94 inches) or more between the programmable controller
and the tracking cable.
Figure 10.22 Distances from the other devices
10 - 21
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module
This section explains how to install and remove a power supply, CPU, I/O, intelligent function or another module to and
from the base unit.
(1) Installation and removal of the module from Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, Q3 DB,
Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB and Q6 WRB
(a) Installation of module on Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, Q3 DB, Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB
and Q6 WRB
Base unit
Securely insert the module
fixing projection (*1) into the
module fixing hole so that the
latch is not misaligned.
Base unit
module Module
fixing hook mounting lever
( 2)
Using the module fixing hole Module fixing
as a supporting point, push projection
the module in the derection
Module connector
of arrow until it clicks.
Base unit
Module fixing hole
Module fixing
projection ( 1) Module
Module
Make sure that the module mounting lever
is inserted in the base unit
securely.
Module protection
Completed
Figure 10.23 Module mounting procedure
10 - 22
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
*1: If the module has two module fixing projections, insert the two module fixing projections on the right and left into the
module fixing holes so that they are not misaligned. 9
Module hook
Base unit hook
10
Q6 RP
3
4
Center top
5
Push
6
Figure 10.24 Mounting the Q6 RP
*2: If the module has two module fixing projections on its top, push the center top of the module so that the two module fixing
hooks on the right and left are securely engaged with the base unit hooks.
7
● When mounting the module, always insert the module fixing projection into the module fixing hole of the base unit.
At that time, securely insert the module fixing projection so that it does not come off from the module fixing hole.
8
Failure to do so may damage the module connector and module.
● When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibration or impact, secure the CPU module to
the base unit using screws.
Module fixing screw : M3 X 12 (user-prepared)
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module
10.3 Module Installation
● After first use of the product, do not mount or remove the module onto or from the base unit and the terminal block to or
from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively. Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause
malfunction.
10 - 23
(b) Removal from Q3 B, Q3 SB, Q3 RB, Q3 DB, Q5 B, Q6 B, Q6 RB, and
Q6 WRB
Support the module with both
hands and securely press the
module fixing hook(*1) with your
finger.
Push
Lifting
Pull the module based on the
supporting point of module bottom Module fixing
while pressing the module fixing hook 1
hook (*1).
Module
connector
Unit/Module
While lifting the module, take off
the module fixing projection (*2) Base unit
from the module fixing hole.
Module fixing hole
Completed
Figure 10.25 Module removal procedure
*1: If the module has two module fixing hooks on its top, push the two modules fixing projections on the right and left of the
module top simultaneously with your fingers until they stop.
Push simultaneously
Module fixing projection
Figure 10.26 Q6 RP removal procedure
*2: If the module has two fixing projections, remove the two module fixing projections on the right and left of the module
bottom from the module fixing holes.
When removing the module which is secured by module fixing screw, remove the module fixing screw first and then module
fixing projection off the module fixing hole of the base unit.
Failure to do so may damage the module fixing projection.
10 - 24
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(2) Installation and removal of the module from QA1S6 B 9
(a) Installation of module on QA1S6 B
10
Insert the module fixing Base unit
projections into the module Unit/Module
fixing hole in the base unit.
Module
3
connector
Using the module fixing hole as Module fixing 4
a support, install the module cutout
onto the base unit by pushing it
in the direction of arrow.
module fixing
projection 5
Make sure that the 6
module is firmly inserted
in the base unit. Then,
secure it with the module
mounting screw.
7
8
Completed
Unit installation screw
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module
10.3 Module Installation
Base unit Unit/Module
Figure 10.27 Module mounting procedure
Make sure to mount the module with the module fixing projection inserted into the module fixing hole, using the module fixing
screws.
Failure to do so may damage the module connector and module.
10 - 25
(b) Removal from QA1S6 B
Remove the module
mounting screw, and
using the bottom of the Base unit
module as a support,
pull the top of the
module toward you.
Module connector
Unit/Module
Lift the module upwards Module fixing cutout
and remove the module
fixing projection from the
module fixing hole.
Completed
Figure 10.28 Module removal procedure
When removing the module which is secured by module fixing screw, remove the module fixing screw first and then module
fixing projection off the module fixing hole of the base unit.
Failure to do so may damage the module fixing projection.
10 - 26
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(3) Installation and removal of modules 9
(a) Installation of module on QA6 B
10
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module
10.3 Module Installation
10 - 27
For use in an environment with particularly frequent vibrations and/or shock, secure the module to
the base with screws. The applicable screw size is M4(0.16) 0.7(0.03) 12mm (0.47 inches).
Refer to the figure on the right.
To mount a module, Insert the module fixing projection(s) into the fixing
hole(s) in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place.
CAUTION
Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction, failure, or a drop of the
module.
When using in an environment of frequent vibrations, secure the module
with a screw.
Tighten the screw within the specified torque range.
Undertightning can cause drop of the screw, circuit or malfunction.
Overtightning can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop,
short circuit, or malfunction.
10 - 28
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(b) Removal from QA6 B 9
10
10.3.3 Installation and removal of module
10.3 Module Installation
Disengage the hook from the module fixing hole (A) and then remove the module fixing projection from the module fixing
hole (B). Attempting to remove the module forcibly may damage the hook or module fixing projection.
10 - 29
10.4 How to set the Base Number for the Extension Base Unit
When using two or more extension base units, the base number must be set with their base number setting
connectors.*1
(The number of extension bases is set to 1 by factory default.)
*1: Since the Q6 WRB is fixed to the extension 1, extension base No. setting is not required.
(1) Setting the extension base number
Set the extension base number in the following procedure.
1) The base number setting connector of the extension base unit is located under the IN side base cover.
(Setting of the extension number setting connector ( Section 6.1.4))
First, loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove the base cover from the
extension base unit.
Fixing screw
Extension base unit
Flat blade screwdriver
Base cover
Base cover
Figure 10.29 Removing a base cover
2) Insert the connector pin in the required base number location of the connector (PIN1) existing between the
IN and OUT sides of the extension cable connector.
Connector pin
Figure 10.30 Setting the number of extension bases
10 - 30
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
3) Install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover screw.
(Tightening torque: 0.36 to 0.48N•m) 9
Fixing screw
Base cover
Extension base unit 10
Base cover
Flat blade screwdriver 4
Figure 10.31 Base cover removal procedure
5
Set the numbers for extension base units in the order of connecting, starting from the one connected to the main base unit.
10.4 How to set the Base Number for the Extension Base Unit
10 - 31
(2) Precautions for setting the extension base numbers
(a) Setting order
Set the extension base number consecutively.
In Auto mode, when any extension base number is skipped, no slots will be allocated to an empty extension
base so that the slots cannot be reserved.
For details of the base mode, refer to the follwoing.
Manuals for the CPU module used (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply
CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q68B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Extension 1
Q68B
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Extension 2
Skipped
stage number
Q68B
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Extension 3
Figure 10.32 The number of slots when a extension base number is skipped
10 - 32
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(b) When the same number is set 9
The same extension number cannot be set.
Main base unit
Q312B 10
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply
module
CPU module 4
Extension base unit
Q68B 5
Extension 1
6
The same extension stage
7
Q68B number cannot be set!
Extension 1
Extension stage number
setting connector
10.4 How to set the Base Number for the Extension Base Unit
Figure 10.33 When the same extension number is set
10 - 33
(c) When connector pins are connectd in more than 2 positions, or no pin is used
The extension base unit cannot be used when connector pins for base number setting are inserted in more
than two positions and when not using any connector pin.
Main base unit
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
Power supply
CPU module
module
Extension base unit
Q68B
Extension 1
Connector pins must not be
inserted in 2 or more positions!
Q68B
Extension 2
Connector pin must be inserted!
Figure 10.34 Connector pins are used in 2 positions, and not using any connector pin
10 - 34
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(d) Extension base positioning for AnS/A series-compatible extension base units 9
(QA1S6 B, QA6 B, and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B)
When using AnS/A series-compatible extension base units in combination, connect Q5 B/Q6 B closest to
the main base unit, and then QA1S6 B, QA6 B, and then QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B.
10
Note that the QA1S6 B and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B cannot be used in combination.
Main base unit 3
Q312B
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Slot number
5
Power supply
module CPU module
Extension base unit
6
Q68B
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Extension 1 Extension base unit for
mounting module corresponding
to the Q Series 7
(Q5 B/Q6 B is connected to
the main base unit or Q5 B/
Q6 B.)
QA1S68
8
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Extension 2 Extension base unit for
mounting module corresponding
to the AnS series (QA1S6 B is
connected to the main base unit,
10.4 How to set the Base Number for the Extension Base Unit
the end of the Q5 B/Q6 B or
QA1S6 B)
QA68B
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Extension 3
Extension base unit for mounting
module corresponding to the A
series 2 (QA6 B is connected to
the main base unit, the end of
the Q5 B/Q6 B/QA1S6 B or
QA6 B)
Figure 10.35 Extension base positioning for the AnS/A series-compatible extension base units
*1: When using the QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B, connect it below the QA6 B.
10 - 35
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable
(1) Instructions for handling an extension cable
• Do not step on an extension cable.
• Connect the extension cable to the base unit with the base cover installed to the base unit.
(After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit, reinstall and screw the base cover.)
• When laying an extension cable, secure 55mm (2.17 inches) or more as the minimum cable bending radius.
If it is less than 55mm (2.17 inches), a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration, cable
disconnection or the like.
• The overall length of extension cables must be up to 13.2m (43.31 feet).
• Do not install extension cables with the main circuit (high voltage and large current) line.
• When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable, do not hold the ferrite cores mounted at both ends of
the cable.
Hold the connector part of the cable for connection or disconnection.
Main base unit
Connector
Ferrite core
Extension cable
Figure 10.36 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable
Holding the ferrite core may cause the cable disconnection in the connector.
Also, if the ferrite core position is shifted, the characteristic will change. When handling the cable, do not to shift
the ferrite core position.
10 - 36
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(2) Connection of extension cable 9
10
When connecting an extension base unit to the main base unit with an extension cable, plug the OUT side connector of the
main base unit and the IN side connector of the extension base unit with an extension cable. The system will not operate
properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to IN, OUT to OUT or IN to OUT.
When connecting two or more extension base units, plug the OUT side connector of the first extension base unit and the IN
side connector of the second extension base unit with an extension cable.
3
• To connect an extension cable to the main base unit, remove the portion under the OUT characters on the
4
base cover with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver (5.5 75, 6 100).
This also applies to a case where an extension cable is connected to the OUT side connector of the
extension base unit.
5
When connecting an extension cable to the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU, remove the base cover manually.
To remove the base cover, insert the tip of a screwdriver into a clearance below the base cover and pry it up.
Be careful not to damage the connector when inserting the screw driver since a connector is located inside
6
the base cover.
Main base unit Extension base unit
Base cover
Cut at 3 places
of thin wall
OUT side of
base cover
Cut at 3 places
of thin wall
7
10.5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable
Flat blade screwdriver Flat blade screwdriver
Figure 10.37 Connection of extension cable
10 - 37
• To connect the extension cable to the next extension base unit, remove the sticker put under the IN
characters on the base cover.
Extension base unit
IN side of
base cover
Seal
Figure 10.38 Connection of extension cable
• When plugging the extension cable to any base unit, hold the connector part of the extension cable.
Main base unit
Connector
Extension cable
Figure 10.39 Connection of extension cable
• After fitting the extension cable, always tighten the extension cable connector fixing screws.
(Tightening torque: 0.20N•m)
Main base unit
Fixing screw
Flat blade screwdriver
Figure 10.40 Connection of extension cable
(3) Disconnection of extension cable
When disconnectiong the extension cable, hold and pull the connector part of the extension cable after confirming
that the fixing screws have been completely removed.
10 - 38
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
10.6 Wiring
9
10.6.1 Wiring precautions 10
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before 3
wiring.
DANGER
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product.
After wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before 4
turning it on for operation.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
5
Ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor
dedicated to the programmable controller.
CAUTION
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction. 6
Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module,
and connect the cables correctly.
Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect 7
wiring may cause a fire or failure.
Connectors for external connection must be crimped or pressed with the
tool specified by the manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. 8
Incomplete connections could result in short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range.
Undertightning can cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.
10.6.1 Wiring precautions
10.6 Wiring
Overtightening can cause damage the screw and/or module, resulting in
drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the
module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign
matter, such as wire chips, from entering the module during wiring.
Do not remove the film during wiring.
Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation.
Mitsubishi programmable controller must be installed in a control panels.
Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the
control panel through a relay terminal block.
Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by
a maintenance personnel who is familiar with protection against
electricshock.
(For the wiring methods, refer to Section 10.6.2.)
10 - 39
This section describes the precautions for wiring power supply lines.
(1) Wiring power supply lines
• Wire the power supply lines for programmable controller, I/O devices, and motor equipment separately as
shown in Figure 10.41.
• If there is much noise, such as lightning surge, connect an isolation transformer.
For details on the isolation transformer, refer to the following.
Section 9.1.6(3) Isolation transformer
• Taking rated current or inrush current into consideration when wiring the power supply, connect a breaker or
an external fuse that have proper blown and detection.
When using a single programmable controller, a 10A breaker or an external fuse are recommended for
wiring protection.
Programmable Isolation
Main controller power transformer
power supply supply
100VAC Programmable
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
Motor power supply
Motor equipment
Inside a control panel
Figure 10.41 Power supply wiring
• Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of two or more power supply modules in parallel to supply power to one
I/O module. Parallel connection will damage the power supply modules.
Power supply module I/O module Power supply module I/O module
DC24V
DC24V DC24V External power supply
Figure 10.42 Cautions when connecting a power supply module
• 100VAC, 200VAC and 24VDC wires must be twisted as dense as possible.
Connect the modules with the shortest distance.
Also, to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum, use the thickest wires possible (maximum 2mm2).
• Do not bundle the 100VAC and 24VDC wires with, or run them close to, the main circuit (high voltage, large
current) and I/O signal lines (including common line). Reserve a distance of at least 100 mm from adjacent
wires.
10 - 40
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
• Momentary power failure may be detected or the CPU module may be reset due to serge caused by
lightening. 9
As measures against serge caused by lightening, connect a surge absorber for lightening as shown in
Figure 10.43.
Using the surge absorber for lightening can reduce the influence of lightening. 10
Programmable
controller 3
AC
I/O devices
4
E1 E1 E2
5
E1 Surge absorber for lightening
Figure 10.43 Connecting a lightning surge absorber
6
7
● Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening (E1) from that of the programmable controller (E2).
● Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit
voltage even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation.
8
10.6.1 Wiring precautions
10.6 Wiring
10 - 41
(2) Wiring of I/O equipment
• Insulation-sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used with the terminal block.
It is recommended to cover the wire connections of the crimping terminals with mark or insulation tubes.
• The wires used for connection to the terminal block must be 0.3 to 0.75mm2 in core and 2.8mm (0.11 inches)
max. in outside diameter.
• Run the input and output lines away from each other.
• When the lines cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines, use a batch-shielded cable and
ground it on the programmable controller side.
In some cases, ground it in the opposite side.
Programmable
controller
Shield cable
Input
RA
Output Shield jacket
DC
Figure 10.44 Wiring of I/O equipment
• Where wiring runs through piping, ground the piping.
• Run the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines.
• Wiring of 200m (686.67 feet) or longer will raises current leakage due to the line capacity, resulting in a fault.
• To prevent electric shock or malfunction, provide the external power supply for the module to be changed
online with means that can turn the power supply off individually, e.g. a switch. ( Section 12.4)
For details, refer to Section 12.5.
• As a countermeasure against the power surge due to lightning, separate the AC wiring and DC wiring and
connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown in (1) of item (10.6.1).
Failure to do so increases the risk of I/O device failure due to lightning.
10 - 42
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(3) Grounding 9
For grounding, perform the following:
• Use a dedicated grounding wire as far as possible. (Grounding resistance of 100
• When a dedicated grounding cannot be provided, use (2) Common grounding shown below.
or less.)
10
Programmable
controller
Another
equipment
Programmable
controller
Another
equipment
Programmable
controller
Another
equipment
3
Grounding Grounding
4
(1) Independent grounding Best (2) Common grounding Good (3) Joint grounding Not allowed
Figure 10.45 Grounding procedures
5
2
• For grounding a cable, use the cable of 2 mm or more.
Position the ground-contact point close to the programmable controller as much as possible so that the
length of the grounding cable will be shorten. 6
10.6.1 Wiring precautions
10.6 Wiring
10 - 43
10.6.2 Connecting to the power supply module
The following figure shows the wiring example of lines such as power lines and grounding lines to the main base unit
and extension base units.
(1) Singular power supply system
Main base unit
100/110VAC
(Q38B)
AC Q61P-A1 CPU module
Fuse
ERR 1
AC
DC FG
24VDC
LG
INPUT
100-120VAC
Connect to 24VDC
terminals of I/O module
that requires 24VDC
internally. Extension base unit
(Q68B)
Extension cable Q61P-A1 I/O module
ERR 1
FG
100VAC LG
INPUT
100-120VAC
Ground wire
Grounding
*1: The operation of the ERR terminal is as fllows.
<When the power supply module is mounted on the main base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, or the
fuse of the power supply module is blown.
<When the power supply module is mounted on the extension base unit>
The terminal is always off (opened).
Figure 10.46 Single power supply system wiring example
● Use the thickest possible (max. 2 mm2 (14 AWG)) wires for the 100/200VAC and 24VDC power cables. Twist these
wires starting at the connection terminals. Use a solderless terminal for wiring a terminal block. To prevent short-circuit
due to loosening screws, use the solderless terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8 mm (0.03 inches) or less.
Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
● When LG and FG terminals are connected, ground the wires.
If not, the programmable controller may become susceptible to noise.
Since the LG terminal has a half of the input voltage, touching this terminal may result in electric shock.
● No system error can be detected by the ERR terminal of an extension base unit. (The ERR terminal is always set to
off.)
10 - 44
CHAPTER10 LOADING AND INSTALLATION
(2) Redundant power supply system 9
System A System B 100V/200VAC
AC
10
Redundant power main base unit
(Q38RB)
Q64RP Q64RP CPU module
3
4
2, 3 2, 3
ERR ERR
100V/200VAC FG FG
LG LG
AC INPUT INPUT
100/ 100/
200VAC 200VAC
5
Redundant power extension base unit
6
(Q68RB)
Q64RP Q64RP I/O module
Extension cable
ERR
2, 3
ERR
2, 3 7
FG FG
LG LG
INPUT INPUT
Ground wire
100/
200VAC
100/
200VAC 8
Grounding
100V/200VAC
10.6.2 Connecting to the power supply module
10.6 Wiring
AC
100V/200VAC
AC
*2: The operation of the ERR terminal is as fllows.
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power main base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the AC power is not input, a CPU module stop error (including a reset) occurs, the
redundant power supply module fails, or the fuse of the redundant power supply module is blown.
<When the redundant power supply module is mounted on the redundant power extension base unit>
The terminal turns off (opens) when the redundant power supply module fails.
*3 When input power is supplied to the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power main base unit
and the redundant power supply module mounted on the redundant power extension base unit simultaneously, the ON
(short) timing of the ERR terminal on the redundant power main base unit is later than that of the ERR terminal on the
redundant power extension base unit by the initial processing time of the CPU module.
Figure 10.47 Redundant power supply system wiring example
10 - 45
● Use the thickest possible (max. 2 mm2 (14 AWG)) wires for the 100/200VAC and 24VDC power cables. Twist these
wires starting at the connection terminals. Use a solderless terminal for wiring a terminal block. To prevent short-circuit
due to loosening screws, use the solderless terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8 mm (0.03 inches) or less.
Note that up to two solderless terminals can be connected per terminal block.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
● Supply power to two redundant power supply modules individually (redundant power supply system).
● When two redundant power supply modules (Q64RP) are placed together and operated as a redundant power supply
system, it is recommended to use one of them as an AC power input and connect the other to an uninterruptible power
supply to the other.
● When the LG and FG terminals are connected, ground the wires.
If not, the programmable controller may become susceptible to noise.
Since the LG terminal has a half of the input voltage, touching this termial may result in electric shock.
10 - 46
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 1
2
Do not touch the terminals while power is on.
Doing so will cause electric shock.
DANGER
Correctly connect the battery connector. 11
Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw
the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, 4
resulting in injury and fire.
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases
before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or 5
module fixing screws.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or 6
malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in
drop, short circuit, or malfunction. 7
11 - 1
Before performing online operations (especially, program
modification, forced output, and operation status change) for the
CAUTION
running CPU module from the peripheral connected, read relevant
manuals carefully and ensure the safety.
Do not disassemble of modify the modules.
Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury or a fire.
Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or
PHS (Personal Handy-phone System) more than 25cm (9.85
inches) away in all directions from the programmable controller.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases
before mounting or removing the module. Failure to do so may
cause the module to fail or malfunction.
A module can be replaced online (while power is on) on any
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station or in the system where a CPU
module supporting the online module change function is used.
Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be
replaced online, and each module has its predetermined
replacement procedure.
( Section 12.4.1).
After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module
to/from the base unit, and the terminal block to/from the module
more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the
module.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak
inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it
without using.
Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to
discharge the static electricity from the human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
In order to use the programmable controller in normal and optimal condition at all times, this section describes
items that must be maintained or inspected daily or at regular intervals.
11 - 2
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
11.1 Daily Inspection
1
The items that must be inspected daily are listed in Table11.1.
2
Table11.1 Daily inspection
Item Inspection Item Inspection Judgment Criteria Measures
Check that fixing screws are
11
The screws and cover must be
1 Installation of base unit not loose and the cover is not Retighten the screws.
installed securely
dislocated.
Check that the module is not The module fixing hook must 4
Securely engaged the module
2 Installation of I/O module dislocated and the unit fixing be engaged and installed
fixing hook.
hook is engaged securely. securely.
Check for loose terminal
Screws must not be loose. Retighten the terminal screws.
5
screws.
The proper clearance must be
Check for distance between
3 Connecting conditions
solderless terminals.
provided between solderless
terminals.
Correct.
6
Check that the cable connec- Retighten the connector fixing
Connections must no be loose.
tor is not loose. screws.
Power supply The LED must be on (green).
7
module Check that the LED is on. (Error if the LED is off or on
POWER LED*1 (red)).
The LED must be on (green or 8
Power supply
orange) or flashing (orange).
module Check that the LED is on.
(Error if the LED is off, on
LIFE LED*2
(red), or flashing (red))
11.1 Daily Inspection
The LED must be on (green).
CPU module
Check that the LED is on. (Error if the LED is off or flash-
MODE LED*3
ing.)
CPU module Check that the LED is on in The LED must be on. (Error if
RUN LED the RUN status. the LED is off.)
Module indication LED
CPU module The LED must be off. (Error if
Check that the LED is off.
ERR. LED the LED is on or flashing.)
4 CPU module The LED must be off. (Error if Section 12.2.
Check that the LED is off.
BAT. LED*4 the LED is on.)
The LED must be on when the
input power is turned on.
The LED must be off when the
Input module Check that the LED turns on
input power is turned off.
Input LED and off.
(Error if the LED does not turn
on or turn off as indicated
above.)
The LED turns on when the
output power is turned on.
The LED must be off when the
Output module Check that the LED turns on
output power is turned off.
Output LED and off.
(Error if the LED does not turn
on or turn off as indicated
above.)
*1: For the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU, check the POWER LED on the CPU module side.
*2: When the Life detection power supply module is used, check the LIFE LED.
*3: The Basic model QCPU does not have the MODE LED.
*4: The Basic model QCPU does not have the BAT. LED.
11 - 3
11.2 Periodic Inspection
The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year are listed below.
When the equipment has been relocated or modified, or wiring layout has been changed, perform this inspection.
Periodic Inspection
Table11.2 Periodic Inspection
Item Inspection Item Inspection Judgment Criteria Measures
Ambient temperature 0 to 55
Ambient environment
When the sequencer is used in
Ambient humidity 5 to 95 %RH *1
Measure with a thermometer the board, the ambient
1 and a hygrometer. temperature in the board
Measure corrosive gas. Corrosive gas must not be becomes the ambient
Atmosphere
present. temperature.
Measure a voltage between the 85 to 132VAC
2 Power voltage terminals of 100/200VAC and 170 to 264VAC Change the power supply.
24VDC. 15.6 to 31.2VDC
Retighten the screws.
Move the module to check for The module must be installed If the CPU, I/O, or power
Installation
Looseness, rattling
looseness and rattling. securely. supply module is loose, fix it
3
with screws.
Adhesion of dirt and Dirt and foreign matter must
Check visually. Remove and clean.
foreign matter not be present.
Looseness of terminal Try to further tighten screws
Screws must not be loose. Retighten the terminal screws.
screws with a screwdriver.
Connection
Proximity of solderless Solderless terminals must be
4 Check visually. Correct.
terminals to each other positioned at proper intervals.
Looseness of Retighten the connector fixing
Check visually. Connectors must not be loose.
connectors screws.
Check the BAT. LED at the Replace the battery when the
The LED must be off.
front side of the CPU module. BAT. LED is on.
Check the length of term after Must not be used more than 5 Replace the battery if it has
5 Battery purchasing the battery. years. been used more than 5 years.
Check that SM51 or SM52 is
Replace the battery when
turned off using GX Developer Must be turned off.
SM51 or SM52 is on.
in monitor mode.
The Error log must not be
6 PLC diagnostics Check the Error log. Section 12.3.3
updated.
Specify factors that increase
the scan time.
Maximum scan time must be
Check the values of SD526 (Check the operation status of
within the allowable range
7 Maximum scan time and SD527 using GX the trigger signal that passes
given in the specification of the
Developer in the monitor mode. through a loop if loop positions
system.
exist in the sequence
program.)
*1: When AnS/A Series module is included in the system, the judgement criteria will be from 10 to 90 % RH.
11 - 4
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
1
The batteries installed in the CPU module and SRAM card are used for data retention of the program memory,
standard RAM, and latch device during the power failure. Special relays SM51 and SM52 turn on due to the battery 2
voltage drop. Even if the special relays turn on, the program and retained data are not deleted immediately.
After relay SM51 turns on, replace the battery quickly within the backup power time for (3 minutes).
11
SM51 turns on when the battery voltage drops below the specified value, and remains on even after the voltage is recovered
to the normal value.
SM52 turns on when the battery voltage drops below the specified value, and turns off when the voltage is recovered to the
4
normal value.
After SM51 and/or SM52 turns on, replace the battery quickly.
5
SM51 and SM52 turn on when the battery voltage of the CPU module or SRAM card is lowered.
To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered, check the contents of the special resisters
SD51 and SD52.
6
b15 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD51, SD52 Fixed at 0
Battery error for CPU module When the battery
Battery alarm for SRAM card voltage is low, the 7
Battery error for SRAM card value is "1."
Figure 11.1 Bit pattern
For details of SD51 and SD52, refer to Section 12.8. 8
The cases for memory retention by the CPU module battery and the SRAM card battery are described below.
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
The important points are:
● The CPU module battery cannot retain the SRAM card memory.
● The SRAM card battery cannot retain the CPU module memory.
Table11.3 Cases for memory retention by the CPU module battery and the SRAM card battery.
Power supply Battery of CPU Memory of CPU Memory of SRAM
SRAM card battery
module module module card
Installed
Connected
Not installed
On
Installed
Not connected
Not installed
Installed
Connected
Not installed
Off
Installed
Not connected
Not installed
: Retained, : Not retained
11 - 5
11.3.1 Display of battery consumption and reduction measures of the
consumption
(1) Battery consumption
The battery consumption represents consumption of the CPU module battery energy.*1Note1
The larger value of the battery consumption in the table, the more battery per time unit is consumed.
The battery consumption depends on the factors of (a) to (c) as follows.
The following table shows the relationship of the factors and the battery consumption.
Table11.4 Battery consumption and causes for determining the consumption
Factors of battery consumption
(a) Battery (c) Size of file register file in Battery
life-prolonging (b) Module error log function*3 standard RAM (SR) consumption
function*2 <Unit: word>
Set ---- ---- 1
No file registers or 0K < SR 128K 2
Not set 128K < SR 384K 3
Not set
384K < SR 4
Set Refer to Table11.5.
When the standard RAM is set as a storage location for module error log data, battery consumption will be as
shown in Table11.5.
Table11.5 Battery consumption when module error log data are stored to the standard RAM
Battery consumption
(c) Size of file
Q10UD(E)H/
register file in
Q00U/01U/02U/ Q13UD(E)H/
standard RAM
Q03UD(E)/ Q6UD(E)HCPU Q20UD(E)H/
(SR)
Q04UD(E)HCPU Q26UD(E)HC
<Unit: word>
PU
0K SR 128K 2 3 3
128K < SR 384K ---- 3 4
384K < SR ---- ---- 4
*1: Applicable to the Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, and Q06UDHCPU if the serial numbers (first five digits) are
"10012" or later.
The current consumption level can be checked by referring to SD118 where the battery consumption value is stored.
*2: For details of the battery life-prolonging function, refer to the following.
( QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: For details of the module error log function, refer to the following.
( QnUCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Note1
Basic High
Note11.1 Redundant performance Process
The battery consumption value is displayed only for the Universal model QCPU.
11 - 6
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(2) Reduction measures of battery consumption 1
The following describes measures for reducing battery consumption.
• Enable the battery life-prolonging function.
• When storing a file register in standard the RAM, minimize the file register file.
2
• By performing the latch data backup function (to standard ROM), the battery life-prolonging function will be
enabled independent of the parameter setting.*4
If not powering on the programmable controller for a long period of time for shipment or other reason, back
11
up the data to the standard ROM.
*4: Except when the battery life-prolonging function has already been enabled.
4
11.3.1 Display of battery consumption and reduction measures of the consumption
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
11 - 7
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
(1) Battery (Q6BAT) lives of Basic model QCPUs
Table11.6 Battery life
Battery life
After SM52 turned
CPU module Power-on time Actual service
Guaranteed value on. (Backup power
model ratio*1 value (Reference
*2 time after an
value)*3
alarm*4)
26,000 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
0%
2.96 years 5.00 years 30 days
37,142 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
30%
4.23 years 5.00 years 30 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
Q00JCPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 30 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 30 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 30 days
26,000 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
0%
2.96 years 5.00 years 30 days
37,142 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
30%
4.23 years 5.00 years 30 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
Q00CPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 30 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 30 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 710 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 30 days
5,600 hours 25,175 hours 420 hours
0%
0.63 years 2.87 years 18 days
8,000 hours 35,964 hours 420 hours
30%
0.91 years 4.10 years 18 days
11,200 hours 43,800 hours 420 hours
Q01CPU 50%
1.27 years 5.00 years 18 days
18,666 hours 43,800 hours 420 hours
70%
2.13 years 5.00 years 18 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 420 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 18 days
*1: The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*2: The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 , which is calculated based on the characteristic values of
manufacturere-supplied memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of -25
to 75 (operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 ).
*3: The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at
storage ambient temperature of 40 . This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the
memory.
*4: In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
•The battery connector is disconnected.
•The lead wire of the battery is broken.
11 - 8
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1
● Do not use the battery exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● When the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life, take the following measures.
• Perform ROM operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off. 2
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery. 11
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
● The battery (Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not available for the Basic model QCPU. 4
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
11 - 9
(2) Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) lives of High Performance model QCPU,
Process CPU, and Redundant CPU
Table11.7 Battery life
Battery life*5
Q6BAT Q7BAT
After SM52 After SM52
CPU module Power-on Actual Actual
turned on. turned on.
model time ratio*1 service service
Guaranteed (Backup Guaranteed (Backup
value value
value*2 power time value*2 power time
(Reference (Reference
after an after an
value)*3 value)*3
alarm*4) alarm*4)
30,000 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
0%
3.42 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
42,857 hours 43,800hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
4.89 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800hours 240 hours
Q02CPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
2,341 hours 18,364 hours 120 hours 5,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
0%
0.26 years 2.09 years 5 days 0.57 years 5.00 years 10 days
3,344 hours 26,234 hours 120 hours 7,142 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
0.38 years 2.99 years 5 days 0.81 years 5.00 years 10 days
Q02HCPU 4,682 hours 36,728 hours 120 hours 10,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
50%
Q06HCPU 0.53 years 4.19 years 5 days 1.14 years 5.00 years 10 days
7,803 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 16,666 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
70%
0.89 years 5.00 years 5 days 1.90 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
1,897 hours 14,229 hours 96hours 4,051 hours 38,727 hours 192 hours
0%
0.21 years 1.62 years 4 days 0.46 years 4.42 years 8 days
2,710 hours 20,327 hours 96hours 5,787 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
30%
0.30 years 2.32 years 4 days 0.66 years 5.00 years 8 days
Q02PHCPU 3,794 hours 28,458 hours 96 hours 8,102 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
50%
Q06PHCPU 0.43 years 3.25 years 4 days 0.92 years 5.00 years 8 days
6,323 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours 13,503 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
70%
0.72 years 5.00 years 4 days 1.54 years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 9 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 4 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 8 days
1,260 hours 7,755 hours 48 hours 2,900 hours 21,107 hours 96 hours
0%
0.14 years 0.88 years 2 days 0.33 years 2.40 years 4 days
Q12HCPU 1,800 hours 11,079 hours 48 hours 4,142 hours 30,153 hours 96 hours
30%
Q25HCPU 0.20 years 1.26 years 2 days 0.47 years 3.44 years 4 days
Q12PHCPU 2,520 hours 15,510 hours 48 hours 5,800 hours 42,214 hours 96 hours
50%
Q25PHCPU 0.28 years 1.77 years 2 days 0.66 years 4.81 years 4 days
Q12PRHCPU 4,200 hours 25,850 hours 48 hours 9,666 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
Q25PRHCPU 70%
0.47 years 2.95 years 2 days 1.10 years 5.00 years 4 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 48 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 2 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 4 days
11 - 10
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Battery life*5
1
Q8BAT
CPU module *1
model
Power-on time ratio
Actual service value
After SM52 turned on. 2
Guaranteed value *2 (Backup power time
(Reference value)*3
after an alarm*4)
0%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours 11
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
5.00 years
43,800 hours
5.00 years
43,800 hours
10 days
240 hours
4
Q02CPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days 5
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
0%
20,498 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours 6
2.34 years 5.00 years 10 days
29,959 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
3.42 years 5.00 years 10 days 7
Q02HCPU 41,785 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
50%
Q06HCPU 4.77 years 5.00 years 10 days
70%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours 8
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
16,609 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
0%
1.89 years 5.00 years 8 days
23,727 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
30%
2.70 years 5.00 years 8 days
Q02PHCPU 33,218 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
50%
Q06PHCPU 3.79 years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 8 days
11,038 hours 29,609 hours 96 hours
0%
1.26 years 3.38 years 4 days
Q12HCPU 16,200 hours 42,311 hours 96 hours
30%
Q25HCPU 1.80 years 4.83 years 4 days
Q12PHCPU 22,075 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
50%
Q25PHCPU 2.52 years 5.00 years 4 days
Q12PRHCPU 37,055 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
Q25PRHCPU 70%
4.23 years 5.00 years 4 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 4 days
11 - 11
*1: The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*2: The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 , which is calculated based on the characteristic values of manufacturer-supplied
memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage ambient temperature range of -25 to 75 (operating ambient temperature of 0 to
55 ).
*3: The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient
temperature of 40 . This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the memory.
*4: In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of the battery is broken.
*5: For the High Performance model QCPU, these values are applicable when the serial number (first five digits) of the CPU module is
"05011" or later.
For the battery life of the CPU module with a serial number (first five digits) is "05010" or earlier, refer to Appendix 2.3.
● Do not use the battery exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● When the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life, take the following measures.
• Perform ROM operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turns on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
11 - 12
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(3) Battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) lives of the Universal model QCPU 1
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life 2
Q6BAT
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on. 11
Guaranteed value*3 (Backup power time
(Reference Value)*4
after an alarm*5)
0%
30,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 4
3.44 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
4.91 years 5.00 years 25 days
5
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
70%
43,800 hours
5.00 years
43,800 hours
5.00 years
600 hours
25 days
6
Q00U(J)CPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
Q01UCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q02UCPU 25,300 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
7
0%
Q03UD(E)CPU 2.89 years 5.00 years 25 days
36,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
4.12 years 5.00 years 25 days 8
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
30,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
3.44 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
4.91 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q04UD(E)HCPU
4,300 hours 32,100 hours 384hours
0%
0.49 years 3.66 years 16 days
6,100 hours 43,800 hours 384hours
30%
0.70 years 5.00 years 16 days
8,600 hours 43,800 hours 384hours
2 50%
0.98 years 5.00 years 16 days
14,300 hours 43,800 hours 384hours
70%
1.63 years 5.00 years 16 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 384hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 16 days
11 - 13
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q6BAT
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3 (Backup power time
(Reference Value)*4
after an alarm*5)
25,300 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
2.89 years 5.00 years 25 days
36,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
4.12 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
4,200 hours 32,100 hours 384 hours
0%
0.48 years 3.66 years 16 days
6,000 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours
30%
0.68 years 5.00 years 16 days
8,400 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours
Q06UD(E)HCPU 2 50%
0.96 years 5.00 years 16 days
14,000 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours
70%
1.60 years 5.00 years 16 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 16 days
2,300 hours 19,200 hours 192 hours
0%
0.26 years 2.19 years 8 days
3,200 hours 27,400 hours 192 hours
30%
0.37 years 3.13 years 8 days
4,600 hours 38,400 hours 192 hours
3 50%
0.53 years 4.38 years 8 days
7,600 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
70%
0.87years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 8 days
11 - 14
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q6BAT 2
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference Value)*4 (Backup power time
11
after an alarm*5)
22,600 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
2.58 years
32,200 hours
5.00 years
43,800 hours
25 days
600 hours
4
30%
3.68 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days 5
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 6
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
4,100 hours 26,200 hours 384 hours
0%
0.47 years 2.99 years 16 days 7
5,800 hours 37,400 hours 384 hours
30%
0.66 years 4.27 years 16 days
2 50%
8,200 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours 8
0.94 years 5.00 years 16 days
13,600 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours
70%
1.55 years 5.00 years 16 days
Q10UD(E)HCPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 384 hours
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
100%
Q13UD(E)HCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 16 days
Q20UD(E)HCPU 2,300 hours 18,600 hours 192 hours
0%
Q26UD(E)HCPU 0.26 years 2.12 years 8 days
3,200 hours 26,500 hours 192 hours
30%
0.37 years 3.03 years 8 days
4,600 hours 37,200 hours 192 hours
3 50%
0.53 years 4.25 years 8 days
7,600 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
70%
0.87 years 5.00 years 8 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 192 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 8 days
1,500 hours 13,800 hours 144 hours
0%
0.17 years 1.58 years 6 days
2,100 hours 19,700 hours 144 hours
30%
0.24 years 2.25 years 6 days
3,000 hours 27,600 hours 144 hours
4 50%
0.34 years 3.15 years 6 days
5,000 hours 43,800 hours 144 hours
70%
0.57 years 5.00 years 6 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 144 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 6 days
11 - 15
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q7BAT
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3 (Backup power time
(Reference Value)*4
after an alarm*5)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q00U(J)CPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
Q01UCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q02UCPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
Q03UD(E)CPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q04UD(E)HCPU
11,700 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
1.34 years 5.00 years 25 days
16,700 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
1.91 years 5.00 years 25 days
23,400 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
2.67 years 5.00 years 25 days
39,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
4.45 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11 - 16
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q7BAT 2
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference Value)*4 (Backup power time
11
after an alarm*5)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years
43,800 hours
5.00 years
43,800 hours
25 days
600 hours
4
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days 5
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 6
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11,400 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
1.30 years 5.00 years 25 days 7
16,200 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
1.85 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q06UD(E)HCPU 2 50%
22,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 8
2.60 years 5.00 years 25 days
38,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
4.34 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
5,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
0.57 years 5.00 years 25 days
7,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
0.81 years 5.00 years 25 days
10,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
1.14 years 5.00 years 25 days
16,600 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
1.89 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11 - 17
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q7BAT
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3 (Backup power time
(Reference Value)*4
after an alarm*5)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
1.27 years 5.00 years 25 days
15,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
1.80 years 5.00 years 25 days
22,200 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
2.53 years 5.00 years 25 days
37,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
4.22 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q10UD(E)HCPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
Q13UD(E)HCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q20UD(E)HCPU 5,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
Q26UD(E)HCPU 0.57 years 5.00 years 25 days
7,100 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
0.81 years 5.00 years 25 days
10,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
1.14 years 5.00 years 25 days
16,600 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
1.89 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
3,700 hours 36,100 hours 432 hours
0%
0.42 years 4.12 years 18 days
5,200 hours 43,800 hours 432 hours
30%
0.59 years 5.00 years 18 days
7,400 hours 43,800 hours 432 hours
4 50%
0.84 years 5.00 years 18 days
12,300 hours 43,800 hours 432 hours
70%
1.40 years 5.00 years 18 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 432 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 18 days
11 - 18
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q8BAT 2
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference Value)*4 (Backup power time
11
after an alarm*5)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years
43,800 hours
5.00 years
43,800 hours
25 days
600 hours
4
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days 5
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q00U(J)CPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 6
100%
Q01UCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q02UCPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
Q03UD(E)CPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days 7
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
2 50%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 8
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q04UD(E)HCPU
38,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
4.43 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
2 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11 - 19
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q8BAT
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3 (Backup power time
(Reference Value)*4
after an alarm*5)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
37,900 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
4.33 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q06UD(E)HCPU 2 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
20,500 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
2.34 years 5.00 years 25 days
29,200 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
3.33 years 5.00 years 25 days
41,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
4.68 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11 - 20
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1
Table11.8 Battery life
Battery life
Q8BAT 2
CPU module Battery Power-on After SM52 turned
model consumption*1 time ratio*2 Actual service value on.
Guaranteed value*3
(Reference Value)*4 (Backup power time
11
after an alarm*5)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years
43,800 hours
5.00 years
43,800 hours
25 days
600 hours
4
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
1 50%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days 5
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 6
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25days
37,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
4.22 years 5.00 years 25 days 7
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
2 50%
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours 8
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q10UD(E)HCPU 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
11.3.2 Battery lives of CPU modules
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
100%
Q13UD(E)HCPU 5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q20UD(E)HCPU 20,200 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
Q26UD(E)HCPU 2.31 years 5.00 years 25 days
28,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
3.29 years 5.00 years 25 days
40,400 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
3 50%
4.61 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
14,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
1.60 years 5.00 years 25 days
20,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
2.28 years 5.00 years 25 days
28,000 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
4 50%
3.20 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11 - 21
*1: For the battery consumption Section 11.3.1.
*2: The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on time is 12 hours and the total power-off time is 12 hours, the power-on time ratio is 50%.)
*3: The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 , which is calculated based on the characteristic values of manufacturer-supplied
memories (SRAM) and on the assumption of storage ambient temperature range of -25 to 75 (operating ambient temperature of 0 to
55 ).
*4: The actual service value (reference value) represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient
temperature of 40 . This value is intended for reference only, as it varies with characteristics of the memory.
*5: In the following status, the backup time after power off is 3 minutes.
• The battery connector is disconnected.
• The lead wire of the battery is broken.
● Do not use the battery exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● When the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life, take the following measures.
• Perform ROM operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data After SM52 turned on (within the backup power time after an alarm).
● When the battery (Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT) is not connected to the CPU module, its service life is five years.
● When the battery-low special relay SM52 turned on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating
condition.
11 - 22
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
1
Replace the battery of the CPU module by the following procedures when it comes to the end of its life.
The programmable controller power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before dismounting the battery.
Data in the memory are backed up for a while by a capacitor even after the battery is removed. However, since data in 2
the memory may be erased if the time for replacement exceeds the backup time shown in Table11.9 to Table11.12,
replace the battery quickly.
11
(1) Replacement procedure for the Basic model QCPU's Q6BAT battery
4
Table11.9 Backup time
Backup time
3 minutes 5
Replacing battery
6
CPU module
Backup the program and the
data.
Turn OFF the programmable controller
7
power supply.
Open the CPU module front cover.
8
Remove the old battery from its
holder.
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
Insert a new battery into the holder
in the correct direction. Connect
the lead to the connector. Connector CPU
module side
Connector
Close the CPU module front cover. battery side
Turn ON the programmable controller
power supply.
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to check
ON/OFF.
ON
Monitor
Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is ON.
Failure of CPU module battery Completed
Figure 11.2 Replacement procedure for the Q6BAT battery
11 - 23
(2) Replacement procedure of the Q6BAT battery for the High Performance model
QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU
Table11.10 Backup time
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the
data.
Turn off the programmable controller
power supply.
Remove the CPU module from the
base unit.
Connector CPU
module side
Open the CPU module bottom cover.
Connector
Remove the old battery from its battery side
holder. Battery Q6BAT
Insert a new battery into the holder
in the correct direction. Connect the
lead to the connector.
Close the CPU module bottom cover.
Install the CPU module into the CPU module
base unit.
Turn on the programmable controller
power supply.
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of CPU module battery Completed
Figure 11.3 Replacement procedure for the Q6BAT battery
11 - 24
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(3) Replacement procedure of the Q7BAT battery 1
Table11.11 Backup time
Backup time 2
3 minutes
Replacing battery
11
Backup the program and the data.
Turn off the programmable controller
4
power supply.
Remove the CPU module from the
base unit.
5
Remove the battery holder at the
bottom of the CPU module. Battery holder 6
Battery
Disconnect the battery connector, *1: When disconnecting the battery Q7BAT
and pull out the Q6BAT/Q7BAT
being used. *1
connector, hold the connector part being 7
careful not to damage the battery cable.
Q7BAT to be
replaced by Disengage the catch on one side of
Confirm
the type of the old
Q7BAT. the battery holder to disassemble the
holder into two, and remove the
Latch
8
battery. Q7BAT.
Battery holder
Q6BAT to be
replaced by Q7BAT. Insert the new Q7BAT into the holder
in the correct direction, and
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
Connect the Q7BAT to the battery reassemble the battery holder so that
connector of the CPU module, and the battery cable comes out of the
set it into the connector holder of the hole in the holder connection. (Push
battery holder. the holder parts in until they click.)
Connector
Set the battery holder to the
CPU module.
Connector
stopper
Install the CPU module into the
base unit.
Turn on the programmable controller
power supply.
CPU module
Battery holder
Monitor
OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 0 is OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of CPU module battery
Completed
Figure 11.4 Replacement procedure for the Q7BAT battery
11 - 25
(4) Replacement procedure of the Q8BAT battery
Table11.12 Backup time
Backup time
3 minutes
Replacing battery
Backup the program and the data.
Turn off the programmable controller
power supply.
2)
Confirm Remove the Q8BAT from the control
Q8BAT to be replaced by Q8BAT.
the type of the old
panel.
battery.
Q6BAT/Q7BAT to
be replaced by Remove the Q8BAT connection
Q8BAT. cable from the Q8BAT.
Remove the CPU module from the
Connect the Q8BAT connection
base unit.
cable to the new Q8BAT.
Remove the cover/battery holder at Connector Install the new Q8BAT to the control
the bottom of the CPU module. of CPU module
panel.*2 (Fixing with a mounting
Connector screw or fixing with the DIN rail is
of battery
Disconnect the battery connector, and Q6BAT
pull out the Q6BAT/Q7BAT. *1
1)
Connect the Q8BAT connection cable
to the connector of the CPU module.
CPU module
Connector
of cable
Q8BAT
connection
(To next page) cable
Connector
of CPU module
CPU module
Q8BAT
connection
cover
*1: Remove the battery connector with holding the connector part so that the battery cable may not be damaged.
11 - 26
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(From previous page)
1
Q8BAT connection cover
Install the Q8BAT connection cover
to the CPU module.
2
Q8BAT connection cable
Install the CPU module into the
base unit.
CPU module 11
Connect the Q8BAT connection cable
to the Q8BAT.
4
Control panel
Install the Q8BAT to the control panel.
*2 (Fixing with a mounting screw or
5
Q8BAT
fixing with the DIN rail are available.)
1)
Fix the Q8BAT connection cable to the
control panel. *3 6
Turn on the programmable controller
power supply.
R (bending radius) *4
7
10mm (0.39 inch) or more
Monitor OFF
SM51 to verify
on/off.
8
Q8BAT Q8BAT
connection cable
ON
Monitor
Bit 0 is OFF.
11.3.3 Replacement procedure of the CPU module battery
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
SD52 to check if bit 0 is
ON.
Bit 0 is on.
Failure of Q8BAT Completed
2)
*2: For the module mounting position, refer to the following .
Section 10.3.2
*3: Clamp the Q8BAT connection cable. If not being clamped, the Q8BAT connection cover, connector, and cable, may be
damaged by a loose cable connection, shifting, or pulling due to carelessness, etc.
*4: Secure 10mm or more as the minimum cable bend radius.
If it is less than 10mm, malfunction may occur due to characteristic deterioration, open cable or the like.
Figure 11.5 Replacement procedure for the Q8BAT battery
11 - 27
● After replacing a battery, write the date for next battery replacement on the sticker on the back side of the front cover.
Write the proper date by checking the battery life. ( Section 11.3.2)
Figure 11.6 Back side of the front cover
● When replacing the battery of a CPU module, pay attention to the following:
• Back up the data in the CPU module by GX Developer before starting replacement.
• When replacing a battery of a Redundant CPU, back up the memory data such as programs by the memory copy
from the control system to the standby system, and then replace the battery of the CPU module that was changed
into the standby status by the system switching function.
For the memory copy from control system to standby system and system switching function, refer to the manual
below.
QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant System)
• When the MELSEC-Q series is used as a UL-certified product, the Q7BAT and Q8BAT battery must be replaced
by service personnel.
The service personnel are defined as experienced technicians who have been sufficiently educated and trained,
and are capable of perceiving and avoiding operational hazard.
11 - 28
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
11.3.4 SRAM card battery life
1
Table11.13 SRAM card battery life
2
Battery life *3
Power-on After SM52
SRAM card
time ratio *1
Guaranteed value Actual service value turned on. 11
(MIN) *4 (Backup power time
(Reference value)
after an alarm)
Q2MEM-1MBS
0%
690 hours 6,336 hours
8 hours 4
Manufacturing control 0.07 years 0.72 years
number 11,784 hours 13,872 hours
100% 8 hours
A" *2
" 1.34 years 1.58 years
5
2,400 hours 23,660 hours
Q2MEM-1MBS 0% 20 hours
0.27 years 2.7 years
Manufacturing control
2,880 hours 31,540 hours
number 30%
0.32 years 3.6 years
20 hours 6
" B" *2
4,320 hours 39,420 hours
or 50% 20 hours
0.49 years 4.5 years
" B " *2
6,480 hours 43,800 hours 7
70% 20 hours
0.73 years 5.0 years
On and after B
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
100% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years 8
2,400 hours 23,660 hours
0% 20 hours
0.27 years 2.7 years
2,880 hours 31,540 hours
30% 20 hours
0.32 years 3.6 years
11.3.4 SRAM card battery life
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
4,320 hours 39,420 hours
Q2MEM-2MBS 50% 20 hours
0.49 years 4.5 years
6,480 hours 43,800 hours
70% 20 hours
0.73 years 5.0 years
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
100% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
0% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
30% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
Q3MEM-4MBS 50% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0y ears
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
70% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
43,800 hours 43,800 hours
100% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
11 - 29
Battery life *3
Power-on After SM52
SRAM card Guaranteed value Actual service value turned on.
time ratio *1
(MIN) *4 (Backup power time
(Reference value)
after an alarm)
36,300hours 43,800hours
0% 50 hours
4.1 years 5.0 years
43,800hours 43,800hours
30% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
43,800hours 43,800hours
Q3MEM-8MBS 50% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
43,800hours 43,800hours
70% 50 hours
5.0years 5.0 years
43,800hours 43,800hours
100% 50 hours
5.0 years 5.0 years
*1: The power-on time ratio indicates the ratio of programmable controller power-on time to one day (24 hours).
(When the total power-on and power-off times are 12 hours for each, the power-on time ratio is 50%).
*2: The manufacturing control number (the third digit from the leftmost) is written on the label on the back of the SRAM card
(as shown in Figure 11.7).
Manufacturer
control number
Figure 11.7 Label on the back of SRAM card
*3: Indicates the battery life when the SRAM card is installed in the High Performance model QCPU with the serial number
(first five digits) is "04012" or later.
For the battery life for those of "04011" or lower, refer to Appendix 2.
*4: The actual value may vary depending on ambient temperature.
● Do not use the battery exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life.
● When the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed value of the battery life, take the following measures.
• Perform ROM operation to protect a program even if the battery dies at the programmable controller power-off.
• Back up programs and data after SM52 turned on (within the backup time after an alarm).
● Note that the SRAM card battery is consumed even while the programmable controller is powered ON with the CPU
module battery connected.
● When the special relay showing battery low, SM52 turned on, immediately change the battery.
Even if an alarm has not yet occurred, it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the conditions
of use.
● The SRAM card is not available for the Basic model QCPU.
11 - 30
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
11.3.5 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure
1
Replace the SRAM card battery in the following procedure.
(1) Replacing Q2MEM-1MBS and Q2MEM-2MBS
2
Replacing battery
11
Backup the program and the
data.
Open the front cover while the 4
programmable controller power
supply is on.
CPU module
5
Release main unit
direction
With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc.,
remove the battery holder locking Battery holder
fixing switch
switch from the LOCK position.
Battery holder CPU module
6
main unit
Remove the battery holder
from the SRAM card. Flat blade
screwdriver
7
Used battery
Remove the old battery from its
holder.
New battery
8
Insert a new battery into the
holder in the correct direction. CPU module
Lock main unit
direction
11.3.5 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
Check that the battery holder Battery holder
fixing switch *
fixing switch is set to the LOCK
position.
* : The battery holder fixing switch is
automatically set to the "LOCK" position
when the battery holder is removed. In its
position, insert the battery holder to the
end.
CPU module
main unit
Deeply insert the SRAM card
into the battery holder.
Monitor OFF Put + toward you.
SM52 to verify on/off.
ON
Monitor
Bit 1 and bit 2 are OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 1 and bit
2 are ON.
Bit 1 and bit 2 are ON.
Failure of SRAM card battery
Completed
Figure 11.8 Replacing Q2MEM-BAT
11 - 31
(2) Replacing Q3MEM-4MBS and Q3MEM-8MBS
Replacing battery Remove a caver,
pressing fixing claws
of top/bottom
Backup the program and the CPU module
data. main unit
Remove a memory card
protective cover of the CPU
module at power-on status of
the programmable controller.
With a flat-blade screwdriver, etc.,
remove the battery holder locking
CPU module
switch from the LOCK position. main unit
Battery holder
Remove the battery holder from
the SRAM card.
Release
direction
Battery holder
fixing switch
Remove the old battery from its
holder.
CPU module
main unit Facing "+ (positive)"
Insert a new battery into the up, install the battery
holder in the correct direction.
Deeply insert the SRAM card
into the battery holder.
LOCK
Battery holder
fixing switch
Set a battery holder fixing switch
to the LOCK position
Set the memory card protective
cover on the CPU module.
Monitor OFF
SM52 to verify on/off.
ON
Monitor Bit 1 and bit 2 are OFF.
SD52 to check if bit 1 and bit
2 are ON.
Bit 1 and bit 2 are ON.
Failure of SRAM card battery
Completed
Figure 11.9 Replacing Q3MEM-8BAT
11 - 32
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
1
Be careful about the following to replace the SRAM card battery.
● To back up the data, replace the SRAM card battery with the programmable controller power supply on and the SRAM
card installed. 2
● Start replacement after backing up the CPU module data using GX Developer.
● Since replacement is made with the programmable controller power supply ON, take extreme care not to get an electric
shock. 11
● When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card, take care so that the battery does not come out
of the battery holder.
● When replacing the battery with the programmable controller power supply off, always back up the data before starting 4
replacement.
[Battery replacement procedure]
1) Back up the SRAM card data using GX Developer.
2) Replace the battery. 5
3) Write the backed up data from GX Developer to the memory card.
Insert or remove the battery in the horizontal direction along the battery holder fixing guide.
Failure to do so may damage the latches of the battery holder. 6
Battery holder latches
Battery fixing guide
7
Battery holder
Figure 11.10 Battery setting direction
11.3.5 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure
11.3 Battery Life and Replacement Procedure
● If a battery of the SRAM card is hard to replace, use of the following tweezers is recommended.
Table11.14 Tweezers for replacing battery
Product Model name
Plastic tweezers NK-2539
Figure 11.11 Replacement of battery using plastic tweezers
11 - 33
11.4 When Programmable Controller Has Been Stored Without Bat-
tery
When resuming operation of the programmable controller after having been stored without battery installed, the data in
the CPU module and the memory card may be corrupted.
Before restarting operation, format the CPU module memory and SRAM card using GX Developer.
After formatting the memories, write backed up data to each memory.
To format a program memory during boot operation, select the "Clear program memory" checkbox in the Boot file tab
of the PLC parameter dialog box.
Remark
For the Universal model QCPU, when the latch data backup function (to standard ROM) is used, data will not be disap-
peared even if storing data without a battery, since latch data such as device data of the CPU module or error history can
be backed up without using a battery.
The relationships between battery and battery-backed memorie are shown in Table11.15.
Table11.15 Relationships between the battery and battery-backed memories
Battery
Memory Battery Built in Memory
Battery of QCPU Module*1
Card
Program memory *2
CPU module Standard RAM
Standard ROM ---- (Battery backup not needed)
SRAM card
*3
Memory card Flash card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
ATA card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
: Battery backed up, : Not battery backed up
*1: Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT are available.
*2: The Universal model QCPU needs no battery backup.
*3: Not applicable the Basic model QCPU.
Before restarting the operation, format the battery-backed memories shown in Table11.15 using GX Developer.
For formatiing memories, refer to the following.
GX Developer Operating Manual
● Before storing the programmable controller, back up all the data stored in the memories.
● When the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is reset, the CPU module initializes all of the fol-
lowing data if an error is detected.
• Program memory data
• Standard RAM data
• Error history
• Latch data (latch relay (L), devices in latch setting range set in the parameter, special relay SM900 to SM999, spe-
cial register SD900 to SD900)
• Sampling trace data
11 - 34
CHAPTER11 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable
1
Controller
When using the programmable controller after the guaranteed battery life had expired during storing, the data in the 2
CPU module and the memory card may had been corrupted.
Before restarting operation, format the CPU module memory and SRAM card using GX Developer.
After formatting the memories, write backed up data to each memory. 11
To format a program memory during boot operation, select the "Clear program memory" checkbox in the Boot file tab
of the PLC parameter dialog box.
4
Remark
For the Universal model QCPU, when the latch data backup function (to standard ROM) is used, data will not be disap-
peared even if a battery life ends, since latch data such as device data of the CPU module or error history can be backed 5
up without using a battery.
6
The relationships between battery and battery-backed memorie are shown in Table11.16.
Table11.16 Relationships between the battery and battery-backed memories
Battery
7
Memory Battery Built in Memory
Battery of QCPU Module*1
Card
*2
8
Program memory
CPU module Standard RAM
Standard ROM ---- (Battery backup not needed)
11.5 When Battery Has Gone Flat During Storage of Programmable Controller
SRAM card
*3
Memory card Flash card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
ATA card ---- (Battery backup not needed)
: Battery backed up, : Not battery backed up
*1: Q6BAT, Q7BAT and Q8BAT are available.
*2: The Universal model QCPU needs no battery backup.
*3: Not applicable to the Basic model QCPU.
Before restarting the operation, format the battery-backed up memories shown in Table11.16 using GX Developer.
For formatting memories, refer to the following.
GX Developer Operating Manual
● Before storing the programmable controller, back up all the data stored in the memories.
● When the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is reset, the CPU module initializes all of the fol-
lowing data if an error is detected.
• Program memory data
• Standard RAM data
• Error history
• Latch data (latch relay (L), devices in latch setting range set in the parameter, special relay SM900 to SM999, spe-
cial register SD900 to SD900)
• Sampling trace data
11 - 35
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes errors that may occur during system operation, how to locate the errors, and measures against
the errors.
For a redundant system (when the Redundant CPU is used), refer to the following. QnPRHCPU User's Manual
(Redundant System)
12.1 Troubleshooting Basics
In order to increase the reliability of the system, resuming the system operation promptly after correcting a problem is
one of the important factors as well as using reliable device.
To promptly start up the system, the trouble cause must be located and eliminated correctly.
The basic three points to be followed in the troubleshooting are as follows.
(1) Visual inspection
Visually check the following.
1) Behavior of the programmable controller and other connected devices
2) Applicability of the power supply
3) States of input and output devices
4) Installation states of the power supply module, CPU module, I/O module, intelligent function module, and
extension cables
5) Wiring (Cables including input and output cables)
6) Display status of all indicators such as "POWER", "RUN", "ERR.", and "I/O" LEDs.
7) Setting status of all switches such as the number of extension base units and data retention time during
power failure.
After checking 1) through 7), connect GX Developer and monitor the operating status and programs of the
programmable controller.
(2) Error checking
Check how the error status changes by operating the following to the programmable controller.
1) Set the RUN/STOP switch Note12.1 to STOP. Note1
2) Reset the trouble with the RESET/L.CLR switch. Note12.1 ( CHAPTER 4)*1
3) Power on and off.*1
*1: Resetting and powering off clears the error codes stored in the completion status area for the dedicated instruction and
the buffer memory states of intelligent function modules.
Before resetting or powering off, backup the error codes and buffer memory states that are relevant to the error.
Note1
Note12.1 Basic Universal
For the Basic model QCPU or Universal model QCPU use the "RUN/STOP/RESET switch" for the operation.
12 - 1
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Narrowing down the scope for identifying trouble cause. 1
Estimate the troubled part in accordance with items (1) and (2) above.
1) Programmable controller or external devices
2
2) I/O module or others
3) Sequence program
3
12
12.1 Troubleshooting Basics
12 - 2
12.2 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to identify errors, details of errors, and measures to eliminate the errors.
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
The following shows the contents of the troubles according to the types of events.Note1
Error description
Section 12.2.2 When the ERR. Terminal (negative logic) has
ERR. terminal has turned off (opened).
turned off (opened)
LIFE OUT terminal of the Life detection power Section 12.2.3 When the LIFE OUT terminal (negative logic) has
supply module has turned off. turned off
MODE LED does not turn on. Note12.2 Section 12.2.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on
MODE LED is flickering. Section 12.2.5 When the MODE LED is flickering
POWER LED has turned off. Section 12.2.6 When the POWER LED has turned off
POWER LED of the Life detection power Section 12.2.7 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange
supply module is flickering in orange.
POWER LED of the redundant power supply Section 12.2.8 When the POWER LED has turned on in red
module has turned on in red.
LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply Section 12.2.9 When the LIFE LED has turned off
module has turned off.
LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply Section 12.2.10 When the LIFE LED has turned on in red
module has turned on in red.
LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply Section 12.2.11 When the LIFE LED is flickering in red
module is flickering in red.
RUN LED has turned off. Section 12.2.12 When the RUN LED has turned off
RUN LED is flickering. Section 12.2.13 When the RUN LED is flickering
ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering. Section 12.2.14 When the ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering
USER LED has turned on. Note12.2 Section 12.2.15 When the USER LED has turned on
BAT.LED has turned on
Note12.2 Section 12.2.16 When the BAT.LED has turned on or is flickering
or is flickering.
BOOT LED is flickering. Note12.2 Section 12.2.17 When the BOOT LED is flickering
LEDs of the output module do not turn on. Section 12.2.18 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on
I/O modules do not operate normally. Section 12.2.19 When output load of the output module does not
turn on
Unable to read a program. Section 12.2.20 When unable to read a program
Unable to write a program. Section 12.2.21 When unable to write a program
Program is rewritten unintentionally. Section 12.2.22 When a program is rewritten unintentionally
(To the next page)
Note1
Note12.2 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the following LEDs.
MODE LED
USER LED
BAT. LED
BOOT LED
12 - 3
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From the previous page) 1
Unable to perform boot operation from Section 12.2.23 When unable to perform boot operation from
memory card. Note12.3 the memory card
2
UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occurred. Section 12.2.24 When "UNIT VERIFY ERR." has occurred
CONTROL BUS ERR. has occurred. Section 12.2.25 When "CONTROL BUS ERR." has occurred
3
CPU module does not start. Section 12.2.26 When the CPU module does not start
12
OPERATION ERROR has occurred at When "OPERATION ERROR" has occurred at
execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and Section 12.2.27 execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions. S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
Comments cannot be read at the execution of When comments cannot be read at execution of
the S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR
instructions.
Section 12.2.28 the S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR
instructions 5
PARAMETER ERROR has occurred at power Section 12.2.29 When "PARAMETER ERROR" has occurred at
on or reset. power on or reset
6
CPU module cannot communicate with Section 12.2.30
When the CPU module cannot communicate with
GX Developer. GX Developer
Ethernet communication is not available other
than by direct connection to GX Developer.
Section 12.2.31 When Ethernet communication is not available other
than by direct connection to GX Developer
7
Ethernet communication with the target device Section 12.2.32 When Ethernet communication with the target
is not available. device is not available
8
Ethernet communication is not available by Section 12.2.33 When Ethernet communication is not available by
direct connection to GX Developer. direct connection to GX Developer
Ethernet communication with a CPU module is Section 12.2.34 When Ethernet communication with a CPU module
12.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
12.2 Troubleshooting
slow or unstable. is slow or unstable
Error has occurred during MC protocol Section 12.2.35 When an error has occurred during MC protocol
communication. communication
Clock data cannot be set by SNTP. Section 12.2.36 When clock data cannot be set by SNTP
Data cannot be received on the target device
side after sending upon the send instruction When unable to receive data on the target device
Section 12.2.37
from the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU by using side by the Socket communication function
the Socket communication function.
Data cannot be received on the Built-in
Ethernet port QCPU side after sending from When unable to receive data by the Socket
Section 12.2.38
the target device side by using the Socket communication function
communication function.
Open process of the Socket communication
function does not complete (SD1282 (Open Section 12.2.39 When open process of the Socket communication
completion signal) does not turn on). function does not complete
Figure 12.1 Troubleshooting flowchart
Note1
Note1
Note12.3 Basic
The Basic model QCPU cannot use the memory card.
12 - 4
12.2.2 When the ERR. terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened)
Refer to the following flowchart when the ERR. terminal has turned off (opened) at power-on or during operation of the
programmable controller.Note1
The ERR. terminal has
turned off (opened).
Flickering (CPU
module is in stop
How is the "ERR." error) Check error details and take action
LED of the CPU according to the details.
module?
Not flickering
Is power supplied? NO
Is the power supply Supply power of proper voltage.
voltage proper?
YES
How is the "MODE" On (green)
LED Note12.4 of the
CPU module?
Off
Remove the corresponding power
supply module, and mount it to the
normal base unit.
(Do not mount any modules other
than the power supply module.)
How is the "POWER" LED On (red) The corresponding power supply module is
of the power supply faulty
module? (Replace it with a normal power supply
module).
Turned on green ( Section 12.4.2
12.4.2)
Mount the corresponding power
supply module to the original system
again, and remove all modules other
than the power supply module from
the base unit.
(To next page)
Note1
Note12.4 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the "MODE" LED. In the flowchart, proceed to "Off".
12 - 5
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From previous page)
1
How is the "POWER"
LED of the power supply
Off The base unit that includes the corresponding 2
power supply module is faulty.
module?
(Change it for a normal base unit.)
On (green) 3
Check the sum of internal current
consumptions of the modules that
comprise the system.
12
Does the total
current exceed the rated Reexamine the system configuration to make the
5
Yes
current consumption of one power total current less than the rated current consumption
supply module? of one power supply module.
Hardware fault
No
6
Execute operation checks in due order,
starting with the minimum system.
For the module that does not operate,
please contact your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative, explaining
7
a detailed description of the problem.
Figure 12.2 When the ERR. terminal has turned off
8
If a CPU module stop error occurs during use of two redundant power supply modules, the error is output from the ERR.
12.2.2 When the ERR. terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened)
12.2 Troubleshooting
terminals of the two redundant power supply modules.
Refer to the following for details of the ERR. terminal.
Section 5.2.1 Power supply module specification list
Section 10.6.2 Wring of power supply module
12 - 6
Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal
The following shows the errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal of the power supply module in a
singular power supply system/redundant power supply system.
<Singular power supply system> .....................................................One Q series power supply module is used.
Table12.1 Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal of a power supply module
CPU module
Basic model QCPU*,
Base unit
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU
Universal model QCPU
Main base unit (Q3 B)
AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown and CPU module stop error (including reset)
Multiple CPU high speed main base
can be detected.
unit (Q3 DB)
Extension base unit (Q6 B) Errors cannot be detected (always off). (Cannot be added)
*: Excluding the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU (without ERR. terminal).
<Singular power supply system> .....................................................One slim type power supply module is used.
Table12.2 Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal of a power supply module
CPU module
Basic model QCPU*,
Base unit Process CPU,
High Performance model QCPU,
Redundant CPU
Universal model QCPU
Slim type main base unit AC power not input, power supply module fuse blown and
(Cannot be combined)
(Q3 SB) CPU module stop error (including reset) can be detected.
*: Excluding the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU (without ERR. terminal).
<Redundant power supply system>...................................................... Two redundant power supply modules are
used.
Table12.3 Errors that can be detected by the ERR. terminal of a power supply module
CPU module
Basic model QCPU*,
Base unit
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU
Universal model QCPU
Redundant power main base unit AC power not input, redundant power supply module fuse blown, CPU module stop error (including
(Q3 RB) reset), and redundant power supply module failure can be detected.
AC power not input, redundant power supply module fuse
Redundant power extension base unit
blown, and redundant power supply module failure can be (Cannot be added)
(Q6 RB)
detected.
*: Excluding the Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU (without ERR. terminal).
12 - 7
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
1
Remark
In the redundant power supply system, the failure of the redundant power supply module can also be detected by using 2
GX Developer (Version 8.18U or later). Note12.5, Note12.6
● Detection by PLC diagnosticsNote1
● Detection by system monitor
3
For details of PLC diagnostics and system monitor, refer to the following.
GX Developer Operating Manual
12
12.2.2 When the ERR. terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened)
12.2 Troubleshooting
Note1
Note12.5 Basic
Failure of redundant power supply cannot be detected by the Basic model QCPU.
High
Note12.6 performance Process
When using the High Performance QCPU or the Process CPU, check the versions of CPU module and GX Developer.
( Appendix 2)
12 - 8
12.2.3 When the LIFE OUT terminal (negative logic) has turned off (opened)
Refer to the following flowchart when the LIFE OUT terminal of the Life detection power supply module has turned off
(opened) at power-on or during operation of the programmable controller.
The LIFE OUT terminal turned off (opened).
Is the POWER LED NO
on in green?
YES
Is the POWER LED YES
flickering in orange?
NO
Section 12.2.6 Section 12.2.7
Flowchart for when the POWER LED Flowchart for when the POWER LED is
turned off flickering in orange
Is the LIFE LED NO Section 12.2.9
on or flickering? Flowchart for when the LIFE LED turned off
YES
Is the LIFE LED NO
flickering in orange?
YES
The module is normal. NO
Is the LIFE LED on in red?
Check the flickering intervals of
the LIFE LED as follows.
Repeatedly turns on for 5 seconds YES
and off for 1 second?
Remaining life is approx. 1year. Section 12.2.10 Section 12.2.11
Module replacement is recommended. Flowchart for when the LIFE LED turned on Flowchart for when the LIFE LED is
in red flickering in red
Flickers at intervals of 0.5 seconds?
Remaining life is approx. 6 months.
Replace the module.
Figure 12.3 When the LIFE OUT terminal has turned off
12 - 9
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on
1
Refer to the following flowchart when the MODE LED of the CPU module does not turn on at programmable controller
power-on.
The "MODE" LED has not turned on
2
(When off)
How is the
"POWER" LED of the power
Off or On (red)
Section 12.2.5
Section 12.2.6 Flowchart for
when the "POWER" LED 3
supply module? turns off.
(When on (red))
Section
Section 12.2.8
12.2.6 Flowchart for
On (green) when the "POWER" LED turns
on (red).
12
Are all
the power
supply modules powered NO Check the wiring and power on all the
on?
power supply modules.
Is the wiring of the power
supply module
correct?
5
NO YES
YES
Can "MODE" LED turn on?
Connect peripheral device and CPU module. 6
Can the Carry out PLC diagnostics, and
7
CPU communicate with the YES
peripheral device? perform troubleshooting according to
the diagnostics result.
NO
Is the extension
cable connected
properly? (Isn't IN connected to
NO
Connect the extension cable properly.
8
IN or OUT connected to
OUT?)
YES NO YES
Can "MODE" LED turn on?
12.2.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on
12.2 Troubleshooting
Is the CPU module After resetting the CPU with the
RESET position RESET/L.CLR switch, set the
RESET/L. CLR switch in
the neutral position? RESET/L.CLR switch to the neutral position.
Neutral position NO YES
Can "MODE" LED turn on?
Replace the power supply module and
confirm that the "POER" LED is turned on
green.
YES
Can "MODE" LED turn on? Hardware fault of power supply module.
NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in
any of the following modules.
1) CPU module Completed
2) Main base unit, extension base unit
3) Extension cable
4) I/O Module (If one is installed)
5) Intelligent function module
(If one is installed)
6) Network module (If one is installed)
Perform operations in due order, starting
with the minimum system where the power
supply module and CPU module are
mounted on the main base unit.
If the module will not work, please consalt
your local nearest Mitsubishi or
representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
*: This applies to the redundant power supply module.
Figure 12.4 When the MODE LED does not turn on
12 - 10
12.2.5 When the MODE LED is flickering
Refer to the following flowchart when the MODE LED of the CPU module flickers at programmable controller power-
on, at operation start or during operation.
The "MODE" LED is flickering.
Have the
forced ON/OFF YES
Cancel forced ON/OFF.
settings made?
NO
NO Can "MODE" LED YES
turn on?
Is the CPU RESET position
module RESET/L. CLR Set the
Move theRESET/L.CLR switchto
RESET/L.CLR switch tothe
the
switch in the neutral neturarl position.
neutral position.
position?
Neutral position
NO Can "MODE" LED YES
turn on?
Hardwarefault
Hardware fault
Execute operation checks in due
Check operations in the order
order, starting with the minimum
starting from the minimum system.
system. Completed
If For
the the
module
module willthat
notdoes
work,not
please
consult
operate, please contact your service
your local Mitsubishi local
center or Mitsubishi
nearest representative,
or explaining
a representative,
detailed description of the
explaining a detailed
problem.
description of the problem.
Figure 12.5 When the MODE LED is flickering
12 - 11
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.6 When the POWER LED has turned off
1
Refer to the following flowchart when the POWER LED of the power supply module has turned off at programmable
controller power-on or during operation.
2
The POWER LED turned off.
Is the MODE LED YES
3
of the CPU module on
in green?
NO
To (A) on the next page
12
NO
Is the power being supplied? Supply power
5
YES Off On (green)
How is the POWER LED?
6
On (red)*
Section 12.2.8
Flowchart for when the POWER LED turns on (red)
7
Is the power voltage NO
Adjust the voltage within the specification
within the specification?
YES
8
Off On (green)
How is the POWER LED?
On (red)*
12.2.6 When the POWER LED has turned off
12.2 Troubleshooting
Section 12.2.8
Flowchart for when the POWER LED turns on (red)
Is the power supply NO
module mounted securely? Mount the power supply module securely.
YES On (green)
Off
How is the POWER LED?
Remove all the modules except for On (red)*
the power supply module from Section 12.2.8
the base unit.
Flowchart for when the POWER LED turns on (red)
Off The base unit that includes the power
How is the POWER LED? supply module is faulty.
(Replace the base unit.)
On (green)
To (B) on the next page Completed
*: Applicable only to the redundant power supply module.
12 - 12
From (A) on the previous page
Power on the programmable controller again.
YES
Is the POWER LED off? Replace the faulty module.
NO
YES
Is the POWER LED on in green? Completed
NO
Is the POWER LED NO
Replace the faulty module.
flickering in orange?
YES
If this problem occurs frequently,
replace the power supply module.
If the same problem still remains after
the replacement, please consult your
local Mitsubishi service center or
representative, explaining a detailed
description of the problem.
From (B) on the previous page
Check the total internal current
consumption of the modules that are
configuring the system.
Is the total current Exceeding
exceeding the rated output current Reexamine the system configuration
of the power supply module? not to let the total current exceed the
rated output current of the power
Not exceeding supply module.
Hardware fault
Check the operation starting from the
smallest system.
For the inoperable module, please
consult your local Mitsubishi service
center or representative, explaining
a detailed description of the problem.
Figure 12.6 When the POWER LED has turned off
12 - 13
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.7 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange
1
Refer to the following flowchart when the POWER LED of the Life detection power supply module flickers in orange at
power-on or during operation of the programmable controller.
2
The POWER LED is flickering in orange.
Power on the programmable controller again.
3
Is the POWER LED
YES 12
flickering again?
NO 5
NO
Is the POWER LED on
in green?
6
YES
7
NO
Is the POWER LED off?
YES
Section 12.2.6
The corresponding Life detection 8
power supply module is faulty.
Flowchart for when the POWER LED (Replace with a normal Life detection
Completed turned off power supply module.)
Figure 12.7 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange
12.2.7 When the POWER LED is flickering in orange
12.2 Troubleshooting
12 - 14
12.2.8 When the POWER LED has turned on in red
Refer to the following flowchart when the POWER LED of the redundant power supply module has turned on in red at
power-on or during operation of the programmable controller.
The "POWER" LED has
turned on (red).
Remove the corresponding
redundant power supply module,
and mount it onto the normal
redundant base unit.
(At this time, do not mount any
modules other than the redundant
power supply module.)
How is the The corresponding redundant power
"POWER" LED of the Off or On (red) supply module is faulty.
redundant power supply (Replace it with a normal one.)
module? ( 12.4.2
Section 12.4.2)
On (green)
Return the corresponding
redundant power supply module to
the original system, and remove all
modules other than the redundant
power supply module from the
redundant base unit.
The redundant base unit that
How is the
Off includes the corresponding
"POWER" LED of the
redundant power supply module is
redundant power supply
faulty. (Replace it with a normal
module?
redundant base unit.)
On (green)
Check the sum of internal current
consumptions of the modules that
comprise the system.
Does the total Reexamine the system configuration
current exceed the rated Yes to make the total current less than
output current of the power
the rated current consumption of one
supply module?
redundant power supply module.
No
Hardware fault
check operations checks in the
order starting with the minimum
system.
If the module will not work, please
consalt your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Figure 12.8 When the POWER LED has turned on in red
12 - 15
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.9 When the LIFE LED has turned off
1
Refer to the following flowchart when the LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply module turned off at power-on or
during operation of the programmable controller.
2
The LIFE LED turned off.
Power on the programmable controller again. 3
Did the LIFE LED YES 12
turn on for 1 second?
NO
5
The power supply module life expired.
Replace the power supply module.
Is the LIFE LED on
in green or orange or flickering
YES
6
in orange?
NO
7
Completed
YES
8
Is the LIFE LED on
in red or flickering in red?
NO
Turned on in red
12.2.9 When the LIFE LED has turned off
12.2 Troubleshooting
Section 12.2.10
The life diagnostics is not available. Flowchart for when the LIFE LED turned on
Replacement of the module is in red
recommended.
Flickering in red
Section 12.2.11
Flowchart for when the LIFE LED is flickering
in red
Figure 12.9 When the LIFE LED of the Life detection module has turned off
12 - 16
12.2.10 When the LIFE LED has turned on in red
Refer to the following flowchart when the LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply module has turned on in red at
power-on or during operation of the programmable controller.
The LIFE LED turned on in red.
Is the operating YES
ambient temperature within
the 0 to 55 ?
NO
Stop the operation of the module for
Adjust the operating ambient
heat dissipation.
temperature within the 0 to 55 .
Power on the programmable controller
again.
Is the LIFE LED on NO
in green or orange?
YES
Completed Replace the faulty module.
Figure 12.10 When the LIFE LED turn on in red
12.2.11 When the LIFE LED is flickering in red
Refer to the following flowchart when the LIFE LED of the Life detection power supply module flickers in red at power-
on or during operation of the programmable controller.
The LIFE LED is flickering in red.
Power on the programmable controller again.
Is the LIFE LED on NO (Flickering in red)
in green or orange?
YES
Completed Replace the faulty module.
Figure 12.11 When the LIFE LED is flickering in red
12 - 17
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.12 When the RUN LED has turned off
1
Refer to the following flowchart when the RUN LED of the CPU module has turned off during operation of the
programmable controller.Note1
2
The "RUN" LED has turned off.
(When off)
3
Off or Section 12.2.5
Section 12.2.6 "Flowchart for
How is the when the "POWER" LED has
On (red)
"POWER" LED of the power
12
turned off."
supply module? (When on (red))
Section 12.2.6
Section 12.2.8 Flowchart for
Turned on green when the "POWER" LED has
turned on (red)
Is "ERR." LED YES Section 12.2.9 "Flowchart for
Section
5
on/flickering? when the "ERR." LED is
on/flickering."
NO
(1) Programmable controller part
6
"RUN" LED is
Reset the CPU module RESET/L. fault/poor connection between
on.
the module and base unit
CLR switch. Note12.7
"RUN" LED is off.
(2) Excessive noise generation
7
Set the CPU module's RUN/STOP
For the case of (1) For the
switch Note12.7 to STOP and
write END to address 0 with the GX Please consult your local Mitsubishi
case of (2)
8
Developer. service center or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Set the CPU module's RUN/STOP "RUN" LED does
switch Note12.7 to RUN and enter not turn on.
12.2.12 When the RUN LED has turned off
12.2 Troubleshooting
to the monitor mode with the GX
Developer to be operated.
"RUN" LED is on.
Possible cause is a sequence
program error.
Connect a surge suppression
Check the program and modify the circuit, such as CR, to the noise
program error location. source.
NO
Can "RUN" LED turn on?
YES
Completed
Figure 12.12 When the RUN LED has turned off
*: This applies to the redundant power supply module.
Note1
Note12.7 Basic
For the Basic model QCPU, use the RUN/STOP/RESET switch for operation.
12 - 18
12.2.13 When the RUN LED is flickering
If the RUN LED flickering, follow the procedure below.
Note1
When the programs or parameters are written into the CPU module during the STOP status and then the RUN/STOP
switch Note12.8 is set from STOP to RUN, the RUN LED of the CPU module flickers.
Although this status does not mean the CPU module error, the CPU module stops the operation. To set the CPU
module to the RUN status, reset the CPU module using the RESET/L.CLR switch Note12.8 or set the RUN/STOP
switch Note12.8 from STOP to RUN position again.
With this setting, the RUN LED turns on.
12.2.14 When the ERR. LED has turned on or is flickering
Refer to the following flowchart when the ERR. LED of the CPU module turns on or flickers at programmable controller
power-on, at operation start or during operation.
"ERR." LED is on/flickering.
Hardware fault Confirm details of error by GX
Developer. ( Section 12.3
12.3)
Please consult your local Mitsubishi Set the RUN/STOP
service center or representative, switch Note12.8 to STOP.
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Modify error details.
( Section
Section 12.3
12.3)
Reset by the RESET/L. CLR
switch Note12.8
.
Set the RUN/STOP switch Note12.8
to RUN.
Can
NO
"ERR." LED
turn off?
YES
Completed
Figure 12.13 When the ERR. LED is on or flickers
Note1
Note12.8 Basic
For the Basic model QCPU, use the RUN/STOP/RESET switch for operation.
12 - 19
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.15 When the USER LED has turned on
1
If the USER LED turned on, follow the procedure described below.
The USER LED turns on when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or the annunciator (F) turns on. 2
If the USER LED is on, monitor the special relays SM62 and SM80 in the monitor mode of GX Developer.
• When M62 has turned on 3
The annunciator (F) is on.Check the error cause using SD62 to SD79.
• When SM80 has turned on
The USER LED turns on by the execution of the CHK instruction. Check the error cause using SD80.
12
Eliminate the error cause after checking.
The USER LED can be turned off by:
5
• Resetting with the RESET/L.CLR switch or
• Executing the LEDR instruction in the sequence program.
6
When the RESET/L. CLR switch is tilted to L.CLR several times for latch clear operation, the USER LED flickers to indicate
that the latch clear processing is in process.
When the RESET/L. CLR switch is further tilted to L.CLR while the USER LED flickering, the USER LED turns off and
7
terminates the latch clear processing.
8
12.2.16 When the BAT. LED has turned on or is flickering
When the BAT. LED has turned on or is flickering, follow the procedure described below.
12.2.15 When the USER LED has turned on
12.2 Troubleshooting
The BAT. LED turns on or flickers when a low battery capacity is detected.
If the BAT. LED is on, monitor the special relays and special registers in the monitor mode of GX Developer to check
which of the CPU module and SRAM card batteries was lowered in capacity. (SM51 to SM52, SD51 to SD52)Note1
After checking, replace the battery with a new one, and reset the CPU module with the RESET/L.CLR switch
Note12.9 or run the LEDR instruction, and the BAT. LED will turn off.
Note1
Note12.9 Universal
For the Universal model QCPU, use the RUN/STOP/RESET switch for operation.
12 - 20
12.2.17 When the BOOT LED is flickering
Refer to the following flowchart when the BOOT LED of the CPU module flickers at programmable controller power-on,
at operation start, or during operation.
The "BOOT" LED is flickering
Power off the programmable
controller.
Remove the memory card.
Move the DIP switches SW2 and
SW3 of the CPU module to ON.
Power on the programmable
controller.
YES Completion of automatic write
Does the "BOOT" LED from memory card to standard
turn on? ROM
NO Perform boot operation from
standard ROM.
CPU module hardware fault. Please
consult your local nearest Mitsubishi
or representative, explaining a
detailed description of the problem.
Figure 12.14 When the BOOT LED is flickering
12 - 21
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.18 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on
1
Refer to the following flowchart when the LEDs of the output module do not turn on during programmable controller
operation.Note1
2
The output module LED
has not turned on
3
NO
Is the "MODE" (Flickering) Section
Section 12.2.5
12.2.4 "Flowchart for
LED Note12.10 on? when the "MODE" LED is 12
flickering."
YES
5
Is the LED on when the NO
output module is monitored Reexamine the program.
on GX Developer? 6
YES
Check the input/output number on
7
the GX Developer system monitor.
8
Does the output NO
Change the output number.
number match?
12.2.18 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on
12.2 Troubleshooting
YES
Does the LED turn NO
on when another output
module is forcibly
turned on?
YES
Does the CPU module, base unit, extension
LED turn on when cable hardware fault.
the output module is changed for NO
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
another output module, service center or representative,
which is then forcibly explaining a detailed description of
turned on? the problem.
YES
Output module hardware fault.
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Figure 12.15 When the LEDs of the output module do not turn on
Note1
Note12.10 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not have the MODE LED. In the flowchart, proceed to "YES".
12 - 22
12.2.19 When output load of the output module does not turn on
Refer to the following flowchart when the output load of the output module does not turn on during programmable
controller operation.
The output load has not turned on.
Is the operation Check output conditions with the
NO
indicator of output module monitor mode of the GX
turned on? Developer.
YES
Is voltage for the Is the operation Voltage measurement among
NO Off
power supply load indicator of input the modules input and COM
added? module turned on? terminals.
0V
YES On
Supply
voltage
What is the voltage value
among the various 0V Set the GX Developer in the
output COM terminals of the monitor mode and check that the
output module? input signal is OFF.
(Monitor signal off)
The rated voltage
is supplied.
Output module failure Check the external wiring and
Replace the output module. Check the power supply load external input devices.
wire and recover the power
supply.
Check the load wire and load, and
recover the power supply.
Confirm rush current that flows to the
load when the maximum number of Please consult your local Mitsubishi
outputs turns on simultaneously. Change the output relay number and
NG service center or representative,
let the load maximum simultaneous
explaining a detailed description of
on current to within the specification.
the problem.
OK
Figure 12.16 When the output load of the output module does not turn on
For the trouble in which input signal to the input module does not turn off, troubleshoot referring to Section 12.5, Examples of
I/O Modules Troubleshooting.
12 - 23
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.20 When unable to read a program
1
Refer to the following flowchart when a program cannot be read out from the CPU module.
A program cannot be read. 2
Is the memory to be read
NO
Select the correct memory. 3
correct?
YES NO
Can a program be read?
YES 12
5
Is the connection cable NO Connect the connection cable
connected properly? properly.
6
YES
NO YES
Can a program be read?
7
Can a program YES
be read by replacing the
connection cable? 8
NO
12.2.20 When unable to read a program
12.2 Troubleshooting
Is the connection USB Is the USB driver NO Install the USB driver into
type RS-232? installed in the personal the personal computer.
computer?
RS-232 YES
NO YES
Can a program be read?
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Can a program YES
be read by lowering the baud
rate?
NO
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem. Completed
Figure 12.17 When a program cannot be read out
12 - 24
12.2.21 When unable to write a program
Refer to the following flowchart when a program cannot be written in the CPU module.Note1
A program cannot be written
into the CPU module.
Is the DIP
ON Turn the DIP switch Note12.11
switch Note12.11 SW1
SW1 (system protect) to OFF.
set to OFF?
OFF
NO Can a program YES
be written?
Has the password YES Cancel the password using the GX
registered? Developer.
NO
NO Can a program YES
be written?
Memory card
Note12.12 Perform the following.
Confirm whether the write-
Is the memory program protect switch is off or not.
memory? Confirm if it is formatted.
Confirm the writing destination
Program memory specification.
Perform the following.
Organize file.
Confirm memory space.
Confirm the writing destination Can a program YES
specification. be written?
NO
Can a program YES
be written?
NO
Format program memory.
Can a program YES
be written?
NO
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem. Completed
Figure 12.18 When a program cannot be written
Note1
Note12.11 Basic Universal
The Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU do not have the DIP switches.
In the flowchart, proceed to "OFF".
Note12.12 Basic
The Basic model QCPU does not support the memory card.
12 - 25
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.22 When program is rewritten unintentionally
1
Refer to the following flowchart when a program is unintentionally rewritten at power-on or reset of the programmable
controller.
2
Program is rewritten unintentionally.
OFF (Program memory execution)
3
Is SM660 ON?
ON (During boot operation) 12
After formatting the program memory
that is performing boot operation
from the standard ROM, write data to
the standard ROM. 5
Invalidate the "Perform boot from
standard ROM" check box in the
boot file setting of the PLC
6
parameter dialog box.
Write the parameters and
7
sequence program to the program
memory.
8
Power on the programmable
controller/perform reset operation.
12.2.22 When program is rewritten unintentionally
12.2 Troubleshooting
YES
Is the program rewritten?
NO
Completed Hardware fault
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Figure 12.19 When program is rewritten unintentionally
12 - 26
12.2.23 When unable to perform boot operation from the memory card
Refer to the following flowchart when the boot operation of the CPU module cannot be performed using the memory
card.Note1
Boot operation cannot be performed
Has a CPU error YES
Remove the cause of the error.
occurred?
NO
NO Can boot operation YES
be performed?
Note12.13
Set the DIP switch 2 and 3 to the
Is the parameter- NO drive in which the parameter file is
valid drive specified by the stored.
DIP switches?
YES
NO Can boot operation YES
be performed?
Is a file set NO
with parameter boot Set a file to boot file setup.
file setup?
YES
NO Can boot operation YES
be performed?
(To next page) (To next page)
Note1
Note12.13 Basic Universal
The Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU do not have the DIP switches.
In the flowchart, proceed to "YES".
12 - 27
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From previous page) (From previous page) 1
Is a file set with
parameter program setup?
NO
Set a file to program setup. 3
YES
NO YES
12
Can boot operation
be performed?
5
Is boot NO
operation file stored in the Write a file to the memory card.
memory card?
6
YES
NO Can boot operation YES
be performed? 7
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
8
explaining a detailed description of
the problem. Completed
Figure 12.20 When boot operation cannot be performed from the memory card
12.2.23 When unable to perform boot operation from the memory card
12.2 Troubleshooting
12 - 28
12.2.24 When “UNIT VERIFY ERR.” has occurred
Refer to the following flowchart when “UNIT VERIFY ERR.” has occurred at programmable controller power-on or
during operation.
The UNIT VERIFY ERR. has occured.
Check the slot where error occurred
with the GX Developer.
Has
the module on
the corresponding slot been YES
Reset the CPU module.
removed/mounted during
operation?
NO
Has the "ERR." YES
LED turned off?
Is the module NO
of the applicable slot Mounted the module properly.
mounted properly? NO
Replace the corresponding module.
YES
NO YES
Has the "ERR."
LED turned off?
Are all the
extension cables of NO
the base unit connected Connect the extension cable properly.
properly?
YES
NO Has the "ERR." YES
LED turned off?
Replace the Normal operation
corresponding module.
Error detection
Replace the CPU Normal operation
module.
Error detection
Replace the Normal operation
applicable base unit.
Error detection
Hardware fault
Mitsubishi
Please consult your local nearest
service center
Mitsubishi or representative,
or representative,
explaining a detailed description of Completed
the problem.
Figure 12.21 When “UNIT VERIFY ERR.” has occurred
12 - 29
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.25 When “CONTROL BUS ERR.” has occurred
1
Refer to the following flowchart when “CONTROL BUS ERR.” has occurred at programmable controller power-on or
during operation.
This flow chart is applicable only when a slot/base unit can be specified by the error code. 2
The CONTROL BUS ERR.
has occured.
3
Check the slot base unit where error
occurred with the GX Developer. 12
Is the module of
the applicable slot mounted NO Mount the module and extension
5
properly? Is the extension cable of the cable properly.
applicable base unit connected
properly?
6
YES NO Is the "ERR." LED YES
turned off?
Are all the
extension cables of the NO
7
Connect the extension cable properly.
base unit connected
properly?
YES NO Is the "ERR." LED YES 8
turned off?
Has
noise in excess of YES
the specified value been Take measures against noise.
12.2.25 When “CONTROL BUS ERR.” has occurred
12.2 Troubleshooting
generated?
NO
Replace the Normal operation
corresponding module.
Error detection
Replace the CPU Normal operation
module.
Error detection
Replace the Normal operation
applicable base unit.
Error detection
Hardware fault
Please consult your local Mitsubishi
nearest
service center
Mitsubishi or representative,
or representative,
explaining a detailed description of Complete
the problem.
Figure 12.22 When “CONTROL BUS ERR.” has occurred
12 - 30
12.2.26 When the CPU module does not start
Refer to the following flowchart when the CPU module does not start upon power-on.Note1
The CPU module does not start.
(When off)
Section 12.2.6 Flowchart for when
Is the "POWER" LED the "POWER" LED turns off.
NO (When on (red))
of the power supply module Note12.14 Section 12.2.8 Flowchart for when
lit (green)? the "POWER" LED turns on (red).
YES
Are all power
supply modules turned on? NO Check the wiring and turn ON all power
Is the power supply module supply modules.
connected correctly?
YES NO YES
Does the CPU module start?
Connect peripheral deivce.
Is communication YES
with peripheral device
succeeded?
NO Perform PLC diagnostics and troubleshoot
according to the results of the diagnosis.
Is the direction of
the exension cable correct? NO
(Check if IN-IN or OUT-OUT Correct the connection of the extension cable.
connection is made.)
YES NO YES
Does the CPU module start?
Is the RESET-L.
CLR switch of the CPU module RESET position
in the RESET position? Cancel the RESET position.
Note12.15
In other than RESET position NO YES
Does the CPU module start?
Change the power supply module and
check if the LED lights up (green).
YES Hardware error of power supply
Does the CPU module start?
module.
NO
The following pleces of hardware may be faulty.
1) CPU module
2) Main base unit, extension base unit
3) Extension cable
4) I/O Module (If one is installed) End
5) Interlligent function module (If one is installed)
6) Network module (If one is installed)
Perform operations in due order, starting with the minimum system
where the power supply module and CPU module are mounted on the
main base unit.
If the module will not work, please consalt your local nearest Mitsubishi
or representative, explaining a detailed discription of the problem.
Figure 12.23 When the CPU module does not start
Note1
Note12.14 Basic
For the Basic model QCPU, it applied to the CPU module (power supply section) is.
Note12.15 Basic
For the Basic model QCPU, check if the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of CPU module is in the RESET position.
12 - 31
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.27 When “OPERATION ERROR” has occurred at execution of the
S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions. 1
Refer to the following flowchart when “OPERATION ERROR” (error code: 4100) has occurred at execution of the
S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
2
3
The OPERATION ERROR has
occurred at the execution of
SP.SFCSCOMR and
SP.SFCTCOMR instructions.
12
Check the program file name and step
No. where error occurred on the PLC
diagnostic screen of GX Developer.
5
Check that the values of the following
instruction devices are within the
range.
6
n1 (Block No.)
n2 (No. of reading comment)
n3 (No. of reading comment pe scan)
7
Are the values 8
specified with n1, n2 and n3 within NO
the setting range?
12.2.27 When “OPERATION ERROR” has occurred at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and
12.2 Troubleshooting
YES
Correct the values specified with n1,
n2 and n3 of the instruction device
within the range.
S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions.
Set the comment file stored in the
memory other than ATA card *1 as
"Comment file used in a command".
1 : Program memory, Standard ROM, SRAM
memory card and Flash memory card
12 - 32
12.2.28 When comments cannot be read at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR
and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
Refer to the following flowchart when any comment of active step or transfer condition associating with active step
cannot be read at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR instructions
The comment cannot be read.
Is the SFC program run? NO
(Check with SM331)
Run the SFC program.
Set the program execution type of
YES
the SFC program to "SCAN".
Can the comment
NO of active step or the
comment of transfer condition
associating with active
step be read?
YES
Is the comment file Completed
to be used for instructions
set with "Comment file used in a NO
command" setting of the PLC
parameter or with the
QCDSET instruction?
Set the comment file with the
"Comment file used in a command"
setting of the PLC parameter or with
the QCDSET instruction.
YES
Should the
comment file setting be
NO (Setting with the QCDSET instruction)
performed with the "Comment
file used in a command"
setting of the PLC
parameter?
YES
(Setting with the PLC parameter)
Execute the QCDSET instruction to
Switch the power from OFF to ON perform the comment file setting.
or reset, after writing the PLC
parameter to the CPU module.
Can the
NO comment of active step or the
comment of transfer condition
associating with active
step be read?
YES
(To next page) Completed
12 - 33
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From previous page) 1
Is the "Comment
file used in a command" 2
setting of the "PLC file setting" of YES
the PLC parameter the "Use
the same file name as
the program"? 3
Does a
comment file which
YES has the same name as the
NO
SFC program file exist in
the target memory?
12
NO
5
Create a comment file which has the same
name as the SFC program file and store it
in the target memory.
6
Switch the power from OFF to ON or
reset, after writing the PLC parameter.
7
Can the
comment of active step or
8
NO the comment of transfer
condition associating
Check the activated SFC block with the with active step
"All block batch monitor" of GX be read?
12.2.28 When comments cannot be read at execution of the S(P).SFCSCOMR and S(P).SFCTCOMR
12.2 Troubleshooting
Developer.
YES
instructions
Is the block Completed
specified with the
SP.SFCSCOMR and NO
SP.SFCTCOMR instructions
activated?
YES
Check the active step in the block Correct the block specified with the
specified with the SP.SFCSCOMR and instruction or review the executing
SP.SFCTCOMR instructions on "Active condition of instruction. (The comment of
step monitor" of GX Developer. the active step or the comment of transfer
condition associating with the active step
cannot be read, since the block specified
Does with the instruction is not activated.)
an activated step
exist in the block specified NO
with the SP.SFCSCOMR
and SP.SFCTCOMR
instructions?
YES
Review the executing condition of
Confirm that the comment of the activated
instruction. (The comment of the active
step or the comment of transfer condition
step or the comment of transfer condition
associating with the activated step can be
associating with the active step cannot
read.
be read, since no activated step exists in
the block specified with the instruction.)
12 - 34
12.2.29 When “PARAMETER ERROR” has occurred at power on or reset.
Refer to the following flowchart when “PARAMETER ERROR” occurs at power ON/reset.
(1) When “PARAMETER ERROR” (error code: 3013) has occurred
The PARAMETER ERROR
(error code: 3013) has occurred.
Read the PLC parameter from the
parameter-valid drive on GX
Developer.
Check the parameter on GX
Developer.
Is the error
detected as the result of the YES
parameter check on GX
Developer?
Correct the item where the error has
NO occurred. Perform the parameter
check on GX Developer again and
confirm that no error is detected.
Is a device set
for each CPU transmission YES
range individually with
the multiple CPU
refresh setting?
Is a device
for each refresh of
NO the transmission range for the NO
host CPU set as " "
(Blank)?
YES Check the product information of the
CPU module on the GX Developer
Set the refresh source device of the
system monitor.
transmission range for the host CPU
set as other than " "(Blank).
(The refresh source device of the
transmission range for the host CPU
cannot be set as " "(Blank).)
Is the product
YES information of the CPU
module "070320000000000"
or later?
Switch the power from OFF to ON or
reset, after writing the PLC parameter
to the CPU module again. NO
Confirm that the same error does not Uncheck "Set starting device for each
occur. PLC" or change to a CPU module of
which product information is
"070320000000000" or later. (If the
product information is not
"070320000000000" or later, the
function for setting a device of each
transmission range individually cannot
be used.)
12 - 35
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) When “PARAMETER ERROR” (error code: 3040) has occurred. 1
The PARAMETER ERROR (error
2
code: 3040) has occurred.
Write the "parameter
(PLC/Network/Remote)" to the
parameter-valid drive on GX 3
Developer.
Switch the power of the system
from OFF to ON or reset the CPU
module.
12
NO
5
Is the PARAMETER ERROR (error
code: 3040) detected again?
Completed
6
YES
Has the "Target
memory" selected the
7
NO
current parameter-valid
drive on the screen of
write to PLC of GX
Developer? 8
YES
Since the CPU module may be Select a parameter-valid drive with
12.2.29 When “PARAMETER ERROR” has occurred at power on or reset.
12.2 Troubleshooting
faulty, please contact your local the "target memory" on the PLC
Mitsubishi representative, explaining writing screen of GX Developer.
a detailed description of the problem.
12 - 36
(3) When PARAMETER ERROR (error code: 3041) has occurred.
The PARAMETER ERROR (error
code: 3041) has occurred.
Write the "parameter (Intelligent
function module)" to the parameter-
valid drive on GX Developer.
Switch the power of the system
from OFF to ON or reset the CPU
module.
NO
Is the PARAMETER ERROR (error
code: 3041) detected again?
Completed
YES
Has the "Target
memory" selected the
NO
current parameter-valid
drive on the screen of
write to PLC of GX
Developer?
YES
Since the CPU module may be Select a parameter-valid drive with
faulty, please contact your local the "target memory" on the PLC
Mitsubishi representative, explaining writing screen of GX Developer.
a detailed description of the problem.
12 - 37
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) When PARAMETER ERROR (error code: 3042) has occurred. 1
The PARAMETER ERROR
(error code: 3042) has occurred.
2
Is the parameter-valid NO
drive set in the program
memory?
3
YES
YES
Is the "PARAM" set for
booting to the program 12
memory with the "Boot
file setting" of the PLC
parameter?
5
NO
Set the "PARAM" for booting to the 6
program memory with the "Boot file
setting" of the PLC parameter.
Write the "parameter 8
(PLC/Network/Remote)" to the
parameter-valid drive on GX
Developer.
12.2.29 When “PARAMETER ERROR” has occurred at power on or reset.
12.2 Troubleshooting
Switch the power of the system from
OFF to ON or reset the CPU
module.
Is the PARAMETER ERROR NO
(error code: 3042) detected
again?
Completed
YES
Has the "Target
memory" selected the
current parameter-valid NO
drive on the screen of
write to PLC of GX
Developer?
YES
Since the CPU module may be Select a parameter-valid drive with
faulty, please contact your local the "target memory" on the PLC
Mitsubishi representative, explaining writing screen of GX Developer.
a detailed description of the problem.
12 - 38
12.2.30 When the CPU cannot communicate with GX Developer
Refer to the following flowchart when communication with peripheral device is disabled when connecting the CPU
module with GX Developer.
The CPU cannot communicate
with the GX Developer.
Is the connection cable NO Connect the connection cable
connected properly? properly.
YES NO Can the CPU YES
communicate with the GX
Developer?
Can the CPU
communicate with the GX YES
Developer by replacing the
connection cable?
NO
Replace the
CPU module with Replace the replaced CPU module
another one and check to see YES
if communication can be made
with the original CPU module and
between the replaced CPU check to see if the CPU module
module and GX starts up normally.
Developer.
NO (To next page)
Is the connection USB Is the USB driver NO Install the USB driver into
type RS-232? installed in the personal the personal computer.
computer?
RS-232 YES
NO Can the CPU YES
communicate with the GX
Developer?
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Can the CPU
communicate with GX YES
Developer by lowering the
baud rate?
NO
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Completed
12 - 39
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From previous page)
1
(When off)
Section 12.2.6 Flowchart for when
the "POWER" LED turns off.
2
How is the "POWER" LED NO (When on (red))
of the power supply module? Section 12.2.8 Flowchart for when
the "POWER" LED turns on (red).
YES
Are all the power
Check the wiring and power on all
3
supply modules powered on? NO
Is the wiring of the power supply the power supply modules.
module correct?
12
YES NO Can the CPU communicate YES
with the GX Developer?
5
Is the extension
cable connected properly? NO
(Isn't IN connected to
IN or OUT connected
Connect the extension cable properly.
6
to OUT?)
YES NO Can the CPU communicate YES
with the GX Developer? 7
Is the CPU module RESET position
RESET/L. CLR switch in Cancel the RESET.
the neutral position? 8
Other than RESET position NO Can the CPU communicate YES
with the GX Developer?
Replace the power supply module and
12.2.30 When the CPU cannot communicate with GX Developer
12.2 Troubleshooting
confirm that the "POWER" LED is turned
on green.
Can the CPU communicate YES
Hardware fault of power supply module.
with the GX Developer?
NO
A hardware fault may have occurred in any of the following modules.
1) CPU module
2) Main base unit, extension base unit
3) Extension cable Completed
4) I/O Module (If one is installed)
5) Interlligent function module (If one is installed)
6) Network module (If one is installed)
Perform operations in due order, starting with the minimum system
where the power supply module and CPU module are mounted on the
main base unit.
If the module will not work, please consalt your local nearest Mitsubishi
or representative, explaining a detailed discription of the problem.
12 - 40
12.2.31 When Ethernet communication is not available other than by direct
connection to GX Developer
Refer to the following flowchart when Ethernet communication is not available other than by connecting GX Developer
directly.
Ethernet communication is not available
by a method other than direct connection
to GX Developer.
In "Transfer Setup" of GX Developer,
select "Ethernet" for "PC side I/F", "PLC
module" for "PLC side I/F", and "Other
station" for "Other station", and then
click "Connection test".
YES
Is the Find CPU function used
for IP address setting? *1
YES
NO Is duplicate IP address Set unique IP addresses.
warning displayed?
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available
with GX Developer?
Are settings in NO Correct the "Transfer Setup"
"Transfer Setup" of GX Developer
settings in GX Developer.
correct? *2
YES
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available
with GX Developer?
YES
Accessing a QnA/A series
CPU on another station?
Replace the MELSECNET/H
YES network module with the one
NO
Are the conditions in *3 met? whose product information is
100420000000000-D or later.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available
with GX Developer?
Section 12.2.32
When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available
Completed
12 - 41
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
*1: If the target CPU is not found by the Find CPU function, check the following.
Route: 1
• Check that access to the target CPU does not pass through any router.
• Check the parameters.
• Check that the Find CPU function is not rejected by a parameter setting of the target CPU.
Computer-side settings:
• Check if an IP address is set.
2
• Check if use of the Ethernet port is enabled.
• Check if the firewall setting is disabled.
When enabled, check if communication with Built-in Ethernet QCPU is excluded in the setting.
• Check if communication with Built-in Ethernet QCPU is disabled by security software. 3
CPU-side settings:
• Is the load for service processing too high in the target CPU? (If so, increase the service
process time in Service process setting of PLC parameters.)
*2: Check the following: 12
PC side I/F Ethernet board setting
• Correct protocol specification (TCP/UDP)?
PC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module
• Isn't direct CPU connection selected?
• Correct IP address specification?
5
*3: Check if all of the following conditions are met:
• The Built-in Ethernet QCPU connected to GX Developer is in a multiple CPU configuration.
• The control CPU of the MELSECNET/H network module on the route is any other than Built-in
Ethernet QCPU. 6
• The product information of the MELSECNET/H network module on the route is:
(100320000000000-D or earlier)
12.2.31 When Ethernet communication is not available other than by direct connection to GX
12.2 Troubleshooting
Developer
12 - 42
12.2.32 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available
Refer to the following flowchart when Ethernet communication with the target device is not available.
Ethernet communication with the target
device is not available.
Perform the following.
Any cable disconnection, Connect cables properly.
NO
poor contact, or power-off or Power on the hub.
an error of the hub? *1 Remove the error in the hub.
YES Is Ethernet
NO communication available YES
with the target device?
Is the target device's NO Ask your network administrator for the
IP address set correctly? *2 target device's IP address, and set it
correctly.
YES Is Ethernet
NO communication available YES
with the target device?
How is the "SD/RD" Off
LED of the CPU module during
communication?
Flashing YES Are cables and
hub connected correctly? *1
NO
Check wiring of cables and hub
and connect them correctly. *1
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available
with the target device?
Off or
How is the "POWER" on (red) (When off)
LED of the power supply module? Section 12.2.6 When the "POWER" LED turns off
(When on (red))
Section 12.2.8 When the "POWER" LED turns on (red)
On (green)
*1: Supplemental remarks on switching hubs
Reconnecting a personal computer or CPU to a
To diagnose the built-in
switching hub or replacing the switching hub with
Ethernet port, power on the
another may take time for the hub to read MAC
CPU module again or reset it.
addresses.
Retry it after a little while, or power on the hub again.
Completed
*2: Check the following:
Is an IP address set?
Is the Ethernet port enabled?
(To the next page) Is the Ethernet port device operating normally?
Is the firewall setting disabled?
If enabled,is communication with the Built-in Ethernet QCPU excluded in the setting?
Isn't communication with the Built-in Ethernet QCPU disabled by security software?
12 - 43
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From the previous page)
1
How is the "ERR." On or flashing
LED of the CPU module?
Hardware fault
2
Please consult your local nearest
Off YES
"LAN CTRL. DOWN"? Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description
of the problem. 3
Change to USB connection to read NO
CPU setting parameters.
Section 12.2.14 12
Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is on/flickering
5
Is the Ethernet
port setting in "PLC parameter" for the Built-in NO
Enter correct parameters.
Ethernet port QCPU correct?*3
6
YES Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
7
the target device?
Is forced deactivation
YES Disable the forced
set in "Status of each connection"
of "Ethernet diagnosis"? deactivation.
8
NO Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
12.2.32 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available
12.2 Troubleshooting
Any error in
"Status of each connection" or YES Take actions according to
"Error log" of "Ethernet the error code.
diagnosis"?
NO Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
(To the next page)
Completed
*3: Confirm the following:
• Correct IP address?
• Normal subnet mask pattern?
• Normal default router IP address?
• Protocol in the open setting, protocol desired for the function, and whether the settings are
completed for the number of modules used for the function?
12 - 44
(From the previous page)
Use TCP or UDP in
Is TCP or UDP in MELSOFT YES MELSOFT connection for
connection used for more than
the specified number of
the number of modules set
modules or less.
by the parameter?
NO Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
YES
TCP/IP?
NO
NO Has any device been
turned off during TCP/IP connection?
YES
Perform the following.
Wait for a little while (approx. 1min.), and
retry after the connection is closed by
the alive check funciton of the Built-in
Ethernet port QCPU.
Increase the number of connections in the
setting to allow some spare connections.
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available with
the target device?
In the detailed
Perform the following.
host station setting of Set a time out value or number
YES
"Transfer Setup", increase the time out of retries again.
value or the number of retries. Consult your network administrator
Is communication now and check the network status.
available?
NO
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
(To the next page)
Completed
12 - 45
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From the previous page) 1
Is a response returned in
PING test?
YES
2
Does transmission NO
NO pass through a router?
YES (To the next page)
3
1)
Is the same network
Does transmission NO address set for IP addresses of the target NO Correct the network
pass through a router? device and CPU?
Is the same subnet mask used?
address and subnet mask
of the IP address.
12
YES
5
YES
Is the same network address set NO (To the next page)
for IP addresses of the target Set the same network address for the IP addresses.
device, router, and CPU?
6
Is Ethernet
NO YES
YES communication available with
the target device?
7
Is there default router IP address NO Enter a default router IP address and subnet
and subnet mask pattern settings in mask pattern correctly.
CPU parameters? 8
Is Ethernet
YES NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
12.2.32 When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available
12.2 Troubleshooting
Are the router IP address and NO Set the router IP address and subnet
subnet mask set on the target mask correctly.
device side?
NO Is Ethernet YES
YES
communication available with
1) the target device?
NO
Any error in the router? Remove the error in the router.
YES
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available with
the target device?
Are the router NO
settings correct? *4 Modify the router settings.
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
Completed
(To the next page) *4: Check the following.
Are the routing settings for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and target devices correct?
Isn't communication with the Built-in Ethernet QCPU disabled by any security or
security software?
12 - 46
(From previous page)
Do PING replies return Check the cables and hub in the
NO
between each pair of nodes on the network to ensure normal
same network? communication route.
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication available with
the target device?
Replace the hub, router, or Normal operation
cables to check for
communication.
Error detection
Hardware fault
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
Completed
the problem.
12 - 47
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.33 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to
GX Developer 1
Refer to the following flowchart when Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to GX Developer.
2
Ethernet communication is not available
by direct connection to GX Developer.
3
Is one cable used for NO Connect the CPU to GX
Developer directly with one cable.
connection?
12
YES
Is Ethernet
NO
communication with GX Developer
YES
5
available?
Any cable
disconnection or poor contact?
NO
Connect the cable correctly.
6
YES
NO Is Ethernet YES
7
communication with GX Developer
available?
8
Is the computer's IP address set NO Ask your network administrator for the
correctly? *1 computer's IP address, and set it correctly.
12.2.33 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to GX Developer
12.2 Troubleshooting
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication with GX Developer
available?
Was direct NO
CPU connection selected
in "PLC side I/F Detailed setting Select direct CPU connection
of PLC module" of "Transfer in "Transfer Setup".
Setup"?
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication with GX Developer
available?
In "Transfer Setup" of GX Developer, select
"Ethernet" for "PC side I/F", "PLC module"
for "PLC side I/F" and "No specification" for
"Other station", and click "Connection test".
*1: Check the following:
Is an IP address set?
Is the Ethernet port enabled?
Is the Ethernet port device operating normally? Completed
(To the next page) Is the firewall setting disabled?
If enabled, are communications with MELSOFT products excluded in the setting?
Isn't communication with the Built-in Ethernet QCPU disabled by security software?
Are multiple Ethernet ports enabled at the same time?
12 - 48
(From the previous page)
How is Off
the "SD/RD" LED of the CPUmodule?
Flashing YES
Are cables connected properly? *2
NO
Check cables and wiring and
connect them properly. *2
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication with GX Developer
available?
(When off)
How is Off or on (red) Section 12.2.6 When the "POWER" LED turns off
the "POWER" LED of the power
(When on (red))
supply module?
Section 12.2.8 When the "POWER" LED turns on (red)
On (green)
To diagnose the built-in Ethernet port, power on
the CPU again or reset it.
How is On or flashing
the "ERR." LED of the CPU module?
Hardware fault
Please consult your local nearest
Off YES Mitsubishi or representative,
"LAN CTRL. DOWN"?
explaining a detailed description
of the problem.
NO
Change to USB connection to read
CPU setting parameters.
Section 12.2.14
Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is on/flickering
Is direct
MELSOFT connection NO Deselect "Disable direct
disabled in "Built-in Ethernet port" connection to MELSOFT".
of "PLC parameter"?
YES
Is Ethernet
NO YES
communication with GX Developer
available?
*2: Check the following:
Is an IP address set?
(To the next page)
Is the Ethernet port enabled?
Completed
Is the Ethernet port device operating normally?
Is the firewall setting disabled?
If enabled, are communications with MELSOFT products excluded in the setting?
Isn't communication with the Built-in Ethernet QCPU disabled by security software?
Are multiple Ethernet ports enabled at the same time?
12 - 49
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
1
(From the previous page)
In "Status of
each connection" of
NO
2
"Ethernet diagnosis", is the directly Disable the forced deactivation.
connected connection set in
forced deactivation
status?
Is Ethernet
3
YES NO YES
communication available
with GX Developer?
12
Any error in "Status of NO
each connection" or "Error log" of Take actions according to the error code.
"Ethernet diagnosis"? 5
Is Ethernet
YES NO
communication available
with GX Developer?
YES
6
7
In the detailed
host station setting of Perform the following.
"Transfer Setup", increase the value YES Adjust the communication timeout or the
of Time out or Retry times. number of retries again.
Check the status of the cables, connected
8
Is communication now
available? devices, and Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
NO
12.2.33 When Ethernet communication is not available by direct connection to GX Developer
12.2 Troubleshooting
Normal operation
Replace the cable.
Error detection
Is direct connection
available for the connected YES Connect a hub to the line and
device? (Check the Ethernet interface communicate with others through
specifications.) the hub.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication available
with GX Developer?
Hardware fault
Please consult your local nearest
Mitsubishi or representative,
explaining a detailed description of
the problem.
Completed
12 - 50
12.2.34 When Ethernet communication with CPU module is slow or unstable
Refer to the following flowchart when Ethernet communication with a CPU module is slow or unstable.
Ethernet communication with the CPU module
is slow or unstable.
YES
Does a duplicate IP
address exist? *1 Set unique IP addresses.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
Is UDP in
MELSOFT connection YES Use UDP in MELSOFT connection for the specified
or MC protocol used for more the number
number of modules or less.
of modules set by the
parameter?
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
Use TCP instead of UDP. YES
Use TCP.
Improved?
NO
YES
Retry or increase the number of Use retries. *2
retries. Improved?
NO
YES
Replace the hub, router or cables. Replace the faulty one with another.
Stabilized?
NO
Is the hub
capable of flow control
(IEEE802.3x PAUSE)? NO Consult your network administrator and correct the hub.
Is the flow control enabled? Use a hub that is capable of flow control.
(Consult your network administrator.) Enable the flow control.
YES NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
*1: Checking methods:
(To the next page) With the Find CPU function of GX Developer, check the Built-in Ethernet
port QCPU for IP address duplication.
Disconnect a suspected device from the network, and run PING test from Completed
another device to its address. If a reply is returned, there is a device with
a duplicate IP address.
Check respective IP address settings.
*2: If transmissions pass through a wireless LAN, some packets may be lost resulting
in unstable Ethernet communication.
Using retries may increase stability of Ethernet communication.
12 - 51
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From the previous page)
1
Has the hub
or router discarded messages
because of its too-small packet buffer
YES
Consult your network administrator and check the hub
and router. 2
Use a hub or router that has a large packet buffer
capacity? (Consult your network
capacity.
administrator.)
3
NO NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
12
Consult your network administrator and check the
Is communication of a network condition.
YES Take actions against noise to reduce communication
device other than the Built-in Ethernet port
5
QCPU unstable? (Consult your network errors. *3
administrator.) Check the traffic, and if a high traffic is a cause of the
problem, take actions for it.
NO
NO Is Ethernet
communication stabilized?
YES
6
Have many
unnecessary broadcast data YES
been received? (See Connection
status in Ethernet 7
diagnosis.)
Unnecessary broadcast data have been highly loaded.
NO Increase service time for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
Consult your network administrator, and check the network condition.
Identify a broadcasting device, and restrict the broadcast data volume.
8
(Devices such as computers or routers may broadcast data.)
Use filtering of broadcast data with a router to prevent the Built-in Ethernet port
QCPU from receiving them.
Separate the network where frequent broadcast occur from the network
12.2.34 When Ethernet communication with CPU module is slow or unstable
12.2 Troubleshooting
containing the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
Reduce the Ethernet communication load on the Built-in Ethernet
Is the Ethernet YES port QCPU.
communication load on the Built-in Increase service time for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
Ethernet port QCPU Reduce the number of connected devices.
too high? Reduce the connection setting value.
Reduce the communication frequency per connection and data volume.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
YES
Is any interrupt program used? Reduce the frequency and process time of the interrupt
program.
NO
NO Is Ethernet YES
communication stabilized?
Check the communications referring to the following.
Section 12.2.32
Completed
When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available
12 - 52
*3 : A communication error may occur due to high-frequency noise emitted from a device other than programmable
controllers. The following measures can be taken to protect network systems from high-frequency noise.
Wiring
• Do not install twisted pair cables together with the main circuit or power cables.
• Put twisted pair cables in a duct.
• Replace UTP cables with STP cables.
Communication method
• Use TCP/IP to exchange data with the target device.
• Increase the number of communication retries, if necessary.
• 10Mbps communication
• In the case of using 100Mbps, replace the hub with a 10Mbps hub and perform data
communication at a transmission speed of 10Mbps.
12 - 53
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.35 When an error has occurred during MC protocol communication
1
Refer to the following flowchart when an error has occurred during MC protocol communication.
Communication error 2
Was the command sent from
NO
Send the command to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
3
another device?
YES
NO YES
12
Was the error resolved?
Was a response YES 5
returned to the device that sent
the command?
NO 6
(To the next page)
Is the end code of the response "0"?
NO According to the end code or error code, repair the 7
error part.
YES
NO YES
8
Was the error resolved?
Is the IP address NO
Correct the IP address and send the command again.
12.2.35 When an error has occurred during MC protocol communication
12.2 Troubleshooting
specified in the command correct?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
Are command
Correct the command format referring to the following
format specifications such as NO
manual.
command type, device,
MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
or address correct?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
Hardware fault
Please consult your local nearest Mitsubishi or
representative, explaining a detailed description of the
problem.
Completed
12 - 54
(From the previous page)
Is the same
protocol (TCP/IP) used for NO Use the same protocol (TCP/IP) for communication with
communication with the target the target device.
device?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
Is the IP address NO
specified in the command correct? Correct the IP address and send the command again.
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
Are the data sent
NO
to the port number specified in the Open
Send the data to the specified port No.
settings on the Built-in Ethernet
port QCPU?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
Is the Communication NO
data code setting (binary/ASCII) Send a command matched with Communication data
matched with the sent code setting.
command?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
NO
Is the sub-header
Send a sub-header of a normal value.
value correct?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
NO
Were data of the request Send data of the request data length.
data length sent?
YES
NO YES
Was the error resolved?
(To the next page)
Completed
12 - 55
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From previous page)
1
Are the data
specified for command format, NO
2
Correct the command format referring to the following manual.
such as command type, device or
address correct? MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
YES
NO YES 3
Was the error resolved?
Were requests Perform the following.
12
from multiple devices YES
Disable simultaneous request
simultaneously sent to the MC protocol
transmissions from multiple devices.
port specified in Open
settings? Set a different MC protocol port for
each target.
5
NO
NO
Was the error resolved?
YES 6
Section 12.2.32
When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available 7
Completed
12.2.35 When an error has occurred during MC protocol communication
12.2 Troubleshooting
12 - 56
12.2.36 When clock data cannot be set by SNTP
Refer to the following flowchart when clock data cannot be set by SNTP.
Time cannot be set by SNTP.
Is the time setting
NO
functioning? (See Ethernet
Check the time setting function settings. *1
diagnosis screen or SD1270.)
NO YES
YES Is the time setting available?
Failed to set time? YES
(See Ethernet diagnosis screen or
SD1270.)
(To the next page)
NO
YES
Is the multiple CPU function used?
NO
NO
Has time been set on CPU
No.1 in the multiple CPU system? Set time on CPU No.1.
YES
NO YES
Is the time setting available?
Are the prameters of NO
the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Enter correct parameters.
correct? *1
YES
NO YES
Is the time setting available?
Check if time was overwritten from the
sequence program or another device. Completed
12 - 57
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From the previous page)
1
Are the prameters of the NO
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Enter correct parameters. 2
correct?
YES NO YES
Is the time setting available?
3
Is the SNTP server NO
specified for Q series running
properly?
Repair the SNTP server.
12
NO YES
YES Is the time setting available?
5
Section 12.2.32 Completed
When Ethernet communication with the target device is not available 6
12.2.36 When clock data cannot be set by SNTP
12.2 Troubleshooting
12 - 58
12.2.37 When unable to receive data on the external device side by the Socket
communication function
Data are not received by the target.
NO Section 12.2.39
The connection opened?*1 When open process of the Socket
communication function does not complete
YES
Data cannot be sent in a connection for
YES simultaneous broadcast whose target
The port No. of
port No. is FFFFH.
the target specified by FFFFH
Send by another connection.
when using UDP?
Set the port No. of the target device by
the SOCSET instruction and then send.
NO
Any error
shown in the Status of YES *1 Refer to the corresponding bit of SD1282 (Open completion signal).
each connection screen or the Error Take corrective actions
*2 Check the following:
log screen on the Ethernet according to the error code.
diagnosis screen? Is the IP address correct?
Is the subnet mask pattern correct?
Is the default router IP address correct?
NO Connection No.
Are the connection method and open method correct?
Are the port No. of own station and IP address/port No. of the
The SOCSND Take corrective actions target device correct?
YES
instruction completed according to the error code Are the protocols and functions to be used all configured in the
in error (Error completion stored in the completion status Open settings?
device turned on)? area of the SOCSND instruction. *3 Two or more receive instructions may be executed to read the data
sent by one send instruction since TCP does not have architecture for
specifying data boundaries.
NO
For this reason, the received data size must be checked when
receiving, and receive the remaining data if exists.
The parameters For more details, refer to the following.
NO
and setting data for Correct the parameters and QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in
SOCOPEN correct?*2 setting data for SOCOPEN. Ethernet Port)
YES
The SOCSND NO Correct the execution
instruction being executed
conditions of the SOCSND
(Start-up contact rose)?
instruction.
YES
NO
Set the send data length?*3 Set the data length.
YES
NO
Any faulty part Correct the faulty part in
in the target device? the target device.
YES
Section 12.2.32
When Ethernet communication with
the target device is not available
12 - 59
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.2.38 When unable to receive data by the Socket communication function
1
*1 Refer to the corresponding bit of SD1282 (Open completion signal)
Data cannot be received.
*2 Check the following:
Is the IP address correct?
2
Is the subnet mask pattern correct?
Is the default router IP address correct?
Section 12.2.39 Connection No.
The connection opened?*1
NO
When open process of the Socket
communication function does not
Are the connection method and open method correct?
Are the port No. of own station and IP address/port No. 3
of the target device correct?
complete
Are the protocols and functions to be used all configured in
the Open settings?
12
YES
*3 Two or more receive instructions may be executed to read the data
sent by one send instruction since TCP does not have architecture for
Any error specifying data boundaries.
shown in the Status YES For this reason, the received data size must be checked when
of each connection screen or Take corrective actions
the Error log screen on the according to the error code. receiving, and receive the remaining data if exists.
5
Ethernet diagnosis For more details, refer to the following.
screen? QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in
Ethernet Port)
NO
*4 It is recommended to include the checking method, such as the data
length and data type code, in the message data so that the data
6
The SOCRCV Take corrective actions according
instruction completed in YES information such as the number of bytes and data size can be
to the error code stored in
error (Error completion the completion status area of checked on the receive side.
device turned on)? the SOCRCV instruction.
NO
7
The receive completion NO
signal of the connection on?
8
YES The parameters NO Correct the parameters
and setting data for SOCOPEN and setting data for
correct?*2 SOCOPEN.
The SOCRCV(S) Correct the execution
NO
instruction being executed? conditions of the SOCRCV(S)
12.2.38 When unable to receive data by the Socket communication function
12.2 Troubleshooting
(Start-up contact is on or instruction. YES
has rosen?)*5
Send data from the target
YES Data are sent from NO device. Check the send
the target device side? processing on the target
The length of device side.
the data to be received NO
and the volume of actually received
data the same in size YES
when using TCP?
YES
Any faulty part NO Correct the faulty part
in the target device? in the target device.
YES
Section 12.2.32
When Ethernet communication with
the target device is not available
Provided
the processing for When the data length is determined, use the fixed-length receive
receiving remaining data when NO
the actual data is less than the mode.
response data length of the If the actual data volume is less than the expected data length,
receive message? take actions for receiving the remaining data .
If the actual data volume is exceeding the expected data length,
process the data as the next message or as unnecessary data.
YES
*3, *4
Section 12.2.32
When Ethernet communication with
the target device is not available
*5 The start-up contact may not be turned on only with the Reception status signal (SD1286) depending
Complete on the scan time since the signal turns on if the next data are received immediately after executing
the SP.SOCRCV instruction.
In this case, provide a normal close contact of the completion device of the SP.SOCRCV instruction
in the start-up condition of the instruction.
12 - 60
12.2.39 When open process of the Socket communication function does not
complete
When open process of
the Socket communication
function does not complete
NO
UDP/IP
TCP/IP? Correct the parameters.*1
YES TCP/IP
Connect from Executed Execute
NO
the Built-in Ethernet port the SOCOPEN instruction the SOCOPEN
QCPU side? YES Active open with Active open instruction with Active
specified? open specified.
NO Passive open YES
Any error
shown in the Status
NO of each connection screen YES Take corrective
Parameters are
Correct the parameters. or the Error log screen on actions according to
correctly set?*2
the Ethernet diagnosis the error code.
screen?
YES NO
Take corrective actions
Connect from the target The SOCOPEN according to the error
The target device NO YES
device to the specified instruction completed code stored in the
is connected to the in error (Error completion
port. completion status area
specified port?*3 device turned
on)? of the SOCOPEN
*3 When in Fullpassive, check that instruction.
YES the IP address and port No. of NO
the target device match with
the set data.
The parameters NO Correct the parameters
and setting data for and setting data for
SOCOPEN SOCOPEN.
correct?*1
YES
The specified Change the status of
NO the specified port of
port on the target device
side is in the Passive the target device to
open status? Passive open.
YES
The SOCOPEN NO Correct the execution
instruction being executed? conditions of the
(Start-up contact is on
or has rosen?) SOCOPEN instruction.
YES
*1 Check the following:
Is the IP address correct?
Connected again
with the same communication Retry 8 seconds later or Is the subnet mask pattern correct?
YES
target IP address, the same own station change the own station port Is the default router IP address correct?
port No., and the same communication No. of the device that is in
target port No. after Connection No.
closing? active open. Are the connection method and open method correct?
Are the port No. of own station and IP address/port No. of the target device
NO correct?
*2 Check the following:
Any faulty part NO Correct the faulty part Is the IP address correct?
in the target device? in the target device. Is the subnet mask pattern correct?
Is the default router IP address correct?
Connection No.
Are the connection method and open method correct?
YES
Is the port No. of own station correct?
Section 12.2.32 When in Full passive, are the IP address and port No. of the target device
correct?
When Ethernet communication
Are the protocols and functions to be used all configured in the Open
with the target device is not
settings?
available.
12 - 61
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3 Error Code List
The CPU module uses the self diagnostics function to display error information (on the LED) and
stores the information into the special relay SM and special register SD, when an error occurs in
the following situations:
• When the Progammable Controller is powered ON.
• When the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN.
• While the CPU module is running.
If an error occurs when a communication request is issued from the peripheral device, intelligent
function module or network system to the CPU module, the CPU module returns the error code 12
(4000H to 4FFFH) to the request source.
The following describes the description of errors which occur in the CPU module and the
corrective actions for the errors.
(1) How to read the error code list
The following describes how to read Section 12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999) to Section
12.3.9 Error code list (7000 to 10000).
(a) Error code, common information and individual information
Alphanumeric characters in the parentheses of the titles indicate the special register
numbers where each information is stored.
(b) Compatible CPU
QCPU : Indicates all the Q series CPU modules.
Q00J/Q00/Q01 : Indicates the Basic model QCPU.
Qn(H) : Indicates the High Performance model QCPU.
QnPH : Indicates the Process CPU.
12.3 Error Code List
QnPRH : Indicates the Redundant CPU.
QnU : Indicates the Universal model QCPU.
Each CPU module : Indicates the relevant specific CPU module.
model name (Example: Q02U)
12 - 62
12.3.1 Error codes
Errors are detected by the self diagnostic function of the CPU module or detected during
communication with the CPU module.
The relation between the error detection pattern, error detection location and error code is shown
in Table 12.1.
Table12.1Reference destination
Error detection
Error detection pattern Error code Reference
location
Detection by the self
diagnostics function of CPU CPU module 1000 to 10000*1*2 Section 12.3.3 to 12.3.9
module
• QCPU User's Manual (Hardware design,
CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH
Maintenance and Inspection)
Serial communication
7000H to 7FFFH Serial Communication User's Manual, etc.
module, etc.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's
CC-Link module B000H to BFFFH
Manual
Ethernet module C000H to CFFFH Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
Detection at communication
CC-Link IE controller CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference
with CPU module E000H to EFFFH
network Manual
• MELSECNET/H mode
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network
MELSECNET/H System Reference Manual
F000H to FFFFH
network module • MELSECNET/10 mode
For QnA/Q4AR MELSECNET/10 Network
System Reference Manual
*1: CPU module error codes are classified into minor, moderate, major errors as shown below.
• Minor error: Errors that may allow the CPU module to continue the operation, e.g., battery error.
(Error code: 1300 to 10000)
• Moderate error: Errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation, e.g., WDT error.
(Error code: 1300 to 10000)
• Major error: Errors that may cause the CPU module to stop the operation, e.g., RAM error.
(Error code: 1000 to 1299)
Determine the error level, i.e. whether the operation can be continued or stopped, by referring to
"Operating Statuses of CPU" described in Section 12.3.3 to 12.3.9 "Error Code List"
*2: When detected an error code without being noted in the reference table, please contact your local
Mitsubishi representive.
12.3.2 Reading an error code
When an error occurs, reading an error code, error message or the like can be executed with GX
Developer.
For the details of the operation method, refer to the operating manual for GX Developer.
12 - 63
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 1000 to 1999, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of
main CPU
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
• Hardware fault
1000 same error is displayed again, this suggests a
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
Mitsubishi representative.)
12
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of
main CPU
• Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason • Take noise reduction measures.
• Hardware fault • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
• Accessed to outlying devices with the device same error is displayed again, this suggests a
range checks disabled (SM237 is turned on)(This CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
1001 error occurs only when BMOV, FMOV, and Mitsubishi representative.)
DFMOV instructions are executed.) • Check the devices specified by BMOV, FMOV,
(Universal model QCPU only) and DFMOV instructions and correct the device
■Collateral information settings.
• Common Information:– (Universal model QCPU only)
• Individual Information:– QCPU
■Diagnostic Timing RUN:
• Always Off
1002 [MAIN CPU DOWN] ERR.:
1003 Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of Flicker
main CPU
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason CPU Status:
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
• Hardware fault Stop
same error is displayed again, this suggests a
■Collateral information
1004 CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
• Common Information:–
Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of
main CPU
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
• Hardware fault
same error is displayed again, this suggests a
■Collateral information
CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
• Common Information:–
Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
1005
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Boot operation was performed in the transfer desti-
nation without formatting.
• Before performing boot operation by the parame- Qn(H)
■Collateral information
ter, select "Clear program memory" to clear the QnPH
• Common Information:–
program memory. QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON
12 - 64
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
1006 [MAIN CPU DOWN] QCPU
1007 Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of
main CPU
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
• Hardware fault Qn(H)
same error is displayed again, this suggests a
■Collateral information QnPH
1008 CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
• Common Information:– QnPRH
Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
• A failure is detected on the power supply module,
CPU module, main base unit, extension base
unit or extension cable.
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
• When using the redundant base unit, the redun- Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
same error is detected again, it is considered that
dant power supply module failure in both sys-
the power supply module, CPU module, main base Qn(H)*6
1009 tems and/or the redundant base unit failure are QnPH
unit, extension base unit or extension cable is
detected. QnPRH
faulty.
■Collateral information QnU
(Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[END NOT EXECUTE]
Entire program was executed without the execution
of an END instruction. RUN:
• When the END instruction is executed it is read Off
• Take noise reduction measures.
as another instruction code, e.g. due to noise. ERR.:
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
• The END instruction has been changed to Flicker
1010 same error is displayed again, this suggests a QCPU
another instruction code somehow.
CPU module hardware fault. (Contact your local
■Collateral information CPU Status:
Mitsubishi representative.)
• Common Information:– Stop
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[SFCP. END ERROR]
The SFC program cannot be normally terminated
due to noise or other reason.
• The SFC program cannot be normally terminated
• Take noise reduction measures.
due to noise or any similar cause.
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
• The SFC program cannot be normally terminated
1020 same error is displayed again, this suggests a QnPH
for any other reason.
CPU module hardware fault. (Contact your local QnU
■Collateral information
Mitsubishi representative.)
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When SFC program is executed
[MAIN CPU DOWN]
Runaway or error of the CPU module was
detected. • Take measures against noise.
• Malfunction due to noise etc. • Reset the CPU module and run it again. If the
• Hardware failure same error is displayed again, the CPU module
1035 QnU
■Collateral information has hardware failure.(Contact your local Mitsub-
• Common Information:– ishi representative, explaining a detailed descrip-
• Individual Information:– tion of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
*4 Function version is B or later.
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04101" or later.
12 - 65
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[RAM ERROR]
The sequence program storing program memory in
the CPU module is faulty. • Take noise reduction measures.
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
1101 • Common Information:– same error is displayed again,this suggests a
• Individual Information:– CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
■Diagnostic Timing Mitsubishi representative.) RUN:
• At power ON/ At reset/ When an END instruction Off
executed ERR.:
[RAM ERROR] Flicker QCPU
• The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
• The standard RAM and extended RAM in the CPU Status:
• Take noise reduction measures.
1102
CPU module are faulty.
■Collateral information
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
same error is displayed again,this suggests a
Stop
12
• Common Information:–
CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local
• Individual Information:–
Mitsubishi representative.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset/ When an END instruction
executed
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
12 - 66
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[RAM ERROR]
The device memory in the CPU module is faulty.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– QCPU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing • Take noise reduction measures.
• At power ON/ At reset • When indexing is performed, check the value of
[RAM ERROR] index register to see if it is within the device
• The device memory in the CPU module is faulty. range.
1103
• The device out of range is accessed due to • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
indexing, and the device for system is overwrit- same error is displayed again,this suggests a
ten. CPU module hardware fault.(Contact your local Qn(H)*8
■Collateral information Mitsubishi representative.) QnPH*8
• Common Information:– QnPRH*9
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset/ When an END instruction
executed
[RAM ERROR]
The address RAM in the CPU module is faulty. • Take noise reduction measures.
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
1104 • Common Information:– same error is displayed again, this suggests a QCPU
RUN:
• Individual Information:– CPU module hardware fault. (Contact your local
Off
■Diagnostic Timing Mitsubishi representative.)
• At power ON/ At reset ERR.:
Flicker
[RAM ERROR]
The CPU memory in the CPU module is faulty.
■Collateral information CPU Status:
Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common Information:–
QnU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing • Take noise reduction measures.
• At power ON/ At reset • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.If the
1105 [RAM ERROR] same error is displayed again, this suggests a
The CPU shared memory in the CPU module is CPU module hardware fault. (Contact your local
faulty. Mitsubishi representative.) Qn(H)*4
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:– QnPRH
• Individual Information:– QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
• Check the battery to see if it is dead or not. If
[RAM ERROR]
dead, replace the battery.
The battery is dead.
• Take noise reduction measures.
The program memory in the CPU module is faulty.
• Format the program memory, write all files to the
■Collateral information Qn(H)
• Common Information:– PLC, then reset the CPU module, and RUN it
1106 QnPH*7
• Individual Information:– again.
QnPRH
■Diagnostic Timing If the same error is displayed again, the possible
cause is a CPU module hardware fault. (Contact
• STOP RUN/When an END instruction exe-
your local Mitsubishi representative, explaining a
cuted
detailed description of the problem.)
*4 Function version is B or later.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*8 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "08032" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 67
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
1107 [RAM ERROR]
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– QnPRH
1108
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[RAM ERROR]
The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty.
■Collateral information Qn(H)*8
1109 • Common Information:– QnPH*8
• Individual Information:– QnPRH*9
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. (Con-
12
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
A fault was detected by the initial check of the
tracking hardware.
■Collateral information
1110
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset QnPRH
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
RUN:
A tracking hardware fault was detected.
Off
■Collateral information
ERR.:
1111 • Common Information:–
Flicker
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset CPU Status:
Stop
1112 [TRK. CIR. ERROR]
A tracking hardware fault was detected during run-
ning. • Start after checking that the tracking cable is con-
• The tracking cable was disconnected and rein- nected.
serted without the standby system being pow- If the same error is displayed again, the cause is
ered off or reset. the hardware fault of the tracking cable or CPU
• The tracking cable is not secured by the connec- module. (Please contact your local Mitsubishi
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
tor fixing screws. representative, explaining a detailed description
1113
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun- of the problem.)
dant system startup procedure was not followed. • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
■Collateral information and execute a startup again. For details, refer to
• Common Information:– the QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant Sys- QnPRH
• Individual Information:– tem).
■Diagnostic Timing
• During running
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
A fault was detected by the initial check of the
tracking hardware.
■Collateral information This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. (Con-
1115
• Common Information:– tact your nearest Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
*8 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "08032" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 68
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[TRK. CIR. ERROR]
A tracking hardware fault was detected during run-
ning. • Start after checking that the tracking cable is con-
• The tracking cable was disconnected and rein- nected.
serted without the standby system being pow- If the same error is displayed again, the cause is
ered off or reset. the hardware fault of the tracking cable or CPU
• The tracking cable is not secured by the connec- module. (Please contact your local Mitsubishi
1116 tor fixing screws. representative, explaining a detailed description QnPRH
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun- of the problem.) RUN:
dant system startup procedure was not followed. • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure, Off
■Collateral information and execute a startup again. For details, refer to ERR.:
• Common Information:– the QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant Sys- Flicker
• Individual Information:– tem).
■Diagnostic Timing CPU Status:
• During running Stop
[RAM ERROR]
The memory of the CPU module in the Multiple • Take noise reduction measures.
CPU high speed transmission area is faulty. • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again.
■Collateral information If the same error is displayed again, the CPU
1150 QnU*10
• Common Information:– module has hardware failure. Contact your local
• Individual Information:– Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
■Diagnostic Timing description of the problem.
• At power ON/ At reset
[RAM ERROR] • Take noise reduction measures.
The program memory in the CPU module is over- • Format the program memory, write all files to the
written. PLC, then reset the CPU module, and RUN it
■Collateral information again.
1160
• Common Information:– If the same error is displayed again, the CPU
• Individual Information:– module has hardware failure. Contact your local
■Diagnostic Timing Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
• At program execution description of the problem.
[RAM ERROR]
The data of the device memory built in the CPU
• Take noise reduction measures.
module is overwritten.
If the same error is displayed again, the CPU
■Collateral information
1161 module has hardware failure. Contact your local
• Common Information:– QnU
Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed RUN:
• Individual Information:–
description of the problem. Off
■Diagnostic Timing
• At program execution ERR.:
[RAM ERROR] Flicker
The error of the data held by the battery in the CPU • Take noise reduction measures.
module is detected. (It occurs when the automatic • Change the CPU main body or SRAM card bat- CPU Status:
format is not set.) tery. Stop
1162 ■Collateral information If the same error is displayed again, the CPU
• Common Information:– module has hardware failure. Contact your local
• Individual Information:– Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
■Diagnostic Timing description of the problem.
• At power ON/ At reset
[RAM ERROR]
The destruction of the data stored in the standard
• Take noise reduction measures.
RAM is detected.
If the same error is displayed again, the CPU
■Collateral information
1164 module has hardware failure. Contact your local QnU*11
• Common Information:–
Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
• Individual Information:–
description of the problem.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*11 The Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, .Q26UD(E)HCPU only.
12 - 69
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The operation circuit for index modification in the
CPU module does not operate normally.
■Collateral information
1200
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The hardware (logic) in the CPU module does not
operate normally.
■Collateral information
1201 QCPU
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:– 12
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The operation circuit for sequence processing in
the CPU module does not operate normally.
■Collateral information
1202
• Common Information:–
RUN:
• Individual Information:–
Off
■Diagnostic Timing
ERR.:
• At power ON/ At reset This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. (Con-
Flicker
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.] tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
The operation circuit for index modification in the
CPU Status:
CPU module does not operate normally.
Stop
■Collateral information
1203
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The hardware (logic) in the CPU module does not
operate normally.
■Collateral information
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
1204 QnPRH
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[OPE. CIRCUIT ERR.]
The operation circuit for sequence processing in
the CPU module does not operate normally.
■Collateral information
1205
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
12 - 70
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
• Check FUSE. LED of the output modules and
[FUSE BREAK OFF] replace the module whose LED is lit.
There is an output module with a blown fuse.
(The module with a blown fuse can also be iden-
■Collateral information
tified using GX Developer.
• Common Information:Module No.(Slot No.) Qn(H)
Check the special registers SD1300 to SD1331
[For Remote I/O QnPH
to see if the bit corresponding to the module is
network]Network No./ QnPRH
"1".) RUN:
Station No. QnU
• When a GOT is bus-connected to the main base Off/On
• Individual Information:–
unit or extension base unit, check the connection ERR.:
■Diagnostic Timing
status of the extension cable and the earth status Flicker/On
• Always
1300 of the GOT.
[FUSE BREAK OFF] CPU Status:
There is an output module with a blown fuse. Stop/
■Collateral information Check ERR. LED of the output modules and
Continue*1
• Common Information:Module No.(Slot No.) replace the module whose LED is lit.
[For Remote I/O (The module with a blown fuse can also be identi-
Q00J/Q00/Q01
network]Network No./ fied using GX Developer. Check the special regis-
Station No. ters SD130 to SD137 to see if the bit corresponding
• Individual Information:– to the module is "1".)
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[I/O INT. ERROR]
An interruption has occurred although there is no
interrupt module. Any of the mounted modules is experiencing a
■Collateral information hardware fault. Therefore, check the mounted mod-
1310 QCPU
• Common Information:– ules and change the faulty module. (Contact your
• Individual Information:– local Mitsubishi representative.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• During interrupt
[I/O INT. ERROR]
An interrupt request from other than the interrupt
RUN:
module was detected.
Off
■Collateral information Take action so that an interrupt will not be issued Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
• Common Information:– from other than the interrupt module. ERR.:
QnU
• Individual Information:– Flicker
■Diagnostic Timing
• During interrupt CPU Status:
Stop
• Correct the interrupt pointer setting in the PLC
1311 [I/O INT. ERROR]
system setting of the PLC parameter dialog box.
An interrupt request from the module where inter-
• Take measures so that an interrupt is not issued
rupt pointer setting has not been made in the PLC
from the module where the interrupt pointer set-
parameter dialog box was detected. Q00J/Q00/Q01 *5
ting in the PLC system setting of the PLC param-
■Collateral information QnPRH
eter dialog box has not been made. Correct the
• Common Information:– QnU
interrupt setting of the network parameter. Cor-
• Individual Information:–
rect the interrupt setting of the intelligent function
■Diagnostic Timing
module buffer memory. Correct the basic pro-
• During interrupt
gram of the QD51.
1320 [LAN CTRL.DOWN] RUN:
The H/W self-diagnostics detected a LAN controller
Off
failure.
ERR.:
■Collateral information This suggests a CPU module hardware fault. (Con-
Flicker QnU*13
1321 • Common Information:– tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing
Stop
• At power ON/ At reset
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*4 Function version is B or later.
*5 Function version is A.
*13 This applies to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
12 - 71
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
• There was no response from the intelligent func-
tion module/special function module in the initial
processing.
When the unsupported module is mounted, remove
• The size of the buffer memory of the intelligent
it.
function module/special function module is
When the corresponding module is supported, this
invalid.
1401 suggests the intelligent function module/special
• The unsupported module is mounted.
function module, CPU module and/or base unit is
■Collateral information
expecting a hardware fault (Contact your local Mit-
• Common Information:Module No.(Slot No.)
subishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset/When intelligent function
module is accessed 12
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
The intelligent function module/special function
module was accessed in the program, but there
was no response. This suggests the intelligient function module/spe-
■Collateral information cial function module , CPU module and/or base unit
1402 RUN:
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) is expecting a hardware fault (Contact your local
Off/On
• Individual Information:Program error location Mitsubishi representative.)
ERR.:
■Diagnostic Timing
Flicker/On
• When an intelligent function module access QCPU
instruction is executed
CPU Status:
[SP. UNIT DOWN] When the unsupported module is mounted, remove
Stop/
• The unsupported module is mounted. it.
When the corresponding module is supported, this Continue*2
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) suggests the intelligent function module/special
• Individual Information:– function module , CPU module and/or base unit is
■Diagnostic Timing expecting a hardware fault (Contact your local Mit-
• When an END instruction executed subishi representative.)
[SP. UNIT DOWN]
• There was no response from the intelligent func-
tion module/special function module when the
1403 END instruction is executed.
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
• An error is detected at the intelligent function
module/special function module. The CPU module, base module and/or the intelli-
• The I/O module (intelligent function module/spe- gent function module/special function module that
cial function module) is nearly removed, com- was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault.
pletely removed, or mounted during running. (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
When performing a parameter I/O allocation the
intelligent function module/special function module
could not be accessed during initial communica-
RUN:
tions.
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Off
(On error occurring, the head I/O number of the
same error is displayed again, the intelligent func- ERR.:
corresponding intelligent function module/special
1411 tion module/special function module, CPU module Flicker QCPU
function module is stored in the common informa-
or base unit is faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
tion.)
representative.) CPU Status:
■Collateral information
Stop
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
*2 In the QCPU, either error stop or continue can be selected for each intelligent function module by the parameters.
12 - 72
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
The FROM/TO instruction is not executable, due to
a control bus error with the intelligent function mod-
ule/special function module. Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
(On error occurring, the program error location is same error is displayed again, the intelligent func-
1412 stored in the individual information.) tion module/special function module, CPU module QCPU
■Collateral information or base unit is faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) representative.)
• Individual Information:Program error location
■Diagnostic Timing
• During execution of FROM/TO instruction set
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.] • Remove the CPU module incompatible with the
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom- multiple CPU system from the main base unit, or
patible with the multiple CPU system is mounted. replace the CPU module incompatible with the
Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
■Collateral information multiple CPU system with a CPU module com-
• Common Information:– patible with the multiple CPU system. Qn(H)*4
• Individual Information:– • The intelligent function module, CPU module or QnPH
■Diagnostic Timing base unit is faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
• Always representative.)
RUN:
1413 [CONTROL-BUS. ERR.] Off
An error is detected on the system bus.
ERR.:
• Self-diagnosis error of the system bus.
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Flicker
• Self-diagnosis error of the CPU module
same error is displayed again, the intelligent func-
■Collateral information QCPU
tion module, CPU module or base unit is faulty. CPU Status:
• Common Information:–
(Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.) Stop
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.] • Remove the CPU module incompatible with the
• Fault of a loaded module was detected. multiple CPU system from the main base unit, or
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom- replace the CPU module with a CPU module
Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
patible with the multiple CPU system is mounted. compatible with the multiple CPU system.
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the Qn(H)*4
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) same error is displayed again, the intelligent QnPH
• Individual Information:– function module, CPU module or base unit is QnU
■Diagnostic Timing faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi representa-
1414
• Always tive.)
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
An error is detected on the system bus. Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
■Collateral information Qn(H)
same error is displayed again, the intelligent func-
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH
tion module, CPU module or base unit is faulty.
• Individual Information:– QnPRH
(Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
■Diagnostic Timing QnU
• Always
*4 Function version is B or later.
12 - 73
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
Fault of the main or extension base unit was
Q00J/Q00/Q01
detected.
Qn(H)*4
■Collateral information
QnPH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing QnU
• When an END instruction executed
1415 [CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
Fault of the main or extension base unit was
detected.
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
■Collateral information
same error is displayed again, the intelligent func- Qn(H)*8
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:–
tion module, CPU module or base unit is faulty.
(Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
QnPH*8 12
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/ At reset/ When an END instruction
executed
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
System bus fault was detected at power-on or
reset.
Qn(H)*4
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH
QnU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
1416
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.]
In a multiple CPU system, a bus fault was detected RUN:
at power-on or reset. Off
■Collateral information ERR.: Q00/Q01*4
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) Flicker QnU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the CPU Status:
• At power ON/ At reset same error is displayed again, the intelligent func- Stop
[CONTROL-BUS. ERR.] tion module, CPU module or base unit is faulty.
A reset signal error was detected on the system (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
bus.
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
■Collateral information
1417 QnPRH
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[CONTROL-BUS.ERR.]
In the redundant system, at power-on/reset or
switching system, the control system cannot Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
access the extension base unit since it failed to same error is displayed again, the CPU module,
acquire the access right.
1418 the Q6 WRB, or hardware of extension cable is QnPRH*9
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
• Individual Information:– explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/ At reset/ At Switching execution
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
The error of host CPU is detected in the Multiple
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
CPU high speed bus.
same error is displayed again, the CPU module has
■Collateral information
1430 hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi rep- QnU*10
• Common Information:–
resentative, explaining a detailed description of the
• Individual Information:–
problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
*4 Function version is B or later.
*8 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "08032" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 74
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.] • Take noise reduction measures.
The communication error with other CPU is • Check the main base unit mounting status of the
detected in the Multiple CPU high speed bus. CPU module.
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
1431
• Common Information:Module No. (CPU No.) same error is displayed again, the CPU module
• Individual Information:– has hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsub-
■Diagnostic Timing ishi representative, explaining a detailed descrip-
• At power ON/ At reset tion of the problem.)
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
The communication time out with other CPU is
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
detected in the Multiple CPU high speed bus.
same error is displayed again, the CPU module has
■Collateral information
1432 hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi rep-
• Common Information:Module No. (CPU No.)
resentative, explaining a detailed description of the
• Individual Information:–
problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
1433 [MULTI-C.BUS ERR.] • Take noise reduction measures.
1434 The communication error with other CPU is • Check the main base unit mounting status of the
detected in the Multiple CPU high speed bus. CPU module.
■Collateral information • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
RUN:
• Common Information:Module No. (CPU No.) same error is displayed again, the CPU module
1435 Off
• Individual Information:– has hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsub-
ERR.:
■Diagnostic Timing ishi representative, explaining a detailed descrip-
• Always tion of the problem.)
Flicker QnU*10
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
CPU Status:
same error is displayed again, the CPU module has
Stop
1436 [MULTI-C.BUS ERR.] hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi rep-
The error of the Multiple CPU high speed main resentative, explaining a detailed description of the
base unit is detected. (The error of the Multiple problem.)
CPU high speed bus is detected.) • Take noise reduction measures.
■Collateral information • Check the main base unit mounting status of the
• Common Information:– CPU module.
• Individual Information:– • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
1437
■Diagnostic Timing same error is displayed again, the CPU module
• At power ON/ At reset has hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsub-
ishi representative, explaining a detailed descrip-
tion of the problem.)
[MULTI-C.BUS ERR.]
An error of the multiple CPU high speed main base
unit was detected. (An error of the multiple CPU Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
high speed bus was detected.) same error is displayed again, the CPU module has
1439 ■Collateral information hardware failure. (Contact your local Mitsubishi rep-
• Common Information:– resentative, explaining a detailed description of the
• Individual Information:– problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[AC/DC DOWN]
• A momentary power supply interruption has RUN:
occurred. On
• The power supply went off. ERR.:
1500 ■Collateral information Check the power supply. Off QCPU
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Continue
• Always
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 75
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error LED Status Corresponding
Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
Code CPU Status CPU
[SINGLE PS. DOWN]
The power supply voltage of either of redundant
power supply modules on the redundant base unit
dropped. Check the power supplied to the redundant power
1510 ■Collateral information supply modules mounted on the redundant base
• Common Information:Base No./ Power supply No. unit. RUN:
• Individual Information:– On
Qn(H)*6
■Diagnostic Timing ERR.:
• Always QnPH*6
On
QnPRH
[SINGLE PS. ERROR]
On the redundant base unit, the one damaged CPU Status: QnU*12
redundant power supply module was detected. Continue
Hardware fault of the redundant power supply mod-
1520
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Base No./ Power supply No.
ule. (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
12
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[BATTERY ERROR*3]
• The battery voltage in the CPU module has
dropped below stipulated level.
• Change the battery.
• The lead connector of the CPU module battery is
• If the battery is for program memory, standard
not connected.
RAM or for the back-up power function, install a
• The lead connector of the CPU module battery is
1600 lead connector. QCPU
not securely engaged.
• Check the lead connector of the CPU module for RUN:
■Collateral information
looseness. Firmly engage the connector if it is On
• Common Information:Drive Name
loose. ERR.:
• Individual Information:–
Off
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
CPU Status:
[BATTERY ERROR*3] Continue
Voltage of the battery on memory card has dropped
below stipulated level. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
1601 Change the battery.
• Common Information:Drive Name QnPRH
• Individual Information:– QnU*14
12.3.3 Error code list (1000 to 1999)
12.3 Error Code List
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[FLASH ROM ERROR]
The number of writing to flash ROM (standard ROM
RUN:
and system securement area) exceeds 100,000
On
times.
ERR.:
(Number of writings >100,000 times)
1610 Change the CPU module. On QnU
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Continue
■Diagnostic Timing
• When writing to ROM
*3 BAT. LED is displayed at BATTERY ERROR.
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04101" or later.
*12 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
*14 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
12 - 76
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 2000 to 2999, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.]
In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom-
patible with the multiple CPU system is mounted.
■Collateral information
Replace the CPU module incompatible with the
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) Qn(H)*3
multiple CPU system with a CPU module compati-
[For Remote I/O network] QnPH
ble with the multiple CPU system.
Network No./Station No.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.]
The I/O module status is different from the I/O mod-
ule information at power ON.
Read the error common information at the GX
• I/O module (or intelligent function module) is not RUN:
Developer, and check and/or change the module
installed properly or installed on the base unit. Off/On
that corresponds to the numerical value (module
■Collateral information ERR.:
number) there. Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) Flicker/On
2000 Alternatively, monitor special registers SD150 to
[For Remote I/O network]
SD157 using GX Developer, and check and replace
Network No./Station No. CPU Status:
the module where the bit of its data is "1".
• Individual Information:– Stop/
■Diagnostic Timing Continue*1
• When an END instruction executed
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.] • Read the common information of the error using
I/O module information power ON is changed. the peripheral device, and check and/or change
• I/O module (or intelligent function module/special the module that corresponds to the numerical
function module) not installed properly or value (module number) there.
installed on the base unit. • Alternatively, monitor the special registers Qn(H)
■Collateral information SD1400 to SD1431 at a peripheral device, and QnPH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) change the fuse at the output module whose bit QnPRH
[For Remote I/O network] has a value of "1". QnU
Network No./Station No. • When a GOT is bus-connected to the main base
• Individual Information:– unit or extension base unit, check the connection
■Diagnostic Timing status of the extension cable and the grounding
• When an END instruction executed status of the GOT.
[UNIT VERIFY ERR.] RUN:
During operation, a module was mounted on the
Off/On
slot where the empty setting of the CPU module
ERR.:
was made. During operation, do not mount a module on the
Flicker/On Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
2001 ■Collateral information slot where the empty setting of the CPU module
QnU
• Common Information:Module No. (CPU No.) was made.
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop/
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed Continue*2
[BASE LAY ERROR]
• More than applicable number of extension base
units have been used. RUN:
• When a GOT was bus-connected, the CPU mod- Off Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
• Use the allowable number of extension base
ule was reset while the power of the GOT was ERR.: QnPRH
units or less.
2010 OFF. Flicker Q00UJ
• Power on the Progammable Controller and GOT
■Collateral information Q00U/Q01U
again.
• Common Information:Base No. CPU Status: Q02U
• Individual Information:– Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*2 Either error stop or continue can be selected for each module by the parameters.
*3 The function version is B or later.
12 - 77
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[BASE LAY ERROR]
The QA1S6 B, QA6 B, or
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B was used as the base unit. Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
Do not use the QA1S6 B, QA6 B, or QnPH
2011 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Base No. QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B as the base unit. QnPRH
• Individual Information:– QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[BASE LAY ERROR]
The GOT is bus-connected to the main base unit of
the redundant system.
The following errors are detected in the CPU 12
redundant system compatible with the extension
base unit.
• The base unit other than the Q6 WRB is con- • Remove a bus connection cable for GOT con-
nected to the extension stage No.1. nection connected to the main base unit.
• The base unit is connected to any one of the • Use the Q6 WRB (fixed to the extension stage
extension stages No.2 to No.7, although the No.1)
Q6 WRB does not exist in the extension stage • Use the CPU module compatible with the exten-
No.1 . sion base unit for the other system.
2012 • The other system CPU module is incompatible • Do not use the Q5 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B or
with the extension base unit. QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B for the base unit.
• The Q5 B, QA1S6 B, QA6 B or • Use the main base unit which has the same num-
QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B is connected. ber of slots.
• The number of slots of the main base unit for • Hardware failure of the Q6 WRB. (Contact your QnPRH*6
RUN:
both systems is different. local Mitsubishi representative, explaining a
Off
Information of the Q6 WRB cannot be read cor- detailed description of the problem.)
ERR.:
rectly. Flicker
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Base No.
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
[BASE LAY ERROR]
Stage number of the Q6 WRB is recognized as
other than extension stage No.1 in the redundant
system. Hardware failure of the Q6 WRB. (Contact your
2013 ■Collateral information local Mitsubishi representative, explaining a
• Common Information:Base No. detailed description of the problem.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[EXT.CABLE ERR.]
The following errors are detected in the redundant
system.
• At power-on/reset, the standby system has Check to see if the extension cable between the
detected the error in the path between the control main base unit and the Q6 WRB is connected cor-
system and the Q6 WRB. rectly. If not, connect it after turning OFF the main
• The standby system has detected the error in the base unit where the extension cable will be con-
2020 path between the host system CPU and the nected. QnPRH*6
Q6 WRB at END processing. If the cable is connected correctly, hardware of the
■Collateral information CPU module, Q6 WRB, or extension cable is
• Common Information:– faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
• Individual Information:– explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/At reset/ When an END instruction
executed
*3 The function version is B or later.
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 78
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
The slot to which the QI60 is mounted is set to
other than Inteli (intelligent function module) or
Interrupt (interrupt module) in the I/O assignment of
Qn(H)*3
PLC parameter. Make setting again to match the PLC parameter I/O
QnPH
■Collateral information assignment with the actual loading status.
QnPRH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• In the I/O assignment setting of PLC parameter,
Inteli (intelligent function module) was allocated
to an I/O module or vice versa.
• In the I/O assignment setting of PLC parameter,
a module other than CPU (or nothing) was allo-
cated to the location of a CPU module or vice
versa. • Make the PLC parameter’s I/O assignment set-
• In the I/O assignment setting of the PLC parame- ting again so it is consistent with the actual status Qn(H)
ter, switch setting was made to the module that of the intelligent function module and the CPU QnPH
has no switch setting. module. QnPRH
• In the I/O assignment setting of the PLC parame- • Delete the switch setting in the I/O assignment QnU
ter dialog box, the number of points assigned to setting of the PLC parameter.
2100 the intelligent function module is less than the
number of points of the mounted module.
RUN:
■Collateral information
Off
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
ERR.:
• Individual Information:–
Flicker
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
CPU Status:
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
Stop
• In the parameter I/O allocation settings, an Inteli
(intelligent function module) was allocated to a
location reserved for an I/O module or vice versa.
• In the parameter I/O allocation settings, a module
other than CPU (or nothing) was allocated to a
location reserved for a CPU module or vice
versa. Reset the parameter I/O allocation setting to con-
• In the I/O assignment setting of the PLC parame- form to the actual status of the intelligent function Q00J/Q00/Q01
ter dialog box, the number of points assigned to module and the CPU module.
the intelligent function module is less than the
number of points of the mounted module.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
13 or more A-series special function modules
(except for the A1SI61) that can initiate an interrupt
to the CPU module have been installed. Reduce the A series special function modules
2101 ■Collateral information (except the A1SI61) that can make an interrupt Qn(H)
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) start to the CPU module to 12 or less.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
*3 The function version is B or later.
12 - 79
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
Seven or more A1SD51S have been installed.
■Collateral information
2102 • Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) Keep the number of A1SD51S to six or fewer. Qn(H)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.] • Reduce the number of QI60/A1SI61 modules
• Two or more QI60/A1SI61 modules are mounted
mounted in the single CPU system to one.
in a single CPU system.
• Change the number of QI60/A1SI61 modules set
• Two or more QI60/A1SI61 modules are set to the
to the same control CPU to only one in the multi-
same control CPU in a multiple CPU system.
• Two or more A1SI61 modules are loaded in a
ple CPU system.
• Reduce the number of A1SI61 modules to only
Qn(H)*3 12
multiple CPU system. QnPH
one in the multiple CPU system. When using an
■Collateral information
interrupt module with each QCPU in a multiple
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
CPU system, replace it with the QI60. (Use one
• Individual Information:–
A1SI61 module + max. three QI60 modules or
■Diagnostic Timing
only the QI60 modules.) RUN:
• At power ON/At reset
Off
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.] ERR.:
Two or more QI60, A1SI61 interrupt modules have
Flicker
been mounted.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
Install only 1 QI60, A1SI61 module. CPU Status:
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) QnPRH
Stop
2103 • Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
Two or more QI60 modules are mounted.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) Reduce the QI60 modules to one. Q00J/Q00/Q01*5
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
Two or more QI60 modules where interrupt pointer
setting has not been made are mounted.
• Reduce the QI60 modules to one.
■Collateral information Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
• Make interrupt pointer setting to the second QI60
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) QnU
module and later.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
*3 The function version is B or later.
*5 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04101" or later.
12 - 80
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Two or more MELSECNET/H modules are
mounted.
• Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H modules
• Two or more CC-Link IE controller network mod-
ules are mounted. to one.
• Two or more Ethernet modules are mounted. • Reduce the number of CC-Link IE controller net- Q00UJ
■Collateral information work modules to one.
• Common Information:Module No.
• Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to one.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
controller network modules in total are mounted • Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H and CC-
in the entire system. Link IE controller network modules to four or less
• Two or more MELSECNET/H modules are
in total in the entire system.
mounted in the entire system.
• Two or more CC-Link IE controller network mod- • Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H modules
ules are mounted in the entire system. to one in the entire system. Q00U/Q01U
• Two or more Ethernet modules are mounted in • Reduce the number of CC-Link IE controller net-
the entire system.
work modules to one in the entire system.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. • Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to one
• Individual Information:– in the entire system.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Three or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
controller network modules in total are mounted RUN:
in the entire system. • Reduce the MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE con- Off
• Three or more Ethernet interface modules are troller network modules up to two or less in the ERR.:
2106 mounted in the entire system. entire system. Flicker Q02U
■Collateral information • Reduce the Ethernet interface modules up to two
• Common Information:Module No. or less in the entire system. CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE
controller network modules in total are mounted
in the entire system. • Reduce the MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE con-
• Five or more Ethernet interface modules are troller network modules up to four or less in the
mounted in the entire system. entire system. QnU*7
■Collateral information • Reduce the Ethernet interface modules up to four
• Common Information:Module No. or less in the entire system.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Three or more CC-Link IE controller network
modules are mounted in the entire system.
• Five or more MELSECNET/H and CC-Link IE • Reduce the CC-Link IE controller network mod-
controller network modules in total are mounted ules up to two or less in the entire system. Qn(H)*6
in the entire system. • Reduce the total number of the MELSECNET/H QnPH*9
■Collateral information and CC-Link IE controller network modules up to QnPRH*9
• Common Information:Module No. four or less in the entire system.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*7 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 81
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Five or more MELSECNET/H modules have
been installed.
• Five or more Ethernet interface modules have • Reduce the number of MELSECNET/H modules
Qn(H)
been installed. to four or less.
QnPH
■Collateral information • Reduce the number of Ethernet modules to four
QnPRH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) or less.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Two or more MELSECNET/H modules were
installed. 12
• Two or more Ethernet modules were installed. • Reduce the MELSECNET/H modules to one or
2106 • Three or more CC-Link modules were installed. less.
Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information • Reduce the Ethernet modules to one or less.
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) • Reduce the CC-Link modules to two or less.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• The same network number or same station num-
RUN:
ber is duplicated in the MELSECNET/H network
Off Q00J/Q00/Q01
system.
ERR.: Qn(H)
■Collateral information • Check the network number and station number.
Flicker QnPH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing
Stop
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
The start X/Y set in the PLC parameter’s I/O
assignment settings is overlapped with the one for
Make the PLC parameter’s I/O assignment setting
another module.
again so it is consistent with the actual status of the
2107 ■Collateral information QCPU
intelligent function module/special function mod-
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
ules.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• Network module A1SJ71LP21, A1SJ71BR11,
A1SJ71AP21, A1SJ71AR21, or A1SJ71AT21B
dedicated for the A2USCPU has been installed.
• Network module A1SJ71QLP21 or
Replace the network module for the A2USCPU or
A1SJ71QBR11 dedicated for the Q2AS has been
2108 the network module for the Q2ASCPU with the Qn(H)
installed.
MELSECNET/H module.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
12 - 82
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
• The location designated by the FROM/TO
instruction set is not the intelligent function mod-
ule/special function module.
• The module that does not include buffer memory
has been specified by the FROM/TO instruction.
• The intelligent function module/special function Q00J/Q00/Q01
module, Network module being accessed is Qn(H)*3
2110 faulty. QnPH
• Station not loaded was specified using the • Read the individual information of the error using QnPRH
instruction whose target was the CPU share the GX Developer, check the FROM/TO instruc- QnU
memory. tion that corresponds to that numerical value
■Collateral information (program error location), and correct when nec-
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) essary.
• Individual Information:Program error location • The intelligent function module/special function
■Diagnostic Timing module that was accessed is experiencing a
• When instruction executed hardware fault. Therefore, change the faulty
[SP. UNIT ERROR] module. Alternatively, contact your local Mitsub-
• The location designated by a link direct device ishi representative.
(J \ ) is not a network module.
• The I/O module (intelligent function module/spe-
cial function module) was nearly removed, com-
RUN:
2111 pletely removed, or mounted during running.
Off/On
■Collateral information
ERR.:
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
Flicker/On
• Individual Information:Program error location
■Diagnostic Timing
CPU Status:
• When instruction executed
Stop/
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
• The module other than intelligent function mod- Continue*1
QCPU
ule/special function module is specified by the
intelligent function module/special function mod-
ule dedicated instruction.
Or, it is not the corresponding intelligent function
module/special function module.
2112 • There is no network No. specified by the network
dedicated instruction.
Or the relay target network does not exit. Read the individual information of the error using a
■Collateral information peripheral device, and check the special function
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) module /special function module dedicated instruc-
• Individual Information:Program error location tion (network instruction) that corresponds to the
■Diagnostic Timing value (program error part) to make modification.
• When instruction executed/STOP RUN
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
The module other than network module is specified
bythe network dedicated instruction.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
2113 • Common Information:FFFFH (fixed) QnPH
• Individual Information:Program error location
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed/STOP RUN
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*3 The function version is B or later.
12 - 83
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
An instruction, which on execution specifies other
stations, has been used for specifying the host
CPU. (An instruction that does not allow the host Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
CPU to be specified). Qn(H)*3
2114
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
QnU
• Individual Information:Program error location
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed/ STOP RUN
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
An instruction, which on execution specifies the
host CPU, has been used for specifying other
12
CPUs. (An instruction that does not allow other sta-
Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
tions to be specified).
2115 Qn(H)*3
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) QnPH
• Individual Information:Program error location
■Diagnostic Timing Read the individual information of the error using
• When instruction executed/ STOP RUN the GX Developer, check the program correspond-
[SP. UNIT ERROR] ing that value (program error location), and make
• An instruction that does not allow the under the correction.
control of another CPU to be specified is being RUN:
used for a similar task. Off/On
• Instruction was executed for the A or QnA mod- ERR.:
2116 ule under control of another CPU. Flicker/On
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) CPU Status:
Q00J/Q00/
• Individual Information:Program error location Stop/Continue
■Diagnostic Timing Q01*3
• When instruction executed/ STOP RUN Qn(H)*3
QnPH
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
A CPU module that cannot be specified in the QnU
instruction dedicated to the multiple CPU system
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
was specified.
2117 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
• Individual Information:Program error location
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed/ STOP RUN
[SP. UNIT ERROR]
When the online module change setting is set to be
• When performing the online module change in a
“enabled” in the PLC parameter in a multiple CPU
multiple CPU system, correct the program so that
system, intelligent function module controlled by
access will not be made to the intelligent function
other CPU using the FROM instruction/intelligent Qn(H)*3
module controlled by the other CPU.
2118 function module device (U \ G) is specified. QnPH
• When accessing the intelligent function module
■Collateral information controlled by the other CPU in a multiple CPU QnU*7
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.)
system, set the online module change setting to
• Individual Information:Program error location
be “disabled” by parameter.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*3 The function version is B or later.
*7 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 84
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
The locations of the Q5 B/Q6 B, QA1S6 B/
QA6 B, and QA6ADP+A5 B/A6 B are
improper. Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
2120 Check the location of the base unit. Qn(H)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– QnPH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
The CPU module is installed to other than the CPU
slot and slots 0 to 2.
■Collateral information Check the loading position of the CPU module and Qn(H)
2121
• Common Information:– reinstall it at the correct slot. QnPH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
The QA1S6 B/QA6 B and QA6ADP+A5 B/
A6 B are used for the main base unit. Qn(H)
2122 ■Collateral information Replace the main base unit with a usable one. QnPH
• Common Information:– QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
RUN:
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.] Off
• A module is mounted on the 65th slot or later ERR.:
slot. Flicker
• Remove the module mounted on the 65th slot or
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
later slot.
is greater than the number of slots specified at
• Remove the module mounted on the slot whose CPU Status:
[Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base setting. Stop
number is greater than the number of slots spec- Qn(H)
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
ified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base QnPH
of I/O points exceeds 4096 points.
setting. QnPRH
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
• Remove the module mounted on the slot whose QnU*7
of I/O points strides 4096 points.
number of I/O points exceeds 4096 points.
■Collateral information
• Replace the module with the one whose number
• Common Information:–
of occupied points does not exceed 4096 points.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
2124 [SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module is mounted on after the 25th slot (on
after the 17th slot for the Q00UJ).
• Remove the module mounted on after the 25th
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
is later than the one set in the "Base setting" on (on after the 17th slot for the Q00UJ).
the I/O assignment tab of PLC parameter in GX • Remove the module mounted on the slot whose
Developer. number is later than the one set in the "Base set-
• A module is mounted on the slot for which I/O ting" on the I/O assignment tab of PLC parameter
points greater than 1024 (greater than 256 for
in GX Developer. Q00UJ
the Q00UJ) is assigned.
• Remove the module mounted on the slot for Q00U/Q01U
• A module is mounted on the slot for which I/O
points is assigned from less than 1024 to greater which I/O points greater than 1024 (greater than
than 1024 (from less than 256 to greater than 256 for the Q00UJ) is assigned.
256 for the Q00UJ). • Replace the end module with the one whose
■Collateral information number of occupied points is within 1024 (within
• Common Information:–
256 for the Q00UJ).
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
*4 The function version is A.
*7 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 85
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module is mounted on the 37th slot or later
slot. • Remove the module mounted on the 37th slot or
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number later slot.
is greater than the number of slots specified at • Remove the module mounted on the slot whose
[Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base setting. number is greater than the number of slots spec-
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number ified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base
of I/O points exceeds 2048 points. Q02U
setting.
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number
of I/O points strides 2048 points. • Remove the module mounted on the slot whose
■Collateral information number of I/O points exceeds 2048 points.
• Common Information:– • Replace the module with the one whose number
• Individual Information:– of occupied points does not exceed 2048 points.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
12
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
• A module is mounted on the 25th slot or later
slot. (The 17th slot or later slot for the Q00J.) • Remove the module mounted on the 25th slot or
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number later slot. (The 17th slot or later slot for the
is greater than the number of slots specified at Q00J.)
[Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base setting. • Remove the module mounted on the slot whose
2124
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number number is greater than the number of slots spec-
of I/O points exceeds 1024 points. (256 points for ified at [Slots] in [Standard setting] of the base RUN:
the Q00J.) setting. Off Q00J/Q00/Q01
• A module is mounted on the slot whose number • Remove the module mounted on the slot whose ERR.:
of I/O points strides 1024 points. (256 points for number of I/O points exceeds 1024 points. (256 Flicker
the Q00J.) points for the Q00J.)
■Collateral information • Replace the module with the one whose number CPU Status:
• Common Information:– of occupied points does not exceed 1024 points. Stop
• Individual Information:– (256 points for the Q00J.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY ERR.]
5 or more extension base units were added. (3
bases for Q00J)
■Collateral information Remove 5 or more extension base units. (3 bases
Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
• Common Information:– for Q00J)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[SP. UNIT LAY. ERR.]
• A module which the QCPU cannot recognise has
been installed.
• There was no response form the intelligent func- • Install a usable module.
tion module/special function module. • The intelligent function module/special function
2125 QCPU
■Collateral information module is experiencing a hardware fault. (Con-
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
*4 The function version is A.
12 - 86
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. UNIT LAY. ERR.]
CPU module locations in a multiple CPU system
are either of the following. • Mount modules on the available slots so that the
• There are empty slots between the QCPU and empty slots will be located on the right-hand side
QCPU/motion controller. of the CPU module.
• A module other than the High Performance • Remove the module mounted on the left-hand
model QCPU/Process CPU (including the motion side of the High Performance model QCPU/Pro- Qn(H)*3
2126
controller) is mounted on the left-hand side of the cess CPU, and mount the High Performance QnPH
High Performance model QCPU/Process CPU. model QCPU/Process CPU on the empty slot.
■Collateral information Mount the motion CPU on the right-hand side of
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) the High Performance model QCPU/Process
• Individual Information:– CPU.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[SP.UNIT LAY ERR.]
The unusable module is mounted on the extension
base unit in the redundant system.
■Collateral information • Remove the unusable module from the extension
2128 QnPRH*6
• Common Information:Module No. base unit.
• Individual Information:– RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing Off
• At power-ON/ At reset ERR.:
[SP. UNIT VER. ERR.] Flicker
In a multiple CPU system, the control CPU of the
intelligent function module incompatible with the • Change the intelligent function module for the CPU Status:
multiple CPU system is set to other than CPU No.1. one compatible with the multiple CPU system Stop Q00J/Q00/Q01
■Collateral information (function version B).
2150 QnPH
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) • Change the setting of the control CPU of the
QuU*10
• Individual Information:– intelligent function module incompatible with the
■Diagnostic Timing multiple CPU system to CPU No.1.
• At power ON/At reset/
At writing to progurammable controller
[SP. UNIT VER. ERR.]
Either of the following modules incompatible with
the redundant system has been mounted in a
redundant system.
• CC-Link IE controller network modules Use either of the following modules compatible with
• MELSECNET/H modules the redundant system.
2151 • Ethernet modules • CC-Link IE controller network modules QnPRH
■Collateral information • MELSECNET/H modules
• Common Information:Module No. (Slot No.) • Ethernet modules
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/
At writing to progurammable controller
*3 The function version is B or later.
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 87
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MISSING PARA.]
There is no parameter file in the drive specified as
valid parameter drive by the DIP switches. • Check and correct the valid parameter drive set-
Qn(H)
■Collateral information tings made by the DIP switches.
• Common Information:Drive Name QnPH
• Set the parameter file to the drive specified as
• Individual Information:– QnPRH
valid parameter drive by the DIP switches.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
[MISSING PARA.]
There is no parameter file at the program memory.
■Collateral information
2200 • Common Information:Drive Name
• Individual Information:–
Set the parameter file to the program memory. Q00J/Q00/Q01 12
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
[MISSING PARA.]
Parameter file does not exist in all drives where
parameters will be valid.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Drive Name Set a parameter file in a drive to be valid. QuU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN RUN:
Off
[BOOT ERROR]
ERR.:
The contents of the boot file are incorrect. Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
Flicker
■Collateral information Qn(H)
2210 • Common Information:Drive name Check the boot setting. QnPH
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
QnPRH
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
QnU
• At power ON/ At reset
[BOOT ERROR]
File formatting is failed at a boot.
• Reboot.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
• CPU module hardware fault. (Contact your local
2211 • Common Information:Drive name QnPRH
Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
• Individual Information:– QnU
description of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
• The device information (number of points) back-
uped by the device data backup function is differ-
ent from the number of device points of the PLC
• Set the number of device points at the time of
parameter.
backup to the device point setting in [PLC
After this error occurred, perform restore per
parameter]. Then, turn ON from OFF power sup-
power-on/reset until the number of device points is
2220 ply, or reset the CPU and cancel reset. QnU
identical to the number of device points in the PLC
• Delete the backuped data, and turn ON from
parameter, or until the backup data is deleted.
OFF power supply, or reset the CPU and cancel
■Collateral information
reset.
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
*3 The function version is B or later.
12 - 88
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[RESTORE ERROR]
• The device information backuped by the device
data backup function is incomplete. (Turning
power supply OFF or reset is suspected.)
Do not return the data when this error occurs. Also,
delete the incomplete device information at the time
2221 Reset the CPU module and run it again.
of this error occurrence.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
The model name of the restoration destination CPU
module is different from the one of the backup
source CPU module.
Execute a restore for the CPU module whose name
2225 ■Collateral information
is same as the backup source CPU module.
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:– RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing Off
• At power ON/ At reset ERR.:
[RESTORE ERROR] Flicker QnU
• ·The backup data file is destroyed. (The content
of the file is different from the check code. CPU Status:
• Reading the backup data from the memory card Stop
is not successfully completed.
• Since the write protect switch of the SRAM card • Execute a restore of other backup data because
is set to on (write inhibited), the checked the backup data may be destructed.
2226
"Restore for the first time only" setting cannot be • Set the write protect switch of the SRAM card to
performed. off (write enabled).
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[RESTORE ERROR]
Writing the backup data to the restoration destina-
tion drive is not successfully completed.
■Collateral information Execute a restore for the other CPU module too
2227
• Common Information:File name/Drive name because the CPU module may be damaged.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
• A memory card was removed without switching RUN:
the memory card in/out switch OFF. Off/On
• The memory card in/out switch is turned ON • Remove memory card after placing the memory ERR.: Qn(H)
although a memory card is not actually installed. card in/out switch OFF. Flicker/On QnPH
2300
■Collateral information • Turn on the card insert switch after inserting a QnPRH
• Common Information:Drive name memory card. CPU Status: QnU*11
• Individual Information:– Stop/
■Diagnostic Timing Continue*1
• When memory card is inserted or removed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*11 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
12 - 89
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
• The memory card has not been formatted.
• Memory card format status is incorrect.
• The QCPU file does not exist in the Flash card. Qn(H)
• Format memory card.
■Collateral information QnPH
• Reformat memory card.
• Common Information:Drive name QnPRH
• Write the QCPU file the Flash card
• Individual Information:– QnU*11
■Diagnostic Timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed/When
memory card is inserted
2301 [ICM. OPE. ERROR] RUN:
SRAM card failure is detected. (It occurs when
automatic format is not set.)
Off/On
ERR.:
12
Writing parameters was performed duruing setting Flicker/On
Format SRAM card after changing battery of SRAM
file registers.
card.
■Collateral information
CPU Status: QnU*11
Write a parameter, which set the file register at "Not
• Common Information:Drive name
available", in CPU, and then perform the ioperation. Stop/
• Individual Information:–
Continue*1
■Diagnostic Timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed/When
memory card is inserted
[ICM. OPE. ERROR]
A memory card that cannot be used with the CPU
module has been installed. Qn(H)
• Format memory card.
■Collateral information QnPH
2302 • Reformat memory card.
• Common Information:Drive name QnPRH
• Check memory card.
• Individual Information:– QnU*11
■Diagnostic Timing
• When memory card is inserted or removed
[FILE SET ERROR]
Automatic write to standard ROM was performed
on the CPU module that is incompatible with auto-
• Execute automatic write to standard ROM on the
matic write to standard ROM.
CPU module which is compatible with automatic
(Memory card where automatic write to standard
write to standard ROM.
ROM was selected in the boot file was fitted and
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
• Using GX Developer, perform write of parame- Qn(H)*3
the parameter enable drive was set to the memory
ters and programs to standard ROM. QnPH
card.)
• Change the memory card for the one where QnPRH
■Collateral information RUN:
automatic write to standard ROM has not been
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name Off
set, and perform boot operation from the memory
• Individual Information:Parameter number ERR.:
card.
2400 ■Diagnostic Timing Flicker
• At power ON/At reset/ At writing to proguramma-
ble controller CPU Status:
[FILE SET ERROR] Stop
The file designated at the PLC file settings in the • Read the individual information of the error using
parameters cannot be found. peripheral device, check to be sure that the
■Collateral information parameter drive name and file name correspond
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name to the numerical values there (parameter num- QCPU
• Individual Information:Parameter number ber), and correct.
■Diagnostic Timing • Create a file created using parameters, and load
• At power ON/At reset/ At writing to proguramma- it to the CPU module.
ble controller
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*3 The function version is B or later.
*11 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
12 - 90
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[FILE SET ERROR]
Program memory capacity was exceeded by per-
forming boot operation or automatic write to stan-
dard ROM.
Qn(H)*3
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name QnPH
QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing • Check and correct the parameters (boot setting).
• At power ON/At reset/ • Delete unnecessary files in the program memory.
At writing to progurammable controller • Choose "Clear program memory" for boot in the
[FILE SET ERROR] parameter so that boot is started after the pro-
Program memory capacity was exceeded by per- gram memory is cleared.
forming boot operation.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name QnU
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/
At writing to progurammable controller
[FILE SET ERROR] RUN:
The file specified by parameters cannot be made. • Read the individual information of the error using Off
■Collateral information the peripheral device, check to be sure that the ERR.:
2401 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name parameter drive name and file name correspond Flicker
QCPU
• Individual Information:Parameter number to the numerical values there (parameter num-
■Diagnostic Timing ber), and correct. CPU Status:
• At power ON/At reset/ At writing to proguramma- • Check the space remaining in the memory card. Stop
ble controller
[FILE SET ERROR]
• Although setting is made to use the device data
storage file, there is no empty capacity required
for creating the device data storage file in the
standard ROM.
• When the latch data backup function (to standard
ROM) is used, there is no empty capacity
required for storing backup data in standard
ROM. (The parameter number "FFFFH" is dis-
Secure the empty capacity of the standard ROM. QnU
played for the error individual information.)
• Standard RAM capacity is insufficient that error
history of the module cannot be stored.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ At writing to proguramma-
ble controller
[FILE OPE. ERROR]
• The specified program does not exist in the pro-
• Read the individual information of the error using
gram memory. RUN:
the peripheral device, check to be sure that the
This error may occur when the ECALL, EFCALL, Off/On
program corresponds to the numerical values
PSTOP, PSCAN, POFF or PLOW instruction is ERR.: Qn(H)
there (program location), and correct.
executed. Flicker/On QnPH
2410 Create a file created using parameters, and load
• The specified file does not exist. QnPRH
it to the CPU module.
■Collateral information CPU Status: QnU
• In case a specified file does not exist, write the
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name Stop/
file to a target memory and/or check the file spec-
• Individual Information:Program error location Continue*1
ified with the instruction again.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*3 The function version is B or later.
12 - 91
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[FILE OPE. ERROR]
• The file is the one which cannot be specified by
the sequence program (such as comment file).
• The specified program exists in the program
memory, but has not been registered in the pro-
Read the individual information of the error using Qn(H)
gram setting of the Parameter dialog box.
the peripheral device, check to be sure that the pro- QnPH
2411 This error may occur when the ECALL, EFCALL,
gram corresponds to the numerical values there QnPRH
PSTOP, PSCAN or POFF instruction is executed.
(program location), and correct. QnU
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Program error location RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
Off/On
ERR.:
12
[FILE OPE. ERROR] Flicker/On
The SFC program file is one that cannot be desig-
nated by the sequence program. Read the individual information of the error using Qn(H)
CPU Status:
■Collateral information the peripheral device, check to be sure that the pro- QnPH
2412 Stop/
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name gram corresponds to the numerical values there QnPRH
Continue*1
• Individual Information:Program error location (program location), and correct. QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[FILE OPE. ERROR]
No data has been written to the file designated by Read the individual information of the error using
the sequence program. the peripheral device, check to be sure that the pro-
Qn(H)
■Collateral information gram corresponds to the numerical values there
2413 QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name (program location), and correct.
QnPRH
• Individual Information:Program error location Check to ensure that the designated file has not
■Diagnostic Timing been write protected.
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
• There is a program file that uses a device that is • Read the common information of the error using
out of the range set in the PLC parameter device the peripheral device, check to be sure that the
setting. parameter device allocation setting and the pro-
• After the PLC parameter setting is changed, only gram file device allocation correspond to the
the parameter is written into the PLC. numerical values there (file name), and correct if QCPU
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
■Collateral information necessary. RUN:
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • If PLC parameter device setting is changed, Off
• Individual Information:– batch-write the parameter and program file into ERR.:
2500 ■Diagnostic Timing the PLC. Flicker
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.] CPU Status:
After the index modification of the PLC parameter is Stop
changed, only the parameter is written to the PLC.
When the index modification of the PLC parameter
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name is changed, batch-write the parameter and program QnU
• Individual Information:– file into the PLC.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
12 - 92
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
There are multiple program files although "none"
has been set at the PLC parameter program set-
Qn(H)
tings.
Edit the PLC parameter program setting to "yes". QnPH
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name Alternatively, delete unneeded programs. QnPRH
• Individual Information:– QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
2501
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
• There are three or more program files.
• The program name differs from the program con-
tents. • Delete unnecessary program files.
■Collateral information • Match the program name with the program con- Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name tents.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
The program file is incorrect.
Alternatively, the file contents are not those of a
sequence program. Check whether the program version
■Collateral information is .QPG, and check the file contents to be QCPU
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
sure they are for a sequence program.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
RUN:
2502 • At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN Off
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.] ERR.:
The program file is not the one for the redundant Flicker
CPU. Create a program using GX Developer or PX
■Collateral information Developer for which the PLC type has been set to CPU Status:
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name QnPRH
the redundant CPU (Q12PRH/Q25PRH), and write Stop
• Individual Information:– it to the CPU module.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
There are no program files at all.
■Collateral information
2503 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name QCPU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
• Check program configuration.
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
• Check parameters and program configuration.
Two or more SFC normal programs or control pro-
grams have been designated. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name QnPRH
• Individual Information:– QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
2504 • At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
[CAN'T EXE. PRG.]
There are two or more SFC programs.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name Reduce the SFC programs to one. Q00J/Q00/Q01*3
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/ STOP RUN
*3 The function version is B or later.
12 - 93
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
Check for illegal accesses. If any illegal access is
identified, take actions such as disabling communi-
[REMOTE PASS.FAIL] cation of the connection.
RUN:
The count of remote password mismatches If no illegal access is identified, clear the error and
ON
reached the upper limit. perform the following. (Clearing the error also
ERR.:
■Collateral information clears the count of remote password mismatches.)
2700 ON
• Common Information:– • Check if the remote password sent is correct.
• Individual Information:– • Check if the remote password has been locked.
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing • Check if concurrent access was made from multi-
Continue
• Always ple devices to one connection by UDP.
QnU*8
• Check if the upper limit of the remote password
mismatch count is too low.
[SNTP OPE.ERROR]
Time setting failed when the programmable control- • Check if the time setting function is set up cor-
RUN:
Off/ON
12
ler was powered ON or reset. rectly.
ERR.:
■Collateral information • Check if the specified SNTP server is operating
2710 Flicker/ON
• Common Information:– normally, or if any failure has occurred on the
• Individual Information:– network connected to the specified SNTP server
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing computer.
• When time setting function is executed Stop/Continue
12.3.4 Error code list (2000 to 2999)
12.3 Error Code List
*8 This applies to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
12 - 94
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 3000 to 3999, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the intelligent function
module under control of another CPU is specified in
the interrupt pointer setting of the PLC parameter. • Specify the head I/O number of the intelligent
Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information function module under control of the host CPU.
QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • Delete the interrupt pointer setting of the parame-
• Individual Information:Parameter number ter. QnU*10
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The PLC parameter settings for timer time limit set-
ting, the RUN-PAUSE contact, the common pointer
number, general data processing, number of empty
slots, system interrupt settings, baud rate setting,
and service processing setting are outside the
range that can be used by the CPU module. QCPU
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a program memory check, the check capacity RUN:
has not been set within the range applicable for the Off
CPU module. ERR.:
3000 ■Collateral information Flicker QnPH
• Read the individual information of the error using
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name the peripheral device, check the parameter item QnPRH*5
• Individual Information:Parameter number CPU Status:
corresponding to the numerical value (parameter
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
No.), and correct it.
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/ • Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU mod-
At writing to progurammable controller ule, reload the CPU power supply and/or reset
[PARAMETER ERROR] the module.
The parameter settings in the error individual infor- • If the same error occurs, it is thought to be a
mation (special register SD16) are illegal. hardware error. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
■Collateral information representative.)
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name QCPU
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The ATA card is set to the memory card slot when
the specified drive for the file register is set to
“memory card (ROM)” and [Use the following file]
or [Use the same file name as the program] (either
one is allowed) is set in the PLC file setting.
■Collateral information QnU*11
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
*1 The function version is B or later.
*5 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
*11 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
12 - 95
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
• Read the individual information of the error using
[PARAMETER ERROR] the peripheral device, check the parameter item
The parameter settings are corrupted. corresponding to the numerical value (parameter
■Collateral information No.), and correct it.
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU mod-
3001 • Individual Information:Parameter number QCPU
ule, reload the CPU power supply and/or reset
■Diagnostic Timing the module.
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/ • If the same error occurs, it is thought to be a
At writing to progurammable controller hardware error. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
representative.)
[PARAMETER ERROR]
When "Use the following file" is selected for the file
register in the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter
12
dialog box, the specified file does not exist although
the file register capacity has been set. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/ RUN:
Off
At writing to progurammable controller
ERR.:
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Flicker
When [Use the following file] is set for the file regis- • Read the individual information of the error using
ter in the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter dia- the peripheral device, check the parameter item
CPU Status:
log box and the capacity of file register is not set, corresponding to the numerical value (parameter
Stop
the file register file does not exist in the specified No.), and correct it.
target memory. • Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU mod-
3002
■Collateral information QnU*10
ule, reload the CPU power supply and/or reset
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name the module.
• Individual Information:Parameter number • If the same error occurs, it is thought to be a
■Diagnostic Timing hardware error. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/ representative.)
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
When [Use the following file.] is set for the device
data storage file in [PLC file] of [PLC parameter],
and [Capacity] is not set, the device data storage
file does not exist in the target memory.
■Collateral information QnU
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 96
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The automatic refresh range of the multiple CPU
system exceeded the file register capacity.
Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information Change the file register file for the one refresh-
QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name enabled in the whole range.
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnU*10
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[PARAMETER ERROR]
3003 • Read the individual information of the error using
The number of devices set at the PLC parameter
the peripheral device, check the parameter item
device settings exceeds the possible CPU module
corresponding to the numerical value (parameter
range.
No.), and correct it.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • If the error is still generated following the correc-
• Individual Information:Parameter number tion of the parameter settings, the possible cause
■Diagnostic Timing is the memory errorm of the CPU module's pro-
gram memory or the memory card. (Contact your
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
local Mitsubishi representative.)
At writing to progurammable controller
QCPU
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The parameter file is incorrect.
Alternatively, the contents of the file are not param-
eters.
Check whether the parameter file version
■Collateral information
3004 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name is .QPA, and check the file contents to be
• Individual Information:Parameter number sure they are parameters. RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing Off
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/ ERR.:
Flicker
At writing to progurammable controller
• Read the individual information of the error using
CPU Status:
the peripheral device, check the parameter item
Stop
[PARAMETER ERROR] corresponding to the numerical value (parameter
The contents of the parameter are broken. No.), and correct it.
■Collateral information • Write the modified parameter items to the CPU Qn(H)*7
3005 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name module again, and power-on the Programmable QnPH*9
• Individual Information:Parameter number Controller or reset the CPU module. QnPRH*9
■Diagnostic Timing • When the same error occurs again, the hardware
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN is faulty. Contact your local Mitsubishi represen-
tative, explaining a detailed description of the
problem.
[PARAMETER ERROR] • Delete the setting of the Q02CPU' s high speed
• The high speed interrupt is set in a Q02CPU. interrupt. To use high speed interrupts, change
• The high speed interrupt is set in a multiple CPU the CPU module to one of the Q02H/Q06H/
system. Q12H/Q25HCPU.
• The high speed interrupt is set when aQA1S6 B • To use a multiple CPU system, delete the setting
of the high-speed interrupt. To use high speed
or QA6 B is used.
interrupts, change the system to a single CPU
• No module is installed at the I/O address desig-
3006 system. Qn(H)*4
nated by the high speed interrupt.
• To use either the QA1S6 B or QA6 B, delete
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name the setting of the high speed interrupt. To use
• Individual Information:Parameter number high speed interrupts, do not use the QA1S6 B/
■Diagnostic Timing QA6 B.
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/ • Re-examine the I/O address designated by the
At writing to progurammable controller high speed interrupt setting.
*1 The function version is B or later.
*4 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04012" or later.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 97
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The parameter file in the drive specified as valid
parameter drive by the DIP switches is inapplicable
for the CPU module.
Create parameters using GX Developer, and write
■Collateral information
3007 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name them to the drive specified as valid parameter drive QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number by the DIP switches.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the modules for AnS, A,
Q2AS and QnA have been set to multiple control
12
CPUs.
Re-set the parameter I/O assignment to control
■Collateral information
3009 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name them under one CPU module. (Change the param- Qn(H)*1
• Individual Information:Parameter number eters of all CPUs in the multiple CPU system.)
RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing Off
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/ ERR.:
At writing to progurammable controller Flicker
[PARAMETER ERROR]
The parameter-set number of CPU modules differs CPU Status:
from the actual number in a multiple CPU system. Stop
■Collateral information Match the number of (CPU modules in multiple
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name Qn(H)*1
3010 CPU setting) - (CPUs set as empty in I/O assign-
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnPH
ment) with that of actually mounted CPU modules.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Multiple CPU setting or control CPU setting differs
from that of the reference CPU settings in a multi-
ple CPU system.
Match the multiple CPU setting or control CPU set- Q00/Q01*1
■Collateral information
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
3012 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name ting in the PLC parameter with that of the reference Qn(H)*1
• Individual Information:Parameter number CPU (CPU No.1) settings. QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
*1 The function version is B or later.
12 - 98
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[PARAMETER ERROR]
Multiple CPU auto refresh setting is any of the fol-
lowings in a multiple CPU system.
• When a bit device is specified as a refresh
Check the following in the multiple CPU auto
device, a number other than a multiple of 16 is
refresh setting and make correction.
specified for the refresh-starting device.
• When specifying the bit device, specify a multiple
• The device specified is other than the one that
may be specified.
of 16 for the refresh starting device. Qn(H)*1
• Specify the device that may be specified for the QnPH
• The number of send points is an odd number.
refresh device.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • Set the number of send points to an even num-
• Individual Information:Parameter number ber.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple CPU auto
refresh setting is any of the following.
• The total number of transmission points is
greater than the maximum number of refresh Check the following in the multiple CPU auto
points. refresh setting and make correction.
■Collateral information Q00/Q01*1
• The total number of transmission points is within
3013 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name the maximum number of refresh points.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller RUN:
[PARAMETER ERROR] Off
In a multiple CPU system, the multiple CPU auto ERR.:
refresh setting is any of the following. Flicker
• The device specified is other than the one that Check the following in the multiple CPU auto
may be specified. refresh setting and make correction. CPU Status:
• The number of send points is an odd number. • Specify the device that may be specified for the Stop
• The total number of send points is greater than refresh device.
the maximum number of refresh points. • Set the number of send points to an even num-
• The setting of the refresh range crosses over the ber.
boundary between the internal user device and QnU*10
• Set the total number of send points within the
the extended data register (D) or extended link range of the maximum number of refresh points.
register (W). • Set the refresh range so that it does not cross
■Collateral information over the boundary between the internal user
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name device and the extended data register (D) or
• Individual Information:Parameter number extended link register (W).
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
• In a multiple CPU system, the online module
change parameter (multiple CPU system param-
eter) settings differ from those of the reference
CPU. • Match the online module change parameter with
• In a multiple CPU system, the online module
that of the reference CPU.
change setting is enabled although the CPU Qn(H)
• If the CPU module that does not support online
3014 module mounted does not support online module QnPH
chang parameter. module change is mounted, replace it with the
QnU*8
■Collateral information CPU module that supports online module
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name change.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
*1 The function version is B or later.
*8 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 99
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[PARAMETER ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU
verified is different from the one set in the parame-
Read the individual information of the error using
ter setting.
the peripheral device, check the parameter item
■Collateral information
3015 • Common Information:File name/ Drive name corresponding to the numerical value (parameter
• Individual Information:Parameter number/CPU No. No./CPU No.) and parameter of target CPU, and
■Diagnostic Timing correct them.
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR]
QnU*8
The CPU module incompatible with multiple CPU
synchronized boot-up is set as the target for the
12
synchronized boot-up in the [Multiple CPU synchro-
nous startup setting].
■Collateral information Delete the CPU module incompatible with multiple
3016
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name CPU synchronized boot-up from the setting.
• Individual Information:Parameter number/ CPU
No.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/ At reset/
At writing to progurammable controller
[PARAMETER ERROR] With GX Developer, write [PLC parameter/Network
The parameter file is damaged. RUN:
parameter/Remote password] to a valid drive then
■Collateral information Off
reload the power supply for system and/or reset the
3040 • Common Information:– ERR.:
CPU module. If the same error occurs, it is thought
• Individual Information:– Flicker
to be hardware error. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
■Diagnostic Timing
representative.)
• At power ON/At reset CPU Status:
[PARAMETER ERROR] Stop
Parameter file of intelligent function module is dam- With GX Developer, write [Intelligent function mod-
aged. ule parameter] to a valid drive to write the parame-
■Collateral information ters then reload the power supply for system and/or
3041
• Common Information:– reset the CPU module. If the same error occurs, it
• Individual Information:–
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
is thought to be a hardware error. (Contact your
■Diagnostic Timing local Mitsubishi representative.)
• At power ON/At reset Qn(H)*5
• With GX Developer, write [PLC parameter/Net- QnPH*5
work parameter/Remote password] to a valid
QnPRH*5
drive then reload the power supply for system
and/or reset the CPU module. If the same error
[PARAMETER ERROR] occurs, it is thought to be a hardware error. (Con-
The system file that have stored the remote pass- tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
word setting information is damaged. • When a valid drive for parameter is set to other
■Collateral information than [program memory], set the parameter file
3042
• Common Information:– (PARAM) at the boot file setting to be able to
• Individual Information:– transmit to the program memory.
■Diagnostic Timing With GX Developer, write [PLC parameter/Net-
• At power ON/At reset work parameter/Remote password] to a valid
drive then reload the power supply for system
and/or reset the CPU module. If the same error
occurs, it is thought to be hardware error. (Con-
tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
*5 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*8 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 100
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link IE controller
network module controlled by another CPU is spec- • Delete the network parameter of the CC-Link IE
ified as the head I/O number of the CC-Link IE con- controller network module controlled by another
Qn(H)*7
troller network module. CPU.
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the head I/O number of the QnPH*9
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name CC-Link IE controller network module controlled QnU
• Individual Information:Parameter number by host CPU.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The network parameter of the CC-Link IE controller
network operating as the normal station is overwrit-
ten to the control station.
Or, the network parameter of the CC-Link IE con-
troller network operating as the control station is
overwritten to the normal station.
Reset the CPU module.
(The network parameter is updated on the module
by resetting.)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN
RUN:
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
Off
• The number of modules actually mounted is dif-
ERR.:
ferent from that is set in Network parameter for
3100 Flicker
MELSECNET/H.
• The head I/O number of the actually mounted
CPU Status:
module is different from the one set in the net-
Stop
work parameter of the CC-Link IE controller net- Qn(H)*7
work. QnPH*9
• Data cannot be handled in the parameter exists. • Check the network parameter and actual mount- QnPRH*9
• The network type of CC-Link IE controller net- ing status, and if they differ, make them matched. QnU
work is overwritten during power-on. (When When network parameters are modified, write
changing the network type, switch RESET to them to the CPU module.
RUN.) • Check the setting of extension base unit stage
■Collateral information number.
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • Check the connection status of extension base
• Individual Information:Parameter number unit and extension cable. When the GOT is bus-
■Diagnostic Timing connected to the main base unit or extension
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN base unit, also check its connection status.
[LINK PARA. ERROR] If an error occurs even after performing the
• The CC-Link IE controller network module is above checks, the hardware may be faulty.
specified for the head I/O number of network (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
parameter in the MELSECNET/H. explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
• The MELSECNET/H module is specified for the
head I/O number of network parameter in the
CC-Link IE controller network.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 101
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
• Check the network parameter and actual mount-
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
ing status, and if they differ, make them matched.
• Although the CC-Link IE controller network mod-
When network parameters are modified, write
ule is mounted, network parameter for the CC-
them to the CPU module.
Link IE controller network module is not set.
• Check the setting of extension base unit stage
• Although the CC-Link IE controller network and
number. Qn(H)*7
MELSECNET/H modules are mounted, network
parameter for the MELSECNET/H module is not
• Check the connection status of extension base QnPH*9
unit and extension cable. When the GOT is bus- QnPRH*9
set.
connected to the main base unit or extension QnU
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name base unit, also check its connection status.
• Individual Information:Parameter number If an error occurs even after performing the
■Diagnostic Timing above checks, the hardware may be faulty.
(Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
12
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN
explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the MELSECNET/H
under control of another CPU is specified as the
• Delete the MELSECNET/H network parameter of
head I/O number in the network setting parameter Q00/Q01*1
the MELSECNET/H under control of another
of the MELSECNET/H. Qn(H)*1
CPU.
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • Change the setting to the head I/O number of the
MELSECNET/H under control of the host CPU. QnU*10
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR] RUN:
The network parameter of the MELSECNET/H Off
operating as the normal station is overwritten to the ERR.:
3100 control station. Flicker
Or, the network parameter of the MELSECNET/H
operating as the control station is overwritten to the Qn(H)*1
CPU Status:
normal station. (The network parameter is updated QnPH
Reset the CPU module. Stop
on the module by resetting.) QnPRH
■Collateral information QnU
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Check the network parameters and actual
• The number of modules actually mounted is dif-
mounting status, and if they differ, make them
ferent from that is set in Network parameter for
matched.
MELSECNET/H.
If any network parameter has been corrected,
• The head I/O number of actually installed mod-
write it to the CPU module.
ules is different from that designated in the net-
• Check the extension base unit stage No. setting.
work parameter of MELSECNET/H.
• Check the connection status of the extension
• Some data in the parameters cannot be handled.
base units and extension cables.
• The network type of MELSECNET/H is overwrit-
When the GOT is bus-connected to the main QCPU
ten during power-on. (When changing the net-
base unit and extension base units, also check
work type, switch RESET to RUN.)
the connection status.
• The mode switch of MELSECNET/H module*5 is
If the error occurs after the above checks, the pos-
outside the range.
sible cause is a hardware fault. (Contact your local
■Collateral information
Mitsubishi representative, explaining a detailed
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
description of the problem.)
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing • Set the mode switch of MELSECNET/H module*5
within the range.
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
*5 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 102
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The link refresh range exceeded the file register
capacity. Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information Change the file register file for the one that enables QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name entire range refresh. QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnU*10
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• When the station number of the MELSECNET/H
module is 0, the PLC-to-PLC network parameter
has been set.
• When the station number of the MELSECNET/H
module is other than 0, the remote master
Correct the type or station number of the MELSEC- Qn(H)*1
NET/H module in the network parameter to meet QnPH
parameter setting has been made.
the used system. QnPRH
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The refresh parameter for the CC-Link IE controller
network is outside the range. Qn(H)*7
■Collateral information QnPH*9
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name RUN: QnPRH*9
• Individual Information:Parameter number • Check the network parameters and mounting Off QnU
■Diagnostic Timing status, and if they differ, match the network ERR.:
3101 • At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN parameters and mounting status. Flicker
[LINK PARA. ERROR] If any network parameter has been corrected,
• The network No. specified by a network parame- write it to the CPU module. CPU Status:
ter is different from that of the actually mounted • Confirm the setting of the number of extension Stop
network. stages of the extension base units.
• The head I/O No. specified by a network parame- • Check the connection status of the extension
ter is different from that of the actually mounted I/ base units and extension cables.
O unit. When the GOT is bus-connected to the main
• The network class specified by a network param- base unit and extension base units, also check
eter is different from that of the actually mounted their connection status.
QCPU
network. If the error occurs after the above checks, the
• The network refresh parameter of the MELSEC- cause is a hardware fault. (Contact your local Mit-
NET/H, MELSECNET/10 is out of the specified subishi representative, explaining a detailed
area. description of the problem.)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
A multi-remote I/O network was configured using a
module that does not support the MELSECNET/H
multi-remote I/O network.
Use a module that supports the MELSECNET/H
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name multi-remote I/O network.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 103
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• The system A of the MELSECNET/H remote
master station has been set to other than Station
No. 0.
• Set the system A of the MELSECNET/H remote
• The system B of the MELSECNET/H remote
master station to Station No. 0.
master station has been set to Station No. 0. QnPRH
• Set the system B of the MELSECNET/H remote
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name master station to any of Station No. 1 to 64.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
Since the number of points of the B/W device set in
12
[Device] of the PLC parameter is lower than the
number of B/W refresh device points shown in the
following table when parameters of the MELSEC-
NET/H are not set, the refresh between the CPU
module and the MELSECNET/H cannot be per-
formed..
RUN:
Refresh No. of refresh device No. of refresh device
device points of B device points of W device Off
8192 points 8192 points ERR.: Qn(H)*7
1 (8192 points×1 (8192 points×1 Set the refresh parameter of the MELSECNET/H in
3101 module) module) Flicker QnPH*7
accordance with the number of points of B/W
8192 points 8192 points
No. of 2 (4096 points×2 (4096 points×2 devices set in [Device] of the PLC parameter. QnPRH*7
mountable modules) modules) CPU Status: QnU
network 6144 points 6144 points Stop
modules 3 (2048 points×3 (2048 points×3
modules) modules)
8192 points 8192 points
4 (2048 points×4 (2048 points×4
modules) modules)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The setting of the network refresh range crosses
over the boundary between the internal user device
and the extended data register (D) or extended link Set the network refresh range so that it does not
register (W). cross over the boundary between the internal user
QnU
■Collateral information device and the extended data register (D) or
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name extended link register (W).
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 104
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
A CC-Link IE controller network parameter error
was detected. Qn(H)*7
■Collateral information QnPH*9
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
QnPRH*9
• Individual Information:Parameter number
QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN • Correct and write the network parameters.
[LINK PARA. ERROR] • If the error occurs after correction, it suggests a
• The network module detected a network parame- hardware fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
ter error. representative.)
• A MELSECNET/H network parameter error was
detected.
QCPU
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The station No. specified in pairing setting are not
correct.
• The stations are not numbered consecutively.
Refer to the troubleshooting of the network module,
• Pairing setting has not been made for the CPU
and if the error is due to incorrect pairing setting,
module at the normal station. QnPRH
reexamine the pairing setting of the network param-
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name eter. RUN:
• Individual Information:Parameter number Off
■Diagnostic Timing ERR.:
3102 • At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN Flicker
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
CPU Status:
The CC-Link IE controller network module whose
Stop
first 5 digits of serial No. is "09041" or earlier is
mounted.
Mount the CC-Link IE controller network module
■Collateral information QnU
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09042" or later.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
Group cyclic function in CC-Link IE controller net-
work that does not correspond to group cyclic func-
tion is set.
Set group cyclic function in function version D or
■Collateral information QnU*9
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name later of CC-Link IE controller network.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
Paring setting in CC-Link IE controller network
modules installed in CPUs except for redundant Q00J/Q00/Q01
CPUs was performed.
Examine the paring setting for the network parame- Qn(H)*9
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name ter in the control staion. QnPH*9
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnU*9
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*9 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 105
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• LB/LW own station send range at LB/LW4000 or
later was set.
• LB/LW setting (2) was performed.
Examine the network range assignments for the
3102 ■Collateral information Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name network parameter in the control station.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, Ethernet interface mod-
ule under control of another station is specified to
the start I/O number of the Ethernet network
• Delete the Ethernet network parameter of Ether-
net interface module under control of another Q00/Q01*1
12
parameter. station. Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the start I/O number of QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name Ethernet interface module under control of the QnU*10
• Individual Information:Parameter number host station.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Although the number of modules has been set to
one or greater number in the Ethernet module
count parameter setting, the number of actually
mounted module is zero.
• The start I/O No. of the Ethernet network param-
eter differs from the I/O No. of the actually QCPU
3103 mounted module. RUN:
■Collateral information Off
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name ERR.:
• Individual Information:Parameter number Flicker
■Diagnostic Timing • Correct and write the network parameters.
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN • If the error occurs after correction, it suggests a
CPU Status:
hardware fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
[LINK PARA. ERROR] Stop
representative.)
• Ethernet module whose network type is set to
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
“Ethernet (main base)” is mounted on the exten-
sion base unit in the redundant system.
• Ethernet module whose network type is set to
“Ethernet (extension base)” is mounted on the
main base unit in the redundant system. QnPRH*7
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• The Ethernet, MELSECNET/H and MELSEC-
NET/10 use the same network number.
• The network number, station number or group
number set in the network parameter is out of
range.
• Correct and write the network parameters.
• The specified I/O number is outside the range of
• If the error occurs after correction, it suggests a
3104 the used CPU module. QCPU
hardware fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
• The Ethernet-specific parameter setting is not
representative.)
normal.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 106
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the CC-Link module
under control of another station is specified as the
head I/O number of the CC-Link network parame- • Delete the CC-Link network parameter of the Q00/Q01*1
ter. CC-Link module under control of another station. Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information • Change the setting to the start I/O number of the QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name CC-Link module under control of the host station. QnU*10
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• Though the number of CC-Link modules set in
the network parameters is one or more, the num-
ber of actually mounted modules is zero.
• The start I/O number in the common parameters
is different from that of the actually mounted
RUN:
module.
Off
• The station type of the CC-Link module count QCPU
ERR.:
setting parameters is different from that of the
3105 Flicker
actually mounted station.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name CPU Status:
• Individual Information:Parameter number Stop
• Correct and write the network parameters.
■Diagnostic Timing • If the error occurs after correction, it suggests a
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN hardware fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
[LINK PARA. ERROR] representative.)
• CC-Link module whose station type is set to
“master station (compatible with redundant func-
tion)” is mounted on the extension base unit in
the redundant system.
• CC-Link module whose station type is set to
“master station (extension base)” is mounted on QnPRH*7
the main base unit in the redundant system.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 107
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The CC-Link link refresh range exceeded the file
register capacity. Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information Change the file register file for the one refresh- QnPH
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name enabled in the whole range. QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The network refresh parameter for CC-Link is out of
range.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name Check the parameter setting. QCPU 12
3106 • Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
The setting of the network refresh range crosses
over the boundary between the internal user device
and the extended data register (D) or extended link Set the network refresh range so that it does not
register (W). cross over the boundary between the internal user
QnU
■Collateral information device and the extended data register (D) or
• Common Information:File name extended link register (W).
• Individual Information:Parameter number RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing Off
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN ERR.:
Flicker
[LINK PARA. ERROR]
• The CC-Link parameter setting is incorrect.
• The set mode is not allowed for the version of the CPU Status:
mounted CC-Link module. Stop
3107 ■Collateral information Check the parameter setting. QCPU
• Common Information:File name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[SFC PARA. ERROR]
The parameter setting is illegal.
• Though Block 0 was set to "Automatic start" in
the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box, Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Block 0 does not exist. QnPH
3200
■Collateral information QnPRH
• Common Information:File name QnU
• Individual Information:Parameter number Read the common information of the error using
■Diagnostic Timing the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
• STOP RUN ing to its numerical value (program error location),
and correct the problem.
[SFC PARA. ERROR]
The block parameter setting is illegal.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
3201 • Common Information:File name QnPH
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnPRH
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
12 - 108
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SFC PARA. ERROR]
The number of step relays specified in the device
setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is less than
that used in the program. Qn(H)
3202 ■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:File name QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing Read the common information of the error using
• STOP RUN the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
[SFC PARA. ERROR] ing to its numerical value (program error location),
The execution type of the SFC program specified in and correct the problem.
the program setting of the PLC parameter dialog
Qn(H)
box is other than scan execution.
QnPH
3203 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/ At reset/ STOP RUN*3
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The start I/O number in the intelligent function mod-
ule parameter set on GX Configurator differs from
the actual I/O number.
■Collateral information
3300 • Common Information:File name Check the parameter setting. QCPU
• Individual Information:Parameter number*2
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
RUN:
At writing to progurammable controller Off
[SP. PARA ERROR] ERR.:
• The refresh setting of the intelligent function Flicker
module exceeded the file register capacity.
• The intelligent function module set in GX Config- CPU Status: Q00J/Q00/Q01
urator differs from the actually mounted module. • Change the file register file for the one which Stop Qn(H)*1
■Collateral information allows refresh in the whole range. QnPH
• Common Information:File name • Check the parameter setting. QnPRH
• Individual Information:Parameter number*2 QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The intelligent function module's refresh parameter
setting is outside the available range.
■Collateral information
3301 • Common Information:File name Check the parameter setting. QCPU
• Individual Information:Parameter number*2
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The setting of the refresh parameter range crosses
over the boundary between the internal user device
and the extended data register (D) or extended link
register (W). Set the refresh parameter range so that it does not
■Collateral information cross over the boundary between the internal user
QnU
• Common Information:File name device and the extended data register (D) or
extended link register (W).
• Individual Information:Parameter number*2
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
*1 The function version is B or later.
*2 Parameter No. is the value gained by dividing the head I/O number of parameter in the intelligent function module set by GX Configurator by 10H.
*3 The diagnostic timing of CPU modules except for Universal QCPU can be performed only when switching the CPU modules to run.
12 - 109
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SP. PARA ERROR]
The intelligent function module's refresh parameter
are abnormal.
■Collateral information
3302 • Common Information:File name Check the parameter setting. QCPU
• Individual Information:Parameter number*2
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
[SP. PARA ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the automatic refresh
setting or other parameter setting was made to the
intelligent function module under control of another
• Delete the automatic refresh setting or other
12
parameter setting of the intelligent function mod- Q00/Q01*1
station.
■Collateral information
ule under control of another CPU. Qn(H)*1
3303
• Common Information:File name/ Drive name • Change the setting to the automatic refresh set- QnPH
• Individual Information:Parameter number ting or other parameter setting of the intelligent QnU*10
■Diagnostic Timing function module under control of the host CPU.
• At power-On/ At reset/ STOP RUN/
At writing to progurammable controller
RUN:
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
Off
The head I/O number of the target module of the
ERR.:
remote password is set to other than 0H to 0FF0H. Qn(H)*1
Flicker
■Collateral information Change the head I/O number of the target module QnPH
• Common Information:– to be within the 0H to 0FF0H range. QnPRH
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop QnU*7
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
The head I/O number of the target module of the
remote password is set to other than 0H to 07E0H.
■Collateral information Change the head I/O number of the target module
• Common Information:– Q02U
to be within the 0H to 07E0H range.
3400 • Individual Information:–
12.3.5 Error code list (3000 to 3999)
12.3 Error Code List
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
The head I/O number of the target module of the
remote password is outside the following range.
Change the head I/O number of the target module
• Q00JCPU: 0H to 1E0H
of the remote password for the number within the
• Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0H to 3E0H
■Collateral information
following range. Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
• Common Information:– • Q00JCPU: 0H to 1E0H
• Individual Information:– • Q00CPU/Q01CPU: 0H to 3E0H
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
*2 Parameter No. is the value gained by dividing the head I/O number of parameter in the intelligent function module set by GX Configurator by 10H.
*7 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 110
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
Position specified as the head I/O number of the
remote password file is incorrect due to one of the
following reasons:
• Module is not loaded.
• Other than a the intelligent function module (I/O
module)
• Intelligent function module other than serial com-
munication module, modem interface module or
Mount serial communication module, modem inter- Qn(H)*1
face module or Ethernet module of function version QnPH
Ethernet module
B or later in the position specified in the head I/O QnPRH
• Serial communication module or Ethernet mod-
No. of the remote password file. QnU
ule of function version A
The intelligent function module where remote pass-
word is available is not mounted.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN RUN:
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.] Off
Any of the following modules is not mounted on the ERR.:
3401 slot specified for the head I/O number of the remote Flicker
password. Mount any of the following modules in the position
• Serial communication module of function version specified for the head I/O number of the remote CPU Status:
B or later password. Stop
• Ethernet module of function version B or later • Serial communication module of function version
• Modem interface module of function version B or Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
B or later
later • Ethernet module of function version B or later
■Collateral information • Modem interface module of function version B or
• Common Information:– later
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[REMOTE PASS. ERR.]
Serial communication module, modem interface
module or Ethernet module of function version B or
later controlled by another CPU was specified in a
• Change it for the Ethernet module of function Qn(H)*1
multiple CPU system.
version B or later connected by the host CPU. QnPH
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– • Delete the remote password setting. QnU*10
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
*1 The function version is B or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 111
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 4000 to 4999, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
• The program contains an instruction code that
cannot be decoded.
• An unusable instruction is included in the pro- 12
gram.
4000 ■Collateral information QCPU
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
When instruction executed
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
The program contains a dedicated instruction for
SFC although it is not an SFC program. Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
■Collateral information Qn(H)
4001 • Common Information:Program error location QnPH
• Individual Information:– QnPRH
■Diagnostic Timing QnU
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
When instruction executed
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
• The name of dedicated instruction specified by
RUN:
the program is incorrect.
Off
• The dedicated instruction specified by the pro- Read the common information of the error using a
ERR.:
gram cannot be executed by the specified mod- peripheral device, check error step corresponding
Flicker
ule. to its numerical value (program error location), and
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
4002
■Collateral information correct the problem.
• Common Information:Program error location CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
When instruction executed
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
The number of devices for the dedicated instruction
specified by the program is incorrect.
QCPU
■Collateral information
4003 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
When instruction executed
[INSTRCT. CODE ERR]
The device which cannot be used by the dedicated
instruction specified by the program is specified.
■Collateral information
4004 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
When instruction executed
*2 The function version is B or later.
12 - 112
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MISSING END INS.]
There is no END (FEND) instruction in the pro-
gram.
■Collateral information
4010 • Common Information:Program error location QCPU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(P)]
The total number of internal file pointers used by
the program exceeds the number of internal file
Qn(H)
pointers set in the parameters.
QnPH
4020 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location QnPRH
• Individual Information:– RUN: QnU
■Diagnostic Timing Off
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN ERR.:
Flicker
[CAN'T SET(P)]
• The common pointer Nos. assigned to files over-
Read the common information of the error using a CPU Status:
lap.
peripheral device, check error step corresponding Stop
• The local pointer Nos. assigned to files overlap.
to its numerical value (program error location), and
4021 ■Collateral information
correct the problem.
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN QCPU
[CAN'T SET(I)]
The allocation pointer Nos. assigned by files over-
lap.
■Collateral information
4030 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/STOP RUN
[OPERATION ERROR]
The instruction cannot process the contained data.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location QCPU
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] • Take measurements against noise. RUN:
Access error of ATA card occurs by Off/On
• Reset and restart the CPU module.
SP.FREAD/SP.FWRITE instructions. Qn(H)
When the same error is displayed again, the ERR.:
■Collateral information QnPH
ATA card has hardware failure. Flicker/On
4100 • Common Information:Program error location QnPRH
(Please consult your local Mitsubishi service cen-
• Individual Information:–
CPU Status: QnU*11
ter or representative, explaining a detailed
■Diagnostic Timing
description of the problem.) Stop/
• When instruction executed
Continue*1
[OPERATION ERROR]
The file being accessed by other functions with
• Stop the file accessed with other functions to
SP.FWRITE instruction was accessed.
execute SP.FWRITE instruction.
■Collateral information
• Stop the access with othrer functions and the QnU*11
• Common Information:Program error location
SP.FWRITE instructuion to execute at same
• Individual Information:–
time.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*11 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
12 - 113
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The number of setting data dealt with the instruc-
tion exceeds the applicable range.
• The storage data and constant of the device
specified by the instruction exceeds the applica-
ble range.
• When writing to the host CPU shared memory,
the write prohibited area is specified for the write
destination address.
• The range of storage data of the device specified
QCPU
by the instruction is duplicated.
• The device specified by the instruction exceeds
the range of the number of device points.
12
• The interrupt pointer No. specified by the instruc-
tion exceeds the applicable range.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location RUN:
• Individual Information:– Off/On
■Diagnostic Timing ERR.:
Read the common information of the error using
• When instruction executed
the peripheral device, check error step correspond- Flicker/On
4101 [OPERATION ERROR]
ing to its numerical value (program error location),
• The storage data of file register specified by the
and correct the problem. CPU Status:
instruction exceeds the applicable range. Or, file
Stop/
register is not set.
Continue*1
■Collateral information QnU*10
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The block data that crosses over the boundary
between the internal user device and the
extended data register (D) or extended link regis-
ter is specified (including 32-bit binary, real num-
ber (single precision, double precision), indirect
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
QnU
address, and control data)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 114
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[OPERATION ERROR]
In a multiple CPU system, the link direct device
(J \ ) was specified for the network module • Delete from the program the link direct device
Q00/Q01*2
under control of another station. which specifies the network module under con-
Qn(H)*2
■Collateral information trol of another CPU.
QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location • Using the link direct device, specify the network
• Individual Information:– module under control of the host CPU. QnU*10
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The network No. or station No. specified for the
dedicated instruction is wrong.
• The link direct device (J \ ) setting is incorrect.
• The module No./ network No./number of charac-
4102 ter strings exceeds the range that can be speci- QCPU
fied.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] Read the common information of the error using
• The specification of character string the peripheral device, check error step correspond- RUN:
(" ") specified by dedicated instruction cannot be ing to its numerical value (program error location), Off/On
used for the character string. and correct the problem. ERR.:
■Collateral information QnU
Flicker/On
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed Stop/
[OPERATION ERROR] Continue*1
The configuration of the PID dedicated instruction
Q00J/Q00/
is incorrect.
Q01*2
■Collateral information
4103 Qn(H)
• Common Information:Program error location
QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP instructins were
executed while setting program memory check.
• Delete the program memory check setting.
■Collateral information
4105 • When using the program memory check, delete QnPH*5
• Common Information:Program error location
PLOADP/PUNLOADP/PSWAPP instructions.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
33 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions
Q00/Q01*2
were executed from one CPU module. Using the multiple CPU dedicated instruction com-
pletion bit, provide interlocks to prevent one CPU Qn(H)*2
■Collateral information
4107 QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location module from executing 33 or more multiple CPU
• Individual Information:– dedicated instructions. Q00U/Q01U
■Diagnostic Timing Q02U
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*2 The function version is B or later.
*5 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 115
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[OPERATION ERROR]
With high speed interrupt setting PR, PRC,
UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY or PWM instruction is
Delete the high-speed interrupt setting.
executed.
When using high-speed interrupt, delete the PR,
4109 ■Collateral information Qn(H)*3
PRC, UDCNT1, UDCNT2, PLSY and PWM instruc-
• Common Information:Program error location
tions.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] RUN:
An attempt was made to perform write/read to/from Off/On
ERR.:
the CPU shared memory write/read disable area of
the host station CPU module with the instruction. Flicker/On 12
Q00/Q01*2
4111 ■Collateral information
CPU Status: QnU
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:– Stop/
Read the common information of the error using
■Diagnostic Timing Continue*1
GX Developer, and check and correct the error step
• When instruction executed
corresponding to that value (program error loca-
[OPERATION ERROR]
tion).
The CPU module that cannot be specified with the
multiple CPU dedicated instruction was specified.
■Collateral information Q00/Q01*2
4112
• Common Information:Program error location QnU*10
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
• When the SP.DEVST instruction is executed, the
number of writing to the standard ROM of the day • Check that the number of execution of the RUN:
exceeds the value specified by SD695. SP.DEVST instruction is proper. Off/On
• The value outside the specified range is set to • Execute the SP.DEVST instruction again the fol- ERR.:
4113 SD695. lowing day or later day. Or, arrange the value of Flicker/On QnU
■Collateral information SD695.
• Common Information:Program error location • Correct the value of SD695 so that it does not CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– exceed the range. Stop/Continue
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
Since the manual system switching enable flag RUN:
(special register SM1592) is OFF, manual system Off/On
switching cannot be executed by the control system ERR.:
To execute control system switching by the SP.
switching instruction (SP. CONTSW). Flicker/On
4120 CONTSW instruction, turn ON the manual system QnPRH
■Collateral information
switching enable flag (special register SM1592).
• Common Information:Program error location CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Stop/
■Diagnostic Timing Continue*1
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] • Reexamine the interlock signal for the SP.
• In the separate mode, the control system switch- RUN:
CONTSW instruction, and make sure that the SP.
ing instruction (SP. CONTSW) was executed in
CONTSW instruction is executed in the control Off/On
the standby system CPU module.
system only. (Since the SP. CONTSW instruction ERR.:
• In the debug mode, the control system switching Flicker/On
cannot be executed in the standby system, it is
4121 instruction (SP. CONTSW) was executed. QnPRH
recommended to provide an interlock using the
■Collateral information
operation mode signal or like.) CPU Status:
• Common Information:Program error location
• As the SP. CONTSW instruction cannot be exe- Stop/
• Individual Information:–
cuted in the debug mode, reexamine the inter- Continue*1
■Diagnostic Timing
lock signal related to the operation mode.
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*2 The function version is B or later.
*3 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04012" or later.
*10 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 116
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[OPERATION ERROR]
• The dedicated instruction was executed to the
module mounted on the extension base unit in
the redundant system. RUN:
• The instruction for accessing the intelligent func- • Delete the dedicated instruction for the module Off/On
tion module mounted on the extension base unit mounted on the extension base unit. ERR.:
4122 from the standby system at separate mode was • Delete the instruction for accessing the intelligent Flicker/On QnPRH*6
executed. function module mounted on the extension base
■Collateral information unit from the standby system. CPU Status:
• Common Information:Program error location Stop/Continue
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
Instructions to read SFC step comment (S(P).SFC- RUN:
SCOMR) and SFC transition condition comment Off/On
(S(P).SFCTCOMR) are executed for the comment ERR.:
Qn(H)*4
file in ATA card Target comment file is to be other than the com- Flicker/On
4130 QnPH*5
■Collateral information ment file in ATA card.
• Common Information:Program error location CPU Status: QnPRH
• Individual Information:– Stop/
■Diagnostic Timing Continue*1
• When END/other instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
The SFC program is started up by the instruction RUN:
while the other SFC program has not yet been Off/On
completed. Check the SFC program specified by the instruc- ERR.:
4131 ■Collateral information tion. Or, check the executing status of the SFC pro- Flicker/On
• Common Information:Program error location gram.
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop/Continue
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR]
Operation where the input data is special value
("-0", unnormalized number, nonnumeric, ) is
Read the common information of the error using
performed. QnU
the peripheral device, check the error step corre- RUN:
4140 ■Collateral information
sponding to the numerical value (program error Off/On
• Common Information:Program error location
part), and correct it. ERR.:
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing Flicker/On
• When instruction executed
[OPERATION ERROR] CPU Status:
Overflow occurs at operation. Stop/
Read the common information of the error using
■Collateral information Continue*1
the peripheral device, check the error step corre-
4141 • Common Information:Program error location
sponding to the numerical value (program error
• Individual Information:–
part), and correct it.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR NEXT ERROR]
No NEXT instruction was executed following the
RUN:
execution of a FOR instruction.
Off
Alternatively, there are fewer NEXT instructions Read the common information of the error using
ERR.:
than FOR instructions. the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
4200 Flicker QCPU
■Collateral information ing to its numerical value (program error location),
• Common Information:Program error location and correct the problem.
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*4 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07012" or later.
*5 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 117
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[FOR NEXT ERROR]
A NEXT instruction was executed although no FOR
instruction has been executed.
Alternatively, there are more NEXT instructions Read the common information of the error using
than FOR instructions. the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
4201
■Collateral information ing to its numerical value (program error location),
• Common Information:Program error location and correct the problem.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR NEXT ERROR]
More than 16 nesting levels are programmed.
■Collateral information 12
4202 • Common Information:Program error location Keep nesting levels at 16 or under.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[FOR NEXT ERROR]
A BREAK instruction was executed although no
FOR instruction has been executed prior to that.
■Collateral information
4203
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing Read the common information of the error using
• When instruction executed the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
RUN:
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)] ing to its numerical value (program error location),
Off
The CALL instruction is executed, but there is no and correct the problem.
ERR.:
subroutine at the specified pointer.
Flicker QCPU
■Collateral information
4210
• Common Information:Program error location
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)]
There was no RET instruction in the executed sub-
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
routine program.
■Collateral information
4211
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing Read the common information of the error using
• When instruction executed the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)] ing to its numerical value (program error location),
The RET instruction exists before the FEND and correct the problem.
instruction of the main routine program.
■Collateral information
4212
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(P)]
More than 16 nesting levels are programmed.
■Collateral information
4213 • Common Information:Program error location Keep nesting levels at 16 or under.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
12 - 118
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
Though an interrupt input occurred, the corre-
sponding interrupt pointer does not exist.
■Collateral information
4220
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
An IRET instruction does not exist in the executed
interrupt program.
■Collateral information
4221 QCPU
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed Read the common information of the error using
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)] the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
The IRET instruction exists before the FEND ing to its numerical value (program error location),
instruction of the main routine program. and correct the problem.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
4223
• The IRET instruction was executed in the fixed
scan execution type program. RUN:
• The STOP instruction was executed in the fixed Off
scan execution type program. ERR.:
QnU
■Collateral information Flicker
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
• When instruction executed
[CAN'T EXECUTE(I)]
The interrupt pointer for the module mounted on
the extension base unit is set in the redundant sys-
tem. Delete the setting of interrupt pointer for the module
4225 ■Collateral information mounted on the extension base unit, since it cannot QnPRH*6
• Common Information:– be used.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power-ON/At reset
[INST. FORMAT ERR.]
The number of CHK and CHKEND instructions is
not equal.
■Collateral information Qn(H)
4230
• Common Information:Program error location QnPH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing Read the common information of the error using
• When instruction executed the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
[INST. FORMAT ERR.] ing to its numerical value (program error location),
The number of IX and IXEND instructions is not and correct the problem.
equal.
■Collateral information
4231 QCPU
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*6 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 119
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[INST. FORMAT ERR.]
The configuration of the check conditions for the
CHK instruction is incorrect.
Alternatively, a CHK instruction has been used in a
low speed execution type program. Qn(H)
4235
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM.ERROR]
• The multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedi-
cated instruction used in the program specifies 12
the wrong CPU module. Or, the setting in the
CPU module is incompatible with the multiple
CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruc-
tion.
• The reserved CPU is specified.
• The uninstalled CPU is specified.
• The head I/O number of the target CPU/16 (n1)
is outside the range of 3EH to 3E3H.
4350 • The CPU module where the instruction cannot be
executed is specified.
• The instruction is executed in a single CPU sys- RUN:
tem. Off
• The host CPU is specified. Read the common information of the error using
ERR.:
• The instruction is executed without setting the the peripheral device, check error step correspond-
Flicker
"Use multiple CPU high speed communication". ing to its numerical value (program error location),
■Collateral information and correct the problem.
CPU Status:
• Common Information:Program error location
Stop
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
QnU*7
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM.ERROR]
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
• The multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedi-
cated instruction specified by the program cannot
be executed to the specified target CPU module.
• The instruction name is wrong.
• The instruction unsupported by the target CPU
4351
module is specified.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM.ERROR]
The number of devices for the multiple CPU high-
speed transmission dedicated instruction specified
by the program is wrong.
4352 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*7 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 120
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MULTI-COM.ERROR]
The device which cannot be used for the multiple
CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instruction
specified by the program is specified.
4353 ■Collateral information QnU*7
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM.ERROR]
The character string which cannot be handled by
the multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedi-
cated instruction is specified. Read the common information of the error using
4354 ■Collateral information the peripheral device, check error step
• Common Information:Program error location corresponding to its numerical value (program error
• Individual Information:– location), and correct the problem.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[MULTI-COM.ERROR] QnU*7
The number of read/write data (number of request/
receive data) for the multiple CPU high-speed
transmission dedicated instruction specified by the
program is not valid.
4355
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed RUN:
[SFCP. CODE ERROR] Off
No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in SFC pro- ERR.:
gram. Flicker
Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4400 • Common Information:Program error location QnPH
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– QnPRH
Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(BL)]
The block number designated by the SFC program
exceeds the range.
■Collateral information
4410 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN Write the program to the CPU module again using
[CAN'T SET(BL)] GX Developer.
Block number designations overlap in SFC pro-
gram. Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
■Collateral information Qn(H)
4411 • Common Information:Program error location QnPH
• Individual Information:– QnPRH
■Diagnostic Timing QnU
• STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(S)]
A step number designated in an SFC program
exceeds the range.
■Collateral information
4420 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
*2 The function version is B or later.
*7 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 121
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[CAN'T SET(S)]
Total number of steps in all SFC programs exceed
the maximum.
■Collateral information
4421 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
■Diagnostic Timing
Qn(H)
• STOP RUN Write the program to the CPU module again using
QnPH
GX Developer.
[CAN'T SET(S)] QnPRH
Step number designations overlap in SFC program. QnU
■Collateral information
4422 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
12
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
[CAN'T SET(S)]
The total number of (maximum step No.+1) of each
block exceeds the total number of step relays.
Correct the total number of step relays so that it
■Collateral information
4423 • Common Information:Program error location does not exceed the total number of (maximum
• Individual Information:– step No.+1) of each block.
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN RUN:
Off
[SFC EXE. ERROR]
ERR.:
The SFC program cannot be executed.
Flicker
• The data of the block data setting is illegal.
• Write the program to the CPU module again
• The SFC data device of the block data setting is
using GX Developer. CPU Status:
beyond the device setting range set in the PLC
• After correcting the setting of the SFC data Stop
4430 parameter.
device, write it to the CPU module.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:File name/Drive name • After correcting the device setting range set in
• Individual Information:– the PLC parameter, write it to the CPU module.
■Diagnostic Timing Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
• STOP RUN QnU
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
[SFC EXE. ERROR]
The SFC program cannot be executed.
• The block parameter setting is abnormal.
■Collateral information
4431 • Common Information:File name/Drive name
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN Write the program to the CPU module again using
[SFC EXE. ERROR] GX Developer.
The SFC program cannot be executed.
• The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
■Collateral information
4432 • Common Information:File name/Drive name
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
*2 The function version is B or later.
12 - 122
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The numbers of BLOCK and BEND instructions in
an SFC program are not equal.
■Collateral information
4500 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN Qn(H)
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.] QnPH
The configuration of the STEP* to TRAN* to TSET QnPRH
to SEND instructions in the SFC program is incor-
rect.
4501 ■Collateral information Write the program to the CPU module again using
• Common Information:Program error location the peripheral device.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• STEPI* instruction does not exist in the block of
RUN:
the SFC program.
Off
4502 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location ERR.:
• Individual Information:– Flicker
■Diagnostic Timing
CPU Status:
• STOP RUN
Stop
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• The step specified in the TSET instruction does
• Write the program to the CPU module again
not exist. Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
using GX Developer.
• In jump transition, the host step number was Qn(H)
• Read the common information of the error using
4503 specified as the destination step number. QnPH
GX Developer, and check and correct the error
■Collateral information QnPRH
• Common Information:Program error location step corresponding to that value (program error
QnU
• Individual Information:– location).
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• The step specified in the TAND instruction does
not exist.
Write the program to the CPU module again using
4504 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location GX Developer.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
*2 The function version is B or later.
12 - 123
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• In the operation output of a step, the SET Sn/
BLmSn or RST Sn/BLmSn instruction was speci-
fied for the host step.
4505
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location RUN:
• Individual Information:– Off
■Diagnostic Timing Read the common information of the error using
ERR.:
• STOP RUN GX Developer, and check and correct the error step Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
Flicker
corresponding to that value (program error loca- QnU
[SFCP. FORMAT ERR.]
tion).
The structure of the SFC program is illegal.
• In a reset step, the host step number was speci-
CPU Status:
Stop
12
fied as the destination step.
4506 ■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
[SFCP. OPE. ERROR]
The SFC program contains data that cannot be pro-
cessed.
■Collateral information
4600
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[SFCP. OPE. ERROR] RUN:
Exceeds device range that can be designated by Off/On
the SFC program. Read common information of the error using the ERR.:
Qn(H)
■Collateral information peripheral device, check error step corresponding Flicker/On
4601 QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location to its numerical value (program error location), and
QnPRH
• Individual Information:– correct the problem. CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop/
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
• When instruction executed Continue*1
[SFCP. OPE. ERROR]
The START instruction in an SFC program is pre-
ceded by an END instruction.
■Collateral information
4602
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence. (LED indication varies.)
*2 The function version is B or later.
12 - 124
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[SFCP. EXE. ERROR]
The active step information at presumptive start of
the SFC program is incorrect.
■Collateral information
4610 • Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:– RUN:
Read common information of the error using the
■Diagnostic Timing On
peripheral device, check error step corresponding
• STOP RUN ERR.:
to its numerical value (program error location), and
On
[SFCP. EXE. ERROR] correct the problem.
Key-switch was reset during RUN when presump- The program is automatically subjected to an initial
CPU Status:
tive start was designated for SFC program. start.
Continue Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4611 QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location
QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• STOP RUN
[BLOCK EXE. ERROR]
Startup was executed at a block in the SFC pro-
gram that was already started up. Read common information of the error using the
■Collateral information peripheral device, check error step corresponding
4620
• Common Information:Program error location to its numerical value (program error location), and
• Individual Information:– correct the problem.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
[BLOCK EXE. ERROR] RUN:
Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist
• Read the common information of the error using Off Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
in the SFC program.
GX Developer, and check and correct the error ERR.: Qn(H)
■Collateral information
4621 step corresponding to that value (program error Flicker QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location
location). QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
• Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is OFF. CPU Status: QnU
■Diagnostic Timing
Stop
• When instruction executed
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
Startup was executed at a block in the SFC pro-
gram that was already started up. Read common information of the error using the
Qn(H)
■Collateral information peripheral device, check error step corresponding
4630 QnPH
• Common Information:Program error location to its numerical value (program error location), and
QnPRH
• Individual Information:– correct the problem.
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
*2 The function version is B or later.
12 - 125
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
• Startup was attempted at the step that does not
exist in the SFC program.
Or, the step that does not exist in the SFC pro-
gram was specified for end.
• Forced transition was executed based on the
• Read the common information of the error using Q00J/Q00/Q01*2
transition condition that does not exit in the SFC
the peripheral device, and check and correct the Qn(H)
program.
4631 error step corresponding to that value (program QnPH
Or, the transition condition for forced transition
error location). QnPRH
that does not exit in the SFC program was can-
• Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is OFF. QnU
celed.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Program error location
RUN:
12
• Individual Information:–
Off
■Diagnostic Timing
ERR.:
• When instruction executed
Flicker
[STEP EXE. ERROR]
There were too many simultaneous active steps in
CPU Status:
blocks that can be designated by the SFC program.
Stop
■Collateral information
4632
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing Read common information of the error using the Qn(H)
• When instruction executed peripheral device, check error step corresponding QnPH
[STEP EXE. ERROR] to its numerical value (program error location), and QnPRH
There were too many simultaneous active steps in correct the problem. QnU
all blocks that can be designated.
■Collateral information
4633
• Common Information:Program error location
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When instruction executed
12.3.6 Error code list (4000 to 4999)
12.3 Error Code List
*2 The function version is B or later.
12 - 126
12.3.7 Error code list (5000 to 5999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 5000 to 5999, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[WDT ERROR]
• The scan time of the initial execution type pro-
• Read the individual information of the error from
gram exceeded the initial execution monitoring
the peripheral device, check its value (time), and
time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC
shorten the scan time. Qn(H)
parameter.
• Change the initial execution monitoring time or QnPH
■Collateral information
the WDT value in the PLC RAS setting of the QnPRH
• Common Information:Time (value set)
PLC parameter. QnU
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea-
• Resolve the endless loop caused by jump transi-
sured)
tion.
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[WDT ERROR]
5000 • The power supply of the standby system is
• Since power-off of the standby system increases
turned OFF.
the control system scan time, reset the WDT
• The tracking cable is disconnected or connected
value, taking the increase of the control system
without turning off or resetting the standby sys-
scan time into consideration.
tem.
• When the tracking cable is disconnected during
• The tracking cable is not secured by the connec-
operation, securely connect it and restart the QnPRH
tor fixing screws.
CPU module. If the same error is displayed
■Collateral information
again, the tracking cable or CPU module has a
• Common Information:Time (value set)
hardware fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea- RUN:
representative, explaining a detailed description
sured) Off
of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing ERR.:
• Always Flicker
[WDT ERROR]
• The scan time of the program exceeded the • Read the individual information of the error using CPU Status:
WDT value specified in the PLC RAS setting of the peripheral device, check its value (time), and Stop
the PLC parameter. shorten the scan time.
■Collateral information • Change the initial execution monitoring time or
QCPU
• Common Information:Time (value set) the WDT value in the PLC RAS setting of the
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea- PLC parameter.
sured) • Resolve the endless loop caused by jump transi-
■Diagnostic Timing tion.
• Always
[WDT ERROR]
• The power supply of the standby system is
5001 • Since power-off of the standby system increases
turned OFF.
the control system scan time, reset the WDT
• The tracking cable is disconnected or connected
value, taking the increase of the control system
without turning off or resetting the standby sys-
scan time into consideration.
tem.
• When the tracking cable is disconnected during
• The tracking cable is not secured by the connec-
operation, securely connect it and restart the QnPRH
tor fixing screws.
CPU module. If the same error is displayed
■Collateral information
again, the tracking cable or CPU module has a
• Common Information:Time (value set)
hardware fault. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea-
representative, explaining a detailed description
sured)
of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
12 - 127
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[PRG. TIME OVER]
The program scan time exceeded the constant
scan setting time specified in the PLC RAS setting
of the PLC parameter. Qn(H)
■Collateral information QnPH
• Common Information:Time (value set) QnPRH
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea- QnU
sured)
• Review the constant scan setting time.
■Diagnostic Timing
• Review the constant scan setting time and low
• Always
speed program execution time in the PLC param-
[PRG. TIME OVER]
eter so that the excess time of constant scan can
The low speed program execution time specified in
the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter
be fully secured. 12
exceeded the excess time of the constant scan.
Qn(H)
■Collateral information
5010 QnPH
• Common Information:Time (value set)
QnPRH
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea-
sured) RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing On
• Always ERR.:
[PRG. TIME OVER] On
The program scan time exceeded the constant
scan setting time specified in the PLC RAS setting CPU Status:
of the PLC parameter. Continue
Review the constant scan setting time in the PLC
■Collateral information
parameter so that the excess time of constant scan Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Common Information:Time (value set)
can be fully secured.
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea-
sured)
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[PRG. TIME OVER]
The scan time of the low speed execution type pro-
gram exceeded the low speed execution watch
time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC Read the individual information of the error using
parameter dialog box. the peripheral device, check the numerical value
12.3.7 Error code list (5000 to 5999)
12.3 Error Code List
Qn(H)
5011 ■Collateral information (time) there, and shorten scan time if necessary.
QnPH
• Common Information:Time (value set) Change the low speed execution watch time in the
• Individual Information:Time (value actually mea- PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter dialog box.
sured)
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
12 - 128
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 6000 to 6999, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[FILE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the control system and
standby system do not have the same programs
and parameters.
• Match the programs and parameters of the con-
The file type detected as different between the two
trol system and standby system.
systems can be checked by the file name of the
• Verify the systems by either of the following pro-
error common information.
cedures 1), 2) to clarify the differences between
the files of the two systems, then correct a wrong
• The program is different.
file, and execute “Write to PLC“ again.
(File name = ********.QPG)
1) After reading the programs/parameters of
• The PLC parameters/network parameters/redun-
System A using
dant parameters are different.
GX Developer or PX Developer, verify them
(File name = PARAM.QPA)
with those of System B.
• The remote password is different.
2) Verify the programs/parameters of GX Devel-
(File name = PARAM.QPA)
oper or PX Developer saved in the offline
• The intelligent function module parameters are
environment with those written to the CPU
different.
6000 modules of both systems.
(File name = IPARAM.QPA)
• When the capacity of each write destination
• The device initial values are different.
within the CPU for online change of multiple pro- RUN:
(File name = ********.QDI)
gram blocks is different between the two sys- Off
• The capacity of each write destination within the
tems, take corrective action 1) or 2). ERR.:
CPU for online pchange of multiple program
1) Using the memory copy from control system Flicker QnPRH
blocks is different.
to standby system, copy the program memory
(File name = MBOC.QMB)
from the control system to the standby sys- CPU Status:
(This can be detected from the standby system
tem. Stop
of the redundant system.)
2) Format the CPU module program memories
■Collateral information
of both systems. (For the capacity of each
• Common Information:File name
write destination within the CPU for online
• Individual Information:–
change of multiple program blocks, set the
■Diagnostic Timing
same value to both systems.)
• At power ON/At reset/
At tracking cable connection/At changing to
backup mode/At completion of write during RUN/
At system switching/At switching both systems
into RUN
[FILE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the valid parameter drive
settings (SW2, SW3) made by the DIP switches are
not the same.
Match the valid parameter drive settings (SW2,
■Collateral information
6001 SW3) by the DIP switches of the control system
• Common Information:–
and standby system.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion/At operation mode change
12 - 129
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[OPE. MODE DIFF.]
The operational status of the control system and
standby system in the redundant system is not the RUN:
same. On
(This can be detected from the standby system of ERR.:
Synchronise the operation statuses of the control
6010 the redundant system.) On
system and standby system.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Continue
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[OPE. MODE DIFF.]
At power ON/reset, the RUN/STOP switch settings 12
of the control system and standby system are not
the same in a redundant system.
(This can be detected from the control system or
Set the RUN/STOP switches of the control system
6020 standby system of the redundant system.)
and standby system to the same setting.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[UNIT LAY. DIFF.]
• In a redundant system, the module configuration
QnPRH
differs between the control system and standby
system.
• The network module mode setting differs RUN:
• Match the module configurations of the control
between the two systems. Off
system and standby system.
(This can be detected from the control system or ERR.:
6030 • In the redundant setting of the network parame-
standby system of the redundant system.) Flicker
ter dialog box, match the mode setting of System
■Collateral information
B to that of System A.
• Common Information:Module No. CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)
12.3 Error Code List
connection/At operation mode change
[UNIT LAY. DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the CPU module model
name differs between the control system and
standby system.
(This can be detected from the standby system of
the redundant system.) Match the model names of the control system and
6035
■Collateral information standby system.
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable
connection/At operation mode change
12 - 130
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[UNIT LAY. DIFF.]
A difference in the remote I/O configuration of the
MELSECNET/H multiplexed remote I/O network
between the control system and standby system of
a redundant system was detected.
(This can be detected from the control system or Check the network cables of the MELSECNET/H
6036
standby system of the redundant system.) multiplexed remote I/O network for disconnection.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No.
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
RUN:
[CARD TYPE DIFF.] Off
In a redundant system, the memory card installa-
ERR.:
tion status (installed/not installed) differs between
Flicker
the control system and standby system.
Match the memory card installation statuses (set/
6040 ■Collateral information
not set) of the control system and standby system. CPU Status:
• Common Information:–
Stop
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[CARD TYPE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the memory card type dif-
fers between the control system and standby sys-
tem.
Match the memory card types of the control system
6041 ■Collateral information
and standby system.
• Common Information:– QnPRH
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[CAN'T EXE. MODE]
The function inexecutable in the debug mode or
operation mode (backup/separate mode) was exe- RUN:
cuted. On
(This can be detected from the control system or ERR.:
Execute the function executable in the debug mode
6050 standby system of the redundant system.) On
or operation mode (backup/separate mode).
■Collateral information
• Common Information:– CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Continue
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[CPU MODE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the operation mode
(backup/separate) differs between the control sys-
RUN:
tem and standby system.
Off
(This can be detected from the standby system of
ERR.:
the redundant system.) Match the operation modes of the control system
6060 Flicker
■Collateral information and standby system.
• Common Information:–
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable connec-
tion
12 - 131
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[CPU MODE DIFF.]
In a redundant system, the operation mode
(backup/separate) differs between the control sys-
tem and standby system.
(This can be detected from the standby system of
Match the operation modes of the control system
6061 the redundant system.)
and standby system.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
RUN:
• Individual Information:–
Off
■Diagnostic Timing
ERR.:
• When an END instruction executed
Flicker
[CPU MODE DIFF.]
Both System A and B are in the same system sta- 12
CPU Status:
tus (control system).
Stop
(This can be detected from the system B of the
redundant system.)
Power the CPU module (System B) which resulted
6062 ■Collateral information
in a stop error, OFF and then ON.
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset/At tracking cable
connection
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) occurred in
tracking data transmission.
(This error may be caused by tracking cable
QnPRH
removal or other system power-off (including
reset).)
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun-
6100
dant system startup procedure was not followed.
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Tracking transmission data
classification
• Individual Information:–
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If the RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)
12.3 Error Code List
error still occurs, this indicates the CPU module On
• Always
or tracking cable is faulty. (Contact your local Mit- ERR.:
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
subishi representative, explaining a detailed On
• A timeout error occurred in tracking (data trans-
description of the problem.)
mission).
• Confirm the redundant system startup procedure, CPU Status:
(This error may be caused by tracking cable
and execute a startup again. Continue
removal or other system power-off (including
reset).)
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun-
dant system startup procedure was not followed.
6101
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Tracking transmission data
classification
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
12 - 132
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
A data sum value error occurred in tracking (data
reception).
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
6102
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• A data error (other than sum value error)
occurred in tracking (data reception).
(This error may be caused by tracking cable
removal or other system power-off (including
reset).)
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun-
6103 dant system startup procedure was not followed. • Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If the
(This can be detected from the control system or error still occurs, this indicates the CPU module
standby system of the redundant system.) or tracking cable is faulty. (Contact your local Mit-
■Collateral information subishi representative, explaining a detailed
• Common Information:– description of the problem.)
• Individual Information:– • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
■Diagnostic Timing and execute a startup again.
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.] RUN:
• An error (e.g. retry limit exceeded) occurred in On
tracking (data transmission). ERR.:
(This error may be caused by tracking cable On QnPRH
removal or other system power-off (including
reset).) CPU Status:
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun- Continue
dant system startup procedure was not followed.
6105
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Tracking transmission data
classification
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
• A timeout error occurred in tracking (data trans-
mission).
(This error may be caused by tracking cable
removal or other system power-off (including
• Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If the
reset).)
error still occurs, this indicates the CPU module
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun-
or tracking cable is faulty. (Contact your local Mit-
dant system startup procedure was not followed.
6106 subishi representative, explaining a detailed
(This can be detected from the control system or
description of the problem.)
standby system of the redundant system.)
• Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
■Collateral information
and execute a startup again.
• Common Information:Tracking transmission data
classification
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
12 - 133
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.]
A data sum value error occurred in tracking (data
reception).
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
6107
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always • Check the CPU module or tracking cable. If the
[TRK. TRANS. ERR.] error still occurs, this indicates the CPU module
• A data error (other than sum value error)
occurred in tracking (data reception).
or tracking cable is faulty. (Contact your local Mit-
subishi representative, explaining a detailed 12
(This error may be caused by tracking cable description of the problem.)
removal or other system power-off (including • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
reset).) and execute a startup again.
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun-
6108 dant system startup procedure was not followed.
(This can be detected from the control system or
standby system of the redundant system.)
■Collateral information
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[TRK. SIZE ERROR] RUN:
The tracking capacity exceeded the allowed range. On
(This can be detected from the control system or ERR.:
standby system of the redundant system.) On QnPRH
■Collateral information
6110 Reexamine the tracking capacity.
• Common Information:Tracking capacity excess CPU Status:
error factor Continue
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)
12.3 Error Code List
[TRK. SIZE ERROR]
The control system does not have enough file reg-
ister capacity for the file registers specified in the
tracking settings.
(This can be detected from the control system or Switch to the file registers of which capacity is
6111 standby system of the redundant system.) greater than the file registers specified in the track-
■Collateral information ing settings.
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
[TRK. SIZE ERROR]
File registers greater than those of the standby sys-
tem were tracked and transmitted from the control
system.
(This can be detected from the standby system of Switch to the file registers of which capacity is
6112 the redundant system.) greater than the file registers specified in the track-
■Collateral information ing settings.
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• When an END instruction executed
12 - 134
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[TRK. CABLE ERR.]
• A start was made without the tracking cable
being connected.
• A start was made with the tracking cable faulty.
RUN:
• As the tracking hardware on the CPU module Make a start after connecting the tracking cable. If
Off
side was faulty, communication with the other the same error still occurs, this indicates the track-
ERR.:
system could not be made via the tracking cable. ing cable or CPU module side tracking transmis-
6120 Flicker
(This can be detected from the control system or sion hardware is faulty.
standby system of the redundant system.) (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
CPU Status:
■Collateral information explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
Stop
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[TRK. DISCONNECT]
• The tracking cable was removed.
• If the tracking cable was removed, connect the
• The tracking cable became faulty while the CPU
tracking cable to the connectors of the CPU mod-
module is running. RUN:
ules of the two systems.
• The CPU module side tracking hardware On
• When the error is not resolved after connecting
became faulty. ERR.:
the tracking cable to the connectors of the CPU
6130 (This can be detected from the control system or On
modules of the two systems and resetting the
standby system of the redundant system.)
error, the tracking cable or CPU module side
■Collateral information CPU Status:
tracking hardware is faulty.
• Common Information:– Continue
(Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
• Individual Information:–
explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[TRK.INIT. ERROR]
• The other system did not respond during initial QnPRH
communication at power ON/reset. • Power the corresponding CPU module OFF and
RUN:
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun- then ON again, or reset it and then unreset. If the
Off
dant system startup procedure was not followed. same error still occurs, this indicates the CPU
ERR.:
(This can be detected from the control system or module is faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
6140 Flicker
standby system of the redundant system.) representative, explaining a detailed description
■Collateral information of the problem.)
CPU Status:
• Common Information:– • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
Stop
• Individual Information:– and execute a startup again.
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[CONTROL EXE.]
The standby system has been switched to the con-
trol system in a redundant system. (Detected by the
CPU that was switched from the standby system to
the control system)
Since this error code does not indicate the error
RUN:
information of the CPU module but indicates its sta-
On
tus, the error code and error information are not
ERR.:
stored into SD0 to 26, but are stored into the error
6200 – Off
log every system switching.
(Check the error information by reading the error
CPU Status:
log using GX Developer.)
No error
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Reason(s) for system
switching
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
12 - 135
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[STANDBY]
The control system has been switched to the
standby system in a redundant system. (Detected
by the CPU that was switched from the control sys-
tem to the standby system)
Since this error code does not indicate the error
RUN:
information of the CPU module but indicates its sta-
On
tus, the error code and error information are not
ERR.:
stored into SD0 to 26, but are stored into the error
6210 – Off
log every system switching.
(Check the error information by reading the error
CPU Status:
log using GX Developer.)
■Collateral information
No error 12
• Common Information:Reason(s) for system
switching
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[CAN'T SWITCH]
System switching cannot be executed due to
standby system error/ tracking cable error/ online
module change in execution at separate mode.
RUN:
Causes for switching system at control system are
On
as follows:
• Check the status of the standby system and ERR.: QnPRH
• System switching by SP. CONTSW instruction
6220 resolve the error. On
• System switching request from network module
• Complete the online module change.
■Collateral information
CPU Status:
• Common Information:Reason(s) for system switching
No error
• Individual Information:Reason(s) for system switching
failure
■Diagnostic Timing
• At switching execution
[STANDBY SYS. DOWN]
Any of the following errors was detected in the
backup mode. • Check whether the standby system is on or not,
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)
12.3 Error Code List
• The standby system has not started up in the and if it is not on, power it on.
redundant system. • Check whether the standby system has been
RUN:
• The standby system has developed a stop error reset or not, and if it has been reset, unreset it.
On
in the redundant system. • Check whether the standby system has devel-
ERR.:
• The CPU module in the debug mode was con- oped a stop error or not, and if it has developed
6300 On
nected to the operating control system. the error, remove the error factor and restart it.
(This can be detected from the control system of • When the CPU module in the debug mode was
CPU Status:
the redundant system.) connected to the control system operating in the
Continue
■Collateral information backup mode, make connection so that the con-
• Common Information:– trol system and standby system are combined
• Individual Information:– correctly.
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
12 - 136
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
• The standby system exists but the control system
[CONTROL SYS. DOWN] does not exist.
Any of the following errors was detected in the • Check whether the system other than the
backup mode. standby system is on or not, and if it is not on,
• The control system has not started up in the power it on.
redundant system. • Check whether the system other than the
• The control system has developed a stop error in standby system has been reset or not, and if it is
RUN:
the redundant system. has been reset, unreset it.
Off
• The CPU module in the debug mode was con- • Check whether the system other than the
ERR.:
nected to the operating standby system. standby system has developed a stop error or
6310 Flicker
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun- not, and if has developed the error, remove the
dant system startup procedure was not followed. error factor, set the control system and standby
CPU Status:
(This can be detected from the standby system of system to the same operating status, and restart.
Stop
the redundant system.) • When the CPU module in the debug mode was
■Collateral information connected to the control system operating in the
• Common Information:– backup mode, make connection so that the con-
• Individual Information:– trol system and control system are combined cor-
QnPRH
■Diagnostic Timing rectly.
• Always • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
and execute a startup again.
6311 [CONTROL SYS. DOWN]
• As consistency check data has not transmitted
from the control system in a redundant system,
the other system cannot start as a standby sys-
RUN:
tem. • Replace the tracking cable. If the same error still
Off
• The error occurred at a startup since the redun- occurs, this indicates the CPU module is faulty.
ERR.:
dant system startup procedure was not followed. (Contact your local Mitsubishi representative,
Flicker
6312 (This can be detected from the standby system of explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
the redundant system.) • Confirm the redundant system startup procedure,
CPU Status:
■Collateral information and execute a startup again.
Stop
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[CONTROL SYS. DOWN]
The control system detected the error of the system RUN:
configuration and informed it to the standby system Off
Restart the system after checking that the connec-
(host system) in the redundant system. ERR.:
tion between base unit and the system configura-
6313 ■Collateral information Flicker QnPRH*1
tion (type/number/parameter of module) are
• Common Information:–
correct.
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
• At power ON/At reset
[PRG. MEM. CLEAR]
The memory copy from control system to standby
RUN:
system was executed, and the program memory
Off
was cleared.
After the memory copy from control system to ERR.:
■Collateral information
6400 standby system is completed, switch power OFF Flicker QnPRH
• Common Information:–
and then ON, or make a reset.
• Individual Information:–
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing
Stop
• At execution of the memory copy from control
system to standby system
12 - 137
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MEM.COPY EXE]
The memory copy from control system to standby
system was executed. RUN:
(This can be detected from the control system of On
the redundant system.) ERR.:
6410 ■Collateral information – On
• Common Information:–
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Continue
• At execution of the function of copying memory
from control system to standby system
[TRK. PARA. ERROR]
The file register file specified in the tracking setting 12
of the PLC parameter dialog box does not exist.
Read the individual information of the error using
■Collateral information QnPRH
6500 GX Developer, and check and correct the drive
• Common Information:File name/Drive name
name and file name. Create the specified file.
• Individual Information:Parameter number
RUN:
■Diagnostic Timing
Off
• At power ON/At reset
ERR.:
[TRK. PARA. ERROR]
Flicker
The file register range specified in the device detail
setting of the tracking setting of the PLC parameter
CPU Status:
dialog box exceeded the specified file register file
Read the individual information of the error using Stop
capacity.
6501 GX Developer, and increase the file register capac-
■Collateral information
ity.
• Common Information:File name/Drive name
• Individual Information:Parameter number
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
12.3.8 Error code list (6000 to 6999)
12.3 Error Code List
12 - 138
12.3.9 Error code list (7000 to 10000)
The following shows the error messages from the error code 7000 to 10000, the contents and
causes of the errors, and the corrective actions for the errors.
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
• In the operating mode of a multiple CPU system,
a CPU error occurred at the CPU where "All sta-
tion stop by stop error of CPU " was selected. • Read the individual information of the error using
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom- GX Developer, identify the error of the CPU mod-
patible with the multiple CPU system was Q00/Q01*1
ule, and remove the error.
mounted.
• CPU modules other than CPU No.1 were
• Remove the CPU module incompatible with the Qn(H)*1
removed from the base unit in operation, or multiple CPU system from the main base unit. QnPH
reset. • Check the mounting status of CPU modules QnU*6
■Collateral information other than CPU No.1 and whether the CPU mod-
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) ules were reset.
• Individual Information:–
7000
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
In a multiple CPU system, CPU other than CPU
No.1 cannot be started up due to stop error of the
CPU No.1 at power-on, which occurs to CPU No.2 Q00/Q01*1
Read the individual information of the error using
to No.4. Qn(H)*1
GX Developer, identify the error of the CPU mod-
■Collateral information QnPH
ule, and remove the error.
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) QnU*6
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset RUN:
[MULTI CPU DOWN] Off
• There is no response from the target CPU mod- • Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the ERR.:
ule in a multiple CPU system during initial com- same error is displayed again, this suggests the Flicker
munication.
hardware fault of any of the CPU modules. (Con-
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom-
tact your local Mitsubishi representative.) CPU Status: Q00/Q01*1
patible with the multiple CPU system was
• Remove the CPU module incompatible with the Stop Qn(H)*1
mounted.
■Collateral information multiple CPU system from the main base unit. QnPH
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) Or, replace the CPU module incompatible with
• Individual Information:– the multiple CPU system with the compatible
■Diagnostic Timing one.
7002
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
• There is no response from the target CPU mod-
ule in a multiple CPU system during initial com-
• Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
munication.
same error is displayed again, this suggests the
■Collateral information QnU*6
hardware fault of any of the CPU modules. (Con-
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
tact your local Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI CPU DOWN]
There is no response from the target CPU module
in a multiple CPU system at initial communication
Reset the CPU module and RUN it again. If the
stage. Q00/Q01*1
same error is displayed again, this suggests the
7003 ■Collateral information Qn(H)*1
hardware fault of any of the CPU modules. (Contact
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) QnPH
your local Mitsubishi representative.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
*1 The function version is B or later.
*6 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 139
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MULTI CPU DOWN] • Check the system configuration to see if modules
RUN:
In a multiple CPU system, a data error occurred in are mounted in excess of the number of I/O
Off
communication between the CPU modules. points.
ERR.:
■Collateral information • When there are no problems in the system con- Q00/Q01*1
7004 Flicker
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) figuration, this indicates the CPU module hard- QnU*6
• Individual Information:– ware is faulty. (Contact your local Mitsubishi
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing representative, explaining a detailed description
Stop
• Always of the problem.)
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
• In a multiple CPU system, a faulty CPU module
was mounted.
• In a multiple CPU system, a CPU module incom-
patible with the multiple CPU system was • Read the individual information of the error using
12
mounted. (The CPU module compatible with the RUN:
GX Developer, and replace the faulty CPU mod-
multiple CPU system was used to detect an Off
ule. Q00/Q01*1
error.) ERR.:
• In a multiple CPU system, any of the CPU No. 2
• Replace the CPU module with the one compati- Qn(H)*1
Flicker
to 4 was reset with power ON. (The CPU whose ble with the multiple CPU system. QnPH
reset state was cancelled was used to detect an • Do not reset any of the No. 2 to 4 CPU modules. QnU*6
CPU Status:
error.) • Reset CPU No. 1 and restart the multiple CPU
Stop
■Collateral information system.
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The PC CPU module-compatible software package RUN:
(PPC-DRV-01)*5 whose version is 1.06 or earlier is Off
used in a multiple CPU system. Change the version of the PC CPU module-com- ERR.:
■Collateral information patible software package (PPC-DRV-01)*5 to 1.07 Flicker Q00/Q01*1
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) or later.
7010
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
12.3.9 Error code list (7000 to 10000)
12.3 Error Code List
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Q173(H)CPU(N) is
RUN:
mounted on the multiple CPU high-speed main
Off
base unit (Q3 DB). (This may result in a module
Replace the Q172(H)CPU(N) and Q173(H)CPU(N) ERR.:
failure.) with the Motion CPU compatible with the multiple Flicker
■Collateral information CPU high-speed main base unit.
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
CPU Status:
• Individual Information:–
Stop
■Diagnostic Timing Qn(H)*4
• At power ON/At reset
QnPH*4
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The Universal model QCPU (except Q02UCPU) RUN:
and Q172(H)CPU(N) are mounted on the same Off
base unit. (This may result in a module failure.) Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that can be ERR.:
■Collateral information used in a multiple CPU system, and change the Flicker
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) system configuration.
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
• At power ON/At reset
*1 The function version is B or later.
*4 The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09082" or later.
*6 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 140
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
Either of the following settings was made in a multi-
ple CPU system.
RUN:
• Multiple CPU automatic refresh setting was
Off
made for the inapplicable CPU module. • Correct the multiple CPU automatic refresh set-
ERR.:
• "I/O sharing when using multiple CPUs" setting ting. Q00/Q01*1
Flicker
was made for the inapplicable CPU module. • Correct the "I/O sharing when using multiple QnU*6
■Collateral information CPUs" setting.
CPU Status:
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
Stop
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The system configuration for using the Multiple
7011 CPU high speed transmission function is not met.
• The QnUCPU is not used for the CPU No.1.
• The Multiple CPU high speed main base unit
(Q3 DB) is not used. • Change the system configuration to meet the RUN:
• Points other than 0 is set to the send range for conditions for using the Multiple CPU high speed Off
the CPU module incompatible with the multiple transmission function. ERR.:
CPU high speed transmission function. • Set the send range of CPU, that does not corre- Flicker QnU*3
• Points other than 0 is set to the send range for spond to multiple CPU compatible area, at 0
the CPU module incompatible with the multiple point, when performing automatic refreshing in CPU Status:
CPU. multiple CPU compatible area. Stop
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
• Individual Information:–
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI EXE. ERROR]
The Q172(H)CPU(N) or Q173(H)CPU(N) is RUN:
mounted to the CPU slot or slots 0 to 2. (The mod- • Check the QCPU and Motion CPU that can be Off
ule may break down.) used in a multiple CPU system, and change the ERR.:
7013 ■Collateral information system configuration. Flicker QnU
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) • Remove the Motion CPU incompatible with the
• Individual Information:– multiple CPU system. CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
• At power ON/At reset
[MULTI CPU ERROR]
In the operating mode of a multiple CPU system, an
error occurred in the CPU where "system stop" was RUN:
not selected. On
Read the individual information of the error using Q00/Q01*1
(The CPU module where no error occurred was ERR.:
the peripheral device, check the error of the CPU Qn(H)*1
7020 used to detect an error.) On
module resulting in CPU module fault, and remove QnPH
■Collateral information
the error. QnU*6
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) CPU Status:
• Individual Information:– Continue
■Diagnostic Timing
• Always
[CPU LAY. ERROR]
An assignment error occurred in the CPU-mount- • Set the same value to the number of CPU mod- RUN:
able slot (CPU slot, I/O slot 0, 1) in excess of the ules specified in the multiple CPU setting of the Off
number of CPU modules specified in the multiple PLC parameter dialog box and the number of ERR.:
CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box. Q00J/Q01/Q01*1
7030 mounted CPU modules (including CPU (empty)). Flicker
■Collateral information QnU
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) • Make the type specified in the I/O assignment
• Individual Information:– setting of the PLC parameter dialog box consis- CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing tent with the CPU module configuration. Stop
• At power ON/At reset
*1 The function version is B or later.
*3 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*6 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 141
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
[CPU LAY. ERROR] • Set the same value to the number of CPU mod-
RUN:
An assignment error occurred within the range of ules specified in the multiple CPU setting of the
Off
the number of CPUs specified in the multiple CPU PLC parameter dialog box and the number of
setting of the PLC parameter dialog box. ERR.:
mounted CPU modules (including CPU (empty)). Q00J/Q01/Q01*1
7031 ■Collateral information Flicker
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) • Make the type specified in the I/O assignment QnU
• Individual Information:– setting of the PLC parameter dialog box consis-
CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing tent with the CPU module configuration.
• At power ON/At reset Stop
[CPU LAY. ERROR] RUN:
• The number of CPU modules mounted in a multi- Off
ple CPU system is wrong. Configure a system so that the number of mount-
ERR.:
Q00/Q01*1
7032
■Collateral information
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
able modules of each CPU module does not
exceed the maximum number of mountable mod-
Flicker
QnU*6
12
• Individual Information:– ules specified in the specification.
■Diagnostic Timing CPU Status:
• At power ON/At reset Stop
[CPU LAY. ERROR] RUN:
The CPU module has been mounted on the inappli- Off
cable slot. ERR.: Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
■Collateral information
7035 Mount the CPU module on the applicable slot. Flicker QnPRH
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.)
• Individual Information:– QnU
■Diagnostic Timing CPU Status:
• At power ON/At reset Stop
[CPU RAY ERROR] RUN:
The host CPU No. set by the multiple CPU setting
• Mount the mounting slot of the CPU module cor- Off
and the host CPU No. determined by the mounting
position of the CPU module are not the same. rectly. ERR.:
7036 ■Collateral information • Correct the host CPU No. set by the multiple Flicker QnU*3
• Common Information:Module No.(CPU No.) CPU setting to the CPU No. determined by the
• Individual Information:–
mounting position of the CPU module. CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing
• At power ON/At reset Stop
[INCORRECT FILE] Write the file shown as SD17 to SD22 of individual
The error of stored file (enabled parameter file) is
information to the drive shown as SD16(L) of indi- RUN:
detected.
■Collateral information vidual information, and turn ON from OFF the Off
• Common Information:– power supply of the CPU module or cancel the ERR.:
12.3.9 Error code list (7000 to 10000)
12.3 Error Code List
8031 • Individual Information:File diagnostic information reset. Flicker QnU
■Diagnostic Timing If the same error is displayed again, the CPU mod-
• At power-On/
• At reset/ ule has hardware failure. Contact your local Mitsub- CPU Status:
• STOP RUN/At writing to progurammable ishi representative, explaining a detailed Stop
controller description of the problem.
RUN:
On
ERR.:
[F**** ] On/Off *2
Annunciator (F) was set ON
Read the individual information of the error using
■Collateral information CPU Status:
the peripheral device, and check the program cor-
9000 • Common Information:Program error location Continue QCPU
responding to the numerical value (annunciator
• Individual Information:Annunciator number RUN:
number).
■Diagnostic Timing ERR.:
• When instruction executed USER LED On
CPU Status:
Continue
*1 The function version is B or later.
*3 The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 142
Error
LED Status Corresponding
Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action
CPU Status CPU
(SD0)
RUN:
[<CHK>ERR ***-***]
On
Error detected by the CHK instruction.
Read the individual information of the error using ERR.:
■Collateral information Qn(H)
the peripheral device, and check the program cor- Off
9010 • Common Information:Program error location QnPH
responding to the numerical value (error number) USER LED On
• Individual Information:Failure No. QnPRH
there.
■Diagnostic Timing
CPU Status:
• When instruction executed
Continue
[BOOT OK]
Storage of data onto ROM was completed normally RUN:
in automatic write to standard ROM. Off
Use the DIP switches to set the valid parameter
(BOOT LED also flickers.) ERR.: Qn(H)*1
drive to the standard ROM. Then, switch power on
9020 ■Collateral information Flicker QnPH
again, and perform boot operation from the stan-
• Common Information:– QnPRH
dard ROM.
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Stop
• At power ON/At reset
[CONT. UNIT ERROR]
In the multiple CPU system, an error occurred in RUN:
the CPU module other than the Process CPU/High Off
Performance model QCPU. Check the details of the generated error by con- ERR.:
Qn(H)*1
10000 ■Collateral information necting to the corresponding CPU module using Flicker
QnPH
• Common Information:– GX Developer.
• Individual Information:– CPU Status:
■Diagnostic Timing Continue
• Always
*1 The function version is B or later.
12 - 143
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3.10 Canceling of Errors
Q series CPU module can perform the cancel operation for errors only when the errors allow
the CPU module to continue its operation.
To cancel the errors, follow the steps shown below.
1) Eliminate the cause of the error.
2) Store the error code to be canceled in the special register SD50.
3) Energize the special relay SM50 (OFF ON).
4) The error to be canceled is canceled.
12
After the CPU module is reset by the canceling of the error, the special relays, special
registers, and LEDs associated with the error are returned to the status under which the
error occurred.
If the same error occurs again after the cancellation of the error, it will be registered again in
the error history.
When multiple enunciators(F) detected are canceled, the first one with No. F only is
canceled.
Refer to the following manual for details of error canceling.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program
Fundamentals)
(1) When the error is canceled with the error code to be canceled stored in the SD50, the lower one digit of the code is
neglected.
(Example)
12.3.10 Canceling of Errors
12.3 Error Code List
If error codes 2100 and 2101 occur, and error code 2100 to cancel error code 2101.
If error codes 2100 and 2111 occur, error code 2111 is not canceled even if error code 2100 is canceled.
(2) Errors developed due to trouble in other than the CPU module are not canceled even if the special relay (SM50) and
special register (SD50) are used to cancel the error.
(Example)
Since "SP. UNIT DOWN" is the error that occurred in the base unit (including the extension cable), intelligent function
module, etc. the error cause cannot be removed even if the error is canceled by the special relay (SM50) and special
register (SD50).
Refer to the error code list and remove the error cause.
12 - 144
Memo
12 - 145
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU
module
The Q series CPU module returns an error code to the request source if an error occurs at a
request of communication from GX Developer, intelligent function module or network system.
This error code is not an error that is detected by the CPU module self-diagnosis function, so it is not stored in the special
relay (SD0).
When the request source is a GX Developer, a message or an error code is displayed.
When the request source is an intelligent function module or network system, an error is returned to the process that was
requested.
12
The error contents of the error codes (4000H to 4FFFH) detected by the CPU module and the
messages displayed by the GX Developer are shown in .
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Connect the serial communication cable correctly.
4000H Serial communication sum check error
• Take noise reduction measures.
• Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
4001H Unsupported request was executed. • Check the CPU module model name selected in the
peripheral device.
• Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
4002H Unsupported request was executed. • Check the CPU module model name selected in the
peripheral device.
Command for which a global request cannot be
4003H Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
performed was executed.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
Any operation for the CPU module is prohibited
• Set the system protect switch of the CPU module to
Common error by the system protect function provided against
OFF.
4004H the following events.
• Perform operation again after the CPU module has
• The system protect switch is ON.
completed starting.
• The CPU module is starting.
The volume of data handled according to the
4005H Check the command data of the MC protocol, etc.
specified request is too large.
• Check with the external device maker for the support
condition.
4006H Serial communication could not be initialized.
• Check the CPU module model name selected in the
peripheral device.
The CPU module is BUSY.
4008H After the free time has passed, reexecute the request.
(The buffer is not vacant).
Since the CPU module is running, the request
4010H Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status.
CPU mode contents cannot be executed.
error Since the CPU module is not in a STOP status,
4013H Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status.
the request contents cannot be executed.
12 - 146
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Check the specified drive memory status.
The specified drive memory does not exist or
4021H • After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute
there is an error.
programmable controller memory format.
The file with the specified file name or file No.
4022H Check the specified file name and file No.
does not exist.
The file name and file No. of the specified file do
4023H Delete the file and then recreate the file.
not match.
4024H The specified file cannot be handled by a user. Do not access the specified file.
Forcibly execute the request, or make the request again after
The specified file is processing the request from
4025H the processing from the other peripheral device is com-
the other peripheral device.
pleted.
The file password or drive keyword set to the tar- Make access after specifying the file password or drive key-
4026H
get drive (memory) must be specified. word set to the target drive (memory).
CPU file related
4027H The specified range exceeds the file range. Check the specified range and access within that range.
error
Forcefully execute the request forcibly.
4028H The same file already exists.
Or reexecute after changing the file name.
Revise the specified file contents.
4029H The specified file capacity cannot be obtained. Or reexecute after cleaning up and reorganizing the speci-
fied drive memory.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
402AH The specified file is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
Execute again after setting the CPU module to the STOP
The request contents cannot be executed in the status.
402BH
specified drive memory. Execute programmable controller memory arrangement to
increase the continuous free space of the drive (memory).
The requested operation cannot be executed cur-
402CH Execute again after a while.
rently.
4030H The specified device name cannot be handled. Check the specified device name.
• Check the specified device No.
4031H The specified device No. is outside the range. • Check the device assignment parameters of the CPU
module.
There is a mistake in the specified device qualifi-
cation.
The unusable device name • Check the specified device qualification method.
4032H
CPU device (TS,TC,SS,SC,CS,CC) must be specified in MC • Check the specified device name.
specified error protocol random reading, random writing (word),
monitor registeration and monitor command.
Writing cannot be done because the specified Do not write the data in the specified device, and do not turn
4033H
device is for system use. on or off.
Since the completion device for the target station CPU mod-
Cannot be executed since the completion device
ule cannot be turned ON by the SREAD instruction/SWRITE
4034H for the dedicated instruction cannot be turned
instruction, execute again after setting the operating status of
ON.
the target station CPU module to the RUN status.
12 - 147
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
The request contents cannot be executed in the Check whether the specified module is the intelligent func-
4040H
specified intelligent function module. tion module having the buffer memory.
Check the header address and access number of points and
The access range exceeds the buffer memory
4041H access using a range that exists in the intelligent function
range of the specified intelligent function module.
Intelligent func- module.
tion module • Check that the specified intelligent function module is
The specified intelligent function module cannot
4042H specification operating normally.
be accessed.
error
The intelligent function module does not exist in
• Check the specified module for a hardware fault.
12
4043H Check the I/O No. of the specified intelligent function module.
the specified position.
A control bus error occurred during access to the Check the specified intelligent function module and other
4044H
intelligent function module. modules and base units for a hardware fault.
The request contents cannot be executed
4050H because the memory card write protect switch is Turn off the memory card write protect switch.
on.
Check the following and make it countermeasures.
The specified device memory cannot be
4051H • Is the memory one that can be used?
accessed.
• Is the specified drive memory correctly installed?
Protect error The specified file attribute is read only so the data Do not write data in the specified file.
4052H
cannot be written. Or change the file attribute.
Check the specified drive memory.
An error occurred when writing data to the speci-
4053H Or reexecute write after changing the corresponding drive
fied drive memory.
memory.
An error occurred when deleting the data in the Check the specified drive memory.
4054H
specified drive memory. Or re-erase after replacing the corresponding drive memory.
• Execute the function again after the operation of the
other peripheral device has ended.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
The online debug function is being executed by • When the operation was suspended by the other
4060H
the other peripheral device. peripheral device, execute the function again after
executing it on the other peripheral device to normally
complete the operation.
• Execute communication after the registering the online
debug function (e.g.online program change/trace/con-
Online registra- Communication of the online debug function was
4061H ditional monitor).
tion error unsuccessful.
• Execute again after checking the communication route
such as the communication cable.
The registered number of locked files exceeded Execute again after file access by the other peripheral device
4063H
the maximum value. has ended.
• Check the set data of the online debug function (e.g.
The specified data of the online debug function is online program change/trace/conditional monitor).
4064H
incorrect. • Execute again after checking the communication route
such as the communication cable.
12 - 148
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
The device allocation information differs from the Check the device assignment parameters of the CPU mod-
4065H
parameter. ule or the device assignment of the request data.
The specified drive keyword/file password is • Correct the drive keyword of the specified drive.
4066H
wrong. • Correct the file password of the specified file.
• Check the system area capacity of the user setting
Online registra- specified for programmable controller memory format.
4067H Monitor communication was unsuccessful.
tion error • Execute again after checking the communication route
such as the communication cable.
Operation is disabled since the same operation is Execute the function again after the operation from the other
4068H
being executed from the other peripheral device. peripheral device has been ended.
The drive (memory) number that cannot be han-
406AH Check the specified drive and specify the correct drive.
dled (other than 0 to 4) was specified.
Execute Read from PLC to make the program of the periph-
Circuit inquiry The program not yet corrected and the one cor-
4070H eral device the same as that of the CPU module, and then
error rected by online program change are different.
execute online program change again.
4080H Request data error Check the request data specified in the MC protocol, etc.
4081H The sort subject cannot be detected. Check the data to be searched.
The specified command is executing and there- Execute the command again after the request from the other
4082H
fore cannot be executed. peripheral device is completed.
An attempt was made to perform operation for the
4083H Register the program to the parameters.
program not registered to the parameters.
4084H The specified pointer P, I did not exist. Check the pointer P, I in the specified data.
Pointer P, I cannot be specified because the pro- Specify pointer P, I after registering the program to be exe-
4085H
gram is not specified in the parameter. cuted in the parameter.
Other errors
4086H Pointer P, I has already been added. Check the pointer No. to be added and make correction.
4087H Trying to specify too many pointer P, I. Check the specified pointer P, I and make a correction.
• The specified step No. is not the start of the • Check and correct the specified step No.
instruction. • Read from PLC to make the program of the peripheral
4088H
• Program stored in the CPU is different from device the same as that of the CPU module, and write
the relevant program. to PLC during RUN again.
• Check the specified program file contents.
An attempt was made to insert/delete the END
4089H • Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
instruction by online program change.
STOP status.
12 - 149
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Check the capacity of the specified program file.
The file capacity was exceeded by the write dur-
408AH • Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
ing Run.
STOP status.
• Reexecute after the CPU module is in a status where
the mode request can be executed.
408BH The remote request cannot be executed.
• For remote operation, set the parameter to "Enable
remote reset".
408CH
An attempt was made to remote-start the pro-
gram, which uses the CHK instruction, as a low
• The program including the CHK instruction cannot be
executed at low speed. Execute again after checking
12
speed program. the program.
• Check whether the model of the used CPU module is
correct or not.
Other errors
• The sequence program where online program change
The instruction code that cannot be handled
408DH was attempted includes the instruction that cannot be
exists.
handled by the CPU module model name set in the
project. Reexamine the sequence program and delete
that instruction.
• Write the program after setting the CPU module to the
STOP status.
• The starting position of online program change is not
408EH The write step is illegal. specified with the correct program step No. Check
whether the used peripheral device supports the CPU
module model name and CPU module version set in
the project.
40A0H A block No. outside the range was specified. Check the setting contents and make a correction.
A number of blocks that exceeds the range was
40A1H Check the number of settings and make a correction.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
specified.
A step No. that is outside the range was speci-
40A2H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
SFC device fied.
40A3H specification Step range limit exceeded Check the number of settings and make a correction.
error The specified sequence step No. is outside the
40A4H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
range.
40A5H The specified device is outside the range. Check the number of settings and make a correction.
The block specification pattern and step specifi-
40A6H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
cation pattern were wrong.
The drive (memory) specified in SFC file opera-
40B0H Check the setting contents and make a correction.
tion is wrong.
The SFC program specified in SFC file operation
40B1H Check the specified file name and make a correction.
does not exist.
The program specified in SFC file operation is not
40B2H Check the specified file name and make a correction.
an SFC program.
SFC file related
Using online program change of SFC, an attempt
error
was made to execute rewrite operation of the
"SFC dedicated instruction", such as the "STEP
Write the program after setting the CPU module to the STOP
40B3H start instruction or transition start instruction", that
status.
shows an SFC chart.
(SFC dedicated instruction cannot be written dur-
ing RUN.)
12 - 150
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
4100H CPU module hardware fault Change the CPU module.
Serial communication connection was executed
4101H Check the CPU module series.
for a different CPU module series.
An attempt was made to erase the Flash ROM Execute again after setting the CPU module to the STOP
4102H
during use of the file register. status.
The instruction written during RUN is wrong or Execute online program change again, or write the program
4103H
illegal. after setting the CPU module to the STOP status.
4105H CPU module internal memory hardware fault Change the CPU module.
The command cannot be executed since the CPU
Execute the operation again after the CPU module has
4106H module is performing system initialization pro-
started.
cessing.
Other errors An attempt was made to perform the operation of
Do not execute the function unsupported by the target CPU
4107H the function unavailable for the target CPU mod-
module.
ule model name.
Operation cannot be made normally by device Execute device monitor/test again. Before execution, check
4108H
monitor/test. that access is not made to the access prohibited area.
The specified operation cannot be executed since
Execute the request again after deregistering the monitoring
4109H the monitoring, set the condition for other appli-
condition on the same screen.
cation in same computer, is in execution.
The specified command cannot be executed
410AH Execute the request again after the online program change.
because of online prgram change.
The registration of monitoring condition was can- Execute the registration of monitoring condition again after
410BH
celed because of online program change. the online program change.
Since the CPU module is in a stop error status, it
4110H Execute the request again after resetting the CPU module.
cannot execute the request.
CPU mode
The requested operation cannot be performed
error Execute the request again after the other CPU modules have
4111H since the other CPU modules have not yet started
started.
in the multiple CPU system.
12 - 151
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
The specified drive (memory) or file does not Execute again after checking the specified drive (memory) or
4121H
exist. file.
The specified drive (memory) or file does not Execute again after checking the specified drive (memory) or
4122H
exist. file.
Execute programmable controller memory format to make
the drive (memory) normal.
4123H The specified drive (memory) is abnormal.
In the case of the Flash ROM, check the data to be written to
the Flash ROM, and write them to the Flash ROM.
Execute programmable controller memory format to make
the drive (memory) normal.
4124H The specified drive (memory) is abnormal.
In the case of the Flash ROM, check the data to be written to 12
the Flash ROM, and write them to the Flash ROM.
The specified drive (memory) or file is performing
4125H Execute again after a while.
processing.
The specified drive (memory) or file is performing
4126H Execute again after a while.
processing.
4127H File password mismatch Execute again after checking the file password.
4128H File password mismatch with copy destination Execute again after checking the file password.
Cannot be executed since the specified drive
4129H Execute again after changing the target drive (memory).
(memory) is ROM.
Cannot be executed since the specified drive
412AH Execute again after changing the target drive (memory).
(memory) is ROM.
Execute again after changing the write inhibit condition or
412BH The specified drive (memory) is write-inhibited.
drive (memory).
File-related
Execute again after changing the write inhibit condition or
412CH errors The specified drive (memory) is write-inhibited.
drive (memory).
File-related
The specified drive (memory) does not have Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
412DH errors
enough free space. (memory).
The specified drive (memory) does not have Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
412EH
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
enough free space. (memory).
The drive (memory) capacity differs between the
Execute again after checking the drive (memory) copy desti-
412FH drive (memory) copy destination and copy
nation and copy source.
source.
The drive (memory) type differs between the drive Execute again after checking the drive (memory) copy desti-
4130H
(memory) copy destination and copy source. nation and copy source.
The file name of the file copy destination is the
4131H Execute again after checking the file names.
same as that of the copy source.
4132H The specified number of files does not exist. Execute again after checking the specified data.
Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
4133H The specified drive (memory) has no free space.
(memory).
The attribute specification data of the file is
4134H Execute again after checking the specified data.
wrong.
The date/time data of the peripheral device (per- Execute again after checking the clock setting of the periph-
4135H
sonal computer) is beyond the range. eral device (personal computer).
4136H The specified file already exists. Execute again after checking the specified file name.
Execute again after changing the condition of the specified
4137H The specified file is read-only.
file.
Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the
4138H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
maximum.
The specified file has exceeded the already exist-
4139H Execute again after checking the size of the specified file.
ing file range.
12 - 152
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
The specified file has exceeded the already
413AH Execute again after checking the size of the specified file.
existing file size.
The same file was accessed simultaneously from
413BH Execute again after a while.
different peripheral devices.
File-related
413CH The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after changing the file condition.
errors
Execute again after increasing the capacity of the specified
413DH File-related The specified file capacity cannot be secured.
drive (memory).
errors
Operation is disabled for the specified drive
413EH Execute again after changing the target drive (memory).
(memory).
The file is inhibited from write to the standard
413FH Execute again after changing the specified drive (memory).
RAM.
Operation was executed for the intelligent func-
Intelligent func- Execute the operation again from the control CPU of the tar-
414AH tion module of the non-control group in the multi-
tion module get module.
ple CPU system.
specification
The I/O address of the specified CPU module is Execute again after checking the I/O address of the specified
414CH error
wrong. CPU module.
An attempt was made to format the drive pro- Do not format the target drive (memory) as it cannot be for-
4150H
File-related tected by the system. matted.
errors An attempt was made to delete the file protected
4151H Do not delete the target file as it cannot be deleted.
by the system.
The registered number of forced inputs/outputs
4160H Deregister the unused forced inputs/outputs.
exceeded the maximum value.
Execute again after securing the area that enables multiple-
The multiple-block online change system file does
4165H block online change at the time of programmable controller
not exist.
memory format.
Since the file batch online change executed previously
Cannot be executed since file batch online remains abnormally terminated for some reason (example:
4166H change is being made by the same starting communication disturbance during execution), file batch
source. online change is disabled.
Forcibly perform new file batch online change.
Since the file batch online change executed previously from
the other communication route remains abnormally termi-
Cannot be executed since file batch online nated for some reason (example: communication distur-
4167H Online registra- change is being made from the other starting bance during execution), file batch online change is disabled.
tion error source. If file batch online change is not being executed by the other
peripheral device, forcibly perform new file batch online
change.
Deregister the device test with executing condition in CPU
The registered number of device test with execut-
4168H module, or decrease the number of registering device test
ing condition exceeds 32.
with executing condition at one time.
Deregister the device test with executing condition after
The device test with executing condition has
4169H checking the registered number of device test with executing
never been registered.
condition in CPU module.
Check whether the specified executing conditions (program,
The specified executing condition does not exist.
416AH step No. operation timing, device name) in deregistering are
(Device test with executing condition)
registered.
The specified program is SFC program. (Device Check the specifing program name in de/registering the
416BH
test with executing condition) device test with executing condition.
12 - 153
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
Check the specified remote passward then, execute the lock/
4170H The passward is wrong.
unlock processing of the remote password again.
The port for communication use is at remote Execute communication after unlocking the remote password
4171H
passsword locking status. processing.
• Stop transmitting from several modules simultaneously
when setting a remote password and using User Data-
Requested for a wrong module to unlock remote gram Protocol (UDP) in MELSOFT connection.
4174H
password. • The MELSOFT connection can be used with Transmis-
sion Control protocol (TCP) when setting a remote
12
password.
• Do not specify the direct connection when using other
connection setting.
Communication error occured in direct connec-
4176H • Do not turn off the CPU power during communication,
tion.
reset the power, and plug out the cable in direct
connection.
• File operation is disabled since File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) function is in operation.
4178H • Online operation that requires file access is Retry after the operation for FTP function is completed.
performed while File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) function is in operation.
• Check whether the power module and the programma-
Ethernet
ble controller CPU are attached properly.
I/F
• Check whether the system's use environment is within
Error
the range of the programmable controller CPU
genaral specifications.
System error.(The setting data in OS is abnor-
4180H • Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
mal.)
• Reset the CPU module.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
If the error is shown once again, the CPU module hardware
must be abnormal. Please contact with system service sta-
tions, agencies, or branch offices nearby and consult forl the
problems.
• Check the receiving module operation.
• Check the status of the lines, such as cables, hubs
Transmission to the receiving modules is unsuc-
4181H and routes,connected to receiving modules.
cessful.
• Some line packets may be engaged. Retry to commu-
nicate a little while later.
• Check the receiving module operation.
• Check the status of the lines such as a cable, a hub
Communication with receiving modules caused a
4182H and a route to receiving modules.
time-out error.
• Some line packets may be engaged. Retry to commu-
nicate a little while later.
• Check the receiving module operation.
Communication with receiving modules was inter-
4183H • Check the status of the lines such as cables, hubs and
rupted.
routes connected to receiving modules.
12 - 154
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Communication processing buffer has been
ran out since requests were consecutively
received in MC protocol. • For MC protocol, send a request after receiving a
• Communication processing buffer has been response to the previous request.
4184H ran out since received data read is not per- • For socket communication, enable received data read.
formed or cannot keep up with the volume. • For socket communication, decrease the number of
• Communication processing is not available data sent from the target device.
since the communication processing buffer
has been ran out.
• For MC protocol, keep the connection until a response
• The connection to the target device is dis- is sent.
connected before sending a response using • Keep the connection until a sequence of communica-
4185H MC protocol tion is completed.
• The connection to the target device is dis- • Other error such as 4184H may be the cause. If any
connected during communication other error has occurred, take corrective action of that
error.
System error (The argument data in OS is abnor-
4186H
mal.)
System error (The wait processing in OS is
4187H
abnormal.)
4188H System error (The data length in OS is abnormal.)
System error (The protocol information in OS is
4189H
abnormal.)
System error (The address data of communicat-
418AH
Ethernet ing module in OS is abnormal.)
I/F System error (The protocol information in OS is
418BH
Error abnormal.)
System error (The protocol specification process-
418CH
ing in OS is abnormal.)
• Check whether the power module and programmable
System error
418DH controller CPU are attached properly.
(The typed data in OS is abnormal.)
• Check whether the system use environment is within
System error (The expedited data processing in
418EH the range of the programmable controller CPU
OS is abnormal.)
genaral specifications.
418FH System error (The protocol information in OS is
• Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
4190H abnormal.)
• Reset the CPU module.
System error (The address data of communicat-
4191H If the error is shown once again, the CPU module hardware
ing module in OS is abnormal.)
is abnormal. Please contact with system service, agency, or
System error (The host module address process-
4192H branch office nearby and tell the problems.
ing in OS is abnormal.)
4193H to System error (The transmission processing in OS
4196H is abnormal.)
4197H System error (The connection processing in OS is
4198H abnormal.)
System error (The connection termination pro-
4199H
cessing is abnormal.)
System error (The connection processing in OS is
419AH
abnormal.)
System error (The connection termination pro-
419BH
cessing is abnormal.)
419CH System error (The processing order in OS is
419DH abnormal.)
12 - 155
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Check the receiving module operation.
• Check the status of the lines such as a cable, a hub
Connection to the module was unsuccessful or
419EH and a route to receiving modules
interrupped.
• Retry to connect a little while later, if the error occured
in communication.
• Check whether the power module and programmable
controller CPU are attached properly.
• Check whether the system use environment is within
the range of the programmable controller CPU
12
Ethernet System error (The I/O control processing is
419FH genaral specifications.
I/F abnormal.)
• Check whether the power capacity is sufficient.
Error
• Reset the CPU module.
If the error is shown once again, the CPU module
hardware is abnormal. Please contact with system
• Retry after a while
• Check the behavior of the target device.
Data cannot be sent since the target device has
• Check whether the target device is processing data
41A0H no free space in receive area (TCP window size
receiving.
is zero).
• Check whether the QnUDE(H)CPU is sending any
unnecessary data.
The port number setting for the Built-in Ethernet
41A1H
port QCPU is invalid.
Correct the port number.
The port number setting for the target device is
41A2H
invalid.
• For TCP/IP, the same Host station port No.
is specified as MC protocol. • Specify a port number that is not duplicated with that of
• For TCP/IP, a connection with the same host MC protocol
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
41A3H
station No. and the same destination port • Review port numbers of the Built-in Ethernet port
No. are already specified to one communi- QCPU and correct if duplicated.
cation target.
• For UDP/IP, the same Host station port No. • Specify a port number that is not duplicated with that of
is specified as MC protocol. MC protocol
41A4H
• For UDP/IP, the specified host station No. is • Review port numbers of the Built-in Ethernet port
duplicated. QCPU and target device and correct if duplicated.
The IP address setting of the target device for
41A5H Ethernet Correct the IP address. Specify A, B, or C for the class.
OPEN processing is invalid.
I/F
• Check the bihavior of the target device.
socket com-
• Check OPEN processing of the target device.
muinication
Connection was not established in OPEN pro- • Correct the port No. of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
41A6H error
cessing for TCP connection. and the IP address, port No., and open processing
method of the target device.
• Check whether the cables are securely connected.
• Correct the data length.
41A8H Data length is out of permissible range. • If the data is longer than the range, split the data and
send them.
• Review the IP address and Ethernet address of the tar-
get device.
• Check whether the target device has the ARP function.
If not, communicate with the one that has the ARP
41ABH Failed to send data due to resend timeout in TCP. function.
• Check the bihavior of the target device.
• The line may be congested with packets. Resend data
after a while.
• Check whether the cables are securely connected.
12 - 156
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Check the bihavior of the target device.
41ACH The target device cannot be found.
• Check whether the cables are securely connected.
• Check whether the cables are securely connected.
• Check the line status by PING test from the target
Data cannot be send due to no connection or dis- device.
41ADH
connection of the cable. • Check the status of Built-in Ethernet port QCPU by self
diagnostic test (Built-in Ethernet port QCPU reset)
Ethernet • Send data again
I/F • Specify the connection No. within 1 to 16.
41B4H socket com- The connection number setting is invalid. • Check whether "Socket communication" is selected for
muinication "Open system" parameter.
error The specified connection has already completed
41B6H Perform CLOSE processing and then OPEN processing.
OPEN processing.
• The specified connection has not completed
41B7H • Reexecute after OPEN processing is completed.
OPEN processing.
• Contents of control data is not correct.
• Correct the contents of the control data.
• Open instruction was executed through
41B9H • Configure the open settings parameters or execute the
open settings parameter even though
OPEN instruction through control data.
parameters are not set for "Open settings".
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41C1H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
File open specification data for file access is
41C2H Execute again after checking the specification data.
wrong.
Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the
41C3H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
maximum.
Simultaneously accessible files exceeded the
41C4H Execute again after decreasing file operations.
maximum.
41C5H File-related The specified file does not exist. Execute again after checking the file.
errors The specified file or drive (memory) does not
41C7H Execute again after checking the file or drive (memory).
exist.
Execute again after checking the size of the specified file.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information data
The specified file has exceeded the already exist-
41C8H may be corrupted.
ing file range.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
grammable controller memory format.
Access to the file sector was unsuccessful.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
41C9H The format information data of the target drive
grammable controller memory format.
(memory) is abnormal.
12 - 157
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
Access to the file sector was unsuccessful.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
41CAH The format information data of the target drive
grammable controller memory format.
(memory) is abnormal.
41CBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
41CCH The specified file does not exist. Execute again after checking the file.
41CDH Access to the file is inhibited by the system. Do not access the specified file.
The specified file is write-disabled since its The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after
41CEH
attribute is read-only.
The specified drive (memory) capacity was
checking the attribute.
12
41CFH Execute again after checking the drive (memory) capacity.
exceeded.
Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
41D0H The specified drive (memory) has no free space.
(memory).
Execute again after checking the file name.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information data
41D1H The file name is specified in a wrong method. may be corrupted.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
grammable controller memory format.
Execute again after checking the size of the specified file.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information data
The specified file has exceeded the already exist-
41D4H may be corrupted.
ing file range.
File-related After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
errors grammable controller memory format.
Forcibly execute the request, or execute after changing the
41D5H The file of the same name exists.
file name.
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41D6H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41D7H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
41D8H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after a while.
Execute again after canceling the write protect of the speci-
41DFH The specified drive (memory) is write-protected.
fied drive (memory).
• Execute again after checking whether the memory
The specified drive (memory) is abnormal or does card has been installed.
41E0H
not exist. • After backing up the data, execute programmable con-
troller memory format.
• After backing up the data, execute write to PLC (Flash
ROM).
41E1H Access to the flash ROM was unsuccessful. • Execute again after checking whether the specified
drive is the Flash ROM card and whether the memory
card size is correct.
12 - 158
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Execute again after checking whether the memory
card has been installed.
41E4H Access to the memory card was unsuccessful. • Execute again after replacing the memory card.
• After backing up the data, execute programmable con-
troller memory format.
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41E7H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41E8H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
41E9H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after some time.
41EBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
The file information data may have been corrupted.
The file system of the specified drive (memory) is
41ECH After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
logically corrupted.
grammable controller memory format.
The specified drive (memory) does not have con-
tinuous free space. Execute again after deleting unnecessary files or executing
41EDH
(The free space for file is sufficient but the contin- programmable controller memory arrangement.
uous free space is insufficient.)
File-related Creation of power failure backup for the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card has
41EFH
errors drive (memory) was unsuccessful. been installed.
The power failure backup data of the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card has
41F0H
drive (memory) are corrupted. been installed.
The power failure backup for the specified drive Execute again after checking whether the memory card has
41F1H
(memory) has a repair command. been installed.
Execute again after checking the specified drive (memory).
Operation cannot be performed since the speci-
41F2H When performing operation for the Flash ROM, use write to
fied drive (memory) is Flash ROM.
PLC (Flash ROM).
PLC write to the program memory or transfer to the backup
The identical data is being accessed by the other memory is in execution.
41F8H
peripheral devices. Access the data again after checking that the above-men-
tioned function has been completed.
Program was written beyond the area where the Execute again after reducing either the already written pro-
41FAH
program can be executed. gram or newly written program.
Operation is being performed for the file already Execute again after the currently performed operation is
41FBH
specified for the same peripheral device. completed.
An attempt was made to erase the drive (mem- The specified drive (memory) is being used and cannot be
41FCH
ory) being used. erased.
41FDH There are no data written to the Flash ROM. Write a file by executing write to PLC (Flash ROM).
41FEH The memory card has not been inserted. Insert or re-insert the memory card.
41FFH The memory card type differs. Check the memory card type.
12 - 159
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
Access to the file sector was unsuccessful.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
41CAH The format information data of the target drive
grammable controller memory format.
(memory) is abnormal.
41CBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
41CCH The specified file does not exist. Execute again after checking the file.
41CDH Access to the file is inhibited by the system. Do not access the specified file.
The specified file is write-disabled since its The specified file is write-inhibited. Execute again after
41CEH
attribute is read-only.
The specified drive (memory) capacity was
checking the attribute.
12
41CFH Execute again after checking the drive (memory) capacity.
exceeded.
Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive
41D0H The specified drive (memory) has no free space.
(memory).
Execute again after checking the file name.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information data
41D1H The file name is specified in a wrong method. may be corrupted.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
grammable controller memory format.
Execute again after checking the size of the specified file.
If the error recurs after re-execution, the file information data
The specified file has exceeded the already exist-
41D4H may be corrupted.
ing file range.
After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
grammable controller memory format.
Forcibly execute the request, or execute after changing the
41D5H File-related The file of the same name exists.
file name.
errors
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41D6H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41D7H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
41D8H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after a while.
Execute again after canceling the write protect of the speci-
41DFH The specified drive (memory) is write-protected.
fied drive (memory).
• Execute again after checking whether the memory
The specified drive (memory) is abnormal or does card has been installed.
41E0H
not exist. • After backing up the data, execute programmable con-
troller memory format.
• After backing up the data, execute write to PLC (Flash
ROM).
41E1H Access to the flash ROM was unsuccessful. • Execute again after checking whether the specified
drive is the Flash ROM card and whether the memory
card size is correct.
• Execute again after checking whether the memory
card has been installed.
41E4H Access to the memory card was unsuccessful. • Execute again after replacing the memory card.
• After backing up the data, execute programmable con-
troller memory format.
12 - 160
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41E7H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
The file information data may be corrupted.
The format information data of the specified drive
41E8H After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
(memory) is abnormal.
grammable controller memory format.
41E9H The specified file is being accessed. Execute again after some time.
41EBH The file name is specified in a wrong method. Execute again after checking the file name.
The file information data may have been corrupted.
The file system of the specified drive (memory) is
41ECH After backing up the data in the CPU module, execute pro-
logically corrupted.
grammable controller memory format.
The specified drive (memory) does not have con-
tinuous free space. Execute again after deleting unnecessary files or executing
41EDH
(The free space for file is sufficient but the contin- programmable controller memory arrangement.
uous free space is insufficient.)
Creation of power failure backup for the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card has
41EFH
drive (memory) was unsuccessful. been installed.
The power failure backup data of the specified Execute again after checking whether the memory card has
41F0H File-related
drive (memory) are corrupted. been installed.
errors
The power failure backup for the specified drive Execute again after checking whether the memory card has
41F1H
(memory) has a repair command. been installed.
Execute again after checking the specified drive (memory).
Operation cannot be performed since the speci-
41F2H When performing operation for the Flash ROM, use write to
fied drive (memory) is Flash ROM.
PLC (Flash ROM).
PLC write to the program memory or transfer to the backup
The identical data is being accessed by the other memory is in execution.
41F8H
peripheral devices. Access the data again after checking that the above-men-
tioned function has been completed.
Program was written beyond the area where the Execute again after reducing either the already written pro-
41FAH
program can be executed. gram or newly written program.
Operation is being performed for the file already Execute again after the currently performed operation is
41FBH
specified for the same peripheral device. completed.
An attempt was made to erase the drive (mem- The specified drive (memory) is being used and cannot be
41FCH
ory) being used. erased.
41FDH There are no data written to the Flash ROM. Write a file by executing write to PLC (Flash ROM).
41FEH The memory card has not been inserted. Insert or re-insert the memory card.
41FFH The memory card type differs. Check the memory card type.
12 - 161
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
The requested processing cannot be performed Do not make a request where an error occurred, or make a
4200H since online module change is not enabled in the request again after enabling online module change in the
setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter. setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter.
The requested processing cannot be performed Do not make a request where an error occurred, or make a
4201H since online module change is enabled in the set- request again after disabling online module change in the
ting of the multiple CPU setting parameter. setting of the multiple CPU setting parameter.
The requested processing cannot be performed
Make a request again after completion of the online module
4202H since an online module change is being per-
formed.
change. 12
Take following procedures to replace the module mounted on
the main base unit.
The module mounted on the main base unit can-
• Switch the system where the target module to be
4203H not be replaced online since the extension base
replaced is mounted to the standby system.
unit is mounted.
• Turn OFF power supply of the standby system.
• Replace the target module.
Change the connection destination to the control system and
The specified module of the extension base unit
perform the online module change again. (This corrective
4204H cannot be replaced online since it is connected to
action can be made to the module mounted on the extension
the standby system.
base unit only.)
The specified head I/O number is outside the When making a request, specify the head I/O number of the
4210H
range. module that will be changed online.
4211H Online module An online module change request is abnormal. Check the command used to make a request.
change-related An online module change is already being made Make a request again after completion of the online module
4212H
error for other equipment. change, or continue after changing the connection path.
The specified head I/O number differs from the When making a request, specify the head I/O number of the
4213H
one registered for online module change. module being changed online.
The specified module differs from the one Make a request again after mounting the module that is the
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
4214H
changed online. same as the one changed online.
When making a request, specify the head I/O number of the
4215H The specified module does not exist. module that will be changed online, or make a request again
after mounting the module.
4216H The specified module is faulty. Make a request again after changing the module.
4217H There is no response from the specified module. Continue the online module changing operation.
Do not make a request where an error occurred, or make a
The specified module is incompatible with online
4218H request again to the module compatible with online module
module change.
change.
The specified module is mounted on the exten- Do not make a request to any modules mounted on the
4219H sion base unit of the type that requires no power extension base unit of the type that requires no power supply
supply module. module and the main base unit.
Make a request to the CPU module that controls the speci-
421AH The specified module is not in a control group.
fied module.
An error occurred in the setting of the initial set- Resume processing after checking the contents of the intelli-
421BH
ting parameter of the intelligent function module. gent function module buffer memory.
Cannot be executed as the parameter file has
421CH Operation cannot be performed. Operation is interrupted.
been rewritten.
12 - 162
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
Connect GX Developer to the new control system and check
System switching occurs during the online mod-
421DH the status of the online module change. According to the sta-
ule change.
tus of online module change, take procedures for it.
The tracking cable may be faulty or the standby system may
The information of the online module change can- have an error.
not be sent to the standby system. When the sys- • Check the mounting status of the tracking cable or
Online module
421EH tem switching occurs during the online module replace the tracking cable.
change-related
change, the online module change may not be • Check the status of the standby system. When a stop
error
continued. error was detected by the standby system, perform
troubleshooting.
The module mounted on the extension base unit • Set the connection destination of a programming tool
cannot be replaced online when the connection to the present control system.
421FH
destination is set to the standby system in the • Perform the online module change to the module
separate mode. mounted on the extension base unit again.
Any of the following unsupported operations was
executed for the standby system.
• Operation mode change Execute the operation again after changing the transfer
4240H
• System switching setup to the control system.
• Memory copy from control system to
standby system
Communication cannot be made since the
standby system has been powered off or reset or Request communication after powering on the standby sys-
4241H
is in a user watchdog timer error or CPU module tem or setting its Reset switch to the neutral position.
hardware fault status.
Communication with the standby system cannot Cannot be executed since the tracking cable is disconnected
4242H be made since the tracking cable is faulty or dis- or faulty. Execute again after checking the tracking cable for
connected. disconnection or changing it for a normal one.
The command cannot be executed since the Execute again after removing the stop error of the standby
4243H
standby system is in stop error. system.
The command cannot be executed since the
Execute again after placing the standby system in the same
4244H operation status differs from that of the standby
operation status (RUN/STOP) as the control system.
Redundant sys- system.
tem-related Check that the other system CPU module has normally
4245H Other system CPU module status error
error started up and that the tracking cable is connected.
The command cannot be executed since opera-
tion mode (separate/backup) change or system Execute again after the operation mode change or system
4246H
(control/standby system) switching is being exe- switching being executed is completed.
cuted.
Execute again after memory copy from control system to
standby system is completed.
Check the following and take corrective action.
• Is SM1596 of the control system or standby system
ON?
(ON: Memory copy being executed)
Memory copy from control system to standby sys-
4247H Execute again after SM1596 has turned OFF since it is
tem is already being executed.
turned OFF by the system on completion of memory
copy.
• Is SM1597 of the control system ON?
(ON: Memory copy completed)
Execute again after turning OFF SM1597 of the control
system.
12 - 163
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Communication was made during system
switching. • Execute again after system switching.
4248H • The system specified in the transfer setup • After checking whether the specified system exists or
(request destination module I/O number) not, restart communication.
does not exist.
• Normally start the system as the redundant system.
(Make communication again after establishing the sys-
The redundant system is not established.
4249H (Control system/standby system or System A/
tem.)
• Execute again after changing the transfer setup
12
System B not yet definite)
(request destination module I/O number) to "No set-
tings have been made" (03FFH).
The command that could not be processed was
Execute again after changing the transfer setup (request
executed when the transfer setup (request desti-
424AH destination module I/O number) to "No settings have been
nation module I/O number) is Control system/
made" (03FFH).
Standby system/System A/System B.
The command cannot be executed since system Manual system switching is inhibited by the manual system
424BH switching is inhibited by the manual system switching enable flag (SM1592). Execute again after turning
switching enable flag (SM1592). ON SM1592.
The specified command cannot be executed dur- Execute again after the online program change operation is
424CH
ing online program change operation. finished.
Redundant sys-
• Execute again after changing to the backup mode.
tem-related
The transfer setup or function unavailable for the • Execute again after changing the transfer setup
424DH error
debug mode was used. (request destination module I/O number) to System A
or control system.
The control system/standby system specifying
424EH This function cannot be executed since it is not supported.
method is not supported.
Although system switching was executed from GX Devel-
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
System switching was executed by the other con-
oper, system switching was executed first by the other condi-
424FH dition during execution of system switching by GX
tion. Check the system for any problem and execute the
Developer.
operation again as necessary.
Execute communication again after changing the tracking
cable.
Sum check error occurred in tracking communica- If the same error recurs after the tracking cable is changed,
4250H
tion. the cause is the hardware fault of the CPU module.
(Please contact your local nearest Mitsubishi or representa-
tive, explaining a detailed description of the problem.)
The command cannot be executed in the sepa-
4251H Execute again after changing to the backup mode.
rate mode.
By monitoring SD1690 (other system network module No.
System switching was not executed since an
that issued system switching request), identify the faulty
4252H error occurred in the redundant system compati-
redundant-compatible intelligent module of the standby sys-
ble network module of the standby system.
tem, then remove the module fault, and execute again.
12 - 164
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
Since a communication error or system switching occurred
during execution of online program change to the control
system CPU module, online program change redundant
tracking was suspended.
Since a communication error or system switching
Execute online program change again after confirming that
occurred during online program change to the
communication with the control system CPU module and
4253H control system CPU module, online program
standby system CPU module can be normally made.
change to the standby CPU module cannot be
When long time is taken for communication between GX
executed.
Developer and control system CPU module or standby sys-
tem CPU module, the error may be avoided by adjusting
SD1710 (standby system online program change start wait-
ing time).
The tracking cable may not be connected correctly, or the
tracking communication hardware of the CPU module may
The command cannot be executed since an error
be faulty. Check the connection status of the tracking cable.
4254H was detected in the tracking communication hard-
If the condition is not restored to normal after the cable con-
ware.
nection status is corrected, the possible cause is the hard-
ware fault of the CPU module.
Tracking communication is being prepared when it is con-
The command cannot be executed since tracking
4255H nected. Execute the operation again after a while (about 1
communication is being prepared.
second).
The tracking cable may not be connected correctly, or the
tracking communication hardware of the CPU module may
Redundant sys-
The command cannot be executed since a time- be faulty. Check the connection status of the tracking cable.
4256H tem-related
out error occurred in tracking communication. If the condition is not restored to normal after the cable con-
error
nection status is corrected, the possible cause is the hard-
ware fault of the CPU module.
The command cannot be executed since the host The command cannot be executed since the host system is
4257H system CPU module is in a watchdog timer error in a watchdog timer error or CPU module hardware fault sta-
or CPU module hardware fault status. tus. Execute again after checking the host system status.
Execute again after completing the operation mode change
Operation mode being changed (from backup by changing the status from STOP to RUN using the RUN/
4258H
mode to separate mode) STOP switch of the CPU module whose RUN LED is flicker-
ing or remote operation.
Operation mode change is being executed in the
Execute again in the same communication route as the one
4259H communication route different from the current
where the operation mode change was executed.
one from the other peripheral device.
Although the communication was made via the
intelligent function module mounted on the exten-
Change the combination of the connection destination speci-
425BH sion base unit, the combination of the connection
fication and the command to the supported combination.
destination specification (Redundant CPU specifi-
cation) and the command is unsupported.
System switching cannot be made since the mod-
Switch systems after the online module change has been
425CH ule mounted on the extension base unit is being
completed.
replaced online.
Operation mode cannot be changed since the
Change the operation mode after the online module change
425DH module mounted on the extension base unit is
has been completed.
being replaced online.
12 - 165
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.2 Error code
Error code
Error item Error details Corrective action
(Hexadecimal)
• Access to the specified station cannot be
made since the routing parameters are not
set to the start source CPU module and/or • Set to the related stations the routing parameters for
relay CPU module. access to the specified station.
• For routing via a multiple CPU system, the • Retry after a while, or start communication after con-
4A00H control CPU of the network module for data firming that the system for data routing has started.
routing has not started. • In a redundant system configuration, connect the
Link-related
• When System A/System B is not yet identi-
fied in a redundant system configuration,
tracking cable, start System A/System B normally, and
then restart communication.
12
error communication was made with the other
station via the network module.
The network of the No. set to the routing parame- Check and correct the routing parameters set to the related
4A01H
ters does not exist. stations.
• Check the network module/link module for an error or
offline status.
4A02H Access to the specified station cannot be made.
• Check to see if the network number/PC number setting
has no mistake.
4A03H A request for network test was issued. Check the request data of the MC protocol, etc.
• Take corrective action after checking the error that
occurred at the specified access destination or the
An error occurred in the access destination or
relay station to the accessed station.
4B00H relay station, or the specified transfer setup
• Check the transfer setup (request destination module
(request destination module I/O number) is illegal.
I/O number or programmable controller number) in the
request data of the MC protocol, etc.
The target is not the No. 1 CPU of the multiple Execute the request for the No. 1 CPU of the multiple CPU
4B01H
Target-related CPU system. system.
12.3.11 Error codes returned to request source during communication with CPU module
12.3 Error Code List
error Perform operation for the module that can execute the speci-
4B02H The request is not addressed to the CPU module.
fied function.
• The specified route is not supported by the
specified CPU module version.
4B03H Check whether the specified route is supported or not.
• The communication target CsPU is not
mounted.
The specified transfer setup (request destination In the target setup, an illegal value is set as the head I/O
4B04H
module I/O number) is not supported. number of the target module.
The specified device is unavailable for the motion
4C00H Check the request data contents.
CPU or outside the device range.
Multiple CPU- There are a total of 33 or more DDWR and DDRD Execute again after reducing the number of DDWR and
4C08H
related error requests. DDRD requests to be executed simultaneously.
The specification of the requested CPU module
4C09H Check the request data contents.
No. is illegal.
12 - 166
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
This section explains how to change the module online (with power on) without stopping the system.
12.4.1 Online module change
An online module change Note12.15 is a function that allows the Q series module mounted on the main base unit or
extension base unit to be changed during system control executed by the Process CPU or Redundant CPU.Note1
Using an online module change, the module that failed during control can be replaced with the module of the same
model name.
● An online module change cannot add a module or change the current module for another module.
● When executing an online module change for the Process CPU in the multiple CPU system, it is necessary to specify
"Online module change enable for other CPU" in the multiple CPU setting of the PLC parameter dialog box.
Also, there are restrictions on the versions of the CPU modules that comprise the multiple CPU system. For details,
refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
● Perform an online module change after confirming that the system outside the programmable controller will not
malfunction.
● To prevent an electric shock, operating module malfunction, etc., provide a switch or similar individually cutting-off
means for the external power supply of the module to be changed online.
● It is recommended to verify that the operations of the unchanged modules will not be affected by executing an online
module change in an actual system beforehand to confirm the following
• The means and structure that will cut off the connection with the external device are correct.
• ON/OFF of switches, etc. has no influence.
● Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit or terminal block more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant),
after the first use of the product.
Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector.
Note1
High
Note12.15 Basic performance Universal
The Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU are not
compatible with an online module change.
12 - 167
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) System configuration that allows online module change 1
An online module change can be peformed under the following conditions.
(a) Modules that can be changed online 2
The modules that can be changed online are shown in Table12.3.
Table12.3 Modules that can be changed online
3
Module type Restrictions
Input module
Output module No restrictions 12
I/O combined module
Analog-digital converter module
Intelligent function
Digital-analog converter module 5
Temperature input module Supported by function version C.
module
Temperature control module
Pulse input module 6
*1: When using Redundant CPU and/or connecting a extension base unit, online module change cannot be performed to a
intelligent function module mounted on the main base unit.
7
The modules other than listed above cannot be changed online.
For whether the above intelligent function modules can be changed online or not and their changing
procedures, refer to the manual of the used intelligent function module. 8
(b) Versions of GX Developer that supports online module change
GX Developer is required to perform an online module change.
For GX Developer version, refer to the following
12.4.1 Online module change
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
When Process CPU is used : Section 2.1.6
When Redundant CPU is used : QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Redundant
System)
An online module change can also be performed from GX Developer via a
network.
(c) Restrictions on base units
1) When the slim type main base unit (Q3 SB) is used, an online module change cannot be performed.
2) When the extension base unit of the type that requires no power supply module (Q5 SB) is used, an
online module change cannot be performed for the modules mounted on all base units connected.
3) When the redundant type extension base unit (Q6 WRB) is used, the online module change cannot be
performed to all modules connected to the main base unit.
12 - 168
(d) Control status of CPU module
1) An online module change can be executed when a stop error has not occurred.
Whether an online module change can be executed or not depending on the control status of the CPU
module is shown in Table12.4.
Table12.4 Whether online module change can be executed or not
Control status RUN status*1 STOP status PAUSE status At stop error
Whether online module
change can be executed Can be executed Can be executed Can be executed Cannot be executed
or not
*1: Including the case where a continue error has occurred in the RUN status.
2) An online module change can be continued if the control status of the CPU module is changed to the STOP/
PAUSE status during the online module change.
In either of the following cases, however, the online module change cannot be continued.
•When the CPU module is reset
•When a stop error occurs
(e) Number of modules that can be changed online
The number of modules that can be changed online at one time is one for
each CPU module.
Multiple modules cannot be changed simultaneously.
12 - 169
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Restrictions on online module change 1
The following operations cannot be performed during an online module change.
• Issue an online module change request from multiple GX Developers to one CPU module.
• Write parameters to the CPU module during online module change.
2
3
The following message appears (refer to Figure 12.24) if an online module change request is issued from another GX
Developer to the CPU module during online module change.
After confirming the message, select "Yes" or "No".
12
Figure 12.24 Message screen 5
When "Yes" is selected
Online module change operation is switched to "GX Developer 2)" that issued the request later. (Operation is continued
from the pre-switching status.)
"Yes" selected
6
8
Online module Online module change
change continued execution canceled
12.4.1 Online module change
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
GX Developer 2) GX Developer 1)
Figure 12.25 Online module change (When "Yes" is selected)
When "No" is selected
The operation of online module change "GX Developer 2)" requested later is suspended. (Online module change "GX
Developer 1)" executed first is continued.)
"No" selected
Online module Online module change
change suspended execution continued
GX Developer 2) GX Developer 1)
Figure 12.26 Online module change (When "No" is selected)
12 - 170
(3) Special relays and special register related to online module change
Information during online module change is stored into the special relays (SM235, SM236) and special register
(SD235).
•Whether the online module change of the corresponding CPU module is executed or not can
be checked by monitoring SM235, SM236 and SD235.
•SM235: Online module change flag (turns on during online module change)
•SM236: Flag that turns on only one scan after online module change (turns on only one scan
after completion of online module change)
•SD235: Module being changed online (stores the starting I/O number of the module being
changed online/10H)
Refer to Section 12.7 for details of SM235 and SM236 and to Section 12.8 for details of SD235.
Online module Online module
change start change completed
ON
SM235 OFF
Starting I/O number of module being
SD235 changed online/10H
ON
SM236 OFF
1 scan
Figure 12.27 Time chart
12 - 171
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Online module change procedure 1
The following explains the online module change procedure of the I/O module.
For the online module change procedure of the intelligent function module, refer to the manual of the used
intelligent function module.
2
3
• It is recommended to turn off the output (Y) from the output module/I/O combined module to be changed online
before it is changed.
• When making an online module change for the Redundant CPU, specify "No settings have been made (Default)",
"System A" or "System B" as the target system in the "transfer setup" by GX Developer.
Do not specify the "Control system" or "Standby system" as the target system.
12
If the "Control system" or "Standby system" is specified in the transfer setup, the following error dialog (refer to
Figure 12.28) appears at execution of an online module change.
When the following error dialog is displayed, change the target system to "No settings have been made (Default)",
"System A" or "System B", and then perform an online module change.
5
7
Figure 12.28 Error dialog box
• When executing online module change for the module mounted on the extension base unit in the Redundant
CPU, access cannot be made to a module mounted on the extension base unit from the standby system. Set 8
[Transfer setup] in GX Developer, checking that the trasnfer target Redundant CPU module is the control system.
12.4.1 Online module change
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
12 - 172
1) Choose [Diagnostics] [Online module change] on GX Developer, and select the "Online module change"
mode.
Figure 12.29 System monitor
2) Double-click the module to be changed online to display the online module change screen.
(Table12.5 shows the communication status with the target module for online module change when the
following screen (refer to Figure 12.30) is displayed.)
Table12.5 Communication status with the module
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Input module refresh Executed
Output module refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
I/O hybrid module
Output refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction Executed
Instruction using intelligent
Executed
function module device
Intelligent dedicated instruction Executed
Intelligent function Intelligent automatic refresh Executed
module
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
Figure 12.30 Online module change screen
12 - 173
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Click the Execution button to enable a module change.
(Table12.6 shows the communication status with the target module for online module change when the 1
following screen (refer to Figure 12.31) is displayed.)
Table12.6 Communication status with the module
2
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Input module refresh
Not executed
(Data held)
3
Output module refresh Not executed
Not executed
Input refresh
I/O hybrid module (Data held) 12
Output refresh Not executed
Input refresh Not executed
Output refresh Not executed
FROM/TO instruction No processing 5
Instruction using intelligent
No processing
function module device
Intelligent function Intelligent dedicated instruction No processing
module Intelligent automatic refresh No processing 6
Communication
Buffer memory batch monitor
error 7
Figure 12.31 Online module change screen
4) With a switch or other device, cut off the connection with the external device (module I/O signals).
8
5) Turn off the switch of the external power supply for module to shut off power supply.
6) Disconnect the terminal block or connector from the module.
12.4.1 Online module change
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
7) Remove the module. ( Section 10.3.3)
8) Mount a new module on the same slot. ( Section 10.3.3)
9) Connect the terminal block or connector to the module.
10)Turn on the switch of the external power supply for module to resume power supply.
11)With a switch or other device, make a connection with the external device (module I/O signals).
12 - 174
12)After mounting the module, click the Execution button.
(Table12.7 shows the communication status with the target module for online module change when the
following screen (refer to Figure 12.32) is displayed.)
Table12.7 Communication status with the module
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Not executed
Input module refresh
(Data held)
Output module refresh Not executed
Not executed
Input refresh
I/O hybrid module (Data held)
Output refresh Not executed
Input refresh Executed
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction No processing
Instruction using intelligent
No processing
function module device
Intelligent function Intelligent dedicated instruction No processing
module Intelligent automatic refresh No processing
Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
Figure 12.32 Online module change screen
When the initial settings of the intelligent function module have been made by GX Configulator, the set data are written to the
intelligent function module.
13)Click the Execution button to start control.
14)The Online module change completed screen appears.
(Table12.8 shows the communication status with the target module for online module change when the
following screen (refer to Figure 12.33) is displayed.)
Table12.8 Communication status with the module
Executed/Not
Target module, item
executed
Input module refresh Executed
Output module refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
I/O hybrid module
Output refresh Executed
Input refresh Executed
Output refresh Executed
FROM/TO instruction Executed
Intelligent function Instruction using intelligent
Executed
module function module device
Intelligent dedicated instruction Executed
Intelligent automatic refresh Executed
Figure 12.33 Online module change screen Buffer memory batch monitor Executed
12 - 175
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(5) Operation in case of system switching occurrence during online module 1
change (When Redundant type extension base unit is used)
The following describes the procedures to be taken when the system switching occurs during online module
2
change is performed to the module mounted on the extension base unit in the Redundant CPU.
1) Connect GX Developer to the new control system.
2) Check the status of the module where the online module change was performed at [System Monitor]. 3
12
8
Figure 12.34 System monitor
3) When selecting [Online module change] in a status of a module being replaced online, screen shown in
12.4.1 Online module change
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
Figure 12.30 is displayed.
Figure 12.35 Online module change screen
4) Continue the operation that has been executed before system switching occurrence.
12 - 176
• When connecting the new control system and clicking the Execution button, the message shown in Figure 12.31
may be shown. In this case, select [Yes] and continue operation for the online module change.
Figure 12.36 Message dialog box
• At the time of completion of the online module change, the error dialog box shown in Figure 12.32 may be shown,
but the online module change is completed normally.
Figure 12.37 Error dialog box
12 - 177
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.4.2 Change of redundant power supply module
1
Following the flowchart shown below, change a faulty redundant power supply module online (with power on).
(It is assumed that the other redundant power supply module is normally operating.)
2
Start
Check the redundant power supply
module to be changed.
3
Power OFF the redundant power supply 12
module to be changed.
Change the redundant power supply 5
module.
Power ON the new redundant power
6
supply module.
7
Make sure that the "POWER" LED is
turned on green.
8
Completed
Figure 12.38 Redundant power supply module replacement procedure
12.4.2 Change of redundant power supply module
12.4 Module Change during System Operation
12 - 178
• If either redundant power supply module fails, change it for a normal one earlier than usual (within 14 days as a
guideline).
If it does not fail, it is recommended to change the redundant power supply module for a new one after five years
have elapsed.
• Change the redundant power supply module with extreme care, referring to Section 10.3.3(1).
If the module fixing projection of the redundant power supply module comes off from the module fixing hole of the
redundant base unit, an error will occur due to connector damage.
• When the redundant power supply system is used, a "continue" error will occur due to a redundant power supply
module failure. Cancel the error after changing the faulty redundant power supply module for a normal one.
Note12.16, Note12.17
• When the redundant power supply system is used, the failure status of the redundant power supply module can
be checked by the system monitor of GX Developer (Version 8.18U or later) or the special relay SM1781/special
register SD1781. Note12.16, Note12.17Note1
For details of the system monitor, refer to the following.
GX Developer Operating Manual
Note1
Note12.16 Basic
Failure of redundant power supply cannot be detected by the Basic model QCPU.
High
Note12.17 performance Process
When using the High Performance QCPU or the Process CPU, confirm the versions of CPU module and GX
Developer. ( Appendix 2)
12 - 179
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting
1
This section explains possible problems with I/O circuits and their corrective actions.
12.5.1 Input circuit troubleshooting 2
The following describes possible problems with input circuits and their corrective actions.
3
Table12.9 Input circuit problems and corrective actions
Condition Cause Corrective Action 12
• Leakage current of input switch • Connect an appropriate CR so that the voltage
(e.g. drive by non-contact switch). across the terminals of the input module becomes
AC input
lower than the off voltage. 5
AC input
Example 1
Input signal is Leakage Input
not turned off.
current module
R
Input
module
6
Power supply
It is recommended to use 0.1 to 47 F+47 to 120 (1/ 7
2W) for the CR constant.
• Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp.
• Same as Example 1.
AC input • Provide an independent display circuit separately. 8
Example 2
Input signal is
Leakage Input
not turned off.
current module
12.5.1 Input circuit troubleshooting
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting
Power supply
• Same as Example 1.
• Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable.
(However, leakage current is not generated when the
(Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is approx. 100
power supply is located in the input equipment side
pF/m).
as shown below.)
Example 3
Input signal is AC input
AC input
not turned off.
Leakage Input
current module Input
module
Power supply
Power supply
• Drive by a switch with LED display.
• Connect an appropriate resistor so that the current
across the input module becomes lower than the off
current.
DC input (plus common) DC input (plus common)
Example 4
Input signal is
not turned off. Leakage current Input Resister Input
module module
*: A calculation example of the resistance to be
connected is shown on the following page.
Table12.9 Input circuit problems and corrective actions (Continued)
12 - 180
Condition Cause Corrective Action
• Use only one power supply.
• Sneak path due to the use of two power supplies. • Connect a sneak path prevention diode. (Figure
DC input below)
Example 5
DC input
Input signal is
not turned off. E1 E2 Input
module
E1 E2 Input
module
E1 E2
Stepwise distortion as shown below appears to the Improve input signal waveform by using the on-
zero cross voltage of input signal (AC). line system etc.
Input signal is
Example 6
not turned on
(AC input Zero cross
module) voltage
Change the response time setting.
Example: 1ms to 5ms
(When excessive noise is cyclic, shorter response time
Example 7
setting may produce a higher effect.) When the above
False input due Depending on response time setting, noise is imported
action is not effective, take measures against noise to
to noise as input.
block excessive noise, e.g. avoid tying the power
cables and control cables in a bundle, and add surge
absorbers to the noise sources such as the relays and
contactors used with the same power supply.
<Calculation example of the resistance to be connected in Example 4>
• Connecting a switch with LED display, in which a maximum 2.33mA leakage current flows when 24VDC is
supplied to the QX40.
QX40
Leakage current Input
2.33mA module
24VDC
• In this case, the circuit does not satisfy the condition that the off current of the QX40 is 1.7mA or less.
Connect a resistance as follows.
QX40
2.33mA
IZ=1.7mA
IR=0.63mA R Input impedance
5.6k
24VDC
(To the next page)
12 - 181
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(From preceding page)
• In order to satisfy the condition that the OFF current of the QX40 is 1.7mA or less, the resistance R, in which 1
a 0.63mA or more current flows, shall be connected.
Calculating with the formula "IR: IZ = Z (Input impedance): R",
IZ 1.7
2
R< Z (Input impedance)= 5.6=15.11[k ]
IR 0.63
the resistance R will be R<15.11k . 3
Consequently, if the resistance R is set to 12k , the electric power W of the resistance R will be calculated
in the following formula,
W= (Input voltage)2/R=28.82/12000=0.069[W]. 12
• Since the resistance requires the electric power which is 3 to 5 times of the power actually consumed, the
resistance to be connected to the corresponding terminal shall be 12.0k and 1/4 to 1[W]. 5
• The OFF voltage of the QX40 when the resistance R calculated above is connected will be 8.90[V]
6
1
2.33[mA]=8.90[V]
1 1
+
12.0[k ] 5.6[k ]
7
This also satisfies the condition that the OFF voltage of the QX40 is 11V or less.
12.5.1 Input circuit troubleshooting
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting
12 - 182
12.5.2 Output circuit troubleshooting
This section explains trouble examples and troubleshooting in the output circuit.
Table12.10 Output circuit troubleshooting
Condition Cause Corrective Action
• Connect a resistor of several ten K to several
• When load is half-wave rectified inside (This is
typical of some solenoids.) hundred K at both ends of the load.
QY22
Output module D1 [1] Resistor
Load
Load
Excessive
Example 1
[2]
voltage is applied
to load when
• When the polarity of the power supply is [1], the
output turns off.
capacitor C is charged. When the polarity is [2], the
voltage charged in C plus the power supply voltage
is applied to across D1. The maximum value of the
voltage is approx. 2.2E.
(This usage does not pose problems to the output
components but may deteriorate the diode built in
the load, causing burnout, etc.)
• Leakage current due to the built-in surge • Connect a resistor at both ends of the load.
suppressor (If the wiring from the output module to the load is
long, be careful since there may be a leakage
QY22
current due to the line capacity.)
Example 2
Load does not Output module
Load
turn off.(Triac Resistor
output) Leakage current
Load
• Connect a resistor to both ends of a load so that the
• The load current is lower than the minimum load
load current is higher than the minimum load
current.
current.
• When the load current is lower than the minimum
load current of the output module, the triac does not
operate and the load current flows into a phototriac Resistor
as shown by the arrow in the following figure. When
an inductive load is being connected, the load may
not be turned off since surge at the time of off is Load
applied to the phototriac.
Example 3
The load is not
Surge suppressor
turned off. (Triac QY22
output)
Phototriac
Control
circuit Load
Triac
12 - 183
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
1
Table12.10 Output circuit troubleshooting (Continued)
Situation Cause Countermeasure
When turning on or off the external 2
power, check that the external power
supply rising edge is 10ms or more, and
switch the SW1 to the primary side of
external power supply. 3
Primary Secondary
side side
Erroneous output due to the stray capacitance (C) between external power supply
12
SW1 Programmable
collector and emitter of hotocoupler. controller
There is no erroneous output at normal load.
An erroneous output may occur at high sensitivity load
When switching to the secondary side of
the external power supply is required, the
5
(such as solid state relay). external power supply rising edge
connected a condenser must be slow,
Output module, Combined module and measured 10ms or more. 6
Photocoupler Sink output
C
IC
Tr1
Y0
Y0
7
When the
L
external power
Example 4
supply turns 8
on, the load is
turned on for a R1
0V
moment. SW
12/24VDC
SW C1
Constant
12.5.2 Output circuit troubleshooting
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting
voltage circuit COM COM
24V 24V
Source output
I Y0
L
R1
0V
SW
C1
COM
24V
*: Measures will not be effective to the
following module due to the characterictic
of external power supply circuit.
• QY81P
12 - 184
Table12.10 Output circuit troubleshooting (Continued)
Situation Cause Countermeasure
If the external power supply is turned on precipitously, Ic
current flows due to the stray capacitance (C) between
collector and emitter of hotocoupler.
Ic current flows to the next stage of transister Tr1 gate and Y0
output turns on by 100 s R1: Several tens of ohms
Power capacity (external power supply
current*1)2 resistance value (3 to 5)*2
C1: Several hundreds of microfarads 50V
*1 Refer to consumption current of the
SW: External power external power supply for modules
When the supply (24V) at On used in this manual.
external power 10ms or less *2 Select the power capacity of
Example 4
supply turns resistance to be 3 to 5 times lager
on, the load is than the actual power consumption.
turned on for a (Example)
moment. R1=40 , C1=300 F
Use the below expression to calculated a
Output Y0
time constant
Approx. 100 s
C1 R1=300 10-6 40
=12 10 s
-3
=12ms
12 - 185
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.10 Output circuit troubleshooting (Continued) 1
Situation Cause Countermeasure
The load [2] which was turned OFF may be turned ON due to Take either of the following measure.
back electromotive force at the time of power-off [1] if an • To prevent the generation of the back
inductive load is used. electromotive force, connect diode in 2
parallel with load where the back
electromotive force has been generated.
Output module,
ombined module
Source output -
Back electromotive
+
[3]
Source output 3
force
[3]
ON Y0 Load
Back
12
electromotive
force
[2] Load
Y1 Load
OFF
Sink output
5
[1]
Shut off
[3]
COM Back
electromotive
force
0V Load
6
Output module, • Connect diode between (+) and (-) of
7
ombined module [3] the external power supply so that a
Back electromotive
Sink output + - sneak path circuit is porvided.
force
ON Y0 Load Connect the diode to C1 and R1 in
parallel when example 4 is performed
[2] simultaneously. 8
The load which Y1 Load Source output -
Back electromotive
+ [3]
OFF force
was turned off Y0 Load
[1] ON
Example 5
is turned on for Shut off
a moment at
12.5.2 Output circuit troubleshooting
12.5 I/O Module Troubleshooting
[2]
COM
power-off. Y1 Load
OFF
(Transistor 12/24VDC
[1]
Shut off
output)
COM D1
C1 R1
0V
Example 4
* Measures will not be effective to the
following module due to the characterictic
of external power supply circuit.
• QY81P
Back electromotive
Sink output + - [3]
force
Y0 Load
ON
[2]
Y1 Load
OFF
[1]
Shut off
COM
D1
C1 R1
12/24VDC
Example 4
D1: Reverse current VR(VRM)···*1,
Forward current IF(IFM)···*2
* 1 Approx. 10 times the rated voltage of
the spec.
Ex.: 24VDC Approx.200V
*2 More than 2 times the Max. load
current (common) of the spec.
Ex: 2A/1 common More than 4A
12 - 186
12.6 Built-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis
Using the diagnostic function of GX Developer, the module status, parameter settings, communication status, and
error log of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU can be checked.
The relevant screen can be activated by either of the following two methods.
• In GX Developer, select [Diagnostics] [PLC diagnostics] [Ethernet diagnosis]
Figure 12.39 PLC Diagnostics screen
• In GX Developer, select [Diagnostics] [Ethernet diagnostics]
Figure 12.40 Ethernet diagnosis screen
On the following pages, details of the built-in Ethernet port diagnosis screens are described.
12 - 187
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Parameter status 1
12
7
Figure 12.41 Ethernet diagnosis (Parameter status) screen
Table12.11 Ethernet diagnosis (Parameter status) items 8
Item Description
IP address
Subnet mask The Ethernet address (MAC address) of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
12.6 Built-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis
Default router IP address can be monitored.
Ethernet address
Before performing the Built-in Ethernet port, check that the “CPU” is selected in the Target module setting on the Ethernet
diagnosis screen.
12 - 188
(2) Error log
Figure 12.42 Ethernet diagnosis (Error log) screen
Table12.12 Ethernet diagnosis (Error log) items
Item Description
Displays connection No. of the connection that has an error.
Connection No. UDP connections that function in MELSOFT connection are treated as one
connection, and the lowest connection No. is stored in the error log.
Protocol
Open system Displays the settings of PLC parameter.
Host station port No.
Displays a generated error code.*1
Error code In the case of MELSOFT connection, only the errors related to Ethernet com-
munication are stored in the Error log.
Displays the IP address of the other device when an error occurs in communi-
Destination IP address
cation with it.
Displays the port number of the other device when an error occurs in commu-
Destination port No.
nication with it.
Command code Displays command No. when an error occurs in MC protocol communication.
Year/Month/Day, Time Displays the date and time of error occurrence.
Clear history Clears the displayed error log.
Error and solution Displays details of the selected error code and corrective actions.
*1 "SNTP OPE. ERROR" (error code: 2710) is stored in the error log only when the time setting at power-ON or reset has
failed.
For results in the case of executing the time setting regularly or by special relay "SM1270" from the sequence program,
check the SNTP status screen or special register "SD1270".
Because the error log is battery backed up, the information is retained even if the power is turned off.
Note that the latch data backup function (to the standard ROM) cannot back up the error log to the standard ROM.
12 - 189
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Status of each connection 1
12
7
Figure 12.43 Ethernet diagnosis (Status of each connection) screen
Table12.13 Ethernet diagnosis (Status of each connection) items 8
Item Description
Host station port number Displays the setting of PLC parameter.
Destination IP address Displays the IP address of the target device.*1
12.6 Built-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis
Destination port No. Displays the port number of the target device.*1
Displays an error code for an error that occurred on the connection.*1
Latest Error Code In the case of MELSOFT connection, only the errors related to Ethernet com-
munication are stored in the Status of each connection.
Protocol
Displays the settings of PLC parameter.
Open system
In TCP connections, displays whether connection with the target device is
TCP status
established or not.*1
Remote password status Displays the remote password status.*2
Unlock error count Displays how many times an unlock error has occurred.*1*3
If this is set for a connection for which illegal accesses are suspected, commu-
Force deactivation status
nication of the connection is disabled. *1*3
*1: UDP connections that function in MELSOFT connection are treated as one connection. Therefore, for multiple connec-
tions, the same information is displayed.
*2: Not displayed when the protocol is UDP and direct connection to GX Developer is used.
*3: The same information is displayed when the protocol is TCP and when multiple MELSOFT connections exist.
12 - 190
(4) Connection status
Figure 12.44 Ethernet diagnosis (Connection status) screen
Table12.14 Ethernet diagnosis (Connection status) items
Item Description
Full duplex/Half duplex Displays whether the line uses the full or half duplex system.
Connection status Displays whether a hub or target device is connected or not.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Displays whether the network is 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
Maximum size of detection Displays the maximum size of discarded broadcast message data.
Amount of data per unit time (latest) Displays the total size of discarded broadcast message data per unit time.
Displays the maximum total size of discarded broadcast message data per unit
Amount of data per unit time (maximum)
time.
Clear line status Clears the number of receive buffer overflows and broadcast information.
12 - 191
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(5) SNTP status 1
12
7
Figure 12.45 Ethernet diagnosis (SNTP status) screen
Table12.15 Ethernet diagnosis (SNTP status) items 8
Item Description
Latest time setting Displays the operation result of the latest time setting.
Execution time Displays the time data collected by the latest time setting execution.
12.6 Built-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis
Displays the time that was required for time data acquisition in the latest time
Time required for response (ms)
setting execution.
Execute time setting Adjusts the clock time.
12 - 192
(6) PING test
PING test is a test by which existence of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU can be checked from GX Developer.
Performing a PING test for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU can determine the following:
• Whether the line is connected to the target Built-in Ethernet port QCPU properly
• Whether the parameters for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU are set correctly
(a) Executing a PING test by GX Developer
In GX Developer, open the Ethernet diagnosis screen and click [PING test]
Figure 12.46 Ethernet diagnosis screen
12 - 193
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.16 PING test items
1
Item Description Setting range
IP address Specify the IP address of the PING test target station. (Target station's IP address)
Address speci-
fication
IP address input form Select a form for IP address entry. Decimal/Hexadecimal 2
IP address/Host name Specify a host name of the PING test target station. -
In the Result area, displays the test results for the host
Display the host name. -
name corresponding to the IP address.
3
1 to 8192 bytes
Specify any size of the system data that are sent during a
Specify the data size. (For the Built-in Ethernet port
PING test.
QCPU, 1460 bytes or less)
Setting Options Specify the time of the
12
communication time Specify the time to wait for PING test completion. 1 to 30 seconds
check.
Specify the number of
• Specify the number of times. 5
Specify the number of transmissions. No. of times: 1 to 50
transmissions.
• Execute till interrupting
Result Displays PING test results. - 6
Displays the total number of packet transmissions and
Success/transmissions -
the number of successful transmissions.
7
If failed, check the following and run the PING test again.
• The Built-in Ethernet port QCPU installation to the base unit
• Connection to Ethernet
8
• Respective parameters written to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
• Built-in Ethernet port QCPU operating status (whether an error has occurred or not)
• Respective IP addresses set in GX Developer and PING test target stations
• Subnet addresses set in GX Developer and PING test target stations when transmissions do not pass through any
12.6 Built-in Ethernet Port Diagnosis
router
12 - 194
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
Special relays, SM, are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the Programmable
Controller.
For this reason, they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal
internal relays.
However, they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module.
The heading descriptions in the following special relay lists are shown in 3.1.
Table12.17 Explanation of special relay list
Item Function of Item
Number • Indicates special relay number
Name • Indicates name of special relay
Meaning • Indicates contents of special relay
Explanation • Discusses contents of special relay in more detail
• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and, if it is set by the system, when setting is performed.
<Set by>
S : Set by system
U : Set by user (sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer)
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set>
Indicated only for registers set by system
Set by
Each END : Set during each END processing
(When set)
Initial : Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or when going from STOP
to RUN)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when instruction is executed
Request : Set only when there is a user request (through SM, etc.)
System switching : Set when system switching is executed.
• Indicates the corresponding special relay (M9 ) of the ACPU.
Corresponding (When the contents are changed, the special relay is represented M9 format change. Incompatible with the
ACPU M9 Q00J/Q00/Q01 and QnPRH.)
• New indicates the special relay newly added to the Q series CPU module.
Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name.
QCPU : Indicates all the Q series CPU modules.
Q00J/Q00/Q01 : Indicates the Basic model QCPU.
Corresponding Qn(H) : Indicates the High Performance model QCPU.
CPU QnPH : Indicates the Process CPU.
QnPRH : Indicates the Redundant CPU.
QnU : Indicates the Universal model QCPU
Each CPU module model name: Indicates the relevant specific CPU module. (Example: Q02U)
For details on the following items, refer to the following manuals:
• Networks Manual of the corresponding network module
• SFC QCPU(Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
Do not change the values of special relays set by the system with user program or device test operations.
Doing so may result in system downtime or communication fault.
12 - 195
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Diagnostic Information
1
Table12.18 Special relay
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by ponding Corresponding 2
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
(Includes when an annunciator is ON, and when an
error is detected with CHK instruction) S (Error) New
Qn(H)
QnPH
3
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to QnPRH
OFF : No error normal thereafter.
SM0 Diagnostic errors
ON : Error
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
(Includes when an annunciator is ON)
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to
S (Error) New
Q00J/Q00/Q01
QnU
12
normal thereafter.
• Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
(Does not include when an annunciator is ON or Qn(H)
when an error is detected by the CHK instruction) S (Error) M9008 QnPH
OFF : No self-diagnosis • Remains ON even if the condition is restored to QnPRH
SM1 Self-diagnostic error errors normal thereafter.
ON : Self-diagnosis • Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis.
(Does not include when an annunciator is ON) Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Remains ON even if the condition is restored to
normal thereafter.
S (Error) New
QnU 6
OFF : No error common
Error common information • When SM0 is ON, turns ON if there is error common
SM5 S (Error) New
information ON : Error common information
information 7
OFF : No error individual QCPU
Error individual information • When SM0 is ON, turns ON if there is error individual
SM16 S (Error) New
information ON : Error individual information
information
SM50 Error reset OFF ON: Error reset • Conducts error reset operation U New 8
• Turns ON if battery voltage at CPU module or
Qn(H)
memory card drops below rated value.
QnPH
• Remains ON even if the battery voltage returns to S (Error) M9007
QnPRH
normal thereafter.
QnU
OFF : Normal • Synchronizes with the BAT. LED.
SM51 Battery low latch
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
ON : Battery low • Turns ON if battery voltage at CPU module drops
below rated value.
• Remains ON even if the battery voltage returns to S (Error) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
normal thereafter.
• Synchronous with ERR. LED
OFF : Normal • Same as SM51, but turns OFF subsequently when
SM52 Battery low S (Error) M9006
ON : Battery low battery voltage returns to normal.
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within
20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply
module.
OFF : AC/DC DOWN not Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then
QCPU
AC/DC DOWN detected ON.
SM53 S (Error) M9005
detection ON : AC/DC DOWN • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within
detected 10ms occurs during use of the DC power supply
module.
Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then
ON.
12 - 196
Table12.18 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• ON when operation error is generated
OFF : Normal
SM56 Operation error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal S (Error) M9011
ON : Operation error
thereafter.
• Turns ON if there is at least one output module
whose fuse has blown.
OFF : Normal
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
SM60 Blown fuse detection ON : Module with blown S (Error) M9000
thereafter.
fuse
• Blown fuse status is checked even for remote I/O
station output modules. QCPU
• Turns ON if the I/O module differs from the status
registered at power on.
OFF : Normal • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
SM61 I/O module verify error S (Error) M9002
ON : Error thereafter.
• I/O module verification is also conducted for remote
I/O station modules.
OFF : Not detected S (Instruction
SM62 Annunciator detection • Goes ON if even one annunciator (F) goes ON. M9009
ON : Detected execution)
• Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction. Qn(H)
OFF : Not detected S (Instruction
SM80 CHK detection • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal New QnPH
ON : Detected execution)
thereafter. QnPRH
Corresponds
SM90 M9108
to SD90
Corresponds
SM91 M9109
to SD91
Corresponds
SM92 M9110
to SD92
Corresponds
SM93 M9111
to SD93
• Goes ON when measurement of
Startup of monitoring OFF : Not started(monitoring Corresponds
SM94 step transition monitoring timer is M9112 Qn(H)
timer for step transition timer reset) to SD94
commenced. U QnPH
(Enabled only when ON : Started(monitoring Corresponds
SM95 • Resets step transition monitoring M9113 QnPRH
SFC program exists) timer started) to SD95 timer when it goes OFF.
Corresponds
SM96 M9114
to SD96
Corresponds
SM97 New
to SD97
Corresponds
SM98 New
to SD98
Corresponds
SM99 New
to SD99
OFF : Serial communication
• Stores the setting of whether the serial
Serial communication function is not used. S (Power-ON or
SM100 communication function is used or not in the serial
function using flag ON : Serial communication reset)
communication setting parameter
function is used.
OFF : GX Developer • Stores whether the device that is communicating via
Communication S (RS232
SM101 ON : MC protocol the RS-232 interface is GX Developer or MC protocol
protocol status flag communication)
communication device communication device
• Turns ON when an abnormal protocol was used to
make communication in the serial communication
OFF : Normal
SM110 Protocol error function. S (Error)
ON : Abnormal
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter Q00/Q01
Q00UJ
• Turns ON when the mode used to make
New Q00U
communication was different from the setting in the
OFF : Normal Q01U
SM111 Communication status serial communication function. S (Error)
ON : Abnormal Q02U*7
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.
• Turns ON when the error codes stored in SM110,
SM112 Error information clear ON : Cleared SM111, SD110 and SD111 are cleared. (Activated U
when turned from OFF to ON)
OFF : Normal • Turns ON when an overrun error occurred in the
SM113 Overrun error S (Error)
ON : Abnormal serial communication error.
OFF : Normal • Turns ON when a parity error occurred in the serial
SM114 Parity error S (Error)
ON : Abnormal communication error.
OFF : Normal • Turns ON when a framing error occurred in the serial
SM115 Framing error S (Error)
ON : Abnormal communication error.
• Turns ON when the data is written to the program
cache memory.
Program memory OFF : Completed • Turns OFF when the program memory batch transfer
S (When status
SM165 batch transfer ON : Not being executed or is completed. New QnU* 6
changed)
execution status Not completed • Remains ON if the program memory batch transfer is
not executed after the data is written to the program
cache memory.
*6: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10012" or later.
• Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
*7: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10102" or later.
12 - 197
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) System information
1
Table12.19 Special relay
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by ponding Corresponding 2
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Qn(H)
SM202 LED OFF command OFF ON : LED OFF
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the LEDs
corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off
U New
QnPH
QnPRH
3
QnU
SM203 STOP contact STOP status • Goes ON at STOP status S (Status change) M9042
SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status
OFF : PAUSE disabled
• Goes ON at PAUSE status
• PAUSE status is entered if this relay is ON when the
S (Status change) M9041
12
SM206 PAUSE enable coil U M9040
ON : PAUSE enabled PAUSE contact goes ON
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON and after END
OFF : Ignored instruction execution of subsequent scan, clock data QCPU
SM210 Clock data set request U M9025
ON : Set request stored in SD210 to SD213 are written to the CPU
module.
OFF : No error • ON when error is generated in clock data (SD210 to
SM211 Clock data error S (Request) M9026
ON : Error SD213) value, and OFF if no error is detected.
SM213
Clock data read
request
OFF : Ignored
ON : Read request
• When this relay is ON, clock data is read to SD210 to
SD213 as BCD values.
U M9028 6
Turned ON when access can be made to the CPU
OFF : CPU No.1 preparation
module No.1 from the other CPU module at power-on
CPU No.1 preparation uncompleted
SM220 or reset operation. SM220 is used as interlock for QnU
completed ON : CPU No.1 preparation
completed
accessing the CPU module No.1 when the multiple
CPU synchronous setting is asynchronous. 7
Turned ON when access can be made to the CPU
OFF : CPU No.2 preparation
module No.2 from the other CPU module at power-on
CPU No.2 preparation uncompleted
SM221 or reset operation. SM221 is used as interlock for
completed ON : CPU No.2 preparation
completed
accessing the CPU module No.2 when the multiple
CPU synchronous setting is asynchronous. S (When status
8
New QnU*8
Turned ON when access can be made to the CPU changed)
OFF : CPU No.3 preparation
module No.3 from the other CPU module at power-on
CPU No.3 preparation uncompleted
SM222 or reset operation. SM222 is used as interlock for
completed ON : CPU No.3 preparation
accessing the CPU module No.3 when the multiple
completed
CPU synchronous setting is asynchronous.
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
Turned ON when access can be made to the CPU
OFF : CPU No.4 preparation
module No.4 from the other CPU module at power-on
CPU No.4 preparation uncompleted
SM223 or reset operation. SM223 is used as interlock for QnU*5
completed ON : CPU No.4 preparation
accessing the CPU module No.4 when the multiple
completed
CPU synchronous setting is asynchronous.
OFF : Online module change
Online module change is not in progress • Turns on during online module change. (for host S (During online
SM235 New
flag ON : Online module change CPU) module change)
in progress
QnPH
OFF : Online module change • Turns ON for one scan after online module change is
S (When online
Online module change incomplete complete.
SM236 module change is New
complete flag ON : Online module change • This contact point can only be used by the scan
complete)
complete program. (for host CPU)
• Selects whether to check a device range during
OFF : Device range checked
Device range check execution of the BMOV, FMOV or DFMOV
SM237 ON : Device range not U New QnU*6
inhibit flag instruction (only when the conditions for subset
checked
processing are established).
*5: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*6: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10012" or later.
• Q13UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
*8: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 198
Table12.19 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• Goes OFF when reset of the No. 1 CPU is canceled.
OFF : No. 1 CPU reset • Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is resetting
SM240 No. 1 CPU reset flag cancel (including the case where the CPU module is
ON : No. 1 CPU resetting removed from the base).
The other CPUs are also put in reset status.
• Goes OFF when reset of the No. 2 CPU is canceled.
• Comes ON when the No. 2 CPU is resetting
OFF : No. 2 CPU reset Q00/Q01*1
(including the case where the CPU module is
SM241 No. 2 CPU reset flag cancel Qn(H)*1
removed from the base).
ON : No. 2 CPU resetting QnPH
The other CPUs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error
code: 7000). QnU*8
• Goes OFF when reset of the No. 3 CPU is canceled.
• Comes ON when the No. 3 CPU is resetting
OFF : No. 3 CPU reset
(including the case where the CPU module is
SM242 No. 3 CPU reset flag cancel
removed from the base).
ON : No. 3 CPU resetting
The other CPUs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error
code: 7000).
• Goes OFF when reset of the No. 4 CPU is canceled. S (Status change) New
• Comes ON when the No. 4 CPU is resetting
OFF : No. 4 CPU reset Qn(H)*1
(including the case where the CPU module is
SM243 No. 4 CPU reset flag cancel QnPH
removed from the base).
ON : No. 4 CPU resetting QnU*5
The other CPUs result in "MULTI CPU DOWN" (error
code: 7000).
• Goes OFF when the No. 1 CPU is normal (including
OFF : No. 1 CPU normal
a continuation error).
SM244 No. 1 CPU error flag ON : No. 1 CPU during stop
• Comes ON when the No. 1 CPU is during a stop
error
error.
• Goes OFF when the No. 2 CPU is normal (including Q00/Q01*1
OFF : No. 2 CPU normal
a continuation error). Qn(H)*1
SM245 No. 2 CPU error flag ON : No. 2 CPU during stop
• Comes ON when the No. 2 CPU is during a stop QnPH
error
error. QnU*8
• Goes OFF when the No. 3 CPU is normal (including
OFF : No. 3 CPU normal
a continuation error).
SM246 No. 3 CPU error flag ON : No. 3 CPU during stop
• Comes ON when the No. 3 CPU is during a stop
error
error.
• Goes OFF when the No. 4 CPU is normal (including
OFF : No. 4 CPU normal Qn(H)*1
a continuation error).
SM247 No. 4 CPU error flag ON : No. 4 CPU during stop S (Status change) New QnPH
• Comes ON when the No. 4 CPU is during a stop
error QnU*5
error
OFF : Ignored • When this relay goes from OFF to ON, maximum
SM250 Max. loaded I/O read U New
ON : Read loaded I/O number is read to SD250.
Qn(H)
• Effective for the batch refresh (also effective for the QnPH
low speed cyclic) QnPRH
• Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or
to receive all slave stations in the MELSECNET/H.
• Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or Qn(H)*2
All stations refresh OFF : Refresh arrival station to receive all slave stations in the CC-Link IE QnPH*6
SM254 U New
command ON : Refresh all stations controller network . QnPRH*6
• Effective for the batch refresh (also effective for the
low speed cyclic)
• Specify whether to receive only arrival station or all QnU
stations in the MELSECNET/H or CC-Link IE
controller network.
*1: This applies to the CPU of function version B or later.
*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*5: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*6: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
*8: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 199
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.19 Special relay
Corres- 1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : Operative network
• Goes ON for standby network(If no designation has 2
SM255 been made concerning active or standby, active is S (Initial) New
ON : Standby network
MELSECNET/10, assumed.)
MELSECNET/H OFF : Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.)
SM256 U New
SM257
module 1 information ON : Does not read
OFF : Writes
indicate whether to read from the link module.
• For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.),
U New
3
ON : Does not write designate whether to write to the link module.
• Goes ON for standby network
OFF : Operative network
SM260 (If no designation has been made concerning active S (Initial) New
ON : Standby network
MELSECNET/10,
MELSECNET/H OFF : Reads
or standby, active is assumed.)
• For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.)
12
SM261 U New
module 2 information ON : Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module.
OFF : Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.),
SM262 U New
ON : Does not write designate whether to write to the link module.
• Goes ON for standby network Qn(H)
OFF : Operative network
SM265 (If no designation has been made concerning active S (Initial) New QnPH
ON : Standby network
MELSECNET/10, or standby, active is assumed.) QnPRH
MELSECNET/H OFF : Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.)
SM266 U New
module 3 information ON : Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module.
SM267
OFF : Writes
ON : Does not write
• For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.),
designate whether to write to the link module.
U New
6
• Goes ON for standby network
OFF : Operative network
SM270 (If no designation has been made concerning active S (Initial) New
ON : Standby network
or standby, active is assumed.)
SM271
MELSECNET/10,
MELSECNET/H OFF : Reads • For refresh from link to CPU module (B, W, etc.)
U New
7
module 4 information ON : Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module.
OFF : Writes • For refresh from CPU module to link (B, W, etc.),
SM272 U New
ON : Does not write designate whether to write to the link module.
SM280 CC-Link error
OFF : Normal
ON : Error
• Goes ON when a CC-Link error is detected in any of
the installed CC-Link module. Goes OFF when S (Status change) New 8
normal operation is restored.
• This flag is enabled when the time reserved for
communication processing is set in SD315.
• Turns ON to delay the END processing by the time
set in SD315 in order to perform communication
Communication
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
OFF : Without delay processing.
SM315 reserved time delay U New Q00J/Q00/Q01
ON : With delay (The scan time increases by the period set in
enable/disable flag
SD315.)
• Turns OFF to perform the END processing without a
delay of the time set in SD315 when there is no
communication processing. (Defaults to OFF)
Presence/absence of OFF : SFC program absent • Turns ON when an SFC program is registered.
SM320 S (Initial) M9100
SFC program ON : SFC program present • OFF when an SFC program is not registered.
Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
• Initial value is set at the same value as SM320.
Qn(H)
OFF : SFC program not (Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present.)
QnPH
Start/stop SFC executed (stop) • Turn this relay from ON to OFF to stop program M9101form
SM321 S (Initial)/U QnPRH
program ON : SFC program executed execution. at change
QnU
(start) • Turn this relay from OFF to ON to resume program
execution.
*1: This applies to the CPU of function version B or later.
12 - 200
Table12.19 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• The SFC program starting mode in the SFC setting
of the PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial
SFC program start OFF : Initial start M9102form
SM322 value. S (Initial)/U
status ON : Resume start at change
AT initial start: OFF
At continued start: ON
OFF : Continuous transition
Presence/absence of Set the presence/absence of continuous transition for
not effective
SM323 continuous transition the block where "Continuous transition bit" of the SFC U M9103
ON : Continuous transition
for entire block data device has not been set.
effective
• OFF during operation in the continuous transition S (Instruction
M9104 Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
OFF : When transition is mode or during continuous transition, and ON when execution)
Continuous transition Qn(H)
SM324 executed continuous transition is not executed.
prevention flag QnPH
ON : When no transition • Always ON during operation in the no continuous S (Status change) New
QnPRH
transition mode.
QnU
Select whether the coil outputs of the active steps are
held or not at the time of a block stop.
• As the initial value, the output mode at a block stop in
Output mode at block OFF : OFF
SM325 the parameter is OFF when the coil outputs are OFF, S (Initial)/U M9196
stop ON : Preserves
and ON when the coil outputs are held.
• All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF.
• Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON.
Selects the device status when the stopped CPU is run
SFC device clear OFF : Clear device
SM326 after the sequence program or SFC program has been U New
mode ON : Preserves device
modified when the SFC program exists.
Qn(H)
OFF : Hold step output Select the device status at the time of switching from QnPH
Output during end step S (Initial)/U
SM327 turned OFF (cleared) STOP to program write to RUN.(All devices except the New QnPRH
execution QnU
ON : Hold step output held step relay)
U Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
Select whether clear processing will be performed or
not if active steps other than the ones being held exist
in the block when the end step is reached.?
OFF : Clear processing is • When this relay turns OFF, all active steps are
Clear processing
performed. forcibly terminated to terminate the block. Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
SM328 mode when end step U New
ON : Clear processing is not • When this relay is ON, the execution of the block is QnU
is reached
performed. continued as-is.
• If active steps other than the ones being held do not
exist when the end step is reached, the steps being
held are terminated to terminate the block.
Select whether the low speed execution type program
will be executed in the asynchronous mode or in the
synchronous mode.
• Asynchronous mode (this relay is turned OFF.)
Mode in which the operation of the low speed
Operation mode for
OFF : Asynchronous mode execution type program is performed continuously Qn(H)
SM330 low speed execution U New
ON : Synchronous mode within the excess time. QnPH
type program
• Synchronous mode (this relay is turned ON.)
Mode in which the operation of the low speed
execution type program is not performed
continuously and operation is performed from the
next scan if there is excess time.
• Indicates whether the normal SFC program is being
Normal SFC program OFF : Not executed executed or not.
SM331
execution status ON : Being executed • Used as an SFC control instruction execution
Qn(H)*3
interlock.
S (Status change) New QnPH*4
Program execution • Indicates whether the program execution
QnPRH
management SFC OFF : Not executed management SFC program is being executed or not.
SM332
program execution ON : Being executed • Used as an SFC control instruction execution
status interlock.
• The status of the intelligent function module access
ON indicates completion of instruction executed immediately before is stored. Qn(H)
SM390 Access execution flag intelligent function module (This data is overwritten when the intelligent function S (Status change) New QnPH
access module access instruction is executed again.) QnPRH
• Used by the user in a program as a completion bit.
GINT instruction Indicates execution status of the S(P).GINT instruction.
OFF : Not executed S (Instruction
SM391 execution completion • Turned OFF before the instruction is executed. New QnU
ON : Execution completed execution)
flag • Turned ON after the instruction is completed.
*1: This applies to the CPU of function version B or later.
*3: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04122" or later.
*4: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
12 - 201
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) System clocks/counters
1
Table12.20 Special relay
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
2
M9
ON S (Every END
SM400 Always ON
OFF
• Normally is ON
processing)
M9036
QCPU
3
ON S (Every END
SM401 Always OFF • Normally is OFF M9037
OFF processing)
• After RUN, ON for 1 scan only.
• This connection can be used for scan execution type
12
programs only.
• When an initial execution type program is used, this Qn(H)
relay turns OFF at the END processing of the scan S (Every END QnPH
execution type program in the first scan after RUN. M9038
After RUN, ON for 1 ON processing) QnPRH
SM402 1 scan
scan only OFF ON QnU
Initial 1 scan of scan
OFF
execution execution type
type program program
• After RUN, ON for 1 scan only.
S (Every END
New Q00J/Q00/Q01
6
processing)
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only.
• This connection can be used for scan execution type
programs only.
• When an initial execution type program is used, this 7
relay turns OFF at the END processing of the scan Qn(H)
execution type program in the first scan after RUN. S (Every END QnPH
M9039
After RUN, OFF for 1 ON processing) QnPRH
SM403 1 scan ON
QnU
8
scan only OFF OFF
Initial 1 scan of scan
execution execution type
type program program
S (Every END
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only. New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
Low speed execution • After RUN, ON for 1 scan only.
ON S (Every END
SM404 type programON for 1 1 scan • This connection can be used for low speed execution type New
OFF processing)
scan only after RUN programs only.
Qn(H)
Low speed execution QnPH
• After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only.
type programAfter ON S (Every END
SM405 1 scan • This connection can be used for low speed execution type New
RUN, OFF for 1 scan OFF processing)
programs only.
only
• Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5-ms
interval.
• When Programmable Controller power supply is Qn(H)
0.005s turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, QnPH
SM409 0.01 second clock 0.005s S (Status change) New
goes from OFF to start. QnPRH
(Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the QnU
designated time has elapsed during the execution of
the program.)
SM410 0.1 second clock 0.05s M9030
0.05s
• Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each
designated time interval.
SM411 0.2 second clock 0.1s • When Programmable Controller power supply is M9031
0.1s
turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed,
S (Status change)
goes from OFF to start.
SM412 1 second clock 0.5s (Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the M9032
0.5s
designated time has elapsed during the execution of
the program.)
SM413 2 second clock 1s M9033 QCPU
1s
• This relay alternates between ON and OFF at
intervals of the time (unit: s) specified in SD414.
• When Programmable Controller power supply is
ns turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, M9034form
SM414 2n second clock ns S (Status change)
goes from OFF to start. at change
(Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the
designated time has elapsed during the execution of
the program.)
12 - 202
Table12.20 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• This relay alternates between ON and OFF at
intervals of the time (unit: ms) specified in SD415.
• When Programmable Controller power supply is Qn(H)
n(ms) turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, QnPH
SM415 2n (ms) clock n(ms) S (Status change) New
goes from OFF to start. QnPRH
(Note that the ON-OFF status changes when the QnU
designated time has elapsed during the execution of
the program.)
SM420 User timing clock No.0 • Relay repeats ON/OFF switching at fixed scan M9020
SM421 User timing clock No.1 intervals. M9021
• When Programmable Controller power supply is
SM422 User timing clock No.2 turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed, M9022
SM423 User timing clock No.3 goes from OFF to start. M9023
(For the redundant CPU, however, this relay is
S (Every END
always OFF after system switching.) QCPU
processing)
• The ON/OFF intervals are set with the DUTY
n2 scan n2 scan instruction
SM424 User timing clock No.4 M9024
DUTY n1 n2 SM420
n1 scan
n1: ON scan interval
n2: OFF scan interval
SM430 User timing clock No.5
SM431 User timing clock No.6
S (Every END Qn(H)
SM432 User timing clock No.7 • For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs New
processing) QnPH
SM433 User timing clock No.8
SM434 User timing clock No.9
(5) Scan information
Table12.21 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : Completed or not
Low speed program • Goes ON when low speed execution type program is S (Every END Qn(H)
SM510 executed New
execution flag executed. processing) QnPH
ON : Execution under way.
• When this relay goes from OFF to ON, the module Qn(H)
Reads module service OFF : Ignored
SM551 service interval designated by SD550 is read to U New QnPH
interval ON : Read
SD551 to SD552. QnPRH
(6) I/O refresh
Table12.22 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• When this special relay is turned ON, I/O refresh is
performed after execution of the first program, and
the next program is then executed.
Program to program I/ OFF : Not refreshed
SM580 When a sequence program and an SFC program are U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*1
O refresh ON : Refreshed
to be executed, the sequence program is executed,
I/O refresh is performed, and the SFC program is
then executed.
*1: This applies to the CPU of function version B or later.
12 - 203
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(7) Memory cards
Table12.23 Special relay
1
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU 2
M9
Memory card usable OFF : Unusable
SM600 • ON when memory card is ready for use by user S (Status change) New
flags ON : Use enabled
SM601
Memory card protect
flag
OFF : No protect
ON : Protect
• Goes ON when memory card protect switch is ON S (Status change) New 3
OFF : No drive 1
SM602 Drive 1 flag • Turns ON when the mounted memory card is RAM S (Status change) New
ON : Drive 1 present
OFF : No drive 2
SM603 Drive 2 flag
Memory card in-use
ON : Drive 2 present
OFF : Not used
• Turns ON when the mounted memory card is ROM S (Status change) New
Qn(H)
QnPH
12
SM604 • Goes ON when memory card is in use S (Status change) New
flag ON : In use QnPRH
OFF : Remove/insert enabled QnU*1
Memory card remove/ • Goes ON when memory card cannot be inserted or
SM605 ON : Remove/insert U New
insert prohibit flag removed
prohibited
• Turned ON by user to enable the removal/insertion
of memory card.
OFF : Remove/insert
Memory card remove/ • Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is
SM609 prohibited S/U New
insert enable flag removed.
ON : Remove/insert enabled
• This contact can be used only when SM604 and
SM605 are OFF.
6
OFF : Unusable
SM620 Drive 3/4 usable flags • Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU
ON : Use enabled
OFF : No drive 3
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H) 7
SM622 Drive 3 flag • Always ON S (Initial) New QnPH
ON : Drive 3 present
QnPRH
QnU*2
SM623 Drive 4 flag
OFF : No drive 4
ON : Drive 4 present
• Always ON S (Initial) New QCPU 8
Qn(H)
OFF : Not used • Goes ON when the file within Drive 3 (standard QnPH
SM624 Drive 3/4 in-use flag S (Status change) New
ON : In use RAM) or Drive 4 (standard ROM) is used. QnPRH
QnU
Q00J/Q00/Q01
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
Qn(H)
OFF : File register not used
SM640 File register use • Goes ON when file register is in use S (Status change) New QnPH
ON : File register in use
QnPRH
QnU*2
*1: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
*2: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 204
Table12.23 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Qn(H)
OFF : File register not used QnPH
SM650 Comment use • Goes ON when comment file is in use S (Status change) New
ON : File register in use QnPRH
QnU
OFF : Internal memory
Qn(H)
execution • Goes ON while boot operation is in process
S (Status change) New QnPH
ON : Boot operation in • Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF
QnPRH
progress
SM660 Boot operation
OFF : Program memory
execution Q00J/Q00/Q01
• Goes ON while boot operation is in process S (Status change) New
ON : Boot operation in QnU*1
progress
• Turned ON when latch data backup to the standard
Latch data backup to
OFF : Not completed ROM is completed.
SM671 standard ROM S (Status change) New QnU
ON : Completed • Time when the latch data backup to the standard
completion flag
ROM was performed is stored in SD672 or later.
• Goes ON when access is made to area outside the
Memory card file Qn(H)
OFF : Within access range range of file register of memory card(Set within END
SM672 register access range S/U New QnPH
ON : Outside access range processing.)
flag QnPRH
• Reset at user program
• Turned ON when data cannot be backuped to the
Error completion of
OFF : No Error standard ROM by the latch data backup normally.
SM675 latch data backup to S New
ON : Error • Turned OFF when data is backuped to the standard
standard ROM
ROM by the latch data backup normally.
• If latch data backup is performed when SM676 is
ON, restore the data every time turning ON from
Specification of OFF the power supply from the next power-on.
OFF : Not specified
SM676 restration repeated • Delete the backuped latch data, or restore the data U New
ON : Specified
execution every time turning ON from OFF the power supply
until the latch data backup operation will be executed
again.
OFF : Write error • Turns ON if a write error is detected at writing to
Program memory write
SM680 ON : Write not executed/ program memory (flash ROM). S (At write) New
error
normal Turns OFF by the write direction.
• Turns ON when writing to the program memory (flash
Program memory OFF : During writing
SM681 ROM) is in progress, and turns OFF when writing is S (At write) New QnU
writing flag ON : Write not executed
completed.
OFF : Overwrite count is
Program memory
100,000 or more • Turns ON when the overwrite count of program
SM682 overwrite count error S (At write) New
ON : Overwrite count is less memory (flash ROM) reaches 100,000.
flag
than 100,000
OFF : Write error • Turns ON when write error is detected at writing to
Standard ROM write
SM685 ON : Write not executed/ standard ROM (flash ROM). S (At write) New
error
normal • Turns OFF by the write direction.
• Turns ON when writing to the standard ROM (flash
Standard ROM writing OFF : During overwriting
SM686 ROM) is in progress, and turns OFF when writing is S (At write) New
flag ON : Overwrite not executed
completed.
OFF : Overwrite count is
Standard ROM • Turns ON when the overwrite count of standard
100,000 or more
SM687 overwrite count error ROM (flash ROM) reaches 100,000. S (At write) New
ON : Overwrite count is less
flag (It is necessary to change CPU module.)
than 100,000
OFF : Backup start
preparation not
Backup start Turns on when the backup start preparation is
SM691 completed S (Status change) New
preparation status flag completed.
ON : Backup start
preparation completed QnU*3
OFF : Restoration not
Restoration complete Turns on when restoration of the backup data in the
SM692 completed S (Status change) New
flag memory card is completed.
ON : Restoration completed
*1: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
*3: The modules whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later are the relevant models. (Except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU)
12 - 205
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(8) Instruction-Related Special Relays
Table12.24 Special relay
1
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9 2
OFF : Carry OFF S (Instruction
SM700 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction M9012 QCPU
ON : Carry ON execution)
Qn(H)
Switching the number of
3
Number of output • Used for the PR, PRC, BINDA, DBINDA, BINHA, QnPH
SM701 output characters and the U M9049
characters selection DBINHA, BCDDA, DBCDDA, or COMRD instruction QnPRH
output pattern
QnU
OFF : Search next • Designates method to be used by search instruction.
SM702 Search method U New
ON : 2-part search • Data must be arranged for 2-part search.
12
• The sort instruction is used to designate whether
OFF : Ascending order
SM703 Sort order data should be sorted in ascending order or in U New QCPU
ON : Descending order
descending order.
• Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for S (Instruction
New
OFF : Non-match found the BKCMP instruction. execution)
SM704 Block comparison
ON : All match • Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for S (Instruction
New
the DBKCMP instruction. execution)
Turns on when the data to be compared by the DT or
DT/TM instruction OFF : Improper data not QnU*2
TM instruction is not recognized as date data or time S (Instruction
SM709 improper data detected New
data, or the device (3 words) to be compared exceeds execution) or U
detection flag ON : Improper data detected
the specified device range.
CHK instruction OFF : Conditions priority • Remains as originally set when OFF. S (Instruction
Qn(H) 6
SM710 New QnPH
priority ranking flag ON : Pattern priority • CHK priorities updated when ON. execution)
QnPRH
OFF : During DI S (Instruction
SM715 EI flag • ON when EI instruction is being executed. New QCPU
ON : During EI execution)
Turns on when all data conditions are confirmed that 7
they are met by the DBKCMP instruction.
Block comparison
OFF : Mismatch found (Initial execution type program, scan execution type
SM716 (Except an interrupt
ON : No mismatch program, stand-by type program executed from initial
program)
execution type program or scan execution type
program) QnU*2 8
Turns on when all data conditions are confirmed that
S (Instruction
they are met by the DBKCMP instruction. New
Block comparison OFF : Mismatch found execution)
SM717 (Interrupt program, fixed scan execution type program,
(Interrupt program) ON : No mismatch
stand-by type program executed from interrupt program
or fixed scan execution type program)
Turns on when all data conditions are confirmed that
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
Block comparison
OFF : Mismatch found they are met by the DBKCMP instruction.
SM718 (Interrupt program
ON : No mismatch QnU*3
(Interrupt program (I45) or Stand-by type program
(I45))
executed from interrupt program (I45))
OFF : Comment read not • Turns on only during one scan when the processing Qn(H)
Comment read completed of the COMRD or PRC instruction is completed. QnPH
SM720 S (Status change) New
completion flag ON : Comment read • Turns on only during one scan when the processing QnPRH
completed of the COMRD instruction is completed. QnU
• Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the
Qn(H)
SP. FWRITE, SP. FREAD, COMRD, PRC, or LEDC
QnPH
instruction.
• Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the Qn(H)
SP. FWRITE, SP. FREAD, COMRD or LEDC QnPH
OFF : File not accessed instruction. QnPRH
SM721 File being accessed S (Status change) New
ON : File being accessed
• Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the
SP. FWRITE, SP. FREAD, COMRD or SP.DEVST QnU
instruction.
• Turns ON while the ATA card or standard ROM is
QnU*1
being accessed.
OFF : Error detection
BIN/DBIN instruction performed • Turned ON when "OPERATION ERROR" is
SM722 U New QCPU
error disabling flag ON : Error detection not suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction.
performed
*1: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09042" or later.
*2: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*3: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 206
Table12.24 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : Not executed by
• During OFF, XCALL instructions will not be executed
XCALL instruction execution condition
even if execution condition is risen.
SM734 execution condition risen U New Qn(H)*1
• During ON, XCALL instructions will be executed
designation ON : Executed by execution
when execution condition is risen.
condition risen
OFF : SFC comment readout
instruction is • Turns on the instructions, (S(P).SFCSCOMR) to Qn(H)*2
SFC comment readout
inactivated. read the SFC step comments and (S(P).
SM735 instruction in S (status change) New QnPH*3
ON : SFC comment readout SFCTCOMR) to read the SFC transition condition
execution flag QnPRH*3
instruction is comments.
activating.
OFF : Instruction not
MSG instruction S (Instruction Qn(H)
SM738 executed • Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed New
reception flag execution) QnPRH
ON : Instruction execution
Scaling instruction OFF : Search next Determines a search method when the scaling
SM750 U New QnU*8
search method setting ON : 2-part search instruction is executed.
PID bumpless Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
processing OFF : Matched • Specifies whether to match the set value (SV) with Qn(H)
SM774 U New
(for complete ON : Not matched the process value (PV) or not in the manual mode. QnPRH
derivative) QnU
• Select whether link refresh processing will be
OFF : Performs link refresh Q00J/Q00/Q01
performed or not when only communication with the
ON : Performs no link U New Qn(H)
CPU module is made at the execution of the COM
refresh QnPH
Selection of refresh instruction.
processing during
SM775 OFF : Performs refresh Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
COM/CCOM
instruction execution processes other than • Select whether to perform refresh processes other Qn(H)*5
an I/O refresh than an I/O refresh set by SD778 when the COM or U New QnPH*3
ON : Performs refresh set CCOM instruction is executed. QnPRH
by SD778 QnU
• Set whether the local device of the subroutine
Enable/disable local OFF : Local device disabled
SM776 program called at execution of the CALL instruction U New Qn(H)
device at CALL ON : Local device enabled
is valid or invalid. QnPH
Enable/disable local QnPRH
OFF : Local device disabled • Set whether the local device at execution of the
SM777 device in interrupt U New QnU*9
ON : Local device enabled interrupt program is valid or invalid.
program
Q00J/Q00/Q01*4
PID bumpless
OFF : Matched • Specifies whether to match the set value (SV) with Qn(H)*6
SM794 processing(for U New
ON : Not matched the process value (PV) or not in the manual mode. QnPRH
incomplete derivative)
QnU
*1: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "06082" or later.
*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07012" or later.
*3: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*4: This applies to the CPU module of function version B or later.
*5: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04012" or later.
*6: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "05032" or later.
*8: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*9: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 207
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.24 Special relay
Corres- 1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Block information
using multiple CPU
• Turns ON when the number of the remaining blocks
of the dedicated instruction transmission area used S (When
2
OFF : Block is secured for the multiple CPU high-speed transmission
high-speed instruction/END
SM796 ON : Block set by SD796 dedicated instruction(target CPU= CPU No.1) is less New
transmission processing
cannot be secured than the number of blocks specified by SD796.
dedicated instruction executed)
Turns ON at instruction execution. Turns OFF when
(for CPU No.1)
3
the empty area exists at END processing.
• Turns ON when the number of the remaining blocks
Block information of the dedicated instruction transmission area used S (When
using multiple CPU OFF : Block is secured for the multiple CPU high-speed transmission instruction/END
high-speed
SM797 ON : Block set by SD797 dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU No.2) is less New
transmission processing
cannot be secured than the number of blocks specified by SD797.
dedicated instruction executed)
Turns ON at instruction execution. Turns OFF when
(for CPU No.2) the empty area exists at END processing.
• Turns ON when the number of the remaining blocks
QnU*7 12
Block information of the dedicated instruction transmission area used S (When
using multiple CPU OFF : Block is secured for the multiple CPU high-speed transmission instruction/END
high-speed
SM798 ON : Block set by SD798 dedicated instruction (target CPU= CPU No.3) is less New
transmission processing
cannot be secured than the number of blocks specified by SD798.
dedicated instruction executed)
Turns ON at instruction execution. Turns OFF when
(for CPU No.3) the empty area exists at END processing.
• Turns ON when the number of the remaining blocks
Block information of the dedicated instruction transmission area used S (When
using multiple CPU OFF : Block is secured for the multiple CPU high-speed transmission instruction/END
high-speed
SM799 ON : Block set by SD799 dedicated instruction(target CPU= CPU No.4) is less New
transmission processing
than the number of blocks specified by SD799.
6
dedicated instruction cannot be secured
Turns ON at instruction execution. Turns OFF when executed)
(for CPU No.4) the empty area exists at END processing.
*7: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
(9) Debug 7
Table12.25 Special relay
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
8
M9
OFF : Not ready • Switches ON when the trace preparation is
SM800 Trace preparation S (Status change) New
ON : Ready completed
• Trace is started when this relay switches ON.
OFF : Suspend
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
SM801 Trace start • Trace is suspended when this relay switches OFF. U M9047
ON : Start
(All related special Ms switches OFF.)
Trace execution in OFF : Suspend
SM802 • Switches ON during execution of trace. S (Status change) M9046
progress ON : Start Qn(H)
• Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF QnPH
SM803 Trace trigger OFF ON: Start to ON. (Identical to TRACE instruction execution U M9044 QnPRH
status) QnU*1
OFF : Not after trigger
SM804 After trace trigger • Switches ON after trace is triggered. S (Status change) New
ON : After trigger
OFF : Not completed
SM805 Trace completed • Switches ON at completion of trace S (Status change) M9043
ON : End
OFF : Normal
SM826 Trace error • Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace S (Status change) New
ON : Errors
• Even when the trace condition or the trigger
ON : Forced registration
Forced registration condition is established, the sampling trace setting
enabled
SM829 specification of trace can be set to the CPU module by turning SM829 ON U New QnU*1
OFF : Forced registration
setting and registering the sampling trace setting by GX
disabled
Developer.
*1: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 208
(10) A to Q conversion correspondences
Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays
M9000 to M9255 after A to Q conversion.
(However, the Basic model QCPU and Redundant CPU do not support the A to Q
conversion.)
These special relays are all set by the system, and cannot be set by the user program.
To turn them ON/OFF by the user program, change the special relays in the program into
those of QCPU.
However, some of SM1084 and SM1200 to SM1255 (corresponding to M9084 and M9200 to
M9255 before conversion) can be turned ON/OFF by the user program, if they could be
turned ON/OFF by the user program before conversion.For details on the ACPU special
relays, see the user's manuals for the individual CPUs, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/
B Data Link System Reference Manuals
Check "Use special relay/special register from SM/SD1000" for "A-PLC" on the PLC system tab of PLC parameter in GX
Developer when the converted special relays are used with the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and
Universal model QCPU.
When not using the converted special relays, uncheck "Use special relay/special register from SM/SD1000" to save the time
taken for processing special relays.
Remark
The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column.
When a special relay for modification is provided, the device number should be changed to the provided QCPU special
relay.
When is provided, the converted special relay can be used for the device number.
When is provided, the device number does not work with QCPU.
Table12.26 Special relay
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
• Turned on when there is one or more output modules of
which fuse has been blown.
OFF : Normal
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
M9000 SM1000 – Fuse blown ON : Module with blown
thereafter.
fuse
• Output modules of remote I/O stations are also checked
fore fuse condition.
Qn(H)
• Turned on if the status of I/O module is different form QnPH
entered status when power is turned on.
QnU*1
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
I/O module verify OFF : Normal thereafter.
M9002 SM1002 –
error ON : Error • I/O module verification is done also to remote I/O station
modules.
• Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to
SD1123 are reset.
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 209
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.27 Special relay
1
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
• Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms
occurs during use of the AC power supply module.
2
OFF : AC DOWN not
AC DOWN • Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then ON.
M9005 SM1005 – detected
detection • Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms
ON : AC DOWN detected
occurs during use of the DC power supply module.
• Reset when the power supply is switched OFF, then ON.
• Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the
3
OFF : Normal specified.
M9006 SM1006 – Battery low
ON : Battery low • Turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal
thereafter.
OFF : Normal
• Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the
specified.
Qn(H)
QnPH
12
M9007 SM1007 – Battery low latch
ON : Battery low • Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal QnU*1
thereafter.
Self-diagnosis OFF : No error • Turned on when error is found as a result of self-
M9008 SM1008 SM1
error ON : Error diagnosis.
• Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is
Annunciator OFF : No F number detected
M9009 SM1009 SM62 executed.
detection ON : F number detected
• Switched off when SD1124 data is cleared to zero.
• Turned on when operation error occurs during execution
M9011 SM1011 SM56
Operation error
flag
OFF : No error
ON : Error
of application instruction.
• Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
6
thereafter.
OFF : Carry OFF
M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction.
ON : Carry ON
M9016 SM1016
Data memory clear OFF : lgnored
• Clears the data memory including the latch range (other
than special relays and special registers) in remote run Qn(H)
7
flag ON : Output claered
mode from computer, etc. when SM1016 is on. QnPH
• Clears the unlatched data memory (other than special
Data memory clear OFF : lgnored
M9017 SM1017 relays and special registers) in remote run mode from
flag ON : Output claered
computer, etc. when SM1017 is on. 8
• Relay which repeats on/off at intervals of predetermined
User timing clock
M9020 SM1020 – scan.
No.0
• When power is turned on or reset is per-formed, the clock
starts with off.
User timing clock Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction.
M9021 SM1021 –
No.1
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
DUTY n1 n2 SM1020
n2 scan n2 scan
n1: ON scan interval
User timing clock
M9022 SM1022 – n2: OFF scan interval
No.2
n1 scan * : If DUTY instruction, which specified from SM 1020 to
SM 1024 of User timing clock in programs other than
User timing clock a program for a Universal model QCPU, changes the Qn(H)
M9023 SM1023 – QnPH
No.3 programmable controller to the Universal model
QCPU, the special relays SM 420 to 424 will be QnU*1
replaced.
User timing clock
M9024 SM1024 – (Universal model QCPUs cannot specify the special
No.4
relays from SM 1020 to SM1024.)
OFF : Ignored • Writes the clock data stored in SD1025 to SD1028 to the
Clock data set
M9025 SM1025 – ON : Set request present CPU module after the END instruction is executed in the
request
used scan in which SM1025 turned from OFF to ON.
OFF : No error
M9026 SM1026 – Clock data error • Switched on by clock data (SD1025 to SD1028) error
ON : Error
Clock data read OFF : Ignored • Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when
M9028 SM1028 –
request ON : Read request SD1028 is on.
• The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program
to process all data communication requests accepted
Batch processing OFF : Batch processing not during one scan in the END processing of that scan.
of data conducted • The batch processing of the data communication requests Qn(H)
M9029 SM1029
communications ON : Batch processing can be turned on and off during running. QnPH
requests conducted • The default is OFF (processed one at a time for each END
processing in the order in which data communication
requests are accepted).
M9030 SM1030 – 0.1 second clock 0.05s
0.05s
• 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second and 2 second, clocks
M9031 SM1031 – 0.2 second clock 0.1s are generated.
0.1s Qn(H)
• Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even
QnPH
during scan if corresponding time has elapsed.
M9032 SM1032 – 1 second clock 0.5s QnU*1
0.5s • Starts with off when Programmable Controller power
supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed.
M9033 SM1033 – 2 second clock 1s
1s
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 210
Table12.27 Special relay
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
• Alternates between ON and OFF according to the
seconds specified at SD414. (Default: n = 30)
2n minute clock(1 ns • Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even
M9034 SM1034 –
minute clock)*2 ns during scan if corresponding time has elapsed.
• Starts with off when Programmable Controller power
supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed.
ON
M9036 SM1036 – Always ON
OFF • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application Qn(H)
instruction in sequence program. QnPH
ON • SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without regard
M9037 SM1037 – Always OFF QnU*1
to position of key switch on CPU module front. SM1038
OFF
and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN status
except when the key switch is at STOP position, and
ON for 1 scan only ON turned off and on. Switched off if the key switch is in STOP
M9038 SM1038 – 1 scan
after RUN OFF position. SM1038 is on for one scan only and SM1039 is
off for one scan only if the key switch is not in STOP
RUN flag(After position.
ON
M9039 SM1039 – RUN, OFF for 1 1 scan
scan only) OFF
OFF : PAUSE disabled Qn(H)
M9040 SM1040 SM206 PAUSE enable coil • When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or pause
ON : PAUSE enabled QnPH
contact has turned on and if SM1040 is on, PAUSE mode
PAUSE status OFF : PAUSE not in effect is set and SM1041 is turned on.
M9041 SM1041 SM204
contact ON : PAUSE in effect
STOP status OFF : STOP not in effect • Switched on when the RUN key switch or RUN/STOP
M9042 SM1042 SM203 Qn(H)
contact ON : STOP in effect switch is in STOP position.
QnPH
OFF : Sampling trace in • Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed QnU*1
Sampling trace progress the number of times preset by parameter after STRA
M9043 SM1043 SM805
completed ON : Sampling trace instruction is executed.
completed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed.
• Turning on/off SM1044 can execute STRA/STRAR
OFF ON Same as STRA instruction.
instruction (SM1044 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral device.)
execution When switched from OFF to ON: STRA instruction
M9044 SM1044 SM803 Sampling trace
ON OFF Same as STRAR When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR instruction
instruction The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for Qn(H)
execution the sampling trace. QnPH
At scanning, at time Time (10 ms unit)
• The SM1045 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when the
Watchdog timer OFF : Does not reset WDT ZCOM instruction and data communication request batch
M9045 SM1045
(WDT) reset ON : Resets WDT processing are executed (used when the scan time
exceeds 200 ms).
Qn(H)
OFF : Trace not in progress
M9046 SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace • Switched on during sampling trace. QnPH
ON : Trace in progress
QnU*1
OFF : Sampling trace • Sampling trace is not executed unless SM1047 is turned
Sampling trace
M9047 SM1047 SM801 suspended ON.
preparations
ON : Sampling trace started Sampling trace is suspended when SM1047 goes OFF.
• When SM1049 is OFF, characters up to NULL (00H) code
Switching the OFF : Output until NULL
are output.
M9049 SM1049 SM701 number of output code encountered
• When SM1049 is ON, ASCII codes of 16 characters are
characters ON : 16 characters output
output. Qn(H)
• Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction. QnPH
CHG instruction OFF : Enabled
M9051 SM1051 • Switched ON when program transfer is requested.
execution disable ON : Disable
Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete.
• When SM1052 is ON, the SEG instruction is executed as
SEG instruction OFF : 7SEG segment display an I/O partial refresh instruction.
M9052 SM1052
switch ON : I/O partial refresh When SM1052 is OFF, the SEG instruction is executed as
a 7-SEG display instruction.
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
*2: minute clock indicates the name of the special relay (M9034) of the ACPU.
12 - 211
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.27 Special relay
ACPU Special Special
1
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
M9056 SM1056
Main side P, I set
OFF : Other than when P, I
set being requested 2
request ON : P, I set being • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other
requested program (for example subprogram when main program is
OFF : Other than when P, I being run) is complete during run. Automatically switched
3
Sub side P, I set set being requested off when P, I setting is complete.
M9057 SM1057
request ON : P, I set being
requested
Main side P, I set Momentarily ON at P, I set
M9058 SM1058
completion completion • Turned ON once when the P, I set has been completed,
M9059 SM1059
Sub program P, I
set completion
Momentarily ON at P, I set
completion
and then turned OFF again.
12
OFF : Other than when P, I
Sub program 2 P, I set being requested
M9060 SM1060
set request ON : P, I set being • Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other
requested program (for example subprogram when main program is
OFF : Other than when P, I being run) is complete during run. Automatically switched
Sub program 3 P, I set being requested off when P, I setting is complete.
M9061 SM1061
set request ON : P, I set being
requested
M9070 SM1070
A8UPU/
A8PUJrequired
OFF : Read time not
shortened
• Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU/
A8PUJ.
6
search time*3 ON : Read time shortened (In this case, the scan time is extended by 10 %.) Qn(H)
It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not QnPH
7
when the END instruction is processed (to set the END
OFF : Error check executed instruction processing time).
M9084 SM1084 Error check
ON : No error check • Check for fuse blown.
• Check of battery
• Collation check of I/O module
8
• Turns ON when the detail factor of the operation error is
Operation error OFF : No error stored into SD1091.
M9091 SM1091
details flag ON : Error • Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal
thereafter.
OFF : SFC programs not
Presence/absence • Turned on if the SFC program is registered.
M9100 SM1100 SM320 used
of SFC program • Turned off if the SFC program is not registered.
ON : SFC programs used
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
• The value in SM1100 is set as the initial value.
(The relay automatically turns ON when the SFC program
is present.)
Start/stop SFC OFF : SFC programs stop
M9101 SM1101 SM321 • When this relay turns from ON to OFF, execution of the
program ON : SFC programs start
SFC program stops.
• When this relay turns from OFF to ON, execution of the
SFC program resumes.
• The SFC program start mode in the SFC setting of the
SFC program start OFF : Initial start PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial value.
M9102 SM1102 SM322
status ON : Resume start At initial start: OFF
At continue start: ON
*3: The A8UPU/A8PUJ is not available for the QCPU/QnACPU.
12 - 212
Table12.27 Special relay
ACPU Special Special
Corresponding
Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details
CPU
Relay Conversion Modification
OFF : Continuous transition
Presence/absence • Set whether continuous transition will be performed for the
not effective
M9103 SM1103 SM323 of continuous block where the "continuous transition bit" of the SFC
ON : Continuous transition
transition information device is not set.
effective
• OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or
Continuous OFF : When transition is during continuous transition, and ON when continuous
M9104 SM1104 SM324 transition completed transition is not executed.
suspension flag ON : When no transition • Always ON during operation in the no continuous
transition mode.
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9108 SM1108 SM90
start (equivalent of
SD90)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9109 SM1109 SM91
start (equivalent of
SD91)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9110 SM1110 SM92
start (equivalent of
SD92)
Step transition • Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition
OFF : Monitoring timer reset
monitoring timer monitoring timer is started.
M9111 SM1111 SM93 ON : Monitoring timer reset
start (equivalent of Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition
start
SD93) monitoring timer.
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9112 SM1112 SM94
start (equivalent of
SD94) Qn(H)
Step transition QnPH
monitoring timer
M9113 SM1113 SM95
start (equivalent of
SD95)
Step transition
monitoring timer
M9114 SM1114 SM96
start (equivalent of
SD96)
• Selects the operation output when block stop is executed.
ON : Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being used
by using operation output of the step being
Operation output OFF : Coil output OFF
M9196 SM1196 SM325 executed at block stop.
at block stop ON : Coil output ON
OFF : All coil outputs are turned off. (Operation output
by the SET instruction is retained regardless of
the ON/OFF status of SM1196.)
I/O numbers
SM SM
to be
1197 1198
displayed
M9197 SM1197
OFF OFF X/Y0 to 7F0 Switches I/O numbers in the fuse blow module storage
Switch between
X/Y800 to registers (SD1100 to SD1107) and I/O module verify error
blown fuse and I/O ON OFF
FF0 storage registers (SD1116 to SD1123) according to the
verify error display
X/Y1000 to combination of ON/OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198.
OFF ON
17F0
M9198 SM1198
X/Y1800 to
ON ON
1FF0
• Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU module at
Data recovery of
OFF : Data recovery disabled restart when sampling trace/status latch is executed.
M9199 SM1199 online sampling
ON : Data recovery enabled • SM1199 should be ON to execute again. (Unnecessary
trace/status latch
when writing the data again from peripheral devices.)
(11) QCPU with built-in Ethernet port
Table12.28 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
OFF : No time setting function Set this to ON when executing the time setting function
Time setting function
(SNTP client) execution (SNTP client).
SM1270 (SNTP client) U New
ON : Time setting function (Only when the time setting function is in "Use" with the
execution
(SNTP client) execution time setting parameter.) QnU*1
To clear the acumulated numeber (SD979 to 999) of
Remote password OFF : Normal
SM1273 mismatched remote passwords, the setting SM1273 is U New
mismatch count clear ON : Clear
executed.
* 1: This applies to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
12 - 213
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(12) Process control instructions
1
Table12.29 Special relay
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
2
M9
• Specifies whether or not to hold the output value
OFF : No-hold
SM1500 Hold mode
ON : Hold
when a range over occurs for the S.IN instruction
range check.
U New
QnPH 3
• Specifies whether or not the output value is held QnPRH
OFF : No-hold
SM1501 Hold mode when a range over occurs for the S.OUT instruction U New
ON : Hold
range check.
(13) For redundant systems (Host system CPU information *1) 12
SM1510 to SM1599 are only valid for redundant systems.
All off for standalone systems.
Table12.30 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU 6
M9
OFF : Redundant system
backup mode, stand-
• Turns on when the operating mode is redundant
SM1510 Operation mode alone system
ON : Redundant system
system separate.
S (Each END) New
7
separate mode
• Distinguishes between system A and system B.
System A identification • The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected.
SM1511
flag
System A System B
When TRK. CABLE ERR.
(error code: 6210) occurs (Unknown) S (Initial) New
8
System B identification SM1511 ON OFF OFF
SM1512
flag QnPRH
SM1512 OFF ON OFF
Debug mode status OFF : Not in debug mode • Turns on when the redundant system operating
SM1513 S (Initial) New
flag ON : Debug mode mode is set to debug mode.
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
• Indicates operation system status.
Control system • The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected.
SM1515
judgment flag
Control Standby When TRK. CABLE ERR.
system system (error code: 6210) occurs (Unknown) S (Status change) New
Standby system SM1515 ON OFF OFF
SM1516
judgment flag
SM1516 OFF ON OFF
*1: The information of the host CPU module is stored.
12 - 214
Table12.29 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
• Turns on when the CPU module is started up by the
OFF : Power supply on
system switching (switching from the standby system
CPU module startup startup
SM1517 to the control system). Remains OFF when the S (Status change) New
status ON : Operation system
standby system is switched to the control system by
switch start up
a power-ON startup.
• Turns ON once switch between standby system to
Standby system to
ON control system, (ON for 1 scan only) occurs.
SM1518 control system 1 scan S (Each END) New
OFF • This status flag can only be used for scan execution
switching status flag
type programs.
• On the last operation Control System was System
Previous Control
ON B,if power supply is supplied, or reset is released on
SM1519 System Identification 1 scan S (Each END) New
OFF both SYSTEM together,After RUN, ON for 1 scan
Flag
only by System A side.
SM1520 SM1520 Block 1
SM1521 SM1521 Block 2
SM1522 SM1522 Block 3
SM1523 SM1523 Block 4
SM1524 SM1524 Block 5
SM1525 SM1525 Block 6
SM1526 SM1526 Block 7
SM1527 SM1527 Block 8
SM1528 SM1528 Block 9 • When data is transferred
QnPRH
SM1529 SM1529 Block 10 based on the tracking
SM1530 SM1530 Block 11 setting of the redundant
parameter dialog box, the
SM1531 SM1531 Block 12
target block is specified
SM1532 SM1532 Block 13 as trigger.
SM1533 SM1533 Block 14
Data tracking transfer OFF : No trigger • When "Auto Tracking
SM1534 SM1534 Block 15 S (initial)/U New
trigger specification ON : Trigger block No.1" is enabled in
SM1535 SM1535 Block 16 the tracking setting,
SM1536 SM1536 Block 17 SM1520 is turned ON by
the system at power ON/
SM1537 SM1537 Block 18
STOP to RUN. In other
SM1538 SM1538 Block 19 cases, SM1520 to
SM1539 SM1539 Block 20 SM1583 are turned ON
by the user.
SM1540 SM1540 Block 21
SM1541 SM1541 Block 22
SM1542 SM1542 Block 23
SM1543 SM1543 Block 24
SM1544 SM1544 Block 25
SM1545 SM1545 Block 26
SM1546 SM1546 Block 27
SM1547 SM1547 Block 28
SM1548 SM1548 Block 29
12 - 215
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.29 Special relay
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SM1549 SM1549 Block 30
M9
2
SM1550 SM1550 Block 31
SM1551 SM1551 Block 32
SM1552
SM1553
SM1552
SM1553
Block 33
Block 34
3
SM1554 SM1554 Block 35
SM1555 SM1555 Block 36
SM1556
SM1557
SM1556
SM1557
Block 37
Block 38
12
SM1558 SM1558 Block 39
SM1559 SM1559 Block 40
SM1560 SM1560 Block 41 • When data is transferred
SM1561 SM1561 Block 42 based on the tracking
setting of the redundant
SM1562 SM1562 Block 43
parameter dialog box, the
SM1563 SM1563 Block 44 target block is specified
SM1564
SM1565
SM1564
SM1565
Block 45
Block 46
as trigger.
6
Data tracking transfer OFF : No trigger • When "Auto tracking
SM1566 SM1566 Block 47 S (initial)/U New
trigger specification ON : Trigger block No. 1" is enabled in
SM1567 SM1567 Block 48 the tracking setting,
SM1568
SM1569
SM1568
SM1569
Block 49
Block 50
SM1520 is turned ON by
the system at power ON/ 7
STOP to RUN. In other
SM1570 SM1570 Block 51 cases, SM1520 to
SM1571 SM1571 Block 52 SM1583 are turned ON
by the user.
SM1572
SM1573
SM1572
SM1573
Block 53
Block 54
QnPRH
8
SM1574 SM1574 Block 55
SM1575 SM1575 Block 56
SM1576 SM1576 Block 57
SM1577 SM1577 Block 58
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
SM1578 SM1578 Block 59
SM1579 SM1579 Block 60
SM1580 SM1580 Block 61
SM1581 SM1581 Block 62
SM1582 SM1582 Block 63
SM1583 SM1583 Block 64
OFF : System switching
request issuing module • Turns ON when a system switching request is issued
System switching
absent from the network module. The module No. that
SM1590 enable/disable flag S (Each END) New
ON : System switching issued system switching can be checked by SD1590.
from network module
request issuing module • Turns OFF when all bits of SD1590 are OFF.
present
ON : Error is not detected by This flag is used to determine if the new standby station
new standby system at detects 6210:STANDBY during system switching.
Standby system error
system switching This applies to the following switching methods:
SM1591 detection disable flag U New
OFF : Error is detected by • System switching from GX Developer
at system switching
new standby system at • System switching using dedicated instruction
system switching • System switching by the intelligent function module
OFF : Disable user system
• This flag enables system switching by the user from
Enable/disable user switching
SM1592 GX Developer or by dedicated instruction. U New
system switching ON : Enable user system
(SP.CONTSW).
switching
12 - 216
Table12.29 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
Sets the operation for the case accessing buffer
memory of the intelligent function module mounted on
the extension base unit from the standby system CPU
in separate mode.
OFF : “OPERATION ERROR” (error code: 4112) will be
Setting to access
OFF : Error returned when accessing buffer memory of the
SM1593 extension base unit of QnPRH*2
ON : Ignored intelligent function module on the extension base
standby system CPU
unit from the standby system CPU.
ON : No processing is performed when accessing
buffer memory of intelligent function module on U
the extension base unit from the standby system New
CPU.
• When SM1595 is turned from OFF to ON, memory
copy from control system to standby system starts.
OFF : Start memory copy
Memory copy to other Note that when SM1595 is turned from OFF to ON,
SM1595 ON : No memory copy
system start flag memory copy does not start if the I/O No. of the copy
initiated
destination (standby system CPU module: 3D1H) is
not stored in SD1595.
OFF : Memory copy not • Turns on while memory is copied to other system.
Memory copy to other S (Starting to
SM1596 executed • Turns off when memory copy execution has
system status flag copy/finish)
ON : Memory copy executed completed. QnPRH
OFF : Memory copy not
Memory copy to other
completed • Turns on once the memory copying to the other
SM1597 system completion S (finish)/U
ON : Memory copy system has completed.
flag
completed
New
OFF : Copy standard ROM
Copy contents of • If set to on by user, the standard ROM data is not
data
SM1598 standard ROM during copied to the other system while memory copy is U
ON : Standard ROM data is
memory copy executing.
not copied
*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is “09012” or later.
(14) For redundant system (Other system CPU information *1)
SM1600 to SM1650 only valid for the CPU redundant system backup mode, so they cannot
be refreshed during the separate mode.
Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for the SM4651 to SM1699.
SM1600 to SM1699 are all turned off for stand-alone system.
Table12.30 Special relay
Corresp
onding
Set by Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation Host
(When Set) CPU
SM
*2
• Turns on when an error occurs during redundant
Other system error OFF : No error
SM1600 system. Error check (Turns on single bit of SD1600.) S (Each END) – QnPRH
flag ON : Error
• Is off when no errors are present
• Turns on when a diagnostics error occurs. (Includes
Other system OFF : No error error detection when annunciator is ON, and by CHK
SM1610 S (Each END) SM0
diagnostics error ON : Error instruction)
• Corresponds to status of SM0 at other system
OFF : No self diagnostics • Turns on when a self diagnostics error occurs.
Other systems self error occurred (Does not include error detection when annunciator
SM1611 S (Each END) SM1
diagnostics error. ON : Self diagnostics error is ON, and by CHK instruction)
occurred • Corresponds to status of SM1 at other system
OFF : No common error
• Turns on when there is common error information at
Other system common information present
SM1615 other system S (Each END) SM5
error information ON : Common error QnPRH
• Corresponds to status of SM5 at other system
information present
OFF : No individual error
Error individual • Turns on when there is individual error information at
information present
SM1626 information for other other system S (Each END) SM16
ON : Individual error
systems • Corresponds to status of SM16 at other system
information present
By turning this relay from OFF to ON, the continue error
OFF to ON: that occurred in the standby system CPU module can
Standby system
SM1649 Cancels error of standby be canceled. U –
cancel error flag
system Use SD1649 to specify the error code of the error to be
canceled.
*1 Stores other system CPU diagnostic information and system information.
*2 This shows the special relay(SM ) for the host system CPU.
12 - 217
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(15) For redundant system (tracking)
1
Either the backup mode or the second mode is valid for SM1700 to SM1799.
All is turned off for stand-alone system.
Table12.31 Special relay
2
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9 3
Transfer trigger OFF : Transfer not completed • Turns on for one scan, once transfer of block 1 to
SM1700 S (status change)
completion flag ON : Transfer completed block 64 is completed.
(1) Turning this relay from OFF to ON enables
manual system switching during online program
change redundant tracking.
12
After the manual system switching disable status
is canceled, the system automatically turns off
SM1709.
Manual system (2) System switching due to any of the following
ON : Manual system
switching disable/ conditions is executed even during online
switching enabled
enable setting during program change redundant tracking, regardless of S (When
SM1709 (Disable canceled)
online program the status of this relay. executed)/U
OFF : Manual system
change redundant •Power off, reset, hardware failure, CPU stop error
switching disabled
6
tracking (3) In either of the following statuses, the system
switching disable status can also be canceled by
this relay.
•Multiple-block online program change redundant
tracking execution status New QnPRH
•File batch online program change redundant
(1)
tracking execution status
Set whether the tracking of the following data will
7
be executed or not during online program change
redundant tracking.
•Device memory
(Including SM/SD that will automatically execute
tracking)
8
Transfer tracking data OFF : No device tracking •PIDINIT information, S.PIDINIT information, SFC
SM1710 during online program ON : Transfer device information U
change enable flag memory (2) SM1710 can be also used to set whether tracking
will be executed or not while online change of
multiple program blocks or batch of files is being
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
performed to ensure consistency of both systems.
(3) This SM is also transferred form control system
CPU module to standby system CPU module by
tracking data.
12 - 218
Table12.31 Special relay
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
SM1712 SM1712 Block 1
SM1713 SM1713 Block 2
SM1714 SM1714 Block 3
SM1715 SM1715 Block 4
SM1716 SM1716 Block 5
SM1717 SM1717 Block 6
SM1718 SM1718 Block 7
SM1719 SM1719 Block 8
SM1720 SM1720 Block 9
SM1721 SM1721 Block 10
SM1722 SM1722 Block 11
SM1723 SM1723 Block 12
SM1724 SM1724 Block 13
SM1725 SM1725 Block 14
SM1726 SM1726 Block 15
SM1727 SM1727 Block 16
SM1728 SM1728 Block 17
SM1729 SM1729 Block 18
SM1730 SM1730 Block 19
SM1731 SM1731 Block 20
SM1732 SM1732 Block 21
SM1733 SM1733 Block 22
SM1734 SM1734 Block 23
Turns ON only during one
SM1735 Transfer trigger OFF : Transfer uncompleted SM1735 Block 24 scan when the transmission
S (status change) New QnPRH
SM1736 completion flag ON : Transfer completed SM1736 Block 25 of the corresponding block is
completed.
SM1737 SM1737 Block 26
SM1738 SM1738 Block 27
SM1739 SM1739 Block 28
SM1740 SM1740 Block 29
SM1741 SM1741 Block 30
SM1742 SM1742 Block 31
SM1743 SM1743 Block 32
SM1744 SM1744 Block 33
SM1745 SM1745 Block 34
SM1746 SM1746 Block 35
SM1747 SM1747 Block 36
SM1748 SM1748 Block 37
SM1749 SM1749 Block 38
SM1750 SM1750 Block 39
SM1751 SM1751 Block 40
SM1752 SM1752 Block 41
SM1753 SM1753 Block 42
SM1754 SM1754 Block 43
SM1755 SM1755 Block 44
SM1756 SM1756 Block 45
SM1757 SM1757 Block 46
SM1758 SM1758 Block 47
SM1759 SM1759 Block 48
12 - 219
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.31 Special relay
Corres- 1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
M9
SM1760 SM1760 Block 49 2
SM1761 SM1761 Block 50
SM1762 SM1762 Block 51
SM1763 SM1763 Block 52
SM1764
SM1765
SM1764
SM1765
Block 53
Block 54
3
SM1766 SM1766 Block 55 Turns ON only during one
OFF : Transmission
SM1767 Transfer trigger SM1767 Block 56 scan when the transmission
uncompleted S (status change) New QnPRH
SM1768 completion flag SM1768 Block 57 of the corresponding block is
SM1769
ON : Transmission end
SM1769 Block 58 completed. 12
SM1770 SM1770 Block 59
SM1771 SM1771 Block 60
SM1772 SM1772 Block 61
SM1773 SM1773 Block 62
SM1774 SM1774 Block 63
SM1775 SM1775 Block 64
(16) Redundant power supply module information
Table12.32 Special relay
6
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU
M9
CPU 7
OFF : No redundant power • Turns ON when one or more redundant power
supply module with supply modules with input power OFF are detected.
input power OFF • Turns on if any of SD1780 bits is on.
SM1780
Power supply off
detection flag
detected
ON : Redundant power
• Turns off if all bits of SD1780 are off.
• Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the
S (Each END) 8
supply module with redundant main base unit (Q38RB).
input power OFF • When the multiple CPU system is configured, the
detected flags are stored only to the CPU No.1.
• Turns ON when one or more faulty redundant power
OFF : No faulty redundant supply modules are detected.
power supply module • Turns on if any of SD1781 bits is on.
12.7 SPECIAL RELAY LIST
Power supply failure detected • Turns off if all bits of SD1781 are off.
SM1781 S (Each END)
detection flag ON : Faulty redundant • Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the
power supply module redundant main base unit (Q38RB). Qn(H)*2
detected • When the multiple CPU system is configured, the
New QnPH*2
flags are stored only to the CPU No.1. QnPRH
Momentary power • Turns ON when a momentary power failure of the QnU*3
SM1782 failure detection flag input power supply to the power supply 1 or 2 is
for power supply 1 *1 detected one or more times. After turning ON,
remains ON even if the power supply recovers from
the momentary power failure.
OFF : No momentary power • Turns OFF the flag (SM1782, SM1783) of the power
failure detected supply 1/2 when the CPU module starts.
S (Each END)
Momentary power ON : Momentary power • When the input power to one of the redundant power
SM1783 failure detection flag failure detected supply modules turns OFF the corresponding flag
turns OFF.
for power supply 2 *1
• Turns OFF when the main base unit is not the
redundant main base unit (Q38RB).
• When the multiple CPU system is configured, the
flags are stored only to the CPU No.1.
*1: The "power supply 1" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/Q68RB/Q65WRB).
The "power supply 2" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/Q68RB/Q65WRB).
*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04012" or later.
However, for the multiple CPU system configuration, this applies to all CPU modules whose first 5 digits of serial No. are "07032" or later.
*3: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 220
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
The special registers, SD, are internal registers with fixed applications in the Programmable
Controller.
For this reason, it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way
that normal registers are used.
However, data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules.
Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been
made to the contrary.
The heading descriptions in the following special register lists are shown in 4.1.
Table12.33 Descriptions of the special register lists headings
Item Function of Item
Number • Indicates special register number
Name • Indicates name of special register
Meaning • Indicates contents of special register
Explanation • Discusses contents of special register in more detail
• Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user, and, if it is set by the system, when setting is performed.
<Set by>
S : Set by system
U : Set by user (sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer)
S/U : Set by both system and user
<When set>
Set by Indicated only for registers set by system
(When set) Each END : Set during each END processing
Initial : Set only during initial processing (when power supply is turned ON, or when going from STOP to RUN)
Status change : Set only when there is a change in status
Error : Set when error occurs
Instruction execution : Set when instruction is executed
Request : Set only when there is a user request (through SM, etc.)
System switching : Set when system switching is executed.
• Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU
Corresponding ACPU (When the contents are changed, the special register is represented D9 format change. Incompatible with the Q00J/Q00/Q01
M9 and QnPRH.)
• New indicates the special register newly added to the Q series CPU module.
Indicates the relevant CPU module.
QCPU : Indicates all the Q series CPU modules.
Q00J/Q00/Q01 : Indicates the Basic model QCPU.
Qn(H) : Indicates the High Performance model QCPU.
Corresponding CPU
QnPH : Indicates the Process CPU.
QnPRH : Indicates the Redundant CPU.
QnU : Indicates the Universal model QCPU
Each CPU type name : Can be applied only to the specific CPU. (e.g. Q02U)
For details on the following items, refer to the following manuals:
• Networks Manual of the corresponding network module
• SFC QCPU(Q mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual (SFC)
Do not change the values of special relays set by the system with user program or device test operations.
Doing so may result in system downtime or communication fault.
12 - 221
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Diagnostic Information
1
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
2
D9
D9008
Diagnostic Diagnosis error • Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data.
SD0
errors code • Contents identical to latest fault history information.
S (Error) format
change 3
• Year (last two digits) and month that SD0 data was updated is stored as
BCD 2-digit code.
SD1 (Example) October, 1995
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12) 9510H 12
• The day and hour that SD0 was updated is stored as BCD 2-digit code.
Clock time for Clock time for
SD2 diagnosis error diagnosis error b15 to b8 b7 to b0 (Example) 10 a.m. on 25th S (Error) New
occurrence occurrence Day (1 to 31) Hour (0 to 23) 2510H
• The minute and second that SD0 data was updated is stored as BCD 2-
digit code.
SD3 (Example) 35 min. 48 sec.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Minutes (0 to 59) Seconds (0 to 59) 3548H 6
Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being
stored in the common information areas (SD5 through SD15) and the
individual information areas (SD16 through SD26) are stored here.
The category code for judging the error information type is stored.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
7
Individual information Common information
category codes category codes
• The common information category codes store the following codes:
0 : No error
8
QCPU
1: Unit/module No./ CPU No./Base No.*
2: File name/Drive name
3: Time (value set)
4: Program error location
5: System switching cause (for Redundant CPU only)
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
6: Reason(s) for tracking capacity excess error (specific to Redundant
CPU)
7: Base No./Power supply No. (The first 5 digits of serial number 10072
Error or higer are chosen for Universal model QCPU.)
Error information
SD4 information 8: Tracking transmission data classification (specific to Redundant CPU) S (Error) New
category code
categories *: For a multiple CPU system that consists of the Basic model QCPU,
High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model
QCPU the module number or CPU number is stored depending on the
error that occurred.
(Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been
stored.)
CPU No. 1: 1, CPU No. 2: 2, CPU No. 3: 3, CPU No. 4: 4
• The individual information category codes store the following codes:
0: No error
1: (Empty)
2: File name/Drive name
3: Time (value actually measured)
4: Program error location
5: Parameter number
6: Annunciator number
7: CHK instruction failure No. (except for the Basic model QCPU and the
Universal model QCPU)
8: Reason(s) for system switching failure (specific to Redundant CPU)
12: File diagnostic information (specific to the Universal model QCPU)
13: Parameter No./CPU No. (specific to the Universal model QCPU)
12 - 222
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Common information corresponding to the error codes (SD0) is stored
here.
SD5 • The following ten types of information are stored here:
• The error common information type can be judged by the "common infor-
mation category code" in SD4. (The values of the "common information
category code" stored in SD4 correspond to following 1) to 8).)
1) Slot No.
SD6
Number Meaning
SD5 Slot No./CPU No./Base No. 1, 2, 3, 4
SD6 I/O No. 5
SD7
SD7 SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD8 SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
*1: For a multiple CPU system that consists of the Basic model QCPU, High
SD9
Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model QCPU, the
slot number or CPU number is stored depending on the error that
occurred.
Slot 0 in the multiple CPU system is the one on the slot on the right of the
SD10 rightmost CPU module.
(Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been
stored.)
No. 1 CPU: 1, No. 2 CPU: 2, No. 3 CPU: 3, No. 4 CPU: 4
*2: If a fuse blown or I/O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the
SD11 MELSECNET/H remote I/O station, the network number is stored into the
upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits.
Use the I/O No. to check the module where the fuse blown or I/O verify
error occurred.
*3: 255 is stored into SD5 of the Basic model QCPU when an instruction, etc.
SD12
has been executed for the module later than the one on the last slot
where a module can be mounted.
*4: Definitions of base No. and slot No.
<Base No.>
SD13 Value used to identify the base unit on which the CPU module has
Error common Error common been mounted. The following shows the definition of the base No. S (Error) New QCPU
information information
Base No. Definition
0 Indicates the main base unit mounted with the CPU
module.
SD14
1 to 7 Indicates the extension base unit. The stage
number setting made by the stage number setting
connector on the extension base unit is the base
No.
When stage number setting is extension 1:
Base No. = 1
when stage number setting is extension 7:
Base No. = 7
<Slot No.>
Value used to identify the slot of each base unit and the module
mounted on that slot.
•The I/O slot 0 (slot on the right side of the CPU slot) of the main base
unit is defined as the slot of "Slot No. = 0".
•The slot Nos. are consecutively assigned to the slots of the base
units in order of the main base unit and extension base units 1 to 7.
•When the number of base unit slots has been set in the I/O
assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box, the slot Nos.
are assigned for only the number of set slots.
*5: When 0FFFFH is stored into SD6 (I/O No.), the I/O No. cannot be
SD15
identified due to overlapping I/O No., etc. in the I/O assignment setting of
the PLC parameter dialog box. Therefore, identify the error location using
SD5.
2) File name/Drive name
Number Meaning (Example) File name =
SD5 Drive ABCDEFGH. IJK
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD6
42H(B) 41H(A)
SD7 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD8 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46H(F) 45H(E)
SD9
48H(H) 47H(G)
SD10 Extension 6 2EH(.)
49H(I) 2EH(.)
SD11 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
4BH(K) 4AH(J)
SD12
SD13
(Empty)
SD14
SD15
12 - 223
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.34 Special register
Corres- 1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
2
SD5
3
SD6
12
3) Time (value set)
Number Meaning
SD7 SD5 Time : 1 s units (0 to 999 s)
SD6 Time : 1ms units (0 to 65535ms)
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
6
SD8 SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
7
4) Program error location
SD9
Number Meaning
SD5
SD6 File name
Error common Error common SD7 (ASCII code: 8 characters)
S (Error) New QCPU
SD10
information information SD8
SD9 Extension 6 2EH(.)
(ASCII code: 3 characters)
8
SD10
SD11 Pattern 7
SD12 Block No.
SD13 Step No./transition condition
SD14 Sequence step No. (L)
SD11 SD15 Sequence step No. (H)
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
*7 : Contents of pattern data
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
SD12 (Not used) SFC block designation present
(1)/absent (0)
SFC step designation present
(1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation present
SD13 (1)/absent (0)
SD14
SD15
12 - 224
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
5) Reason(s) for system switching
Number Meaning
SD5
SD5 System switching condition 13
Control system switching
SD6
instruction argument
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD6 SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
SD7
*13: Details of reason(s) for system switching
0 : No system switching condition
(default)
SD8 1 : Power-OFF, reset, hardware failure,
watchdog timer error
2 : Stop error
(except watchdog timer error) S (Error) New QnPRH
3 : System switching request by
network module
16 : Control system switching instruction
SD9
17 : Control system switching request
from GX Developer
6) Reason(s) for tracking capacity excess error
The block No. when the data amount that can be tracked (100k) is
exceeded is indicated by the bit pattern of the corresponding special
SD10 relay.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Error common Error common
1 1 1
information information SD5 (SM1535) 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1528) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1520)
(Block16) (Block9) (Block1)
SD6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD11 SD7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
SD8 (SM1583) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (SM1568)
(Block64) (Block49)
SD9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD12 SD15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7) Power supply No.
Number Meaning
SD13 SD5 Base No.
SD6 Power supply No.
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11 (Empty)
SD14
SD12 Qn(H)*1
SD13 QnPH*1
S (Error) New
SD14 QnPRH
SD15
QnU*2
1: Power supply 1 fault
2: Power supply 2 fault
"Power Redundant power supply module
SD15 supply mounted on POWER 1 slot of redundant
module 1": base unit (Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB)
"Power Redundant power supply module
supply mounted on POWER 2 slot of redundant
module 2": base unit (Q38RB, Q68RB, Q65WRB)
*1: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 225
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
2
SD5
12
SD6
SD7
8) Tracking transmission data classification
Stores the data classification during tracking.
Number Meaning 6
SD8 SD5 Data type 15
SD6
SD7
7
SD8
SD9
SD10 (Empty)
SD11
SD9
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15 8
Error common Error common *15: Details of data classification
SD10 S (Error) New QnPRH
information information b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Each bit
0 0: Not sent
1: Being sent
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
Device data
SD11 Signal flow
PIDINIT/S. PIDINIT
instruction data
SFC execution data
System switching
request
SD12 Operation mode
change request
System data
SD13
SD14
SD15
12 - 226
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Individual information corresponding to error codes (SD0) is stored here.
• There are the following eight different types of information are stored.
• The error individual information type can be judged by the "individual
SD16 information category code" in SD4. (The values of the "individual infor-
mation category code" stored in SD4 correspond to following 1) to 8),
12), and 13).)
1) (Empty)
2) File name/Drive name
SD17 (Example) File name =
Number Meaning ABCDEFGH. IJK
SD16 Drive b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD17 42H(B) 41H(A)
SD18 File name 44H(D) 43H(C)
SD19 (ASCII code: 8 characters) 46H(F) 45H(E)
SD20 48H(H) 47H(G)
SD21 Extension 6 2EH(.) 49H(I) 2EH(.)
SD18
SD22 (ASCII code: 3 characters) 4BH(K) 4AH(J)
SD23
SD24
(Empty)
SD25
SD26
3) Time (value actually measured)
SD19
Number Meaning
SD16 Time : 1 s units (0 to 999 s)
SD17 Time : 1ms units (0 to 65535ms)
SD18
SD19
SD20
SD20 SD21
SD22 (Empty)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
4) Program error location
SD21
Number Meaning
Error individual Error individual SD16 S (Error) New QCPU
information information SD17 File name
SD18 (ASCII code: 8 characters)
SD19
SD20 Extension 6 2EH(.)
SD22 SD21 (ASCII code: 3 characters)
SD22 Pattern 7
SD23 Block No.
SD24 Step No./transition No.
SD25 Sequence step No. (L)
SD26 Sequence step No. (H)
SD23 *7 : Contents of pattern data
15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 (Bit number)
0 0 to 0 0
(Not used) SFC block designation
present (1)/absent (0)
SFC step designation
SD24 present (1)/absent (0)
SFC transition designation
present (1)/absent (0)
5) Parameter No. 6) Annunciator number /
7) CHK instruction
SD25 malfunction number
Number Meaning Number Meaning
SD16 Parameter No. 16 SD16 No.
SD17 SD17
SD18 SD18
SD19 SD19
SD20 SD20
SD21 SD21
(Empty) (Empty)
SD22 SD22
SD23 SD23
SD26 SD24 SD24
SD25 SD25
SD26 SD26
*16: For details of the parameter No., refer to the User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU
module used.
12 - 227
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
*6 : Extensions are shown below.
Table12.35 Extension name
1
SDn SDn+1 Extension
File Type
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Higher 8 bits Name
51H 50H 41H QPA Parameters 2
• Sequence program
51H 50H 47H QPG
• SFC program
51H 43H 44H QCD Device comment 3
51H 44H 49H QDI Initial device value
51H 44H 52H QDR File register
Local device
51H 44H 4CH QDL
(Other than the Basic model QCPU)
12
Sampling trace data
51H 54H 44H QTD
(Other than the Basic model QCPU)
Breakdown history data
51H 46H 44H QFD (Other than the Basic model QCPU and
the Universal model QCPU)
51H 53H 54H QST
SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD instruction file
(For Universal model QCPU only)
6
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
12 - 228
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
8) Reason(s) for system switching failure
Number Meaning
System switching prohibition
SD16 condition 14
SD17
SD18
SD19
SD20
SD21
(Empty)
SD22
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
*14: Details of reason(s) for system switching failure
0 : Normal switching completion
(default) QnPRH
1 : Tracking cable fault (cable
removal, cable fault, internal
circuit fault, hardware fault)
2 : Hardware failure, power OFF,
reset or watchdog timer error
occurring in standby system
3 : Hardware failure, power OFF,
reset or watchdog timer error
occurring in control system
4 : Preparing for tracking
5 : Time limit exceeded
6 : Standby system is in stop error
(except watchdog timer error)
7 : Operation differs between two
systems (in backup mode only)
8 : During memory copy from control
system to standby system
Error individual Error individual 9 : Online program change
SD26 S (Error) New
information information 10 : Error detected by network
module of standby system
11 : System switching being executed
12 : Online module change in
progress
12) File diagnostic information
SD16 Failuer information (H) drive No.(L)
SD17
SD18 File name
SD19 (ASCll: 8 characters)
SD20
SD21 EXtension *6 2EH(.)
SD22 (ASCll; 3 characters)
SD23 Failure information 2
SD24 (CRC value that is read)
SD25 Failure information 3
SD26 (CRC value that is calculated)
13) Parameter No./CPU No. QnU
Number Meaning
SD16 Parameter No.*16
SD17 CPU No. (1 to 4)
SD18
SD19
SD20
SD21
SD22 (Empty)
SD23
SD24
SD25
SD26
12 - 229
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
Error number that
D9
2
SD50 Error reset performs error • Stores error number that performs error reset U New
reset
• All corresponding bits go 1(ON) when battery voltage drops.
• Subsequently, these remain 1(ON) even after battery voltage has been
returned to normal.
3
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Bit pattern CPU error
SD51
Battery low
latch
indicating where
battery voltage
alarm
error
1
S (Error) New 12
drop occurred
1: This does not apply to Basic model QCPU.
• In the alarm, data can be held within the time specified for battery low.
• The error indicates the complete discharge of the battery. QCPU
Bit pattern • Same configuration as SD51 above
indicating where • After the alarm is detected (ON), the alarm turns OFF by error detection
6
SD52 Battery low S (Error) New
battery voltage (ON). (For the Universal model QCPU only)
drop occurred • Turns to 0 (OFF) when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter.
• Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85% (AC power)/65% (DC
Number of times power) of the rating during operation of the CPU module, the value is
AC/DC DOWN
SD53 for AC/DC DOWN incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code. S (Error) D9005
detection
detection • The counter repeats increment and decrement of the value ;
0 32767 -32768 0
7
Number of
Number of module • Value stored here is the lowest station I/O number of the module with
SD60 module with S (Error) D9000
with blown fuse the blown fuse.
blown fuse
SD61
I/O module
verify error
I/O module verify
error module
• The lowest I/O number of the module where the I/O module verification
S (Error) D9002
8
number took place.
number number
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
12 - 230
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Annunciator Annunciator S (Instruction
SD62 • The first annunciator number (F number) to be detected is stored here. D9009
number number execution)
Number of Number of S (Instruction
SD63 • Stores the number of annunciators searched. D9124
annunciators annunciators execution)
SD64 When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET F instruction, the F numbers which D9125
go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered.
SD65 The F numbers turned OFF by RST F instruction are deleted from SD64 - D9126
SD79, and the F numbers stored after the deleted F numbers are shifted to
the preceding registers.
SD66 D9127
Execution of the LEDR instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 up
by one.
SD67 D9128
After 16 annunciators have been detected, detection of the 17th will not be
stored from SD64 through SD79.
SD68 D9129
SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET
F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR
SD69 D9130
SD62 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 (Number
SD70 detected) D9131
QCPU
Table of SD63 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 (Number of
SD71 annunciators D9132
detected Annunciator detected) S (Instruction
annunciator detection number SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 execution)
SD72 New
numbers SD65 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15
SD66 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
SD73 New
SD67 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
SD68 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
SD74 New
SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
SD75 SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 New
(Number
SD72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 210 0 detected)
SD76 SD73 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
SD74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD77 SD75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
SD76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD78 SD77 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
SD78 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD79 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
S (Instruction
SD80 CHK number CHK number • Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD code. New
execution)
SD90 Corresponds to D9108
SM90 • Set the annunciator number (F number) that will
Corresponds to be turned ON when the step transition
SD91 monitoring timer setting or monitoring timeout D9109
SM91
occurs.
SD92 Corresponds to D9110
SM92
Corresponds to b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD93 D9111
Step transition SM93 Qn(H)
SD94 monitoring timer Corresponds to D9112 QnPH
F number for timer
setting value SM94 QnPRH
set value and time F number setting Timer time limit U
(Enabled only Corresponds to
SD95 over error (0 to 255) setting D9113
when SFC SM95
program exists) (1 to 255s:
SD96 Corresponds to D9114
SM96 (1s units))
SD97 Corresponds to • Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99 during an New
SM97 active step starts the timer, and if the transition
SD98 Corresponds to condition next to the corresponding step is not New
SM98 met within the timer time limit, the set
Corresponds to annunciator (F) turns ON.
SD99 New
SM99
12 - 231
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
Stores the
D9
2
transmission
Transmission
speed specified in 96 : 9.6kbps, 192 : 19.2kbps, 384 : 38.4kbps, S (Power-ON or
SD100 speed storage New
the serial 576 : 57.6kbps, 1152 : 115.2kbps reset)
area
3
communication
setting.
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 to b0
Communication
Stores the
communication
setting specified in S (Power-ON or
Q00/Q01
Q00UJ
12
SD101 setting storage New Q00U
the serial reset) Q01U
area Sumcheck presence
communication
setting. Write during RUN setting 0: Absent Q02U*4
0: Disabled 1: Present
1: Enabled
* : Since the data is used by the system, it is undefined.
Stores the
transmission wait 0 : No waiting time
SD102
Transmission
wait time
storage area
time specifed in
the serial
10 to 150: Waiting time (unit: ms) S (Power-ON or
reset)
New 6
communication Defaults to 0.
setting.
Stores the preset Qn(H)
CH1 96 : 9600bps, 192 : 19.2kbps, 384 : 38.4kbps,
7
transmission QnPH
transmission 576 : 57.6kbps, 1152 : 115.2kbps
SD105 speed when GX S New QnPRH
speed setting *: Other than RS-232 connection holds the data at RS-232 connection.
Developer is
(RS-232)
used.
(When disconnected, the default value is 1152.) QnU*3
Stores the data
Data sending sending result
SD110 result storage
area
when the serial
communication
Stores the error code at the timeout sending data. S (Error)
Q00/Q01
Q00UJ
8
function is used.
New Q00U
Stores the data Q01U
Data receiving receiving result Q02U*4
SD111 result storage when the serial Stores the error code at the time of receiving data. S (Error)
area communication
function is used.
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
Displays the current amount of battery consumption.
The value range:1 to 2(Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU,
Amount of
Amount of battery Q02UCPU, Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU) S (Status
SD118 battery
consumption 1 to 3(Q06UD(E)HCPU) change)
New QnU*4
consumption
1 to 4(Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU,
Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU)
Stores the factor which makes the battery life-prolonging function valid.
When SD119 is other than 0, the battery life-prolonging function is valid.
0:No factor
Battery life- b15 to b2 b1 b0 1:Foctor
Battery life- S (Status
SD119 prolonging New QnU
prolonging factor change)
factor b0: CPU switch setting
b1: Backup in execution by
latch data backup function
(to standard ROM)
*3: This applies to Universal model QCPUs except for the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
*4: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10102" or later.
12 - 232
Table12.34 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD130 • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a
bit pattern (in units of 16 points).
SD131 (If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set
numbers are stored.)
SD132 Bit pattern in units b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
of 16 points,
1 1
SD133 indicating the SD130 0 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fuse blown modules whose
1 1
SD134 module fuses have blown SD131 (Y1F0) 0 0 0 0 (Y1A0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: No blown fuse
SD135 1: Blown fuse 1 1
present SD137 0 0 0 0 (Y7B0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Y730) 0 0 0
SD136 Indicates fuse blow.
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one.
SD137
This flag is cleared by error resetting operation
• When I/O modules, of which data are different from those entered at S (Error) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD150
power-ON, have been detected, the I/O module numbers (in units of 16
SD151 points) are entered in bit pattern. (Preset I/O module numbers set in
parmeters when parameter setting has been performed.)
Bit pattern, in units
SD152
of 16 points, b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
indicating the 1
SD153 SD150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (X Y)
modules with
I/O module 0
verify errors. 1
verify error SD151 0 0 0 0 0 0 ( X Y) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD154 0: No I/O verify 190
errors
1: I/O verify error 1
SD155 SD157 0 ( X Y) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
present 7E0
Indicates an I/O module verify error.
SD156
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one.
SD157 This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
12 - 233
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) System information
1
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
2
D9
• The CPU switch status is stored in the following format:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
3
3) Empty 2) 1)
1): CPU switch status
0: RUN
1: STOP Qn(H)
12
2: L.CLR S (Every END
New QnPH
processing)
QnPRH
2): Memory card
Always OFF
switch
b8 through b12 correspond to
SW1 through SW5 of system
3): DIP switch setting switch 1.
0: OFF, 1: ON.
b13 through b15 are empty.
6
Status of CPU • The CPU switch status is stored in the following format:
SD200 Status of switch
switch b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty 2) 1) S (Every END
7
New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2): Memory card switch Always OFF 8
• The CPU switch status is stored in the following format:
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty 2) 1) S (when RUN/
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
STOP/RESET New QnU
switch changed)
1): CPU switch status 0: RUN
1: STOP
2): Memory card switch Always OFF
• The following bit patterns store the status of the LEDs on the CPU
module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker.
b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Q00J/Q00/Q01
S (Status Qn(H)
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) New
change) QnPH
QnPRH
1): RUN 5): BOOT
2): ERR. 6): Empty Mode bit pattern
3): USER 7): Empty 0: OFF 1: Green
4): BAT. 8): MODE 2: Orange
Status of (The Basic model QCPU does not include 3) to 8).)
SD201 LED status
CPU-LED • The following bit patterns store the status of the LEDs on the CPU
module:
• 0 is off, 1 is on, and 2 is flicker.
b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
S (Status
8) 7) 6) 5) 4) 3) 2) 1) New QnU
change)
1): RUN 5): BOOT
2): ERROR 6): Empty
3): USER 7): Empty
4): BAT. 8): MODE
(The Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU do not include 5).)
12 - 234
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Specify the LEDs to be turned off using this register, and turn SM202
from OFF to ON to turn off the specified LEDs.
USER and BOOT can be specified as the LEDs to be turned off.
• Specify the LEDs to be turned off in the following bit pattern.
(Turned off at 1, not be turned off at 0.)
b15 b8 b4 b0
Fixed Fixed Fixed Qn(H)
LED off Bit pattern of LED to 0 to 0 to 0 QnPH
SD202 U New
command that is turned off QnPRH
USER QnU
LED
BOOT
LED
(The Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU cannot specify the BOOT
LED.)
• The CPU operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
2) 1)
1): Operating status 0: RUN
of CPU 1: STEP-RUN (For the QnACPU only)
2: STOP D9015
Operating Operating status S (Every END
SD203 3: PAUSE format QCPU
status of CPU of CPU processing)
change
2): STOP/PAUSE 0: Instruction in remote operation program
cause from RUN/STOP switch ("RUN/STOP/
RESET switch" for Basic model QCPU)
1: Remote contact
2: Remote operation from GX Developer/
serial communication, etc.
3: Internal program instruction
Note: Priority is
earliest first 4: Error
• The LED display color of the LED status shown in SD201 1) to 8).
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
1)RUN LED
0: OFF
1: Green
2)ERROR LED
0: OFF
1: Red
3)USER LED
0: OFF
1: Red
LED display CPU-LED display S (status
SD204 4)BAT. LED New QnU
color color 0: OFF change)
1: Yellow
2: Green
5)BOOT LED
0: OFF
1: Green
6)Empty
7)Empty
8)MODE LED
0: OFF
1: Green
(The Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU do not include 5).)
12 - 235
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
• When error is generated, the LED display (flicker) is made according to
D9
2
the error number setting priorities.
(The Basic model QCPU supports only the annunciator (error item No.
7).
3
SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 D9038
• The Universal model QCPU sets execution/non-execution of LED
display of the error corresponding to the each priority ranking when the
error occurs.
• The setting areas for priorities are as follows:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD207 Priority 4
SD208 Priority 8
Priority 3
Priority 7
Priority 2
Priority 6
Priority 1
Priority 5 D9039
12
SD208 Priorities 5 to 8 SD209 Priority 11 Priority 10 Priority 9 format
change Q00J/ Q00/Q01*9
(Priority 11 is valid when Redundant CPU is used.)
Qn(H)
LED display
U QnPH
priority ranking Default Value
SD207 = 4321H(0000H for Basic model QCPU) QnPRH
SD208 = 8765H(0700H for Basic model QCPU) QnU
(0765H for Redundant CPU)
SD209 = 00A9H(0000H for Basic model QCPU)
(0B09H for Redundant CPU)
• No display is made if "0" is set. 6
• In case of the Basic model QCPU, the ERR. LED turns ON when the
SD209 Priorities 9 to 11 annunciator turns ON, if "7" has been set to either of priorities 1 to 11. New
• In case of the Basic model QCPU, the ERR. LED does not turn ON
7
when the annumciator turns ON, if "7" has not been set to either of
priorities 1 to 11.
However, even if "0" has been set, information concerning CPU module
operation stop (including parameter settings) errors will be indicated by
the LEDs without conditions.
8
• The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code as shown
below:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Clock data (year,
SD210 Clock data July, 1993 D9025
month)
9307H
Year Month
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
• The day and hour are stored as BCD code as shown below:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Clock data (day, 31st, 10 a.m.
SD211 Clock data S (Request)/U D9026 QCPU
hour) 3110H
Day Hour
• The minutes and seconds (after the hour) are stored as BCD code as
shown below:
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Clock data
SD212 Clock data 35 min, 48 s D9027
(minute, second)
3548H
Minute Second
*9: Function version is B or later.
12 - 236
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• The year (first two digits) and the day of the week are stored as BCD
code as shown below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H
Clock data
SD213 Clock data (higher digits of Day of the week S (Request)/U D9028
year, day of week) 0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (19 or 20) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
• LED display ASCII data (16 characters) stored here.
SD220 (On the Basic model QCPU, the registers store the message (16
characters of ASCII data) at error occurrence (including annunciator
ON).
SD221 QCPU
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
15th character from 16th character from
SD220 the right the right
SD222
13th character from 14th character from
SD221 the right the right
SD223 11th character from 12th character from
SD222 the right the right
LED display S (When
LED display data 9th character from 10th character from New
data SD223 changed)
the right the right
SD224
7th character from 8th character from
SD224 the right the right
SD225 5th character from 6th character from
SD225 the right the right
3rd character from 4th character from
SD226 the right the right
SD226
1st character from 2nd character from
SD227 the right the right
SD227 • The LED display device data at the time of CHK is not stored in the
Basic model QCPU and the Universal model QCPU.
The header I/O
Module to which number of the
online module module to which • 10H is added to the value of the header I/O number of which the online S (During online QnPH
SD235 New
change is being online module module change is being performed. module change) QnPRH
performed change is being
performed /10H
0: Automatic
SD240 Base mode mode • Stores the base mode. S (Initial) New
1: Detail mode
QCPU
0: Main base only
Extension stage
SD241 1 to 7: Extension • Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being installed. S (Initial) New
number
stage number
12 - 237
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
2
b7 b2 b1 b0
Fixed to 0 to
Base type
Main base unit
3
differentiation
0: QA**B is 1st extension Qn(H)
A/Q base
installed base S (Initial) New QnPH
differentiation Fixed to 0
(A mode) 2nd extension QnPRH
1: Q**B is installed when the
base base is not
(Q mode)
to
12
installed.
7th extension
base
b4 b2 b1 b0
Fixed to 0 to
Base type
Installed Q base differentiation Main base unit
presence/ 0: Base not 1st extension base S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
absence installed 2nd extension base
SD242 1: Q**B is installed
to
4th extension base 6
b7 b2 b1 b0
Fixed to 0 to
Main base unit
1st extension
7
Base type base
Fixed to 0
Installed Q base differentiation 2nd extension when the
presence/ 0: Base not base S (Initial) New QnU
absence installed
1: Q**B is installed
to
7th extension
base is not
installed. 8
base
• The bits from the third extension stage to the seventh extension stage
are fixed to "0" in the Q00UJCPU.
• The bits from the fifth extension stage to the seventh extension stage are
fixed to "0" in the Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD243
SD243 Extension
3
Extension Extension
2 1 Main
SD244 Extension
7
Extension Extension Extension
6 5 4 Qn(H)
No. of base QnPH
No. of base slots S (Initial) New
slots • As shown above, each area stores the number of slots being installed. QnPRH
SD244 • The bits from the third extension stage to the seventh extension stage QnU
are fixed to "0" in the Q00UJCPU.
• The bits from the fifth extension stage to the seventh extension stage are
fixed to "0" in the Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD243
Extension Extension Extension Main
No. of base SD243 3 2 1
slots (Operation No. of base slots SD244 Fixed to Fixed to Fixed to Extension S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01
0 0 0 4
status)
SD244
• As shown above, each area stores the number of slots being installed.
(Number of set slots when parameter setting has been made)
New
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD245
No. of base SD245 Extension
3
Extension Extension Main
2 1
slots (Mounting No. of base slots SD246 Fixed0
to Fixed to Fixed to Extension
0 0 4
S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
status)
SD246
• As shown above, each area stores the number of module-mounted slots
of the base unit (actual number of slots of the installed base unit).
Qn(H)
• When SM250 goes from OFF to ON, the upper 2 digits of the final I/O S (Request
New QnPH
Loaded Loaded maximum number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values. END)
SD250 QnPRH
maximum I/O I/O No.
• The upper 2 digits of the final I/O number plus 1 of the modules loaded Q00J/Q00/Q01
S (Initial) New
are stored as BIN values. QnU
*9: Function version is B or later.
12 - 238
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Number of • Indicates the number of mounted MELSECNET/10 modules or
SD254
modules installed MELSECNET/H modules.
• Indicates I/O number of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD255 I/O No.
MELSECNET/H module
Information from 1st module
Network • Indicates network No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD256 QCPU
No. MELSECNET/H module
Group • Indicates group No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD257
number MELSECNET/H module
Station • Indicates station No. of mounted MELSECNET/10 module or
SD258
MELSECNET/ No. MELSECNET/H module
10. Standby
• In the case of standby stations, the module number of the standby S (Initial) New
SD259 MELSECNET/H informa- Qn(H)
information station is stored. (1 to 4)
tion QnPH
SD260 QnPRH
Information from
to • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. QnU*10
2nd module
SD264
SD265
Information from
to • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. Qn(H)
3rd module
SD269 QnPH
SD270 QnPRH
Information from
to • Configuration is identical to that for the first module. QnU*11
4th module
SD274
1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the
corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the
bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link
module and CPU module cannot be made.
Information Information Information
of 3) of 2) of 1)
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Empty Qn(H)
Error detection
SD280 CC-Link error S (Error) New QnPH
status 1st QnPRH
module
2nd
module
3rd
module
4th
module
The above module Nos. n are in order of the head I/O numbers.
(However, the one where parameter setting has not been made is not
counted.)
*10: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
*11: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
12 - 239
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
1) When Xn0 of the mounted CC-Link module turns ON, the bit of the
D9
2
corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
2) When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC-Link module turns OFF, the
bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 (ON).
3) Turns to 1 (ON) when communication between the mounted CC-Link
module and CPU module cannot be made.
3
Information Information Information
of 3) of 2) of 1)
Error detection
b15 to b12 b11 to
Empty
b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Qn(H)*14 12
SD281 CC-Link error S (Error) New QnPH*14
status 5st
module QnPRH*15
6nd
module
7rd
module
8th
module
The above module Nos. n are in order of the head I/O numbers.
(However, the one where parameter setting has not been made is not
6
counted.)
SD286 • The number of points assigned to M is stored with 32 bits.
Points assigned to
• Even if the points assigned to M are 32k points or less, the points are
7
SD287 M (for extension)
Device stored.
S (Initial) New QnU*16
SD288 assignment • The number of points assigned to B is stored with 32 bits.
Points assigned to
• Even if the points assigned to B are 32k points or less, the points are
SD289 B (for extension)
stored.
Number of points
SD290
assigned for X
• Stores the number of points currently set for X devices
8
Number of points
SD291 • Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices
assigned for Y
Number of points
SD292 Device • Stores the number of points currently set for M devices
assigned for M
assignment
Number of points
SD293 (Same as • Stores the number of points currently set for L devices S (Initial) New
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
assigned for L
parameter
contents) Number of points
SD294 • Stores the number of points currently set for B devices
assigned for B
Number of points
SD295 • Stores the number of points currently set for F devices
assigned for F
Number of points
SD296 • Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices
assigned for SB
Number of points
SD297 • Stores the number of points currently set for V devices QCPU
assigned for V
Number of points
SD298 • Stores the number of points currently set for S devices
assigned for S
Number of points
SD299 • Stores the number of points currently set for T device
assigned for T
Device Number of points
SD300 assignment • Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices
assigned for ST
(Same as S (Initial) New
parameter Number of points
SD301 • Stores the number of points currently set for C devices
contents) assigned for C
Number of points
SD302 • Stores the number of points currently set for D devices
assigned for D
Number of points
SD303 • Stores the number of points currently set for W devices
assigned for W
Number of points
SD304 • Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices
assigned for SW
*14: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "08032" or later.
*15: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
*16: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 240
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores the number of points of index register (Z) to be modified in the
Device 16 bit modification
range of 16 bits.
SD305 assignment Number of points S (Initial) New QnU
(The assignment is set by the ZR device index modification setting
(Index register) assigned for Z
parameter.)
Device • Stores the number of ZR device points (except the number of points of
SD306
assignment Number of points extended data register (D) and extended link register (W)). The number
(Same as assigned for ZR of assignment points of ZR device is stored into this SD only when 1k
SD307 parameter (for extension) point or more is set to the extended data register (D) and extended link
contents) register (W).
Device Number of points
SD308 • Stores the total number of points of the extended data register (D) and
assignment assigned for D (for
(assignment data register in internal device memory area (stores the value in 32-bit S (Initial) New QnU*17
inside + for
SD309 including the binary).
extension)
number of
points set to the
SD310 Number of points
extended data • Stores the total number of points of the extended link register (W) and
assigned for W
register (D) and link register in internal device memory area (stores the value in 32-bit
(for inside + for
SD311 extended link binary).
extension)
register (W))
• Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX
Developer or other units.
• The greater the value is designated, the shorter the response time for
Time reserved Q00J/Q00/Q01
Time reserved for communication with other devices (GX Developer, serial communication
for Qn(H)
SD315 communication units) becomes. U New
communication QnPH
processing • If the designated value is out of the range above, it is processed that no
processing QnPRH
setting is made.
• Setting range: 1 to 100 ms
• Note that the scan time becomes longer by the designated time.
No. of modules
SD340 • Indicates the number of mounted Ethernet module.
installed
SD341 I/O No. • Indicates I/O No. of mounted Ethernet module
Network
SD342 • Indicates network No. of mounted Ethernet module QCPU
No.
Information of 1st module
SD343 Group No. • Indicates group No. of mounted Ethernet module
Ethernet Station
SD344 • Indicates station No. of mounted Ethernet module S (Initial) New
information No.
• Empty
SD345 to
Empty (With QCPU, the Ethernet module IP address of the 1st module is stored
SD346
in buffer memory.) Qn(H)
• Empty QnPH
SD347 Empty (With QCPU, the Ethernet module error code of the 1st module is read QnPRH
with the ERRRD instruction.) QnU*10
SD348 to Information from
• Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD354 2nd module
SD355 to Ethernet Information from Qn(H)
• Configuration is identical to that for the first module. S (Initial) New
SD361 information 3rd module QnPH
SD362 to Information from QnPRH
• Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
SD368 4th module QnU*11
*10: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
*11: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*17: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
12 - 241
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
2
b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Not used Instruction reception
status of channel 1
Instruction reception
3
status of channel 2
Instruction reception
status of channel 3
SD380
Ethernet
instruction
Instruction
reception status of
Instruction reception
status of channel 4 12
reception status 1st module Instruction reception
status of channel 5
Instruction reception
status of channel 6
Instruction reception S (Instruction
New QnPRH
status of channel 7 execution)
Instruction reception
status of channel 8
ON: Received (Channel is being used.)
OFF: Not received (Channel is not used.) 6
Instruction
SD381 reception status of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
2nd module
SD382
Ethernet
instruction
Instruction
reception status of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
7
reception 3rd module
status
Instruction
SD383 reception status of • Configuration is identical to that for the first module.
4th module 8
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
12 - 242
Table12.36 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Number of • The number of CPU modules that comprise the multiple CPU system is Q00/Q01*9
SD393
multiple CPUs stored. (1 to 3, Empty also included) QnU
• The CPU module types of No. 1 CPU to 3 and whether the CPU
modules are mounted or not are stored.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
SD394 Empty (0) CPU No.3 CPU No.2 CPU No.1
S (Initial) New
CPU mounting
SD394 Q00/Q01*9
information
CPU module mounted or CPU module type
not mounted 0: PLC CPU
0: Not mounted 1: Motion CPU
1: Mounted 2: PC CPU
Q00/Q01*9
• In a multiple CPU system configuration, the CPU number of the host
Multiple CPU Qn(H)*9
SD395 CPU is stored. S (Initial) New
Multiple CPU number QnPH
CPU No. 1: 1, CPU No. 2: 2, CPU No. 3: 3, CPU No. 4: 4
system QnU
information
No. 1 CPU
SD396
operation status The operation information of each CPU No. is stored.
(The information on the number of multiple CPUs indicated in SD393 is
stored.)
No. 2 CPU
b15 b14 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Q00/Q01*9
SD397 Vacancy Classification Operation status
operation status QnU*17
mounted S (END
0: Not mounted processing New
1: Mounted error)
No. 3 CPU
SD398 0: Normal 0: RUN
operation status
1: Minor fault 2: STOP
2: Medium fault 3: PAUSE
3: Major fault 4: Initial
FH: Reset FH: Reset
No. 4 CPU
SD399 QnU*11
operation statu
*9: Function version is B or later.
*11: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*17: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
(3) System clocks/counters
Table12.37 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Following programmable controller CPU module RUN, 1 is added each
1 second Number of counts S (Status
SD412 second D9022
counter in 1-second units change)
• Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 QCPU
2n second clock 2n second clock • Stores value n of 2n second clock (Default is 30)
SD414 U New
setting units • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767
2nms clock • Stores value n of 2nms clock (Default is 30)
SD415 2nms clock units U New
setting • Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 Qn(H)
• Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to QnPH
RUN. S (Every END QnPRH
New
(Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program.) processing) QnU
Number of counts
SD420 Scan counter • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
in each scan
• Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to
S (Every END
RUN. New Q00J/Q00/Q01
processing)
• Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0
• Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to
Low speed scan Number of counts RUN. S (Every END Qn(H)
SD430 New
counter in each scan • Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to -32768 to 0 processing) QnPH
• Used only for low speed execution type programs
12 - 243
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Scan information
1
Table12.38 Special register
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
2
D9
Qn(H)
SD500
Execution
program No.
Program No. in
execution
• Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN
value.
S (Status
change)
New
QnPH
QnPRH 3
QnU
Low speed
Low speed • Program number of low speed excution type program No. currently
execution type S (Every END Qn(H)
SD510 excution type being executed is stored as BIN value. New
program No.
program No. in
execution
• Enabled only when SM510 is ON.
processing) QnPH
12
• The current scan time is stored into SD520 and SD521. D9018
Current scan time S (Every END
SD520 (Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU, format
(in 1 ms units) processing)
in 1 s units.)) change
SD520: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
Current scan SD521: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the
QCPU
time Universal model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Current scan time (Example) When the current scan time is 23.6ms, the following values are S (Every END
SD521 New
(in 100 s units) stored. processing)
SD520 = 23
SD521 = 600 6
Initial scan time • Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program into SD522 and
SD522
(in 1 ms units) SD523.
(Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
S (First END
Initial scan time in 1 s units.)) New
SD523
Initial scan time
(in 100 s units)
SD522: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD523: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal
processing)
7
model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Minimum scan • Stores the minimum value of the scan time except that of an initial D9017
S (Every END Qn(H)
SD524 time (in 1 ms execution type program into SD524 and SD525. (Measurement is made format
Minimum scan
time
units) in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU, in 1 s units.))
SD524: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
processing)
change QnPH
QnPRH
8
Minimum scan
SD525: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal S (Every END QnU
SD525 time (in 100 s New
model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999)) processing)
units)
Maximum scan • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of an initial D9019
SD526 time (in 1 ms execution type program into SD526 and SD527. (Measurement is made format
units) change
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
Maximum scan in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU, in 1 s units.)) S (Every END
time Maximum scan SD526: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
SD527 time (in 100 s SD527: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal New
units) model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Current scan time • Stores the current scan time of a low speed execution type program into
SD528 Current scan
(in 1 ms units) SD528 and SD529.
time for low S (Every END
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) New
speed execution processing)
Current scan time SD528: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD529 type programs
(in 100 s units) SD529: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
Minimum scan
SD532 time (in 1 ms • Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed execution
Minimum scan
units) type program into SD532 and SD533.
time for low S (Every END
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) New Qn(H)
speed execution Minimum scan processing)
SD532: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) QnPH
SD533 type programs time (in 100 s SD533: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
Maximum scan
SD534 time (in 1 ms • Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of the first scan
Maximum scan
units) of a low speed execution type program into SD534 and SD535.
time for low S (Every END
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) New
speed execution Maximum scan processing)
SD534: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD535 type programs time (in 100 s SD535: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
END processing • Stores the time from the end of a scan execution type program to the
SD540 time (in 1 ms start of the next scan into SD540 and SD541.
Qn(H)
units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.(For the Universal model QCPU,
END processing S (Every END QnPH
in 1 s units.)) New
time END processing processing) QnPRH
SD540: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD541 time (in 100 s QnU
SD541: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900) (Storage range: 0
units) to 900 (For the Universal model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
12 - 244
Table12.38 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Minimum scan
SD524 time (in 1 ms • Stores the minimum value of the scan time into SD524 and SD525.
Minimum scan units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
time Minimum scan SD524: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
SD525 time (in 100 s SD525: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
New
Maximum scan
SD526 time (in 1 ms • Stores the maximum value of the scan time into SD526 and SD527.
Maximum scan units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
Q00J/Q00/Q01
time Maximum scan SD526: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
SD527 time (in 100 s SD527: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
END processing
SD540 time (in 1 ms • Stores the time from when the scan program ends until the next scan
units) starts into SD540 and SD541.
END processing S (Every END
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) New
time END processing processing)
SD540: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD541 time (in 100 s SD541: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
units)
Constant scan • Stores the wait time for constant scan setting into SD542 and SD543.
SD542 wait time (in 1 ms (Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
Constant scan units) in 1 s units.)) S (Every END
New QCPU
wait time Constant scan SD542: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
SD543 wait time (in 100 SD543: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal
s units) model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
Cumulative
execution time for
low speed
SD544
execution type • Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed execution type
Cumulative programs program into SD544 and SD545.
execution time (in 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
for low speed New
Cumulative SD544: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
execution type
execution time for SD545: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
programs
low speed • Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan.
SD545
execution type
programs Qn(H)
(in 100 s units) QnPH
Execution time for
low speed
SD546 execution type • Stores the execution time of a low speed execution type program during
Execution time programs one scan into SD546 and SD547.
for low speed (in 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
New
execution type Execution time for SD546: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
programs low speed SD547: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
SD547 execution type • Stored every scan.
programs
(in 100 s units)
Scan execution
type program • Stores the execution time of a scan execution type program during one
SD548
execution time (in scan into SD548 and SD549.
Scan execution 1 ms units) Qn(H)
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Every END
type program New QnPH
Scan execution SD548: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing)
execution time QnPRH
type program SD549: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
SD549 • Stored every scan.
execution time (in
100 s units)
Scan program • Stores the execution time of a scan program during one scan into
SD548 execution time SD548 and SD549.
(in 1 ms units) (Measurement is made in 100 s units. (For the Universal model QCPU,
Scan program in 1 s units.)) S (Every END Q00J/Q00/Q01
New
execution time Scan program SD548: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535) processing) QnU
SD549 execution time SD549: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900 (For the Universal
(in 100 s units) model QCPU, storage range is 0 to 999))
• Stored every scan.
Service interval
SD550 measurement Unit/module No. • Sets I/O number for module that measures service interval. U New
module
Module service Qn(H)
SD551 interval • Stores the service interval for the module specified in SD550 into SD551 QnPH
(in 1 ms units) and SD552 when SM551 is turned ON. QnPRH
Service interval
(Measurement is made in 100 s units.) S (Request) New
time Module service SD551: Stores the ms place. (Storage range: 0 to 65535)
SD552 interval SD552: Stores the s place. (Storage range: 0 to 900)
(in 100 s units)
12 - 245
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(5) Memory card
1
Table12.39 Special register
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by
(When Set)
ponding
ACPU
Corresponding
CPU
2
D9
• Indicates the type of the memory card installed.
3
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
Drive 1 0: Does not exist
(RAM) type Qn(H)
1: SRAM card
Memory card S (Initial and QnPH
12
SD600 Memory card typs New
typs 0: Does not exist card removal) QnPRH
(1: SRAM) QnU
Drive 2 type
2: ATA card
3: Flash card
(The bits for the drive 1 (RAM) type and drive 2 (ROM) type are fixed to "0"
in the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.)
Drive 1
• Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. S (Initial and
SD602 (Memory card Drive 1 capacity New Qn(H)
• (Empty capacity after format is stored.) card removal)
RAM) capacity QnPH
6
Drive 2 QnPRH
S (Initial and
SD603 (Memory card Drive 2 capacity • Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units.*1 New QnU*2
card removal)
ROM) capacity
• The use conditions for memory card are stored as bit patterns .
(In use when ON)
7
• The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below:
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Not used
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : CPU fault history (QFD) Qn(H)
Memory card Memory card use S (Status
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used New QnPH
use conditions conditions change)
b3 : Device initial value (QDI)
b4 : File register R (QDR)
b11 : Local device (QDL)
b12 : Not used
QnPRH
8
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Not used b15 : Not used
• The use conditions for memory card are stored as bit patterns .
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
(In use when ON)
SD604
• The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below:
b0 : Boot operation (QBT)*1 b8 : Not used
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
b3 : Device initial value (QDI)*2 b11 : Local device (QDL)
Memory card Memory card use S (Status
b4 : File register R (QDR) b12 : Not used New QnU*2
use conditions conditions change)
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Backup data (QBP) *3 b15 : Not used
*1: Turned ON at boot start and OFF at boot completion.
*2: Turned ON when reflection of device initial value is started and OFF
when reflection of device initial value is completed.
*3: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10102" or later.
*1: When the Q2MEM-8MBA is used, value stored in the special register SD603 differs depending on the combination of the serial number of the High
Performance model QCPU and the manufacture control number of the ATA card.
For details, refer to Section 7.1.2.
*2: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
12 - 246
Table12.39 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Indicates the drive 3/4 type.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
Drive 3
(Standrd Fixed to 1 Qn(H)
QnPH
RAM) S (Initial) New
QnPRH
Drive 4 QnU
(Standrd Fixed to 3
ROM)
SD620 Drive 3/4 typs Drive 3/4 typs
(The bits for the drive 3 (standard RAM) type is fixed to "0" in the
Q00UJCPU.)
• Indicates the drive 3/4 type.
b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
0
Drive 3 0: Absent S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
(Standard RAM) 1: Present
Drive 4 Fixed to
(Standrd ROM) "3 (FLASH ROM)"
Qn(H)
Drive 3 • Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. QnPH
S (Initial) New
SD622 (Standard RAM) Drive 3 capacity (Empty capacity after format is stored.) QnPRH
capacity QnU
• Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1k byte units. S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
Drive 4 • Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units. QnPH
S (Initial) New
SD623 (Standard Drive 4 capacity (Empty capacity after format is stored.) QnPRH
ROM) capacity QnU
• Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1k byte units. S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
• The conditions for usage for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns.
(In use when ON)
• The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below:
b0 : Boot operation (QBT) b8 : Not used
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : CPU fault history (QFD)
Qn(H)
Drive 3/4 use Drive 3/4 use b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : SFC trace (QTS) S (Status
New QnPH
conditions conditions change)
b3 : Device initial value (QDI) b11 : Local device (QDL) QnPRH
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Not used b15 : Not used
• The conditions for usage for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns.
SD624 (In use when ON)
• The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below:
b0 : Not used b8 : Module error log*2
b1 : Parameters (QPA) b9 : Not used
b2 : Device comments (QCD) b10 : Not used
Drive 3/4 use Drive 3/4 use b3 : Device initial value (QDI)*1 b11 : Local device (QDL) S (Status
New QnU
conditions conditions change)
b4 : File register (QDR) b12 : Not used
b5 : Sampling trace (QTD) b13 : Not used
b6 : Not used b14 : Not used
b7 : Not used b15 : Not used
*1: Turned ON at boot start and OFF at boot completion.
*2: The modules whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "11043" or later.
• The conditions for usage for drive 3/4 are stored as bit patterns.
b15 to b5 b4 to b0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Drive 3/4 use Drive 3/4 use S (Status
SD624 New Q00J/Q00/Q01
conditions conditions Boot operation (QBT) change)
0: Not used 1: In use
File register (QDR)
0: Not used 1: In use
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
File register S (Status
SD640 Drive number: • Stores drive number being used by file register New QnPH
drive change) *10 QnPRH
QnU*3
*3: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
*10: On the Basic model QCPU, data is set at STOP to RUN or RSET instruction execution after parameter execution.
12 - 247
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.39 Special register 1
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9 2
• Stores file register file name (with extension) selected at parameters or
SD641
by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code.
SD642 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD643
SD641 2nd character 1st character
Qn(H)
3
SD642 4th character 3rd character
S (Status QnPH
SD643 6th character 5th character New
SD644 change) QnPRH
SD644 8th character 7th character QnU*3
SD645 SD645 1st character of
extension
2EH(.) 12
SD646 3rd character of 2nd character of
the extension the extension
File register file File register file
name name • Stores file register file name (MAIN.QDR) selected at parameters as
ASCII code.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD641 2nd character (A) 1st character (M)
SD646
6
SD642 4th character (N) 3rd character (I)
SD643 6th character ( ) 5th character ( ) S (Initial) New Q00J/Q00/Q01
SD644 8th character ( ) 7th character ( )
1st character of
SD645 2EH(.)
the extension (Q)
SD646
3rd character of
the extension (R)
2nd character of
the extension (D)
7
Qn(H)
S (Status QnPH
SD647
File register
capacity
File register
capacity
• Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k word
units.
change)
New
QnPRH
QnU*3
8
S (Initial) Q00J/Q00/Q01
Q00J/Q00/Q01
Qn(H)
File register File register block S (Status
SD648 • Stores the currently selected file register block number. D9035 QnPH
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
block number number change) *10
QnPRH
QnU*3
Comment drive • Stores the comment drive number selected at the parameters or by the S (Status
SD650 Comment drive New
number QCDSET instruction. change)
SD651 • Stores the comment file name (with extension) selected at the
parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code.
SD652
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD653 Qn(H)
SD651 2nd character 1st character
QnPH
SD654 SD652 4th character 3rd character
Comment file Comment file S (Status QnPRH
SD655 SD653 6th character 5th character New QnU
name name change)
SD654 8th character 7th character
1st character of
SD655 2EH(.)
the extension
SD656
3rd character of 2nd character of
SD656 the extension the extension
Boot designation • Stores the drive number where the boot designation file (*.QBT) is being
SD660 S (Initial) New
file drive number stored.
SD661 • Stores the file name of the boot designation file (*.QBT).
SD662 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD661 2nd character 1st character Qn(H)
SD663
Boot operation SD662 4th character 3rd character QnPH
SD664 designation file File name of boot SD663 6th character 5th character QnPRH
S (Initial) New
designation file SD664 8th character 7th character QnU*4
SD665
1st character of
SD665 2EH(.)
the extension
SD666 3rd character of 2nd character of
SD666
the extension the extension
*3: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU.
*4: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU.
*10: On the Basic model QCPU, data is set at STOP to RUN or RSET instruction execution after parameter execution.
12 - 248
Table12.39 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Stores information of parameter storage destination drive which is
enabled.
0: Drive 0 (Program memory)
Parameter
Parameter enable 1: Drive 1 (SRAM card)
SD670 enable drive S (Initial) New
drive No. 2: Drive 2 (Flash card/ATA card)
information
4: Drive 4 (Standard ROM)
(Only drive 0 and drive 4 are valid in the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and
Q01UCPU.)
Indicates the status of the latch data backup function.
Presence/ Restore operation at
Status absence of turning power supply
backup data ON from OFF
0 No backup data Absent Restoring not executed
Restoring executed when
Restore ready turning power supply
1 ON from OFF the
completion
following time
Status of latch
Restore execution S (Status
SD671 data backup Status display 2 Restoring not executed New
completion Present change)
function
3 Backup execution wait Restoring not executed
Restore repeated Restoring executed
4 execution ready when turning power
completion supply ON from OFF
• "2 Restore ready completion" is a status immediately after restoring
data.
"3 Backup execution wait" is a status after turning power supply ON from
OFF at "2 Restore ready completion".
• Stores the last 2 digits of year and month when backup is performed in
2-digit BCD code.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Backup time (Year
SD672 July, 1993
and month)
9307H QnU
Year Month
• Stores the day and hour when backup is performed in 2-digit BCD code.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Backup time (Day 31st, 10 a.m.
SD673
and hour) 3110H
Day Hour
• Stores the minute and second when backup is performed in 2-digit BCD
code.
Backup time b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD674 Backup (Minute and 35 min., 48 sec. S (At write) New
information second) 3548H
Minute Second
• Stores the first 2 digits of year and day of week when backup is
performed in BCD code.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H
Backup time (Year Day of the week
SD675
and day of week) 0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
12 - 249
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU 1
D9
• Stores the last 2 digits of year and month when data is restored in 2-digit
BCD code.
SD676
Restore time
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
July, 1993
2
(Year and month)
9307H
Year Month
• Stores the day and time when data is restored in 2-digit BCD code. 3
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Restore time (Day 31st, 10 a.m.
SD677
and time)
12
3110H
Day Hour
• Stores the minute and second when data is restored in 2-digit BCD
code.
Backup data Restore time b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD678 restration (Minute and 35 min., 48 sec. S (Initial) New
information second) 3548H
Minute Second
• Stores the first 2 digits of year and day of week when data is restored in 6
BCD code.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H 7
Restore time
SD679 (Year and day of Day of the week QnU
week) 0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99)
8
1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Program Write (transfer)
Displays the status of writing (transferring) the program memory (flash
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
SD681 memory write status display S (At write) New
ROM) in percentage. (0 to 100%) "0" is set when the write direction is set.
(transfer) status (percentage)
SD682 • Stores the index value for the number of write operations to the program
memory (flash ROM) up to the present in BIN 32-bit value.
When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times, "FLASH ROM
Program
Write count index ERROR" (error code: 1610) occurs. (The index value is calculated even
memory write S (At write) New
SD683 up to present when exceeding 100 thousand times.)
count index
Note) The write count does not equal to the index value.(Since a flash
ROM write life is prolonged by the system, 1 is added to the write count
index when writing is performed twice or so.).
Standard ROM Write (transfer)
Displays the status of writing (transferring) the standard ROM (flash ROM)
SD686 write (transfer) status display (per- S (At write) New
in percentage. (0 to 100%) "0" is set when the write direction is set.
status centage)
SD687 • Stores the index value for the number of write operations to the standard
ROM (flash ROM) up to the present in BIN 32-bit value.
When the index value exceeds 100 thousand times, "FLASH ROM
ERROR" (error code: 1610) occurs. (The index value is calculated even
Standard ROM Write count index
when exceeding 100 thousand times.) S (At write) New
SD688 write count index up to present
Note) The write count does not equal to the index value. (Since a flash
ROM write life is prolonged by the system, 1 is added to the write count
index when the total write capacity after the previous count up reaches
about 1M byte.)
Stores the factor of the error that occurred in the backup.
0H : No error
100H: Memory card not inserted
200H: Size of backup target data exceeded
Backup error Backup error 300H: Memory card write inhibit setting S (Backup error
SD689 New
factor factor 400H: Memory card write error occurrence)
500H: Backup target data read error (from program memory)
503H: Backup target data read error (from standard RAM)
504H: Backup target data read error (from standard ROM) QnU*1
510H: Backup target data read error (from system data)
Stores the current backup status.
0 : Before backup start
1 : Backup start prepared
S (Status
SD690 Backup status Backup status 2 : Backup start preparation completed New
change)
3 : Backup in execution
4 : Backup completed
FF: Backup error
*1: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10102" or later. (Except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU)
12 - 250
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Backup execution • Displays the execution status of data backup to the memory card in
Backup S (Status
SD691 status display percentage (0 to 100%). New
execution status change)
(Percentage) • "0" is set when the backup starts.
Stores the factor of an error that occurred in the restoration.
Each error factor is as follows:
Factor of error 800H: The CPU module model name is not matched.
Restoration error S (Error
SD692 occurred in the 801H: The file password is set only for the restoration destination data or is New
factor occurrence)
restoration not matched.
810H: The verified backup data file is not matched or the backup data read
failed.
Stores the current restoration execution status.
Each error factor is as follows: QnU*1
0 : Before restoration start
Restoration Current restoration 1 : Restoration in execution S (Status
SD693 New
status status 2 : Restoration completed change)
FF: Restoration error
Sets "0" (Before restoring), however, when the restoration is completed
only during the automatic restoration.
• Displays the execution status of restoration to the CPU module in
Restoration
percentage (0 to 100%).
Restoration execution status S (Status
SD694 • "0" is set before the restoration. New
execution status display change)
Sets "0" (Before restoring), however, when the restoration is completed
(Percentage)
only during the automatic restoration.
• Specifies the maximum number of executions of the writing to standard
ROM instruction (SP.DEVST) to write to the standard ROM per day.
Specification of Specification of • When the number of executions of the writing to standard ROM
writing to stan- writing to standard instruction exceeds the number of times set by SD695, “OPERATION
SD695 U New QnU
dard ROM ROM instruction ERROR” (error code: 4113) occurs.
instruction count count • The setting range for SD695 is 1 to 32767. If 0 or value outside the
range is set, “OPERATION ERROR” (error code: 4113) occurs at
execution of the writing to standard ROM instruction.
SD696 Available
Available memory Stores the available memory in memory card. (Stores the value in 32-bit
memory in
SD697 in memory card binary.)
memory card S (Backup in
New QnU*1
SD698 operation)
Backup data Backup data
Stores the backup data capacity. (Stores the value in 32-bit binary.)
SD699 capacity capacity
*1: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10102" or later. (Except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU)
12 - 251
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(6) Instruction-Related Registers 1
Table12.40 Special register
Corres-
Number Name Meaning Explanation
Set by ponding Corresponding 2
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• During block operations, turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use the Q00J/Q00/Q01
3
SD705
mask pattern being stored at SD705 (or at SD705 and SD706 if double Qn(H)
Mask pattern Mask pattern U New
words are being used) to operate on all data in the block with the QnPH
SD706 masked values. QnPRH
• Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the
SD715
following manner:
SD716 IMASK
b15 b1 b0 12
S (During
instruction mask Mask pattern SD715 l15 to l1 l0 New
execution)
pattern
SD716 l31 to l17 l16
SD717 QCPU
SD717 l47 to l33 l32
SD718
Accumulator Accumulator • For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs. S/U New
SD719
Program No. Program No.
6
Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the PLOADP
designation for designation for Qn(H)
SD720 instruction when designated. U New
PLOADP PLOADP QnPH
Designation range: 1 to 124
instruction instruction
SD738
• Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction.
7
SD739
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
SD740
SD738 2nd character 1st character
SD741
SD742
SD739
SD740
4th character
6th character
3rd character
5th character
8
SD743 SD741 8th character 7th character
SD744 SD742 10th character 9th character
SD745 SD743 12th character 11th character
SD746 SD744 14th character 13th character
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
SD745 16th character 15th character
SD747
SD746 18th character 17th character
SD748
SD747 20th character 19th character
SD749
SD748 22nd character 21st character
SD750 SD749 24th character 23rd character
SD751 SD750 26th character 25th character
SD752 SD751 28th character 27th character
SD753 Message SD752 30th character 29th character S (During
Message storage New QCPU
SD754 storage SD753 32nd character 31st character execution)
SD755
SD754 34th character 33rd character
SD755 36th character 35th character
SD756
SD756 38th character 37th character
SD757
SD757 40th character 39th character
SD758
SD758 42nd character 41st character
SD759 SD759 44th character 43rd character
SD760 SD760 46th character 45th character
SD761 SD761 48th character 47th character
SD762 SD762 50th character 49th character
SD763 SD763 52nd character 51st character
SD764
SD764 54th character 53rd character
SD765 56th character 55th character
SD765
SD766 58th character 57th character
SD766
SD767 60th character 59th character
SD767
SD768 62nd character 61st character
SD768 SD769 64th character 63rd character
SD769
12 - 252
Table12.40 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Specify the limit of each PID loop as shown below.
SD774 PID limit setting b15 b1 b0 Qn(H)
0: With limit
to (for complete SD774 Loop16 to Loop2 Loop1 U New QnPRH
1: Without limit
SD775 derivative) QnU
SD775 Loop32 to Loop18 Loop17
• Specify the limit of each PID loop as shown below.
PID limit setting
0: With limit b15 to b8 b7 to b1 b0
SD774 (for complete U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
1: Without limit
derivative) SD774 Loop8 to Loop2 Loop1
• Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is
executed.
• Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON.
b15 b14 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD778 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
I/O refresh
CC-Link refresh
MELSECNET/H
refresh
Automatic refresh of
intelligent function Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
modules
U New Qn(H)*11
Automatic refresh of
CPU shared memory
(Fixed to "0" for
Redundant CPU)
Execution/non-
execution of
communication with
CPU module
• Refresh between multiple CPUs by COM instruction is performed under
the following occasion.
Receiving operation from other device: b4 of SD778(refresh in the CPU
shared memory) is turned to 1.
b0 to b14: Sending operation from host CPU : b15 of SD778(communication with
0: Do not peripheral device is executed/nonexecuted) is turned to 0.
refresh • Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is
Refresh 1: Refresh executed.
processing b15 bit • Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON.
selection when 0: Communication
SD778 the COM/ with CPU b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
CCOM module is SD778 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
instruction is executed I/O refresh
executed 1: Communication CC-Link refresh
withCPU CC-Link IE controller
network or
module is
MELSECNET/H refresh
nonexecuted Automatic refresh of
intelligent function
modules
Reading input/output
from group outside
multiple CPU system
Auto refresh using the Qn(H)*13
multiple CPU high speed U New QnPH*12
transmission area of
multiple CPU system QnPRH
Execution/non-
execution of
communication with
CPU module
• Refresh between multiple CPUs by COM instruction is performed under
the following occasion.
Receiving operation from other device: b4 of SD778(refresh in the CPU
shared memory) is turned to 1.
Sending operation from host CPU : b15 of SD778(communication with
peripheral device is executed/nonexecuted) is turned to 0.
• When b2 (refresh of the CC-Link IE controller network and
MELSECNET/H) of SD778 is 1, the CC-Link IE controller network and
MELSECNET/H perform refresh.
Therefore, if there are many refresh points, processing time for the COM
instruction will be extended.
*9: Function version is B or later.
*11: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "04012" or later.
*12: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
*13: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 253
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.40 Special register
1
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9 2
• Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM, CCOM
instruction is executed.
• Designation of SD778 is made valid when SM775 turns ON.
b15 b14 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD778 0/1 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3
I/O refresh
b0 to b14:
CC-Link refresh
0: Do not Refresh of
refresh
12
MELSECNET/H and
Refresh 1: Refresh CC-Link IE controller
network
processing b15 bit
Automatic refresh of
selection when 0: communication intelligent function
SD778 the COM/ with peripheral modules U New QnU
CCOM device is Auto refresh using
QCPU standard area of
instruction is executed
multiple CPU system and
executed 1: communication reading input/output from
with peripheral group outside.
device is Auto refresh using the
nonexecuted multiple CPU high speed
transmission area of
multiple CPU system
Execution/non-
6
execution of
communication with
CPU module
• Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows: 7
b15 b1 b0
SD781 l63 to l49 l48
SD781
to
Mask pattern of
IMASK Mask pattern
SD782 l79 to l65 l64
S (During
New
Qn(H)
QnPH
8
to execution) QnPRH
SD793 instruction
QnU
SD793 l255 to l241 l240
(The Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU cannot use the special
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
registers SD786 to SD793.)
• Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows:
b15 b1 b0
SD781 l63 to l49 l48
SD781 Mask pattern of
SD782 l79 to l65 l64 S (During
to IMASK Mask pattern New Q00J/Q00/Q01
execution)
SD785 instruction
to to
SD785 l127 to l113 l112
• Specify the limit of each PID loop as shown below.
SD794 PID limit setting b15 b1 b0 Qn(H)*13
0: With limit
to (for incomplete SD794 Loop16 to Loop2 Loop1 U New QnPRH
1: Without limit
SD795 derivative) QnU
SD795 Loop32 to Loop18 Loop17
• Specify the limit of each PID loop as shown below.
PID limit setting
0: With limit b15 to b8 b7 b1 b0
SD794 (for incomplete U New Q00J/Q00/Q01*9
1: Without limit
derivative) SD794 Loop8 to Loop2 Loop1
*9: Function version is B or later.
*13: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "09012" or later.
12 - 254
Table12.40 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Maximum
number of
• Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the multiple CPU
blocks used for
high-speed transmission dedicated instruction (target CPU=CPU No.1).
the multiple
When the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU transmission is
CPU high-
executed to the CPU No.1, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD796 speed New
dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of after RUN)
transmission
this register, SM796 is turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal
dedicated
for consecutive execution of the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU
instruction
transmission.
setting (for CPU
No.1)
Maximum
number of
• Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the multiple CPU
blocks used for
high-speed transmission dedicated instruction (target CPU=CPU No.2).
the multiple
When the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU transmission is
CPU high-
executed to the CPU No.2, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD797 speed New
dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of after RUN)
transmission Maximum number
this register, SM797 is turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal
dedicated of blocks range for
for consecutive execution of the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU
instruction dedicated
transmission.
setting (for CPU instructions
No.2) Range: 1 to 7
QnU*14*15
Maximum (Default: 2 Or
number of when setting other
• Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the multiple CPU
blocks used for than 1 to 7, the
high-speed transmission dedicated instruction (target CPU=CPU No.3).
the multiple register operates
When the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU transmission is
CPU high- as 7).
executed to the CPU No.3, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD798 speed New
dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of after RUN)
transmission
this register, SM798 is turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal
dedicated
for consecutive execution of the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU
instruction
transmission.
setting (for CPU
No.3)
Maximum
number of
• Specifies the maximum number of blocks used for the multiple CPU
blocks used for
high-speed transmission dedicated instruction (target CPU=CPU No.4).
the multiple
When the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU transmission is
CPU high-
executed to the CPU No.4, and the number of empty blocks of the U (At 1 scan
SD799 speed New
dedicated instruction transmission area is less than the setting value of after RUN)
transmission
this register, SM799 is turned ON, which is used as the interlock signal
dedicated
for consecutive execution of the dedicated instruction of Multiple CPU
instruction
transmission.
setting (for CPU
No.4)
*14: The Universal model QCPU except the Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, and Q02UCPU.
*15: The range is from 1 to 9 for the Q03UDCPU, Q04UDCPU, and Q06UDHCP whose first 5 digits of serial number is "10012" or earlier.
(Default: 2 Or when setting other than 1 to 9, the register operates as 9).
12 - 255
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(7) Debug
Table12.41 Special register 1
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
2
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Stores the status of the debug function usage as shown below.
0: Forced ON/OFF for external I/O
1: Executional conditioned device test
2 to 15:Absent (0 fix)
b15 to b2 b1 b0
3
Debug function Debug function S (Status
SD840 0 New QnU*1
usage usage change)
Forced ON/OFF for
external I/O
Executional conditioned
device test 12
(0: Not used, 1: Used)
*1: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
(8) Redundant CPU information (host system CPU information*1)
Table12.42 Special register
Set by
Corres-
ponding Corresponding
6
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
History of Latest status of
Stores the completion status of the memory copy from control system to
standby system executed last.
7
1) Stores the same value as stored into SD1596 at normal completion/
memory copy memory copy
abnormal completion of the memory copy from control system to S (Status
SD952 from control from control New QnPRH
standby system. change)
system to system to standby
standby system system
2) Backed up for a power failure, this special register holds the status of
memory copy from control system to standby system executed last. 8
3) Cleared to 0 by latch clear operation.
*1: The host system CPU information is stored.
(9) Remote password count
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
Table12.43 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Direct
SD979 MELSOFT
connection
SD980 to Connection
SD995 1 to 16 Count of unlock
Stores the count of unlock processing failures. S(Status
MELSOFT processing
Range: 0 to FFFEH (FFFFH when the limit is exceeded) change)
New QnU*1
SD998 connection failures
using TCP port
FTP
SD999 communi
cation port
*1: This applies to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
12 - 256
(10) A to Q conversion
ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to Q special registers SD1000 to
SD1255 after A to Q/QnA conversion.
(However, the Basic model QCPU and Redundant CPU do not support the A to Q
conversion.)
These special registers are all set by the system, and cannot be set by the user program.
To set data by the user program, correct the program for use of the QCPU special registers.
However, some of SD1200 to SD1255 (corresponding to D9200 to 9255 before conversion)
can be set by the user program if they could be set by the user program before conversion.
For details on the ACPU special registers, refer to the user's manual for the corresponding
CPU, and MELSECNET or MELSECNET/B Data Link System Reference Manuals.
Check "Use special relay/special register from SM/SD1000" for "A-PLC" on the PLC system tab of PLC parameter in GX
Developer when the converted special registers are used with the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and
Universal model QCPU.
When not using the converted special registers, uncheck "Use special relay/special registers from SM/SD1000" to save the
time taken for processing special registers.
Remark
Supplemental explanation on "Special Register for Modification" column
For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified, modify it to the special register for
QCPU.
For the device numbers for which is specified, special register after conversion can be used.
Device numbers for which is specified do not function for QCPU.
12 - 257
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.44 Special register
ACPU
Special
Special
1
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
• When fuse blown modules are detected, the first I/O number of the
lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal.
2
(Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown,
"50" is stored in hexadecimal) Qn(H)
Number of module
D9000 SD1000 – Fuse blown To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor QnPH
with blown fuse
operation given in hexadecimal.
(Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0.)
QnU*1 3
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote
I/O stations.
• Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch
numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred. 12
AJ02 I/O module Extension base unit
Setting Stored Base unit Stored
switch data slot No. data
0 0 0 4
1 1 1 5
Number of module Qn(H)
D9001 SD1001 – Fuse blown 2 2 2 6
with blown fuse QnPH
3 3 3 7
4
5
4
5
6
6 6
7 7
• For the remote I/O station, the value of (module I/O No./10H) + 1 is 7
stored.
• If I/O modules, of which data are different from data entered, are
detected when the power is turned on, the first I/O number of the
I/O module I/O module verify
lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in
hexadecimal. (Storing method is the same as that of SD1000.) Qn(H) 8
D9002 SD1002 – To monitor the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor QnPH
verify error error module number
operation given in hexadecimal. QnU*1
(Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0.)
• I/O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote
I/O terminals.
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
• When the AC power supply module is used, 1 is added at
Qn(H)
occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms.
QnPH
(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when the power supply
QnU*1
AC DOWN Number of times for is switched from OFF to ON.
D9005 SD1005 –
counter AC DOWN • When the DC power supply module is used, 1 is added at
Qn(H)
occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms.
QnPH
(The value is stored in BIN code.) It is reset when the power supply
QnU*1
is switched from OFF to ON.
Qn(H)
Self-diagnostic Self-diagnostic error • When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error number is
D9008 SD1008 SD0 QnPH
error number stored in BIN code.
QnU*1
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 258
Table12.44 Special register
Special
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
• When one of F0 to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or
SET F instruction, the F number, which has been detected earliest
F number at which Qn(H)
Annunciator among the F numbers which have turned on, is stored in BIN code.
D9009 SD1009 SD62 external failure has QnPH
detection • SD1009 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction.
occurred QnU*1
If another F number has been detected, the clearing of SD1009
causes the next number to be stored in SD1009.
• When operation error has occurred during execution of application
Step number at which instruction, the step number, at which the error has occurred, is
D9010 SD1010 Error step operation error has stored in BIN code.
occurred. Thereafter, each time operation error occurs, the contents of
SD1010 are renewed.
• When operation error has occurred during execution of application
Step number at which instruction, the step number, at which the error has occurred, is
Qn(H)
D9011 SD1011 Error step operation error has stored in BIN code. Since the step number is stored into SD1011
QnPH
occurred. when SM1011 turns from OFF to ON, the data of SD1011 is not
updated unless SM1011 is cleared by a user program.
• The I/O control mode set is returned in any of the following
numbers:
I/O control I/O control mode
D9014 SD1014 0: Both input and output in direct mode
mode number
1: Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode
3: Both input and output in refresh mode
• The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in
SD1015.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Remote RUN/STOP CPU key switch
by computer
0 RUN
0 RUN
1 STOP Qn(H)
Operating Operating status of 1 STOP
D9015 SD1015 SD203 2 PAUSE 1
2 PAUSE 1 QnPH
status of CPU CPU 3 STEP RUN
QnU*1
Remains the same in
remote RUN/STOP
mode.
Status in program Remote RUN/STOP
by parameter setting
0 Except below
0 RUN
STOP
1 Instruction 1 STOP
execution
2 PAUSE 1
*1: When the CPU mdoule is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off, the
CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode.
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 259
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.44 Special register
Special
1
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
0: Main program
2
(ROM)
1: Main program
(RAM)
2: Subprogram 1
(RAM) 3
3: Subprogram 2
(RAM)
4: Subprogram 3
12
(RAM)
5: Subprogram 1
(ROM)
Program • Indicates which sequence program is run presently. One value of 0 Qn(H)
D9016 SD1016 6: Subprogram 2
number to B is stored in BIN code. QnPH
(ROM)
7: Subprogram 3
(ROM)
8: Main program
(E2PROM)
9: Subprogram 1
(E2PROM)
A: Subprogram 2
(E2PROM)
6
B: Subprogram 3
(E2PROM)
D9017 SD1017 SD524 Scan time
Minimum scan time
(10 ms units)
• If scan time is smaller than the content of SD1017, the value is
newly stored at each END. Namely, the minimum value of scan 7
time is stored into SD1017 in BIN code.
Qn(H)
Scan time • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always
D9018 SD1018 SD520 Scan time QnPH
(10 ms units) rewritten.
QnU*1
D9019 SD1019 SD526 Scan time
Maximum scan time
(10 ms units)
• If scan time is larger than the content of SD1019, the value is newly
stored at each END. Namely, the maximum value of scan time is
8
stored into SD1019 in BIN code.
• Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples
Constant scan time of 10 ms.
Qn(H)
D9020 SD1020 Constant scan (User sets in 10 ms 0 : No setting
QnPH
units) 1 to 200 : Set. Program is executed at intervals of (set
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
value) 10 ms.
Scan time • At every END, the scan time is stored in BIN code and always
D9021 SD1021 – Scan time
(1 ms units) rewritten.
• When the PC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1 every
1 second second.
D9022 SD1022 SD412 Count in units of 1s.
counter • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to -32768 and
then again up to 0. Counting repeats this routine.
• The year (last two digits) and month are stored as BCD code as
shown below.
Clock data b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
D9025 SD1025 – Clock data 1987, July
(year, month)
H8707
Year Month Qn(H)
QnPH
• The day and hour are stored as BCD code as shown below. QnU*1
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Clock data 31st, 10 a.m.
D9026 SD1026 – Clock data
(day, hour) H3110
Day Hour
• The minute and second are stored as BCD code as shown below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
Clock data 35 min, 48 sec.
D9027 SD1027 – Clock data
(minute, second) H3548
Minute Second
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 260
Table12.44 Special register
Special
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
• The day of the week is stored as BCD code as shown below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
Example:
Friday
H0005
Day of the week
Clock data
D9028 SD1028 – Clock data 0 Sunday Qn(H)
(day of week)
Always set "0" 1 Monday QnPH
2 Tuesday QnU*1
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Extension file • Stores the block No. of the extension file register being used in
D9035 SD1035 SD648 Use block No.
register BCD code.
• Designate the device number for the extension file register for
direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN
data.
D9036 SD1036 Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of block No. 1 to
designate device numbers.
Device number when Extension file register
Extension file
individual devices 0
registerfor to Block No.1
from extension file
designation of 16383 area
register are directly
device number
accessed 16384 Block No.2
to area
D9037 SD1037 SD1037,SD1036
Device No. (BIN data)
to
• Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or flicker) to
D9038 SD1038 SD207 Priorities 1 to 4 indicate errors with error code numbers.
• Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0
LED display
SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1
priority ranking
SD208 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5
D9039 SD1039 SD208 Priorities 5 to 7 • For details, refer to the applicable CPUs User's Manual and the
ACPU Programming manual (Fundamentals).
Qn(H)
QnPH
• Turned on/off with a peripheral device.
When STRA or STRAR instruction is executed, the value stored in
For sampling Step or time during SD1044 is used as the sampling trace condition.
D9044 SD1044
trace sampling trace At scanning--------0
At time--------------Time (10 msec unit)
The value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code.
• Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is
used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a
Work area for Block number of
D9049 SD1049 binary value.
SFC extension file register
• Stores "0" if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller, which cannot
be expansion file register No. 1, is used or if SM320 is OFF.
• Stores error code of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN
code.
0 : No error
SFC program Error code generated 80: SFC program parameter error
D9050 SD1050
error number by SFC program 81: SFC code error
82: Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded
83: Block start error
84: SFC program operation error
• Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC
Block number where
D9051 SD1051 Error block program in BIN code.
error occurred
In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored.
• Stores the step number, where error code 84 occurred in an SFC
Step number where program, in BIN value.
D9052 SD1052 Error step
error occurred • Stores "0" when error code 80, 81 or 82 occurred.
• Stores the block stating step number when error code 83 occurs.
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 261
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.44 Special register
Special
1
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
Transition condition • Stores the transition condition number, where error code 84 occurred
2
D9053 SD1053 Error transition number where error in an SFC program, in BIN value.
occurred Stores "0" when error code 80, 81, 82 or 83 occurred.
Sequence step • Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and
D9054 SD1054
Error sequence
step
number where error
occurred
operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in
BIN code.
3
• Stores the step number when status latch is executed.
• Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed Qn(H)
in a main sequence program. QnPH
Status latch
• Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is
executed in a SFC program.
12
D9055 SD1055 SD812 execution step Status latch step
number Block No. Step No.
(BIN) (BIN)
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
PLC Data check of serial • In the self-loopback test of the serial communication module, the
Qn(H)
D9072 SD1072 communication communication serial communication module writes/reads data automatically to
QnPH
check module make communication checks.
Register for
• Sets the time check time of the data link instructions (ZNRD,
ZNWR) for the MELSECNET/10.
6
D9085 SD1085 setting time 1 s to 65535 s • Setting range : 1 s to 65535 s (1 to 65535)
check value • Setting unit :1s
• Default value : 10 s (If 0 has been set, default 10 s is applied) Qn(H)
7
QnPH
Number of
Number of special
special • For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer program
D9090 SD1090 functions modules
functions package.
over
modules over
Qn(H)
D9091 SD1091
Detailed error
code
Self-diagnosis
detailed error code
• Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error. QnPH
QnU*1
8
Head I/O • Stores the first two digits of the head I/O number of the I/O module,
Head I/O number of I/
number of I/O which will be dismounted/mounted online (with power on), in BIN Qn(H)
D9094 SD1094 SD251 O module to be
module to be value. QnPH
replaced
replaced Example) Input module X2F0 H2F
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
• The DIP switch information of the CPU module is stored in the
following format.
0: OFF
1: ON
b15 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DIP switch DIP switch D9095 0 Qn(H)
D9095 SD1095 SD200
information information QnPH
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 262
Table12.44 Special register
Special
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
• Output module numbers (in units of 16 points), of which fuses have
D9100 SD1100
blown, are entered in bit pattern. (Preset output module numbers
when parameter setting has been performed.)
D9101 SD1101
b15 b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9102 SD1102 1 1
SD1100 0 0 0 (YC0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Y80)
D9103 SD1103 Bit pattern in units of SD1101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Qn(H)
Fuse blown 16 points, indicating
– 1 QnPH
module the modules whose 1
SD1107 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9104 SD1104 QnU*1
Y7 Y7
fuses have blown B0 30
D9105 SD1105 Indicates fuse blow.
D9106 SD1106 • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote I/
O station.
(If normal status is restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is
D9107 SD1107
required to perform clear by user program.)
D9108 SD1108
• Set the value of the step transition monitoring timer and the
annunciator number (F number) that will be turned ON when the
D9109 SD1109 monitoring timer times out.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D9110 SD1110
Step transfer Timer setting valve
Qn(H)
D9111 SD1111 – monitoring timer and the F number at
F number setting Timer time limit setting QnPH
setting time out
(02 to 255) (1 to 255 s:(1 s units))
D9112 SD1112
• By turning ON any of SM1108 to SM1114, the monitoring timer
D9113 SD1113 starts. If the transition condition following a step which corresponds
to the timer is not established within set time, set annunciator (F) is
turned on.)
D9114 SD1114
• When I/O modules, of which data are different from those entered
D9116 SD1116
at power-ON, have been detected, the I/O module numbers (in
units of 16 points) are entered in bit pattern. (Preset I/O module
D9117 SD1117 numbers set in parmeters when parameter setting has been
performed.)
D9118 SD1118
b15 b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
SD1116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY
D9119 SD1119 Bit pattern, in units of 0
I/O module 16 points, indicating 1
– SD1117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
verification error the modules with 190
D9120 SD1120
verification errors. 1
SD1123 0 0 0 0 XY
7B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Qn(H)
QnPH
D9121 SD1121
Indicates an I/O module verify error. QnU*1
D9122 SD1122
• I/O module verify check is executed also to remote I/O station
modules.
D9123 SD1123 (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed. Therefore, it is
required to perform clear by user program.)
• When one of F0 to 255 (F0 to 2047 for AuA and AnU) is turned on
by SET F instruction 1 is added to the contents of SD63. When
Number of
Number of annuciator RST F or LEDR instruction is executed, 1 is subtracted from the
D9124 SD1124 SD63 annuciator
detections contents of SD63.
detections
• Quantity, which has been turned on by SET F instruction is stored
into SD63 in BIN code. The value of SD63 is maximum 16.
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12 - 263
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.44 Special register
Special
1
ACPU Special
Register Corresponding
Special Register for Name Meaning Details
after CPU
Register Modification
Conversion
2
• When any of F0 to 2047 is turned on by SET F instruction, the
D9125 SD1125 SD64 annunciator numbers (F numbers) that are turned on in order are
registered into SD1125 to SD1132.
• The F number turned off by RST F instruction is erased from any of
D9126 SD1126 SD65
SD1125 to SD1132, and the F numbers stored after the erased F
number are shifted to the preceding registerers.
3
By executing LEDR instruction, the contents of SD1125 to SD1132
are shifted upward by one.
When there are 8 annunciator detections, the 9th one is not stored
D9127 SD1127 SD66 into SD1125 to SD1132 even if detected.
SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET
12
F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR
D9128 SD1128 SD67 SD1009 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
Annunciator Qn(H)
Annunciator
detection SD1124 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 QnPH
detection number
number QnU*1
D9129 SD1129 SD68 SD1125 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
SD1126 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15
D9130 SD1130 SD69
SD1127 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 6
SD1128 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
SD1129 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
D9131 SD1131 SD70
SD1130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110 7
SD1131 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
D9132 SD1132 SD71 SD1132 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210
8
*1: The relevant modules are as follows:
• The Universal model QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "10102" or later.
• Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
12 - 264
(11) QCPU with built-in Ethernet port
Table12.45 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
Stores the operation result of the time setting function.
Operation Stores 0: Not executed
SD1270
result operationresult. 1: Success
FFFFH: Failure
Stores years (last two digits of the Christian Era) and monthes by two digits of
BCD code.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD1271 July, 1993
9307H
Year Month
Stores dates and hours acquired with time setting function by two digits of
BCD code.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
SD1272 31st, 10 a.m.
3110H
Day Hour
Time setting function
Stores minutes and seconds acquired with time setting function by two digits
of BCD code.
Stores time
Execution b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example: S (status
SD1273 acquired with time
time 35 min., 48 sec. change)
setting function.
3548H
Minute Second
Stores years (first two digits of the Christian Era) and days acquierd with time
setting function.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 Example:
1993, Friday
1905H
SD1274 Day of the week New QnU*1
0 Sunday
Higher digits of year (0 to 99) 1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Stores time taken from transmission to SNTP server to clook time setup at
Required Stores time
CPU.
SD1275 response required for clock
Range: 0 to FFFEH (Unit: ms)
time time aquisition.
FFFFH when the above limit is exceeded.
SD1276 Specify this when a connection is to be invalidated forcibly on the user
program. If invalidation is specified for a connection, it stops communication
and does not respond. (When a remote password is used and frequent unlock
processing errors have occurred on a connection, this is useful for temporarily
inhibiting access to the connection.)
b15b14 to b1 b0
SD1276
Connection 1
Connection 2
Connection 15
Forced Specifies forced Connection 16
connection connection b15b14 b13 b12 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 U
SD1277 invalidation invalidation. SD1277 0 0 0
MELSOFT communication
port (UDP/IP)
MELSOFT communication
port (TCP/IP)
FTP communication port
Directconnection to
MELSOFT
0: Valid (default)
1: Invalid
This register is to be invalidated if a socket communication is used as an
open system.
*1: This applies to the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
12 - 265
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.46 Special register
Corres-
1
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
Open completion status of connections (whose open system is socket
D9
2
communication) using socket communication functions is stored.
All bits corresponding to connections using any communications other than
the socket communication are fixed to "0".
SD1282
b15b14 to b1 b0 3
Open completion Stores open S (Status
SD1282 Connection 1 New QnU*2
signal completion status change)
Connection 2
to
Connection 15
Connection 16 12
0 : Open processing is not completed.
1 : Open processing is completed.
Open request status of connections using socket communication functions is
stored.
All bits corresponding to connections using any communications other than
the socket communication are fixed to "0".
b15b14 to b1 b0
SD1284
SD1284
Open request
signal
Stores open
request status Connection 1
Connection 2
S (Status
change)
New QnU*2 6
to
Connection 15
Connection 16
0 : No open requests
1 : In open request
7
Reception status of connections using socket communication functions is
stored.
All bits corresponding to connections using any communications other than
the socket communication are fixed to "0".
b15b14 to b1 b0
8
SD1286
Connection 1
Connection 2
to
Connection 15
Reception status Stores reception S (Status
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
SD1286 Connection 16 New QnU*2
signal status change)
For TCP (Normal reception mode)
0 : Data have not been received.
1 : Data have been received.
For TCP (Fixed length reception mode)
0 : Data have not been received
,or received data size has not been reached to valid buffer size.
1 : Received data size has been reached to valid buffer size.
For UDP
0 : Data have not been received.
1 : Data have been received.
Connection status of built-in Ethernet port is stored.
b15 to b11 b10 b9 to b0
SD1288 1/0
Built-in Ethernet Stores connection
S (Status
SD1288 port connection status of built-in New QnU*2
Connection status change)
status Ethernet port 0 : Not connected with or disconnected from hubs or devices.
1 : Connected to hubs or devices
It may take several seconds for the QCPU to determine whether to connect or
disconnect a built-in Ethernet port.
*2: The built-in Ethernet port QCPU whose serial number (first five digits) is "11012" or later is targeted.
12 - 266
(12) Fuse blown module
Table12.47 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD1300 • The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a D9100
SD1301 bit pattern (in units of 16 points). D9101
(If the module numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set
SD1302 D9102
numbers are stored.)
SD1303 • Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output modules D9103
SD1304 Bit pattern in units D9104
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SD1305 of 16 points, D9105
indicating the 1 1 Qn(H)
SD1306 SD1300 0 0 0 (YC0) 0 0 0 (Y80) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9106
Fuse blown modules whose QnPH
SD1307 1 S (Error) D9107
module fuses have blown SD1301
1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 QnPRH
SD1308 0 : No blown fuse
(Y1F0) (Y1A0)
New QnU
SD1309 1 : Blown fuse 1 1
to present SD1331 0 0 0 0 Y1F
B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y1F
30
0 0 0 New
SD1330
Indicates fuse blow.
SD1331 New
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one.
This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
(13) I/O module verification
Table12.48 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
SD1400 • When the I/O modules whose I/O module information differs from that D9116
SD1401 registered at power-ON are detected, the numbers of those I/O modules D9117
are entered in bit pattern.
SD1402 D9118
(If the I/O numbers are set by parameter, the parameter-set numbers
SD1403 are stored.) D9119
Bit pattern, in units
SD1404 of 16 points, • Also detects I/O module information. D9120
SD1405 indicating the b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 D9121
SD1406 modules with 1 D9122 Qn(H)
I/O module verification errors. SD1400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X0Y QnPH
SD1407 S (Error) D9123
verify error 0 : No I/O 1 QnPRH
SD1408 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
verification SD1401 XY
190 QnU
SD1409 errors
to 1 : I/O verification 1 New
SD1431 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SD1430 error present 1FE0
Indicates an I/O module verify error.
SD1431 New
• Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one.
This flag is cleared by error resetting operation.
(14) Process control instructions
Table12.49 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• Set the basic period (1 second units) use for the process control
SD1500 instruction using floating point data.
Basic period Basic period tome U New
SD1501
Floating point
pointsdata
data== SD1501 SD1500
Process control Process control
• Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred in the QnPH
SD1502 instruction detail instruction detail S (Error) New
process control instruction.
error code error code
Process control Process control
instruction instruction • Shows the error process block that occurred in the process control
SD1503 S (Error) New
generated error generated error instruction.
location location
SD1506 QnPH
Dummy device Dummy device • Used to specify dummy devices by a process control instruction. U New
SD1507 QnPRH
• Selects the availability (enabled/disabled) of the function for process
b0
control instructions.
Bumpless function
Function b15 b14 to b2 b1 b0
availability setting
availability SD1508 0 0 0 1/0
for the S.PIDP QnPH
SD1508 selection for U New
instrunction QnPRH
process control Bumpless function
0: Enabled
instruction availability for the
1: Disabled
S.PIDP instruction
(Default: 0)
12 - 267
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(15) For redundant systems (Host system CPU information *1) 1
SD1510 to SD1599 are only valid for redundant systems.
They are all set to 0 for stand-alone systems.
Table12.50 Special register 2
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU
D9
CPU
3
The LED status for BACKUP, CONTROL, SYSTEM A, SYSTEM B is
stored in the following format:
b15 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 to b0
0 0 12
4 LED states
BACKUP
Redundant • BACKUP
SYSTEM B 0: Off S (status
SD1585 system LED • CONTROL 1: On (red) 5: On (orange-yellow) New
0: Off change)
status • SYSTEM A 1: On
2: Flicker(red) 6: Flicker
(orange-yellow)
• SYSTEM B 2: Flicker 3: On(green)
4: Flicker(green)
SYSTEM A
0: Off CONTROL
1: On 0: Off QnPRH
2: Flicker 1: On
6
Stores the reason(s) for system switching on the host system.
The following values are stored corresponding to the methods for system
switching:
Initialized to 0 when the power supply is switched off and then on or the
Reason(s) for
Reason(s) for
system switching
RESET switch is set to the RESET position and then to the neutral
position. S (when
7
SD1588 system switch-
that occurred in 0: Initial value (control system has not been switched) condition occurs)
ing
host station 1: Power off, Reset, H/W failure, WDT error,
2: CPU stop error (except WDT)
3: System switching request from network module
16: System switching dedicated instruction 8
17: System switching request from GX Developer
• Stores the reason(s) for system switching failure.
0: System switching normal (default)
1: Tracking cable is not connected , tracking cable error, FPGA circuit
failure.
2: H/W failure, power-OFF, Reset, WDT error on the standby system
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
3: H/W failure, power-OFF, Reset, WDT error on the Control system
4: Tracking data transfer initialization
Reason(s) for 5: Communication timeout
Reason(s) for
system 6: Serious error(except WDT error) on the Standby system S(when system
SD1589 system switching QnPRH
switching failure 7: There is difference between both systems is switched)
failure No.
conditions (detected as Backup mode only)
8: During memory copy from control system to standby system
9: During online program change
10: During detection of intelligent function module failure on the standby
system
11: System switching being executed
• Resets to "0" when host system is powered on.
• Resets to "0" once system has been switched successfully.
• Stores head address of network module which a system switch request
was initiated.
• Turns off automatically by system, after network error is reset by user.
Each bit
b15 to b11 to b1 b0 0:OFF
SD1590 0 0/1 0/1 0 1:ON
Network module
Network module
head address, Module 0: CPU module is invalid
head address, as it is 2-slot model. S (Error/Status
SD1590 which requested New
which requested Module 1: Module on the right change)
system
system switching side of the CPU module
switching to
Module11: Module at the
rightmost end of the
12-slot base (Q312B) QnPRH
• Please refer to SD1690 which stores the corresponding head address of
network module on other system.
Memory copy
Memory copy • Stores the memory copy target I/O No.(Standby system CPU module:
SD1595 target I/O U New
target I/O number 3D1H) of before SM1595 is turned from OFF to ON.
number
• Stores the execution result of Memory copy function.
0 : Memory copy successfully completed
Memory copy Memory copy 4241H : Standby system power supply off S (Status
SD1596 New
status status 4242H : Tracking cable is disconnected or is damaged change)
4247H : Memory copy function is being executed
4248H : Unsupported memory copy destination I/O Number
*1: The information of the host CPU module is stored.
12 - 268
(16) For redundant systems (Other system CPU information *1)
SD1600 to SD1659 is only valid during the back up mode for redundant systems, and
refresh cannot be done when in the separate mode.
SD1651 to SD1699 are valid in either the backup mode or separate mode.
When a stand-alone system SD1600 to SD1699 are all 0.
Table12.51 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SD *2
• If an error is detected by the error check for redundant system, the
corresponding bit shown below turns ON. That bit turns OFF when the
error is cleared after that.
Each bit
b15 b2 b1 b0 0: OFF
SD1600 Fixed to 0 1: ON
Tracking cable is not
connected or damaged
Power-OFF, reset,
watchdog timer error or
hardware failure occurred
in other system
System error System error Other system stop error
SD1600 S(Every END)
information information (except watchdog timer
error)
Bit turns on when failing to
connect with other system.
The following causes are
shown below:
Tracking H/W failure
Host system WDT
error
Cannot recognize
other system therefore
causing error –
• If any of b0, b1, b2 and b15 is ON, the other bits are all OFF.
• In the debug mode, b0, b1, b2 and b15 are all OFF.
Stores the reasons for system switching.
• Stores the reasons for system switching into SD1601 of both systems
when system switching occarred.
• Initialized to 0 at power OFF to ON/reset to unreset.
• The following shows values stored into this register.
System 0: Initial value (System switching has not occurred)
System switching S(when system QnPRH
SD1601 switching 1: Power-OFF, Reset, H/W failure, WDT error,(*)
results is switched)
results 2: CPU stop error (except WDT)
3: System switching request by network module
16: System switching dedicated instruction
17: System switching request from GX Developer
*: When the system is switched by the power OFF/reset of the control
system, "1" is not stored into SD1601 of the new standby system.
• Stores the parameters for system switching dedicated instruction
System SP.CONTSW.
System switching
switching (The parameters (SD1602) for SP.CONTSW are stored in both systems
dedicated S(when system
SD1602 dedicated A&B)
instruction is switched)
instruction • SD1602 is only valid when "16" is stored in SD1601.
parameter
parameter • This SD1602 is updated once system switch instruction SP.CONTSW is
activated.
Other system Diagnostic error • The error value sorted in BIN code.
SD1610 S(Every END) SD0
diagnostic error code • Stores SD0 of the other system CPU module
SD1611 Other system • Stores the date and time when diagnostics error occurred corresponding
SD1612 diagnostic error Diagnostic error to error code stored in SD1610. SD1 to
S(Every END)
occurrence occurrence time • Data format is the same as SD1 to SD3. SD3
SD1613 time • Also, stores the value to SD1 to SD3.
Other system • Stores the category code corresponding to the error comment
error Error information information/individual information code.
SD1614 S(Every END) SD4
information category code • Data format is the same as SD4.
category • Also, stores the value to SD4.
• Stores the common information corresponding to the error code stored
SD1615 Other system
Error common in this system CPU. SD5 to
to error common S(Every END)
information • Data composition is the same as SD5 to SD15. SD15
SD1625 information
• Also, stores the value to SD5 to SD15.
• Stores the individual information corresponding to the error code stored
SD1626 Other system
Error individual in this system CPU. SD16 to
to error individual S(Every END)
information • Data composition is the same as SD16 to SD26. SD26
SD1636 information
• Also, stores the value to SD16 to SD26.
*2: Shows the special register (SD ) for the host system CPU module.
12 - 269
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table12.51 Special register 1
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
SD *2 2
• Stores the error code of the error to be cleared by clearing a standby
system error.
• Stores the error code of the error to be cleared into this register and turn
Standby system
SD1649 error cancel
command
Error code of error
to be cleared
SM1649 from OFF to ON to clear the standby system error.
• The value in the lowest digit (1 place) of the error code is ignored when
S(Every END) 3
stored into this register.
(By storing 4100 in this register and resetting the error, errors 4100 to
4109 can be cleared.)
Stores the operation information of the other system CPU module in the
following format. 12
"00FFH" I stored when a communication error occurs, or when in debug
mode.
b15 to b8 b7tob4 b3to b0
SD1650 0
0:No error
1:Continue error
2:Stop error
F:Communication with
other system
6
Other system Other system disabled ( )
SD1650 operating operating S(Every END)
information information 0:RUN : Communication
2:STOP
3:PAUSE
with other system
disabled, debug
7
F:Communication with mode
other system – QnPRH
disabled ( )
Note : A communication error is caused by the following:.
8
• When the power supply is switched off, or when the other system is
reset.
• H/W error occurs on either of system A or B.
• WDT error occurs.
• Tracking cable is not connected.
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
• Tracking cable is disconnected or damaged.
• Stores head address of network module which a system switch request
was initiated, using the following format.
• Turns off automatically by system, after network error is reset by user.
Each bit
b15 to b11 to b1 b0 0:OFF
SD1690 0 0/1 0/1 0 1:ON
Network module
Network module
head address, Module 0: CPU module is
head address,
which requested invalid as it is 2-
which requested slot model
SD1690 system S(Every END)
system switching Module 1: Module on the
switching on
on host (control) to
right side of the
host (control) CPU module
system
system Module11: Module at the
rightmost end of
the 12-slot base
(Q312B)
• Please refer to SD1590 which stores the corresponding head address of
network module on host system.
*2 : Shows the special register (SD ) for the host system CPU.
12 - 270
(17) For redundant systems (Trucking)
SD1700 to SD1779 is valid only for redundant systems.
These are all 0 for stand-alone systems.
Table12.52 Special register
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9
• When the tracking error is detected, count is added by one.
Tracking error Tracking error
SD1700 • The counter repeats an increment and decrement of the value; 0 S(Error) QnPRH
detection count detection count
32767 - 32768 0
• Set in seconds the waiting time of the standby system CPU module from
when online program change to the control system CPU module is
completed by the online program change for redundancy function until
the online program change to the standby system CPU module starts.
• If no online program change request is issued to the standby system
CPU module within the preset time after completion of the online
program change to the control system CPU module, both system CPU
modules judge it as the failure of the online program change for
redundancy. In this case, both system CPU modules resume the
Waiting time for New
Waiting time for consistency check between system A & B suspended during the online
online program
online program program change. Also, the control system CPU module is set to accept a
SD1710 change U/ S (Initial) QnPRH
change (standby new request of online program change for redundancy.
(standby
system) • When both systems are powered on, 90 seconds are set to SD1710 as
system)
the default value.
• Set the value within the range 90 to 3600 seconds. When the setting is 0
to 89 seconds, it is regarded as 90 seconds for operation. If the setting is
outside the allowed range, it is regarded other than 0 to 3600 seconds
for operation.
• The waiting time for a start of online program change to the standby
system CPU module is checked according to the SD1710 setting during
online change of multiple blocks and online change of batch of files for
redundancy.
12 - 271
CHAPTER12 TROUBLESHOOTING
(18) Redundant power supply module information
1
SD1780 to SD1789 are valid only for a redundant power supply system.
The bits are all 0 for a singular power supply system.
Table12.53 Special register
2
Corres-
Set by ponding Corresponding
Number Name Meaning Explanation
(When Set) ACPU CPU
D9 3
• Stores the status of the redundant power supply module with input
power OFF in the following bit pattern.
• Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant power main base
unit (Q38RB).
Input power OFF Input power OFF
12
detection status of detection status of
1 Each bit
power supply 2 power supply 1 1
0: Input power ON status/ No
Power supply redundant power supply
b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0
Power supply off module
SD1780 off detection 1: Input power OFF status S(Every END) New
detection status SD1780 to to
status
Main base unit
Extension base unit 1st stage
:
Extension base unit 7th stage
6
Main base unit
Extension base unit 1st stage
:
Extension base unit 7th stage
• When configuring multiple CPU, the status is stored to 1st CPU module.
• Stores the failure detection status of the redundant power supply module
in the following bit pattern. (The corresponding bit is cleared to 0 when
the input power to the faulty redundant power supply module is switched
7
OFF after detection of the redundant power supply module failure.)
• Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant power main base
unit (Q38RB).
Failure detection
status of power
Failure detection
status of power 8
supply 2 1 supply 1 1 Each bit
0: Redundant power supply
b15 to b9 b8 b7 to b1 b0 module failure not
Power supply Power supply detected/No redundant power
SD1781 to to
SD1781 failure detection failure detection supply module S(Every END) New
1: Redundant power supply Qn(H)*2
status status
QnPH*2
module failure detected
(Detectable for redundant
12.8 SPECIAL REGISTER LIST
power supply module only) QnPRH
Main base unit QnU*3
Extension base unit 1st stage
:
Extension base unit 7th stage
Main base unit
Extension base unit 1st stage
:
Extension base unit 7th stage
• When configuring multiple CPU, the status is stored to 1st CPU module.
• Counts the number of times of momentary power failure of the power
Momentary supply 1/2.
power failure Momentary power • Monitors the status of the power supply 1/ 2 mounted on the redundant
detection failure detection power main base unit (Q38RB) and counts the number of times of
SD1782 S(Every END) New
counter for count for power momentary power failure.
power supply supply 1 Status of power supply 1/power supply 2 mounted on the redundant
1*1 extension base unit is not monitored.
• When the CPU module starts, the counter of the power supply 1/ 2 is
cleared to 0.
• If the input power to one of the redundant power supply modules is
turned OFF, the corresponding counter is cleared to 0.
The counter is incremented by 1 every time the momentary power failure of
Momentary the power supply 1/ 2 is detected.(The counter repeats increment and
power failure Momentary power decrement of the value; 0 32767 – 32768 0 (The system monitor
detection failure detection of GX Developer shows the counter within the range between 0 and 65535.
SD1783 S(Every END) New
counter for count for power • Stores 0 when the main base unit is not the redundant power main base
power supply supply 2 unit (Q38RB).
2*1 • When configuring multiple CPU, the status is stored to 1st CPU module.
• The counter repeats increment and decrement of the value, 0 32767
– 32768 0
(The system monitor of GX Developer shows the counter within the
range between 0 and 65535.
*1: The "power supply 1" in dicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 1 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
The "power supply 2" indicates the redundant power supply module mounted on the POWER 2 slot of the redundant base unit (Q38RB/68RB/Q65WRB).
*2: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "07032" or later.
However, for the multiple CPU system configuration, this applies to all CPU modules whose first 5 digits of serial No. are "07032" or later.
*3: The module whose first 5 digits of serial No. is "10042" or later.
12 - 272
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
Appendix 1.1 CPU Module
(1) Q00JCPU
4-mounting screws (M4 14)
80 0.3 (3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
(0.28)
98 (3.86)
7
15.5 224.4 0.3 (8.83 0.01)
(0.61) 244 (9.61)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.1 Q00JCPU
(2) Q00UJCPU
4-mounting screws (M4 14)
80 0.3 (3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
(0.28)
(0.16)
98 (3.86)
4
15.5 224.4 0.3 (8.83 0.01)
(0.61) 244 (9.61)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.2 Q00UJCPU
App - 1
APPENDICES
(3) Q00CPU,Q01CPU,Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU,Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU, 1
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU,
Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, 2
Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU
Q02HCPU
MODE
3
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
App
BOOT
APPEN-
(3.86)
98
DIX
PULL
USB
6
7
RS-232
23 (0.92)
(0.16)
8
4
89.3 (3.52) 27.4
(1.08)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.3 Q00CPU,Q01CPU,Q02CPU,Q02HCPU,Q06HCPU,Q12HCPU,Q25HCPU,Q02PHCPU,Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU,Q25PHCPU,Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU,Q02UCPU,Q03UDCPU,Q04UDHCPU,Q06UDHCPU,
Appendix 1.1 CPU Module
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
Q10UDHCPU,Q13UDHCPU,Q20UDHCPU,Q26UDHCPU
App - 2
(4) Q03UDECPU,Q04UDEHCPU,Q06UDEHCPU,Q10UDEHCPU,Q13UDEHCPU,Q20U
DEHCPU,Q26UDEHCPU
(3.86)
98
(0.16)
23 (0.92)
4
115 (4.53) 27.4
(1.08)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.4 Q03UDECPU,Q04UDEHCPU,Q06UDEHCPU,Q10UDEHCPU,Q13UDEHCPU,Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU
(5) Q12PRHCPU,Q25PRHCPU
Q25PRHCPU
MODE BACKUP
RUN CONTROL
ERR. SYSTEM A
USER SYSTEM B
BAT.
BOOT
98 (3.86)
TRACKING
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB
RS-232
(0.16)
50.8
4
(2.03)
89.3 (3.52) 2 55.2
(0.08) (2.17)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.5 Q12PRHCPU,Q25PRHCPU
App - 3
APPENDICES
(6) When Q7BAT-SET is mounted on the CPU module 1
Q25HCPU
2
MODE
RUN
ERR.
USER
BAT.
BOOT
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB App
RS-232
APPEN-
DIX
30 (1.18)
LITHIUM BATTERY
MODEL Q7BAT-SET 6
89.3 (3.52) 27.4
(1.08)
7
Unit : mm (inches)
8
Q25PRHCPU
MODE BACKUP
RUN CONTROL
ERR. SYSTEM A
USER SYSTEM B
BAT.
Appendix 1.1 CPU Module
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
BOOT
TRACKING
98 (3.86)
PULL
USB
RS-232
30 (1.18)
2
(0.08)
LITHIUM BATTERY
MODEL Q7BAT-SET
89.3 (3.52) 27.4
(1.08)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.6 When Q7BAT-SET is mounted on the CPU module
App - 4
(7) When Q3MEM-4MBS or Q3MEM-8MBS is mounted on the CPU module
98 (3.86)
89.3 (3.52) 24.5 5
(5.95) (0.20)
118.8 (4.68) 27.4
(1.09)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.7 When Q3MEM-4MBS, Q3MEM-8MBS is mounted on the CPU module
App - 5
APPENDICES
1
Appendix 1.2 Power Supply Module
(1) Q61P-A1,Q61P-A2,Q61P,Q61P-D,Q62P,Q63P 2
Q61P-A1
POWER
App
98 (3.86)
APPEN-
DIX
PULL
7
90 (3.54) 55.2
(2.17)
Unit : mm (inches) 8
Figure App.8 Q61P-A1,Q61P-A2,Q61P,Q61P-D,Q62P,Q63P
(2) Q64P
Appendix 1.2 Power Supply Module
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
Q64P
POWER
98 (3.86)
PULL
115 (4.53) 55.2
(2.17)
Unit : mm (incases)
Figure App.9 Q64P
App - 6
(3) Q64PN
98 (3.86)
115 (4.53) 55.2 (2.17)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.10 Q64PN
(4) Q61SP
Q61SP
INPUT Q61SP
100-240VAC
98 (3.86)
MITSUBISHI
90 (3.54) 14 27.4
(0.55) (1.08)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.11 Q61SP
App - 7
APPENDICES
(5) Q63RP 1
Q63RP
2
POWER
98 (3.86)
App
APPEN-
DIX
PULL
6
115 (4.53) 83 (3.27)
Unit : mm (inches) 7
Figure App.12 Q63RP
(6) Q64RP 8
Q64RP POWER
Appendix 1.2 Power Supply Module
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
98 (3.86)
PULL
115 (4.53) 83 (3.27)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.13 Q64RP
App - 8
(7) A1S61PN,A1S62PN,A1S63P
A1S61PN
POWER
INPUT OUTPUT
100-240VAC DC 5V 5A
105VA
50 / 60Hz
130 (5.12)
NP
6.5 93.6 (3.69) 54.5 (2.15)
(0.26)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.14 A1S61PN,A1S62PN,A1S63P
App - 9
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.3 Main Base Unit
1
(1) Q33B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
2
OUT
5V
98 (3.86)
(3.15 0.01)
3
SG
80 0.3
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
FG
App
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 169 0.3 (0.65 0.01) APPEN-
(0.61) 189 (7.44) DIX
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.15 Q33B 6
(2) Q35B
4-mounting screws (M4×14) 7
OUT
8
98 (3.86)
5V
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
FG
Appendix 1.3 Main Base Unit
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 224.5 0.3 (8.84 0.01)
(0.61) 245 (9.65)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.16 Q35B
App - 10
(3) Q38B
(a) Q38B with 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4 14)
OUT
80 0.3(3.15 0.01)
5V
98(3.86)
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
(0.28)
7.5(0.30) 15.5 170 0.3(6.69 0.01) 138 0.3 (5.43 0.01)
7
44.1 (0.61) 328(12.91)
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.17 Q38B (5 base mounting holes)
(b) Q38B with 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
CPU
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 308 0.3 (12.13 0.01)
(0.61)
328 (12.91)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.18 Q38B (4 base mounting holes)
App - 11
APPENDICES
(4) Q312B 1
(a) Q312B with 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws 2
(M4 14)
OUT
3
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98(3.86)
SG
80 0.3
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
FG
App
(0.28)
7
7.5(0.30) 15.5 170 0.3(6.69 0.01) 249 0.3(9.8 0.01) APPEN-
44.1 (0.61) 439(17.28) DIX
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.19 Q312B (5 base mounting holes) 6
(b) Q312B with 4 base mounting holes
OUT
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
7
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
8
80 0.3
(0.28)
Appendix 1.3 Main Base Unit
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
7.5
7
(0.30) 44.1
(1.74) 15.5 419 0.3 (16.50 0.01)
(0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.20 Q312B (4 base mounting holes)
App - 12
(5) Q32SB
4-mounting screws (M4×12)
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
5V
80 0.3
SG
CPU I/O0 I/O1
POWER
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 18.5 101 0.3 (3.98 0.01)
(0.73) 8.5 (0.33) 114 (4.49)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.21 Q32SB
(6) Q33SB
4-mounting screws (M4×12)
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
5V
80 0.3
SG
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
POWER
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 18.5 129 0.3 (5.08 0.01)
(0.73) 8.5 (0.33) 142 (5.59)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.22 Q33SB
App - 13
APPENDICES
(7) Q35SB 1
4-mounting screws (M4×12)
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
5V
80 0.3
SG
App
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 18.5
(0.73) 8.5 184.5 0.3 (7.26 0.01)
(0.33) 197.5 (7.78)
APPEN-
DIX
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.23 Q35SB
6
(8) Q38RB
5-mounting
screws 7
(M4×14)
OUT
5V 5V 8
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG SG
80 0.3
CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
Appendix 1.3 Main Base Unit
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 249 0.3 (9.80 0.01)
44.1 (1.74)
15.5 (0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.24 Q38RB
App - 14
(9) Q38DB
5-mounting
screws
(M4 14)
OUT
5V
98 (3.86)
0.3
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
80
FG 38D
15.5 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 138 0.3 (5.43 0.01)
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) (0.61) 328 (12.91)
44.1 (1.74)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.25 Q38DB
(10)Q312DB
5-mounting
screws
(M4 14)
OUT
0.01)
5V
98 (3.86)
0.3
SG
a1 b1
POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
(3.15
FG
80
312D
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30) 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 249 0.3 (9.80 0.01)
44.1 (1.74) 15.5 (0.61)
439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.26 Q312DB
App - 15
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.4 Extension Base Unit
1
(1) Q52B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
2
IN OUT
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
3
80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1
App
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 83.5 0.3 APPEN-
(0.16) (3.29 0.01) DIX
106 (4.17)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.27 Q52B 6
(2) Q55B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
7
IN OUT
8
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
Appendix 1.4 Extension Base Unit
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 167 0.3 (6.57 0.01)
(0.61) 189 (7.44)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.28 Q55B
(3) Q63B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
98 (3.86)
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 167 0.3 (6.57 0.01)
(0.61) 189 (7.44)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.29 Q63B
App - 16
(4) Q65B
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 222.5 0.3 (8.76 0.01)
(0.61) 245 (9.65)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.30 Q65B
(5) Q68B
(a) Q68 with 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
(M4 14)
IN OUT
5V
98(3.86)
(3.15 0.01)
SG
80 0.3
a1 b1
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
(0.28)
7.5(0.30) 15.5 190 0.3(7.48 0.01) 116 0.3 ( 4.57 0.01)
7
44.1 (0.61) 328(12.91)
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.31 Q68B (5 base mounting holes)
(b) Q68 with 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14)
IN OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 306 0.3 (12.05 0.01)
(0.61) 328 (12.91)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.32 Q68B (4 base mounting holes)
App - 17
APPENDICES
(6) Q612B 1
(a) Q612B with 5 base mounting holes
5-mounting screws
2
(M4 14)
IN OUT
3
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98(3.86)
80 0.3
SG
a1 b1
App
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11
FG
(0.28)
7
7.5(0.30) 15.5 190 0.3 (7.48 0.01) 227 0.3 (8.94 0.01) APPEN-
44.1 (0.61) 439 (17.28) DIX
(1.74)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.33 Q612B (5 base mounting holes) 6
(b) Q612B with 4 base mounting holes
4-mounting screws (M4×14) 7
IN OUT
5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
8
SG
80 0.3
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9
FG
Appendix 1.4 Extension Base Unit
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1
(1.74) 15.5 417 0.3 (16.42 0.01)
(0.61)
439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.34 Q612B (4 base mounting holes)
App - 18
(7) QA1S65B
4-mounting screws (M5×25)
110 0.3 (4.33 0.01)
IN OUT
130 (5.12)
5V
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
QA1S65B
(0.39)
16.4
10
(0.65)
51.2
10 295 0.3 (11.61 0.01)
(2.02)
(0.39) 315 (12.40)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.35 QA1S65B
(8) QA1S68B
4-mounting screws (M5×25)
110 0.3 (4.33 0.01)
IN OUT
130 (5.12)
5V
SG
FG
POWER I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
QA1S68B
(0.39)
16.4
10
(0.65)
51.2
(2.02) 10 400 0.3 (15.75 0.01)
(0.39) 420 (16.54)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.36 QA1S68B
App - 19
APPENDICES
(9) QA65B 1
2 6-M4 screw 4- 6 installation holes
Base cover (for module installation) (M5 mounting screw)
2
3
0.01)
250 (9.84)
0.3 (7.87
App
200
APPEN-
DIX
6
332 0.3 (13.07 0.01)
46.6
(1.83) 352 (13.87)
7
Hand hold
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.37 QA65B
8
(10) QA68B
2 9-M4 screw 4- 6 installation holes
Base cover (for module installation) (M5 mounting screw)
Appendix 1.4 Extension Base Unit
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
0.01)
250 (9.84)
0.3 (7.87
200
446 0.3 (17.56 0.01)
46.6
(1.83) 466 (18.35)
Hand hold
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.38 QA68B
App - 20
(11) Q68RB
5-mounting
screws
(M4×14)
IN OUT
5V 5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
SG SG
80 0.3
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7
FG FG
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1 (1.74) 15.5 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 247 0.3 (9.72 0.01)
(0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.39 Q68RB
(12) Q65WRB
5-mounting
screws
(M4×14)
IN1 IN2 OUT
5V 5V
(3.15 0.01)
98 (3.86)
80 0.3
SG SG
POWER 1 POWER 2 I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
(0.28)
7.5
7
(0.30)
44.1 15.5 170 0.3 (6.69 0.01) 247 0.3 (9.72 0.01)
(1.74) (0.61) 439 (17.28)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.40 Q65WRB
App - 21
APPENDICES
Appendix 1.5 Extension Cable
1
QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,QC30B,QC50B,QC100B
2
(1.65)
42.0
3
10 34.2 6.0
(1.35) (0.24)
(0.39)
App
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.41 QC05B,QC06B,QC12B,QC30B,QC50B,QC100B
APPEN-
DIX
Appendix 1.6 Tracking cable
6
QC10TR,QC30TR
7
A
B
(1.56)
B
39.7
12.4 33.5
8
(0.49) (1.32)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.42 QC10TR,QC30TR
Appendix 1.5 Extension Cable
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
App - 22
Appendix 1.7 Q8BAT-SET
Q8BAT
4.5mounting screws(M4 14)
87(3.43)
55.2(2.17)
Q8BAT
89.8(3.54)
98(3.86)
OUTPUT
3VDC
49(1.93)
5.8
(0.18)
(0.23) 47.1(1.85)
4.5
4.5 5.1mounting screws(M4 14)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.43 Q8BAT
QC10BAT
QC10BAT
30
55(2.17)
(1.18)
39(1.54) 1000(39.37)
Unit : mm (inches)
Figure App.44 QC10BAT
App - 23
APPENDICES
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
1
Q series CPU module is updated to add functions and change the specifications.
The functions and specifications that can be used by the CPU module change depending on the function version. 2
Appendix 2.1 Basic Model QCPU Upgrade
3
(1) Specification comparison
TableApp.1 Specification comparison
App
Function Version of CPU Module
Specifications Function Version A Function Version B
APPEN-
"04121" or earlier "04122" or later DIX
Q00JCPU
Standard RAM capacity Q00CPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
Q01CPU 64K bytes 128K bytes 6
Q00JCPU
CPU shared memory Q00CPU
7
Q01CPU
: Usable/compatible, : Unusable/incompatible
8
Appendix 2.1 Basic Model QCPU Upgrade
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
App - 24
(2) Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
TableApp.2 Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
First 5 digits of Supported GX
Function Function version
serial No. Developer
Function block
( GX Developer Operating Manual (Function Block))
Structured text (ST) language A “04121” of earlier
( QCPU (Q Mode) Programming Manual (Structured
Text))
MELSAP3
( QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual
(SFC))
PID operation function*1
( QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU Programming Manual Version 8.00A or later
(PID Control Instructions)) -
Real number operation*1 *3
Intelligent function module event interruption *3
Device initial value automatic setting function *3 B “04122“ or later
Remote password setting function *3
E-mail parameter
( Manual of the module that includes e-mail function)
Online change using pointer *3
Increased file register capacity (32K points to 64K points)*2 *3
Multiple CPU System compatibility
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)) Version 8.00A or later
*3
Multiple-block online change
CC-Link Remote network additional mode
B “06112“ or later Version 8.03D or later
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
- : Not related to GX Developer * : Incompatible with Q00JCPU
*1: When the CPU instruction installed by GX Developer Version 8 is read by GX Developer of Version 7 or earlier, it is processed as an
"instruction code error" by GX Developer.
*2: Unsupported by the Q00JCPU.
*3: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
App - 25
APPENDICES
Appendix 2.2 High Performance Model QCPU Upgrade
1
(1) Specification comparison
TableApp.3 Specification comparison 2
First 5 digits of serial number of the CPU Module
Function Version A Function Version B
Specifications
“02091“ or “02092“ or “02112“ or “03051“ or “04012“ or
3
earlier later later later later
Q02CPU 64K bytes
Q02HCPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
App
Standard RAM capacity Q06HCPU 64K bytes 128K bytes
Q12HCPU 64K bytes 256K bytes APPEN-
DIX
Q25HCPU 64K bytes 256K bytes
CPU shared memory
Extended life battery SRAM card *1 6
Compatibility with 2Mbyte SRAM card
: Usable/compatible, : Unusable/incompatible 7
*1: For details of the SRAM card battery life, refer to Section 11.3.4.
(2) Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions 8
TableApp.4 Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
First 5 digits of Supported GX
Function Function version
Appendix 2.2 High Performance Model QCPU Upgrade
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
serial No. Developer
*2
Automatic write to standard ROM
Enforced ON/OFF for external I/O *2
Remote password setting *2 Version 6 or later
Compatibility with MELSECNET/H remote I/O network *2 A “02092” or later
Interrupt module (QI60) compatibility *2
Programming module compatibility
-
( Section 2.1.5)
App - 26
First 5 digits of Supported GX
Function Function version
serial No. Developer
Compatibility with the multiple CPU system *5 “02122“ or later Version 7 or later
*3 “03051“ or later Version 7.10L or later
Installation of PC CPU module into the multiple CPU system
High speed interrupt *2 Version 8 or later
Compatibility with index modification for module designation of
-
dedicated instruction “04012“ or later
Selection of refresh item for COM instruction
-
QCPU Programing Manual (Comon Instructions)
SFC program online batch change *2
“04122“ or later Version 8 or later
File memory capacity change*2
CC-Link remote network additional mode
( CC-Link Manual) Version 8.03D or later
“05032“ or later
Incomplete derivative PID operation function *4
Floating-point comparison instruction speedup -
Read of the SFC activity step comment compatible
B
( QCPU (Q mode)/ QnACPU programming manual “07012“ or later
(SFC))
Error detection in the redundant power supply system *2 Version 8.23Z or later
Clock data in 1/1000 sec. units compatible *2 -
“07032“ or later
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM *2
Version 8.23Z or later
Individual setting of refresh device on multiple CPU system *3
Selection of trailing edge instruction execution/non-execution at
“07092“ or later Version 8.27D or later
online change *2
Block assurance function of CC-Link cyclic data per station
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
(Details))
“08032“ or later Version 8.32J or later
CC-Link network parameter can be set up to 8 modules.
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual
(Details))
Compatibility with MELSECNET/G network
( MELSECNET/G Network System Reference Version 8.45X or later
Manual (Controller Network)) B “09012“ or later
Compatibility with ATA card
-
( Section 7.1.2)
- : Not related to GX Developer
*2: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*3: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System)
*4: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
QCPU (Q Mode) / QnACPU Programming Manual (PID Control Instructions)
App - 27
APPENDICES
Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of
Older Versions 1
(1) Q6BAT/Q7BAT battery life when the serial number (first five digits) of the QCPU
2
is "05010" or earlier
TableApp.5 Q6BAT/Q7BAT Battery life
3
Battery life
Q6BAT Q7BAT
Actual After SM52 Actual After SM52 App
CPU module Power-on service turned on service turned on
Guaranteed Guaranteed
model time ratio value (Backup value (Backup
value value APPEN-
(Reference power time (Reference power time
(70 ) (70 ) DIX
value) after an value) after an
(40 ) alarm) (40 ) alarm)
0%
5,433 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 13,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours 6
0.62 years 5.00 years 5 days 1.48 years 5.00 years 10 days
7,761 hours. 43,800 hours 120 hours 18,571 hours. 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
0.88 years 5.00 years 5 days 2.11 years 5.00 years 10 days
7
10,866 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 26,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
Q02CPU 50%
1.24 years 5.00 years 5 days 2.96 years 5.00 years 10 days
18,110 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,333 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
70%
2.06 years 5.00 years 5 days 4.94 years 5.00 years 10 days
8
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
2,341 hours 14,550 hours 120 hours 5,000 hours 38,881 hours 240 hours
0%
Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of Older Versions
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
0.26 years 1.66 years 5 days 0.57 years 4.43 years 10 days
3,344 hours 20,786 hours 120 hours 7,142 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
0.38 years 2.37 years 5 days 0.81 years 5.00 years 10 days
Q02HCPU 4,682 hours 29,100 hours 120 hours 10,000 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
50%
Q06HCPU 0.53 years 3.32 years 5 days 1.14 years 5.00 years 10 days
7,803 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 16,666 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
70%
0.89 years 5.00 years 5 days 1.90 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 120 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 5 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
1,260 hours 6,096 hours 48 hours 2,900 hours 16,711 hours 96 hours
0%
0.14 years 0.69 years 2 days 0.33 years 1.90 years 4 days
1,800 hours 8,709 hours 48 hours 4,142 hours 23,873 hours 96 hours
30%
0.20 years 0.99 years 2 days 0.47 years 2.72 years 4 days
Q12HCPU 2,520 hours 12,192 hours 48 hours 5,800 hours 33,422 hours 96 hours
50%
Q25HCPU 0.28 years 1.39 years 2 days 0.66 years 3.81 years 4 days
4,200 hours 20,320 hours 48 hours 9,666 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
70%
0.47 years 2.31 years 2 days 1.10 years 5.00 years 4 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 48 hours 43,800 hours 43,800 hours 96 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 2 days 5.00 years 5.00 years 4 days
App - 28
TableApp.6 Q6BAT/Q7BAT Battery life
Battery life
Q6BAT
CPU module Power-on
After SM52 turned on
model time ratio Guaranteed value Actual service value
(Backup power time after
(70 ) (Reference value) (40 )
an alarm)
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
Q02CPU 50%
5.00 years 5.00years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
20,498 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
0%
2.34 years 5.00 years 25 days
29,959 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
30%
3.42 years 5.00 years 25 days
Q02HCPU 41,785 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
50%
Q06HCPU 4.77 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
70%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 600 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 25 days
11,038 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
0%
1.26 years 5.00 years 10 days
16,200 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
30%
1.80 years 5.00 years 10 days
Q12HCPU 22,075 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
50%
Q25HCPU 2.52 years 5.00 years 10 days
37,055 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
70%
4.23 years 5.00 years 10 days
43,800 hours 43,800 hours 240 hours
100%
5.00 years 5.00 years 10 days
App - 29
APPENDICES
(2) SRAM card battery life when the serial number (first five digits) of the QCPU is 1
"04011" or earlier
TableApp.7 SRAM card Battery life 2
Battery life
Power-on After SM52 turned on
SRAM card
time ratio
Guaranteed value Actual service value
(Backup power time
3
(MIN) (Reference Value)
after an alarm)
690 hours 6,336 hours
Q2MEM-1MBS
0%
0.07 years 0.72 years
8 hours App
Q2MEM-2MBS 11,784 hours 13,872 hours
100% 8 hours
1.34 years 1.58 years
APPEN-
DIX
(3) Number of file register points according to the serial number (first five digits)
TableApp.8 File register points 6
CPU module model name Number of file register points
Q02CPU 32K points
Q02HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "04011" or earlier 32K points
7
Q06HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "04012" or later 64K points
Serial number (first five digits) is "02091" or earlier 32K points
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU Serial number (first five digits) is "02092" or later 128K points
8
Appendix 2.3 Precautions for Using the High Performance Model QCPU of Older Versions
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
App - 30
Appendix 2.4 Process CPU Upgrade
(1) Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
TableApp.9 Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
First 5 digits of Supported GX
Function Function version
serial No. Developer
Compatibility with index modification for module designation of
dedicated instruction
Manual of the intelligent function module that can use the
dedicated instructions -
Selection of refresh item for COM instruction
( QCPU Programming manual (Common Instructions))
SFC program online batch change*1
Version 8
File memory capacity change*1
(Version 8.22Y or
CC-Link remote network additional mode earlier)
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
“07032“ or later
Program memory check function*1 Version 8.23Z or later
Read of the SFC activity step comment compatible
( QCPU (Q mode)/ QnACPU programming manual -
(SFC Manual))
C
Error detection in the redundant power supply system *1 Version 8.23Z or later
Clock data in 1/1000 sec. units compatible *1 -
Storage of sampling trace files in standard RAM *1
Individual setting of refresh device on multiple CPU system Version 8.23Z or later
( QCPU User's Manual (Multiple CPU System))
Selection of trailing edge instruction execution/non-execution
“07092“ or later Version 8.27D or later
at online change*1
Block assurance function of CC-Link cyclic data per station
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
“08032“ or later Version 8.32J or later
CC-Link network parameter can be set up to 8 modules.
( CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual)
Compatibility with CC-Link IE controller network ( CC-
“10042“ or later Version 8.68W or later
Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual)
- : Not related to GX Developer
*1: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
App - 31
APPENDICES
Appendix 2.5 Redundant CPU Upgrade
1
(1) Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
TableApp.10 Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
2
First 5 digits of serial Supported GX
Function Function version
No. Developer
Read of the SFC activity step comment 3
compatible
( QCPU (Q mode)/ QnACPU
-
programming manual (SFC))
“07032“ or later App
Clock data in 1/1000 sec. units
compatible *1
Storage of sampling trace files in standard APPEN-
*1
Version 8.23Z or later DIX
RAM
Selection of trailing edge instruction
execution/non-execution at online change “07092“ or later Version 8.27D or later
*1 D 6
Extension base unit compatible
( QnPRHCPU User's Manual “09012“ or later Version 8.45X or later
(Redundant System)) 7
Settingí8í for the number of modules in
Network parameter for CC-Link
“09012“ or later Version 8.58L or later
( CC-Link System Master/Local 8
Module User's Manual)
Compatibility with CC-Link IE controller
network ( CC-Link IE Controller “10042“ or later Version 8.68W or later
Appendix 2.5 Redundant CPU Upgrade
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
Network Reference Manual)
- : Not related to GX Developer
*1: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
Qn(H)/QnPH/QnPRHCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
App - 32
Appendix 2.6 Universal Model QCPU Upgrade
(1) Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
TableApp.11 Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions
First 5 digits of serial Supported
Function Function version
No. GX Developer
Use of the PC CPU module*2
( QCPU User's manual “09072“ or later -
(Multiple CPU System))
Setting whether to use the local devices
Version 8.62Q or later
per program*1
Program memory batch transfer status
check function (SM165)-compatible*1
The multiple CPU high-speed
transmission dedicated instruction- “10012“ or later
compatible*2 -
( QCPU Programming manual
(Common Instructions))
Display of the amount of battery
consumption ( Section 11.3.1)
Bit device extension*1 B
*1
Execution conditioned device test
Sampling trace auto start function*1 *2
CC-Link IE group cyclic communication
function
( CC-Link IE Controller Network
Reference Manual)
Scan time measurement*1 “10042“ or later Version 8.68W or later
Forced ON/OFF of external I/O*1
Monitoring condition setting*1 *2
Redundant power supply system
compatible*1 *2
32-bit indexing with "ZZ" specification
( QCPU Programming manual
(Common Instructions))
- : Not related to GX Developer
*1: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: Some models do not support the function. For details, refer to the corresponding reference.
*3: Data of the extended data register (D) and extended link register (W) can be retained in the standard ROM by using the latch data
backup function (Section 6.29) if the serial number (first five digits) of the Universal model QCPU is "10042" or later.
*4: Communication using A-compatible 1E frame is available only via the Ethernet module.
If the module is connected to the Ethernet port built in the CPU, this function is not available.
App - 33
APPENDICES
TableApp.11 Function comparisons and supported GX Developer versions 1
First 5 digits of serial Supported
Function Function version
No. GX Developer
Extended data register (D) and extended
2
“09042“ or later*3 Version 8.70Y or later
link register (W)*1 *2
Serial communication function*1 *2
3
CPU module change function with
memory card*1 *2
Local device setting of the index register*1
“10102“ or later
App
*2
Communication using the A-compatible
1C/1E frame (MC protocol)*4 *5 ( Q B Version 8.78G or later APPEN-
Corresponding MELSEC Communication DIX
Protocol Reference Manual)
Socket communication function *2
( QnUCPU User's Manual
6
"11012" or later
(Communication via Built-in Ethernet
Port))
Module model name read Version 8.82L or later 7
“11043” or later
Module error log function ----*6
- : Not related to GX Developer 8
*1: For details of the functions, refer to the following.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
*2: Some models do not support the function. For details, refer to the corresponding reference.
*3: Data of the extended data register (D) and extended link register (W) can be retained in the standard ROM by using the latch data
Appendix 2.6 Universal Model QCPU Upgrade
Appendix 2 Functions Added or Changed by Version Upgrade
backup function (Section 6.29) if the serial number (first five digits) of the Universal model QCPU is "10042" or later.
*4: Communication using A-compatible 1E frame is available only via the Ethernet module.
If the module is connected to the Ethernet port built in the CPU, this function is not available.
*5: Communication using the A-compatible 1C frame is available only via any serial communication module.
If the module is connected to the built-in RS-232 interface of the CPU module, this function is not available.
*6: Use GX Works2 of version 1.10L or later.
App - 34
Appendix 3 Precautions for Battery Transportation
When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations.
(1) Regulated models
The batteries for the Q Series CPU module (including memory cards) are classified as shown in TableApp.12
TableApp.12 Models subject to transportation regulations
Classification for
Product name Model Product supply status
transportation
Battery Q8BAT Lithium battery (assembled battery)
Lithium battery (assembled battery)
Battery Q8BAT-SET
+ Q8BAT connection cable Dangerous goods
Battery Q7BAT Lithium battery
Battery Q7BAT-SET Lithium battery with holder
Battery Q6BAT Lithium battery
Q2MEM-BAT
SRAM card battery Lithium coin battery
Q3MEM-BAT
Q2MEM-1MBS Packed with lithium coin battery
Q2MEM-2MBS (Q2MEM-BAT) Non-dangerous goods
Q3MEM-4MBS Packed with lithium coin battery
Memory card
Q3MEM-8MBS (Q3MEM-BAT)
Packed with lithium coin battery
Q3MEM-4MBS-SET
(Q3MEM-BAT)
Q3MEM- 8MBS-SET
+ Memory card protective cover
(2) Transport guidelines
Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG code and the local transport regulations when
transporting products after unpacking or repacking, while Mitsubishi ships products with packages to comply with
the transport regulations.
Also, consult with the shipping carrier.
App - 35
APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in
1
EU Member States
This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries 2
and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
Appendix 4.1 Disposal precautions 3
In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries. Dispose of batteries properly at the
local community waste collection/recycling center. App
The symbol shown in Figure App.45 is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built-in
APPEN-
batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers. DIX
Figure App.45 Symbol
Appendix 4.1 Disposal precautions
Appendix 4 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States
Note: This symbol is for EU member states only.
The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) Article 20 “Information
for end-users” and Annex II.
The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes.
App - 36
Appendix 4.2 Exportation precautions
The new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and/or
devices with built-in batteries to EU member states.
• To print the symbol on batteries, devices, or their packaging
• To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products
(1) Labelling
To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no symbol, to EU member states
on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol shown in Figure App.45 on the batteries, devices, or their pack-
aging.
(2) Explaining the symbol in the manuals
To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26, 2008
or later, provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol.
If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided, separately
attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices.
The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the
new EU Battery Directive(2006/66/EC).
App - 37
INDEX
1
[0] to [9] [D]
5VDC internal current consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 2
Data register [D]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
[A] Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Device
A series power supply module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Annunciator [F]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
3
A5oooB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Counter [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
A6oooB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Data register [D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Allowable momentary power failure time. . . . . . . . 4-3 Edge relay [V]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4
Annunciator [F] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 File register [R,ZR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
AnS series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Function input [FX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
AnS series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Function output [FY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
INDEX
ATA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Function register [FD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Automatic writing to standard ROM. . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Index register [Z] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Intelligent function module device . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
[B] Internal relay [M] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 INDEX
Interrupt pointer [I] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Backup mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Latch relay [L]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Base unit Link direct device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Extension stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Link register [W] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 7
External dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-10 Link relay [B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Installation and removal of module . . . . . . . . 10-22 Link special register [SW]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Mounting orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Link special relay [SB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 8
Pointer [P] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Mounting position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Retentive timer [ST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Parts names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Special register [SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Specification Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Special relay [SM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Step relay [S] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery Timer [T]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Battery for QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 DIN rail
Battery for SRAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Applicable DIN rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 DIN rail mounting Adapter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Replacement procedure (CPU module) . . . . . 11-23 DIN rail mounting screw intervals. . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Replacement procedure (SRAM card) . . . . . . 11-31 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Replacement reference period. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Boot operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 [E]
[C] Edge relay [V] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Calculating heat generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-25
Category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Extended scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Extension
CE mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Number of extension stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Circuit Setting for number of extension stages . . . . . . 6-14
Fail-safe circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-24
System design circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 External dimensions
Constant scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 CPU module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-1
Control method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Extension base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-16
Control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Extension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-22
Counter [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-10
CPU module Power supply module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-6
External dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-1 Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-22
Installation and removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
CPU shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Index - 1
[F] Link special register [SW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Link special relay [SB] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Fail-safe Low Voltage directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
[M]
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Ferrite core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
File register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Max. number of files stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Flash card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 MELSECNET/H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Function input [FX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Memory capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Function output [FY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Memory Card
Function register [FD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Battery Installation into the Memory Card . . . . 7-11
Function version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
List of usable memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[G] Loading/unloading procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Part names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26 Specifications of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Memory size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
[H] Module
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Module change
During System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-167
[I] Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . 12-178
Multiple CPU high speed main base unit . . . . . . A-25
I/O control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Index register [Z]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Intelligent function module [N]
Intelligent function module device. . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Network module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Intelligent function module parameter . . . . . . . . 4-2 No. of device points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Intensive insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 No. of device tracking words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Internal current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 No. of I/O device points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Internal relay [M]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 No. of I/O points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Interrupt pointer [I] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Noise filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Isolation transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
[O]
[L]
Online (with power on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-167
Latch clear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Online module change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-167
Latch range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Operation mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Latch relay [L] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
LED
[P]
"BAT." LED turns on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
"BOOT" LED of the CPU module flickers . . . 12-21 Part name
"ERR." LED of the CPU module turns on or Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
flickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
"MODE" LED of the CPU module does not Part names
turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
"MODE" LED of the CPU module flickers . . . 12-11 High Performance model QCPU, Process
"POWER" LED of the power supply module CPU and Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
turns off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
"POWER" LED of the redundant power Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
supply module turns on red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Pointer [P] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
"RUN" LED flickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Power supply module
"RUN" LED of the CPU module turns off . . . 12-18 Connecting to the power supply module . . . . 10-44
"USER" LED turns on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 External dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-6
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Names of Parts and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Link direct device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Link register [W] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Precaution
Link relay [B]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Index - 2
Connection of GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Separate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Precaution on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Precautions for battery transportation . . . . . App-35 Singlar power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 1
Precautions for using coaxial cables . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Slim type main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-24
Precautions for using the high performance Slim type power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-25
model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-28 Special register [SD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 2
Precautions when connecting the Special relay [SM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
uninterruptive power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Specifications
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Battery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Extension cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 3
Process control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Hardware specifications of the CPU module . . . 4-1
Processing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Main base unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 4
Program capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Memory card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Program language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Program size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Power supply module specifications . . . . . . . . . 5-2
INDEX
Program transfer time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Specifications of the battery for memory card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
[Q] SRAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Standard RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 INDEX
Q series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Standard ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Q series power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Standards
Q3oooB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Q3oooDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 7
Q3oooRB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Q3oooSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Step relay [S] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Q5oooB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Q6BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
System
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
8
Q6oooB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Q6oooRB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Q6oooWRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Q7BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 System A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Q7BAT-SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 System B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Q8BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 System configuration
Q8BAT-SET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Applicable softwares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
QA1S6oooB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
QA6oooB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Overall configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
QnUD(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Peripheral device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
[R] Sequence control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
System switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Redundant base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 [T]
Redundant power extension base unit . . . . . . . . A-24
Redundant power main base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Timer [T] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Redundant power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Tracking execution time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Redundant system Troubleshooting
Backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Troubleshooting Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Debug mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Troubleshooting flowchart
Operation mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform
Separate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 boot operation from memory card . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Reset operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Flowchart for when output load of output
Retentive timer [ST]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 module does not turn on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
RUN/PAUSE contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Flowchart for when output module LED is not
turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
[S] Flowchart for when program is rewritten
unintentionally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Screw tightening torque range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Index - 3
Flowchart for when the "ERR." LED is
on/flickering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is
flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Flowchart for when the "MODE" LED is not
turned on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Flowchart for when the "POWER" LED is turned
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Flowchart for when the "RUN" LED is turned
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Flowchart for when the ERR terminal is turned
off (opened). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Flowchart for when unable to read a program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Flowchart for when unable to write a program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR. occurs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
When "CONTROL BUS ERR." has occurred
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
When the "BAT." LED is turned on . . . . . . . . 12-20
When the "RUN" LED is flickering. . . . . . . . . 12-19
When the "USER" LED is turned on . . . . . . . 12-20
[U]
Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
[W]
Weight
Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Extension cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3,5-14
Wiring
Wiring of extension cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Wiring of I/O equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Wiring of I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Wiring to power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Wiring of I/O module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Index - 4
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be
solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months,
and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of
repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution
labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure
caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if
functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or
as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures
of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for
accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user,
maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will
not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device,
and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or
fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality
assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded
from the programmable controller applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of
applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties
concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
SH(NA)-080483ENG-P
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA Kazpromautomatics Ltd. KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Straße 89 99, Paola Hill Mustafina Str. 7/2
Gothaer Straße 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta- Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-470046 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. CZECH REPUBLIC Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Avenir Business Park, Radlická 714/113a Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Phone: +31 (0)180 – 46 60 04 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Fax: +31 (0)180 – 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex TEXEL ELECTRONICS Ltd. ISRAEL
Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS 2 Ha´umanut, P.O.B. 6272
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 IL-42160 Netanya
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON
INEA BH d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
IRL-Dublin 24 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Lebanon - Beirut
BA-71000 Sarajevo NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
Italian Branch AKHNATON BULGARIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
Viale Colleoni 7 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21 Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) BG-1756 Sofia RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6004 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 CBI Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND INEA CR d.o.o. CROATIA Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o. SERBIA Private Bag 2016
Poland Branch Losinjska 4 a Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86 ZA-1600 Isando
Krakowska 50 HR-10000 Zagreb SER-18106 Nis Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770
PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA SR d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Technologická 374/6 Izletnicka 10
Spanish Branch CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec SER-113000 Smederevo
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579 B:ELECTRIC, s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC AutoCont Control s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Mladoboleslavská 812 Radlinského 47
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK CZ-197 00 Praha 19 - Kbely SK-02601 Dolny Kubin
UK Branch Phone: +420 286 850 848, +420 724 317 975 Phone: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
Travellers Lane Fax: +420 286 850 850 Fax: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK CS MTrade Slovensko, s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Lykkegårdsvej 17, 1. Vajanskeho 58
DK-4000 Roskilde SK-92101 Piestany
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +421 (0)33 / 7742 760
Office Tower “Z” 14 F Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +421 (0)33 / 7735 144
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA INEA d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 Pärnu mnt.160i Stegne 11
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 EE-11317 Tallinn SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Jaakonkatu 2 Box 426
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 FIN-01620 Vantaa SE-20124 Malmö
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 02
UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND
5, Mavrogenous Str. Im Schörli 5
GR-18542 Piraeus CH-8600 Dübendorf
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28
MELTRADE Ltd. HUNGARY GTS TURKEY
Fertő utca 14. Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
HU-1107 Budapest TR-34775 Yukarı Dudullu-Ümraniye-İSTANBUL
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
Vestienas iela 2 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
LV-1035 Riga UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA
Savanoriu Pr. 187
LT-02300 Vilnius
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980
MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com
You might also like
- D4562-13 Avionics Service Parts Manual 74 and On 150 172 177100% (1)D4562-13 Avionics Service Parts Manual 74 and On 150 172 177365 pages
- I/O Module Type Building Block User's ManualNo ratings yetI/O Module Type Building Block User's Manual158 pages
- Transition From MELSEC-A&QnA (Large Type) Series To Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) L08043enggNo ratings yetTransition From MELSEC-A&QnA (Large Type) Series To Q Series Handbook (Fundamentals) L08043engg298 pages
- Transition From MELSEC-AnSQnAS (Small Type) Series To Q Series Handbook - Intelligent Function ModulesNo ratings yetTransition From MELSEC-AnSQnAS (Small Type) Series To Q Series Handbook - Intelligent Function Modules328 pages
- Transition From MELSEC-A0J2H Series To Q Series Handbook L08060engcNo ratings yetTransition From MELSEC-A0J2H Series To Q Series Handbook L08060engc226 pages
- QCPU (A Mode) CPU Module: Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-ANo ratings yetQCPU (A Mode) CPU Module: Q02CPU-A Q02HCPU-A Q06HCPU-A152 pages
- MELSEC-A-QnA (Large), AnS-QnAS (Small) Transition Examples - L08121edNo ratings yetMELSEC-A-QnA (Large), AnS-QnAS (Small) Transition Examples - L08121ed176 pages
- AJ65BT-R2N - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080687-B (09.08)No ratings yetAJ65BT-R2N - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080687-B (09.08)96 pages
- Q64AD2DA - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080793-F (01.18)No ratings yetQ64AD2DA - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080793-F (01.18)232 pages
- MELSEC-A - QnA Series Transition Examples - L08121ecNo ratings yetMELSEC-A - QnA Series Transition Examples - L08121ec184 pages
- A To Q Transition Manual (Intelligent Function Modules)No ratings yetA To Q Transition Manual (Intelligent Function Modules)90 pages
- Q2AS (H) CPU (-S1) - User's Manual SH (NA) - 3599-K (01.11)0% (1)Q2AS (H) CPU (-S1) - User's Manual SH (NA) - 3599-K (01.11)554 pages
- Digital-Analog Converter Module Type AJ65SBT PDFNo ratings yetDigital-Analog Converter Module Type AJ65SBT PDF74 pages
- Q61LD - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080821-D (02.16)No ratings yetQ61LD - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080821-D (02.16)274 pages
- A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SH A2SH A2AS A2USH CPU S1 S30 - UserManual Hardware - IB 66468 O PDFNo ratings yetA1SCPUC24 R2 A1SH A2SH A2AS A2USH CPU S1 S30 - UserManual Hardware - IB 66468 O PDF122 pages
- MODBUS Interface Module QJ71MB91 Users Manual Hardware IB - NA - 0800329-BNo ratings yetMODBUS Interface Module QJ71MB91 Users Manual Hardware IB - NA - 0800329-B30 pages
- MITSUBISHI - QnUCPU User's Manual Communication Via Built in Ethernet PortNo ratings yetMITSUBISHI - QnUCPU User's Manual Communication Via Built in Ethernet Port172 pages
- QnUCPU UserManual CommunicationViaBuiltInEthernetPort SH 080811 INo ratings yetQnUCPU UserManual CommunicationViaBuiltInEthernetPort SH 080811 I156 pages
- MITSUBISHI QCPU User's Manual Hardware Design Maintenance InspectionNo ratings yetMITSUBISHI QCPU User's Manual Hardware Design Maintenance Inspection704 pages
- MELSEC-Q Temperature Control Module User's Manual: - Q64TCTTN - Q64Tcttbwn - Q64TCRTN - Q64TcrtbwnNo ratings yetMELSEC-Q Temperature Control Module User's Manual: - Q64TCTTN - Q64Tcttbwn - Q64TCRTN - Q64Tcrtbwn438 pages
- Mitsubishi Q64DA Series Anolog Module User ManualNo ratings yetMitsubishi Q64DA Series Anolog Module User Manual186 pages
- QJ71MB91 - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080578-J (12.17)No ratings yetQJ71MB91 - User's Manual SH (NA) - 080578-J (12.17)376 pages
- MELSEC iQ-R Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual (Startup)No ratings yetMELSEC iQ-R Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual (Startup)56 pages
- MITSUBISHI Q Serial Communication Module User's ManualNo ratings yetMITSUBISHI Q Serial Communication Module User's Manual396 pages
- MITSUBISHI L Serial Communication Module User's Manual BasicNo ratings yetMITSUBISHI L Serial Communication Module User's Manual Basic424 pages
- QD81DL96 - Startup Guide L (NA) - 08147-A (07.09)No ratings yetQD81DL96 - Startup Guide L (NA) - 08147-A (07.09)36 pages
- Melsec Iq-R Cpu Module User's Manual (Application)No ratings yetMelsec Iq-R Cpu Module User's Manual (Application)796 pages
- Haier India Customer Care No. 1800 419 9999 India Customer CareNo ratings yetHaier India Customer Care No. 1800 419 9999 India Customer Care1 page
- Design Optimization of Structural Concrete Beams Using ANN AlgorithmNo ratings yetDesign Optimization of Structural Concrete Beams Using ANN Algorithm5 pages
- Tiktok On SNSU Students: Engagement and InfluenceNo ratings yetTiktok On SNSU Students: Engagement and Influence6 pages
- Artificial Intelligence in Metallurgical EngineeringNo ratings yetArtificial Intelligence in Metallurgical Engineering12 pages
- GJU Hisar Non Teaching Recruitment 2024 NotificationNo ratings yetGJU Hisar Non Teaching Recruitment 2024 Notification16 pages
- Royal Impact Futures Scholarship Application Form 2025 - 23jan2025 (FINAL) ...No ratings yetRoyal Impact Futures Scholarship Application Form 2025 - 23jan2025 (FINAL) ...8 pages
- Security Benefits and Drawbacks of Software-Defined NetworkingNo ratings yetSecurity Benefits and Drawbacks of Software-Defined Networking4 pages
- Get Unlimited Downloads With A Subscription: 135301821 Pedoman Pelaporan Insiden Keselamatan PasienNo ratings yetGet Unlimited Downloads With A Subscription: 135301821 Pedoman Pelaporan Insiden Keselamatan Pasien2 pages
- Designing Scalable Modular Digital Data Centers FinalRev2No ratings yetDesigning Scalable Modular Digital Data Centers FinalRev218 pages
